Richmond East Primary Care Centre 10551 Shellbridge Way, Suites 90 & 95 Richmond, BC

Richmond East Primary Care Centre
10551 Shellbridge Way, Suites 90 & 95

Richmond, BC
ISSUED FOR 100% CD
ARCHITECT: Chernoff Thompson Architects

Suite 1340, 1075 West Georgia Street
Vancouver, BC, V6E 3C9
CLIENT: Vancouver Coastal Health

5th Floor, 520 W. 6th Avenue
Vancouver, BC, V5Z 4H5
PROJECT Colliers Project Leaders

MANAGER: 200 Granville St 19th Floor
Vancouver, BC, V6C 2R6
STRUCTURAL: Entuitive
Suite 1020, 1075 West Georgia Street
Vancouver, BC, V6E 3C9
MECHANICAL: AME Group

200 – 638 Smithe Street
Vancouver, BC, V6B 1E3
ELECTRICAL: O’M Engineering

401-533 Smithe Street
Vancouver, BC, V6B 6H1
COMMUNICATION RYR Electrical Consultants Ltd.

11232 Blaney Crescent
Pitt Meadows, BC, V3Y 2W2
File: 42037.0
0.0.0
Date: 24/03/2023
RICHMOND EAST PRIMARY CARE CENTRE SECTION 00 00 10
10551 SHELLBRIDGE WAY, SUITES 90 & 95 DIVISION 00
RICHMOND, BC TABLE OF CONTENTS
INDEX PAGE 1
SPECIFICATION DIVISION SECTION PAGES

DIVISION 00 00 00 00 Cover Page 1
INDEX 00 00 00 Table of Contents 5
DIVISION 01 01 33 33 Submittals 3
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures 2
DIVISION 02 02 05 00 Selective Demolition 3

SITEWORK
DIVISION 05 05 50 00 Metal Fabrication 3

METALS
DIVISION 06 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry 3

WOOD, PLASTICS 06 20 00 Finish Carpentry 3
& COMPOSITES 06 40 00 Architectural Woodwork 8
06 64 01 Fiber-Reinforced Laminates 3
DIVISION 07 07 21 16 Blanket Insulation 2

THERMAL AND MOISTURE 07 84 00 Firestopping 4
PROTECTION 07 92 00 Joints Sealants 3
DIVISION 08 08 06 10 Door and Window Schedule 5

OPENINGS 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 5
08 14 00 Wood Doors 4
08 43 00 Aluminum Storefronts 5
08 71 00 Door Hardware 21
08 80 00 Glazing 5
DIVISION 09 09 06 00 Finish Schedule 4

FINISHES 09 22 00 Supports for Plaster and Gypsum Board 5
09 29 00 Gypsum Board 6
09 30 13 Ceramic Tiling 4
09 51 00 Acoustical Ceiling 9
09 65 00 Resilient Flooring 8
09 67 23 Resinous Flooring 6
09 68 00 Carpeting 5
09 77 00 Special Wall Surfacing 4
09 91 00 Painting 9
09 96 56 Epoxy Coating 4
DIVISION 10 10 11 00 Visual Display Surfaces 3

SPECIALTIES 10 26 23 Protective Wall Covering 5
10 28 13 Washroom Accessories 5
10 51 13 Metal Lockers 4
CHERNOFF THOMPSON ARCHITECTS 24/03/2023 CTA PROJECT #42037.0

INDEX PAGE 2
10 80 00 Miscellaneous Specialties 4
DIVISION 12 12 50 05 Roller Shades 6

FURNISHINGS 12 56 70.13 Integrated Patient Care Modular System 7
DIVISION 32 32 31 13 Chainlink Fences 4

EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

INDEX PAGE 3
APPENDICES:
APPENDIX 1.1 OWNER SUPPLIES CONTRACTOR INSTALLS (OSCI) ITEMS CUT 85
SHEETS
APPENDIX 1.2 OWNER SUPPLIES & INSTALLS (OSOI) ITEMS CUT SHEETS 86
APPENDIX 2.1 ABATEMENT PROJECT SUMMARY REPORT, BUILDING 2 – UNIT 95 52
APPENDIX 2.2 ABATEMENT PROJECT SUMMARY REPORT, BUILDING 2 – UNIT 90 46
APPENDIX 2.3 HAZARDOUS BUILDING MATERIALS ASSESSMENT – UNIT 90 AND 58

95
APPENDIX 3 FIRST FLOOR SLAB SCAN SUMMARY AND INTERPRETATION 52

REPORT
APPENDIX 4 GLAZING FILM PATTERN AND GRAPHICS 2
DRAWING LIST
ARCHITECTURAL
A-000 COVER SHEET, LOCATION PLANS & NOTES
A-000.1 WALL & DOOR TYPE SCHEDULE
R-00 RENDERINGS
R-01 RENDERINGS
R-02 MATERIAL & FINISHES BOARDS
A-001 CODE COMPLIANCE DIAGRAMS
A-100 FLOOR PLAN (DEMOLITION)
A-100.1 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN (EXISTING)
A-101 FLOOR PLAN KEYPLAN
A-102 FLOOR PLAN WEST-1
A-103 FLOOR PLAN WEST-2
A-104 FLOOR PLAN EAST
A-105 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN KEYPLAN
A-106 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN WEST-1
A-107 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN WEST-2
A-108 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN EAST
A-109 SETTING OUT PLAN
A-110 FLOOR PLAN - PARKING LEVEL
A-111 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - PARKING LEVEL
A-112 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN STRUCTURE
A-200 FINISHES PLAN - FLOORING
A-201 FINISHES PLAN - WALLS
A-300 INTERIOR ELEV. LEGEND & TYP. FIXTURE MOUNTING
HEIGHT
A-400 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS WEST
A-406 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS EAST

INDEX PAGE 4
A-500 PARTIAL FLOOR AND CEILING PLANS - PUBLIC CORRIDOR
A-501 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS - PUBLIC CORRIDOR
A-550 BUILDING SECTIONS
A-560 SECTIONS KEYPLAN MAIN FLOOR
A-561 SECTION KEYPLAN PARKING
A-562 BUILDING SECTIONS - SUITE 90
A-600 TYPICAL DETAILS
A-601 TYPICAL DETAILS
A-602 AHU ENCLOSURE DETAILS
A-603 PARKING LEVEL DETAILS
A-650 RECEPTION COUNTER
A-651 RECEPTION COUNTER
A-652 RECEPTION COUNTER RENDERS
A-700 MILLWORK DETAILS
STRUCTURAL
S1 STRUCTURAL NOTES & HOUSEKEEPING PAD DETAILS
S2 PARKADE FLOOR PLAN
S3 MAIN FLOOR FRAMING PLAN
S4 OPENING REINFORCEMENT & TRANSFORMER SUPPORT
MECHANICAL
M-001 COVER SHEET
M-002 MOTORLIST
M-003 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES
M-004 PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE
M-005 SCHEMATIC
M-101 DEMOLITION PLAN - MAIN FLOOR
M-201 PLUMBING PLAN - PARKING
M-202 PLUMBING PLAN - MAIN FLOOR
M-301 HVAC PLAN - PARKING
M-302 HVAC PLAN - MAIN FLOOR
M-303 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN
M-401 MECHANICAL DETAILS
M-402 MECHANICAL DETAILS
M-501 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
M-502 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
ELECTRICAL
E000 SYMBOL LEGEND AND DRAWING LIST
ED100 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PLAN
E010 PARKADE LEVEL POWER PLAN
E100 POWER, ICT AND FIRE ALARM PLAN
E200 LIGHTING PLAN
E300 SECURITY PLAN
E400 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM - DEMO
E401 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM - NEW
E410 MECHANICAL MOTORLIST
E420 LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE
INDEX PAGE 5
E421 LIGHTING CONTROL DETAILS
E430 ELECTRICAL DETAILS - SHEET 1 OF 2
E431 ELECTRICAL DETAILS - SHEET 2 OF 2
E440 PANEL SCHEDULES
E500 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION
E501 SECURITY SPECIFICATION
IT
T-0 SYMBOLS & ABBREVIATIONS
T-1 PARKING LEVEL
T-2 COMMUNICATIONS FLOOR PLAN
T-3 COMMUNICATIONS DETAILS
T-6 COMMUNICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS
T-7 COMMUNICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS
T-8 PRE-QUALIFIED CONTRACTORS
END OF SECTION 00 00 10

10551 SHELLBRIDGE WAY, SUITES 90 & 95
RICHMOND, BC SUBMITTALS
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PAGE 1
1.0 DOCUMENTS
.1 This section of the specification forms part of the contract Documents and is to be read,
interpreted and coordinated with all other parts.
.2 Submittals are shop drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, performance charts,

brochures, products and other data, which the Contractor provides to illustrate details of a
portion of the Work.
2.0 ADMINISTRATIVE
.1 Provide submittals listed in specification sections for review. Submit in orderly sequence so as
to not cause delay in the work. Failure to submit samples in time is not considered sufficient
reason for an extension of Contract time and no claim for extension by reason of such default
will be permitted.
.2 Work affected by the submittal will not proceed until review by the Consultant is complete.
.3 Review submittals prior to submission to the Consultant. This review by the Contractor
indicates that necessary requirements have been determined with requirements of the Work
and Contract Documents. Submittals not reviewed, dated stamped and signed by the
Contractor will be returned without being examined and shall be resubmitted when completed.
.4 Verify that field measurements and affected adjacent work are coordinated.
.5 The Contractor’s responsibility for errors and omissions in submissions is not relieved by the
Consultant’s review of submittals.
.6 The Contractor’s responsibility for deviations in submission from requirements of Contract

Documents is not relieved by the Consultant’s review of submittals unless a deviation on the
submittal is noted as such in writing and has been approved by the Consultant.
3.0 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Within fourteen (14) calendar days of award of Contract submit a detailed list of all shop
drawings, which will be submitted for approval. This list will reflect each individual item, the
date of shop drawings submittal and the date that approval will be required in order to comply
with the Construction Schedule.
.2 The Contractor is responsible for submitting and instructing Subcontractors and suppliers to
submit through its office to the Consultant digital file (pdf) of all shop and setting drawings or
diagrams.
.3 The Contractor is responsible for submitting and instructing Subcontractors and suppliers to
submit digital file (pdf) of product data for requirements requested in the specification and as the
Consultant may reasonably request where shop drawings will not be prepared due to
standardized manufacture of product.
.4 Indicate materials, construction methods and attachment or anchorage, erections diagrams,

connections, explanatory notes and other information necessary for completion of the work.
Where articles or equipment attach or connect to other articles or equipment, indicate that they
have been coordinated regardless of what section adjacent equipment will be supplied and
installed. Indicate cross-references to design drawings and specifications.
.5 Make review comments, adjustments or revisions to be brought to the Contractor’s or supplier’s

attention on the pdf file by the Consultant or applicable engineering consultant and returned to
CHERNOFF THOMPSON ARCHITECTS 24/03/2023 CTA Project #42037.0

the Contractor for distribution. Shop drawings which require extensive correction will be sent
back for revisions and resubmission as noted.
.6 The Contractor and each Subcontractor or supplier shall conform to review comments,
adjustments and stamped instructions of each shop drawing reviewed.
.7 Shop drawings files to be collected, and files of all shop drawings must be turned over to the
Owner upon project completion.
.8 If, after Consultant review, only minor corrections are to be made, shop drawings will be
returned and fabrication and installation of the Work may proceed. Only drawings rejected or
noted for revisions and resubmission need be resubmitted through the same review procedure.
Include revisions required by previous reviews before resubmission.
.9 No Work which is dependent on shop drawing information will proceed until final review has
been completed by the Consultant. The contractor is responsible for Work performed prior to
receipt of final reviewed shop drawings. No review comments and adjustments made on shop
drawings by the Consultant shall be construed as authorization for changes in the Work or the
Contact Price. If adjustment affects the value of the Work, advise the Consultant in writing prior
to proceeding with the Work.
.10 Fabricate Work exactly as shown on final reviewed shop drawings and, if shop practice dictates
revisions, request approval by revising shop drawings and resubmitting to the Consultant.
.11 File one (1) copy of each final reviewed shop drawing on site for construction, reference and
viewing by the Consultant.
.12 The Contractor and each Subcontractor or supplier shall consider the foregoing paragraphs as
the minimum requirements. Further instructions contained in a particular specification section
govern that section of the Work.
.13 Prepare shop drawings using metric units same as the Contract Documents.
4.0 SAMPLES
.1 Where required by a particular specification section by the Consultant, submit samples in
triplicate for approval and required testing. Samples to be the materials specified or of the pre-
approved alternatives. No deviation permitted after approval of samples.
.2 The Contractor or applicable Subcontractor or supplier to prepare the following:

.1 Submit samples in sizes and quantities as required in respective section.
.2 Label samples as to origin and intended use, project, name, contractor, and date.
.3 Deliver samples prepaid to the Consultant’s business address unless otherwise
directed.
.4 Notify the Consultant in writing at time of submission of deviations in samples from the
requirements of the Contract Documents.
.5 Make changes in samples, which the Consultant may require, consistent with the
Contract Documents.
.6 Submit full range of colour chart when degree of pattern or color cannot be represented
by a single sample.
.7 Include cost of delivery and handling, assembly and return of samples to supplier where
applicable.

.3 Adjustments made on samples by the Consultant are not intended to change the Contract
Price. If adjustments affect the value of the Work, state such in writing to the Consultant prior to
proceeding with the Work.
.4 If samples are not approved, all samples will be returned for further sample submission by the
Contractor. If samples are approved, one (1) sample for the Contractor’s record and one (1)
sample for the Subcontractor’s or supplier’s record will be returned marked “reviewed and
accepted as noted.”
.5 When samples are too large and impractical for delivery or assembly to the Consultant’s office,
deliver to the site or to another location agreed to by the Contractor and Subcontractor or
supplier, but only with prior notification and approval by the Consultant.
.6 Approved samples will become the standard of workmanship and material against which
installed Work will be checked.
.7 Each product incorporated in the Work to be precisely the same in all details as the “final
reviewed and accepted sample’.
5.0 EXTENDED WARRANTIES

.1 Submit to the Consultant all extended certificates or written warranties as specified in each
application selection of the specifications.
.2 Where Work is performed by Contractor’s Subcontractors and when written warranties are
required, secure such warranties from the Subcontractor and provide to the Consultant on or
before Substantial Performance or Total Performance of the project.

RICHMOND, BC CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
1.0 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

.1 Submit to the Consultant one (1) copy of maintenance, operating and instruction manuals.
.2 Separately bound manuals are to be prepared for the following trade work:
.1 Building: Architectural elements, fixtures, finishes, casework, hardware,
specialties, etc.
.2 Mechanical: Heating ventilating, air conditioning, etc.
.3 Plumbing: Plumbing, fire sprinklers, etc.
.4 Electrical: Power, lighting, fire alarm system, data, communications, security, etc.
.3 Provide maintenance manuals in hard and electronic format as specified hereafter, giving full
operating and maintenance instructions for each system and major piece of equipment, as well
as, maintenance instructions for building elements, fixtures and finishes.
.4 Manuals are to contain pertinent maintenance operational and installation instruction

information on equipment, materials cleaning and lubrication schedules, filters, overhaul,
replacement, adjustment schedules, and emergency procedures as applicable. Instructions in
manuals shall be in simple language so as to guide the Owner in the proper operation and
maintenance of building material, components, equipment and systems.
.5 Include all items covered by Change Orders.
.6 Update the manuals periodically during the installation and commissioning phase of the Work
so that the manuals are final by the scheduled turnover date.
.7 Include equipment supplied by the Owner and pre-tendered equipment.
.8 Binders:
.1 Binders shall be ACCO Canadian Co. Ltd. or approved substitution as follows:
.2 ACCO Inview D-Ring Binders – color Black
1 inch – 41805-0
2 inch – 41807
.3 ACCO expanding bar-lock catalogue binder - color Black
3 to 5.5 inches – 05436-0
.9 Pages:
.1 Descriptions and lists are to be neatly typed or printed on 216 mm x 280 mm heavy
bond paper. Duplicate pages shall be made by electrostatic dry copier.
.2 The maximum paper size for schedules and diagrams is 280 mm x 432 mm. Larger
paper sizes will be accepted for diagrams only if a mylar sepia is provided for each
sheet.
.3 Alphabetical index tab separators are to be used in each manual to identify each
information “Section”.
.10 Manual contents shall be organized into applicable categories of Work, parallel to specifications
divisions and sections.
.11 Architectural manuals shall include in general, but shall not necessarily be limited to, the
following:
.1 List of all Subcontractors, manufacturers, suppliers, complete with addresses and
telephone and facsimile numbers.
.2 Copy of hardware schedule and paint schedules, complete with the actual
manufacturer, supplier and identification names and numbers.

RICHMOND, BC CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
.3 All manufacturer’s equipment, materials, products, data, details, identification, list,

schedules of maintenance, operational and installation instruction information as
required in accordance with the various sections of the specification.
.4 All extended guarantees, warranties, maintenance bonds, certificates, letters of
guarantees, registration cards, as called for in the various sections of the specification,
with the following information.
.1 Name and address of subject.
.2 Commencement date (Substantial Performance of the Work) of guarantees
and warranties.
.3 Duration and expiry date of guarantees and warranties.
.4 Signature and seal of the Contractor, installer, manufacturer and/or supplier as
applicable.
.5 Complete set of all final reviewed shop drawings.
.6 Certificates of Inspection.
.7 Test reports and certificates as applicable.
.8 Confirmation letters of all extra, reserve, replacement materials as required in
accordance with various sections of the specification has been properly handed over
and received by the Owner in good order.
.9 Confirmation letters of all portable units, equipment, materials such as fire
extinguishers, special tools, keys for all equipment and/or panels, elevator
pads/accessories, keys to millwork, casework, has been properly handed over and
received by the Owner in good order.
.10 Submit to the Consultant one (1) copy of plumbing/mechanical and electrical manuals
in accordance with this section and to detailed requirements specifically set out in the
various sections of the specification as applicable.
1.1 ELECTRONIC COPIES OF MANUALS

.1 In addition to the printed copies, submit electronic copies of all operating and maintenance data
as specified under clause 1.4.
.2 Submit data on “read only” USBs. Provide one (1) copy of each USB for the Owner and 1 copy
to the Consultant.
.3 Do not provide separate USBs for each major section. Use more than one USB only if the
volume of data exceeds the capacity of a single USB. Professionally label each USB, including
the name of the Owner, project and title.
.4 Organize electronic data using directories and sub-directories as generally described in clause
1.4. Prior to assembling the electronic data, submit to the Consultant a detailed list of the
proposed directory/sub-directory structure including proposed files names. File names to be
easily recognizable without the need to open the document to know what information the file
contains. Directory structure and file naming is subject to the approval of the Consultant.
.5 Provide information in Portable Document Format (PDF). Break down large files into sections
and use bookmark structure for easy navigation.

RICHMOND, BC SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
SITEWORK PAGE 1
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DOCUMENTS
.1 This Section of the Specifications forms part of the Contract Documents and is to be read,
interpreted and co-ordinated with all other parts.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES

Generally, but not limited to the following:
.1 Demolish walls (non-structural) and doors, flooring, ceiling, glazing, mechanical and electrical
distributions and fixtures, etc. as required to complete the work.
.2 All material and debris resulting from demolition shall be promptly removed from Site and
disposed of in a legal manner. Salvaged materials are to be reused or turned over to the Owner
as indicated in drawings or other sections of the spec.
.3 Selling of any materials at the Site is not permitted; Contractor will be assumed to have allowed
for any credit he may obtain from such materials.
.4 Make good damaged areas, which will not be concealed by new construction. Make good all
structural damage. Match patching and making good work at least to that displayed by the
existing; such that new surfaces are plumb, level and properly aligned with existing.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 Mechanical
.2 Electrical
1.4 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES

.1 Comply with all bylaws and acquire all necessary permits.
.2 Comply with all Workers’ Compensation Board of B.C. Accident Prevention Regulations.
1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

.1 Store materials and equipment at Site only when immediately necessary, and as otherwise
approved; and so as not to cause any obstruction.
1.6 SITE CONDITIONS

.1 The Contractor should accept the Site as it exists and will be responsible for all demolition work
as shown on the Drawings or specified.
.2 The Contractor shall visit the Site at his own expense prior to the submission of Bids and take
whatever time is required to ascertain the Site conditions and surrounding features related to the
proposed demolition and new construction work, and ensure himself that conditions are suitable
for the execution of the work.
.3 No additional sums of money will be allowed for any items resulting from lack of familiarity with
the Site conditions; report any discrepancies to the Consultant.
.4 Use sufficient measures to protect existing services and existing space adjacent to the project
area. Make good all damaged areas, which will not be covered up by new work.
.5 The Contractor will be held responsible for any such damage (movement or settlement) and
must repair promptly such damage to the Owner's property at no additional cost to the Owner.
.6 Provide and maintain all legal and necessary hoarding, lights and warning signs during the
execution of the work to fully protect all persons; provide adequate insurance in order that the
SITEWORK PAGE 2
Owner shall be saved harmless from any loss, damage, death or injury through neglect,
carelessness, or incompetence of the Contractor, or the handling or condition of appliances.
.7 Maintain unobstructed safe access for personnel and removal of materials at all times.
.8 Take precautions to guard against movements, settlements, collapse and damages to adjacent
structures, services, utilities and construction.
.9 Prevent debris from accumulating and blocking drainage systems and blocking safe exit passage
to adjoining streets and property.
.10 Verify the existence of all known service utilities by Site examination and review of applicable
engineering drawings available from the municipality, the Owner and the utility companies prior
to submission of a bid and prior to the commencement of the work to identify exact locations.
.11 Keep fire extinguishing suppression equipment on hand at all times.
.12 Provide illumination for safe demolition and working conditions, but in no case less than
prescribed by WSBC regulations in areas where work is being done.
1.7 SCHEDULING OF WORK

.1 Sequence of Demolition is responsibility of the Contractor.
1.8 HAZARDOUS MATERIAL

.1 Refer to hazmat report appended in Appendix 2.1, 2.2 and 2.3 of the specification.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1 All materials, or equipment not specifically described but required for the proper completion of the
work of this Section, shall be selected by the Contractor subject to approval by the Owner.
.2 Except for materials and equipment to be removed and relocated and materials designated to be
salvaged, the Owner does not require recovery of any existing materials, fittings, fixtures and
equipment to be salvaged during the demolition operation. All materials forming part of this
Section of the work shall become the Contractors property and shall be removed entirely from the
Site and disposed of in a legal manner to an approved disposal waste-dumping Site as applicable.
.3 Selling or burning of salvaged materials, fittings, fixtures, and equipment on Site is not permitted.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
.1 Inspect the work and notify the Owner of any conditions affecting the performance of the work.
Review the drawings and determine the total content of work to follow.
.2 Ensure all services, whether built-in or exposed, are properly located and marked as to position,
type of service, size, direction of flow.
.3 Inspect materials, equipment, components to be reused or turned over to the Owner. Note their
condition and advise the Owner in writing of any defects or conditions which would affect
removal and reuse.
.4 Site verify and locate all existing services, in basement ceiling. Provide x-ray scan re-bar prior to
coring the concrete slab. Any damage to existing services will be the responsibility of the
Contractor.
SITEWORK PAGE 3
3.2 PREPARATION
.1 Cap off, disconnect and seal any required existing services, sanitary and storm sewers,
waterlines, electrical and telephone services, gas service, in accordance with the contract
documents as established by the appropriate consultant before starting with demolition.
.2 Take adequate measures during demolition to protect the public in conformance with CSA S350
and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
.3 Provide protection to ensure materials, finishes and surfaces to remain will not be damaged,
scratched, or marred by work of this Section.
.4 Ensure that affected services and utilities designated for removal have been disconnected prior
to the commencement of work.
.5 Provide Rada Scanning or GPR scanning prior to coring of concrete floor.
3.3 WORKMANSHIP
.1 Do work in accordance with CSA S350 and Part 8.0 of BCBC 2018.
.2 Cutting, removing and demolition shall be performed so as not to cut or remove more that is
necessary of to damage adjacent work. Cut existing construction back to meet straight lines
allowing for replacement finishes of follow.
.3 Breakup large pieces of demolished material for handling and to prevent overloading and damage
to existing construction.
.4 Schedule and execute all work in a careful manner with all necessary consideration to prevent
injury or damages to persons and to surrounding property. Do not interfere with the passage to
and from and operation of adjoining space.
.5 Do not let piled material endanger structure or persons at any time.
.6 Where any material, component, assembly or item is indicated for reuse, removal shall be by a
trade, which normally provides or installs such an item.
.7 Store such items being reused in a protected area until ready to be reinstalled into the new
construction proposed.
.8 Cut out and remove assemblies, materials, items indicated as being removed, abandoned or
discarded on the drawings.
.9 Repair and make good damage to existing construction caused by the work of this Section.
Use mechanics skilled in the type of work involved to replace such damaged work.
.10 Demolish in a manner as to minimize dusting. Keep dusty materials, areas contained within the
project area.
.11 Clear and remove promptly by the end of each working day all demolished materials from the
Site.
.12 Inspect existing conditions to confirm the extent and location of demolition will not damage
adjacent areas.
.13 Should any conflicts arise, immediately contact the Consultant for direction prior to proceeding.
At completion recover all materials. Leave Site neat and clean.
3.4 CLEAN-UP
.1 Continuously during the work of this Section remove all dirt, debris discarded material and
deposit in waste containers. Keep routes to and from waste containers clear.

RICHMOND, BC METAL FABRICATION
METALS PAGE 1
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DOCUMENTS
1 This Section of the Specifications forms part of the Contract Documents and is to be read,

.1 Supply and installation of metal fabrication.
.2 All light iron and miscellaneous metal work not specified under another section but required for the
work shall be provided under this section whether or not specifically referred to herein.
.3 Steel support for millwork as indicated.

.1 Rough Carpentry Section 06 10 00
.2 Supports for Plaster and Gypsum Board Section 09 22 00
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS

.1 Do welding in accordance with W59-2013 except where specified otherwise.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2 Indicate materials, core thicknesses, finishes, connections, joints, method of anchorage, number of
anchors, supports, reinforcement, details and accessories.
.3 Submit engineered shop drawings. All shop drawings to be signed and sealed by a Professional
Engineer licensed in BC. Design and fabricate work in accordance with BCBC 2018. The said
professional engineer to submit Model Schedule S-B and S-C.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1 Steel sections and plates: to CAN 3 G40.20-13/G40.21-13, Grade 300W, and hollow structural
sections, Grade 350W.
.2 Steel pipe: to ASTM A53-94 minimum 35Ksi..
.3 Welding materials to CSAW59 2013 by fabricators qualified to CSA W47.1 1983 -92(2001)
2.1 min.
.4 Bolts and anchor bolts: to ASTM A307-14.
.5 Galvanizing: hot dipped galvanizing with zinc coating 610 g/m 2 to CSA G164-M1992.
.6 Shop coat primer: to CGSB 1 GP 40M
.7 Zinc primer: To CGSB 1 GP 48, CISC/CPMA 1-73A, CISC/CPMA 2-75.
.8 Steel welded wire mesh: 9ga galvanized 20mm x 13mm diamond grid flattened expanded metal
mesh, welded to steel angle.

METALS PAGE 2
.9 Stainless Steel: Grade 316 for sink and counter. Grade 304 for all supporting structure not exposed
to view.
2.2 FABRICATION
.1 Build work square, true, straight, and accurate to required size with joints closely fitted and
properly secured.
.2 Fabricate items from steel unless otherwise noted.
.3 Use self-tapping shake-proof flat headed screws on items requiring assembly by screws or as
indicated.
.4 Where possible, fit, and shop assemble work, ready for erection.
.5 Shop weld all connections possible with minimum 5 mm fillets unless noted otherwise.
.6 Ensure exposed welds are continuous for length of each joint. File or grind exposed welds
smooth and flush.
2.3 FINISHES
.1 Shop painting:
.1 Apply one shop coat of primer to interior metal items, with the exception of stainless steel,
aluminum or concrete encased items.
.2 Use primer unadulterated, as prepared by the manufacturer. Paint on dry surfaces, free
from rust, scale, or grease. Do not paint when temperature is lower than 7 oC.
.3 Clean surfaces to be field welded: do not paint.
.4 All interior exposed steel to be painted.
.2 Galvanizing:
.1 All exterior steel are to be hot dipped galvanized according to Clause 2.1.5.
.3 Stainless Steel:
.1 No. 4 finish.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 ERECTION
.1 Erect metal work square, plumb, straight, and true, accurately fitted, with tight joints, and
intersections.
.2 Provide suitable means of anchorage acceptable to the Consultant such as dowels, anchor
clips, bar anchors, expansion bolts, and shields and toggles.
.3 Make field connections with bolts to CSA CAN 3 – S16.1M and CSA S1653-1981.
.4 Hand items over for casting into concrete or building into masonry to appropriate trades together
with setting templates.
.5 Touch up rivets, field welds, bolts, and burnt or scratched surfaces after completion of erection with
primer.
.6 Touch up galvanized surfaces with zinc primer where burned by field welding.
.7 Isolate dissimilar metals.

METALS PAGE 3
.8 Do welding work in accordance with CSA W59. On-site welding is strictly prohibited for all exterior
steel work.

RICHMOND, BC ROUGH CARPENTRY
WOOD, PLASTICS & COMPOSITES PAGE 1
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DOCUMENTS

.1 Rough carpentry for the work.
.2 Rough carpentry work not specified under another section but required for the work shall be
provided under this section whether or not specifically referred to herein.
.3 Backing for millwork vanity, door frames, wall stop, washroom accessories, and specialty items.

.1 Finish Carpentry Section 06 20 00
.2 Gypsum Board Section 09 29 00
.3 Washroom Accessories Section 10 28 13
.4 Miscellaneous Specialties Section 10 80 00
1.4 REFERENCE
.1 CSA B111-1974 (R 2003) Wire Nails, Spikes and Staples.
.2 CAN/CSA –0325.0-07 Construction Sheathing.
.3 CSA O121-08 (R 2013) Douglas Fir Plywood.
.4 CAN/CSA O141-05 (R 2009) Softwood Lumber.
.5 CSA O515-09 Canadian Softwood Plywood.
.6 CAN/CSA-G164-M92 (R 2003) Hot Dip Galvanizing of irregular shaped articles.
.7 National Lumber Grades Authority (NLGA) Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber 2000.
1.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

.1 Lumber shall be grade marked by an agency certified by the Canadian Lumber Standards
Accreditation Board.
.2 Plywood shall be grade marked in accordance with the requirements of applicable CSA
standards.
.3 Wood Treatment: CAN/CSA-O80 (R 2012).
1.6 WASTE MANAGEMENT & DISPOSAL

.1 Separate and recycle waste materials.
.2 Separate wood waste and place in designated areas.
.3 Set aside damaged wood for acceptable alternative uses (e.g. bracing, blocking, cripples,
bridging, finger-joining, or ties). Store this separated reusable wood waste convenient to cutting
station and area of work.
.4 Separate corrugated cardboard in accordance with Waste Management Plan and place in
designated areas for recycling.
.5 Do not burn scrap at the project site.
.6 Fold up metal banding, flatten, and place in designated area for recycling.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1 Lumber
.1 Standards: unless specified otherwise, softwood, S4S material shall be used in
accordance with the following standards:
Size, grading, inspection: CSA O141-05 (R 2009).

Species groups: CSA 086-01 (R 2006).
Minimum grades: National Lumber Grades Authority Standard Grading.
Rules for Canadian Lumber NLGA 1987 edition.
Maximum moisture content: 12% interior.
.2 Furring, strapping, blocking: Douglas Fir, or Hemlock, Utility Grade.
.2 Plywood
.1 Standards: Douglas Fir Plywood: CSA O121-08 (R 2013).
.3 Preservative Treatment
.1 Treat all wood in contact with concrete, metal or masonry even if separated by building
paper. Treat all exterior wood. Where factory treated wood is cut on site, apply two
coats of same preservative solution to all cut surfaces and allow to dry prior to
installation into the work.
.2 To CSA O80 (R 2012) wood to be treated by pressure treatment with chromated copper
arsenate at 4kg/m3 to refusal.
.4 Fire Retardant Paint

.1 Latex (water base) intumescent fire retardant paint
.2 Reduce the surface burning characteristics of the substrate. In the presence of heat or
flame, the coating puffs up (intumesces) and forms a thick sponge like cellular foam
layer. This foam layer insulates the substrate reducing the penetration of heat. Tested
to ASTM E-84 (UL723, UBC 42-1, NFPA 255 and CAN/ULC-S102 fire test.
.3 Flame Spread Ratings: Class “A”. When tested in accordance with ASTM E-84 (NFPA
255)
.4 Acceptable product: 1500° Series FRL by International Fire-Shield Inc.
.5 Miscellaneous Materials
.1 Rough Hardware: Including machine bolts, washers, lag bolts, drift pins, dowels and
such like, to CSA B33-1-1961 (R 1969); nails, spikes and staples to CSA B111-1974 (R
2003), galvanized in exterior locations, high humidity areas and elsewhere where liable
to corrosion, and in treated lumber. Framing anchors by TECO, or other pre-approved
as shown on structural drawings. Metal Fire stops: .455 mm (26 ga.) galvanized, as
required by codes.
.6 Galvanizing: to CSA G164 – M92 (R 2003)

3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Install strapping, furring, blocking etc., where shown and elsewhere as required to space out
and support other work.
.2 Locate, align and plumb faces of furring and blocking to accurate location of items supported to
a tolerance of 1:600.
.3 Install wood cants, nailer curbs and other wood supports as required and secure using
galvanized fasteners.
.4 Countersink hardware where necessary to provide clearance for other work.
.5 Co-ordinate with other trades and do all preparing, cutting, trimming as required for passage of
their work. Attach plates, blocking, spacers, supports as required to receive and provide
support for items supported.
3.2 CLEANING
.1 Remove all debris and excess material as work proceeds and at end of installation leaving area
ready for other trades; repair any defects to this work or any other defects caused by this work.

RICHMOND, BC FINISH CARPENTRY
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DOCUMENTS

.2 Architectural Woodwork Section 06 40 00
.3 Wood Doors Section 08 14 00
.4 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Section 08 11 13
.5 Door Hardware Section 08 71 00
.9 Roller Shades Section 12 50 05

.1 Supply and installation of items of finish carpentry fabricated and installed on site as noted
herein.
.2 Job-site assembly, installation, and fitting of shop-fabricated components specified under

Section 06 40 00.
.3 Installation of doors and finish hardware.
.4 Installation of specialty items in Division 10 except as noted by specialty item suppliers.
1.4 REFERENCES
.1 North American Architectural Woodwork Standards (NAAWS) as published by Architectural
Woodwork Manufacturer's Association of Canada (AWMAC) / Woodwork Institute (WI), latest
edition.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 If requested by the Consultant, install mock-up of millwork units for review.
.2 Ensure that components supplied to this section for installation are in accordance with reviewed
shop drawings and that the components have been fabricated to suit the existing site conditions
without modification.
.3 Items not given a specific quality grade shall be Custom grade as defined in the NAAWS.
.4 The quality of workmanship and installation shall conform to or exceed the minimum
requirements of the AWMAC’s standard (NAAWS) and as specified herein.


.1 Protect items from damage and moisture changes during delivery. Protect from damage by
weather while in transit.
.2 Do not deliver and store items on site in advance of installation schedule. Deliver directly to
room or area where items to be installed. Protect finished surfaces.
.3 Conform to NAAWS.
1.7 JOB CONDITIONS

.1 Coordinate the work of this section with the work of others to ensure built-in items are
incorporated. Provide all drawings and dimensions for the proper location of built-in anchorage
and the provision of rough openings.
.2 Maintain at an ambient temperature between 16 degrees Celsius to 20 degrees Celsius and

relative humidity of between 43% to 55% in the completed building, for 48 hours before
installation and continuing up until final acceptance in rooms and areas in which work of this
section is to be installed.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1 Supply miscellaneous hardware for installation of millwork items including nails, screws, bolts,
nuts and washers.
.2 Supply and install blocking, backing and furring materials as required for installation.
.3 Douglas Fir Plywood: G.1.S (wood patches only permitted). G.2.S where exposed both sides.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
.1 Obtain installation details for millwork from Section 06 40 00.
.2 Check hardware items delivered to ensure compliance with hardware schedule. Obtain
installation instructions and templates.
.3 Cut to proper length and fit items supplied oversized.
.4 Provide anchors, nailers and blocking to secure millwork items.
3.2 DOOR FRAMES

.1 Install door frames in prepared openings square level, plumb and secure to wall framing with
suitable sized fasteners concealed in final installation.
.2 Frames shall be glued and erected with concealed nails.
3.3 DOORS AND HARDWARE

.1 Install doors and hardware in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and templates
supplied under Section 08 71 00. Fit accurately using full complement of screws and draw up
tight.
.2 Install hardware as indicated in Door Hardware Section 08 71 00.

.3 Hang doors to open and close smoothly. Keep an even margin between door and jamb,
sufficient on all sides to allow free action of the door. Readjust and check doors upon
completion of the work, correct any restrictions to free action of the door caused by paint,
moisture or improper fixing of hardware, etc.
.4 Ensure clearance on doors at head and jambs is not more than 3 mm, 12 mm at threshold, and
3 mm between meeting edges of pair doors. Bevel latch edge of doors allowing for swing
clearance.
.5 Remove handling marks and drag marks by lightly sanding doors immediately after installation.
.6 Clean and polish hardware. Remove any scratched, marred or damaged hardware and replace
with new.
.7 Upon completion of installation, have a representative of the hardware supplier review

installation and confirm in writing to the Consultant that finish hardware has been installed
correctly.

RICHMOND, BC ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DOCUMENTS

.1 Architectural millwork including counters, shelvings, cabinets, reception desk, millwork bench,
ceiling bulkheads, wall paneling as shown on drawings.

.3 Fiber Reinforced Laminates Section 06 64 01
.4 Joints Sealants Section 07 92 00
.4 Painting Section 09 91 00
1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit shop drawings as follows:
.1 Furnish shop drawings for review. Confirm all dimensions at site prior to fabrication.
Detail all architectural woodwork construction at large scale not less than 1:20.
.2 Shop drawings shall have been reviewed by AWMAC and carry AWMAC Inspector’s
review stamp of acceptance, as a condition of Guarantee Certificate, prior to submittal
to Consultant.
.3 Shop drawings shall show construction details of architectural woodwork, general
arrangements, locations of all service outlets; typical and special installation conditions;
the material being supplied and connections, attachments, anchorage and location of
exposed fastenings, as applicable.
.4 Shop drawings shall incorporate plans, elevations, sections and details for all work
included in this section. Details shall show and specify all thicknesses, types, finishes,
profiles, joints and hardware.
.5 Submit duplicate samples of plastic laminate.
.6 Submit hardware cut sheets.
.7 Architectural woodwork is subject to inspection and approval by the Consultant prior to
installation.
.8 Submit manufacturer’s descriptive literature of specialty items not manufactured by the
Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers.
.9 Provide maintenance data for all finishes and hardware, for incorporation into
maintenance manual.

.1 Refer to the North American Architectural Woodwork Standards (NAAWS) as published by
Architectural Woodwork Manufacturer’s Association of Canada (AWMAC) / Woodwork Institute
(WI), Latest Edition.
.2 Any reference to "Custom" or "Premium" grade in this specification shall be as defined in the
Standards.
.3 All millwork shall be Custom grade as defined in the standards.

.4 If requested by the Consultant, provide a unit of architectural woodwork to the site during shop
drawing review stage.
.5 Unit to be as selected by the Consultant and is to be of the actual construction, materials, and
finishes specified.
.6 If approved, unit may be installed as part of the contract.
.7 Single-Source Responsibility for Fabrication and Installation. Engage a qualified woodworking

firm to assume undivided responsibility for fabricating, finishing and installing woodwork
specified in this section.

.1 Do not deliver architectural woodwork until building is in proper condition and suitable
arrangements have been made to properly handle, prime, store and protect this work.
.2 Assemble architectural woodwork at mill; cover with protective weatherproof wrapping and
deliver in sections to clear all access openings. Protect from damage during transport and
handling.
.3 In accordance with AWMAC’s standards.
1.7 JOB CONDITIONS

.1 Coordinate the work of this section with the work of others to ensure provisions for items to be
incorporated in architectural woodwork items.
.2 Do not deliver architectural woodwork until rooms and areas in which work of this section to be
installed are maintained at an ambient temperature between 16 degrees Celsius to 21 degrees
Celsius, and a relative humidity of between 43% to 55% in the building, for 48 hours before
installation and continuously up until final acceptance.
1.8 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

.1 Separate and recycle waste.
.2 Separate wood waste and place in designated areas.
.3 Set aside damaged wood for acceptable alternative uses (e.g. bracing, blocking, cripples,
bridging, finger-joining, or ties). Store this separated reusable wood waste convenient to cutting
station and area of work.
.4 Separate corrugated cardboard in accordance with Waste Management Plan and place in
designated areas for recycling.
.5 Do not burn scrap at the project site.
.6 Fold up metal banding, flatten, and place in designated area for recycling.
1.9 GUARANTEE
.1 The architectural woodworker shall furnish the owner with a two (2) year maintenance bond to
the full value of the architectural woodwork sub-contract, or a two (2) year M.M.A.B.C. (The BC
Chapter of AWMAC) Guarantee Certificate, certifying that the architectural woodwork has been
manufactured and/or installed in accordance with the standards incorporated in the AWMAC’s
standards, (edition in effect at time of tender).
2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL
.1 Clean, new stock to comply with AWMAC grade required using material as specified.
.2 Seal exposed and concealed surfaces of wood products containing formaldehyde to prevent off
– gassing.
2.2 PLASTIC LAMINATE

.1 High Pressure Decorative Laminate (HPDL): Meeting CAN3 A172 or ANSI/NEMA LD3
composed of phenolic resin impregnated Kraft paper filler stock for Class 1 Decorative Laminate
of Grade required by AWMAC Manual.
.2 Grade: General Purpose as noted below or indicated on drawing.
.3 Acceptable Manufacturers: Nevamar, Wilsonart. Formica, Arborite, Pionite, Arpa.
.4 Cabinet tops and rigid plastic bases, countertops, backsplashes: 1.22mm (plus or minus 0.127
mm) thick Horizontal General Purpose Standard (HGS) Grade.
.5 Exposed vertical surfaces: 0.71 mm (plus or minus 0.012 mm) thick Vertical General Purpose
Standard (VGS) Grade – cabinets, and outside of gables.
.6 Cabinet interiors: 0.51 mm thick Cabinet Liner Standard (CLS) Grade – shelves inside cabinets,
interior of gables and backs, colour white U.O.N.; same colour as face laminates for back of
laminated cabinet doors, drawers.
.7 Backing sheet: 0.51mm thick Backing Sheet (BK) Grade – Undecorated backing sheet grade
laminate to be used on the backside of plastic laminated panel substrates to enhance
dimensional stability of the substrate, for all laminated casework components where plastic
laminate finish is applied to only one surface of the component substrate. All panel substrates
not mechanically constrained, should be backed with a laminate manufacturer's backing sheet
to minimize moisture absorption and provide substrate stabilization.
.8 Cabinet / drawer interiors alternate: Thermoset decorative overlays (Melamine panels) – low
pressure decorative laminate pre-laminated by thermal fusion to particleboard, medium density
fiber board or other cellulosic material to form a part of the manufactured panel.
.9 Plastic Laminate Schedule:

.1 PL-1 Nevamar Vermont Maple WM5528SD
(vertical grain direction for all wall & millwork applications;
horizontal grain direction for all ceiling bulkhead application.)
.2 PL-2 Pionite Black SE101-SD
.3 Horizontal / vertical grain refers to grain direction either being horizontal or vertical
visually when installed. Use largest panel size to minimize panel joints. Cross-grain
panels not required U.O.N.
.10 Melamine:
.1 Panolam, S645 True White, Chamois Texture
2.3 CASEWORK
.1 Conform to AWMAC’s standards as applicable.
.2 Casework with Plastic Laminate Finish:
.1 AWMAC Quality Grade: Custom. Locations as noted on the drawings.

.2 Construction: Conform to AWS manual for Flush Overlay Casework. Close voids and
cavities at inside corners and behind end fillers of upper cabinets.
.3 General: All cabinets to be made from 19mm plywood with hardwood edges complete
with 13mm plywood backing.
.4 Exposed Parts: Plastic laminate on Medite 2 core, U.N.O.
.5 Semi-Exposed Parts: Plastic laminate on Medite 2 core. Color, pattern and finish to
match exposed parts, U.N.O.
.6 Exposed Shelving, U.N.O: Medite 2 core in plastic laminate with matching ABS or PVC
edges.
.7 Interior Shelving, U.N.O: 19 mm (or 25 mm for longer span as per AWMAC
requirement) melamine with finished edges. All interior gables and interior backing to be
melamine on closed units. All doors, drawers would be plastic laminate on both sides;
on open units all interior to be plastic laminate.
.8 Edge banding, U.N.O: Matching ABS or PVC material finish to face plastic laminate in
colour, pattern, and finish as per AWMAC Standard.
.9 Concealed Parts: backer matching specification to manufacturer’s option.
2.4 CASEWORK HARDWARE

.1 Hinges: fully concealed, all metal construction, 3 dimensional 6-way adjustment, soft-close built-
in. 110 degree opening. Acceptable Product: Blumotion Clip top by Blum Furniture Fittings.
.2 Door and Drawer Recessed Pulls: Matt Chrome Finish, 160mm c/c, 166 x 40x 14mm.
Acceptable Product: Richelieu 616748160-174 or equivalent.
.3 Drawer Slides: Full extension, side mounting, 100-lb class, chrome finish, handed lever
disconnect for drawer removal, steel ball bearings, soft-close. Drawers wider than 16”: full
extension with 1” over-travel, side or under mounting, 150-lb class, chrome finish, unhanded
lever disconnect, steel ball bearing, soft close. Acceptable Products: Accuride, Knape & Vogt,
Roll-it, or equivalent.
.4 Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: Adjustable Aluminum Shelf Standards and Supports,
17-gauge aluminum, 13mm on centers adjustment increments. Natural aluminum finish. Recess
standards in gables. Acceptable Product: Richelieu Knape & Vogt #255 standards and #256
supports or equivalent.
.5 Cabinet and Drawer Locks:

.1 22mm (7/8”) Pin tumbler door or drawer keyed cabinet cam locks for millwork cabinets
in Group Medical Room (#9028), Care Team Station Small Business Centres (#9020 &
#9527), and Medication Room (#9531). Also refer to drawings.
.2 Allow for 4 keys per lock, provide 4# of master key. Final keying requirements and
numbers of keys to be confirmed with Consultants.
.6 Grommet (GM): Round Cable Entry Plug 75mm diameter for 60mm hole, 18mm depth, with
rotating cover, plastic in white color. Allow for 1# in Control Room #9509A millwork worktop.
Acceptable product: Richelieu # 90060106 or equivalent.
.7 Pull-Out Compost Container (CC):

.1 Location: for Pull-out Cabinet in Recycling Centre in Staff Lounge #9001.
.2 Product: Top-Mounting recycling centre with soft-closing mechanism. Bin Quantity: 1;
capacity: 50 Qt; Colour: Grey; Product Material: plastic. Dimension: 305 W x 591 D x
552 H mm (12” W x 23.25” D x 21.75” H). Slide Extension: Over travel 1.5”. Load
Rating: 68 kg.(150 lb.). Come as a complete set with door mounting brackets pre-
assembled. Acceptable Product: Richelieu Soft-Close Recycling Centres 4WCTM
Series: #4WCTM1550BBSCDM.
.8 Garbage/Recycling Waste Bin (GRB):

.1 Location: for Garbage/ Recycling Cabinet in Recycling Centre in Staff Lounge #9001,
and Group Medical Room #9028.
.2 Product: Polymer Waste Bin, total capacity: 47.3 Litre, product dimensions to be 273mm
W x 375mm D x 522 H; color to be black. Acceptable product: Richelieu RV508 or
equivalent.
.9 Finish to all cabinet hardware-Satin chrome finish unless otherwise specified.
.10 Provide colour-coordinated plastic screw caps on ctsk screws.
.11 All millwork hardware as required to complete work.
2.5 WORKTOP
.1 Solid Surface on 19mm MDF core, total worktop thickness to be 40mm U.O.N.
.2 All solid surface worktop with top ¼” roundover edge, 150mm H integral back splash and side
splash on both sides where applicable, U.O.N.
2.6 COUNTERTOPS FOR CASEWORK (W/ OR W/O SINK) & INTEGRAL BACK/SIDE SPLASHES:
.1 Solid Surface on core materials.
.2 Core Materials: 19mm minimum non-telegraphing plywood at countertops with sink or other
plumbing cut-outs. 25mm thick for longer span as per AWMAC requirement.
.3 150mm H integral coved backsplash and both side splashes for countertops without sink, full
height back/side splashes to underside of upper cabinet full length of countertop for countertops
with sink, U.O.N on drawings.
.4 Caulking at all edges.
2.7 SOLID SURFACE (SSF)

.1 Material: Solid polymer components
.1 Cast, nonporous, filled polymer, not coated, laminated or of composite construction
with through body colors meeting ANSI Z124.3 or ANSI Z124.6, having minimum
physical and performance properties specified.
.2 Superficial damage to a depth of 0.25 mm shall be repairable by sanding and/or
polishing.
.2 Thickness: 13 mm UNO.
.3 Edge treatment: Top ¼” Roundover, U.N.O.
.4 Sheet Size: Maximum size with minimal joint required for each application.
.5 Acceptable manufacturer, product and color:

.1 SSF: Corian Antarctica
.6 Accessories:
.1 Silicone Sealant: Mildew-resistant, FDA-compliant sealant recommended by
manufacturer, in colour to match solid surface.
.2 All other accessories as recommended by solid surface manufacturer.
.3 Ultra-Bond G Adhesive: Pre-measured and pre-tinted two-part adhesive colored to
match surfacing.
.4 Backsplash and Sidesplash: Integral Coved (2-piece not acceptable).
2.8 WALL PANELING

.1 AWMAC Quality Grade – Premium
.2 13 mm medite 2, wall paneling, and wall base U.O.N., as shown on drawings.
.3 Plastic laminate facing, colour and grain direction as noted in specification and as shown on
drawings.
.4 All areas noted with PL finish on wall to be constructed as wall paneling.
2.9 UPHOLSTERY
.1 Bench seating upholstery fabric:
.1 Content: 100% Silicone
.2 Backing: Polyester
.3 Durability: 5000,000 D.R.
.4 Maintenance: WS; Bleach Cleanable (4:1)
.5 Pattern: Silica Likely
.6 Color: Parchment
.7 Accepted Manufacturer & Product: Momentum Textiles Silica Likely (No substitution
allowed).
.8 Location: Change Cubicle #9507.
2.10 FABRICATION
.1 Fabricate material in accordance with manufacturer’s written recommendations for fabrication.
Comply with AWMAC’s standards.
.2 Fabricate countertops, sinks, and splash of 19mm thick material unless otherwise indicated.
.3 Cut and finish component edges with clean, sharp returns, U.N.O. Finished edges shall have a
1.6 mm radius.
.4 Cutouts for sinks shall be smooth and uniform without saw marks. The top and bottom of
openings shall be finished smooth. Maintain minimum 6 mm radius for sink cutouts.
.5 Cutouts for accessories shall be smooth and uniform without saw marks. The top and bottom of
openings shall be finished smooth.
.6 Set nails and countersink screws apply stained wood filler to indentations, sand smooth and
leave ready to receive finish.
.7 Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures, inserts, appliances, outlet boxes and other fixtures.
.8 Obtain governing dimensions before fabricating items which are to accommodate or abut
appliances, equipment and other materials.
.9 Provide sufficient clearance between backsplash and faucet for operation of lever handle.
.10 Ensure adjacent parts of continuous laminate work match in colour and pattern.
.11 Veneer laminated plastic to core material in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's
instructions. Ensure core and laminate profiles coincide to provide continuous support and bond
over entire surface. Use continuous lengths up to 3050mm. Keep joints 600 mm from sink
cutouts.

.12 Shop-install cabinet hardware for doors, shelves and drawers. Use friction catches to provide
some seismic restraint.
.13 Shop assemble work for delivery to site in size easily handled and to ensure passage through
building openings.
.14 Shop-finish cabinet work ready for installation. Limit on-site finishing to touch-up and to site-
fabricated/fitted items where shop-finishing is impractical.
.15 For solid surface, shop assembly:

.1 Fabricate components to greatest extent practical to sizes and shapes indicated, in
accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer’s printed instructions and
technical bulletins.
.2 Form joints between components using manufacturer’s standard joint adhesive without
conspicuous joints.
.3 Rout and finish component edges with clean, sharp returns and smooth edges.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
.1 Inspect site conditions where millwork is to be installed. Report any defects in the work of other
Sections that may affect the installation of millwork to the Consultant.
3.2 PREPARATION
.1 Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before
installing.
.2 Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and
complete work as required, including back priming and removal of packing.
3.3. INSTALLATION
.1 Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWMAC’s standards for type of woodwork
involved.
.2 Install woodwork plumb, level, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with
concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 3mm in 2400mm for plumb and level (including tops).
.3 Fasten and anchor millwork securely. Provide heavy duty fixture attachments for wall mounted
cabinets. Anchor free standing units to floor.
.4 Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to

grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as
required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and
filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish where transparent finish is indicated.
.5 Cabinets - general: Install without distortion so that doors and drawers fit openings properly and
are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to centre doors and drawers in openings and to provide
unencumbered operation. Complete the installation of hardware and accessory items as
indicated.
.6 Shelving, adjustable: 25mm wide heavy-duty support brackets to be fastened to studs. In the
absence of studs, a toggle bolt (3/16”-24, e.g. Shan Toggle) may be used. Shelf brackets to
have 3 tang attachment system. End-capped shelf book brackets are to be installed (Rollit
Style). All shelves must be secured to the brackets.

.7 Tops: Anchor securely to base units and other support systems as indicated. Caulk space
between back-splash and wall with specified sealant.
.8 Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3mm in 2400mm) sag, bow, or other
variation from a straight line. Use draw bolts in countertop joints.
.9 Secure back-splashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches (400 mm) O.C.
.10 Scribe and cut as required to fit abutting walls and to fit properly into recesses and to
accommodate piping, columns, fixtures, outlets or other projecting, intersecting or penetrating
objects.
.11 Fit hardware accurately and securely in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.
.12 For solid surface:

.1 Provide product in the largest pieces available.
.2 Form field joints using manufacturer’s recommended adhesive, with joints
inconspicuous in finished work. Exposed joints/seams shall not be allowed.
.3 Reinforce field joints with solid surface strips extending a minimum of 25mm on either
side of the seam with the strip being the same thickness as the top.
.4 Cut and finish component edges with clean, sharp returns.
.5 Anchor securely to base cabinets or other supports.
.6 Align adjacent countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturer’s written
recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop.
.7 Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches and clean entire surface.
.8 Attach solid surfaces material to leveled supports on frame with dabs of silicone every
460 to 610mm.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

.1 As installation progresses and upon completion clean up debris, packaging and leftover
materials.
.2 Repair damaged and defective woodwork where possible to eliminate functional and visual
defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
.3 Clean millwork and cabinet work, inside cupboards and drawers and outside surfaces.
.4 Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.
.5 Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
3.5 PROTECTIONS
.1 Provide appropriate protection to millwork until building is accepted for use by owner.
.2 In the event of damage, all repairs and replacements necessary shall be made immediately to
the approval of the Consultant at no extra cost.
.3 Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to fabricator and
Installer that ensures that woodwork is without damage or deterioration at the time of
Substantial Performance.

RICHMOND, BC FIBER-REINFORCED LAMINATES
FINISHES PAGE 1
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DOCUMENTS

.1 Provide fiber-reinforced laminates (FRL) for wall applications.

.2 Resilient Flooring Section 09 65 00
1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s literature including product characteristics, accessories and
limitations.
.2 Verification Samples: Submit samples of materials specified to verify color and finish. Include all
trims and color grout as specified.
.3 Color Caulking Samples: Submit color caulking samples as specified in size 305x305mm for color
approval.
.4 Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing panel sizes, joints, grain direction and all molding
and seam treatments. Include all accessories types and corresponding locations used on shop
drawings.
.5 Industry Certifications and Standards: Submit copy of documentation indicating compliance.

.1 Manufacturer: Minimum of 5 years’ experience manufacturing similar products.
.2 Mock-up: Provide mockup of FRL panels showing all moldings, seam treatments, and matching
color caulking to demonstrate quality of finished wall system, complying with manufacturer's
instructions and as specified for the following areas of application for Consultant’s approval.
Maintain panel as a standard of quality for all installations.
.1 Wainscot wall protection
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

.1 Deliver materials and products in unopened factory labeled packages. Store and handle in strict
compliance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations.
1.7 WARRANTY
.1 Manufacturer’s Warranty: Provide manufacturer’s standard warranty against defects in
manufacturing.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1 Fiber-Reinforced Laminates (FRL)
.1 Thickness: 1.9mm (0.075 inches)
.2 Surface Burning Characteristics: US Standard UL-723/ASTM E 84 Class A; Canadian
Standard ULC-S102 Class A for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
.3 Sustainability, Indoor Air Quality: GREENGUARD Gold Certification.

FINISHES PAGE 2
.4 IMO Certified for marine use.
.5 Wear Resistance (Cycles) NEMA 3.13: 3500 typical.
.6 Flexural Strength ASTM D790: 20,148 psi typical.
.7 Molding Profiles: Outside corners flat, 2-piece division bars, inside corners, standard end
caps.
.8 Adhesive: Construction Adhesive #4319 by Franklin Adhesives and Polymers or equal
approved by panel manufacturer.
.9 Joint Caulking: Color Sil by Color Rite or equal approved by panel manufacturer; 100
percent silicone based colored caulking.
.10 Sheet Size: Use maximum size sheet available to minimize panel joints for areas as shown
on drawings.
.11 Approved Product: FRL by Panolam.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
.1 Moldings and Seam Treatments: Include manufacturer’s full range standard anodized aluminum
moldings and seam treatments available for all panel edges and joints including end caps to top of
panels and between wall base and bottom of panels, all outside and inside corners, between all
panel divisions U.O.N.
.2 Use 2-piece outside corner kit FRL trim for all wall corners with FRL panel on one side and PT
(painted) drywall on the other side.
.3 All moldings and seam treatment to be bent 90 degree at corner (U.O.N.) without protruding sharp
edges. All trim edges to be straight, plumb, and ground smooth.
2.3 FRL SCHEDULE

.1 FRL-1 Nevamar Bone White – FRL Pattern NS237-SD
.2 FRL-2 Nevamar Vermont Maple – FRL Pattern NW604-SD (vertical grain direction)
.3 FRL-3 Pionite Daydreaming – FRL Pattern FA008-SD
.4 Horizontal / vertical grain installation refers to grain direction either being horizontal or vertical
visually when installed. Use largest panel size to minimize panel joints. Allow for cross-grain
panel where applicable to minimize panel joints.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
.1 Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
.1 Install products in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved submittals.
.1 Clean substrate of dirt, dust, waxes, and other bond breaking substances prior to
beginning installation.
.2 Install panels with bottom edge located to clear top of any rigid or resilient wall base.
.3 Apply adhesive uniformly using adhesive manufacturers recommended notched trowel to
the entire back of panels completely to the edge.
.4 Lay FRL panels in place leaving approximately 3.175mm (1/8-inch) vertical installations
4.7625mm (3/16 inch) for horizontal installations between panel joints.
.5 Follow adhesive manufacturer’s recommendations for set and application times.
.6 Apply pressure to entire panel face with laminate type roller, removing trapped air and
ensure proper adhesion between surfaces.
.7 Install moldings and seam treatments.

FINISHES PAGE 3
.8 All moldings to mitre at corner, ensure no protruding and/or sharp edges. Grind smooth all
trim corners.
.9 For horizontal top cap trim, bend trim at corner to create a continuous top cap trim around
the corner.

.1 Replace installations out of plumb and not aligned with adjacent panels and construction.
.2 Clean panel face to remove soiling, stains, dust, and dirt using clean rags, and cleaning agents as
instructed by manufacturer.
.3 Leave installation clean, free of residue and debris resulting from work of this Section.

RICHMOND, BC BLANKET INSULATION
THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION PAGE 1
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DOCUMENTS

.1 Insulation as indicated on the drawings and specified herein.

.1 Supports for Plaster & Gypsum Board Section 09 22 00
.3 Acoustic Ceiling Section 09 51 00
1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING

.1 Materials shall be stored in a dry and protected area, off the ground, in original undamaged,
sealed container with manufacturer’s labels and seals in tact. Avoid freezing.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

.1 Review manufacturer’s recommendations for ambient temperatures during and after application.
.2 Report to general contractor in writing, defects of work prepared by other trades and
unsatisfactory site or environmental conditions.
.3 Examine surfaces to ensure they are dry, clean, free of oil, grease, dirt, paint, mull scale or
other deleterious material that would impair bonding.
.4 Commencement of work shall imply acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
2.0 PRODUCTS
.1 Acoustic and Fire Rated Wall Assembly Batt: Rock Wool Insulation. Acceptable product:
Rockwool AFB (Acoustical Fire Batt).
.2 Mineral Wool foil faced insulation: Non-combustible flexible batt insulation with factory applied
foil facing with Flame Spread Rating of less than 25 and Smoke Development Classification of
less than 50 in accordance with ULC S102-03. Density to be minimum 128kg/sq.m. Acceptable
Product: Thermafiber VersaBoard mineral wool insulation by Owens Corning or approved equal.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
.1 Ensure that surfaces to receive insulation are clean and free of obstructions.
3.2 WORKMANSHIP
.1 Install batt insulation to all other areas indicated on drawings to thickness shown.
.2 Fit closely around electrical boxes, pipes, ducts, frames, joists, and other objects in or passing
through insulation.
3.3 INSTALLATION
.1 Batt insulation installation
.1 Install batt insulation for acoustic separations so as to press on drywall over entire
surface area.
RICHMOND, BC BLANKET INSULATION
.2 Mineral Wool Foil Faced insulation

.1 Install batt insulation for acoustic separations to tap or mechanical fasten to steel stud.
Install insulation back to back to allow only the foli face of the insulation to expose in the
ceiling space.
.2 Cut and trim insulation neatly, to fit spaces. Tap all joints and all services penetrations
through the insulation on both sides.

.1 Remove waste and excess material off site at completion of application. Repair and make good
any defects to this application or any defects caused by this application.

RICHMOND, BC FIRESTOPPING
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DOCUMENTS

.1 Provide all labour, material, services and equipment necessary for supply and installation of
firestopping and smoke seals for all new and existing piping penetrations at floor and ceiling
slab within the project area.
.2 Firestopping materials and/or systems intended to act as a firestop and smoke seal within fire
resistive wall for any through penetrating items, poke through termination devices and electrical
outlet boxes.
.3 Seals forming draft tight barriers to retard the passage of smoke, flame and hose stream.

.2 Supports for Plaster & Gypsum Board Section 09 22 00
1.4 REFERENCES
.1 Test Requirements: ULC-S115-M or CAN4-S115-M, “Standard Method of Fire Tests of
Through Penetration Fire Stops.”
.2 Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC) of Scarborough runs CAN4-S115-M under their

designation of ULC-S115-M and publishes the results in their “Fire Resistance Ratings
Directory” that is updated annually.
Underwriters Laboratories (UL) of Northbrook, IL runs ASTM E-814 under their designation of
UL 1479 and publishes the results in their “Fire Resistance Directory” that is updated annually.
UL tests that meet the requirements of ULC-S115-M are given a cUL listing and are published
by UL in their “Products Certified for Canada (cUL) Directory.”
.3 Test Requirements: UL 2079, “Tests for Resistance of Building Joint Systems” (July 1998.)
This test requirement provides more guidelines for testing moving joints than that given in
CAN4-S115-M. UL tests that meet the requirements of ULC-S115-M are given a cUL listing
and are published by UL in their “Products Certified for Canada (cUL) Directory.
.4 International Firestop Council Guidelines for Evaluating Firestop Systems Engineering

Judgements.
.5 CAN/ULC-S102-M, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials.
.6 B.C. Building Code 2018.
.7 NFPA 101 – Life Safety Code.
.8 Canadian Electrical Code.

1.5 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2 Shop Drawings:
.1 Submit shop drawings to show proposed material, reinforcement, anchorage,
fastenings and method of installation. Construction details should accurately reflect
actual job conditions.
.2 Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of
material required. Include data substantiating that the materials comply with specified
requirements. Include composition and limitations, documentation of ULC or cUL
firestop systems.
.3 Samples:
.1 Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2 Submit duplicate 300 mm x 300 mm samples showing actual firestop material proposed
for the project.
1.6 QUALITY CONTROL

.1 Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products of this section with a minimum
of three (3) years proven experience.
.2 Applicator: Approved, licensed and supervised by the manufacturer of Firestopping Materials

with a minimum of three (3) years proven experience.
.3 Product: Manufactured under a Underwriter’s follow-up program and bearing listing label.
.4 Pre-Installation Conference: Convene a meeting between related sections following award of

contract to discuss Firestopping requirements. Ensure that other sections are aware of the
maximum and minimum clearance requirements to the penetration stipulated by the
Underwriter’s design listing.

.1 Deliver materials undamaged in manufacturer’s clearly labeled, unopened containers, identified
with brand, type, and ULC or cUL label where applicable.
.2 Coordinate delivery of materials with scheduled installation date to allow minimum storage time
at job-site.
.3 Store materials under cover and protect from weather and damage in compliance with
manufacturer’s requirements.
.4 Comply with recommended procedures, precautions or remedies described in material safety

data sheets as applicable.
.5 Do not use damaged or expired materials.

.1 Do not use materials that contain flammable solvents.
.2 Schedule installation of firestopping after completion of penetrating item installation but prior to
covering or concealing of openings.
.3 Verify existing conditions and substrates before starting work. Correct unsatisfactory conditions
before proceeding.

.4 Weather conditions: Do not proceed with installation of firestop materials when temperatures
exceed the manufacturer’s recommended limitations for installation printed on product label and
product data sheet.
.5 During installation, provide masking and drop cloths to prevent firestopping materials from
dropping.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1 Firestopping, general
.1 Provide firestopping composed of components that are compatible with each other, the
substrates forming openings, and the items, if any, penetrating the firestopping under
conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by the firestopping manufacturer
based on testing and field experience.
.2 Provide components for each firestopping system that are needed to install fill material.
Use only components specified by the firestopping manufacturer and approved by the
qualified testing agency for the designated fire-resistance-rated systems.
.3 Firestopping Materials are either “cast-in-place” (integral with concrete placement) or

“post installed.” Provide cast-in-place firestop devices prior to concrete placement.
.2 Fire stopping and smoke seal systems:

.1 Asbestos-free materials and systems capable of maintaining an effective barrier against
flame, smoke and gases in compliance with requirements of CAN4-S115 and not to
exceed opening sizes for which they are intended.
.2 Firestop system rating: As indicated on drawings.
.3 Service Penetration Assemblies: Certified by ULC in accordance with CAN4-S115 and listed in
ULC Guide No. 40 U19.
.4 Service Penetration Firestop Components: Certified by ULC in accordance with CAN4-S115

and listed in ULC Guide No. 40 U19.13 and ULC Guide No. 40 U19.15 under the Label Service
of ULC.
.5 Fire-resistance rating of installed firestopping assembly not less than the fire-resistance rating of
surrounding floor and wall assembly.
.6 Firestopping and smoke seals at openings intended for ease of re-entry such as cables:
Elastomeric seals; do not use cementitious or rigid seal at such locations.
.7 Firestopping and smoke seals at openings around penetrations for pipes, ductwork and other
mechanical items requiring sound and vibration control: Elastomeric seal; do not use a
cementitious or rigid seal at such locations.
.8 Primers: To the manufacturer's recommendation for specific material, substrate and end use.
.9 Water (if applicable): Potable, clean and free from injurious amounts of deleterious substances.
.10 Damming and Backup Materials, Supports and Anchoring Devices: To the manufacturer's
recommendations, and in accordance with tested assembly being installed as acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
.1 Examine sizes and conditions of voids to be filled to establish correct thicknesses and
installation of materials. Ensure that substrates and surfaces are clean, dry and frost free.
.2 Prepare surfaces in contact with firestopping materials and smoke seals to the manufacturer's
instructions.
.3 Maintain insulation around pipes and ducts penetrating fire separation.
.4 Mask where necessary to avoid spillage and overcoating onto adjoining surfaces; remove stains
on adjacent surfaces.
3.2 INSTALLATION
.1 Install firestopping and smoke seal material and components in accordance with ULC / cUL
certification and the manufacturer's instructions.
.2 Seal holes or voids made through penetrations, poke-through termination devices, and
unpenetrated openings or joints to ensure continuity and integrity of fire separation are
maintained.
.3 Provide temporary forming as required and remove forming only after materials have gained
sufficient strength and after initial curing.
.4 Tool or trowel exposed surfaces to a neat finish.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

.1 Notify the Consultant when ready for inspection and prior to concealing or enclosing
Firestopping Materials and service penetration assemblies.
.2 Tag service penetrations and every 3.0 meters of joint seal with printed tags indicating name
and phone number of subcontractor and the following statement: “CAUTION! FIRESTOP: DO
NOT RE-ENTER, PUNCTURE OR DESTORY UNLESS PREPARED TO RE-SEAL
IMMEDIATELY WITH PROPER, APPROVED METHOD!”
.3 Allow for six (6) firestops to be disassembled in the presence of the Consultant. Should any of
these firestops prove inadequate, the Consultant will order the inspection of additional firestops.
Following inspections, reinstate the firestops.
3.4 INSPECTION
.1 Notify the Consultant when ready for inspection and prior to concealing or enclosing firestopping
materials and service penetration assemblies.
3.5 SCHEDULE
.1 Firestop and smoke seal at:
.1 Intersection of floor slab and fire-resistance rated gypsum board partitions.
.2 Around mechanical and electrical assemblies penetrating fire separations.
.3 Rigid Ducts: Greater than 129 cm2; firestopping to consist of bead of firestopping
material between retaining angle and fire separation and between retaining angle and
duct, on each side of fire separation.
.1 Remove excess materials and debris and clean adjacent surfaces immediately after application.
.2 Remove temporary dams after initial set of firestopping and smoke seal materials.

RICHMOND, BC JOINT SEALANTS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DOCUMENTS

.1 Interior sealants, joint back-up and joint preparation.

.3 Glazing Section 08 80 00
1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit samples of each type of material and colour at job site during application.
.2 Cure samples under conditions anticipated at job site during application.

.1 Deliver materials to the job site in their original unopened containers with all labels intact.
.2 Cure samples under conditions anticipated at job site during application.
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

.1 Apply sealants only to completely dry surfaces and at air temperatures above minimum
established by manufacturer’s specifications.
1.7 WARRANTY
.1 Provide a written warranty stating that caulking work of this Section is guaranteed against
leakage, cracking, crumbling, melting, shrinkage, running, loss of adhesion and/or staining
adjacent surfaces for a period of three (3) years from the date of Certificate of Substantial
Performance.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1 Primers: Type recommended by sealant manufacturer.
.2 Sealants acceptable for use on this project must be listed on the Qualified Products List issued
by the CGSB Qualification Board for Joint Sealants.
.3 Colours: To match adjoining surfaces
.4 Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive type recommended by sealant manufacturer and compatible with
joint forming materials.
.5 Sealant:

.1 Standard: For interior work unless otherwise specified, ensure compatibility of sealants
being used and other materials in contact with them, meet LEED® requirement VOC
level of 250 g/L for architectural sealant, and conform to the latest editions of the
specifications summarized below:
.2 Silicone caulking: To washroom plumbing fixtures, mildew resistant.
.3 Acoustic caulking: TREMCO Acoustical Sealant, Sternson’s ACRYFLEX, or approved
alternative, for concealed sealing; TREMCO 555, acrylic sealant conforming to CGSB
19-GP-5M standard, for exposed to view sealing work; provide around electrical boxes,
phone plugs, and other penetrations in partitions scheduled for acoustic separation.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 CONDITIONS OF SURFACES

.1 Verify at the site that joints and surfaces have been provided as specified under the work of
other sections; and that joint conditions will not adversely affect execution, performance or
quality of completed work; and that they can be put into acceptable condition by means of
preparation specified in this section.
.2 Ascertain that sealers and coatings applied to substrates are compatible with sealant used and
the full bond between sealant and substrate is attained. Request samples of the sealed or
coated substrate from their fabricators for testing of compatibility and bond if necessary.
.3 Verify that specified environmental conditions are ensured before commencing work.
.4 Ensure that releasing agents, coatings, or other treatments have either not been applied to joint
surfaces or that they are entirely removed.
.5 Defective work resulting from application to unsatisfactory joint conditions will be considered the
responsibility of the sub-contractor performing the Work of this section.
3.2 PREPARATION
.1 Remove dust, paint, rust, oil, grease, frost and other foreign matter. Dry joint surfaces. Use
joint cleaner where appropriate.
.2 Remove dust, silt, mill scale, and coatings from ferrous metals by wire brush, grinding or
sandblasting.
.3 Install joint filler or apply bond breaker tape to achieve correct joint depth.
.4 Prepare concrete, masonry glazed and vitreous surfaces to sealant manufacturer’s instructions.
.5 Examine joint sizes and correct to achieve depth ratio 1/2 of joint width with minimum width and
depth of 6 mm, maximum width 25 mm. Where joint configuration does not allow for proper
depth/width ratio, a pressure sensitive bond breaker tape shall be placed at the back of the joint
which will not bond to the sealant.
.6 Clean ferrous metal joint bonding surfaces to bare non oxidized metal and remove oil, grease
and other contaminants with Xylol, methylethylketone or isopropylalcohol.
.7 Where required, prime sides of joint in accordance with manufacturer’s direction immediately
prior to caulking.
.8 Where necessary to prevent staining, mask adjacent surfaces prior to priming and caulking.
.9 Apply bond breaker tape where required to manufacturer’s instructions.

3.3 INSTALLATION
.1 The Consultant, the Contractor, the caulking contractor and the sealant manufacturer
representative shall, at the Contractor’s written notice, meet at the project site to review the
material selection, joint preparations, installation procedures and co-ordination with other
trades. If required, the Contractor shall perform sample installation on site in the presence of
the above-mentioned persons indicative of the types of joints detailed. These panels will form
the basis of acceptable workmanship and refinement of installation details.
3.4 APPLICATION
.1 Sealant.
.1 Apply sealant in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
.2 Mask edges of joint where irregular surface or sensitive joint border exists to provide neat
joint.
.3 Apply sealant in continuous beads.
.4 Apply sealant using gun with proper size nozzle.
.5 Use sufficient pressure to fill voids and joints solid.
.6 Form surface of sealant with full bead, smooth, free from ridges, wrinkles, sags, air
pockets, embedded impurities.
.7 Tool exposed surfaces before skinning begins to give slightly concave shape.
.8 Remove excess compound promptly as work progresses and upon completion.
.2 Curing.
.1 Cure sealants in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions.
.2 Do not cover up sealants until proper curing has taken place.
.3 Cleanup.
.1 Clean adjacent surfaces immediately and leave Work neat and clean.
.2 Remove excess and droppings, using recommended cleaners as work progresses.
.3 Remove masking tape after initial set of sealant.

.1 Clean adjacent surfaces immediately and leave work clean and neat. Remove excess sealant
and droppings using recommended cleaners as work progresses. Remove masking after
tooling of joints.

RICHMOND, BC DOOR AND WINDOW SCHEDULE
OPENINGS PAGE 1
DOOR FRAME
Door Clear FROM ROOM TO ROOM Re-marks
Opening Glass Typ Glass RATING
No. Type Mat’l Finish Mat’l Finish
W H Type e Type (HR)
(mm) (mm)
SUITE 90
PUBLIC 2,5,10,
9000 1830 2400 D7 HM PTD LG F1 PSS PTD - 1/3 WAITING AREA
CORRIDOR 11,12,13,
PUBLIC
9001 900 2000 D6 HM PTD LG(F) F1 PSS PTD - 1/3 STAFF LOUNGE 2,10,13
CORRIDOR
CHANGE
9001B 750 2135 D1 HM PTD - F1 PSS PTD - LOCKERS 7
CUBICLE
9001C 750 2135 D1 HM PTD - F1 PSS PTD - LOCKERS STAFF WR 7
STAFF WR &
9001D 750 2135 D1 HM PTD - F1 PSS PTD - LOCKERS 7
SHOWER
CORRIDOR-01 ADMIN.
9002 1000 2135 D8 AL CA RP AL CA RP 1,4
PATIENT WORKROOM
PATIENT WR 4
9003 915 2135 D1 HM PTD - F1 PSS PTD - WAITING AREA 7,11
– ACC.
CORRIDOR-02
9011 915 2135 D6 SCW PL-1 IGU(F) F1 PSS PTD - EXAM ROOM 1 14,16
PATIENT
CORRIDOR-02
PATIENT
CORRIDOR-02
PATIENT
CORRIDOR-02
PATIENT
CORRIDOR-02
PATIENT
CORRIDOR-02
PATIENT
CORRIDOR-02
PATIENT
CORRIDOR-02 CONSULT
9024 915 2135 D6 SCW PL-1 IGU(F) F1 PSS PTD - 14,16
PATIENT ROOM
CORRIDOR-02
PATIENT
CORRIDOR-02
9026 915 2135 D6 HM PTD TG(F) F1 PSS PTD - CLEAN SUPPLY 10,13
PATIENT
OPENINGS PAGE 2
DOOR FRAME
(mm) (mm)
CORRIDOR-02
PATIENT
GROUP
CORRIDOR-02
9028A 915 2135 D5 SCW PL-1 IGU(F) F1 PSS PTD - MEDICAL 14,16
PATIENT
ROOM
GROUP
PUBLIC
9028B 915 2135 D6 SCW PL-1 LG(F) F1 PSS PTD - 1/3 MEDICAL 10,13,14
CORRIDOR
ROOM
CORRIDOR-02
PATIENT
PUBLIC
9040 915 2135 D1 HM PTD - F1 PSS PTD - 3/4 COMM. ROOM 10,13
CORRIDOR
CORRIDOR
CORRIDOR-01
C9001 915 2135 D5 HM PTD RP F2 PSS PTD RP WAITING AREA 1,10,11
PATIENT
SUITE 95
PUBLIC 5,10,
9500 1830 2345 D7 HM PTD LG F1 PSS PTD - 1/3 WAITING AREA
CORRIDOR 11,12,13
9501 850 2135 D1 HM PTD - F1 PSS PTD - WAITING AREA PATIENT WR 1 7
ASSESSMENT /
9502A 1220 2135 D5 SCW PL-1 IGU(F) F2 PSS PTD IGU(F) WAITING AREA 8,14
TRIAGE
ASSESSMENT / 8,10,13,14,
9502B 915 2135 D6 SCW PL-1 IGU(F) F1 PSS PTD - RECEPTION
TRIAGE 18,19
PATIENT WR 2 -
9503 1220 2135 D1 HM PTD - F1 PSS PTD - WAITING AREA ACC.+ 7,11
BARIATRIC
CHANGE
9507 915 2135 D1 HM PTD - F1 PSS PTD - WAITING SPACE
CUBICLE
RADIOGRAPHY
9509 1830 2135 D2 LHM PTD - F1 LLF PTD - WAITING SPACE 20
ROOM
CONSULT
9510A 1220 2135 D6 SCW PL-1 IGU(F) F1 PSS PTD - WAITING AREA 8,14
ROOM 1

OPENINGS PAGE 3
DOOR FRAME
(mm) (mm)
CONSULT 8,10,13,14,
9510B 915 2135 D6 SCW PL-1 IGU(F) F1 PSS PTD - RECEPTION
ROOM 1 18,19
CORRIDOR-02 PATIENT WR 3
9520 915 2135 D1 HM PTD - F1 PSS PTD - 7,11
PATIENT – ACC.
CORRIDOR-02 RADIOGRAPHY
9521A 915 2135 D4 SCW PL-1 IGU(F) F1 PSS PTD - 10,14
PATIENT WORKSTATION
RADIOGRAPHY RADIOGRAPHY
9521B 915 2135 D4 LHM PTD LLG(F) F1 LLF PTD - 10,14
ROOM WORKSTATION
CORRIDOR-02 CONSULT
9522A 915 2135 D6 SCW PL-1 IGU(F) F1 PSS PTD - 14,16,20
PATIENT ROOM 2
CONSULT
9522B EX EX EX EX EX EX EX EX EX EX EXTERIOR 9,13
ROOM 2
PUBLIC CARE TEAM
9527 900 2000 D1 HM PTD - F1 PSS PTD 1/3 2,10,13,18
CORRIDOR STATION
CORRIDOR-04
PATIENT
CORRIDOR-04 MEDICATION
9531 915 2135 D6 SCW PL-1 TG(F) F1 PSS PTD - 10,13,18
PATIENT ROOM
CORRIDOR-04
PATIENT
CORRIDOR-04
PATIENT
CORRIDOR-04
PATIENT
CORRIDOR-04
PATIENT
CORRIDOR-04
PATIENT
CORRIDOR-04
PATIENT
CORRIDOR-04
PATIENT

OPENINGS PAGE 4
DOOR FRAME
(mm) (mm)
SHARED
EQUIP. ALCOVE
9540 915 2135 D5 SCW PL-1 IGU(F) F1 PSS PTD - OFFICE / 10,14
3
BREAKOUT
CORRIDOR-05
9544 915 2135 D6 HM PTD TG(F) F1 PSS PTD - CLEAN SUPPLY 10,13
SUPPORT
CORRIDOR-05 HOUSE-
9545 915 2135 D1 HM PTD - F1 PSS PTD - 3/4 15
SUPPORT KEEPING
CORRIDOR-05
9546 915 2135 D6 HM PTD TG(F) F1 PSS PTD - SOILED UTILITY 10
SUPPORT
CORRIDOR
CORRIDOR-01 CORRIDOR-03
C9503 1220 2135 D5 HM PTD RP F2 PSS PTD RP 1,10,11
VISITOR PATIENT
PUBLIC CORRIDOR-05
C9505 1220 2135 D3 HM PTD - F1 PSS PTD - 1/3 10,13,18
CORRIDOR SUPPORT
INTERIOR WINDOWS
OVERALL
ROUGH FRAME
OPENING SIZE LOCATION
W H Glass
Mat’l Finish
(mm) (mm) Type
ADMIN.
W9002 4302 1135 PSS PTD TG(F) 8
WORKROOM
WAITING AREA
W9500 2290 1830 AL CA RP
9500
ASSESSMENT /
W9502 1350 965 PSS PTD LG(F) 8
TRIAGE
WAITING
W9505 850 2440 AL CA RP
SPACE 9505
W9509a 1208 1165 LLF PTD LLG RADIOGRAPHY
21
W9509b 890 1165 LLF PTD LLG ROOM

OPENINGS PAGE 5
DOOR FRAME
(mm) (mm)
PUBLIC CORRIDOR
PUBLIC PUBLIC
CORRIDOR CORRIDOR
101 1830 2400 D9 SS #4 TG F1 AL CA - - 1.22
(SOUTH (NORTH
PORTION) PORTION)
LEGEND REMARKS
AL ALUMINUM #1. SIDE-LITE / CLERESTORY REFER INTERIOR ELEVATION
CA CLEAR ANODIZED #2. DOOR TO MATCH EXISTING DOOR OPENING
EX EXISTING #3. REPLACE EXISTING DOOR HARDWARE WITH NEW
(F) FROSTED GLAZING FILM #4. DOOR FRAME TO BE PART OF SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM
HM HOLLOW METAL #5. REMOTE LOCKING FEATURE
IGU INSULATED GLAZED UNIT (25mm thick minimum) #6. ALUM WINDOW WITH TRANSACTION SLIDER
LG LAMINATED GLASS (12mm thick minimum) #7. 19mm (3/4”) UNDERCUT
LLF LEAD LINED METAL FRAME #8. GLAZING FILM PATTERN, REFER TO INTERIOR ELEVATION &
LLG LEADED GLASS SPECIFICATION
LHM LEAD LINED HOLLOW METAL #9. ADD SECURITY PRIVACY FILM ON GLAZING
RP RESIN PANEL #10. CARD ACCESS, ELECTRIC STRIKE & DOOR CLOSER
PL-1 PLASTIC LAMINATE TYPE 1 #11. AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATOR WITH HANDS FREE OPERATOR AT TOP
PSS PRESSED STEEL FRAME AND PUSH BUTTON AT BOTTOM ON BOTH SIDES OF DOOR
PTD PAINTED FINISH #12 PANIC HARDWARE
RP RESIN PANEL #13 ASTRAGAL
SCW SOLID CORE WOOD #14 ACOUSTIC DOOR GASKET, DOOR BOTTOM & THRESHOLD
SS STAINLESS STEEL #15 DOOR CLOSER
TG TEMPERED GLASS (6mm thick minimum) #16 CLASSROOM STYLE KEY LOCK
WD SOLID WOOD #17 PASSAGE LOCK
#18 WIDE-ANGLE PEEPHOLE – ONE-WAY VIEWING ONLY
#19 PEEPHOLE INSTALLED ON RECEPTION SIDE
#20 LEAD THICKNESS TO BE DETERMINED
#21 ONE-PIECE WINDOW
#22 FRAMELESS GLASS DOOR WITH CARD READER & MAG LOCK

RICHMOND, BC HOLLOW METAL DOORS & FRAMES
OPENINGS PAGE 1
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DOCUMENTS
.1 This Section of the Specifications forms part of the Contract Documents and is to be read, interpreted
and coordinated with all other parts.

.1 Pressed steel Door and Window frames.

1.4 REFERENCES
.1 Underwirter’s laboratories of Canada (ULC)
.1 CAN4-S104M-M80, Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
.2 CAN4-S105M-M85, Fire Door Frames.
.2 Canadian Steel Door & Frame Manufacturer’s Association (CSDFMA).
1.5 SUBMITTALS
.1 Shop Drawings:
.1 Submit shop showing typical details of pressed steel frames, including frame schedules and
hardware details, to the Consultant for review prior to fabrication.
.2 Note: Sizes shown on Door Schedule are clear frame opening sizes; base door sizes on
clear opening frame sizes.
1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING

.1 Promptly clean any scratches or disfigurement caused in shipping or handling and touch up with a
rust-inhibitive primer. Properly store materials on planks, or dunnage, out of water, and covered to
protect them from damage due to any cause. Remove wrappings or coverings upon arrival at the
building site and store in a vertical position, spaced by blocking to permit air circulation between
them.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRESSED STEEL FRAMES

.1 All Interior Door - 16 gauge steel frames.
.2 Interior frames to be zinc wiped coat galvanized, having zinc coating finish designating of ZF075 to
ASTM 525. Shop prime after fabrication. Factory torch up after welding.
.3 Provide adjustable anchors of manufacturer's standard to each frame as required.
.4 Blank, reinforce, drill and tap frames for mortised butts and strike. Protect mortised butts and strike
cutouts with metal guard boxes where required.
.5 Reinforce frames when required for surface mounted hardware. Provide drilling and tapping as
required for hardware mounting. Hardware preparation and location shall be in accordance with
ANSI standard. Prepare each door opening for single rubber bumpers, three (3) for single door
opening.

OPENINGS PAGE 2
.6 Weld two (2) channel or angle spreaders to doorjambs at bottom of door opening to ensure proper
alignment.
.7 Provide frames to be anchored to steel stud wall, with anchors of suitable design for new or
previously constructed installation as shown on reviewed shop drawings.
.8 Reinforced head of frames wider than 1220mm.
2.2 HOLLOW METAL DOORS

.1 All Interior doors to be zinc wiped galvanized; having zinc coating finish designation ZF075 to ASTM
525. Interior door face to be 18 gauge.
.2 Provide doors of 44.5 mm thick flush panel design and of honeycomb construction.
.3 Provide insulating core materials to doors in manufacturer's standard for fire-rated ULC approved fire
doors.
.4 Construct doors in accordance with ULC. Provide doors complete with appropriate ULC label for fire
rating and temperature rise.
.5 Provide labeled doors for those openings which require fire protection ratings as determined and
scheduled. Ensure such doors are in accordance with manufacturer's standard and/or type of
construction as tested and approved by a nationally recognized testing agency having a factory
inspection service.
.6 Top and bottom of interior door closed with recessed channel or flush end closure as per
manufacturer's standards. Fill interior voids of doors with sound deadening and insulating core
materials.
.7 Provide raceway in the interior of all doors at centre hinge height to accommodate future electrified
locksets.
.8 Finish Hardware: Prepare door assemblies for installation of hardware specified in Section 08 71 00.
.9 Refer to Mechanical Drawings for doors with grilles or undercuts.
.10 Glazing: Refer to Section 08 80 00.
2.3 LEAD-LINED HOLLOW METAL DOORS
.1 Material: A60 galvanneal steel, ASTM A526 (Galvanneal).
.2 Material: Cold rolled steel, ASTM A366 (Cold Rolled Steel)
.3 Face Sheet: 16 gauge
.4 Construction: Mineral core board.
.5 The edges of our doors shall be continuously seam welded, ground and filled to provide a smooth
finish. The top and bottom of the doors shall be reinforced with continuous steel channels, spot
welded to both sides of the door. Doors shall have 11 gauge steel angles, 12 inches (305 mm) long
for hinge reinforcement.
.6 Door shall comply with HMMA 861-00 For Commercial Hollow Metal Doors and Frames, and SDI-
100, Grade II, Heavy Duty Model 3, Seamless Hollow Metal Construction.

OPENINGS PAGE 3
2.4 LEAD-LINED HOLLOW METAL DOOR FRAMES
.1 Lead-Lined Hollow Metal Door Frames: 16 gage (1.5 mm) welded steel frames with 4-7/8 inches (124
mm) throat and 2 inches (51 mm) face. Provide angle iron spot welded at 6 inches (152 mm) on center,
and anchor bolts to secure frame if lead thickness is 1/8 inch (3 mm) or greater. Design lead-lined door
frames to accommodate lead lining up to 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick.
.2 Door Frame Supports: 2-1/4 inches (57 mm) steel angle iron.
2.5 LEAD-LINED METAL WINDOW FRAMES
.1 Lead-Lined Metal Window Frames: 16 gage (1.5 mm) welded steel frames adjustable from 4-1/4 inches
(108 mm) to 6 inches (152 mm) wall thickness. Design window frames to accept any thickness of
radiation shielding leaded glass and radiation shielding X-Ray safety glass.
.2 Provide radiation protection equivalent to that provided by sheet lead in partition in which view window is
installed.
.1 Provide 1/2 inch (13 mm) removable stops
2.6 FABRICATION
.1 Frames:
.1 Provide frames of welded type, one-piece construction.
.2 Cut mitres and joints accurately and weld continuously on inside of frame profile.
.3 Grind welded corners and joints to flat plane, fill with metallic paste filler and sand to uniform
smooth finish.
.4 Reinforce heads of frames to suit opening width.
.2 Doors:
.1 Mortise, reinforce, drill and tap doors and reinforcements to receive hardware using
templates provided by finish hardware supplier.
.2 Make provision for louvres and glazing as indicated and provide necessary glazing stops.
.3 Construct fully glazed doors as true style and rail doors.
.4 Construct matching panels in same manner as doors.
.5 Touch up doors with primer where galvanized finish damaged during fabrication.
.6 Interior Doors: Edges fully welded, filled and sanded flush.
2.7 ACCESSORIES
.1 Install sheet lead lining within steel door and window frames to provide radiation protection to levels
indicated or levels required to match adjacent wall protection.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
.1 Examine surfaces to which the work of this section is to be applied and ensure that conditions are
able to provide a complete and satisfactory installation.
.2 Commencement of work will indicate acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF PRESSED STEEL FRAME AND DOORS

.1 Place frames prior to construction and enclosing of walls and ceilings. Wherever possible set frames
in place prior to placing of concrete unit masonry or steel stud wall. Set frames accurately in position,
plumbed, aligned and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After construction is
completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.

OPENINGS PAGE 4
.2 Fit doors accurately in their respective frames with plumb, free-swinging, smooth operating and with
even margins with the following clearances:
Between doors and frames at head and jamb: 1.5 mm

At Threshold & Finished floor: 12 mm
Between meeting edges of pairs of doors: 3 mm
Hinge side: 1 mm
.3 Clearances to fire rated assemblies shall meet ULC Listing for the Fire Rating required.
.4 Install fire rated doors and frames in accordance with NFPA 80, latest edition.
.5 Doors and frames shall have clear identification markings for installation purpose.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF LEAD LINED DOOR FRAMES AND DOOR
.1 Lead-Lined Frames: Install lead-lined steel door frames to comply with NAAMM HMMA 840 unless
otherwise indicated. Set frames accurately in position, plumb, and braced securely until permanent
anchors are set.
.2 Secure door frames with steel stud anchors if lead lining is below 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick.
.3 Door Frame Supports (utilize if lead thickness is 1/8 inch (3 mm or greater):

.1 Run steel angle supports full height on each door frame jamb to structure above.
.2 Spot-weld supports at 6 inches (152 mm) along jambs and at corners of jambs and head
frame.
.3 Anchor frame to substrate with fasteners appropriate for substrate.
.4 Apply coat of asphalt mastic or paint to lead lining in door frames where lead will come in
contact with masonry or grout.
.5 Provide 3 anchors per jamb, located adjacent to hinge on hinge jamb, and at corresponding
heights on strike jamb.
.6 In metal stud construction, use wall anchors attached to studs with screws.
.7 Lap lead lining of frames over lining in walls at least 1 inch (25 mm).
.8 Lead Lining of Frames: Line inside of frames with lead of thickness not less than that
required in doors and walls in which frames are used. Form lead to match frame contour,
continuous in each jamb and across head, lapping stops. Form lead shields around areas
prepared to receive hardware. Lap lining over lining in walls at least 1 inch (25 mm).
.4 Touch up damaged finishes with compatible coating after sanding smooth.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF WINDOW FRAMES
.1 Set unleaded side of frame plumb and square in wall opening on control room side of wall with shims.
.2 Set leaded side of frame plumb and square in wall opening on X-Ray side of wall.
.3 Compress sides together against faces of wall.
.4 Install setting blocks, shims, and glazing tape in glazing channel to prevent galls from touching steel
frame.
.5 Install radiation resistant glazing in telescopic frame.
.6 Place steel stops in position and mark location of stop and frame retaining holes on steel frame.

OPENINGS PAGE 5
.7 Remove glazing and drill holes in steel frame.
.8 Place glazing and stops and hand drive setting screws.

.1 Check and re-adjust operating finish hardware items in hollow metal work just prior to final inspection.
Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work
including doors or frames, which are warped, bowed or otherwise damaged.

RICHMOND, BC WOOD DOORS
OPENINGS PAGE 1
1.0. GENERAL
1.1 DOCUMENTS

.1 Wood doors, flush construction, solid core.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE STANDARDS

.1 Use the "Quality Standards Illustrated (QSI)" of the Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers
Association of Canada (AWMAC), Latest Edition, together with authorized additions and
amendments, as a reference standard and as a part of this project specification.
.2 Where modifications to the AWMAC QSI contained within the Manual are included in this
project specification, then such modifications shall govern in case of conflict.
.3 Use the AWMAC QSI to define any reference to Institutional or Architectural grade in this
specification.
.4 Any item not given a specific quality grade shall be premium grade as defined in the latest
edition of the AWMAC QSI.
.5 Ensure wood doors to be used in the project meet the requirements of the AWMAC QSI for the
particular grade specified.
.6 Reference in this specification to part and item number means the parts and items contained
within the AWMAC QSI Manual.
.7 Wood doors shall be of specified grade as defined by AWMAC QSI Manual. Premanufactured
doors meeting AWMAC standards may be accepted.
.8 Doors, doors frames and transom panels shall be manufactured by a single source millwork
contractor who has adequate plan, equipment, and skilled tradesman to furnish doors, door
frames/transom panels meeting the specified requirements.
1.5 DEFINITIONS
.1 Exposed surfaces: Surfaces visible when doors are opened, backs of hinged doors and edges
of hinged doors exposed when opened.
.2 Pre-machined: Factory prepared cut-outs for hardware. Site trimming of work will not be
permitted, except trimming of door height.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
.1 Samples:

OPENINGS PAGE 2
.1 Sample for Verification, Painted Door: Submit one 300mm x 300mm corner sample
showing construction, edge details, core and face painted in selected finish (shop
finished).
.2 Sample for Verification, Painted Transom Panel: Submit one 300mm x 300mm corner
sample showing construction, edge details, core and face painted in selected finish
(shop finished).
.3 Sample for Verification, Painted Frame: Submit one 300mm long corner sample
showing profiles, jointing method, face veneer in selected finish (shop finish).
.4 Control Samples, Factory Finish: Submit duplicate 300 mm x 300 mm factory finished
paint samples on representative substrates. Resubmit samples until approval is
granted. After approval is obtained, divide one approved sample into four equal sized
pieces and distribute to:
.1 Consultant: One piece
.2 Contractor: One piece
.3 Site: One piece
.4 This Section: One piece
.2 Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door;
construction details; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data:
.1 Dimensions and location of cut-outs, mortises, glazing and holes for hardware.
.2 Factory finish requirements.
.3 Jointing, fastening and related items.
.3 Provide maintenance data for cleaning and maintenance of wood painted doors, frames and
transom panels for incorporation into the Airport Authority’s operation and maintenance
manuals.

.1 Package doors and transoms individually in cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors and
transoms in plastic sheeting.
.2 Wrap bundles of frames in plastic sheeting.
.3 Ensure complete protection of edges and finishes during shipment to the job site.
.4 Mark each door and transom on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop
Drawings.
.5 Do not deliver doors until conditions are suitable and doors are actually required for installation.
.6 Store doors in a dry place; off floor; free from extremes of temperature; properly stacked and
protected according to manufacturer's and the Architectural Woodwork Manufacturer's
Association directions.

.1 Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install work until building is enclosed, wet work is
complete and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at
occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
1.9 WARRANTY
.1 Furnish the Owner with a two (2) year company’s Maintenance Bond, to the full value of the
Wood Doors subcontract, certifying that the Wood Doors have been manufactured and installed
in accordance with the standards incorporated in the AWMAC QSI Manual (Latest Edition).

OPENINGS PAGE 3
.2 The Guarantee shall cover replacing and refinishing to make good defects in wood doors due to
faulty workmanship or defective materials, which appear during a two (2) year period following
the date of Substantial Performance of the Contract.
1.10 INSPECTION
.1 Manufacture and install wood doors to the specified AWMAC QSI. Wood doors shall be subject
to an inspection at the plant and site by an appointed inspector, approved by the local chapter
of AWMAC.
.2 Replace any work, which does not meet AWMAC QSI as specified, at no additional costs to the
Owner and to the satisfaction of the Consultant and the inspector.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 INTERIOR DOORS

.1 Interior doors, frames to be flush panel solid core lumber on particle board. Doors to be
minimum 45mm thick, height and width to suit openings. Thickness and profile of frames refer to
drawings. Tempered hardboard with face suitable for paint finish for doors specified to be
painted in Door Schedule. Door Stiles and rails hardwood to AWMAC Custom grade, edge
detail #1.
.2 Particleboard: CAN3-0188.1, extruded particle board, minimum density 448 kg/cu.m.
.3 Medium Density Fibreboard: medite 2, Premium grade, minimum density 768 kg/cu.m.
.4 Crossbanding: 1.6 mm thick hardwood.
.5 Door Edge: Minimum 12 mm thick solid member, one piece full length.
.6 Adhesive: Low VOC, waterproof type, suitable for specific end use.
2.2 FABRICATION
.1 General:
.1 Provide solid wood blocking in doors to suit application of surface applied finish
hardware.
.2 Except where hardware cannot be surface attached and is designed for through bolting
only, fasten all hardware to solid wood.
.2 Doors:
.1 Unless otherwise noted, all Painted Doors to be Solid Core: Particleboard core, 5 ply
construction, full length bonded to core; door edge bonded. AWI/AWMAC QSI No. 1
edge. Laminate cross bandings to core, stiles, rails and door edges.
.2 Provide solid wood blocking in doors to suit application of surface applied finish
hardware.
.3 Except where hardware cannot be surface attached and is designed for through bolting only,
fasten all hardware to solid wood.
.4 Cut doors out for door hardware. Obtain approved copy of Door Hardware Schedule and
perform all necessary cuttings in accordance with schedule. Obtain necessary templates
required for hardware.
3.0 EXECUTION

OPENINGS PAGE 4
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Specified in Section 06 20 00.
.2 Provide even margins between doors and jambs and doors and finished floor as follows:
.1 Hinge Side: 3 mm
.2 Latch side and head: 3 mm
.3 Between meeting edges of pairs of doors: 3 mm
.4 Finished floor: 12 mm
3.2. PREPARATION
.1 This contractor shall include for preparation/installation of hardware.
3.3 PROTECTION
.1 Protect doors and frames on site from construction damage until space is ready to be turned
over.

RICHMOND, BC ALUMINIUM STOREFRONTS
OPENINGS PAGE 1
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DOCUMENTS
.1 This Section of the Specification forms part of the Contract Documents and is to be read,

.1 Glazed aluminum sliding door and aluminum storefront

1.4 REFERENCES
.1 CAN2-12.1-M76 - Glass, Safety, Tempered or Laminated
.2 CAN2-12.1-M76 - Glass, Polished Plate or Float, Flat, Clear.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
.1 Provide a sample of section of glazing frame 300mm long, complete with glazing gaskets in
actual material, colour and finish.
.2 Submit shop drawings for review in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.3 Shop drawings shall be prepared and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the
province of British Columbia to indicate that the assembly will withstand all design loads
imposed upon it, and that connections to building structure will transfer all loads, reactions and
forces to the structure.
.4 Clearly detail profiles, construction, assembly, installation for all conditions, also flashing,
caulking, sealing, provision for thermal movement, deflection and glazing, anchorage
attachment to building structure, method of adjustment.

.1 Storefronts, glass, glazing and sealants shall be fabricated and installed by companies and
skilled workers having a minimum of five (5) years proven experience in the completion of this
type of installation for a comparable project.

.1 Deliver, handle and store units in accordance with the manufacturer's directions.
.2 Store units at site on raised wood pallets protected from the elements and corrosive materials.
Do not remove from crates or other protective covering until ready for installation.
.3 Store prefabricated frame assemblies blocked off the ground in an approved manner to prevent
warping, twisting, undue strain on assembly or physical abuse and damage.
.4 Match mark all components for field assembly.
.5 Glass units must be stored with a positive bottom support at right angles to the plane of the
glass.
1.8 WARRANTY
.1 Provide written warranty issued in the name of the Owner and signed jointly by the Contractor
and installer stating that the storefront assembly is warranted to perform in accordance with
design and performance requirements specified under clauses 1.5 for a period of not less than
_________________________________________________________________________________________
OPENINGS PAGE 2
five (5) years from date of Substantial Performance.
.2 Finish: Against non-uniform fading during warranty period to extent that adjacent members
have a colour range greater than originally accepted colour range samples approved by the
Consultant; pitting or other type of corrosion resulting from natural elements in local
atmosphere; discolouration, staining or streaking of the surface.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1 General: All materials used in this contract shall be of the highest quality as manufactured by
nationally recognized manufacturers and of the type indicated on the drawings and in these
specifications.
.2 Steel Shapes: To CAN3-G40.21-M81, Grade 300W.
.3 Alumininum Members: Extruded from 6063-T54 Alloy free from defects impairing strength,
appearance and durability.
.4 Fastenings: Stainless steel or other corrosion resistant material.
2.2 FRAMING SYSTEM

.1 Construct frames of aluminum extrusions with minimum wall thickness to meet specified performance
requirements.
.2 Interior frame members 114.3 x 44.5 mm nominal size, for interior centre glazing.
.3 Interior storefront: Clear anodic finish: to designation AA- M12C22A41; frame to include continuous
acoustic rubber gasket all 3 sides.
.4 Provided finished aluminum cap to all exposed frame edge.
.5 Approved product: Kawneer Trifab 400 series, or approved equal.
2.3 INTERIOR SLIDING DOORS

.1 Multi-leaf Sliding door:
.1 Aluminum frame, horizontally sliding glass doors with sliding door surface mount sill
track.
.2 Extrusion to be aluminum frame 6063 or 6060 alloy, T5 temper.
.3 corner of main perimeter frame shall be mechanically fastened, and sealed. The frame
interlock bar shall be mechanically joined to form an interlock for the ventilator.
.4 Sliding panel (ventilator) corners to be milled, butt-joined and mechanically joined.
Ventilator shall be equipped and ajustable, ball-bearing steel wheels.
.5 Finish to be clear anodized
.6 Surface mount D Pull handle on outside; recess handle on inside.
.7 Door gasket and door bottom to create acoustic seal
.8 MS 1850S dead bolt.
.9 Acceptable manufacturer: Aluminex SD260 Medium Stile, or approved
equal.
2.5 FASTENERS
.1 In accordance with AAMA Guide Specification Manual to suit base metals in which they occur.
Where exposed, colour coded to match surface in which they occur.
_________________________________________________________________________________________
OPENINGS PAGE 3
2.6 SEALANT
.1 In accordance with CBD #96.
.2 Refer to Section 07 92 00.
2.7 GLAZING MATERIALS

.1 Interior Glazing Gaskets: Dense, EPDM Durometer 50 (Shore A) to ASTM C509, keyed into
stops and frames.
.2 Glass Setting Blocks: Compatible with glass edge seals, with a durometer hardness of 80 of
ASTM D2240.
.3 Glazing (GL) and Engineered Resin Panel (RP): Refer to Section 08 80 00 Glazing.
.4 Aluminium Faced Insulated Panel (AP): Consist of Expanded Polystyrene core (EPS) with 2.0
pcf density bonded on both sides to thermoplastic stabilizers of Exterior-Grade Hardboard with
finished sheets of clear anodized aluminum (0.015 inch nominal or thicker and 0.0125 inch
nominal backer face) on each face manufactured in a laminated batch process using
adhesive(s) between dissimilar materials. Total thickness to be 1 inch / R-3.3 (EPS).
Acceptable product: Thermolite insulated glazing panels as manufactured by Laminators Inc
2.8 FINISHES
.1 Clear Anodized Aluminum Finish to Aluminum Association AA-M12C22A31.
2.9 FABRICATION
.1 Fabricate members to shapes, sizes and configurations as shown on the drawings in
accordance with reviewed shop drawings.
.2 All materials to be used shall be corrosion resistant, nonstaining, non-bleeding and compatible
with adjoining material.
.3 Fabricate all parts and assemblies to AAMA standards for aluminum framing.
.4 Fabricate units in shop in accordance with the manufacturer's assembly details and reviewed
shop drawings. Build square, true, accurate to size, free from defects detrimental to
appearance and performance.
.5 Machine all joints, corners, mitres, accurately to hairline joints. Provide interior reinforcing at
connections of hollow assemblies to structural supports. Mechanical fasteners shall be hidden
in completed installation. Join corners with metal corners sleeves and/or mitre and weld
continuously along entire length of contact.
.6 Fabricate units in largest practical size for handling, transport and installation. Trial assemble all
large units in shop and match-mark for field assembly.
.7 Build in expansion joints and deflection channels as required.
.8 Reinforce vertical and horizontal sections as required to ensure adequate strength to meet
performance requirements and support dead load of system.
.9 Provide, install all alignment bars, brackets, clips, tees, inserts, splice plates, fastenings,
anchors, etc., for fabrication and assembly. Ship loose those items required for field installation.
_________________________________________________________________________________________
OPENINGS PAGE 4
.10 Provide all caps, closures, trim, flashings as required to complete field installations.
2.10 ATTACHMENTS
.1 Door Sweep: Standard components as suplied by manufacturer.
.2 Weather stripping: acoustic seal around 3 sisdes of aluminum storefront as supplied by

manufacturer.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
.1 Inspect the work of other sections upon which the work of this section depends. Proceed only
after deficiencies, if any, in the work of other sections have been corrected.
.2 Ensure that all anchor and setting or installing assemblies or components supplied by the trade
for installation by others are properly located and correctly set in place.
3.2 PREPARATION
.1 Obtain all dimensions affecting the work of this section from the job site.
.2 Provide data, dimensions and components, anchors and assemblies to be installed by others in
proper time for installation.
.3 Apply barrier coating to aluminum surfaces in contact with dissimilar metals and cementitious
materials to minimum 0.7 mm (30 mils) dry film thickness.
3.3 ERECTION
.1 Erect and secure assemblies aligned plumb and square, free from warp, twist or superimposed
loads, installed to achieve weathertight installation with air/thermal barrier seal to full system.
.2 Erect in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and reviewed shop
drawings.
.3 All anchors and fitments shall be concealed. Exposed heads of fasteners not permitted unless
specified otherwise. All joints in exposed work shall be flush hairline butt joints.
.4 Use anchors that will permit sufficient adjustment for accurate alignment.
.5 Build-in and provide any supplementary reinforcing and bracing required for assembly loads
and deflections.
.6 Build in anchors and other items provided by other trades for incorporation into window system.
.7 Secure work adequately to structure in a manner not restricting thermal and wind movement.
Touch-up any damaged finish.
.8 Correctly locate and install flashings, deflectors and weep holes to ensure proper drainage of
moisture to exterior.
.9 Isolate aluminum surfaces from adjacent dissimilar materials and metals with coating of
bituminous paint.
.10 Ensure that all stops, gaskets, splines, seals, etc., are perfectly aligned and ready to receive
glazing as specified herein.
_________________________________________________________________________________________
OPENINGS PAGE 5

.1 At completion of work of this section and continuously as work proceeds, remove all surplus
materials, debris and scrap.
.2 At completion of work, remove all protective surface covering film and wrappings. Clean all
glass panels, frames using mild soap or other cleaning agent approved by the aluminum
storefront manufacturer.
.3 Remove all excess glazing or joint sealing materials from exposed surfaces. Clean and polish
glass.
.4 Adjust hardware for proper function.
_________________________________________________________________________________________
RICHMOND, BC DOOR HARDWARE
OPENINGS PAGE 1
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED

.1 Furnish all labor, material, equipment and services necessary for the supply to the site, of the
Finish Hardware as indicated on the drawings, schedules and specified herein.
.2 Include also the furnishing of all templates and schedules required by manufacturers of hollow
metal doors and pressed steel frames and other such work to enable the manufacturers to make
proper provisions in their work to receive the Finish Hardware.
.3 All Finish Hardware to made to conform to A.N.S.I. standard dimensions.
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS


.1 Standards:
In all cases where C.G.S.B. (Canadian Government Specifications Board), C.S.A (Canadian
Standards association), ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials), or other standards
are quoted, this shall be taken to mean the latest edition of that particular standard including all
revisions.
.2 Materials shall conform to those as specified, in brand and quality, unless otherwise approved in
writing by the Consultant. No claim as to their unsuitability or unavailability or this
Subcontractor's unwillingness to use the same, will be considered, unless such claims are made
in writing prior to the closing of bids.
.3 Qualifications:
Hardware supplier shall be an established contract builders hardware firm who shall have in his
employ one or more A.H.C. (Architectural Hardware Consultant) who are members in good
standing of the DHI (Door and Hardware Institute) and who will be responsible for the complete
hardware contract.
.4 Keying Conference: Conduct conference to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section

"Project Meetings." Keying conference to incorporate the following criteria into the final keying
schedule document:
.1 Function of building, purpose of each area and degree of security required.
.2 Plans for existing and future key system expansion.
.3 Requirements for key control storage and software.
.4 Installation of permanent keys, cylinder cores and software.
.5 Address and requirements for delivery of keys.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1 Samples:
If required by the consultant, a returnable sample of each item of proposed hardware shall be
submitted for approval not later than ten (10) days after requested. Samples to be properly
tagged, indicating name of supplier, name of manufacturer, item number, intended function and
location. Installed item to equal in all respects to approved samples.
.2 Submit the following to Consultant:

OPENINGS PAGE 2
.1 A detailed hardware schedule for the Consultant's approval within two (2) weeks of being
awarded this contract.
.2 Indicate manufacturer's name and article number in complete detail including active
hands of pairs of doors, degree of opening and other information pertinent to the
intended function of the door and frame details.
.3 In addition to hardware, the schedule shall include, for each heading or group of doors,
Consultant's door reference number as per Door Schedule, the room designations, door
size and material and label requirements.
.4 Keying Schedule: After a keying meeting with the owner has taken place prepare a
separate keying schedule detailing final instructions. Submit the keying schedule in
electronic format. Include keying system explanation, door numbers, key set symbols,
hardware set numbers and special instructions. Owner must approve submitted keying
schedule prior to the ordering of permanent cylinders/cores.
.5 Provide "as-installed" hardware list, including name of supplier, to the Consultant upon
substantial performance of the contract.
.6 List to be complete with key to explain manufacturer's names, abbreviations and codes.
.7 Templates shall not be issued or material supplied until the hardware list has been
approved. Provide additional copies of the hardware lists to the Consultant on request.
1.5 COMPLIANCE WITH REGULATIONS

.1 The hardware supplier shall check the listed hardware for compliance with local fire codes and
regulations regarding required hardware for fire doors and report to the Consultant, any
discrepancies or omission in the listed hardware in this respect. Failure to report any such
discrepancies of omission render supplier responsible for cost of rectification.
1.6 CODES AND REFERENCES

.1 Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
.1 CSA B651-18 – Accessible design for the built environment
.2 BCBC - BC Building Code.
.3 NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
.4 NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.
.5 NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.
.6 NFPA 105 - Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies.
.7 UL/ULC and CSA C22.2 - Standards for Automatic Door Operators Used on Fire and
Smoke Barrier Doors and Systems of Doors.

.1 Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up and shelving for door hardware
delivered to Project site. Do not store electronic access control hardware, software or
accessories at Project site without prior authorization.
.2 Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware
Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.
.3 Deliver, as applicable, permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access control credentials, software
and related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package service.
Instructions for delivery to the Owner shall be established at the "Keying Conference".
1.8 TEMPLATES
.1 Templates shall be supplied by the hardware supplier to all trades requiring them.
1.9 GUARANTEE
.1 All Finish Hardware, except door closers shall be guaranteed by the hardware manufacturer, by
written certification, for a period of one (1) year from certified date of substantial performance
against any defects in the design, materials, finish, function and workmanship and that any

OPENINGS PAGE 3
defects will be made good by the manufacturer at no additional cost to the owner. A similar
guarantee for a ten (10) year period shall be provided for door closers by the manufacturer.
.2 Maintenance Service: Submit for Owner’s consideration maintenance service agreement for
electronic products installed.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE

.1 General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in Door Hardware
Sets and each referenced section that products are to be supplied under.
.2 Designations: Requirements for quantity, item, size, finish or color, grade, function, and other
distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Sets at
the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:
.1 Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for
each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing requirements.
Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule.
.3 Substitutions: Requests for substitution and product approval for inclusive mechanical and
electromechanical door hardware in compliance with the specifications must be submitted in
writing and in accordance with the procedures and time frames outlined in Division 01,
Substitution Procedures. Approval of requests is at the discretion of the architect, owner, and
their designated consultants.
2.2 HANGING DEVICES

.1 Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1 butt hinges with number of hinge knuckles and other options as
specified in the Door Hardware Sets.
.1 Quantity: Provide the following hinge quantity:
.1 Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches.
.2 Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches.
.2 Hinge Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths sized
for door thickness and clearances required:
.1 Widths up to 3’0”: 4-1/2” standard or heavy weight as specified.
.3 Hinge Weight and Base Material: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:
.1 Exterior Doors: Heavy weight, non-ferrous, ball bearing or oil impregnated
bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate standard weight.
.2 Interior Doors: Standard weight, steel, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing
hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate heavy weight.
.4 Hinge Options: Comply with the following:
.1 Non-removable Pins: With the exception of electric through wire hinges, provide
set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin,
prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for the all out-swinging lockable
doors.
.2 Continuous Geared Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.26 Grade 1-600 continuous geared hinge. with
minimum 0.120-inch thick extruded 6063-T6 aluminum alloy hinge leaves and a minimum
overall width of 4 inches. Hinges are non-handed, reversible and fabricated to template screw
locations. Factory trim hinges to suit door height and prepare for electrical cut-outs.
.1 Manufacturers:
.1 Pemko (PE).
.3 Continuous Double-acting Hinges. ANSI/BHMA A156.26 Grade 1-600 Certified continuous

hinges. Hinges shall be non-handed and allow the door to swing up to 100 degrees in either
direction. Where required provide electrified transfer hinges with Molex™ standardized plug
OPENINGS PAGE 4
connectors and sufficient number of concealed wires (up to 12) to accommodate the electrified
functions as specified. Connectors plug directly to through-door wiring harnesses for connection
to electric locking devices and power supplies. Wire nut connections are not acceptable.
.1 Manufacturers:
.1 Markar Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (MR) - DSH
Series.
.2 Pemko (PE) – DSH Series.
2.3 POWER TRANSFER DEVICES

.1 Electrified Quick Connect Transfer Hinges: Provide electrified transfer hinges with Molex™
standardized plug connectors and sufficient number of concealed wires (up to 12) to
accommodate the electrified functions specified in the Door Hardware Sets with a 1-year
warranty. Connectors plug directly to through-door wiring harnesses for connection to electric
locking devices and power supplies. Wire nut connections are not acceptable.
.1 Manufacturers:
.1 McKinney (MK) - QC (# wires) Option.
.2 Electric Door Wire Harnesses: Provide electric/data transfer wiring harnesses with standardized
plug connectors to accommodate up to twelve (12) wires. Connectors plug directly to through-
door wiring harnesses for connection to electric locking devices and power supplies. Provide
sufficient number and type of concealed wires to accommodate electric function of specified
hardware. Provide a connector for through-door electronic locking devices and from hinge to
junction box above the opening. Wire nut connections are not acceptable. Determine the length
required for each electrified hardware component for the door type, size and construction,
minimum of two per electrified opening.
.1 Manufacturers:
.1 McKinney (MK) - QC-C Series.
2.4 CYLINDERS AND KEYING

.1 General: Cylinder manufacturer to have minimum (10) years experience designing secured
master key systems and have on record a published security keying system policy.
.2 Source Limitations: Obtain each type of keyed cylinder and keys from the same source
manufacturer as locksets and exit devices, unless otherwise indicated.
.3 Cylinder Types: Original manufacturer cylinders able to supply the following cylinder formats
and types:
.1 Threaded mortise cylinders with rings and cams to suit hardware application.
.2 Rim cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised trim
ring.
.3 Bored or cylindrical lock cylinders with tailpieces as required to suit locks.
.4 Mortise and rim cylinder collars to be solid and recessed to allow the cylinder face to be
flush and be free spinning with matching finishes.
.5 Keyway: Manufacturer’s Standard.
.4 Patented Cylinders: ANSI/BHMA A156.5, Grade 1 Certified Products Directory (CPD) listed
cylinders employing a utility patented and restricted keyway requiring the use of a patented key.
Cylinders are to be protected from unauthorized manufacture and distribution by manufacturer’s
United States patents. Cylinders are to be factory keyed with owner having the ability for on-site
original key cutting.
.1 Patented key systems shall not be established with products that have an expired
patent. Expired systems shall only be specified and supplied to support existing
systems.
.2 Manufacturers:
.1 Sargent (SA) - Degree DG1.
OPENINGS PAGE 5
.2 No Substitution.
.5 Keying System: Each type of lock and cylinders to be factory keyed.

.1 Supplier shall conduct a "Keying Conference" to define and document keying system
instructions and requirements.
.2 Furnish factory cut, nickel-silver large bow permanently inscribed with a visual key
control number as directed by Owner.
.3 New System: Key locks to a new key system as directed by the Owner.
.6 Key Quantity: Provide the following minimum number of keys:

.1 Change Keys per Cylinder: Two (2)
.2 Master Keys (per Master Key Level/Group): Five (5)
.3 Construction Keys (where required): Ten (10)
.7 Construction Keying: Provide construction master keyed cylinders.
.8 Key Registration List (Bitting List):

.1 Provide keying transcript list to Owner's representative in the proper format for
importing into key control software.
.2 Provide transcript list in writing or electronic file as directed by the Owner.
2.5 LOCK AND LATCH STRIKES

.1 Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with
curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise
indicated, and as follows:
.1 Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by
manufacturer.
.2 Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim.
.3 Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Provide manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for
aluminum framing.
.4 Double-lipped strikes: For locks at double acting doors. Furnish with retractable stop for
rescue hardware applications.
.2 Standards: Comply with the following:

.1 Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13.
.2 Strikes for Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2.
.3 Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA A156.36.
.4 Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16.
2.6 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHING DEVICES

.1 Mortise Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.13, Series 1000, Operational
Grade 1 Certified Products Directory (CPD) listed. Locksets are to be manufactured with a
corrosion resistant steel case and be field-reversible for handing without disassembly of the lock
body.
.1 Where specified, provide status indicators with highly reflective color and wording for
“locked/unlocked” or “vacant/occupied” with custom wording options if required.
Indicator to be located above the cylinder with the inside thumb-turn not blocking the
visibility of the indicator status. Indicator window size to be a minimum of 2.1” x 0.6”
with a curved design allowing a 180 degree viewing angle with protective covering to
prevent tampering.
.2 Provide mortise lock bodies functionally compatible with a rose-less lever trim option.
.3 Manufacturers:
.1 Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 8200 Series.

OPENINGS PAGE 6
2.7 ELECTRIC STRIKES

.1 Standard Electric Strikes: Electric strikes conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.31, Grade 1, for use
on non-rated or fire rated openings. Strikes shall be of stainless steel construction tested to a
minimum of 1500 pounds of static strength and 70 foot-pounds of dynamic strength with a
minimum endurance of 1 million operating cycles. Provide strikes with 12 or 24 VDC capability,
fail-secure unless otherwise specified. Where specified provide latchbolt and latchbolt strike
monitoring indicating both the position of the latchbolt and locked condition of the strike.
.1 Manufacturers:
.1 HES (HS) – 1500C Series.
2.8 CONVENTIONAL EXIT DEVICES

.1 General Requirements: All exit devices specified herein shall meet or exceed the following
criteria:
.1 At doors not requiring a fire rating, provide devices complying with NFPA 101 and listed
and labeled for "Panic Hardware" according to UL305. Provide proper fasteners as
required by manufacturer including sex nuts and bolts at openings specified in the
Hardware Sets.
.2 Where exit devices are required on fire rated doors, provide devices complying with
NFPA 80 and with UL labeling indicating "Fire Exit Hardware". Provide devices with the
proper fasteners for installation as tested and listed by UL. Consult manufacturer’s
catalog and template book for specific requirements.
.3 Except on fire rated doors, provide exit devices with hex key dogging device to hold the
pushbar and latch in a retracted position. Provide optional keyed cylinder dogging on
devices where specified in Hardware Sets.
.4 Devices must fit flat against the door face with no gap that permits unauthorized
dogging of the push bar. The addition of filler strips is required in any case where the
door light extends behind the device as in a full glass configuration.
.5 Lever Operating Trim: Where exit devices require lever trim, furnish manufacturer's
heavy duty escutcheon trim with threaded studs for thru-bolts.
.1 Lock Trim Design: As indicated in Hardware Sets, provide finishes and designs
to match that of the specified locksets.
.2 Where function of exit device requires a cylinder, provide a cylinder (Rim or
Mortise) as specified in Hardware Sets.
.6 Vertical Rod Exit Devices: Where surface or concealed vertical rod exit devices are
used at interior openings, provide as less bottom rod (LBR) unless otherwise indicated.
Provide dust proof strikes where thermal pins are required to project into the floor.
.7 Narrow Stile Applications: At doors constructed with narrow stiles, or as specified in
Hardware Sets, provide devices designed for maximum 2” wide stiles.
.8 Dummy Push Bar: Nonfunctioning push bar matching functional push bar.
.9 Rail Sizing: Provide exit device rails factory sized for proper door width application.
.10 Through Bolt Installation: For exit devices and trim as indicated in Door Hardware Sets.
.2 Conventional Push Rail Exit Devices (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.3, Grade 1 Certified
Products Directory (CPD) listed panic and fire exit hardware devices furnished in the functions
specified in the Hardware Sets. Exit device latch to be stainless steel, pullman type, with
deadlock feature.
.1 Manufacturers:
2.9 ELECTROMECHANICAL EXIT DEVICES

.1 Electromechanical Push Rail Exit Devices (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.3, Grade 1 Certified
Products Directory (CPD) listed panic and fire exit hardware devices subject to same
compliance standards and requirements as mechanical exit devices. Electrified exit devices to
be of type and design as specified below and in the hardware sets.

OPENINGS PAGE 7
.1 Energy Efficient Design: Provide devices which have a holding current draw of 15mA
maximum, and can operate on either 12 or 24 volts. Locks are to be field configurable
for fail safe or fail secure operation.
.2 Where conventional power supplies are not sufficient, include any specific controllers
required to provide the proper inrush current.
.3 Motorized Electric Latch Retraction: Devices with an electric latch retraction feature
must use motors which have a maximum current draw of 600mA. Solenoid driven latch
retraction is not acceptable.
.4 Manufacturers:
2.10 DOOR CLOSERS

.1 All door closers specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria:
.1 General: Door closers to be from one manufacturer, matching in design and style, with
the same type door preparations and templates regardless of application or spring size.
Closers to be non-handed with full sized covers.
.2 Standards: Closers to comply with UL-10C for Positive Pressure Fire Test and be U.L.
listed for use of fire rated doors.
.3 Size of Units: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for sizing of door
closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of
use. Where closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the Americans
with Disabilities Act, provide units complying with ANSI ICC/A117.1.
.4 Closer Arms: Provide heavy duty, forged steel closer arms unless otherwise indicated in
Hardware Sets.
.5 Closers shall not be installed on exterior or corridor side of doors; where possible install
closers on door for optimum aesthetics.
.6 Closer Accessories: Provide door closer accessories including custom templates,
special mounting brackets, spacers and drop plates as required for proper installation.
Provide through-bolt and security type fasteners as specified in the hardware sets.
.2 Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Grade 1 Certified Products
Directory (CPD) listed surface mounted, heavy duty door closers with complete spring power
adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; and fully operational adjustable according to door size, frequency of
use, and opening force. Closers to be rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron or aluminum
alloy body construction, with adjustable backcheck and separate non-critical valves for closing
sweep and latch speed control. Provide non-handed units standard.
.1 Manufacturers:
2.11 ELECTROMECHANICAL DOOR OPERATORS

.1 General: Provide low energy operators of size recommended by manufacturer for door size,
weight, and movement; for condition of exposure; and for compliance with UL 325. Coordinate
operator mechanisms with door operation, hinges, and activation devices.
.1 Fire-Rated Doors: Provide door operators for fire-rated door assemblies that comply
with NFPA 80 for fire-rated door components and are listed and labeled by a qualified
testing agency.
.2 Standard: Conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.19.
.3 Performance Requirements:
.1 Opening Force if Power Fails: Not more than 15 lbf required to release a latch if
provided, not more than 30 lbf required to manually set door in motion, and not more
than 15 lbf required to fully open door.
.2 Entrapment Protection: Not more than 15 lbf required to prevent stopped door from
closing or opening.
OPENINGS PAGE 8
.4 Configuration: Surface mounted or in-ground as required. Door operators to control single

swinging and pair of swinging doors.
.5 Operation: Power opening and spring closing operation capable of meeting ANSI A117.1
accessibility guideline. Provide time delay for door to remain open before initiating closing cycle
as required by ANSI/BHMA A156.19.
.6 Features: Operator units to have full feature adjustments for door opening and closing force and
speed, backcheck, motor assist acceleration from 0 to 30 seconds, time delay, vestibule
interface delay, obstruction recycle, and hold open time from 0 up to 30 seconds.
.7 Provide outputs and relays on board the operator to allow for coordination of exit device latch
retraction, electric strikes, magnetic locks, card readers, safety and motion sensors and
specified auxiliary contacts.
.8 Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard, fabricated from aluminum with

nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
.9 Wireless Interface: Operator units shall have a wireless interface via a mobile device for ease of
installation and setup.
.10 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
.1 Ditec HA9LP
2.12 ARCHITECTURAL SEALS

.1 General: Thresholds, weatherstripping, and gasket seals to be of type and design as specified
below or in the Hardware Sets. Provide continuous weatherstrip gasketing on exterior doors and
provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated. At exterior
applications provide non-corrosive fasteners and elsewhere where indicated.
.2 Smoke Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by
a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke control
ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784.
.1 Provide smoke labeled perimeter gasketing at all smoke labeled openings.
.3 Fire Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings
indicated, based on testing according to UL-10C.
.1 Provide intumescent seals as indicated to meet UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure
Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, and NPFA 252, Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door
Assemblies.
.4 Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting
agency, for sound ratings indicated.
.5 Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily
replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.
.6 Manufacturers:
.1 Pemko (PE).
2.13 ELECTRONIC ACCESSORIES

.1 Switching Power Supplies: Provide power supplies with either single or dual voltage
configurations at 12 or 24VDC. Power supplies shall have battery backup function with an
OPENINGS PAGE 9
integrated battery charging circuit and shall provide capability for power distribution, direct lock
control and Fire Alarm Interface (FAI) through add on modules. Power supplies shall be
expandable up to 16 individually protected outputs. Output modules shall provide individually
protected, continuous outputs and/or individually protected, relay controlled outputs.
.1 Provide the least number of units, at the appropriate amperage level, sufficient to
exceed the required total draw for the specified electrified hardware and access control
equipment.
.2 Manufacturers:
.1 Securitron (SU) - AQD Series.
2.14 FABRICATION
.1 Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally
prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to
manufacturers recognized installation standards for application intended.
2.15 FINISHES
.1 Standard: Designations used in the Hardware Sets and elsewhere indicate hardware finishes
complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.18, including coordination with traditional U.S. finishes
indicated by certain manufacturers for their products.
.2 Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness,
and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified
by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware.
.3 Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,

temporary protective covering before shipping.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
.1 Verification of conditions: Examine doors, frames, related items and conditions under which
Work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper and or timely completion.
.1 Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 HARDWARE LOCATIONS

.1 Mount hardware units at heights indicated in the following publications except as specifically
indicated or required to comply with the governing regulations.
.1 Recommended Locations for Builder’s Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames,
by the Door and Hardware Institute (DHI).
.2 Recommended locations for Architectural Hardware for flush wood doors (DHI).
.3 WDMA Industry Standard I.S.-1A-04, Industry Standard for Architectural wood flush
doors.
3.3 INSTALLATION
.1 Install each hardware item per manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Do not install
surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. Set units level,
plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary
for proper installation and operation.
.2 Conform to local governing agency security ordinance.
.3 Install Conforming to ICC/ANSI A117.1 Accessible and Usable Building and Facilities.
.1 Adjust door closer sweep periods so that from the open position of 70 degrees, the door
will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from the latch, measured to the
landing side of the door.
OPENINGS PAGE 10
.4 Installed hardware using the manufacturers fasteners provided. Drill and tap all screw holes
located in metallic materials. Do not use “Riv-Nuts” or similar products.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL AND FINAL ADJUSTMENT

.1 Contractor/Installers, Field Services: After installation is complete, contractor shall inspect the
completed door openings on site to verify installation of hardware is complete and properly
adjusted, in accordance with both the Contract Documents and final shop drawings.
.1 Check and adjust closers to ensure proper operation.
.2 Check latchset, lockset, and exit devices are properly installed and adjusted to ensure
proper operation.
.1 Verify levers are free from binding.
.2 Ensure latchbolts and dead bolts are engaged into strike and hardware is
functioning.
.3 Report findings, in writing, to architect indicating that all hardware is installed and
functioning properly. Include recommendations outlining corrective actions for
improperly functioning hardware if required.
3.5 SCHEDULE OF FINISH HARDWARE
Opening List
Opening Hdw Set Fire Rating Door Material Frame Material
9000 1.0 20 Hollow Metal Pressed Steel
9001B 3.0 Hollow Metal Pressed Steel
9001C 3.0 Hollow Metal Pressed Steel
9001D 3.0 Hollow Metal Pressed Steel
9002 4.0 Aluminum Aluminum
9003 5.0 Hollow Metal Pressed Steel
9011 6.0 Wood Pressed Steel
9028A 17.0 Wood Pressed Steel
9028B 13.0 20 Wood Pressed Steel

OPENINGS PAGE 11
C9001 8.0 Hollow Metal Pressed Steel

9502B 20.0 Wood Pressed Steel
9509 12.0 Lead Lined Lead Lined
Hollow Metal Metal
9510B 20.0 Wood Pressed Steel
9521B 21.0 Lead Lined Lead Lined
Hollow Metal Metal
9522B 14.0 Existing Existing
C9503 8.0 Hollow Metal Pressed Steel
C9505 15.0 20 Hollow Metal Pressed Steel
Hardware List
Mfg Description Product Number Finish

HS Electric Strike 1500C 630
Strike Latch Guard 150
OPENINGS PAGE 12
MK ElectroLynx Harness QC-C006

ElectroLynx Harness QC-C1500
ElectroLynx Harness QC-C300
Hinge, Full Mortise H TA714 4-1/2" x 4" US26D
Hinge, Full Mortise H TA714 QC12 4-1/2" x 4" US26D
Hinge, Full Mortise TA714 4-1/2" x 4" US26D
OT Actuator LPR36HW
ADO HA9LP
Card Reader Card Readers supplied and installed
by others
Ditec Hands Free Actuators 10MS21HR1
Ditec Push Actuators 10PMR1
Ditec Washroom Kit W6-147
Door Viewer Peek-O 595
Existing Re use existing hardware and add
Astragal as indicated.
Hardware Balance of hardware supplied
complete by door supplier
PE Astragal 357SS 84"
Astragal 357SS 96"
Door Bottom 411APKL 36"
Gasketing 319CN
Gasketing S773W 17'
Lead Lined Astragal 357SS x 84" c/w Lead lined option
Meeting Stiles 18062CNB x 7 ft
Sweep 18062CNB
Threshold 151A
Threshold 271A
RF Intermediate Pivot M19 626
Pivot Set 117-1/2 626
Surf Overhead Stop 10-436 630
RO Coordinator 2672 US28
Flush Bolt 2905 US26D
Flush Bolt 555 US26D
Kickplates K1050 x 10" x 2"LDW
Wall Stop 406 US26D
SA Classroom Lock DG1 21 WBS 8237 LNB US26D
Concealed Vert Rod Exit 12 55 56 MD8606 ETJ US32D
Concealed Vert Rod Exit, Exit 12 MD8610 EO US32D
Only

OPENINGS PAGE 13
Fail Safe Lock V20 74 8270-24V LNB US26D

Mortise Cylinder 41 US32D
Office/Entry Lock DG1 21 WBS 8205 LNB US26D
Passage Latch WBS 8215 LNB US26D
Privacy Lock WBS V20 8265 LNB US26D
Storeroom/Closet Lock DG1 21 WBS 8204 LNB US26D
Surface Closer 351 UO EN
Surface Closer DA 351 UO EN
SU Power Distribution Board PDB-1R
Power Supply AQD2
Push Button PB3
Manufacturer List
Code Name
FL Fleming Baron O
HS HES
MK McKinney
OT Other
PE Pemko
RF Rixson
RO Rockwood
SA SARGENT
SU Securitron
Option List
Code Description
H Hospital Tip (regular weight plain bearing, oil
impregnated or ball bearing)
QC12 Swing clear hinge: Quick Connect - Concealed Circuit (12
Wires)
21 Sargent Construction Key System (lost ball) Standard on
new systems est. since 5/1/96
DG1 Patented key control
WBS Wrought Box Strike
12 UL Fire Label Exit Devices - N/A with AD8600
(7000,8300,8400,8500,8888,8600,8700,8700)
55 Signal switch in rail

OPENINGS PAGE 14
56 Remote Dogging/Latch Retraction (minimum Dr

width narrow 26" & wide 28")
74 Lock Case Wrapped in Lead (7800,8200,7900,4870)
V20 Single indicator outside-Vacant/Occupied-green/red,
only esc VN1, N/A w/L,E4 roses
DA Delayed Action (268,269,281,351,1431)
Finish List
Code Description
630 Satin Stainless Steel
US26D Satin Chromium
626 Satin Chrome
630 Satin Stainless
US28 Aluminum Clear Anodized
US26D Brass Satin Chrome Plated
US26D Satin Chromium Plated
US32D Satin Stainless Steel
EN Powder Coated to match US28
Hardware Sets
SET #1.0
Doors: 9000, 9500
7 Hinge, Full Mortise H TA714 4-1/2" x 4" US26D MK
1 Hinge, Full Mortise H TA714 QC12 4-1/2" x 4" US26D MK
1 Concealed Vert Rod Exit 12 55 56 MD8606 ETJ US32D SA
1 Concealed Vert Rod Exit, Exit Only 12 MD8610 EO US32D SA
1 Coordinator 2672 US28 RO
1 Surface Closer 351 UO EN SA
1 ADO HA9LP OT
1 Threshold 271A PE
1 Gasketing 319CN PE
2 Sweep 18062CNB PE
1 Astragal 357SS 96" PE
1 ElectroLynx Harness QC-C1500 MK
1 ElectroLynx Harness QC-C006 MK
2 Ditec Push Actuators 10PMR1 OT
2 Ditec Hands Free Actuators 10MS21HR1 OT
1 Card Reader Card Readers supplied and installed by OT
others

OPENINGS PAGE 15
2 Actuator LPR36HW OT
1 Push Button PB3 SU
1 Power Supply AQD2 SU
1 Power Distribution Board PDB-1R SU
NOTE: Active door may be left in unlock position by access control programming for operational hours.
Card reader is for after hours access, upon presenting valid credentials to reader will allow ADO to
sequence with exit device latch to retract allowing door to open.
During normal operational hours , exit device latch will be in retracted position allow ADO to open door
when actuator is depressed.
Push button to be located in remote location and to be used in emergency situations to lock door by
releasing exit device latch. Exit device is storeroom function locked and can be unlocked by use of key in
trim in case of power failure.
Wiring from junction box to devices by electrical. Wiring diagram supplied by hardware supplier. In case of
emergency lock can be opened by use of key.
Actuators may be disarmed by access control programming for after hours operation
SET #2.0
Doors: 9001
1 Storeroom/Closet Lock DG1 21 WBS 8204 LNB US26D SA
1 Electric Strike 1500C 630 HS
1 Strike Latch Guard 150 HS
1 Surface Closer 351 UO EN SA
1 Wall Stop 406 US26D RO
1 Threshold 271A PE
1 Sweep 18062CNB PE 1
1 Card Reader Card Readers supplied and OT others 1
installed by
NOTE: Note: Upon presenting valid credentials to reader electric strike will release allowing door to open.
Programming by access control, wiring to device by electrical.
SET #3.0
Doors: 9001B, 9001C, 9001D
1 Privacy Lock WBS V20 8265 LNB US26D SA
1 Surf Overhead Stop 10-436 630 RF
SET #4.0
Doors: 9002
2 Mortise Cylinder 41 US32D SA

OPENINGS PAGE 16
1 Hardware Balance of hardware supplied complete by OT

door supplier
SET #5.0
Doors: 9003, 9503
1 ADO HA9LP OT
1 Kickplates K1050 x 10" x 2"LDW RO
1 Ditec Washroom Kit W6-147 OT
NOTE: Note: Washroom Kit prevents entry when room is occupied, c/w advanced 3-relay logic module,
occupied indicator,dual function "push to lock", for restroom control, c/w door position switch. When
actuator is depressed ADO will sequence with electric strike to release allowing door to open. Wiring from
junction box to devices by electrical. Wiring diagram supplied by hardware supplier. In case of emergency
lock can be opened by use of key.
SET #6.0
Doors: 9011, 9013, 9015, 9017, 9019, 9021, 9023, 9024, 9025, 9027, 9029,
9522A, 9530, 9532, 9533, 9534, 9535, 9536, 9537, 9538
1 Classroom Lock DG1 21 WBS 8237 LNB US26D SA
1 Threshold 151A PE
1 Door Bottom 411APKL 36" PE
SET #7.0
Doors: 9026, 9544
OPENINGS PAGE 17

1 Surface Closer DA 351 UO EN SA
1 Gasketing S773W 17' PE
1 Sweep 18062CNB PE
others
SET #8.0
Doors: C9001, C9503
1 ADO HA9LP OT
1 Sweep 18062CNB PE 1
2 Ditec Push Actuators 10PMR1 OT 2
2 Ditec Hands Free Actuators 10MS21HR1 OT 1
1 Card Reader Card Readers supplied and installed by OT others 1
NOTE: Note: On waiting area side resenting valid credentials to reader will allow ADO to sequence with
electric strike and allow door to open. On corridor 01 side depressing actuator will allow ADO to sequence
with electric strike to release allowing door to open. Wiring from junction box to devices by electrical.
Wiring diagram supplied by hardware supplier. In case of emergency lock can be opened by use of key.
SET #9.0
Doors: 9501
SET #10.0
Doors: 9502A, 9510A
1 Classroom Lock DG1 21 WBS 8237 LNB US26D SA
1 Threshold 151A PE

OPENINGS PAGE 18
SET #11.0
Doors: 9507
SET #12.0
Doors: 9509
2 Pivot Set 117-1/2 626 RF

1 Intermediate Pivot ML19 626 RF
1 Electrified Inter Pivot EML19 626 RF
1 Flush Bolt 2905 US26D RO
1 Storeroom/Closet Lock DG1 21 WBS V20 74 8204 LNB US26D SA
1 Lead Lined Astragal 357SS x 84" c/w Lead lined option PE
1 Card Reader Card readers supplied and installed by OT
others
NOTE: Doors are lead lined, flush bolt pockets must be lead lined. Lock is electrified when power
is on outside lever is locked preventing entry. Lock body prefix indicated lock body to be lead lined, lock
also has visual indicator Occupied (Red) or Vacant (Green). Access control to program lock so that outside
lever is locked when X-Ray machine is turned on preventing entry. Lock is free on inside to exiting at any
time.
Door must be interlocked with x-ray room to prevent entry when in use, door must remained locked until
other door is closed. Programming by access control, wiring to devices by electrical. Upon presenting valid
credentials to reader electric strike will release allowing entry
SET #13.0
Doors: 9028B, 9521A, 9540, 9546

1 Threshold 151A PE

OPENINGS PAGE 19

others
SET #14.0
Doors: 9522B
1 Astragal 357SS 84" PE

1 Existing Re use existing hardware and add Astragal OT
as indicated.
SET #15.0
Doors: C9505
2 Flush Bolt 555 US26D RO
1 Threshold 271A PE
2 Meeting Stiles 18062CNB x 7 ft PE
2 Sweep 18062CNB PE
1 Door Viewer Peek-O 595 OT
SET #16.0
Doors: 9520
1 ADO HA9LP OT
1 Ditec Washroom Kit W6-147 OT
NOTE: Note: Washroom Kit prevents entry when room is occupied, c/w advanced 3-relay logic module,
occupied indicator,dual function "push to lock", for restroom control, c/w door position switch. When
actuator is depressed ADO will sequence with electric strike to release allowing door to open. Wiring from
junction box to devices by electrical. Wiring diagram supplied by hardware supplier. In case of emergency
lock can be opened by use of key.

OPENINGS PAGE 20
SET #17.0
Doors: 9028A

1 Passage Latch WBS 8215 LNB US26D SA
1 Threshold 151A PE
SET #18.0
Doors: 9040, 9531
1 Sweep 18062CNB PE
others
SET #19.0
Doors: 9527

1 Sweep 18062CNB PE
others
SET #20.0
Doors: 9502B, 9510B

OPENINGS PAGE 21

1 Threshold 151A PE
others
SET #21.0
Doors: 9521B
1 Pivot Set 117-1/2 626 RF
1 Intermediate Pivot M19 626 RF
1 Threshold 151A PE
1 Card Reader Card Readers supplied and OT
installed by others
NOTE: Door/ Frame are lead lined. Prefix 74 on lock indicates lead lined lock body.
NOTE: Electric strike enclosure to be lead lined by frame supplier
SET #22.0
Doors: 9545
3 Hinge, Full Mortise TA714 4-1/2" x 4" US26D MK

1 Threshold 151A PE
1 Sweep 18062CNB PE

RICHMOND, BC GLAZING
OPENINGS PAGE 1
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DOCUMENTS

.1 Glazing for interior doors and windows.
.2 Glazing film for glazing.
.3 Resin panel for interior windows, mobile partition screens, and framed partition screen.

.1 Joint Sealants Section 07 92 00
.2 Hollow Metal Doors & Frames Section 08 11 13
.4 Aluminium Storefronts Section 08 43 00
1.4 REFERENCES
.1 BC Building Code 2018
.2 Sealant insulating glass units to conform to the Insulating Glass Manufacturers’ Association of
Canada (IGMAC) standards.
.3 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)

.1 CAN/CGSB-12.1 – Tempered or Laminated Safety Glass.
.2 CAN/CGSB-12.2 – Flat, Clear Sheet Glass
.3 CAN/CGSB-12.3 – Flat, Clear Float Glass.
.4 CAN/CGSB-12.8 – Insulating Glass Units.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit samples and shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2 Submit glazing film sample for review.
.3 Submit maintenance and cleaning instructions for incorporation into maintenance manuals.
.4 Submit Resin Panel 8” x 8” size sample of each product types as specified.
1.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

.1 The work of this section shall be installed, glazed and adjusted by experienced workmen in
accordance with manufacturer’s directions.
.2 All glass shall be installed in a perfectly true, plumb and accurate location.

.1 Deliver, handle and store glass by methods approved by manufacturer. Stack all glass vertically
to prevent cracking. Do not remove from protective cases or other protective covering until
ready for installation.

OPENINGS PAGE 2
1.8 WARRANTY
.1 Provide manufacturer’s warranty in writing for insulating glass units against failure of seal of
enclosed air space and deposits on inner faces of glass detrimental to vision for a period of 2
years from date of substantial performance of work.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIAL
.1 Glass thicknesses: Indicated or to industry standards for size of opening, local wind loading and
use, but shall not be less than 6 mm thick.
.2 Silvered Mirror Glass: To CAN/ CGSB-12.5, Type 1A - float glass, 6 mm thick, edges ground
and polished.
.3 Safety Glass : to CAN/CGSB-12.1

.1 Tempered Glass (TG): Type 2-tempered : Free of tong marks in final position, clear, 6
mm thick minimum typical, 10mm minimum for structural silicone glazing.
.4 Laminated (LG): 2 layers of minimum 6mm thk tempered glass laminated to 0.76 mm thick
polyvinyl butyral (PVB) interlayer.
.5 Leaded Glass: Clear leaded glass containing a minimum 48 percent lead oxide (by weight) and
15 percent barium. Thickness as required to provide radiation protection equivalent to that
provided by sheet lead in partition in which lead glass is installed. Equivalencies based on 150
kV unless indicated otherwise.
.1 Equivalency: 2.0 mm.
.6 Glazing Film:
.1 Frosted Glazing Film (GF) / (GF-G):
.1 Materials: Privacy glazing film for interior and exterior application
.2 Film Thickness: 2 mil.
.3 Shading Coefficient: 0.44%
.4 Visible Light Reflectance: 43%
.5 Visible Light Transmittance: 21%
.6 Heat Transmission Coefficient: 5.9W/m² K
.7 Roll Size: 1270mm wide x 30m long
.8 Flammability: ASTM E84 Class 1(A)
.9 Color/Design: Opaque / Frost
.10 Frosted Glazing Film Schedule:
.1 GF – No pattern.
.2 GF-G – Glazing Film with cut-out graphics (refer to Appendix 4 for glazing
film graphics).
.2 Security Glazing Film (GF-S):

.1 Film shall be manufactured from polyethylene terephthalate (polyester) and
combined with sputtered metal coatings to achieve the desired performance and
aesthetic characteristics. The finished film shall be self adhesive and include a
coating to reduce the effects of scratching and abrasions that occur in normal
daily activity and also include absorbers and inhibitors for the purpose of reducing
ultra violet rays.
.2 Exterior applied solar control film with the following properties when applied to
1/4inch (6 mm) clear float glass.
.1 Solar Transmittance: 11 percent
.2 Solar Absorptance: 46 percent
.3 Solar Reflectance: 43 percent
.4 Visible Light Transmittance: 17 percent
OPENINGS PAGE 3
.5 Visible Light Reflectance (Exterior): 54 percent

.6 Visible Light Reflectance (Interior): 55 percent
.7 Emissivity: 0 .70
.8 U-Factor (Winter): 1.02
.9 Shading Coefficient: 0.27
.10 Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.23
.11 Ultraviolet Light Blocked (300-380 nanometers): > 99 percent
.12 Total Solar Energy Rejected: 77 percent
.13 Physical and Thermal Properties, Nominal
.1 Film Thickness: 10.0 mil (250 microns).
.2 Peel Strength: 2,500 g/in (984 g/cm)
.3 Tensile Strength; 30,000 lbs/sq in (2,110 kg/cm sq).
.4 Break Strength; 300 lbs/in (54 kg/cm).
.5 Elongation at Break: >100 percent.
.6 Combustion Rate: Negligible.
.7 Melting Point: 260-265 degrees C.
.8 ASTM D 4830 Puncture Test: 174 lbs (78 (kg).
.9 Meets GSA Level C criteria (3B at 4psi, 28psi/milliseconds).
.3 Acceptable Product: Solar Gard 10 Mil Silver 20 Safety and Security film.
.4 Location: Existing exterior window & glazed door facing the courtyard in
Radiography Room #9509, Control Room #9509A, and Consult Room 2 #9522.
.5 Resin Panel (RP):

.1 Varia Ecoresin by 3Form, no substitution.
.2 Resin Panel Schedule:
.1 RP-1:
.1 Style: Trail Fade in Ultra Clear interlayer.
.2 Finish: Patent on both sides.
.3 Gauge: 12.7mm (1/2”)
.4 Sheet size: 1220mm x 2440mm (4’x8’) & to fit installation.
.5 Design & Cut: cut bottom of panel where panels need to be trimmed
(retain top of panel with “Fade” design at top of windows).
.6 Locations:
.1 Waiting Space #9505 – interior window W9505.
.2 Corridor-03 Patient #C9503 – door #C9503 glazing on door and
sidelite.
.2 RP-2:
.1 Style: Highland Custom Fade in Ultra Clear interlayer.
.2 Custom Organics Fade: Fade begins 36” from bottom of panel and
terminates 52” from the bottom of panel – based on finished panel H
noted below. Provide custom print artwork for approval before fabrication.
.4 Sheet size & Gauge:
.1 For Waiting Area #9500 Mobile Partition Screen: 1830mm (6’) H,
width as required to fit 3Form Freestanding Moveable Partition
200.42 (refer Section 10 80 00 Miscellaneous Specialties); gauge to
be 9.5mm (3/8”).
.2 For Waiting Area #9500 interior window W9500 – aluminum
storefront: 2440mm (8’) H, Width refer drawings for fixed screen as
shown on drawing; gauge to be 12.7mm (1/2”).
.5 Design & Cut: cut top of panel where panels need to be trimmed (retain
“Fade” design at top of panels).
.6 Location: Waiting Area #9500.
.3 RP-3:
.1 Style: Whisper.
.2 Finish: Sandstone on both sides
OPENINGS PAGE 4
.3 Pattern Direction: Parallel to long side.

.4 Sheet size & Gauge:
.1 For Waiting Area #9000 Full Framed Panel: 2185mm (7’) H, width as
noted on drawing and as required to fit 3Form Fully Framed Top-
Support Varia Partition 200.52 (refer Section 10 80 00 Miscellaneous
Specialties); gauge to be 9.5mm (3/8”).
.2 For Admin. Workroom #9002: Height & Width refer to drawings and
door schedule; gauge to be 12.7mm (1/2”).
.5 Locations:
.1 Waiting Area #9000 – Full framed panel.
.2 Admin. Workroom #9002 – door #9002 glazing on door and sidelite.
.4 RP-4:
.1 Style: Gingko Thatch in Ultra Clear interlayer.
.3 Gauge: 12.7mm (1/2”)
.4 Sheet size: 1220mm x 2440 (4’x8’) & to fit installation.
.5 Pattern Direction: Parallel to long side.
.6 Location: Corridor-01 Patient #C9001 – door #C9001 glazing on door
and sidelite.
2.2 GLAZING AND SEALING COMPOUND MATERIALS

.1 Sealant Compounds:
.1 Concealed within framing: CGSB 19-GP-5M acrylic terpolymer in accordance with
Section 07 92 00.
.2 Exposed to view: CAN2-19.24 expoxidized polyurethane terpolymer in accordance with
Section 07 92 00.
.2 Glazing tape: Preformed macro-polyisobutylene tape with continuous integral neoprene shim,
paper release, black colour, width x thickness recommended by manufacturer to suit installation.
.3 Setting blocks: Neoprene, Shore “A” durometer hardness 79-90, 100 mm long x 6 mm high x
widths to suit glass and insulating glass units.
.4 Glazing splines/wedges: Purpose-made extruded neoprene profiles designed to engage

aluminum extrusions and form integral part of respective framing system.
.5 Gaskets: Purpose-made extruded hollow compressible EPDM or neoprene profiles designed to

engage aluminum extrusions and form integral part of framing system.
.6 Primers, sealers and cleaners: To glass manufacturer’s standard.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
.1 Examine the drawings and the site to ascertain fabrication and installation procedures so that
the work may be carried out with a minimum of job site cutting and fitting. Supplement all
drawing information with actual job site dimensions.
3.2 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

.1 All glass shall be cushioned and rattle free. Draw marks shall be installed horizontally unless
prohibited by the size of the sheet.
.2 Install all glass on glazing blocks with spacer blocks, of sizes required to ensure shim spaces as
recommended by the glass manufacturer with adequate space for glazing compounds and
sealants.

OPENINGS PAGE 5
.3 Fill gap between glass and applied stop with sealant to depth equal to bite of frame on glass but
not more than 10 mm below sightline.
.4 Apply sealant to uniform and level line, flush with sightline and tooled or wiped with solvent to
smooth appearance.
3.3 INSTALLATION: MIRRORS

.1 Set mirrors with adhesive, applied in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's instructions.
.2 Set mirrors with clips. Anchor rigidly to wall construction.
.3 Set in frame.
.4 Place plumb and level.
3.4 INSTALLATIONS: GLAZING FILM

.1 Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best
result for the substrate under the project conditions.
.2 Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
.3 Upon completion of film application, allow 30 days for moisture from film installation to dry
thoroughly, and to allow film to dry flat with no moisture dimples when viewed under normal
viewing conditions.
.4 After application of film, wash film using common window cleaning solutions, including ammonia
solutions, 30 days after application. Do not use abrasive type cleaning agents and bristle
brushes to avoid scratching film. Use synthetic sponges or soft cloths.
3.5 CLEANING
.1 Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11 – Cleaning.
.1 Leave Work area clean at end of each day.
.1 Remove traces of primer, caulking.
.2 Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces.
.3 Remove labels.
.4 Clean glass and mirrors using approved non-abrasive cleaner in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions.
.2 Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and
equipment in accordance with Section 01 74 11 – Cleaning.
3.6 PROTECTION
.1 Protect installed products and components from damage during construction.
.2 After installation, mark each light with an "X" by using removable plastic tape or paste.
.1 Do not mark heat absorbing or reflective glass units.
.3 Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by glazing installation.
3.7 GLAZING SCHEDULE

.1 Refer Section 08 06 10 Door and Window Schedule for glazing type in each location.

RICHMOND, BC FINISH SCHEDULE
FINISHES PAGE 1
WALLS CEILING REMARKS

NO. ROOM NAME FLOORS BASE WEST NORTH EAST SOUTH
WALL WALL WALL WALL
SUITE 90
ACT-1/
9000 Waiting Area SV-1 CB PTD/FRL PTD/FRL PTD/FRL PTD/FRL
GWB/PL
9001 Staff Lounge SV-1 CB PTD PTD PTD PTD ACT-1/GWB
9001A Lockers SV-1 CB PTD PTD PTD PTD ACT-1/GWB
9001B Change Cubicle SV-2 CB FRP FRP FRP FRP GWB
9001C Staff WR SV-2 CB FRP FRP FRP FRP GWB
9001D Staff WR & Shower EF EB EWC EWC EWC EWC EWC
9002 Admin. Workroom SV-1 CB PTD PTD PTD PTD ACT-1/PL
9003 Patient WR 4 - Accessible SV-2 CB FRP FRP FRP FRP GWB
9010 Weigh Station SV-1 CB FRL FRL PTD/FRL PTD/FRL ACT-1
9011 Exam Room 1 SV-1 CB PTD/FRL PTD PTD/FRL PTD/FRL ACT-2
9012 Lab Alcove SV-1 CB WP WP WP WP ACT-2
9013 Exam Room 2 SV-1 CB PTD/FRL PTD/FRL PTD/FRL PTD/FRL ACT-2
9015 Exam Room 3 SV-1 CB PTD/FRL PTD PTD PTD/FRL ACT-2
9020 Care Team Station SV-1 CB PTD PTD PTD PTD ACT-1/PL
9024 Consult Room SV-1 CB PTD PTD PTD PTD ACT-4
9026 Clean Supply SV-1 CB WP WP WP WP ACT-3
9028 Group Medical Room SV-1 CB PTD PTD PTD PTD ACT-5/ACT-6
9040 Comm. Room LN RB PTD PTD PTD PTD EC
CORRIDOR
CORR-9001 Corridor-01 Patient SV-1 CB PTD/FRL PTD/FRL PTD/FRL PTD/FRL ACT-1
CORR-9002 Corridor-02 Patient SV-1 CB PTD/FRL PTD/FRL PTD/FRL PTD/FRL ACT-1/PL
SUITE 95
9500 Waiting Area SV-1 CB PTD/FRL PTD/FRL PTD/FRL PTD/FRL ACT-1/

FINISHES PAGE 2

WALL WALL WALL WALL
GWB/PL
9501 Patient WR 1 SV-2 CB FRP FRP FRP FRP GWB
9502 Assessment / Triage SV-1 CB PTD/FRL PTD/FRL PTD/FRL PTD/FRL ACT-2
Patient WR 2 – Acc.+ FRP FRP FRP
9503 SV-2 CB FRP GWB
Bariatric
9504 Reception SV-1 CB PTD PTD PTD PTD ACT-1/PL
9505 Waiting Space SV-1 CB PTD/FRL PTD/FRL PTD/FRL PTD/FRL ACT-1/GWB
9506 Business Work Area SV-1 CB PTD PTD PTD PTD ACT-1
9507 Change Cubicle SV-1 CB WP WP WP WP ACT-1
9509 Radiography Room SV-1 CB PTD/FRL PTD PTD PTD/FRL ACT-2
9509A Control Room SV-1 CB PTD/FRL PTD PTD PTD ACT-2
9510 Consult Room 1 SV-1 CB PTD/FRL PTD PTD PTD ACT-4
9520 Patient WR 3 - Accessible SV-2 CB FRP FRP FRP FRP GWB
9521 Radiography Workstation SV-1 CB PTD PTD PTD PTD ACT-1
9522 Consult Room 2 SV-1 CB PTD PTD PTD PTD ACT-4
9523 HH Station SV-1 CB - PTD/FRL PTD/FRL FRL ACT-2
9524 Stretcher / Treatment Bay SV-1 CB PTD/FRL PTD/FRL PTD/FRL PTD/FRL ACT-2
9525 Equipment Alcove 1 SV-1 CB FRL FRL FRL - GWB
9526 Recliner Bay 1 SV-1 CB - - - FRL ACT-2
9527 Care Team Station SV-1 CB PTD PTD PTD PTD ACT-1/GWB
9527A Lab Alcove SV-1 CB WP WP WP WP ACT-2
9528 Recliner Bay 2 SV-1 CB PTD/FRL - - FRL ACT-2
9529 Equipment Alcove 2 SV-1 CB FRL FRL FRL - GWB
9530 Exam Room 1 SV-1 CB PTD/FRL PTD/FRL PTD PTD ACT-2
9531 Medication Room SV-1 CB WP WP WP WP ACT-3
9533 Exam Room 6 SV-1 CB PTD PTD/FRL PTD/FRL PTD/FRL ACT-2
9540 Shared Office / Breakout SV-1 CB PTD PTD PTD PTD ACT-1
9542 Equipment Alcove 3 SV-1 CB FRL FRL FRL FRL ACT-2
9544 Clean Supply SV-1 CB WP WP WP WP ACT-3
FINISHES PAGE 3

WALL WALL WALL WALL
9545 Housekeeping SV-1 CB WP WP WP WP ACT-3
9546 Soiled Utility SV-1 CB WP WP WP WP ACT-2
9547 Loading SV-1 CB PTD/FRL PTD/FRL PTD/FRL PTD/FRL ACT-2
CORRIDOR
ACT-1/
CORR-9501 Corridor-01 Visitor SV-1 CB PTD/FRL PTD/FRL PTD/FRL PTD/FRL
GWB/PL
CORR-9503 Corridor-03 Patient SV-1 CB PTD/FRL PTD/FRL PTD/FRL PTD/FRL ACT-2/GWB
CORR-9505 Corridor05 Support SV-1 CB PTD/FRL PTD/FRL PTD/FRL PTD/FRL ACT-2
PUBLIC CORRIDORS
- OUTSIDE SUITE 90 & PN/CPT RB/PN PTD PTD PTD PTD GWB 1
SUITE 95
LEGEND
FLOOR BASE WALLS CEILING

CPT Carpet CB Integral Coved Base EWC Epoxy Wall Coating ACT-1 Suspended T-Bar w/ Acoustic
EF Epoxy Flooring EB Epoxy Coved Base FRL Fiber Reinforced Laminate Ceiling Tiles Type 1: 2’x4’ (Tegular Edge)
LN Linoleum Sheet Flooring PN Porcelain Tile FRP Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic ACT-2 Suspended T-Bar w/ Acoustic
PN Porcelain Tile RB Rubber Base PT Painted Ceiling Tiles Type 1: 2’x4’ (Square Edge)
SV Sheet Vinyl Flooring VWC Vinyl Wall Covering ACT-3 Suspended T-Bar w/ Acoustic
(#-Type, refer spec.) WP Wall Protection Panel Ceiling Tiles Type 2: 2’x4’ (Vinyl-faced)
ACT-4 Suspended Seamless Acoustical Ceiling
ACT-5 Suspended T-Bar w/ Acoustic
Ceiling Tiles Type 5: 2x2’ (Tegular Edge)
ACT-6 Suspended T-Bar w/ Acoustic Metal
Ceiling Tiles Type 6: 2x2’ (Tegular Edge)
EC Exposed Ceiling, Painted
EWC Epoxy Coating on GWB Ceiling
GWB GWB Ceiling Paint Finish
PL Plastic Laminate Finish

FINISHES PAGE 4
GENERAL NOTES
1. All Washrooms, Showers, Housekeeping, Medication Room, and Soiled Utility Room to be installed with moisture resistant gypsum wallboard in both walls
and ceiling (if indicated as GWB ceiling).
2. Paint all exposed conduits, pips & ducts & associated supporting structures.
3. All material color to be selected by Consultant, refer to finishes plan drawings and specification.
4. Where specific product type is not specified herein, refer to interior elevations, finishes plan & reflected ceiling plans for detail.
5. Refer interior elevations and finishes plan for extent of all wall panels products and wall paint colors.
6. All Finishes to be new U.N.O.
7. All wall finishes and wall base to be continuous behind mirror and all wall-mount items.
REMARKS
1. Refer Drawings A500 and A501 for floor pattern and other finishing details.

RICHMOND, BC SUPPORTS FOR PLASTER AND
FINISHES GYPSUM BOARD PAGE 1
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DOCUMENTS

.1 Supply and installation of interior steel studs and furring.
.2 Seismic restraints for suspended ceiling framing.

.6 Aluminum Storefronts Section 08 43 00
1.4 REFERENCES
.1 CAN/CGSB-7.1-M86, "Cold Formed Steel Framing Components".
.2 ASTM A446/A446M-85, "Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip
Process, Physical (Structural) Quality".
.3 ASTM A525-86, "Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process".
.4 Association of Wall and Ceiling Contractors of B.C. (AWCC), "Specification Standards Manual",
1993 Edition.
1.5 DESIGN CRITERIA

.1 Design steel studs without relying on sheathing to resist torsion and weak axis buckling.
.2 Design steel stud deflection head to allow for deflection of building structure. The building
structure is designed with a maximum deflection of 1/360.

.1 Steel stud and furring work shall be in accordance with Association of Wall and Ceiling
Contractors of B.C. (AWCC), "Specification Standards Manual", Section 9.7, Interior Steel Studs
and Furring, Section 9.8 Exterior Steel Stud Wall System and Section 9.10, Gypsum Shaft Wall
Systems and performed by a qualified specialist firm employing skilled mechanics to British
Columbia Building Code.
.2 Design suspended bulkhead framing, horizontal duct enclosures and wall framing for wall
supported equipment (e.g. wall hung, cupboards, wall hung dryers, fire hose cabinets, electrical,

telephone, cable panels, video monitors, etc.) to accommodate dead loads as well as seismic
loading.
.3 Provide seismic restraints for all suspended ceiling framing.
.4 All interior steel stud walls shall be engineered by a Professional Engineer, according to
specified design criteria and BCBC 2018. Provide signed and sealed shop drawings by the
Engineer.
.5 Said engineers shall review installation of all such components and issue letters of assurance
Model Schedule S-B, and S-C stating that the components have installed in accordance with
design and BC Building Code requirements.
.6 The cost of engineering shall be included in the cost of the Work.
.7 Weld in accordance with CSA W59-M1989 for steel using qualified welders certified in
accordance with CSA W47.1-1983 and CSA W55.3-1965.

.1 Store packaged material in original containers with manufacturer's seals and labels intact.
.2 Prevent damage to materials during handling and storage. Keep materials under cover and free
from dampness.
1.8 SITE CONDITIONS

.1 Start no work until conditions are satisfactory. Commencement of work shall imply acceptance
of conditions.
1.9 SEQUENCING & SCHEDULING

.1 Co-ordinate installation sequence of steel studs partitions and furring with the other work and
materials and/or services being installed within the partitions and metal furring.
.2 Coordinate steel stud and furring work with other work on which it is in any way dependent.
Ensure correct positioning and installation of other work with which steel stud partitions have to
align and upon which subsequent work is dependent.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1 Steel Studs & Steel Stud Furring:
.1 Conform to CAN/CGSB-7.1-M86, non-loadbearing; C-shape, hot dipped galvanized
steel studs with Z180 (G60) zinc coating to ASTM A525-86, roll formed from ASTM
A446/A446M-85, Grade A steel.
Studs to have knurled face and pre-punched pass-through holes for horizontal runs of
wiring and piping. Length to suit, no splicing allowed.
.2 Flange: Depth not less than 32mm, edges bent back 90 deg. and edges hemmed 5mm
minimum.
.3 Widths: As scheduled and indicated.
.4 Gauges: Interior steel stud to be a minimum of 0.88mm (20 gauge). Interior door jamb
studs: 0.88 mm (20 gauge), two (2) studs each side of opening. Increase gauge of
steel studs at over-height locations to suit stud manufacturer's design tables, in order to
maintain overall partition dimension as detailed in wall schedule and in accordance with
the BC Building Code.
.5 Colour code steel studs for gauge in accordance with AWCC colour code chart.

.2 Stud Tracks:
.1 Top and bottom runner tracks fabricated from same materials as studs; leg design min.
32mm high, slightly bent in to hold studs; widths to equal stud width.
.2 Use extended leg top track to partitions as required for deflection.
.3 Stud Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard, suitable for intended application.
.4 Shaft Wall Framing Supports: Stud and track metal components fabricated from hot-
dipped zinc coated steel meeting ASTM A446/A446M-85, Grade A to conform to ASTM
C645-83. Zinc coating shall be Z180 (G60) to ASTM A525-86. Steel I-studs, J-tracks,
T-splines, L-runners, fasteners shall be of design and gauge as used within appropriate
shaft wall system tested under design numbers indicated in wall schedule.
.5 Furring Channels: Hat section; roll formed from 0.53mm hot dipped galvanized steel
having a Z180 (G60) coating to ASTM A525-86, dimensions 68.2 mm or 66.7mm
overall width, face width 35 mm by 22.2mm deep, face knurled.
.6 "Z-bar" Furring: Roll formed from 0.46mm (26 ga.) hot dipped galvanized steel having a
Z180 (G60) coating to ASTM A525-86, 32mm face dimension x depth to suit rigid
insulation thickness, see drawings and wall schedule.
.7 Gypsum Board Ceiling Framing: Conform to Section 9.7, Part 2, Item 4 of the A.W.C.C.
Standards which are minimum and as otherwise described below to exceed that
minimum.
.1 Tie Wire: 1.62mm (16 ga.) galvanized steel tie wire.
.2 Hangers: 3.6mm (9 ga.) diameter galvanized soft annealed steel wire, or
4.8mm diameter zinc coated or cadmium plated steel rods. Ceiling area
supported:
Area Size of Hangers
Up to 1.15m2 3.6 mm (9 ga.) diameter galvanized wire.

Up to 1.48 m2 4.8mm diameter rods
.3 Inserts: Able to develop full strength of supported hangers.
.8 Main Carrying Channels: Cold formed steel channels of dimension and weight
as follows and protected with rust inhibitive coating. Main carrying channels
shall not be less than 38mm x 12.7mm x 1.37mm cold formed channels.
Maximum Spacing Maximum Spacing
of Hangers of Main Runners
900mm 1200mm
1000mm 1000mm
1200mm 900mm
.1 Cross Furring/Ceilings: Cross furring members shall be hat-shaped furring
channels as specified in Clause 2.5, above. Max. spacing between furring
channels shall conform to the following requirements, based on gypsum board
thicknesses and layers.
.9 Metal Backing Plates: Flat sheet from 0.91mm (20 ga.) thick galvanized steel of same
type as are the studs as blocking to support work of other sections.
Gypsum Board Thickness Maximum Furring Spacing
Single 12.7mm board 400 mm

Single 15.9mm board 600 mm
Double layer 400 mm
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 STEEL STUDS - ERECTION

.1 Steel stud wall types are designated on the Drawings in accordance with wall types listed in
Wall Construction Schedule conforming at least to Section 9.9, Part 3, Items 1 and 2 of the
A.W.C.C. Standards.
.1 Fire Resistance Rated Walls: Comply with requirements of testing agency approved by
the Consultant for wall systems detailed on Drawings.
.2 Install stud tracks at floor and ceiling, accurately align according to partition layout,
secure at centres at max. 600mm o.c. or spacing as shown on wall schedule, whichever
is less, using recommended fasteners in accordance with steel stud manufacturer’s
design load tables (table 9.8) for stud gauges required.
.3 Place studs vertically at centers as detailed in wall schedule and not more than 50 mm
from abutting walls, and at each side of openings and corners. Position studs in tracks
at floor and ceiling. Cross brace steel studs as required to provide rigid installation to
manufacturer's instructions and code requirements. Stud height and spacing limitations
shall be in accordance with stud manufacturer's recommendations.
.4 Erect metal studding to tolerance of 1:1000.
.5 Attach studs to bottom and ceiling tracks using screws.
.6 Co-ordinate simultaneous erection of studs with installation of service lines. When
erecting studs ensure web openings are aligned.
.7 Co-ordinate erection of studs with installation of door/window frames and special
supports or anchorage for work specified in other Sections.
.8 Provide two studs extending from floor to ceiling at each side of openings wider than
stud centres specified. Secure studs together, 50 mm apart using column clips or other
approved means of fastening placed alongside frame anchor clips with any additional
framing members/bracing incorporated around perimeter to adequately resist loads.
.9 Erect track at head of door/window openings and sills of sidelight/window openings to
accommodate intermediate studs. Secure track to studs at each end, in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions. Install intermediate studs above and below openings in
same manner and spacing as wall studs.
.10 Provide and install backing and/or reinforcing within steel stud partitions for items being
hung from or anchored to such partitions or furring.
.11 Install steel studs or furring channel between studs for attaching electrical and other
boxes.
.12 Extend partitions to full height to underside of structure except wherenoted otherwise on
drawings.
.13 Maintain clearance under beams and structural slabs to avoid transmission of structural
loads to studs. Use special track with extended sides where ceiling track is to be
anchored to underside of structure to allow for deflection. Cut studs shorter than
partition height.
.14 Install continuous track sealant tape to isolate studs from uninsulated surfaces and to
seal perimeter of exterior walls.
.15 Install continuous acoustical separation tape behind studs and tracks around perimeter
of sound control partitions.
.16 Provide clearances and isolation felt to ensure no contact between steel stud system
and adjacent metal components to eliminate electrolytic action.
3.2 CEILING & SOFFIT SUSPENSIONS

.1 Hangers:
.1 Ensure hangers for suspended gypsum board ceilings support independent of walls,
columns, pipes, ducts, and are erected plumb and securely anchored to structural
frame or imbedded in concrete slabs. Do not use powder actuated fasteners/anchors.
.2 Space hangers at 1200mm maximum centers along runner channels and not more than
150mm from boundary walls, interruptions of continuity and change in direction.
.3 Provide at least 25mm clearance at walls.

.2 Runner Channels:
.1 Space channels at max. 900mm centers and not more than 150mm from boundary
walls, interruptions of continuity and change in direction. Provide clearance of at least
25mm at walls.
.2 Run the channels transversely to structural framing members.
.3 Where splices are necessary, lap members at least 200mm and wire each end with 2
loops. Avoid clustering or lining up splices.
.4 Attach to rod hangers by bending hanger sharply under bottom flange of runner and
securely wire in place with a saddle tie.
.3 Cross Furring:
.1 Erect furring channels transversely across runner channels, or other supports.
.2 Space furring channels at 400mm centers and not more than 150mm from boundary
walls, openings, interruptions in ceiling continuity and change in direction. Provide a
clearance of at least 25mm at walls.
.3 Secure furring channels to each support with clips or double 1.22 mm (18 ga.) dia. wire
ties. Splice joints by nesting and tying channels together.
.4 Level furring channels to a maximum tolerance of 1:1000.
.4 At openings, including ceiling access panels, in ceiling suspension system that interrupts the
main carrying channels of furring channels, reinforce grillage with 19 mm cold rolled channels,
wire tie to top and parallel to main runner channels, extend 19 mm channels minimum 300 mm
past each end of openings.
3.3 WALL FURRING

.1 Place furring channels attached to masonry or concrete surfaces at 400mm o.c. and not more
than 100mm from corners and openings.
.2 Secure flanges to wall with hardened nails, power actuated fasteners or equivalent fastenings.
Maximum spacing 600 mm alternating to opposite flanges.

.1 Remove debris resulting from the work of this section upon completion.

RICHMOND, BC GYPSUM BOARD
FINISHES PAGE 1
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DOCUMENTS

.1 Gypsum board on studs, furring, suspended ceilings and bulkhead.
.2 Acoustical insulation.

.2 Supports for Plaster and Gypsum Board Section 09 22 10
1.4 REFERENCES
.1 Association Wall & Ceiling Contractors BC (AWCC) "Specification Standards Manual".
.2 CAN/CSA-A82.27-M91, "Gypsum Board Products".
.3 Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada (ULC).
.4 CSA A101-M1983, "Thermal Insulation, Mineral Fibre, for Buildings".

.1 Gypsum board shall be in accordance with Association of Wall and Ceiling Contractors of B.C.
(AWCC), "Specification Standards Manual", Section 9.6, Gypsum Wallboard and performed by a
qualified specialist drywall firm employing skilled mechanics.

from dampness.
1.7 SITE CONDITIONS

.1 Ensure temperature of surrounding areas is within the recommended range; min. 13 oC, maximum
21oC, twenty-four (24) hours before, during and after entire gypsum wallboard and joint treatment
operations. Avoid concentrated or irregular heating during drying.
.2 Ensure proper ventilation to eliminate excessive moisture.
.3 Start no work until conditions are satisfactory, commencement of work shall imply acceptance of
conditions.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1 Gypsum board products, materials and accessories shall conform to AWCC Section 9.6, Part 2
and as follows.

FINISHES PAGE 2
2.2 GYPSUM BOARD

.1 Gypsum Wallboard: Conforming to CAN/CSA-A82.27-M1977 noncombustible gypsum core
surfaced on face side with ivory coloured paper and on back side with grey paper; tapered
longitudinal edges, thickness 12.7mm; dimensions 1219mm x max. practical length for min. joints.
All gypsum wallboard ceiling to be 15.9 mm thick.
.2 Fire-Rated Gypsum Wallboard: Conforming to CAN/CSA-A82.27-M91, Type "X" having ULC label
for fire-resistance rating; tapered longitudinal edges, thickness 15.9mm; dimensions 1219mm x
max. practical length to minimize joints.
.3 Moisture Resistant Gypsum Wallboard: Conforming to CAN/CSA-A82.27-M91; specially

formulated core to resist moisture penetration covered with multi-layer face and back papers
chemically treated to resist moisture penetration. Tapered longitudinal edges, thickness 15.9mm;
dimensions 1219mm x max. practical length for min. joints. Type “X” having a ULC label for Fire
Endurance Rating. All moisture resistant gypsum wallboard ceiling to be 15.9mm thick.
Housekeeping room, Washrooms. Shower rooms, Medication Room and Soiled Utility Room to
have moisture resistant gypsum wall board.
.4 Lead Lined Gypsum Wallboard: Single unpierced layer of sheet lead meeting or exceeding the
requirements of ASTM B 749 laminated to back of gypsum wallboard meeting or exceeding the
requirements of ASTM C36 with additives to enhance fire resistance of core. Gypsum Wallboard is
surfaced with paper on front, back, and long edges. 1219mm width by height as indicated. Lead
thickness to be 1.6mm.
2.3 FASTENINGS & FINISHINGS

.1 Drywall Screws: Conforming to ASTM C646, self-drilling, self-threading case hardened screws with
Phillips type head (bugle head). On steel studs and furring drywall screws shall have a min.
penetration of 12.7mm, as follows:
Single Layer: 12.7 mm #6 screw 25.4 mm

15.9 mm #6 screw 28.6 mm or 31.8
Double Layer: 12.7 mm #7 screw 41.3 mm

15.9 mm #7 screw 47.6 mm
.2 Joint Treatment Materials:

.1 Tape: 50.8mm spark perforated paper tape, of type recommended by manufacturer of
gypsum board products.
.2 Jointing Compound: Casein, vinyl or latex base; slow setting; bedding and finishing
compounds of type recommended by manufacturer of gypsum board.
.3 Water: Fresh, clean, potable, free from deleterious matter or alkalis.
.4 Glass mat Gypsum: Type as recommended by manufacturer of sheathing board.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
.1 Corner Beads: Min. 0.45mm (26 ga.) galvanized sheet steel; round corner bead with perforated
flanges; flanges 28.6mm, radius to match existing. Use extended leg bead at external corners at
double wallboard application.
.2 Casing Beads radius to match existing: Min. 0.45mm (26 ga.) galvanized sheet steel; 'L' type or 'J'
as required; beaded angle or casing with one side perforated for joint filling, suitable for 12.7 mm
and 15.9mm gypsum board.
.3 Lead Lined Gypsum Wallboard:
.1 Screw Fasteners: Type S Bugle Head, length as required.

FINISHES PAGE 3
.2 Lead Strips: 2 inches (51 mm) wide, unless indicated otherwise, by same thickness as
sheet lead laminated on gypsum board.
.3 Lead Discs:3/8 inch (9.5 mm) diameter lead discs for use with screw heads.
.4 Adhesive: Acceptable to manufacturer and capable of adhering lead sheets where

required.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
.1 Examine site conditions and other underlying work for defects and/or discrepancies which might
impair the work of this section.
.2 Ensure that bucks, anchors, blocking, electrical and mechanical work which is to be installed in or
behind gypsum board has been installed and approved, prior to commencing gypsum board
application.
3.2 WORKMANSHIP
.1 Application of gypsum wallboard shall comply with AWCC Specification Standards, Section 9.6,
Part 3, manufacturer's instructions and as specified herein.
.2 Finished gypsum board surfaces shall be smooth, without undulations and true to lines and levels
indicated on drawings, ready for decoration.
.3 Finished joint camber shall not exceed 1.6mm over 300mm joints.
3.3 GENERAL APPLICATION

.1 Drywall partition types are designated on the Drawings in accordance with wall types listed in Wall
Construction Schedule. Fire resistance rated walls and ceilings (where applicable): Comply with
requirements of testing agency for wall and ceiling systems detailed on drawings.
.2 Install partitions extending from floor to underside of concrete slab or structure over unless
indicated and/or listed otherwise.
.3 Install gypsum board to avoid butt-end joints if possible to reduce the amount of joint finishing.
.4 Do not locate joints on same stud on opposite sides of partitions. Stagger end joints occurring on
same side of partitions.
.5 Keep vertical joints at least 300mm from the jamb lines of door, window and other openings.
.6 Cut sheets to fit accurately; butt edges of boards in moderate contact; do not force into place.
Remove ragged edges or burrs with rasp or sandpaper.
.7 Cut and fit of gypsum board to accommodate recessed items in partitions and/or furring.
.8 Allow deflection spaces between drywall partitions and building structural framing components to
allow for movement of framing components.
.9 Level of Finish:
.1 Ceiling space and unexposed plenums, duct shaft – level one.
.2 Ceiling exposed to view – level four.
.3 Wall exposed to view – level four.
.4 Wall for environmental graphics (noted “PT-E” on interior elevation drawings) – level 5.
FINISHES PAGE 4
3.4 SINGLE LAYER APPLICATION

.1 Erect gypsum board vertically or horizontally, whichever results in fewer end joints. Locate end
joints over supporting members.
.2 Arrange end joints to occur on different studs on opposite sides of a partition. Keep end joints
away from prominent locations and central portions of ceilings.
.3 Locate vertical joints at least 300mm from the jamb lines of openings.
.4 Drive screws with a power screw gun and set with countersunk head slightly below the surface of
the gypsum wallboard. Ensure paper face of the gypsum wallboard is not broken by screws.
.5 Ensure perimeter screws are not less than 9.5mm nor more than 12mm from edges and ends and
are opposite the screws on adjacent boards.
.6 Space screws for fire-rated gypsum board 200mm o.c. at gypsum board edges and 300mm o.c. on
gypsum board field on walls, 200mm o.c. on all ceilings, unless otherwise required by ULC Design
Test (or other approved test) assembly for fire rating specified.
.7 Space screws for other applications at 300mm o.c. on the field and edges.
.8 Apply by screw method to steel supports or by single nailing to wood supports, in accordance with
requirements of Section 9.6 - Part 3, Item 6 of A.W.C.C. Standards, 6.2 for screw (steel stud and
furring) application, or otherwise described with drywall laid up in vertical position.
3.5 DOUBLE LAYER APPLICATION

.1 Apply by screwing base and face layers in accordance with Clause 3.4 for single layer application,
except the locations of joints in the two layers shall not coincide.
.2 Where double layer is required, install double layer to entire wall to provide flush wall with no
reveals or recesses.
3.6 MOISTURE RESISTANT

.1 Install and fasten moisture resistant and exterior sheathing gypsum wallboard as indicated in strict
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
3.7 LEAD LINED GYPSUM WALLBOARD
.1 Comply with manufacturer's recommendations.
.2 Adhere lead strips on face of studs at joints in lead-laminated gypsum board, including inside and
outside corners. Use 2 inches (50 mm) wide strips by same thickness as sheet lead laminated on
gypsum board.
.3 Shim studs and other framing members as necessary to provide flat, flush finished surfaces.
.4 Install lead-laminated gypsum board on framing with screws spaced not more than 8 inches (203
mm) on center along edges of board and 12 inches (305 mm) on center in field of board.
.5 Adhere lead discs to fastener heads. In each case, use method that provides continuous radiation
shielding.
.6 Where lead-laminated gypsum board is final substrate, apply joint treatment on fasteners and
joints as per paragraph 3.4
.7 Where second layer of gypsum board occurs over lead-laminated gypsum board, comply with
FINISHES PAGE 5
paragraph 3.5.
3.8 METAL ACCESSORIES

.1 Corner Beads: Install to external corners using longest practical lengths. Fix at max. 150mm o.c.
(alternate sides). Use screw fixing for applying external corner beads.
.2 Casing Beads & Miscellaneous Trim: Install to openings and wherever gypsum board abuts a
dissimilar material, using longest practical lengths; secure at max. 300mm o.c.
3.9 GYPSUM BOARD FINISHING

.1 Tape, fill and sand field joints and internal angles using specified paper tape.
.2 For field joints, corners and exposed screws or nail heads, beads, mix joint filler and apply in strict
accordance with the printed directions of the manufacturer and as follows:
First: Embed the tape.

Second: Apply leveling coat over tape.
Third: Apply skim (polish) coat.
.3 Sand exposed joints, edges, corners, openings, screws and other filled areas to provide a smooth
surface ready for decoration.
.4 Tape and fill only joints in partitions carried above ceilings and where so scheduled.
.5 Rooms without base mould or trim: Finish gypsum board joints to floor slab.
3.10 ACOUSTICAL INSULATION

.1 Install acoustical insulation, as specified, between steel studs in sound insulated partitions
according to wall schedules. Tightly fit insulation between studs and install full heights of
partitions. Install wire ties to hold insulation in place where steel studs have wallboard one side
only.
.2 Install acoustical insulation at sound isolated drywall ceilings as indicated.
3.11 INTERIOR SEALANT

.1 Seal joints between edge of single layer drywall (exposed joint) and exposed masonry walls or
other adjoining vertical surfaces with sealant compound.
.2 Seal joints between edges of gypsum board to inside of exterior walls at adjoining vertical and
horizontal surfaces and at penetrations to provide an effective air barrier in accordance with code
requirements.
3.12 FIRESTOP SEALANT
.1 Seal joints at penetrations of fire-rated partitions and wall construction, joint between edge of first
layer gypsum board and concrete or concrete block or double layer gypsum board wall
construction and where detailed to provide and effective seal against the passage of fire, smoke
and water by Section 07270 - Firestopping & Smoke Seals.
3.13 PATCHING & POINTING

.1 Point up and patch gypsum board; point up and around trim and other set work and leave work
complete and perfect.
.2 Perform necessary patching and making good to sleeves, conduits, cutouts in gypsum board as
required.
3.14 ADJUSTING & CLEANING

FINISHES PAGE 6
.1 Clean thoroughly and remove excess materials from other finished surfaces. Particularly protect
and keep clean glass and aluminum work.
.2 Promptly remove excess and waste material as work proceeds particularly jointing compounds,
and at completion of work.

RICHMOND, BC CERAMIC TILING
FINISHES PAGE 1
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DOCUMENTS

.1 Thick mortar bed and leveling beds for floor and wall base tile.
.2 Porcelain floor and wall base tile, installed using the thinset and/or thickbed method, with
cementitious and epoxy grouted joints.
.3 Backing board.
.4 Accessories.

.1 Sealants (Joints in Ceramic Tile) Section 07 92 00
.2 Gypsum Board (Backing) Section 09 29 00
.3 Carpeting Section 09 68 00

.1 Conform to the standards of "Installation Manual 2002 Ceramic Tile" as produced by Terrazzo
Tile and Marble Association of Canada (TTMAC) which are the minimum and as otherwise
specified herein, to exceed that minimum.
.2 Should modifications to TTMAC standard specifications be contained herein to exceed that

minimum, such modifications govern.
.3 Setting products: Ensure setting bed and bond coat are compatible.
.4 The supplier of Adhesives, Grouts and Mortars shall have been regularly engaged in the
manufacture of these materials for a minimum of ten (10) years.
.5 The tiling contractor shall have been regularly engaged in the installation of tile for a minimum of
five (5) years.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
.1 Samples: Submit duplicate samples of each tile, colour, texture, size and grout in accordance
with Section 01 33 00.
.2 Maintenance Materials: N/A
.3 Maintenance Data: Provide maintenance data for tiling. Include cleaning methods, cleaning
solutions recommended, stain removal methods as well as polishes and waxes recommended.
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

.1 Provide sufficient heat and ventilation in areas where work is being performed, so as to allow
tile work to properly set.
.2 Take precautionary measures to ensure that excessive temperature differential changes do not
occur.

FINISHES PAGE 2

.1 Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels,
including grade, intact until time of use in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
.2 Protect from chipping, scratches and stains.
.3 Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 PORCELAIN TILE

.1 Floor/Base Tile:
Porcelain tile: 305mm x 610mm porcelain homogenous tile
Slip resistance: yes
Frost resistance: yes
Color and finish: to be selected by Consultant
.2 Mortar and Adhesive Materials

Cement: to CSA-A5, type 10
Sand: to ASTM C 144, passing 16 mesh
Hydrated lime: to ASTM C 207, in accordance with TTMAC Installation Manual
Latex additive: formulated for use in cement mortar and thin set bond coat
Water: potable and free of minerals and chemicals which are detrimental to mortar and
grout mixes.
Adhesives: Maximum VOC limit 65 g/L to SCAQMD Rule 1168
2.2 SETTING BED

.1 Setting Beds: Provide in accordance with TTMA of Canada 2019-2021 Specification Guide 09
30 00 Tile Installation Manual for the particular system specified.
.2 Mix thinset beds in accordance with TTMA of Canada 2019-2021 Specification Guide 09 30
00Tile Installation Manual.
.3 Bond coat/setting bed:

(For wall and floor tile areas unless specified otherwise)
.1 Two component non-flammable, non-toxic, acrylic based factory pre-mixed setting
system.
.2 Use same manufacturer for latex additive in premixed thickset mortar and thickset
mortar beds.
.3 Mix in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
2.3 GROUT
.1 Mixtures: Provide in strict accordance with TTMA of Canada 2019-2021 Specifications Guide
09 30 00 Tile Installation Manual for the particular system specified; unless otherwise specified.
.2 Use companion joint grouting materials with siloxane sealer for joints; colour as selected by
Consultant.
.3 Factory prepared coloured grout to ANSI 118.6, colour as selected by Consultant unsanded for
all areas where joints are less than 3.0 mm and sanded for joints wider than 3.0 mm.
Acceptable manufacturers: Crest, Laticrete, Mapei.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
.1 Reinforcing mesh: 50 x 50 x 1.6 mm galvanized steel wire mesh.

FINISHES PAGE 3
.2 Metal Schluter transition / reducing & edge strips tapered to meet abutting other flooring
materials, colour as selected by Consultant.
.3 Sealant: in accordance with Section 07 92 00.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE CONDITION

.1 Verify that areas to receive tile installed by thin bed method have wood float finish and are true
within 3 mm in 3 m.
3.2 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

.1 Install in accordance with TTMA of Canada 2019-2021 Specifications Guide 09 30 00 Tile
Installation Manual for the system described and this specification where it exceeds those
standards.
.2 Cut and fit tiles neatly around corners, fittings and obstructions. Perimeter tile to be minimum
half size.
.3 Chipped, cracked and split tile and edges, not acceptable.
.4 Make joints even and uniform width in accordance with approved samples, plumb, straight, true
and even with adjacent tile to tolerance ± 1.5 mm over 1200 mm.
.5 Make internal angles square, external angles round edge. Use round edge tile at open
terminations of wall tile. Cove tile at base of shower areas.
.6 Sound tile after setting and replace hollow sounding units to obtain full bond.
.7 Provide jointing according to reviewed samples.
.8 Apply wall tile using thin-set method.
.9 Bond wall tile to gypsum wall board with pre-sanded dry-set or latex Portland cement mortar in
one layer, to a minimum thickness 2.5 mm skim coat and trowel with a 6 mm notched trowel.
.10 Install transition divider strips at junction of tile flooring and carpet.
3.3 GROUTING
.1 Follow manufacturer's recommendations for minimum cure time of tile installation prior to
grouting.
.2 Pack joints in full and free of voids and pits. (Tool as specified).
.3 Do not grout internal vertical corners, leave open for sealant.
.4 Clean excess mortar from the surface with water as the work progresses.
.5 Remove grout film or haze within 24 hours before it hardens.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID TYPE CLEANERS ON COLOURED GROUT JOINTS.
3.4 EXPANSION AND CONTROL JOINTS

.1 Provide space or control joints and expansion joints in width and depth as located and detailed
on Contract Drawings.

FINISHES PAGE 4
.2 Carry existing joints in concrete subfloors through to surface of tile work and conform to details
shown on the Drawings.
.3 Install expansion joints where tile abuts restraining surfaces such as perimeter walls, curbs,
columns, wall corners, and directly over cold joints and control joints in structural surfaces and
conform to architectural details. Make joints through tilework directly over structural joints to a
minimum dimension to accommodate anticipated design movement.
.4 Interior installation spaced a maximum of 4.0 m x 4.0 m. Expansion joints shall be raked or cut,
through the setting bed to the supporting slab or structure.
.5 Caulk joints with self leveling polyurethane sealant and backing material as specified in Section
07 92 00.

.1 Sponge and wash across joints. Polish with clean dry cloth.
.2 Remove grout haze following printed recommendations of mortar additive. Do not use acids for
cleaning.
.3 Upon completion, remove waste and excess materials and leave premises clean.
.4 Repair and make good defects to Work of this Section or any other work caused by this
application.
.5 Seal tile and grout using proprietary sealers as recommended by tile manufacturer.
3.6 PROTECTION
.1 Prohibit traffic from floor finish for 72 hours after installation.

RICHMOND, BC ACOUSTICAL CEILING
FINISHES PAGE 1
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DOCUMENTS
interpreted and co-coordinated with all other parts.

.1 Acoustical ceiling panels and Exposed grid suspension system
.2 Metal ceiling panels and suspension system.
.3 Wire hangers, fasteners, main runners, cross tees, and wall angle moldings.
.4 Seismic restraint to all existing T-bar ceiling within the tenant space.

1.4 REFERENCES
.1 AWCC (Association of Wall and Ceiling Contractors) Manual, Section 9.14, Acoustic Ceilings.
.2 ASTM C635, “Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panel Ceilings”.
.3 ASTM C636, “Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In
Panels”.
.4 ASTM A641M, “Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire”.
.5 ASTM E580, “Standard Practice for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile
and Lay-In Panels in Areas Subject to Earthquake Ground Motions”.
.6 ASTM E 1264, Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products.
.7 CAN/CGSB 92.1, Sound Absorptive Prefabricated Acoustical Units.
.8 CSA B111-74(R2003), Wire Nails, Spikes and Staples.
.9 CAN/ULC-S102-[10)], Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
.2 Manufacturer’s Data: Submit manufacturer’s specifications and installation instructions for each
acoustic ceiling system component required. Include reports and other data as may be required to
show compliance with these specifications.
.3 Samples
.1 Submit one representative model of each type ceiling suspension system. Ceiling system
to show basic construction and assembly, treatment at walls, recessed fixtures, splicing,
interlocking, finishes, acoustical unit installation.
.2 Submit duplicate 150x150mm (6x6 in.) samples of each type acoustic ceiling panel.
.4 Shop drawings:
.1 Shop drawings and calculations shall be prepared under the supervision of a professional

FINISHES PAGE 2
Engineer registered in B.C. The Engineer shall verify by sealing the shop drawings that
the drawings were prepared under the Design Engineer’s supervision and that the Work of
this Section meets the design and performance requirements of BC Building Code 2018.
The Engineer shall submit Letter of Assurance along with signed sealed shop drawings
and provide Model Schedule S-B and S-C on completion of the work. The Design
Engineer shall satisfy himself that the manufacture and erection of the ceiling system is in
accordance with his design and carry out periodic inspections of the fabrication and
erection of the Work of this Section as he deems necessary.
.2 Shop drawings shall incorporate plans, sections and full-size details for all work included in
this Section. The full-size details shall show detail profiles, die drawings, and specify all
Products, Materials and finishes, provision for seismic restraint, all anchorage assemblies
and components, provisions for adjustment, fabrication and erection tolerances for the
work of this section and layout of all anchors.
.5 Maintenance Data: Submit for incorporation into maintenance manual complete instructions for the
maintenance of ceiling materials installed in the work.

.1 Execute all work of this section by approved and licensed workmen experienced in acoustic ceiling
panel installations and in accordance with good trade practice.
.2 Conform to the requirement of the NBC for Class 25 (incombustible) Flame Spread Index
according to Federal Specification SS-S-118a and have a Class 1 Flame Spread Rating according
to ASTM E-84, for use in non-combustible construction for acoustic ceiling panels.
.3 Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC), Light Reflectance Value, and Sound Transmission Class
(STC) shall not be less than that listed in the “Acoustical and Board Products Association (ABPA)
Bulletin”, latest edition, for each tile specified, unless otherwise specified.
.4 All suspension anchoring devices and all seismic restraint Work shall be designed and certified by
a Professional Engineer registered in BC, who shall carry out periodic site reviews during
construction and at completion, submit reports and Letters of Assurance to the Client. Costs to be
included in the Contract Price. Site reviews by the Design Engineer are supplementary to the
Contractor’s own primary quality control and supervisory procedures.

.1 Deliver acoustical panels and suspension system components to Project site in original, unopened
packages and store them in a fully enclosed space. Protect against damage from moisture, direct
sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
.2 Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and stabilized moisture
content.
.3 Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.
1.8 SITE CONDITIONS

.1 Environmental Conditions:
.1 Ensure temperature of surrounding areas remains above 14oC (58oF) before, during, and
after application and relative humidity is not in excess of 80%.
.2 Do not install acoustic ceiling assembly until building is enclosed, weatherproof, dust
generating activities have terminated, overhead mechanical work completed, tested and
approved, and painting finished.
.3 For acoustical ceiling type ACT-4, panels should be installed in areas where the building is
enclosed and the HVAC is continuously functioning.

FINISHES PAGE 3
.2 Protection:
.1 Protect work of this Section against damage by others.
.2 Protect work of other sections against damage, resulting from work of this Section.
.3 Repair and make good damage to approval of Consultant.
1.9 SCHEDULING
.1 Co-ordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system components with
other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including but not limited to
signage, light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system components, and partition
assemblies.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 CEILING PANELS

.1 ACT-1 & ACT-2: Acoustic units for suspended ceiling system: to CAN/CGSB-92.1
.1 ASTM E1264 Classification: Type IV, Form 2, Pattern E, Fire Class A
.2 Material: Wet-formed Mineral Fiber with acoustically transparent membrane
.3 Surface Finish: Laminated (painted fiberglass mat) with Improved Overtone for Healthcare
(RXS).
.4 Flame spread rating of 25 or less in accordance with CAN/ULC-S102.
.5 Smoke development Classification 50 or less in accordance with CAN/ULC-S102.
.6 Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) designation of 0.80 to ASTM C423.
.7 Light Reflectance (LR) range of 0.90 to ASTM E 1477.
.8 CAC Rating: 42.
.9 Color: White.
.10 Shape: flat.
.11 Certified Low VOC Emissions.
.12 Humid and Sag Resist: Warranted to withstand relative humidity of up to 90% at 104ºF
without sagging, warping or delaminating for 10-years.
.13 Mold/Mildew Protection: Bioshield.
.14 Recycled Content: 62% (post & pre-consumer combined).
.15 Surface wash-ability: ASTM D 4828 Tested to 2000 cycles with no sign of surface wear.
.16 Warranty: Minimum 15-year performance guarantee.
.17 Size: 24in x 48in x 7/8in
.18 Acceptable Manufacturer and Product:
.1 ACT-1: Certain Teed Symphony M 80 RX #1220B-80-RXS-1
.1 Edge Profile: Reveal Corner Bevel 15/16”
.2 Location: General and staff areas, also refer to drawings & Finish
Schedule for detailed info.
.2 ACT-2: Certain Teed Symphony M 80 RX #1220-80-RXS-1
.1 Edge Profile: Square Lay-in 15/16”
.2 Location: All Exam Rooms and treatment bays, Equipment Alcove, and
Soiled Utility, also refer to drawings & Finish Schedule for detailed info.
.2 ACT-3: Acoustic units for suspended ceiling system: to CAN/CGSB-92.1.

.1 ASTM E1264 Classification: Type IV, Form 2.
.2 Pattern G, Fire Class A.
.5 Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) designation: N/A.
.7 CAC Rating: 42.
.8 Edge type: Square Lay-in, 9.4 mm (15/16”).

FINISHES PAGE 4
.9 Color: White.
.10 Size: 24” x 48” x 5/8” (610 mm x 1220 mm x 16 mm).
.11 Shape: flat.
.12 Surface Finish: Vinyl-faced membrane.
.13 Recycled Content: Contains greater than 39% total recycled content on product
composition of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content.
.15 Acceptable Manufacturer and Product: Certain Teed Vinylshield C #1170-CRF-1.
.16 Location: Medication Room #9531, Clean Supply #9026 & #9544, and Housekeeping
#9545, also refer to drawings & Finish Schedule.
.3 ACT-4: Seamless Acoustic units for suspended ceiling system: to CAN/CGSB-92.1.

.1 ASTM E1264 Classification: Type IV, Form 2.
.2 Pattern G, Fire Class A.
.5 Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) designation: 0.80.
.7 CAC Rating: 46.
.8 Edge type: Tapered, 22 mm (7/8”) four sides.
.9 Color: White.
.10 Size: 48” x 72” x 7/8” (1220 mm x 1830 mm x 22 mm).
.11 Shape: flat.
.12 Finish:
.1 Joint Compound: setting compound and joint tape as recommended by
manufacturer.
.2 Spray Applied Finish: fine textured spray.
.13 Recycled Content: Contains up to 75% total recycled content on product composition of
post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content.
.15 Acceptable Manufacturer and Product: Armstrong AcoustiBuilt Acoustical Ceiling System,
#2604.
.16 Location: all Consult Rooms, also refer to drawings & Finish Schedule.
.4 ACT-5: Acoustic units for suspended ceiling system: to CAN/CGSB-92.1

.1 ASTM E1264 Classification: Type IV, Form 2, Pattern E, Fire Class A
.2 Material: Wet-formed Mineral Fiber with acoustically transparent membrane
.3 Surface Finish: Laminated (painted fiberglass mat) with Improved Overtone for Healthcare
(RXS).
.6 Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) designation of 0.80 to ASTM C423.
.8 CAC Rating: 40.
.9 Color: White.
.10 Shape: flat.
.11 Certified Low VOC Emissions.
.12 Humid and Sag Resist: Warranted to withstand relative humidity of up to 90% at 104ºF
without sagging, warping or delaminating for 10-years.
.13 Mold/Mildew Protection: Bioshield.
.14 Recycled Content: 62% (post & pre-consumer combined).
.15 Surface wash-ability: ASTM D 4828 Tested to 2000 cycles with no sign of surface wear.
.17 Size: 24in x 24in x 7/8in

FINISHES PAGE 5
.18 Acceptable Manufacturer & Product: Certain Teed Symphony M 80 RX #1222F-80-RXS-1.

.19 Location: Group Medical Room #9028, also refer to drawings & Finish Schedule.
.5 ACT-6: Metal Ceiling

.1 Metal Lay-in ceiling.
.2 Substrate: Aluminum
.3 Fire rating: Class A Fire Rated per ASTM E84 – Painted or anodized metal: Flame spread:
≤ 25, Smoke ≤ 50.
.4 Recycled content: Up to 85%.
.5 Weight: Varies 0.75 – 1.1 lbs./sq.ft.
.6 Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) designation: 0.75
.7 Edge: Narrow Elite 9/16”.
.8 Color: Auxilium Maple 8573.
.9 Size: 24 x 24.
.10 Perforation: 188 – perforation diameter to be 0.050 inches, open area to be 6.3%.
.11 Acoustical Infill: Non-Woven Acoustic fabric pad.
.12 Acceptable Manufacturer and Product: Certain Teed Metal Lay-in Tile.
.13 Location: Group Medical Room #9028, also refer to drawings & Finish Schedule.
2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS FOR ACT-1 TO ACT-3, ACT-5 & ACT-6

.1 Materials:
.1 To ASTM C635, Intermediate Duty, capable of supporting ceiling assembly as shown on
the drawings, or specified, with a maximum deflection of 1/360th of the span, including
mechanical and electrical components.
.2 Commercial quality cold rolled steel electro-galvanized coated and pre-painted.
.2 Finish: Low sheen baked enamel, satin sheen white colour.
.3 Suspension System: Non-fire rated, two directional exposed tee bar grid to ceiling pattern as
shown. Components die cut. Main tee with double web, rectangular bulb and 24 mm. rolled cap
on exposed face. Cross tee with rectangular bulb, web extended to form positive interlock with
main tee webs, lower flange extended and offset to provide flush intersection.
.4 Hanger wire: galvanized soft annealed steel wire, 3.6 mm diameter for access tile ceilings.
.5 Hanger inserts: purpose made.
.6 Carrying channels: of size, thickness and weight to carry spans; painted galvanized steel. Where
spans exceed 1200mm use channels of adequate strength.
.7 Accessories: splices, clips, wire ties, retainers and wall moulding flush reveal, to complement
suspension system components, as recommended by system manufacturer.
.8 ULC-approved hold-down clips where noted and required.
.9 Accepted Products:
.1 For ACT-1 to ACT-3: 15/16” EZ Stab Classic System Grids as manufactured by Certain
Teed.
.2 For ACT-5 & ACT-6: 9/16” EZ Stab Elite Narrow System Grids as manufactured by Certain
Teed.
.3 ¼” sq. Shadow Molding for all Reveal Corner Bevel edge acoustic ceiling tiles by same
system manufacturer.
2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS FOR ACT-4

FINISHES PAGE 6
.1 Materials: all main beams and cross tees shall be commercial quality hot-dipped galvanized steel.
.1 Main beam: manufactured main beam- 1-1/2" knurled face with reverse hem by 1-11/16
inches high. Drywall Main Beams are factory punched with cross tee routs, hanger wire
holes, and SuperLock™ main beam clip for a strong secure connection and fast accurate
alignment. Both ShortSpan and Drywall Main Beams are Heavy-duty performance per
ASTM C635.
.2 12ft HD Drywall Main Beam 1-1/2 in.
.2 Cross Tees: manufactured cross tee- 1-1/2" knurled face with reverse hem by 1-1/2 inches high
with factory punched cross tee routs and hanger wire holes and XL stake on clip for a strong secure
connection.
.3 Wall Molding: 12ft Knurled Angle Molding 1-1/4" Face.
.4 Hanger wire: a Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, pre-stretched, with a yield stress load of at least
time three times the design load, but not less than 12-gauge.
.5 Fasteners (for Panel attachment):

.1 #6 x 1-5/8” Fine thread or sharp point self-drilling drywall screws.
.2 Grip-Plate Washer as per manufacturer’s recommendations.
.6 Accessories: provide all accessories as per manufacturer’s written instructions for a complete
install.
.7 Accepted Products: AcoustiBuilt Seamless Acoustical Ceiling Suspension Systems by Armstrong

Ceiling.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
.1 Touch-up paint: in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for surface conditions:
.1 Paint: VOC limit 250 g/L maximum to and GS-11 and SCAQMD Rule 1113.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION/PREPARATION
.1 Inspect the work of other Sections upon which the Work of this Section depends. Proceed only
after deficiencies, if any, in the Work of other Sections have been corrected.
.2 Refer to Drawing schedules for types, locations of acoustic ceilings.
.3 Ensure all drop bulkheads are located and completed.
.4 Lay out grid system in accordance with reflected ceiling plans. Measure each ceiling area and
establish the layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each
ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and conform to the layout indicated on
reflected ceiling plans.
.5 Obtain data and dimensions from mechanical and electrical trades governing the exact location
and suspension of ceiling fixtures and fittings.
.6 For ACT-4: Prior to installation, contact your Armstrong Installation Systems Specialist (ISS).
Before installation, inspect previous work of all other trades. Verify that all work is complete and
accurate to the point where this installation may properly proceed in strict accordance with framing
shop drawings. Contact Armstrong local rep: Brian Etcher, phone: 604-649-4842, email:
bsetcher@armstrongceilings.com for required installation training at least 4-6 weeks before

FINISHES PAGE 7
ordering materials and scheduling installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, PERFORMANCE - GENERAL

.1 Suspension Systems:
.1 Install suspension systems in accordance with ASTM C636, manufacturer’s directions and
conforming to ceiling layout as shown on the drawings.
.2 Provide and install framing members and hangers of adequate strength to safely carry all
loads. Do not hang on mechanical or electrical lines, ducts or services.
.3 Maximum deflection shall be 1/360th of the span.
.4 Install wall and edge moldings where tile abuts walls and other vertical surfaces, and
where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.
.5 Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one
another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
.6 Use laser equipment to lay out, align, and level the ceiling system.
.7 Center system on room axis leaving equal and greater than half border units or as
indicated in Drawings.
.8 Install edge molding at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces, using longest practical
lengths. Miter corners. Provide edge moldings at junctions with other interruptions.
.2 Panels:
.1 Ensure mechanical, electrical work and finished painting have been completed and
inspected before installing panels.
.2 Neatly cut and fit acoustic panels to suspension system. Acoustic panels should be
installed with undamaged edges.
.3 Make cutouts as required for fixtures.
.4 Install acoustical panels in ceiling suspension system.
.3 Suspension Systems - Seismic Restraint Requirements:

.1 Ensure suspension conforms to requirements of ASTM E580 and local building code.
.2 Wall angles or channels will have no special structural value assessed to themselves or
method of attachment to walls.
.3 Main and across runners shall be attached to perimeter members on two adjacent walls;
provide and maintain a clearance of 6.35 mm. between main/cross runners and perimeter
members on the two remaining adjacent walls.
.4 Suspension Wire:
.1 Space suspension wires along each main runner in accordance with the load carrying
capacity of the system using a minimum of 2.05 mm. (12 ga.) soft annealed galvanized
steel wire.
.2 Attach each vertical wire to the ceiling suspension member with a minimum of three turns
and to the structure above with a connection capable of carrying not less than 45.4 kg.
allowable load; ensure points of hanger wire supports do not permit disengagement
through vertical lifting.
.3 Ensure suspension wires do not hang more than one in six out of plumb unless counter
sloping wires are provided.
.4 Design connection so wires do not attach to, or bend around interfering material, such as
ducts; use a trapeze or equivalent device where obstructions preclude direct submission.
.5 Support the terminal ends of each cross runner or main runner independently, maximum
203 mm. from each wall with 2.05 (12 ga.) wire.
.6 Provide horizontal restraint by using four 2.05 mm. wires secured to the main runner within
51 mm. of the cross runner intersection and splayed 90 degrees from each other, at an
angle not exceeding 45 degrees from the plane of the ceiling.
.7 Provide horizontal restraint points 3.7 m. o.c. in both directions, with the first point within
1.2 m. from each wall.

FINISHES PAGE 8
.8 Ensure attachment of the restraint wires to the structure above is adequate for the load
imposed; horizontal restraint is not required for room sizes less than 37.2 m 2 where
surrounding walls connect directly to the structure above; walls will provide the required
restraint for room sizes less than 37.2 m2.
.5 For ACT-4: Install in accordance with all approved plans, details, and manufacturer's installation
guidelines for the system.
3.3 INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, PERFORMANCE – METAL CEILING

.1 General: Install acoustical metal pan ceilings, per manufacturers shop drawings provided, per
manufacturer's written instructions.
.2 Suspend ceiling hangers from building's approved structural substrates and as follows:
.1 Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.
.2 Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces
by bracing, counter-splaying, or other equally effective means.
.3 Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produce hanger
spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacing required to support standard
suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in
form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Utilize supplemental suspension members and
hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced
standards and publications.
.4 Where used secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above
with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to
inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure; that are appropriate for substrate;
and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated
temperatures.
.5 Space hangers not more than 48” on-center, along each member supported directly from
hangers, unless otherwise indicated; and provide hangers not more than 12” from ends of
each member. Supply supporting calculations from licensed Structural Engineer verifying
hanger spacing meets all requirements, when spacing exceeds those recommended.
.6 Level grid to 1/8” in 10’ from specified elevation(s), square and true.
.7 Adjust suspension system runners so they are square (within .5 degree from 90 degrees)
and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked
members.
.3 Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports acceptable to

Architect/Engineer and/or inspector. Suspend bracing from building's structural members and/or
structural deck, as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or
steel deck tabs (unless directed otherwise).
.4 Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where
necessary to conceal edges of acoustical metal pan. Method of edge trim attachment and design of
edge trims to be approved by Architect.
.1 Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 18” on-center and not more
than 6” from ends, leveling with ceding suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8” in 10’.
Miter corners accurately and connect securely.
.2 Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim without prior
written approval, or unless detailed otherwise.
.5 Scribe and cut acoustical metal panel units for accurate fit at penetrations by other work through
ceilings. Stiffen edges of cut units as required to eliminate evidence of buckling or variations in
flatness exceeding referenced standards for stretcher-leveled metal sheet.

FINISHES PAGE 9
.6 Install acoustical metal panel units in coordination with suspension system. Fit adjoining units to
form flush, tight joints. Scribe and cut units for accurate fit at borders and around construction
penetrating ceiling.

.1 Upon completion of the work, replace any defective or marked tile or suspension systems.
.2 Adjust and level suspension as required.
.3 Adjust metal ceiling components to provide uniform tolerances.
.4 Clean systems as per manufacturer’s written instructions.

RICHMOND, BC RESILIENT FLOORING
FINISHES PAGE 1
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DOCUMENTS

.1 Prepare existing floor slab to receive new floor finish.
.2 Supply and install Vinyl Sheet Flooring and integral coved base.
.3 Supply and install Resilient Base.
.4 Supply and install Linoleum sheet flooring.

.1 Fiber-Reinforced Laminates Section 06 64 01
.3 Special Wall Surfacing Section 09 77 00
.4 Protective Wall Covering Section 10 26 23
1.4 REFERENCES
.1 National Floor Covering Association (NFCA) Specification Manual.
.2 ASTM F1913 - 04(2010) Standard Specification for Vinyl Sheet Floor Covering Without Backing.
.3 Fire: ASTM E648 – Class 1; Smoke: ASTM E662 – 450 or less, CAN/ULC S102.2-M88.
.4 ASTM F1861 Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base.
.5 ASTM F 710 Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring.
.6 ASTM F2034 Standard Specification for Sheet Linoleum Floor Covering.

.1 Work to be in accordance with manufacturer's standard specifications and supervised by a certified
installer whose work has been approved by the manufacturer of the materials used.
.2 All preparation, materials and workmanship shall be in strict accordance with NFCA requirements
and material manufacture’s written recommendation and detail requirements for conditions of work
that apply and guarantee/warranty periods noted herein.
.3 Linoleum flooring must be ordered a minimum of sixty (60) days prior to start of scheduled
installation.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
.1 General: Submit for Consultant's review, in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2 Submit shop drawings, seaming plan, coving details, and manufacturer's technical data, installation
and maintenance instructions (latest edition of manufacturer’s manual) for flooring and
accessories.

FINISHES PAGE 2
.3 Samples: Submit duplicate 300 x 300 mm sample pieces of each type of resilient sheet flooring
and, 300 mm long welding rod, 300mm long resilient base.
.4 Submit product literature of Materials, together with the proposed ordering and delivery schedule
for all such materials.
.5 Substrate Tests: Submit copies of moisture and alkalinity tests.
.6 Closeout Submittals:
.1 Submit 4 copies of the following for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 77 00
Closeout Procedures.
.2 Maintenance and operations data includes – methods for maintaining installed products,
and precautions against cleaning materials and methods detrimental to finishes and
performance.
.3 Warranty: Warranty documents specified herein.
.7 Flame Spread Certification: Submit manufacturer’s certification that resilient flooring furnished for
areas indicated to comply with required flame spread rating has been tested and meets or exceeds
indicated standard.
.8 Replacement Material: After completion of work, deliver to project site and store where directed,
replacement materials from same manufactured lot as materials installed, and as follows:
.1 Sheet Flooring: 3m length x width of roll of sheet of each type, pattern and color installed.
Identify each roll.
.2 Resilient Base: Not less than 10 linear feet for each 500 linear feet or fraction thereof of
each different type and color installed.
.3 All maintenance materials to be in one piece as packaged by the manufacturer.
1.7 WARRANTY
.1 Guarantee: Provide a written guarantee in a form acceptable to Owner, that the work of this
Section is guaranteed against shrinking, stretching, creeping, lack of adhesion and failure due to
defective products and/or workmanship, for a period of five (5) years from the date of Substantial
Performance.

.1 Maintain air temperature and structural base temperature at flooring installation areas above 20 oC
to a maximum of 29ºC for 72 hours before laying, during and 72 hours after installation. Protect all
materials from the direct flow of heat from hot-air registers, radiators, or other heating fixtures and
appliances.
.2 Moisture: Ensure substrate is within moisture limits and alkalinity limits prescribed by manufacturer.

.1 Deliver and store materials in original containers, with manufacturer's labels and seals intact, in a
dry weatherproof building.
.2 Maintain storage room temperature 20 degrees Celsius minimum for 72 hours minimum prior to
laying.
.3 Store flooring, adhesives, and accessories in the spaces where they will be installed for at least 48
hours before beginning installation.
1.10 JOB CONDITIONS

FINISHES PAGE 3
.1 Inspect all surfaces prior to start of work and report any unsatisfactory conditions to the Consultant.
Starting work shall imply acceptance.
.2 Do not commence installation until moisture tests have been conducted and conditions are found
to be acceptable.
.3 Obtain instruction from Consultant before starting work, concerning directions of patterns and
grains of resilient coverings.
.4 Consult other trades in advance and make provisions for work of other trades to avoid cutting and
patching.
.5 Protect surrounding surfaces from soiling; make good defects.
2.0 PRODUCTS
.1 All substitutions of equal products must be approved in accordance with bid guidelines prior to
award of contract. Design intent (i.e., color and pattern) and design layout and configuration are
inherent attributes of the specification in addition to performance specification outlined below,
therefore all submitted products must comply with the aesthetic intent of the owner and/or the
architect.
2.1 MATERIALS
.1 Sheet Vinyl Type 1 & Integral Coved Base – SV-1 & CB
.1 Heterogeneous sheet flooring, non-ortho phthalate, shall conform to the requirements of
ASTM F1303 Standard Specification for Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering with Backing, Type I,
Grade 1, with Class B backing.
.2 Width: 1.83 – 3.66 meters (use largest width available for minimum
joints as required)
.3 Thickness: 2.03 mm (0.080”) overall
0.51mm (0.020”) wear layer
.4 Wear Layer: Quantum Guard Elite®
.5 Pattern Repeat: Random Match
.6 HUD/FHA: Meets or Exceeds ADAG (American Disability Act Guidelines)
.7 Flexibility: ASTM F137 – 1.5” mandrel, no cracks or breaks in wear
surface.
.8 Static Load: ASTM F970 Passes - Residual Indent ≤ 0.005”
.9 Static Load: ASTM F970 mod. Passes - 2,000 PSI; Residual Indent ≤
0.005”
.10 Rolling Resistance
/ Caster Chair: ISO 4918; 25,000 Cycles, No Significant Change
.11 Short Term
Residual Indentation: ASTM F1914/F1303 Passes - Must be < 0.007”
.12 Flooring Radiant Panel: ASTM E648 Passes - Class 1; ≥ 0.45 watts/cm2
.13 Smoke Density: ASTM E662 Passes - ≤ 450
.14 Slip Resistance: ASTM C1028, Dry Passes - ≥ 0.5 Leather; 0.6 Rubber
.15 Acoustic STC: ASTM E90; 63 - 6” Concrete with Drop Ceiling
.16 Resistance to Light: ASTM F1515 Passes - < 8 Delta E Color Change
.17 Chemical Resistance: ASTM F925 Passes - No More Than Slight Change
.18 Resistance to Heat: ASTM F1514 Passes - < 8 Delta E Color Change
.19 Resistance to Mold/Mildew: ASTM G21/E2180 Passes - No More Than Slight Change
.20 Indoor Air Quality: FloorScore Certified; CDPH v1.1-2010
.21 Product Declarations: EPD
.22 LEED Scoreboard: May contribute to LEED credits: LEED 2009: MRc5 Regional
Materials; IEQ4.1 Low Emitting Adhesives; IEQ4.3 Low

FINISHES PAGE 4
Emitting Materials - Flooring LEED v4: Building Product

Disclosure & Optimization - EPDs; IEQc2 - Low Emitting
Materials.
.23 Location: General Field flooring
(Refer to Finishes Plan & Finish Schedule).
.24 Approved Product: Mannington Realities II Collection Southern Oak II.
.25 Approved Color: Antique 5611R.
.2 Sheet Vinyl Type 2 & Integral Coved Base – SV-2 & CB

.1 Homogeneous sheet flooring shall conform to the requirements of ASTM F1913 Standard
Specification for Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering without Backing, non-layered. Protected by a
diamond-infused UV-cured polyurethane finish, the colors and pattern detail are dispersed
uniformly throughout the thickness of the product. Color pigments are insoluble in water
and resistant to cleaning agents and light.
.2 Width: 2.0 meters
.3 Length: 20 meters
.4 Thickness: 2.0 mm overall
.5 Static Load Limit: meets ASTM F-970 – @ 250 PSI
.6 Residual Indentation: ASTM F-1914 – less than 0.007 in.
.7 Flexibility: ASTN F-137 – 1.5” mandrel, no cracks or breaks in wear
surface.
.8 Resistance to Chemicals: ASTM F-925 – no more than slight change in surface
.9 Fire Performance: ASTM E 648 – Class 1; ASTM E 662 less than 450
.10 Slip Resistance: ASTM D-2047 – more than 0.5 COF
.11 Floor Score/SCS: Low-emitting material CHPS 01350
.12 EPD: Certified; ISO 14025 and ISO 14040
.13 Low-Emitting Adhesive: SCAQMD Rule #1168 - Less than 50 g/L
.14 Toxic Materials Reduction: No asbestos, free of lead &phthalates (DEHP, DBP, BBP,
DIDP, DNOP)
.15 Finish: Diamond 10 technology coating
.16 Maintenance Options: No Polish – No Buff / Spray Buff
.17 Location: Washrooms & Staff Change Cubicle.
(Refer to Finishes Plan & Finish Schedule).
.18 Approved Product: Armstrong Medintone Homogeneous Sheet Flooring
.19 Approved Color & Pattern: H5300 Cool White
.3 Resilient Base – RB
.1 Resilient Base: To ASTM F1861, rubber, continuous length top set, bullnose top,
coved toe in all areas.
.2 Height: 152 mm.
.3 Thickness: 3 mm
.4 Recycled Content: Contains at least 14% pre-consumer recycled content
.5 Recyclability: 100% Recyclable
.6 SCS FloorScore: Certified; meets California Specifications Section 01350
.7 Exterior Corners: Cut backside and fold
.8 Interior Corners: Mitre on site
.9 Exposed Ends: Round off corners on site. Provide in longest lengths possible.
Joints to be at corners only where possible.
.10 Acceptable Product: Johnsonite
.11 Approved Color: Johnsonite 20 Charcoal WG
.4 Linoleum Sheet Flooring - LN

.1 Homogeneous Linoleum Sheet Flooring to ASTM F2034 for commercial application
.2 Width: 2 meters

FINISHES PAGE 5
.3 Length: 32 meters
.4 Gauge: 2.5 mm
.5 Backing: Jute
.6 Static Load Limit: 450 pounds/sq inch ASTM F-970
.7 Fire Performance: ASTM E 648 – Class 1; ASTM E 662 less than 450;
CAN/UCL – S102.2: FSC1 – 150, SD-160
.8 Location: Comm. Room #9040
(Refer to Finishes Plan & Finish Schedule)
.9 Approved material / colour: Marmoleum Fresco / Eternity 3866 by Forbo
.5 Accessories:
.1 Metal Schluter transition / reducing & edge strips tapered to meet abutting materials,
colour as selected by Consultant. Also follow manufacturer’s recommendation for type of
edge strips for specific anchorage applications.
.2 Cove caps or top edge trim caps and 1” radius cove filler strips for integral coved base
(height as shown on drawings) for sheet vinyl flooring areas. Cove caps or top edge trim
caps to be anodized aluminum.
.3 Provide solid color vinyl weld rod as produced by sheet flooring manufacturer and intended
for heat welding of seams. Color shall be compatible with field color of flooring.
.4 Seam Adhesive: Provide seam adhesive at seams as recommended by resilient flooring
manufacturer.
.5 For sheet flooring with Quantum Guard Elite wearlayer, Quantum Guard Seam Coater pen
by same manufacturer on all seams to extend finish coat protection to seamed areas.
.6 Primers and Levelers: Compatible types as recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers.
Leveling and filler compound to be two-component type, consisting of liquid latex and dry-mixed
filler, both supplied by same manufacturer.
.7 Adhesives: Waterproof type recommended by flooring manufacturer for the applicable conditions.
Use special base adhesive.
.8 Sealer and Wax: Types recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer for material type and
location and approved by Owner's Maintenance Department.
.9 Integral cove base: Provide integral flash cove wall base by extending sheet flooring (height as
shown on drawing) up the wall using adhesive, welding rod, and accessories recommended and
approved by the flooring manufacturer as shown on drawings and in Finish Schedule.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
.1 Ensure concrete floors are smooth, dry and free from scale and other foreign matter likely to be
detrimental to flooring.
.2 Take moisture and alkalinity tests. Use test method recommended by flooring manufacturer.
.3 Notify Consultant in writing of conditions that may affect finished flooring prior to start of work.
.4 Start of work implies acceptance of substrates.
.5 Survey floor level prior to commencement of work.
3.2 PREPARATION
.1 Remove grease, dust and dirt remaining, fill cracks, holes, joints, with approved joint filler and

FINISHES PAGE 6
rough grind to eliminate irregularities. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured and dry. Vacuum floor.
.2 Prep floor with extra concrete levelling compound as needed in addition to nominal skim coat
especially at location of demolished partition walls, and along the hallway where all door openings
need to align. Level the floor within the same area. Provide slope to floor drain location.
.3 Carry out any additional preparation or work as may be required, in order to ensure a satisfactory
installation, including flush leveled between floor finish changes.
.4 Where required, prime surfaces with primers recommended by adhesives manufacturer.
.5 Prepare subfloor as per flooring manufacturer’s written recommendations.
3.3 PRE-INSTALLATION TESTING

.1 Perform Bond test prior to installation using the flooring and adhesive suitable for the subfloor,
install a 915 x 915mm (3’ x3’) section following the recommended installation procedures. Select
areas next to walls, columns, or other light traffic areas. Test should be performed in at least 10
locations to be selected by Consultant in conjunction with installer’s representative. Tape the
perimeter with duct tape to prevent edge drying of the adhesive. After 72 hours, the adhesive
should be dry and the flooring should be difficult to remove. All test result to be documented and
submit to Consultant for record.
.2 Conduct Calcium Chloride Tests before installing resilient flooring. Tests to be made for
existing concrete slabs on where they are least subject to drying conditions. Test should be
performed in at least 10 locations to be selected by Consultant in conjunction with installer’s
representative. Where curing agents have been used, they should be removed in and around the
test areas to help obtain accurate results. The tests should be conducted in accordance with the
latest edition of ASTM F 1869, "Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission
Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride." The test should comply with the
maximum acceptable moisture emission levels according to Manufacturer’s requirement. All test
result to be documented and submit to Consultant for record.
.3 Conduct Moisture testing in accordance with ASTM F 2170 Standard Test Method for Determining
Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs using in situ Probes or ASTM F 1869 Standard Test
Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor. Test should be
performed concurrently with Calcium Chloride Test in at least 10 locations to be selected by
Consultant in conjunction with installer’s representative. All test result to be documented and
submit to Consultant for record
.4 Perform Alkali Test to existing and new Concrete slabs on all floors for alkalinity before the
installation of resilient flooring. The allowable readings must be within 5 to 9 on the pH scale. Test
should be performed in at least 10 locations to be selected by Consultant in conjunction with
installer’s representative. All test result to be documented and submit to Consultant for record.
3.4 INSTALLATION
.1 General:
.1 All primers, where recommended, shall be mandatory.
.2 Provide reference markers. Use chalk or other non-permanent marking devices.
.3 All tools and methods of application shall be strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer’s printed instruction, unless specified otherwise.
.4 Work shall be installed in accordance with approved manufacturer’s standard
specifications, supervised by a certified installer whose work has been approved by
the manufacturer of the materials being used.
.5 At completion, all flooring shall be completely adhered to the substrate throughout
FINISHES PAGE 7
and free of bumps caused by installation over improperly prepared substrate

and/or loose particles covering the substrate.
.6 Work shall be subject to nominal inspection of the manufacturer’s representative
during and after installation.
.2 Sheet Flooring:
.1 Apply adhesive uniformly using recommended trowel. Do not spread more adhesive than
can be covered by flooring before initial set takes place.
.2 Lay flooring to produce a minimum number of seams. Border widths minimum 1/3 width of
full material. Avoid cross seams, filler pieces, and strips. Match edges for color shading
and pattern at the seams in compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
.3 Double cut sheet joints and continuously seal. Heat weld seams according to
manufacturer’s printed instructions.
.4 As installation progresses, and after installation, roll flooring with 45 kg minimum roller to
ensure full adhesion.
.5 Cut flooring neatly around fixed objects. Continue flooring over areas that will be under
built-in furniture.
.6 Terminate flooring at interior of door in openings where adjacent floor finish or colour is
dissimilar.
.7 Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges where flooring terminates.
.8 Install continuous bead of clear silicone sealant at joint where flooring terminates against
walls prior to installing rubber base.
.9 Install flooring to pattern and direction as directed by consultant. Distribute variation in
shade of pattern of production run to obtain uniform effect. Abrupt variations will not be
permitted.
.10 Caulk joint between flooring and thresholds, door frames, window frames and all joints with
other building components.
.11 Without damaging surfaces, remove any excess adhesive from the flooring and wall
surfaces as the work proceeds.
.12 Prepare heat-welded seams with special routing tool supplied for this purpose and heat
weld with vinyl welding rod in seams. Prepare sealed seams with special seam adhesive
supplied for this purpose. Use methods and sequence of work in conformance with written
instructions of the flooring manufacturer. Finish all seams flush and free from voids,
recesses, and raised areas.
.13 Provide integral flash cove wall base where shown on the drawings and Finish Schedule,
including cove fillet support strip and top edge cap trim. Construct flash cove base in
accordance with the flooring manufacturer's instructions. Heat-weld seams as used on the
floor as recommended by manufacturer.
.3 Base:
.1 Apply to walls in continuous full lengths, using special base adhesive, with top uniform and
level, to variation of 1:1000, and bottom of base uniformly tight to flooring with no gaps.
.2 Use pre-molded units at all external corners, with mitre cut internal corners.
.3 Joints to be plain, tight butt, inconspicuously placed where possible.
.4 Use 3 kg hand rollers to ensure base is firmly embedded in adhesive.
.5 Accurately scribe to frames, fitments and other obstructions.
.6 Install base on walls, columns, cabinets and fitments of rooms where base is scheduled or
shown.
.7 Caulk joints between base and door frame, window frame, and all other building
components.
.4 Edge Strip:
.1 Apply edge strip at exposed edges of resilient flooring and in accordance to flooring
manufacturer’s recommendations.

FINISHES PAGE 8
3.5 CLEANING AND WAXING

.1 Remove excess adhesive from floor, base and other surfaces without damage.
.2 Clean, and where recommended by manufacturer, seal and wax floor and base surfaces to flooring
manufacturer's printed instructions.
.3 Perform initial maintenance according to the latest edition of the flooring manufacturer’s
maintenance and warranty literature.
3.6 PROTECTION
.1 Do not allow loads or traffic on flooring for at least 48 hours after installation.
.2 Do not flood with water for at least two (2) weeks after installation.
.3 Protect installed flooring in a manner recommended by flooring manufacturer against damage from
rolling loads, the work of other trades, and including the placement of fixtures and furnishings.
.4 Provide manufacturer-recommended regular maintenance, until the date of Substantial

Performance.

RICHMOND, BC RESINOUS FLOORING
FINISHES PAGE 1
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DOCUMENTS

.1 Epoxy floor and integral cove base coatings.

.5 Epoxy Coating Section 09 96 56

.1 Work to be in accordance with manufacturer’s standard specifications and supervised by a
certified installer whose work has been approved by the manufacturer of the materials used.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
.1 General: Submit for Consultant’s review, in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2 Samples: Submit duplicate 12” x 12” sample with 4” base return at vertical surface of each
colour and material being applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions for Consultant’s
review. Submit 2 textures for selection by consultant. Use representative colours when
preparing samples for review; resubmit until required sheen, colour, and texture are achieved.
Obtain written acceptance of Samples in writing from the Consultant before commencing Work
of this Section. Accepted Samples shall be the final standard of acceptance of the finish.
.3 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data, product data (including physical properties
and appearance options including: standard colours, variable surface textures and surface
sheen),installation instructions, and general recommendations for each flooring material.
Include certification indicating compliance of materials with requirements.
.4 Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's printed maintenance instructions for repair, cleaning
and maintenance procedures; include name of original installer and contact information for
incorporation into Operation and Maintenance Manual.
.5 Substrate Tests: Submit copies of moisture and alkalinity tests.
.6 Guarantee: Provide a written guarantee in a form acceptable to Owner, that the work of this
Section is guaranteed against shrinking, stretching, creeping, lack of adhesion and failure due to
defective products and/or workmanship, for a period of five (5) years from the date of

.1 Installer Qualifications: Engage an Installer who has successfully completed within the last 3
years at least 3 flooring applications similar in type and size to that of this project and who will

FINISHES PAGE 2
assign mechanics from these earlier applications to this project, of which one will serve as lead
mechanic.
.1 Installers must have completed flooring manufacturer’s training program for Products
specified.
.2 Installers must be licensed, certified or approved in writing by the flooring manufacturer for
the Products specified.
.2 Provide mock up for review by consultant.

.1 Do not install the Work of this Section outside of the following environmental ranges without
Manufacturers’ written acceptance:
.1 Material Temperature: Precondition material for at least 24 hours between 18°C and 30°C
(65°F and 86°F).
.2 Ambient and Substrate Temperature: Minimum/Maximum 10˚/30˚C (50˚/86˚F).
.3 Substrate temperature must be at least 3˚C (5˚F) above measured Dew Point.
.4 Mixing and Application attempted at Material, Ambient and/or Substrate Temperature
conditions less than 18˚C (65˚F) will result in a decrease in Product workability and slower
cure rates.
.5 Relative Ambient Humidity: maximum ambient humidity 85% (during application and
curing).
.6 Measure and confirm acceptable test results for Ambient Relative Humidity, Ambient and
Surface Temperature and Dew Point.
.2 Substrate Moisture:
.1 Moisture content of concrete substrate must be ≤ 4% by mass as measured with a
Tramex® CME/CMExpert type concrete moisture meter.
.2 Additionally, internal concrete relative humidity tests may be conducted as per ASTM
F2170 and values must be ≤ 85%.
.3 If moisture content of concrete substrate is higher than 4% by mass and / or if relative
humidity test results exceed readings of 85% RH, Consultant will instruct on addition of
moisture mitigation systems or moisture tolerant primers.
.3 Supply temporary utilities, including power, water, temporary ventilation and lighting for use by
applicator.
.4 Maintain constant ambient room temperature for 48 hours before, during and after installation or
until cured. Minimum temperature of 10°C (50°F) and maximum temperature of 30°C (85°F). Do
not apply Product while ambient and substrate temperatures are rising.
.5 Erect suitable barriers and post legible signs at points of entry to prevent traffic and trades from
entering the work area during application and curing period of the floor.
.6 Ensure adequate ventilation and air flow.
.7 Advise other trades of fixtures and fittings not to be installed until floor is cured, such as:
radiators, painting, decorating, floor-supported equipment or cabinetwork, caulking, plumbing,
fixtures, etc.
.8 Protect adjacent surfaces from damage resulting from work of this trade. If necessary, mask
and/or cover adjacent surfaces, fixtures, equipment, etc. by suitable means.

.1 Delivery:

FINISHES PAGE 3
.1 Deliver materials to site in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers and packaging,

with labels clearly identifying product name, manufacturer, batch or lot number, and date
of manufacture.
.2 Material should be delivered to job site and checked for completeness and shipping
damage prior to job start.
.2 Storage:
.1 Store materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
.2 Keep containers sealed until ready for use. Material should be stored in a dry, enclosed,
protected area from the elements.
.3 Do not subject material to excessive heat or freezing.
.4 Shelf life: Established based on manufacturer’s written recommendation for each
material being used.
.3 Handling:
.1 Protect materials during handling and application to prevent damage or contamination.
.2 Condition materials for use accordingly to manufacturer’s written instructions prior to
application.
.3 Record material lot numbers and quantities delivered to jobsite/storage.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1 Cementitious mortar, for building up slope for slope to drain.
.2 Resinous Flooring System (EF): double broadcast and sealed decorative epoxy floor and
integral cove base composed of multi-coloured quartz aggregates finished with transparent top
coats and as follows:
.1 Compressive Strength: 51.8 MPa (7,511 psi) at 28 days in accordance with ASTM C579.
.2 Flexural Strength: 15.9 MPa (2,306 psi) at 28 days in accordance with ASTM C580.
.3 Hardness: 85 Shore D at 7 days in accordance with ASTM D2240.
.4 VOC Content: ≤ 25 g/L in accordance with ASTM D2369.
.5 Pull-off Strength: > 4.2 MPa (>609 psi) with substrate failure in accordance with ASTM
D4541.
.6 Flammability: Self-extinguishing in accordance with ASTM D635.
.7 System Thickness: minimum 3 mm (1/8”)
.8 Approved Product and Manufacturer: Sikafloor Quartzite Broadcast System by Sika
.9 Color & Texture: Blend 100
.10 Finish: Semi-gloss satin top coat
.11 Location: Staff WR & Shower #9001D, refer to drawings.
.3 Components:
.1 Primer and Broadcast Coats: two component, clear, high solids, low odour, low VOC, high
gloss epoxy finish.
.1 Applied Thickness:
.1 Prime Coat: 254 µm (10 mils) w.f.t.
.2 1st Broadcast Coat: 381 µm (15 mils) w.f.t.
.3 2nd Broadcast Coat: 508 µm (20 mils) w.f.t.
.2 Compressive Strength: 51.8 MPa (7511 psi) in accordance with ASTM C579.
.3 Tensile Strength: 9.2 MPa (1,334 psi) in accordance with ASTM C307.
.4 Pull-off Strength: >4.2 MPa (>609 psi) on concrete in accordance with ASTM
D4541.
.5 Hardness: 85 Shore D in accordance with ASTM D2240.
.6 VOC Content: 1 g/L in accordance with ASTM D2369.
.7 Basis-of-Design Product: Sika Canada Inc., Sikafloor Duochem 9205.

FINISHES PAGE 4
.2 Decorative Broadcast Quartz Aggregates: finished with transparent top coats.

.3 Top Coat: two component, high solids, low odour, low VOC, high strength, high gloss,
clear epoxy resin formulated for improved resistance to clarity change over time.
.1 Applied Thickness: to achieve floor and base thickness as listed below.
.2 Compressive Strength: 70 MPa (10,521 p.s.i.) in accordance with ASTM C579.
.3 Tensile Strength: 28 MPa (4,061 p.s.i.) in accordance with ASTM D638.
.4 Flexural Strength: 83 MPa (12,038 p.s.i.) in accordance with ASTM C580.
.6 Modulus of Elasticity: 1287 MPa (186,663 p.s.i.) in accordance with ASTM C580.
.7 Elongation: 4% in accordance with ASTM D638.
.9 Resistance to Mold Growth: Rated 0 (no growth) in accordance with ASTM D3273.
.10 Resistance to Fungi Growth: Rated 10 (highest resistance) in accordance with
ASTM G21.
.11 Flammability: Self-extinguishing in accordance with ASTM D635.
.12 Basis-of-Design Product: Sika Canada Inc., Sikafloor 2002.
.4 Semi-Gloss Top Coat: two component, low odour, VOC compliant, water-borne, non-
yellowing acrylic-aliphatic polyurethane semi-gloss-finish top coat:
.2 Abrasion Resistance: 0.073 g in accordance with ASTM D4060
(CS17/1000cycles/1000g).
.3 Basis-of-Design Product: Sika Canada Inc., Sikafloor 318.
.5 Epoxy Cove Mortar: three-component, solid colour, low odour, low VOC, vertical grade
coving and detailing mortar with primer.
.1 Compressive Strength: 41 MPa (5946 psi) at 28 days in accordance with ASTM
D695.
.2 Tensile Strength: 36 MPa (5221 psi) at 28 days in accordance with ASTM D638.
.5 Pull-off Strength: > 1.7 MPa (246 psi) with 100% substrate failure in accordance
with ASTM D4541.
.6 Basis-of-Design Product: Sika Canada Inc., Sikafloor Morritex Epoxy Cove Mortar.
.6 Accessories: Provide all cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding materials, and clean-up
materials required per manufacturer’s specifications.
.4 Waterproofing
.1 Anti-fracture waterproof membrane for whole shower room #9001D, with minimum
upstand of 200mm in washroom area, and full height in shower area. Approved product:
Laticrete Hydro Ban.
.5 Floor thickness: minimum 4.7625mm (3/16”) at low point, slope to drain.
.6 Integral flash cove base (EB) thickness: minimum 9.525mm (3/8”), base height: refer to
drawings.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
.1 Ensure concrete floors are smooth, dry and free from grease, wax, oil, dirt, scale and other
foreign matter likely to be detrimental to flooring.
.2 Take moisture and alkalinity tests. Use test method recommended by flooring manufacturer.
.3 Notify Consultant in writing of conditions that may affect finished flooring prior to start of work.

FINISHES PAGE 5
.4 Start of work implies acceptance of substrates.
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION

.1 Remove grease, dust and dirt remaining, fill cracks, holes, joints, with approved joint filler and
rough grind to eliminate irregularities. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured and dry.
.2 Carry out any additional preparation or work as may be required including levelling, in order to
ensure a satisfactory installation.
.3 Where required, prime surfaces with primers recommended by adhesives manufacturer.
3.3 MIXING
.1 Comply with manufacturer's instructions for mixing procedures.
.2 Pre-mix each component before every batch to ensure uniformity.
.3 Carefully measure and mix the components together.
3.4 INSTALLATION
.1 Generally:
.1 Follow manufacturer's written instructions.
.2 Apply cementitious mortar according to slope on drawing and in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
.3 Install integral cove base in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
.4 Prime entire surface with recommended primer.
.5 Apply epoxy and aggregate matrix in accordance with manufacturer's instruction to a
total thickness of 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) to 1/4 inch (6.4 mm). Apply body coat of resin
using roller, squeegee, or trowel. Broadcast pre-mixed grains to saturation.
.6 Apply grout coat(s) and topcoat(s) at manufacturer's recommended coverage to provide
uniform, dense surface.
.7 Allow proper cure time for each installation step.
.8 Allow the finished epoxy flooring to cure for a minimum of 7 days from completion
before putting into service.
.9 If necessary, use temporary protection until flooring is fully cured.
.10 Caulk against door frames and different flooring.
.2 Base:
.1 Carry epoxy coating up sides of walls to a height as shown on drawing above finished
floor surface.
.2 Make top uniform and level, to variation of 1:1000.
.3 Provide 40 mm radius coved epoxy floor base at junctions between base and floor.
.4 Provide coved epoxy at top of base to cover wall coating where applicable.
.5 Install base on walls of rooms where base is scheduled or shown.
.3 Waterproofing
.1 Install waterproofing to minimum of 150mm (6”) high above finished floor in shower room
change area and full height in shower area.
3.5 CLEANING AND WAXING

.1 Clean floor and base surfaces to flooring manufacturer’s printed instructions.
3.6 PROTECTION
.1 Protect finished floor from damage by subsequent trades.
.2 Do not allow light foot traffic on flooring for at least 24 hours after installation.

FINISHES PAGE 6
.3 Do not allow rubber-wheel traffic for at least 72 hours after installation.
.4 Do not immerse or expose to chemical for at least 7 days after installation.
.5 Follow manufacturer’s written recommendations with respect to cure, wait time and return to
service.

RICHMOND, BC CARPETING
FINISHES PAGE 1
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DOCUMENTS

.1 Supply and install carpeting.

.1 Ceramic Tiling Section 09 30 13
1.4 REFERENCES
.1 CGSB 4-GP-129+Corr & Amend - Carpets Commercial.
.2 CGSB 4-GP-156 Direct Glue - Down Carpet - Installation.
.3 CAN4 S102.2-M80 Flame Spread
.4 CGSB 4-GP-155M Flammability
.5 Specification Standards Manual as published by the National Floor Covering Association.

.1 Work to be performed by qualified, skilled layers with five (5) years minimum experience in this
type of Work and under the direct supervision of a responsible and experienced foreman.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
.1 Samples: Submit duplicate full size pieces of specified materials, for each colour selected and
provide samples of accessories in accordance with Section 01 33 00 Submittals.
.2 Shop drawing: Submit shop drawing showing installation pattern and direction.
.3 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data verifying compliance with this specification section.
Submit evidence acceptable to Fire Marshall verifying compliance with:
.1 Flame resistance to CGSB 4-GP-129 as conforming to Hazardous Products Act, Carpet
Regulations.
.2 ULC flame spread and smoke developed classification by ULC listing or test report
certified by nationally recognized fire test Laboratory.
Submit certifications in accordance with Section 01 33 00 Submittals.
.4 Maintenance Materials: Provide 2% minimum of floor area carpeted for each colour used for
future maintenance. Identify all materials. Store where directed.
Maintenance materials to be in the same production run as installed materials.
.5 Maintenance Data: Provide maintenance data for carpet.
.6 Guarantee: Provide a written guarantee that work of this Section is guaranteed against
deterioration and failure of material and workmanship detrimental to appearance and

FINISHES PAGE 2
performance under normal traffic conditions, for a period of ten (10) years, and that all defects
will be made good, without cost to Owner.
In addition provide manufacturer's guarantee to cover defects in carpet material for ten (10)
years against unraveling, colour fading and deterioration of backing materials.

.1 Deliver and store materials in original containers with manufacturers’ seals and labels intact.
from dampness.
.3 Store materials in area of installation for minimum period of 48 hours prior to installation.
.4 Store carpet and adhesive at minimum temperature of 21oC and relative humidity of maximum
65% for minimum of 72 hours before installation.

.1 Separate and recycle waste materials.
.2 Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities.
.3 Collect and separate for disposal packaging material for recycling in accordance with Waste
Management Plan.
.4 Vacuum used carpet before removal.
.5 Maintain possession of removed used carpet.
.6 Sort only clean, dry carpet materials for reclamation. Clean is defined as carpet free from
demolition debris, asbestos contamination, garbage and tack strips.
.7 Immediately remove used carpet from site and transport to reclamation point
1.9 PROTECTION
.1 Protect carpeting materials at the place of building, using original wrappings or heavy-duty
polyethylene sheets.
.2 Upon completion of work, cover traffic areas with heavy duty polyethylene walk sheets.
.3 Protect existing work from damage; make good Work damaged at no additional cost to the
Owner.

.1 Temperature: Maintain ambient temperature 20 degrees C. minimum for 72 hours before and
after, and during installation.
.2 Lighting: Provide 161 cd/m2 (15c/ft2) minimum at surface.
.3 Relative humidity: Maintain relative humidity between 10 and 65% RH for 72 hours before,
during and 72 hours after installation.
.4 Safety: Comply with requirements of Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System

(WHMIS) regarding use, handling, storage, and disposal of hazardous materials.
.5 Ventilation: Provide adequate controlled ventilation during and after installation.

FINISHES PAGE 3
.6 Do not install carpet until space is enclosed and weatherproof, wet-work in space is completed
and nominally dry, and work above ceilings is complete.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1 General: Materials of first quality, no seconds or substandards, colours continuous throughout
thickness of yarn.
Ensure carpet conforms to CGSB 4-GP-129+ Corr & Amend except as noted, and CGSB 4-GP-
155M (flammability).
.2 Carpet: matching existing carpet to achieve continuous appearance between new and existing
carpet areas.
.3 Metal Edge Strips:

.1 Hammered surface aluminum installed.
.2 Floor flange minimum 38 mm wide, face minimum 16 mm wide.
.3 Finish: clear anodic coating.
.4 Metal transition / reducing strips tapered to meet abutting materials.
.5 Carpet protection: non-staining heavy duty kraft paper or 0.152 mm thick polyethylene film.
.6 Patching/Filler/Leveling Compound: Two components consisting of liquid latex and dry,

premixed filler, both supplied by same manufacturer. Use cementitous underlay to approval of
the Consultant.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE CONDITION

.1 Inspect substrate prior to start of work, ensure that surfaces are sound, cured, non-dusting,
smooth and free from defects likely to be detrimental to the work.
.2 Notify Consultant in writing of all defects likely to impair finished work. Start of work implies
acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
.1 Remove grease, dirt, and dust remaining, fill cracks, holes, and joints with approved joint filler
and rough grind to eliminate irregularities. Sweep and vacuum substrate clean.
.2 Ensure that carpet base has been installed prior to laying carpet.
.3 At all locations which receive flooring, verify condition of sub-floor and determine if the floor is
level, and before installation of flooring, spread underlayment where required to provide level
floors. Carpet to have flush leveled transition between other floor finishes.
3.3 INSTALLATION
.1 All primers, where recommended, shall be mandatory.
.2 All tools and methods of application shall be strictly in accordance with the requirements of the
NFCA Manual, in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations,
and as modified herein.

FINISHES PAGE 4
.3 Work shall be installed in accordance with approved manufacturer’s standard specifications,

supervised by a certified installer whose work has been approved by the manufacturer of the
materials being used.
.4 Install carpeting in strict accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.
.5 Install carpet smooth and free of bubbles, puckers, and other defects.
.6 Use materials from same dye lot. Ensure colour, pattern and texture match within any one
visual area. Maintain constant pile direction.
.7 Confirm lay-up pattern with Consultant before commencing any installation. Layout the work in
accordance with the drawings and specifications. Install the carpet to pattern and direction, as
directed by the Consultant.
.8 Install only after other trades and finish work is completed, and fitments, telephone and electrical
pedestal outlets are installed.
.9 Distribute variation in shade of pattern of production run to obtain uniform effect. Abrupt
variations will not be permitted.
.10 Do cutting and fitting as required. Cut and fit neatly into recesses and breaks around columns,
heating elements, piping, outlets and other projections through floor. Fill in strips not less than
450 mm x 900 mm.
.11 Seal finish edges of cut-outs and finish with positive binding methods to produce a 'trim free'
finish.
.12 During stretching and laying operations, continually roll seams using a steel segmented roller
weighing 45 kg (100 lbs.) minimum and ensure that seams lie perfectly flat.
.13 Butt edges of carpet to form a seam-free appearance, in strict accordance with recommended
trade practice.
.14 Lay wall to wall square with room axis unless otherwise shown or directed, with metal edge strip
at exposed edges.
.15 Lay carpet evenly over the entire area, to ensure a perfectly smooth installation, free from
burring, seam separation, puckers and crooked seams, distortions of pattern and/or weave,
uneven tension and other detrimental defects.
.16 Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable
flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.
.17 Terminate flooring at interior of door in openings where adjacent floor finish or color is dissimilar.

.1 Carpet manufacturer's representative: Visit the site before application to ensure subfloor is
properly prepared. Inspect rolls as they are opened to confirm carpet is as specified. Visit the
site from time to time to review installation. Examine installation prior to final acceptance and
report to the consultant any defects which would affect the performance of the carpet
installation.

FINISHES PAGE 5
.1 Immediately after installation remove all trimmings, clippings and other excess material from the
place of building.
.2 Remove spots from carpet surface with and approved spot remover, and thoroughly vacuum the
carpet and leave clean and perfect.
.3 Protect traffic areas of carpeted floors with carpet protection.

RICHMOND, BC SPECIAL WALL SURFACING
FINISHES PAGE 1
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DOCUMENTS

.1 Fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) paneling for wall surfaces, including trim accessories.

.3 Gypsum Board (Backing) Section 09 29 00
1.4 REFERENCES
.1 ASTM D2583 - Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by
Means of a Barcol Impressor.
.2 ASTM D5319 – Standard Specification for Glass-Fiber Reinforced Polyester Wall and
Ceiling Panels.
.3 ASTM D5420 - Standard Test Method for Impact Resistance of Flat, Rigid Plastic
Specimen by Means of a Striker Impacted by a Falling Weight (Gardner Impact).
.4 ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
.1 Product Technical Data: For each type of product required.
.2 Shop Drawings: Showing layout, profiles and product components, including anchorage,
accessories, finish colors, patterns and textures. Indicate location and dimension of joints and
fastener attachment. Include all accessories types and corresponding locations used on shop
drawings.
.3 Samples: Submit duplicate samples of each type of panel, trim and fastener in accordance with
Section 01 33 00.
.4 Certificates: Product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with

specified performance characteristics, criteria and physical requirements
.5 Test and Evaluation Reports: Showing compliance with specified performance

characteristics and physical properties.
.6 Maintenance Materials: Deliver to Owner extra materials from same production run as
products installed. Provide minimum of 1m2 for each type and colour of trim and grout for future
repairs. Package products with protective covering and identify with descriptive labels. Comply
with Division 1 requirements. Store in locations where directed by Consultant.

FINISHES PAGE 2
.7 Operation and Maintenance Data: For installed products including maintenance methods
and precautions against cleaning materials and methods detrimental to finishes and
performance.

.1 Installer Qualifications:
.1 At least five years experience in the installation of fiberglass reinforced plastic panels.
.2 Experience on at least five projects of similar size, type and complexity as this Project.
.3 Employer of workers for this Project who are competent in techniques required by
manufacturer for installation indicated.
.2 Obtain fiberglass reinforced panels, moldings and other accessories from a single
manufacturer.

.1 Ambient Conditions:
.1 Do not begin installation until building is enclosed, permanent heating and
cooling equipment is in operation, and residual moisture from plaster, concrete or
terrazzo work has dissipated.
.2 During installation, and within 48 hours prior to installation, maintain ambient
temperature and relative humidity within limits required by type of panel adhesive
used and recommendation of panel adhesive manufacturer.

.1 Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with
identification labels intact. Package sheets on skids or pallets for shipment to Project site.
.2 Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at

temperature and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer. Store panels in a
dry indoor location at Project site. Remove any foreign matter from face of panel by using
a soft bristle brush, avoiding abrasive action.
1.9 WARRANTY
.1 Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace FRP
panels that fail within specified warranty period.
.1 Failures shall include, but not be limited to substantial defects in material and
workmanship, rotting, rusting, corrosion, development of structural surface
cracks, or requiring painting or refinishing.
.2 Warranty Period: 10 (Ten) years from date of Substantial Completion.
.2 Installer's standard warranty for a period of 10 (Ten) years from date of Substantial
Completion in which installer agrees to repair or replace FRP panels that fail due to poor
workmanship or faulty installation within the specified warranty period.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS – FRP

.1 General: Fiberglass reinforced plastic panels complying with ASTM D5319.
.2 Coating: Multi-layer print, primer and finish coats or applied over-layer.
.3 Nominal Thickness: 2.3 mm (0.09 inch).
.4 Wall Panel Size: 1.2 m (4 feet) by 3 m (10 feet) or 2.4 m (8 feet) as required. Use largest sheet
size with minimum joint as required.

FINISHES PAGE 3
.5 Scratch Resistance: ASTM D2583, Barcol Hardness of 40~72.
.6 Izod Impact Strength of 72 ft. lbs/ in ASTM D 256.
.7 Flexural Strength – 1.0 x 104 psi per ASTM D 790. (7.0 kilogram-force/ square millimeter)
.8 Flexural Modulus – 3.1 x 105 psi per ASTM D 790. (217.9 kilogram-force/ square millimeter)
.9 Tensile Strength – 7.0 x 103 psi per ASTM D 638. (4.9 kilogram-force/ square millimeter)
.10 Tensile Modulus – 1.6 x 105 psi per ASTM D 638. (112.5 kilogram-force/ square millimeter.
.11 Water Absorption – 0.72% per ASTM D 570.
.12 Acceptable Product & Manufacturer:

.1 FRP: INDURO FRP by MARLITE
.1 Color: Blonde Echo 7939
.2 Location: Washrooms (Refer to Finish Schedule & drawings).
2.2 ACCESSORIES
.1 Aluminum Trim moldings:
.1 Inside Corner
.2 Outside Corner
.3 Division
.4 Edge
.5 Color: Anodized Aluminum.
.2 Panel Adhesive: As recommended by panel manufacturer for the required substrates.
.3 Panel Sealant: Single-component, mildew-resistant silicone, clear, as recommended by panel

manufacturer.
.4 Fasteners: Non-staining nylon drive rivets.

.1 Match panel colors.
.2 Length to suit project conditions.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
.1 General: Comply with manufacturer’s product data, including product technical bulletins,
and installation instructions in product catalogs and product packaging.
.2 Verify that substrates previously installed under other sections are acceptable for product
installation in accordance with FRP manufacturer’s instructions.
.1 Examine substrate surfaces to determine that corners are plumb and straight,
that surfaces are smooth, sound and uniform, that nails or screw fasteners are
countersunk, and that joints and cracks are filled flush and smooth with adjoining
surfaces.
.2 Do not begin panel installation until substrate surfaces are in satisfactory
condition.
3.2 PREPARATION
.1 Clean substrates to remove substances that could impair bond of adhesive, including oil,
grease, dirt, dust or other contamination.

FINISHES PAGE 4
.2 Condition panels by unpacking and placing in installation space no less than 24 hours before
installation.
.3 Lay out paneling before beginning installation. Locate panel joints to provide equal panel widths
at ends of walls and so that trimmed panels at corners are not less than 12 inches (300 mm)
wide.
3.3 NSTALLATION
.1 General: Comply with panel manufacturer’s Installation Guide and recommendations.
.2 Cut and drill panels with carbide tipped saw blades or drill bits, or cut with snips.
.3 Install panels with manufacturer’s recommended gap for panel field and corner joints.
.1 Pre-drill fastener holes in panels, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) greater in diameter than
fastener.
.2 Install panels in a full spread of adhesive. For trowel type and application of
adhesive, follow adhesive manufacturer’s recommendations.
.4 Install trim accessories with adhesive and nails or staples. Do not fasten through panels.
.5 Sealant:
.1 Fill grooves in trim accessories with sealant before installing panels and bed
inside corner trim in a bead of sealant.
.2 Remove excess sealant and smears as paneling is installed. Clean with solvent
recommended by sealant manufacturer and then wipe with clean dry cloths.
3.4 CLEANING
.1 Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas.
.2 Repair or replace any installed products that have been damaged.
.3 Clean installed panels in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions prior to Owner’s

Acceptance.
.4 Remove and lawfully dispose of construction debris from Project site.
3.5 PROTECTION
.1 Protect installed product and finish surfaces from damage during construction.

RICHMOND, BC PAINTING
FINISHES PAGE 1
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DOCUMENTS

.1 Paint all surfaces to remain exposed in the finished work whether specifically indicated or not,
except shop and factory finished items and those specifically indicated not to be painted. No
surface shall have less than one prime coat and two finish coats.
.1 Paint walls and ceilings, new and existing.
.2 Paint metal door frames, metal door and wood doors
.3 Paint exposed structures and structural ceilings, exposed pipings, conduits and
ductings.
.4 Paint existing wood window sills.
.2 Colour Scheme: colours to be selected by Consultant. Allowable manufacturer: Dulux Paints,

Benjamin Moore, Sherwin Williams, Cloverdale Paints.


.1 This Contractor shall have a minimum of five (5) years proven satisfactory experience and shall
show proof before commencement of work that he will maintain a qualified crew of painters
throughout the duration of the work. When requested, Contractor shall provide a list of the last
three comparable jobs including name and location, specifying authority/project manager, start
and completion dates and cost amount of the painting work.
.2 Only qualified journeymen who have a “Tradesman Qualification Certificate of Proficiency” shall
be engaged in painting and decorating work. Apprentices may be employed provided they work
under the direct supervision of a qualified journeyman in accordance with trade regulations.
.3 Conform to the standards contained in the Master Painters Institute Architectural Painting
Specification Manual, latest edition (hereafter referred to as MPI Painting Specification Manual)
for all painting products including preparation and application of materials. MPI Painting
Specification Manual as issued by the local MPI Accredited Quality Assurance Association
having jurisdiction.
.4 All paint manufacturers and products used shall be as listed under the “Approved Products”
section of the MPI Painting Specification manual.
.5 Other paint materials shall be the highest quality product of an approved manufacturer listed in
MPI Painting Specification Manual and shall be compatible with other coating materials as
required.
.6 Single-Source Responsibility: provide primers and undercoat paint produced by the same
manufacturer as the finish coat.

FINISHES PAGE 2
.7 All surfaces requiring painting or repainting shall be inspected by the inspection agency who
shall advise on all aspects of painting work including preparation, notifying the Consultant, the
Contractor and the Trade Contractor of any defects or problems prior to commencing painting
work or after the prime coat shows defects in the substrate, and as the work progresses.
.8 Standard of Acceptance:
.1 Wall: No defects visible from a distance of 1000mm at 90° to surface.
.2 Final coat to exhibit uniformity of colour and uniformity of sheen across full surface
area.
.9 Contractor to include cost for inspection by Master Painters Associations.
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

.1 Conform to workplace safety regulations for storage, mixing, application and disposal of all paint
related materials to requirements of those authorities having jurisdiction.
.2 Conform to safety precautions in accordance with the latest requirements to Industrial Health
and Safety Regulations, latest edition, of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.6 SAMPLES AND MOCK-UPS

.1 When requested by the Consultant or Paint Inspection Agency, provide duplicate minimum 300
mm (12”) square samples of surfaces or acceptable facsimiles requested painted with specified
paint or coating in colours, gloss/sheen and textures required to MPI Architectural Painting
Specification Manual standards for review and approval. When approved, samples shall
become acceptable standard of quality for appropriate on-site surface with one of each sample
retained on-site.
.2 When requested by the Consultant or Paint Inspection Agency, prepare and paint designated
surface, area, room or item (in each colour scheme) to requirements specified herein, with
specified paint or coating showing selected colors, gloss/sheen, textures and workmanship to
MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual standards for review and approval. When
approved, surface, area, room and/or items shall become acceptable standard of finish quality
and workmanship for similar on-site work.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
.1 All submittals shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 33 00 – Submittals.
.2 Submit a list of all painting materials and paint drawdowns of minimum size 3”x5” to the
Consultant for review prior to ordering materials.
.3 Submit two sets of Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) prior to commencement of work for
review and for posting at job site as required.
.4 Submit certification reports for ecologo paint products used.
.5 When requested, submit invoice list of all paint materials ordered for project work to Consultant
indicating manufacturer, types and quantities for verification and compliance with specification
and design requirements.
.6 When requested or required by painting of occupied areas, submit work schedule for various
stages of work for the Consultant’s review and Owner’s approval.
.7 At project completion provide an itemized list complete with manufacturer, paint type and colour
coding for all colours used for Owner’s later use in maintenance.
FINISHES PAGE 3
.8 At project completion provide properly packaged maintenance materials as noted herein and
obtain a signed receipt.

.1 Deliver all painting materials in sealed, original labeled containers bearing manufacturer’s
name, brand name, type of paint or coating and colour designation, standard compliance,
materials content as well as mixing and/or reducing and application requirements.
.2 Store all paint materials in original labeled containers in a secure (lockable), dry, heated and
well ventilated single designated area meeting the minimum requirements of both paint
manufacturer and authorities having jurisdiction and at a minimum ambient temperature of 45
degrees F (7 degrees C). Only material used on this project to be stored on site.
.3 Where toxic and/or volatile/explosive/flammable materials are being used, provide adequate
fireproof storage lockers and take all necessary precautions and post adequate warnings (e.g.,
no smoking) as required. Take adequate measures to prevent the release of volatile organic
compounds (VOC) into the atmosphere.
.4 Take all necessary precautionary and safety measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous
combustion and to protect the environment from hazard spills. Materials that constitute a fire
hazard (paints, solvents, drop clothes, etc.) shall be stored in suitable closed and rated
containers and removed from the site on a daily basis.
.5 Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, in regard to the use, handling,
storage and disposal of hazardous materials.
1.9 PROJECT / SITE REQUIREMENTS

.1 UNLESS specifically pre-approved by the Consultant, perform no painting or decorating work
when the ambient air and substrate temperatures are below 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) for
both interior and exterior work.
.2 Perform no painting or decorating work when the relative humidity is above 85% or when the
dew point is less than 5 degrees F (3 degrees C) variance between the air/surface temperature.
.3 Perform no painting or decorating work when the maximum moisture content of the substrate
exceeds:
• 12% for concrete and masonry (clay and concrete brick / block).
• 15% for wood.
• 12% for plaster and gypsum board.
.4 Conduct all moisture tests using a properly calibrated electronic Moisture Meter, except test
concrete floors for moisture using a simple “cover patch test.”
.5 Test concrete, masonry and plaster surfaces for alkalinity as required.
NOTE: Concrete and masonry surfaces must be installed at least 28 days prior to painting and
decorating work and must be visually dry on both sides. This is not to be construed as
including a “wetting down” process for Latex.
.6 Perform no painting or decorating work unless a minimum lighting level of 323 Lux (30 foot
candles) is provided on surfaces to be painted or decorated. Adequate lighting facilities shall
be provided by the General Contractor.

FINISHES PAGE 4
.7 Perform no painting or decorating work unless adequate continuous ventilation and sufficient
heating facilities are in place to maintain ambient air and substrate temperatures above 50
degrees F (10 degrees C) for 24 hours before, during and after paint application. Provide
supplemental ventilating and heating equipment if ventilation and heating from existing system
is inadequate to meet minimum requirements.
.8 Apply paint only to dry, clean, properly cured and adequately prepared surfaces in areas where
dust is no longer generated by construction activities such that airborne particles will not affect
the quality of finished surfaces.
1.10 SCHEDULING
.1 Schedule painting operations to prevent disruption of and by other trades.
.2 Schedule painting operations to prevent disruption of occupants in and about the building.
Obtain written authorization from Consultant for changes in work schedule.
1.11 EXISTING CONDITIONS

.1 Before starting work ensure that surfaces are clean and dry and free of defects before
commencing painting. Starting work shall imply acceptance of surfaces for painting.
1.12 PROTECTION
.1 Protect adjacent work from droppings, overrun, damage or disfigurement.
.2 Coordinate with Division 16 to remove electrical plates, surface hardware, fittings and
fastenings, prior to painting operations. These items shall be carefully stored, cleaned and
replaced on completion of work in each area. No solvent shall be used to clean hardware that
will remove the permanent lacquer finish on some of these items
.3 Protect items that are permanently attached such as Fire Labels on doors and frames.
.4 Move and cover furniture and portable equipment as necessary to carry out painting operations.
Replace as painting operations progress.
.5 As painting operations progress, place “WET PAINT” signs in occupied areas.
.6 Make good all damage caused without extra expense to Owner and to Consultant's satisfaction.
1.13 GUARANTEE
.1 Furnish either the local MPI Accredited Quality Assurance Association’s two (2) year guarantee,
or, alternatively, a 100% two (2) year Maintenance Bond - both in accordance with MPI Painting
Manual requirements. The Maintenance Bond shall warrant that all painting work has been
performed in accordance with MPI Painting Manual requirements.
.2 All painting and decorating work shall be in accordance with MPI Painting Manual requirements
and shall be inspected by the local MPI Accredited Quality Assurance Association’s Paint
Inspection Agency (inspector), whether using either the MPI Accredited Quality Assurance
Association’s guarantee, or the Maintenance Bond option. The cost for such inspections, and
for either the local MPI Accredited Quality Assurance Association’s Guarantee, or the
Maintenance Bond, shall be included in the Base Bid Price.
.3 Painting and decorating Subcontractors choosing the Maintenance Bond option shall provide a
maintenance bond consent from a reputable surety company licensed to do business in
Canada. Cash or certified check are not acceptable in lieu of surety consent.

FINISHES PAGE 5
1.14 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

.1 At project completion provide 4 litres (1 gallon) of each type and colour of paint from the same
production run (batch mix) used in unopened cans, properly labeled and identified for Owner’s
later use in maintenance. Store where directed.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1 All materials shall be manufacturer's best quality products, and in accordance with the MPI
Architectural Painting Specification Manual “Approved Product” listing and shall be from a single
manufacturer for each system used.
.2 Paints shall be ready-mixed unless otherwise specified, except that any coating in paste or
powder form, or to field-catalyzed shall be field-mixed in accordance with the directions of its
manufacturer. Pigments shall be fully ground and shall maintain a soft paste consistency in the
vehicle during storage that can and shall be dispersed readily and uniformly by paddle to a
complete homogeneous mixture.
.3 The paint shall have good flowing and brushing properties and shall dry or cure free of streaks
or sags, to yield the desired finish specified.
.4 Shellac and turpentine to be best quality, and to be compatible with other best materials as
required.
.5 All materials and paints shall be LEED compliance with low / no VOC content.
.6 Where required, paint products shall meet the requirements of the Environmental Choice
Program, Department of the Environment. Water based paints to be certified to ECP-12-89.
2.2 EQUIPMENT
.1 Painting and decorating equipment – to best trade standards for type of product and application.
.2 Spray painting equipment – of ample capacity, suited to the type and consistency of paint or
coating being applied and kept clean and in good working order at all times.
2.3 MIXING AND TINTING

.1 Unless otherwise specified, paints shall be ready-mixed. Re-mix prior to application to ensure
colour and gloss uniformity.
.2 Paste, powder or catalyzed paint mixes shall be mixed in strict accordance with manufacturer’s
written instructions.
.3 Perform all colour tinting operations prior to delivery of paint to site.
.4 Where thinner is used, addition shall not exceed paint manufacturer’s recommendations.
2.4 GLOSS
.1 Paint gloss shall be defined as the sheen rating of applied paint, in accordance with the
following values:
Gloss Level 1 A traditional matte finish - flat Max 5 units, and Max 10 units
Gloss Level 2 A high side sheen flat – a “velvet-like” finish Max 10 units, and 10-35 units
Gloss Level 3 A traditional eggshell-like finish 10-25 units, and 10-35 units

FINISHES PAGE 6
Gloss Level 4 A ‘satin-like finish 20-35 units, and Min 35 units

Gloss Level 5 A traditional semi-gloss 35-70 units,and
Gloss Level 6 A traditional gloss 70-85 units, and
Gloss Level 7 A high gloss More than 85 units
2.5 FINISHES
.1 Colours shall be as selected by the Consultant from a manufacturer’s full range of colours.
Color to either match existing or to be selected by Architect.
.2 Access doors, prime coated butts and other prime painted hardware (e.g., door closers),
registers, radiators and covers, exposed piping and electrical panels shall be painted to match
adjacent surfaces (ie, colour, texture and sheen), unless otherwise noted or where pre-finished.
.3 The inside of light valences shall be painted gloss white.
.4 The inside of all ductwork behind louvres, grilles and diffusers for a minimum of 460mm (18”) or
beyond sightline, whichever is greater, shall be painted using flat black (non-reflecting) paint,
unless otherwise noted.
.5 The consultant shall decide the extent of all colour areas, where the colour shall terminate or
commence, and where colour and texture shall match or contrast with adjacent areas.
2.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SYSTEMS – NEW CONSTRUCTION

.1 Galvanized metal: doors, frames, misc. steel, and pipes.
.1 INT 5.3M High performance architectural latex, gloss level 4
.2 Plaster and gypsum board: gypsum wallboard, drywall, “sheet rock type material”, and textured
finishes:
.1 INT 9.2B High performance architectural latex finish, gloss level 3 finish for wall typical,
gloss level 1 for ceiling.
.3 Dressed Lumber: doors, cabinet, millwork:

.1 INT 6.3A - High performance architectural latex gloss level 4
2.7 INTERIOR REPAINTING SYSTEMS

.1 Galvanized Metal: doors, frames, misc steel, pipes, ducts, etc.
.1 RIN 5.3J High performance architectural latex (over w.b. galvanized primer) gloss level
4 coating.
.2 Plaster and Gypsum Board Surfaces: gypsum wallboard, drywall, “sheet rock type material”,
etc.
.1 RIN 9.2B High performance architectural latex (over latex primer sealer), gloss level 3
finish for wall typical, gloss level 1 finish for ceiling typical.
.3 Dressed Lumber: doors, cabinet, millwork:

.1 RIN 6.3A – High performance architectural latex, gloss level 4 finish
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 CONDITION OF SURFACES

.1 Prior to commencement of work of this section, thoroughly examine surfaces scheduled to be
painted.
.2 Report in writing to the Consultant any condition adversely affecting this work.
FINISHES PAGE 7
.3 Do not proceed with Work until all such defects have been corrected and surfaces are
acceptable to the Painting Contractor.
.4 Commencement of work shall be held to imply acceptance of surfaces except as qualified

herein.
3.2 PREPARATION
Before applying the paint, the various surfaces shall be prepared as described below:
.1 Steel and Iron: work must be thoroughly cleaned - preferably by power tools - to remove all dirt,
rust, scale, gypsum cement, concrete or any other foreign matter before paint is applied.
Grease, oil, etc., shall be removed by washing with a suitable solvent. Iron and steel surfaces
shall in general be primed with red oxide zinc chromate metal primer where not previously shop
primed. Galvanized metal surfaces shall be washed with a galvanized etch, rinsed off
thoroughly and primed with a first coat metal primer. Touch up shop paint primer on steel to
CGSB 85-GP-16M.
.2 Drywall: Cut out scratches, cracks and abrasions in surfaces and adjoining trim as required.
Fill with patching compound. Finish flush with adjoining surface and sand smooth and even
when dry. Prime surface to show defects, if any. Continue painting only after defects are
corrected.
.3 Wood: Surfaces to be painted shall be clean and free of loose dirt, dust or grit before painting is
started. Remove loose or peeling paint and apply undercoat over bare wood. Knots, pitch
streaks and sappy spots shall be first cleaned of residue and touched up with shellac where the
finish coat is paint or enamel. Putty nail holes, cracks, etc., in woodwork after the first coat is
applied. Paint tops, bottoms, and edges of doors as specified for faces of same after doors are
fitted.
3.3 APPLICATION
.1 Use method of paint application generally as accepted by the trade method.
.2 Painting coats specified are intended to cover surfaces satisfactorily when applied in strict
accordance with recommendations. Apply each coat at the proper consistency. Paint more than
3 coats if required to achieve consistent dark accent color or cover existing color.
.3 Sand lightly and dust between coats to achieve required finish.
.4 Do not apply finishes on surfaces that are not sufficiently dry. Each coat of finish should be dry
and hard before a following coat is applied unless the manufacturer's directions state otherwise.
.5 Back prime interior woodwork which is to receive a paint or enamel finish upon arrival at the job
site with enamel undercoater paint. Finish tops of cabinet and projecting ledges, both above
and below sightlines as specified for surrounding surfaces.
.6 Immediately after fitting and sanding and before hanging, seal the entire door with undercoater,
stain or varnish as specified, including the top, bottom, opening and hardware recess edges.
Finish with at least two coats of good quality oil based paint, varnish or lacquer as specified.
.7 Paint mechanical and electrical equipment, pipes conduit, hangers, ducts and access panels in
rooms scheduled to be painted.
.8 Paint exposed steel framing, decking, joists and bracing in rooms scheduled to be painted.

FINISHES PAGE 8
.9 Apply paint and decorating material in a workmanlike manner using skilled and trade qualified
applicators as noted under Quality Assurance.
.10 Minimum painting standards shall be in accordance with MPI Architectural Painting
Specification Manual Premium Grade finish requirements.
.11 Paint all surfaces requiring paint or stain finish to minimum MPI Architectural Painting
Specification Manual finish requirements with application methods in accordance with best trade
practices for type and application of materials used.
.12 Apply paint and coatings within an appropriate time frame after cleaning when environmental
conditions encourage flash-rusting, rusting, contamination or the manufacturer’s paint
specifications require earlier applications.
.13 Painting coats specified are intended to cover surfaces satisfactorily when applied at proper
consistency and in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
.14 Tint each coat of paint progressively lighter to enable confirmation of number of coats.
.15 Apply a minimum of four coats of paint where deep or bright colours are used to achieve
satisfactory results.
.16 Sand and dust between each coat to provide an anchor for next coat and to remove defects
visible from a distance up to 1000mm (39”).
.17 Prime coat of stain or varnish finishes may be reduced in accordance with manufacturer’s
directions.
.18 Do not paint over nameplates of mechanical and electrical equipment.
.19 Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for equipment before installations. Leave
equipment in original finish except for touch-up as required, and paint conduits, mounting
accessories and other unfinished items.

.1 Field inspection of painting operations to be carried out by Paint Inspection Agency.
.2 Advise General Contractor when surfaces and applied coating is ready for inspection. Do not
proceed with subsequent coats until previous coat has been approved.
.3 Co-operate with inspection firm and provide access to areas of work.
3.5 RESTORATION
.1 Clean and re-install all hardware items removed before undertaking painting operations.
.2 Remove protective coverings and warning signs as soon as practical after operations cease.
Remove masking tape and adhesive residue from protected surfaces.
.3 Remove paint splashings on exposed surfaces that were not painted. Remove smears and
spatter immediately as operations progress, using compatible solvent.
.4 Protect freshly completed surfaces from paint droppings and dust. Avoid scuffings newly applied
paint.

FINISHES PAGE 9
.5 Restore areas used for storage, cleaning, mixing and handling of paint to clean condition.
3.6 TOUCH-UP
.1 At completion, touch-up and restore damaged and defective finishes.
.2 Allow for additional coats to produce intended finished appearance.
3.7 CLEANING
.1 Upon completion, remove from the building materials and debris created by this work. During
the progress and on completion of the work carefully clean and remove paint from adjoining
surfaces, hardware, glass, etc. The whole shall be left in perfect condition. Touch up and make
good any paint work damaged by other trades.
3.8 COLOUR SCHEDULE

.1 Colour Schedule:
.1 PT-1 Dulux Paints Commercial White DLX 1025-1
.2 PT-2 Dulux Paints Silver Dollar DLX 1022-3
.3 PT-3 Dulux Paints Ocean Cruise DLX 1236-4
.4 PT-4 Dulux Paints Rustic Pottery DLX 1193-6
.5 PT-5 Dulux Paints Glorious Gold DLX 1107-6
.6 PT-6 Dulux Paints Wild Wilderness DLX 1019-5
.7 PT-7 Dulux Paints Scandinavian Sky DLX 1149-3
.8 PT-8 Dulux Paints High Dive DLX 1236-5
.9 PT-9 Dulux Paints Stepping Stone DLX 1010-4
.2 Refer to Finishes Plan, Reflected Ceiling Plans and Interior Elevations for general field colors
and accent colors area of application.

RICHMOND, BC EPOXY COATING
FINISHES PAGE 1
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DOCUMENTS

.1 Application of epoxy coating system including surface preparation, primer and finish coats in
Washroom/Shower Room walls and ceiling.

.1 Joints Sealants Section 07 92 00
.3 Resinous Flooring Section 09 67 23
1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1 Product Data: submit manufacturer’s technical data, installation instructions, and general
recommendations for each resinous wall material required. Include certification indicating
compliance of materials with requirements.
.2 Samples: submit, for verification purposes, 100 mm square samples of each type and colour of
epoxy coating system required, applied to a rigid backing, in colour and finish indicated.
.3 Applicator Certificate: Submit "Authorized Applicator" certificate issued to system applicator by

coating material manufacturer.

.1 Single Source Responsibility: obtain primary epoxy coating materials including primers, resins,
hardening agents, finish or sealing coats from a single manufacturer with not less than ten years
of successful experience in manufacturing and installing principal materials described in this
section. Contractor shall have completed at least five projects of similar size and complexity.
Provide secondary materials only of type and from source recommended by manufacturer of
primary materials.
.2 Only applicators trained by the system manufacturer are to be employed to install this system.
.3 Pre-installation conference:
.1 General contractor shall arrange a meeting not less than thirty days prior to starting
work.
.2 Attendance:
.1 General contractor
.2 Architect/Owner’s representative
.3 Manufacturer/Installer’s representative
.4 Mock-up: On site, fabricate a 4x8’ mock-up panel to demonstrate quality of finished wall system,
complying with manufacturer's instructions. Install panel where directed by architect/engineer.
Maintain panel as a standard of quality for all installations.

.1 Material shall be delivered to job site and checked by wall contractor for completeness and
shipping damage prior to job start.

FINISHES PAGE 2
.2 All materials used shall be factory pre-weighed and pre-packaged in single, easy-to-manage
batches to eliminate on site mixing errors. No on-site weighing or volumetric measurements
allowed.
.3 Deliver product in factory packages, clearly marked with manufacturer's identification, printed
instructions, lot numbers and shelf life expiration date for each component.
.4 Store materials at 50˚F to 90˚F (10˚C to 32˚C) in dry environment away from sunlight, heat, or
other hazards.

.1 Provide interior environment suitable for installation of resinous finish. Provide supplemental
ventilation as required to control odours.
.2 Ensure that surfaces to receive coating products are above 13°C(55°F) or below 29°C (85°F)
for a minimum of 48 hours prior to installation.
.3 Substrate must be free of hydrostatic, capillary or moisture vapor pressure. Substrates in

contact with ground must have a properly installed, effective vapor barrier to help prevent
potential problems resulting from hydrostatic, capillary or moisture vapor pressure. Concrete
must contain less than 3% moisture when tested per ASTM D 1864.
.4 Do not apply sealers or membrane curing agents to concrete. Moisture curing of concrete is
recommended.
.5 Concretes containing lightweight aggregates are not recommended substrates.
.6 Provide ventilation, lighting and clean, drinkable water supply.
.7 Advise other trades of fixtures and fittings not to be installed until system is cured, such as:
radiators, painting, decorating, floor-supported equipment or cabinetwork, caulking, plumbing,
fixtures, etc.
.8 Work areas shall be kept free of traffic and no trades shall be permitted in rooms during the
application and curing of the coating. Provide temporary barriers and supervision necessary to
control traffic during coating operations.
.9 Protect adjacent surfaces from damage resulting from work of this trade. If necessary, mask
and/or cover adjacent surfaces, fixtures, equipment, etc. by suitable means.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1 General: A Technical Representative from the manufacturer shall be available on three days
notice at the demand of the project consultant to provide advice during the installation of the
flooring system to ensure that the applicator follows the installation recommendations of the
manufacturer.
.2 Epoxy Wall Coating System (EWC):

.1 Location: Full height wall to ceiling and ceiling in Washroom/Shower room. Refer to
drawings and Finish Schedule.
.2 Two components, 90% solids content epoxy coating, two component, high solids low
VOC, water based epoxy finish coat. C/w antimicrobial and anti-fungicidal additives.
.3 Colour: Ceiling – White; Walls – RAL 5024.
FINISHES PAGE 3
.4 Approved Product: Sikagard Duroplast by Sika.

.1 Primer: Sikagard Duroplast PS
.2 Coating: Sikagard Duroplast 100 (two coats @ 6-8 mils d.f.t.)
.3 Finish Coats: Sikagard Duroplast 150 (one coat @ 3-4 mils d.f.t.)
.3 Sealant: epoxy polyurethane, non-sag joint filler for vertical surfaces – Sikaflex 2c NS EZ mix.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
.1 Before starting work, ensure that environmental and site conditions are suitable for application
and curing.
.2 Inspect surfaces for acceptability of levelness, moisture content and other critical factors at time
of installation.
.3 Report in writing to architect/engineer, with copy to manufacturer, of deficiencies that could

impair work. Surfaces must be approved by the certified contractor prior to application of the
system.
.4 Do not apply coating system if ambient temperature is below 10°C (50°F) or above 32°C (90°F)
or if relative humidity is above 80%.
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION

.1 Prepare surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
.2 Remove concrete laitance by steel shot blasting, grit blasting, or other method approved by
manufacturer.
.3 Surface must be clean, sound and dry prior to application.
.4 Pre-fill surface irregularities, holes and cracks in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations.
3.3 MIXING
.1 Comply with manufacturer's instructions for mixing procedures.
.2 Pre-mix each component before every batch to ensure uniformity.
.3 Carefully measure and mix the components together.
3.4 INSTALLATION
.1 Follow manufacturer's written instructions.
.2 Prime entire surface with recommended primer.
.3 Apply each component of epoxy coating system in compliance with manufacturer's directions to
produce a pinhole free surface. Total dry film thickness of epoxy finish coat only to be 18 to 20
mils uninterrupted except at expansion joints.
.4 Apply grout coat(s) and topcoat(s) at manufacturer's recommended coverage to provide

uniform, dense surface.

FINISHES PAGE 4
.5 Apply urethane caulking at stainless steel cap strip of epoxy base to provide continuous
moisture proof system.
.6 Allow proper cure time for each installation step.
.7 Allow the finished system to cure for a minimum of 7 days from completion before putting into
service.
3.5 CURING, PROTECTION AND CLEANING

.1 Cure resinous wall materials in compliance with manufacturer’s directions, taking care to
prevent contamination during stages of application and prior to completion of curing process.
Close area of application for a minimum of 24 hours.
.2 Protect resinous wall materials from damage and wear during construction operation. Where
temporary covering is required for this purpose only, comply with manufacturer’s
recommendations for protective materials and method of application.
.3 Cleaning: remove temporary covering and clean epoxy coating system just prior to final
inspection. Use cleaning materials and procedures recommended by epoxy wall coating
system manufacturer.

RICHMOND, BC VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES
SPECIALTIES PAGE 1
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DOCUMENTS

.1 Whiteboards.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
.2 Clearly indicate component size and configuration, attachment details, accessories, colour and
finish.
3 Manufacturer’s written product data indicating compliance with specified materials required.
.4 Manufacturer’s written installation instructions.
.5 Samples:
.1 300mm x 300mm samples of each whiteboard materials required.
.2 300mm in length samples of trim, tray, and end caps required.

.1 Take delivery, uncrate and store in safe and dry space until ready for installation.
.2 Store on edge, in warm, dry and protected area.
.3 Store product within original package to prevent damage to boards.
.4 Comply with manufacturer’s written recommendations.
1.6 WARRANTY
.1 Warrant in writing surfaces to provide suitable writing surfaces for period of 50 Years from date
of Substantial Performance.
.2 Warrant in writing panels against delamination for period of five (5) Years from date of
.3 Submit manufacturer’s limited five-year written warranty against manufacturing defects for
whiteboard.

.1 Applicator:
Installation by skilled commercial applicators with no less than three years of documented
experience installing same type of specified product and extent required.

SPECIALTIES PAGE 2
.2 Fire Hazard Classification:

Provide materials that comply with NFPA Class A fire rating when tested in accordance with
ASTM E 84 using GRC Board as substrate. Magnetism & magnetism grid: Class A and
magnetism in-line: Class B Identify components with markings from testing and inspection
organization.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1 Magnetic Whiteboard - WB
.1 Porcelain Enamel Markerboard Surface: Porcelain enamel LCS³ markerboard surface
shall be manufactured in accordance with Porcelain Enamel Institute’s specification.
Cold-rolled steel surface is pre-cleaned and treated to ensure complete bond between
the steel and the porcelain. During a 3-coat process, both steel surfaces receive a
ground coat of porcelain enamel. A color cover coat of porcelain enamel is applied to
one surface of the ground coat and is fusion bonded to the steel substrate at
temperature necessary to reduce steel and porcelain stresses and achieve superior
enamel bond and hardness.
.2 Face Sheet: LCS³ Porcelain Enamel Steel Skin.
.3 Laminations (where required): Shall be hot-type neoprene contact adhesive applied to
both surfaces automatically. Each substrate shall have a minimum of 80% covering with
1.5-2.0 dry mils of adhesive. Panel components shall have uniform pressure applied
mechanically over entire area. Laminations shall be made by face sheet manufacturer.
.4 Color: White No.100.
.5 Accepts magnetic accessories.
.6 Extruded Aluminum Trim Profile: 5/16” wide with eased edge.
.7 Trim finish: Satin anodized.
.8 Fabrication: Shop assembly where possible.
.9 Acceptable Products & Manufacturer: Claridge Concept Markerboard by Claridge
Products and Equipment, Inc.
.10 Location: Refer to drawings.
.2 Whiteboard Schedule:
.1 WB-1: 610mm H x 915mm W (24 in x 36 in)
.2 WB-2: 915mm H x 1220mm W (36 in x 48 in)
.3 WB-3: 1220mm H x 2440mm W (48 in x 96 in)
.4 WB-4: 1220mm H x 3660mm W (48 in x 144 in)
.3 Accessories:
.1 Fixed Marker Tray: Concept Markerboard tray by same manufacturer. Tray to be full
width of markerboard for all whiteboards. Acceptable product: Claridge #CP-TRAY-
Add.
.2 Dry-Erase Kit: 4 dry-erase markers and one Microfiber cloth by some manufacturer.
Allow one kit per whiteboard. Acceptable product: Claridge #LCS668-4.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 PROJECT CONDITION

.1 Provide not less than 80 foot-candles per square foot lighting level measured mid-height at
substrate surfaces.
3.2 EXAMINATION
.1 Notify the contractor and consultant in writing of any conditions detrimental to the proper and
timely completion of the installation.
.2 Beginning of installation means acceptance of surface conditions.

SPECIALTIES PAGE 3
3.3 INSTALLATION
.1 All work shall be performed according to manufacturer’s written instructions.
.2 Stop installation of material that is questionable in appearance and notify the manufacturer’s
representative for an inspection.
.3 Installation shall be performed by skilled mechanics experienced in this line of work.
.4 Install work square, plumb, straight, true and accurately fitted with hairline joints.
.5 Install work at locations as per approved shop drawings. Where locations not specified, install
work centred on wall and at locations as confirmed by Consultant.
.6 Include all anchors, dowels and fastenings necessary to anchor work together and/or to work of
other trades. Anchor in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
.7 Verify locations, mounting heights and dimensions of all units before installation.
.8 Refer to drawings for sizes, locations and quantities of units.
.9 Install panels using approved manufacturers adhesive and according to manufacturer’s written
installation instruction.
.10 Finish exposed surfaces of aluminum components in accordance with Aluminum Association
Designation System for Aluminum Finishes, clear anodized, Class 2.
.11 Make finished boards flat and rigid.
3.4 CLEANING
.1 Upon completion of the work, remove surplus materials, rubbish, and debris resulting from the
installation. Leave areas in neat, clean and orderly condition.
.2 Clean & maintain finished work according to manufacturer’s written instructions.

RICHMOND, BC PROTECTIVE WALL COVERING
SPECIALTIES PAGE 1
1.0 GENERAL

.1 This section includes labor, materials and other services necessary to complete vinyl wall
protection covering panels, including trim accessories.
.2 Conform with requirements of all Sections of Division 1, General Requirements, as it applies to

the work of this Section.

1.3 REFERENCES
.1 General: Standards listed by reference, including revisions by issuing authority, form a part of this
specification section to extent indicated. Standards listed are identified by issuing authority,
authority abbreviation, designation number, title or other designation established by issuing
authority. Standards subsequently referenced herein are referred to by issuing authority
abbreviation and standard designation.
.2 American Society for Testing & Materials (ASTM):

.1 AST ASTM E 84-05 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials. CLASS A
.2 ASTM D5420 Gardner Impact Exceeds 80 inch pounds
1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s current printed product literature, specifications, installation
instructions, and field reports in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2 Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings to indicate materials, details, and accessories in
accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures including but limited to the following:
.1 Submit a layout diagram indicating the location of each panel and joining method.
.1 Include all accessories types and corresponding locations used on layout diagram.
.3 Samples: Submit duplicate sample pieces of wall protection covering panel material, as well as
accessory pieces in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.4 Quality Assurance Submittals: Submit the following:

.1 Test Reports: Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance
characteristics and physical properties.
.2 Manufacturer’s Instructions: Current published manufacturer’s installation and
maintenance instructions.
.3 Manufacturer’s Field Reports: Specified herein.
.5 Closeout Submittals: Submit the following:

.1 Operation and Maintenance Data: Operation and maintenance data for installed products
in accordance with Division 1 Closeout Submittals (Maintenance Data and Operation
Data) Section. Include methods for maintaining installed products and precautions
against cleaning materials and methods detrimental to finishes and performance.
.2 Warranty: Warranty documents specified herein.

.1 Installer Qualifications: Installer experienced in performing work of this section who has
specialized in installation of work similar to that required for this project.

SPECIALTIES PAGE 2
.1 Training: Installer who has a min. of five years of experience installing same type of wall
protection covering panels.
.2 Mock-ups: Install at project site a job mock-up using specified products and manufacturer
approved installation methods. Obtain Owner’s and Consultant’s acceptance of finish color,
texture and pattern, and workmanship standards.
.1 Mock-Up Size: 2 full size adjoining panels.
.2 Maintenance: Maintain mock-up during construction for workmanship comparison;
remove and legally dispose of mock-up when no longer required.
.3 Incorporation: Mock-up may be incorporated into final construction upon Owner’s
approval.
.3 Pre-installation Meeting: Conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements,

substrate conditions, manufacturer’s installation instructions and manufacturer’s warranty
requirements.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING

.1 Ordering: Comply with manufacturer’s ordering instructions and lead time requirements to avoid
construction delays.
.2 Deliver, store and handle wall protection panels in accordance to manufacturer’s instructions.
.3 Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification

labels intact.
.4 Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions, at temperature and
humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer.
.5 Store panels in temperature-controlled environments. Leave protective blue film on panel until
ready to use.

.1 Deposit all packaging materials in appropriate container on site for recycling or reuse.
.2 Avoid using landfill waste disposal procedures when recycling facilities are available.
.3 Keep all discarded packaging away from children.

.1 Temperature Requirements: If storage temperature is below 65F (18C), the wall protection panel
must be moved to a warmer place and allowed to reach this temperature before installation. For
further information, refer to manufacturer’s current Installation Guide.
.2 Maintain air temperature and structural base temperature at installation area between 65F (18C)
and 80F (26C) for 48 hours before, during and 24 hours after installation.
1.9 WARRANTY
.1 Project Warranty: Refer to Conditions of the Contract for project warranty provisions.
.2 Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit, for Owner’s acceptance, manufacturer’s standard warranty

document executed by authorized company official. Manufacturer’s warranty is in addition to, and
not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under Contract Documents.
.3 Warranty Period shall be 1 year commencing on Date of Substantial Completion.
1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS

.1 Provide extra materials of product and adhesives in accordance with Section 01 77 00 - Closeout

SPECIALTIES PAGE 3
Procedures.
.2 Provide 2 full size panels, 2% of each trim types and, 2% of adhesive of extra materials and from
same production run as installed materials.
.3 Clearly identify each wall panel and each container of adhesive.
.4 All maintenance materials to be in one piece as packaged by the manufacturer.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 PVCu WALL PROTECTION COVERING PANEL (WP)

.1 Material: Semi-rigid, homogenous extruded PVCu panel, no plasticizers or fillers.
.2 Thickness: 2mm (0.08”).
.3 Wall Panel Size: 4’ x 9’ or 4’ x 10’ as required. Use largest sheet size with minimum joint as
required.
.4 Impact Resistance: ASTM D5420, exceeds 64 inch pounds.
.5 Fire & Smoke Performance: ASTM E84-08, Class A; CAN/ULC – S102.2, tested.
.6 VOC Emissions: CA 01350, passed.
.7 Mold Resistance: ASTM D3273, excellent – score of 10.
.8 Fungi Resistance: ASTM G21, passes rating 0.
.9 UV Exposure: ASTM G154, tested.
.10 HACCP: certified.
.11 USDA / FDA / CIFA: Compliant.
.12 Acceptable Product and Color: Puraguard by Altro; color Salt (White).
.13 Location: Refer to Finishes Plan & Finish Schedule.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
.1 Standard trim moldings for specified product by same manufacturer including:
.1 1-Part Joint Strip – for vertical joints between panels.
.2 1-Part Start and Edge Trim – for panel top and sides.
.3 L-shaped External Corner Cover – for all external corners.
.4 F-shaped Internal/External Corner Trim – for all internal corners; external corners where
required, and all other external corners with WP on one side and PT(painted) drywall on
the other side.
.5 Cap tile strip – for transition between integral coved base and panels.
.6 All trim moldings to be matching color to wall protection panels.
.2 Panel Adhesive: Use only approved adhesives and trowel notches as recommended by panel
manufacturer for the required substrates and application.
.3 Panel Sealant: Use Sanitary Sealant from same manufacturer recommended for wall protection
panels.
.4 Maintenance Cleaner: Include one bottle each of the following cleaner from same manufacturer:

SPECIALTIES PAGE 4
.1 PVC Cleaner
.2 AltroClean 44, 5 Liters.
.3 Anti-Static Solution in spray bottle, 500ml.
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY

.1 Source Quality: Obtain wall products from a single manufacturer.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS

.1 Compliance: Comply with manufacturer’s product data, including product technical bulletins,
product catalog, installation instructions and product label instructions for installation.
3.2 EXAMINATION
.1 Site Verification of Conditions: Verify substrate conditions, which have been previously installed
under other sections, are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions.
3.3 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION

.1 Walls should be smooth and level. High points must be removed and low points filled with filler
intended for the substrate and environmental conditions.
.2 Surfaces must be permanently dry and free from all substances that may contribute to adhesive
bond failure.
.3 Remove loose paint and conduct an adhesive bond test with paint.
.4 Exterior walls must be adequately damp-proofed and insulated.
.5 Dry wall substrates should be paint ready.
3.4 PREPARATION
.1 All surfaces must be free from dust and cleaned prior to wall protection panel installation. The
working environment must also be dust free. Failure to comply with these conditions will reduce
the bond strength between the adhesive and substrate, and may cause the wall protection panels
to de-bond.
.2 All electrical switches, power points etc., should be in a first fix / installation state. All electrical
equipment should only be moved or altered by a qualified electrician.
.3 All plumbing should have pipe-work removed to a first fix or installation state and “tails” left
protruding from the substrate. Wall protection panels can then be drilled and slid over the pipe
tails. All holes should be drilled 1/8” (3mm) oversize to allow for expansion, then sealed with
same manufacturer’s Sanitary Sealant. Plumbing should always be done by a qualified plumber.
.4 Hot pipes and steam pipes should be insulated and a 1/8” to 1/4” (3-6mm) expansion gap should
be created when installing panels around these pipes, then sealed with Sanitary Sealant.
.5 All pipes, fixing bolts, etc. extending through the wall protection panels should have a minimum
1/8” (3mm) expansion gap and be sealed using Sanitary Sealant.
.6 If fitting to door frames, these must be in place prior to installation of wall protection panels.
.7 Prior to installation, complete all painting which comes in contact with wall protection panels, as
sealant used at junctions is non-paintable.
.8 Panels should be stored flat and be pre-conditioned a minimum of 24 hours in ambient

SPECIALTIES PAGE 5
temperatures similar to the prevailing operational conditions.
.9 The panels must be stored on a level flat surface off the ground (risk of condensation on the
panels if stored on damp surfaces). Storage on uneven surfaces could cause the panels to distort
prior to installation.
.10 First, check the room using a 6’ (2 m) level to ensure all walls are flat, paying particular attention
to the corners, window reveals, and door entrances. These need to be inspected to ensure they
are free of any debris or irregularities, which could prevent the panels from laying flat to the
substrate after the adhesive has been applied and the panel installed.
3.5 INSTALLATION
.1 PVC Wall Installation: Install wall protection panels in accordance with the current
manufacturer’s Installation Guide.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

.1 Manufacturer’s Field Services: Upon Owner’s request, provide manufacturer’s field service
consisting of product use recommendations and periodic site visits for inspection of product
installation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
3.7 CLEANING
.1 Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas.
.2 Repair or replace any installed products that have been damaged.
.3 Clean installed panels in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions prior to Owner’s

Acceptance.
.4 Clean the panels with an anti-static solution to reduce the buildup of static.
.5 Remove and lawfully dispose of construction debris from Project site.
3.8 PROTECTION
.1 Protect installed product and finish surfaces from damage during construction.

RICHMOND, BC WASHROOM ACCESSORIES
SPECIALTIES PAGE 1
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DOCUMENTS

.1 Washroom accessories.
.2 Refer to Section 3.6 Schedule of the specification for scope of work.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
.2 Clearly indicate size and description of components, base materials, surface finish inside and out,
hardware and locks, attachment devices, and description of rough-in framing required.
.3 Submit samples of components for the Consultant's approval, in specified material and finish.
.4 Provide maintenance instructions for inclusion in the operation and maintenance manuals.
.5 Provide copies of manufacturer's standard warranties for inclusion in operation and maintenance
manuals.
.6 Furnish tools and extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents as specified in Section
01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals.
.1 Tools: Provide special tools required for assembly, disassembly or removal for washrooms
accessories.
.2 Security Fasteners: Furnish not less than 1 box for each 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of
each type and size of security fastener installed.

.1 Installers: Factory-trained personnel having a minimum of five (5) years proven experience in the
installation of washroom accessories for projects of similar size and complexity.
.2 Regulatory Requirements: Design and installation in accordance with BC Building Code 2018,
"Building Requirements for Persons with Disabilities".
1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING, STORAGE

.1 Deliver material in protective covering to prevent damage during shipping and handling.
.2 Store materials in cartons, protected, in a dry secure area.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1 Sheet Steel: ASTM A526 commercial quality, galvanized to ZF075.
.2 Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A167, Type 304, commercial grade, No. 4 Satin Finish.

SPECIALTIES PAGE 2
.3 Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A312, Type 304, commercial grade, seamless, 1.2 mm wall
thickness minimum, No. 4 Satin Finish.
.4 Fasteners: Concealed screws and bolts hot-dip galvanized; expansion shields synthetic lead or
rubber as recommended by the fixture manufacturer for component and substrate; exposed
fasteners stainless steel, tamperproof.
.5 Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, CS (Commercial Steel), Type B.
.6 Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, CS (Commercial Steel), Type B; with Z180
zinc galvanized coating designation.
.7 Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, austenitic stainless steel, Type 304;
Type 430 for mirrors.
.8 Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
.9 Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications.
2.2 FINISHES
.1 Chrome and nickel plating: to ASTM B 456, satin finish, U.O.N.
.2 Galvanized Metal: (Unexposed after installation) shop prime damaged surfaces after fabrication
with zinc-rich primer.
.3 Steel Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize products made from rolled-, pressed-, and forged-steel
shapes, castings, plates, bars, and strips indicated to be galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123/A
123M.
.4 Stainless Steel:
.1 General: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish. Grind and polish
surfaces to produce uniform, directionally textured, polished finish indicated, free of cross
scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece.
.2 Intermediate Polish Finish: No. 4 unless otherwise indicated.
.3 Grind and polish mirrored surfaces to produce uniform, mirror-polished finish indicated, free
of cross scratches.
.4 When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign
matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.
2.3 FABRICATION
.1 Weld and grind joints of fabricated components flush and smooth. Use mechanical fasteners only
where approved.
.2 Wherever possible, form exposed surfaces from one (1) sheet of stock, free of joints.
.3 Brake form sheet metal work with 1.5 mm radius bends.
.4 Form surfaces flat and without distortion. Maintain flat surfaces without scratches or dents.
.5 Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis.
.6 Hot-dip galvanize concealed ferrous metal anchors and fastening devices to CSA G164-M1981.
.7 Shop assemble components and package complete with anchors and fittings.
.8 Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to job site at appropriate time for building-in. Provide
SPECIALTIES PAGE 3
templates, details and instruction for building in anchors and inserts.
.9 Provide steel anchor plates and components for installation on studding and building framing.
2.4 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

.1 Accessory model numbers listed in schedule are based on the manufacturer listed.
.2 Acceptable Alternative Manufacturers: ASI, Bradley, Frost, Kimberly-Clark, Georgia Pacific.
.3 Alternative manufacturers: Allowed unless otherwise noted. Supply fixtures of like size, quality,
finish and function. Alternative accessories not approved by the Consultant as like in size, quality,
finish and function will be rejected and instructions given to provide the specified accessory in
accordance with the specifications at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION/PREPARATION
.1 Ensure frames, blocking and anchorage are correctly and securely installed ready to accept the
accessory designed for it.
.2 Ensure rooms, surfaces and areas in which accessories to be installed are finished with all painting
completed and dry.
.3 Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
.1 Conform to B.C Building Code for installation requirements for handicapped accessible
accessories.
.2 Install washroom accessories in accordance with the manufacturer's printed directions. Confirm
exact location with the Consultant.
.3 Conceal fasteners wherever possible, compatible with substrates, and suitable for the purpose
intended. Use exposed tamperproof fasteners where required.
.4 Secure accessories rigid, square and flush to wall surface, plumb, levels and in alignment with
other work.
.5 Install and secure all fixtures rigidly in place using the following techniques:
.1 For stud walls, install steel back plate (where recommended by the manufacturer for
specific items) to stud prior to drywall finish. Plate to have threaded studs or plugs
provided.
.2 For hollow masonry units, use toggle bolts drilled into cell/wall cavity.
.3 In solid masonry or concrete, use bolt with lead expansion sleeve set into drilled hole.
.6 Install grab bars on built-in anchors provided by bar manufacturer.
.7 Fill units with necessary supplies shortly before final acceptance of building.
3.3 INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT

.1 Upon completion of installation, adjust all components for proper operation and alignment.
.2 Instruct the Owner's personnel in adjustment, operation, refilling procedures.
.3 Adjust ball and stem style safety hooks to release with application of 35.6-N load.
.4 Clean accessories, touch up all scratches and abrasions to be invisible.

SPECIALTIES PAGE 4
3.4 CLEANING
.1 Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11 - Cleaning.
.1 Leave Work area clean at end of each day.
.2 Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment in
accordance with Section 01 74 11 - Cleaning.
3.5 PROTECTION
.2 Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by washroom accessories installation.
3.6 SCHEDULE
.1 Grab Bars (GB):
.1 GB1 & GB2: Grab bars to be constructed of 30/32 mm dia x 1.6 mm wall tubing of stainless
steel, peened gripping surface, 38 mm diameter wall flanges, concealed screw attachment,
flanges welded to tubular bar, provided steel back plates and all accessories. Knurl bar at
area of hand grips. Grab bar material and anchorage to withstand downward pull of 2.2kN.
Configurations and sizes as indicated. Acceptable manufacturer: Bobrick, Bradley
.1 GB1 (Toilet Side Wall Angled Grab Bar): 760mm x 760mm, 90 degree for 3-
point mounting.
.2 GB2 (Toilet Back Wall Grab Bar): 2 x 305 mm L to suit site condition, horizontal
installation.
.2 GB3 (Toilet Side Flip-up Bariatric Grab Bar): Grab bar shall be Type-304 stainless steel
with satin finish. Grab bar shall have 18-gauge (1.2mm) wall thickness and 1–1/4" (32mm)
outside diameter. Backplate shall be 3/16" (5mm) thick stainless steel, equipped with screw
holes for attachment to wall. Flip-up grab bar shall be manually raised for approach or
departure and lowered to horizontal position for support; counterweighted design shall
prevent grab bar from falling back down to the full horizontal position once grab bar is
raised to the full upright (vertical) position. Grab bar to support loads in excess of 500
pounds (227kg) when installed. Peened bar grip, satin finish. Acceptable manufacturer and
product: Swing-up Grab Bar model B-4998 series by Bobrick.
.2 Baby Changing Station (BCS): Recessed-mounted wall unit brushed 20-gauge stainless steel
exterior with bacterial-resistant polyethylene body. To support static load of 250 lbs minimum. To
ASTM F2285. Liner dispenser, cam-buckle safety belt, pneumatic gas shock mechanism for
smooth, safe open and close motion. Safety instructions in both official languages, graphic
illustration, labeled with universally accepted symbol. ADA Compliant. Includes one case of liners.
Acceptable manufacturer and product: Bradex Recessed-mounted model #962 by Bradley.
.3 Foldable Bench (FB): Folding Shower Seat to be wall-mounted made of phenolic slatted top, teak
look, stainless steel frame with front access mounting flanges. Seat to meet and exceed 113kg
(250lbs) weight capacity in use. Seat overall dimensions to be 457mm (18”) x 381mm (15”). All
external corners to have typical 25mm (1”) radius. Acceptable manufacturer and product:
Freedom Phenolic Slatted Folding Shower Bench, model #: APFSSB-180150PT.
.4 Coat Hook (HK): Surface mounted coat hook shall be painted steel back plate with plastic hook.
Color to be White. Acceptable manufacturer and product: KROK by Magnuson Group.
.1 Coat Hook (HK) – model KROK HJH-10 single hook; size 4-7/8” H x 3-1/8” W x 2-1/2” D.
.2 Hook Strip (HK-2) – model KROK HJH-30 hook strip with 2 hooks; size 4-7/8” H x 11-
13/16” W x 2-1/4” D.
.5 Hook, For Diagnostic Suite (HK-D): Surface mounted coat hook shall be 12-gauge, type 304
stainless steel with satin finish, welded to the support arm, with 16-gauge concealed stainless steel
wall plate. Acceptable manufacturer and product: Bobrick B-6827.

SPECIALTIES PAGE 5
.6 Mirror (MR): One-piece channel frame is 13 x 13 x 9.5 mm with bright polished finish and mitred
corners. No. 1 quality, 6mm glass mirror electrolytically copper plated; guaranteed against silver
spoilage for 10 years. Mirror corners and back protected by shock absorbing material. Back is
galvanized steel, secured to concealed wall hanger with two theft-resistant locking screws.
Acceptable manufacturer and product: Bobrick B-165 series, size to be 762mm (30”) wide x
915mm (36”) high; MR-S (Mirror-small size), size to be 460mm (18”) wide x 915mm (36”) high.
.7 Shower Curtain & Neo-Angle Shower Rod (SC):

.1 Shower Curtain: Commercial grade heavy duty polyester shower curtain, fire retardant and
anti-bacterial coated; 100% waterproof; mold & stain resistant, double weighted hems,
stainless steel eyelets, color in white. 2185mm (86”) high, 1830mm (72”) width.
Acceptable manufacturer and product: J. Sharone’s Contract Shower Curtain model # SR-
132-JS57-7286 White Fire Retardant Shower Curtain.
.2 Shower Rod: Neo-angle rod to be minimum 25mm (1”) diameter 19-gauge brass tubing in
satin nickel finish, 45-degree angle; heavy duty flanges; 2-component rod assembled with
internal splice; ends can be trimmed on site if needed. Include ceiling support in same
finish. Rod size to be 18.5” x 26” x 18.5”. Acceptable manufacturer and product: J.
Sharone’s Neo-Angle Shower Rod - Heavy Duty Flange model # SR-140-MJK-694/629-
18/26.
.3 Curtain Rings: Curtain rings to be satin nickel finish metal open top curtain hooks that are
compatible to Neo-angled curtain rod and ceiling support system. Include manufacturer’s
recommended number of rings for specified shower curtain. Acceptable manufacturer and
product: J. Sharone’s Open Top Shower Curtain Rings model # SR-140-MJK-1528.
.4 Complete system to be from same manufacturer.
.8 Shelf (SW): Shelf for Washrooms shall be type-304, 18-gauge (1.2mm) stainless steel with satin
finish. Mounting brackets, welded to shelf, shall be 16-gauge (1.6mm) stainless steel. Shelf shall
be 455mm (18”) long by 205mm (8") wide with 19mm (3/4") return edges. Front edge shall be
hemmed for safe handling. Acceptable manufacturer and product: Bobrick B-298.
.9 Toilet Backrest (TBR): 32mm (1-1/4”) Stainless steel tube with a 1.6mm (0.064”) wall. Utilizes
concealed fastening mounting. Backrest to be 16mm (5/8”) solid plastic laminate (white finish).
Overall dimensions to be 203mm (8”) D x 305mm (12”) W x 102mm (4”) H. Acceptable
manufacturer and product: Frost #1028.
.10 Toilet Tissue Dispenser (TTD): Combo Unit Toilet Paper Dispenser, size: 20.43”W x 13.12”H x
5.8”D. Manual dispensing of 2 cored toilet paper rolls: either two JRT Jr. Rolls (two full 9.38”
diameter) OR one JRT Sr. Roll (13” diameter) and a stub roll. Dispenser to be ADA compliant,
with a hinged front cover, tear off bars, push button and a lock to reduce pilferage. Color to be
smoke / black. Acceptable manufacturer and product: Kimberly-Clark Professional Scott Essential
Jumbo Roll Toilet Tissue Dispenser, model # 09551. No substitution allowed for this product.
.11 Pass-Thru Cabinet: Specimen pass-thru cabinet shall be type-304 stainless steel with all-welded
construction; exposed surfaces shall have satin finish. Flanges shall be drawn and beveled, one-
piece, seamless construction. Spring-loaded doors shall be self-closing and secured to cabinet
with a full-length stainless steel piano-hinge. Doors shall be equipped with interlocking mechanism
to prevent the door from opening when the other door is open, providing sight-barrier for complete
privacy. International graphic symbol on doors shall identify specimen cabinet. Unit shall be
furnished with a removable stainless steel spillage tray. Acceptable manufacturer and product:
Recessed Specimen Pass-Through Cabinet, model #B-505 by Bobrick.

RICHMOND, BC METAL LOCKERS
SPECIALTIES PAGE 1
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DOCUMENTS
.1 This section forms an integral part of the Contract Documents and is to be read, interpreted and
coordinated with all other parts.
1.2 RELATED WORK

.1 Rough Carpentry Section 06 10 00.
1.3 REFERENCES
.1 CAN/CGSB 44.40 - 01, Steel Clothing Locker.
1.4 ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2 Product Data:
.1 Provide manufacturer’s printed product literature and data sheets for metal locker and
include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and
limitations.
.3 Shop Drawings:
.1 Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in
British Columbia, Canada.
.2 Indicate on drawings: type and class of locker, thicknesses of metal, fabricating and
assembly methods, assembled banks of lockers, tops, rods, hooks, shelves, bases,
numbering, filler panels, end/back panels, doors, handles, locking method, ventilation
method and finishes where applicable.
.4 Samples:
.1 Submit duplicate 50 x 50 mm samples of colour and finish on actual base metal.
.2 Samples will be returned for inclusion into work.
.5 Warranty:
.1 Provide manufacturer’s warranty for a period of two years against defective parts and
Workmanship.

.1 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 - Common Product
Requirements and with manufacturer's written instructions.
.2 Delivery and Acceptance Requirements:

.1 Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name
and address.
.3 Storage and Handling Requirements:

.1 Store materials in dry location and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations
in clean, dry, well-ventilated area.
.2 Store and protect metal lockers from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.
.3 Replace defective or damaged materials with new.
.4 Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse in accordance with Section 01 74 19 - Waste
Management and Disposal.

SPECIALTIES PAGE 2

.1 Installers: Factory-trained personnel having a minimum of five (5) years proven experience in
the installation of lockers for projects of similar size and complexity.
.2 Regulatory Requirements: Design and installation in accordance with N.B.C. 1998 seismic
restraints.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS

.1 Materials: All locker parts shall be made of mild cold rolled sheet steel free from surface
imperfections and contaminants which would be detrimental to the acceptance of a high grade
hybrid epoxy polyester powder finish. Assembly fasteners shall be zinc plated flat head screws
with hex nuts.
.2 Doors: Doors shall be of a double-pan design consisting of a 20 gauge outer panel welded to a
24 gauge inner panel to form a rigid box construction that resists prying. The outer panel to be
double flanged on all four edges and the inner panel single flanged on all four edges, providing
extraordinary rigidity when both panels are welded together. A structural and sound deadening
1" (25mm) cell honeycomb core is bonded to the inner surfaces. The door shall be flush with the
frame and include a recessed handle and recessed number plate, both of which eliminate
protruding parts. Doors to be hinged as shown on drawings.
.3 Door Frames: Both vertical members shall be not less than 16 gauge and formed into a rigid
channel 5/8" (16mm) wide exposed frame and 2-7/16" (62mm) side depth. The frame shall be
completed by 3" (76mm) high top and bottom cross members of not less than 18 gauge formed
as an open box channel and welded to the verticals. The bottom frames’ full-width lintel extends
back and down to form a rigid box to support the bottom shelf. Both vertical frame members
shall be formed to offer a full-length 7/16" (11mm) wide continuous door strike. The latch
vertical member shall include a welded 11 gauge padlock hasp together with a 7/16" (11mm)
O.D. air-cushioned rubber bumper. No fasteners shall be exposed on fronts of locker doors and
frames.
.4 Body: Sides and backs shall be no less than 24 gauge and should not contain extra
unnecessary holes unless otherwise specifically used for the assembly of the lockers and
accessories on the project. Edges shall be formed to provide a strong and rigid assembly when
bolted or riveted together. Locker backs are flanged at right angles providing a triple thickness
of metal at the back corner connections. Shelves, tops and bottoms shall be interchangeable,
not less than 22 gauge and formed into a sturdy pan with a lip formed front edge for additional
strength and safety.
.5 Latching / Locking Device – Single Point: Trouble-free use is achieved with no sliding rods,
springs, turnhandles or moving latches. An 11 gauge 2" (51mm) x 3/4" (19mm) padlock hasp
shall be securely welded to the continuous strike midway up on the frame and centered at the
handle location. The hasp shall be formed to protrude through an extruded aluminum recessed
handle, which is cliplocked and bonded to the door. The handle’s inner surface shall be concave
and grooved for fingertip door control. To keep the door closed when not in use, a 1/2" (13mm)
O.D. nylon friction catch shall be installed on the door to engage the frame in four 4) locations.
Standard padlock.
.6 Hinge Continuous: A full-length 18 gauge continuous piano hinge shall be securely welded to
the frame and fastened to the door with screws or rivets. Hinge shall maximize security and
enhance resistance to abuse and vandalism.

SPECIALTIES PAGE 3
.7 Ventilation: Airflow is achieved through 4 sets of 5 unobstructed louvers 3/4" (19mm) wide x
1/4" (6mm) high in the vertical frame members. Provide 18 each 3/16" (5mm) diameter
perforations at outside perimeter of each top, shelf, and bottom to offer additional ventilation
throughout the inside of each locker.
.8 Number Plate: Each door shall have a high strength black laminated plastic number plate, 2-
1/2" (64mm) wide x 1-1/8" (29mm) high with numbers not less than 7/16" (11mm) high. Plates
shall accommodate up to four digits, be nestled in a recess flush with door surface and shall be
fastened to door with two rivets. Unless otherwise specified, lockers will be numbered
consecutively from 1 – up. Indicate numbering sequence on shop drawing for consultant’s
approval.
.9 Interior Equipment: Standard equipment in the double-tier lockers shall have three single prong
coat hooks per compartment. Double prong coat hooks and 1" (25mm) O.D. coat rods with
stainless steel brackets shall be made available. All hooks are chrome plated steel with ball
point heads and attached to shelves with two fasteners.
.10 Finish & Color: All steel parts and aluminum pedestals shall be thoroughly machine cleaned,
phosphatised, and finished with a high performance epoxy powder coating, baked on to provide
a uniform, smooth, protective finish. All interior body parts are finished in standard Light Grey
#535.
.1 Color Schedule:
.1 LK-1 – Light Grey #535.
.2 LK-2 – Slate #621.
.3 LK-3 – Charcoal #545.
.2 Refer to drawings for colors location.
.11 Products: Approved Product: Emperor Metal Lockers by Hadrian.
.12 Size: 305mm (12”) wide x 457mm (18”) deep x 1829mm (72”) high.
.13 Tier: Double (2).
.14 Accessories:
.1 Sloping tops
.2 Dress Ends
.3 Box Base
.4 Flat top corner filler
.15 Location: Lockers #9001A, refer to drawings.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
.1 Verification of Conditions: verify conditions of substrates and surfaces to receive metal lockers
previously installed under other Sections or Contracts are acceptable for product installation in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions prior to metal locker installation.
.2 Inform Consultant of unacceptable conditions immediately upon discovery.
.3 Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied.
3.2 INSTALLATION
.1 Assemble and install lockers in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. Assemble
by riveting.

SPECIALTIES PAGE 4
.2 Securely fasten lockers to grounds and nailing strips.
.3 Install finished dress end panels to exposed ends of locker banks.
.4 Install locker numbers.
3.3 ADJUSTING
.1 Adjust metal lockers for correct function and operation in accordance with manufacturer's
written instructions.
.2 Lubricate moving parts to operate smoothly and fit accurately.
.3 Touch up scratches and abrasions to match original finish.
3.4 CLEANING
.1 Progress Cleaning: Leave Work area clean at end of each day.
.2 Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.
.3 Waste Management: separate waste materials and remove recycling containers and bins from
site and dispose of materials at appropriate facility.
3.5 PROTECTION
.2 Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by metal locker installation.

RICHMOND, BC MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES
SPECIALTIES PAGE 1
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DOCUMENTS
.1 This section of the Specifications forms part of the Contract Documents and is to be read,
1.2 SECTIONS INCLUDED

.1 Supply and installation of corner guards.
.2 Supply and installation of chair rail.
.3 Supply and installation of mobile partition screens.
.4 Supply and installation of framed partition panel.
.5 Supply and installation of privacy curtain and rack.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittals.
.2 Product Data: Manufacturer's complete and current product data for each product required,
including:
.1 Preparation instructions and recommendations.
.2 Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
.3 Complete installation methods.
.3 Shop Drawings:
.1 General: Show locations of each item and installation details, including mounting and
anchorage. Provide elevations of non-standard conditions.
.4 Selection Samples: Color charts consisting of actual product pieces, demonstrating full range of
available colors, for initial color selection.
.5 Verification Samples for:

.1 Corner Guards: 305mm (12”) long sample of each model specified.
.2 Chair Rail: 305mm (12”) long sample of each model specified including end cap and
mounting hardware.
.3 Mobile Partition Screen & Framed Partition Panel: 152mm (6 inch) long sample of
screen / panel frame in finish specified.
.4 Privacy Curtain: Minimum 152mm (6 inch) x 152mm (6 inch) samples of each product
type specified.
1.5 MAINTENANCE DATA

.1 Submit maintenance data for maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
1.6 WARRANTY
.1 Contractor to provide two-year manufacturer’s warranty for each item.
1.7 PROTECTION

SPECIALTIES PAGE 2
.1 Protect finished surfaces during shipment and installation by approved means. Do not remove
until immediately prior to final completion.

.1 Installer qualifications: For each separate product category, engage an installer who has no less
than 3 years experience in installation of systems similar in complexity to those required for this
project.
.2 Manufacturer’s qualifications: For each separate product category, not less than 5 years
experience in the production of specified products and a record of successful in-service
performance.
.3 Single source responsibility: For each separate product category, provide all components of the
product / system manufactured by the same company to ensure compatibility of color, texture
and physical properties.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 CORNER GUARD (CG)

.1 Provide Engineered PETG surface mounted Corner Guards. Extruded material should be high-
impact, free of PVC and PBTs, and provide chemical and stain resistance. Chemical and stain
resistance should be per ASTM D543 standards as established by the manufacturer. Product
should have 2.4mm (3/32”) radius cover, 90° corner, 38mm (1.5”) leg length with 2.3mm (0.090”)
engineered PETG material. Self-adhesive tape backing.
.1 Approved manufacturer and product: VA-200N Acrovyn corner guard by CS.
.2 Color: Chinchilla #194.
2.2 CHAIR RAIL (CRL)

.1 Provide chair rails in extruded, high impact vinyl/acrylic material with shadowgrain grain texture,
nominal 1.98mm (.078") thickness, chemical and stain resistance should be per ASTM D-1308
standards as established by the manufacturer. Product to be surface mounted assembly
consisting of a continuous aluminum retainer with snap-on cover. Color matched end caps and
corners to be removable for ease of replacement. Attachment hardware shall be appropriate for
wall conditions. Product to be 203.2mm (8”) high in profile, with 31.8mm (1.25”) wall offset.
.1 Approved manufacturer and product: SCR-64M Acrovyn Crash Rail by CS.
.2 Color: White #949.
2.3 MOBILE PARTITION SCREEN

.1 Resin Panel Freestanding Mobile Partition Screen with lockable casters.
.1 Product: Ready to Go Simple Spec 200.42 Freestanding Movable Partition by 3Form.
.2 Resin Panel: RP-2.
.3 Screen size: to fit resin panel height: 1830mm (6’) H, width refer screen schedule
below.
.4 Options: lockable casters.
.5 Frame finish: standard anodized aluminum.
.6 Screen Schedule:
.1 For location Waiting Area #9500 – RP sheet size width to be 915mm (3’); total
two (2) number of screens.
2.4 FRAMED PARTITION PANEL

.1 Resin Panel Full Framed Fixed Panel.
.1 Product: Ready To Go Simple Spec 200.52 Fully Framed Top-Support Varia Partition
by 3Form.
.2 Resin Panel: RP-3.
.3 Partition Panel Size: 2185mm H x 765mm W (refer to drawings).

SPECIALTIES PAGE 3
.4 Package includes: all cutting, top support hardware system, vertical bracing, base
profile, all hardware, and full assembly of complete system.
.5 Frame and hardware finish: standard anodized aluminum frame, satin anodized
aluminum hardware.
.6 Location: Waiting Area #9000.
2.5 PRIVACY CURTAIN (PC)

.1 Ceiling mounted curtain track with suspension bars, track accessories, and attachments:
.1 Approved Manufacturer and product: CS Cubicle Track System.
.1 Cube Tech Industries, Enclosed Channel Track is approved.
.2 Cubicle Tracks: CS Cubicle Curtains#6062 suspended-mounted tracks of heavy
extruded aluminum alloy 6062-T4, 1 3/8" x 3/4", slotted to receive roller carriers,
complete with accessories and components required for complete and secure
installations including splices, end caps and corner bends.
.3 Suspension Height: ¾” square aluminum hangers with suspension brackets made of
molded nylon to adapt to CS 6062 aluminum track. Bottom of suspension bar height to
be installed at 2050mm above finished floor.
.4 Corner Bends: 90-degree Corner bend radius to be 300mm (1’), and to be fabricated in
one continuous “L” shape.
.5 Finish: Clear anodized aluminum.
.6 Carriers: CS Cubicle Curtains 1062N, virgin nylon axle with nylon wheels complete with
nickel-plated brass bead-chain and hook assembly. Provide one carrier for each 6" of
cubicle curtain width.
.7 Rail Hanger: where rail hanger is in conflict with ceiling fixtures in the ceiling (light fixture
/ bariatric ceiling lift etc), track to be braced back to the wall.
.2 Curtain Fabric:
.1 Curtain Fabric – Type 1:
.1 Base Fabric: 9x9 1000 x 1000 Denier 100% polyester.
.2 Coating: 100% Polyvinyl chloride
.3 Weight: 16 oz. per square yard
.4 Width: 61” (1550mm)
.5 Properties: UV and mildew resistant, dielectrically and thermally weldable, shrink /
tear / abrasion resistant, flame retardant, double coated with a top coat for
cleanability.
.6 Approved Manufacturer and product: VinaGARD 16 by George N. Jackson
Limited (no substitution allowed).
.7 Color: VG 16 White.
.8 Location: Stretcher/Treatment Bay #9524, Recliner Bay 1 #9526, and Recliner
Bay 2 #9528.
.2 Curtain Fabric – Type 2:
.1 Material: 50% FR Polyester,50% Post Consumer Recycled Polyester.
.2 Repeat: 115" V, 74" H.
.3 Railroaded: Yes.
.4 Width: 1830mm (72 inches).
.5 Dye:Yarn
.6 Flame Resistance: NFPA 701 Method #1
.7 Weight: 1.00 lb.
.8 Maintenance: WS - Machine Wash, Max Water Temp 160 F - Tumble Dry 3-5
Min, Syn Cycle.
.9 Lightfastness: 650 Hours Class5.
.10 Reduced Environmental Impact:Recycled Fiber Content,GREENGUARD Gold
Certified,NSF 336 Compliant.
.11 Approved Manufacturer and product: Momentum Textiles Golden Leaf Tree.
.12 Color: Acquaint # 09164219 – submit manufacturer’s full standard range of fabric
samples for confirmation.
SPECIALTIES PAGE 4
.13 Location: All Exam Rooms.
.3 Curtain installed length: curtain fabric to terminate 230mm above finished floor.
.4 Curtain installed width: allow for minimum +15% of curtain fabric width than curtain track
length.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
.1 Provide appropriate fasteners and accessories as required to properly complete installation.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION

.1 Verify that walls or ceiling are in proper condition to receive installation of products as per
manufacturer’s requirements.
.2 Clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles.
3.2 INSTALLATION
.1 Install manufactured specialty items in locations shown on drawings and in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommended details, reviewed shop drawings and manufacturer’s instructions.
.2 Exposed fastenings unless otherwise approved, are to be of the same materials, colour and
finish as the base metal on which they occur.
.3 Finish work is to be plumb and level, rigidly secured to substrate, free from distortion and
defects detrimental to appearance or performance. Make any adjustments required.
3.3 PROTECTION AND CLEAN-UP

.1 Protect adjacent surfaces from damage during installation.
.2 At completion of the installation, clean surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s clean-up and
maintenance instructions.
.3 Protect from damage resulting from the work of other Sections.
.4 Promptly, as the work proceeds, and on completion, remove all crating, wrapping and surplus
materials and equipment.

RICHMOND, BC ROLLER SHADES
FURNISHINGS PAGE 1
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DOCUMENTS
.1 This Section of the Specifications forms an integral part of the Contract Documents and is to be
read, interpreted and co-ordinated with all other parts.

.1 Work includes but is not limited to the furnishing of all labour, material, equipment and services
necessary to complete installation of new roller shades to exterior windows as per schedule in
this section.

.4 Acoustical Ceiling Section 09 51 00
1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with General Requirements.
.2 Indicate dimensions in relation to window jambs, operator details, head and sill anchorage
details, chain position, hardware and accessories details.
.4 Samples for Initial Selection.

.1 Include manufacturer’s standard full range of specified shadeband material (fabric)
sample for initial color selection.
.2 Include one Fascia and Hembar material finish samples.
.3 Include Samples of accessories involving color finish selection.
.4 If requested, components, non-working, of cassette shade unit to be provided.
.5 If requested, full-size and operational shade Mock-Up to be provided.
.5 Samples for Verification: For each type of roller shade.
.6 Shadeband Material samples submission. Manufacturer to supply two sample from same
materials to be supplied on project and not less than 10 inches (250mm) by 8 inches (250mm)
of selected colors. Mark interior face of material if applicable. If requested, large sample 24
inches (610 mm) by 24 inches (610 mm) material sample to be provided.
.7 Roller Shade: Full-size operating unit, not less than 16 inches (400 mm) wide by 36 inches
(900mm) long for each type of roller shade indicated.
.8 Installation Accessories: Full-size unit, not less than 10 inches (250 mm) long. This can include,
cassette housings, fascia, bracket assemblies, hembars, chain, crank, side channels, switches,
or other items, as requested before installation is scheduled. All materials are to be of same
type as being supplied on the project.
CHERNOFF THOMPSON ARCHITECTS 24/03/2023 CTA PROJECT#42037.0

FURNISHINGS PAGE 2
.9 Qualification Data: For manufacturer and Installer, both to supply statement on number of years
in business and that the entity is authorized to supply/install roller shades as specified by the
project Architect.
.10 Submit duplicate copies of operating and maintenance instructions including, name and
telephone number of local service company.

.1 Single Manufacturer Requirements: Provide products as specified by Consultant from a single
manufacturer to the greatest extent possible.
.2 Installer Qualifications: Trained and certified by manufacturer for minimum of three years’
experience installing and commissioning products similar to those listed in this specification.
.3 Mock-Ups: Build Mock-Ups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate
aesthetic effects, to verify operation, and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
Manufacturer to arrange for installation of mock-Up in window specified Consultant.
.4 Subject to compliance with requirements, approved Mock-Ups may become part of the
completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
.5 Factory Quality Procedures: Factory procedures for shade fabrication must include hanging and
operating shade fully down/up, inspection and correction (if needed), of each shade prior to
delivery to installation team. Factory pre-testing procedures include but are not limited to:
inspection and correction for telescoping of shade materials, inspection, and correction of
shadeband material for frayed edges and imperfections within the weave, insuring shadeband
material (fabric) hangs flat without buckling or distortion, examining the attachment of the
hembar for being square to shade material and not excessively protruding from shade material
edge.
.6 Performance: As a shadeband material, the fabric shall hang flat, without buckling or distortion.
The edge, when trimmed, shall hang straight without raveling. An unguided roller shade
material shall roll true and straight without shifting sideways more than +1/8 inch (3.18 mm) in
either direction due to wrap distortion or weave design.
1.6 INSPECTION / PREPARATION

.1 Take field measurements to verify or supplement dimensions indicated. Be responsible for
accurate fit of work.
.2 Notify Consultant in writing of any deficiencies in the work of other trades that would affect the
window treatment system.
1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS

.1 Convene minimum two weeks prior to starting work on this section to review scope of work,
installer responsibilities, locations of related devices, coordination with other and related trades,
and to establish general working conditions and time of installation.

.1 Do not deliver to site until areas to receive shades are completely finished, all walls and ceilings
completed and painted.
.2 Deliver materials in original protective wrappings or containers, with manufacturers labels and
sealed intact.
.3 Handle and store materials according to manufacturers recommendations protecting materials
and finishes from damages, marring of finishes or soiling.
FURNISHINGS PAGE 3

.1 Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits
recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under
environmental conditions outside manufacturer’s recommended limits. Do not install shade
cassette units until interior painting is substantially complete. All wet work shall be completed
and dried. Ceilings, window pockets, and mechanical/electrical work above window site shall
be complete before installation of the shade cassette units.
1.10 GUARANTEE
.1 A written one (1) year guarantee will be required guaranteeing all products to be free of any
defects of materials or any deficiencies in workmanship and on-site installation from the date of
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUAL SHADE SYSTEM

.1 TELESHADE (TS Series Shading System) system shall be a smooth operating chain and
sprocket roller shade system contained in a factory assembled shade cassette unit offered by
manufacturer: Legrand Solarfective.
.2 Shade system types:

.1 RS-1: Legrand Solarfective SF-T1: 4 in. Manual Single Teleshade. Clear anodized
aluminium parts.
.2 RS-2: Legrand Solarfective SF-T9: 6 in. Manual Dual Teleshade. Clear anodized
aluminium parts.
.3 Operation:
.1 Easy-Lift (chain operated) Action with infinite positioning, the shade could be closed at
any point across its length of travel. Left hand, right hand or both sides operation
available as standard and factory installed into the shade cassette unit.
.2 Manual Teleshade shall include a “manual override” requirement that allows the shade to
be pulled down by the hembar without using the chain or damaging the clutch.
.4 Assembly:
.1 Provide fully factory assembled and pre-tested shade cassette unit consisting of two end
brackets, chain installed as required, shade tube, extruded aluminum fascia, hembar,
shade material (fabric), regular or reverse roll of shade material, and cassette mounting
attachment brackets for on-site installation. The brackets for the shade cassette unit shall
be adjustable to level the unit for building irregularities and to minimize light gap above
the shade cassette unit. Factory to supply shade cassette unit ready for installation via
attachment brackets fabricated from aluminum, included with each unit.
.2 Attachment Brackets: T5 6005 Aluminum Brackets shall be designed and fabricated to
allow for simple direct installation of the shade cassette unit to the building structure.
Mounting Type to referr to drawings.
.3 Removal of shade cassette unit shall not require disassembly of the shade unit or roller
shade tube.
.4 End Bracket within Cassette Unit: 3 inches by 3-3/4 inches (77 X 96 mm), zinc plated
steel, end bracket shall be two-piece molded ABS construction with 2-1/2 inches (64 mm)
diameter nylon drive sprocket pop-riveted onto the bracket. Brackets color shall co-
ordinate with the fascia color.

FURNISHINGS PAGE 4
.5 Shade Tube: Extruded T5 6005 aluminum shade tube shall be 1/16 inch (1.52mm) thick,
complete with continuous screw fins 3/16 inch (4.82 mm) high; for strength and drive capabilities
when attached to the nylon sprocket. The fins shall be spaced equidistant on tube and placed
according to the weight and sizing characteristics necessary for the intended shade to be
supported. Manufacturer to select tube with sufficient diameter size so deflection caused by
weight of shade material and shade size is not visible and good performance is assured.
.6 Fascia and End Caps: The extruded T6 6063 or 6360 aluminum fascia (front—towards room
interior), shall be 1/16 inch (1.7 mm) thick, complete with two continuous screw flutes, anodized,
powder coated or custom painted. Attachment of fascia is to be two-part process: first, a friction
fit of fascia into cassette shade unit, then step two is mechanical by a hidden/concealed screw
lock-down of fascia to cassette shade unit. Fascia shall be secured by eight #6, ¾ inch screws
to the shade cassette unit. Fascia shall be suitable for regular or reverse roll. Fascia end caps
shall be available and manufactured from T6 6063 or 6360 aluminum and fabricated via a press
fit and a secure mechanical fastener. Fascia and fascia end caps color finish to be: Clear
Anodized.
.7 Drive Assembly:
.1 Factory set for size and travel of shades; chain installed.
.2 Unit is capable of being field adjusted from the exterior of the cassette shade unit without
having to disassemble the hardware. No field servicing or lubrication of the bi-directional
drive assembly is required. Operation and pulling of chain shall be free and without
binding inside the assembly and permitting shade to stop at any point that chain is
stopped and no longer being pulled.
.3 Provided with a built-in shock absorber to prevent chain breakage, under normal usage
conditions.
.4 Factory installed upper bead stop to prevent shade from rolling beyond preset upper limit.
The lower bead stop is to be installed in field after consultation with project Architect. The
bead stops can be removed in the field and adjusted as required without disassembly of
cassette shade unit. The purpose of bead stops is to prevent shade from being raised or
lowered too far thereby preventing damage to shade and/or mechanism.
.5 Compliant child-safety active-spring-loaded tensioning chain retainer supplied with all
cassette shade units (one retainer per chain drive). Design is to be as specified by
Window Covering Materials Association (WCMA).
.6 Manufacturer shall include and fabricate with roller shade, a Lift Assist Mechanism (LAM),
sized according to shade weight and consisting of a spring device installed in the roller
shade tube. The Manufacturer shall install a LAM spring on all very large or heavy
shades.
.7 Drive Chain: shall be No. 10 Stainless Steel bead chain formed in a continuous loop.
Chain with 90-pound tensile strength. Plastic type or Nickel-plate chain is not acceptable.
.8 Exterior Hembar: extruded T6 6360 aluminum with plastic end finials, attached in factory to
shadeband material (fabric). Hembar and finial color finish to be: Clear Anodized.
.9 Shadeband Material Attachment: Manufacturer of cassette shade unit shall attach shadeband
material to roller shade tube in factory. Manufacturer shall have capability for attachment via
double sided tape (specified for insuring shadeband material lays flat), or hidden spline
(lightweight small profile plastic extrusion attached to shadeband material and inserted into a
groove machined into roller tube). Selection of attachment method to be determined by factory
at time of assembly depending on project requirements and size of finished shade cassette unit.
Motorized shades shall be fabricated with tape attachment method, only. All finished shades
must be fabricated with one complete wrap of material (minimum) to cover the attachment of the
shadeband material to the shade tube. This wrap length will vary due to size of shade and size
of tube and factory assembly conditions.

FURNISHINGS PAGE 5
.10 Light Gap: All Cassette Shade Units must maintain equivalent and symmetrical light gaps on
both sides. Gap width to be ¾ inch (19.5 mm) or 7/8 inch (22.23 mm) depending on manual or
motorized shade or other factory assembly condition.
.11 Shadeband Assembly Details:

.1 Shade Cassette Unit manufacturer to assemble roller shade with specified shadeband
material to fill window opening from sill to head and from jamb to jamb.
.2 Manufacturer shall assemble roller shade with the indicated front side of shadeband
material (fabric) facing the interior of the room when roller shade is in down position.
.3 All shadeband material to hang flat without buckling, puckering, or distortion.
.4 Manufacturer to provide T6 6061 aluminum battens in standard roller shades as
necessary to insure proper rolling of roller shades and for proper tracking. The installing
contractor and manufacturer shall fabricate roller shades with a width-to-height ratio that
shall not exceed manufacturer’s published guidelines. The batten shall be selected at
manufacturers discretion based on size of shade and shadeband material selected. All
locations of seams to be approved by project Architect.
.5 Manufacturer shall provide Railroaded type shadebands with seams as required to meet
size requirements and to match other seams. All locations of seams to be approved by
project Architect. Manufacturer shall utilize battens in accordance with their published
guidelines to minimize tracking distortion and for proper rolling of the shadeband material
on the tube.
.12 Double (Dual) Shade: Where specified, two roller shade bands consisting of a Sunscreen and
an Opaque or Blackout shadeband material shall be supplied by manufacturer inside the shade
cassette unit. Each roller shade shall be independently controlled by pull chain as specified
above. All descriptive details as specified above are utilized by a Dual Shade system.
2.2 SHADEBAND MATERIAL (FABRICS)

.1 RS-1: Legrand Solarfective shading fabrics Phifer Sheerweave SW4400 (3% open) or
equivalent performance, color to be: U58 Eco/Chalk.
.2 RS-2: Legrand Solarfective shading fabrics Phifer Sheerweave SW4400 (3% open), and Phifer
Sheerweave 7500 blackout fabric or equivalent performance, color to be: U58 Eco/Chalk & R20
Odyssey.
2.3 FABRICATION
.1 Prior to fabrication, verify actual opening dimensions by on-site measurement. Calculate blind
dimensions to fit within specified tolerances.
.2 Fabricate blinds to fill openings from head to sill and jamb to jamb. Measure in several places.
The clearance blind-to-blind shall be 1/8 inch minimum. Locate blind divisions at mullions.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
.1 Verify that the work in which the blinds will be installed is free of conditions that interfere with
blinds installations and operations. Begin blind installation only when unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
.1 Install work by manufacturer’s skilled tradesmen and in strict accordance with manufacturer’s
installation procedures except as otherwise specified herein.
.2 Install blinds with adequate clearance to permit smooth operation of blinds and any sash
operators. Hold blinds 1/8 inch clear from each side of window opening on inside mount unless
other clearance is indicated.
FURNISHINGS PAGE 6
.3 All items installed, plumbed, squared, rigidly coupled and adequately anchored, maintaining
uniformed clearances, accurate alignment levels, and parallel with the window plane. Fabric
shall not travel more than 3 mm (0.125") in either direction within channels after installation.
.4 The solar screen shall be pre-measured and manufactured off-site.
.5 Demonstrate blinds to be in smooth, working order.

.1 Adjust shades and operating components as required to ensure smooth and trouble free
operation without binding.
.2 Adjust shade and shade-cloth to hang flat without buckling or distortion.
.3 Clean shades and exposed components. Wipe or sponge using a mild detergent and warm
water solution. Do not immense in water or dry-clean.
.4 Replace work, which cannot be satisfactorily repaired, adjusted, or cleaned.
3.4 SCHEDULE OF SHADES

.1 Install roller shades to exterior glazed windows for the rooms as listed for full height of the glazing.
Room # Room Name Roller Shade Type Remarks

9001 Staff Lounge RS-1
9010 Weigh Station RS-1
9011 Exam Room 1 RS-2
9500 Waiting Area RS-1
9502 Assessment / Triage RS-2
9506 Business Work Area RS-1
9509A Control Room RS-2
Roller shades required for
9522 Consult Room 2 RS-2
glazed door.
9524 Stretcher/Treatment Bay RS-2
9526 Recliner Bay 1 RS-2
9528 Recliner Bay 2 RS-2
9540 Shared Office / Breakout RS-1
9542 Equipment Alcove 3 RS-1
9546 Soiled Utility RS-1

RICHMOND EAST PRIMARY CARE CENTRE SECTION 12 56 70.13
RICHMOND, BC INTEGRATED PATIENT CARE MODULAR SYSTEM
FURNISHINGS PAGE 1
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

.1 This Section of the Specifications forms an integral part of the Contract Documents and is
to be read, interpreted and coordinated with all other parts.
1.2 SUMMARY
.1 Section Includes (supply and installation of HH system):
.1 This section specifies Integrated Care Modular System (IPCMS) as detailed on the
drawings (noted as HH – Hand Hygiene Sink System), including related
components and accessories required to form an integral unit. IPCMS components
shown on the drawings but not specified below shall be included as part of the
work under this section, and applicable portions of the specification shall apply to
these items. Each like item of the IPCMS shall be of the same design and other
products that are considered integral to the system shall be manufactured by one
manufacturer.
.2 Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for all IPCMS
components as indicated, in accordance with provisions of Contract Documents.
.3 Coordinate this work with work of all other trades.
.4 Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all
supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances, and devices incidental to
or necessary for sound, secure, and complete installation.
.2 Related Work:
.1 Division26, electrical connections.
.2 Division 23, plumbing connections.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

.1 Horizontal Rails.
.2 Vertical Rails.
.3 Tile.
.4 Sink Modules.
.5 Cabinets.
.6 Close-Outs.
.7 Miscellaneous and Support Accessories.
1.4 REFERENCES AND QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 References:
.1 Laminates shall meet the requirements of PR-046, High-Pressure Laminates
.2 Plastic parts shall meet the HB flammability requirements of UL 94
.3 System shall be GreenGuard Certified
.4 System shall meet National Building, Plumbing and Electrical Codes
.5 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): A167-94
.6 Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip
.7 Shall meet National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
.8 NFPA National electrical Code (NEC)
.9 NFPA 99 Health Care Facilities

FURNISHINGS PAGE 2
.10 NRPA 255

.11 ANSI/BIFMA STANDARDS
.12 Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
.2 Design Criteria:
.1 The intent of this specification is to provide a quality and functional Integrated
Patient Care Modular System in environments that require a high degree of
flexibility and where it is anticipated that there will be future changes. The IPCMS’s
components must have the inherent qualities of durability, aesthetic value, and
safety while being most functional within the healthcare setting.
.2 The IPCMS will allow the healthcare facility to be space efficient by making
maximum use of vertical space and by providing a highly organized and versatile
way of storing materials that are unique to medical requirements and providing an
opportunity to provide necessary medical gases and other utilities to the patient.
.3 The IPCMS shall take up a minimum of floor space and shall be wall mounted
above the floor to facilitate cleaning and housekeeping.
.4 The IPCMS shall support the rail hanging components of the Integrated Modular
Medical Support System.
.3 Installer/Erector Qualifications:
.1 Furnish proof of familiarity with equipment to be installed.
.2 Furnish proof of financial and technical resources to assure prompt performance
in delivery and installation and in-service training of healthcare personnel.
.3 Provide competent supervision and installation persons.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
.1 Shop Drawings:
.1 Provide complete shop and installation drawings, giving all dimensions, details of
construction, and accessory items.
.2 Elevation of service wall(s) showing layout of utilities and access panels, location
of all outlets and accessories.
.3 Details of mounting for framing, utility piping and wiring shall be provided.
.4 Piping and wiring diagrams shall be provided for all utilities.
.5 Indicate wall reinforcement and appropriate fastening and method of installation.
.6 Provide Owner a listing of components not included in this specification but are
required to make the system functional.
.2 Mock-up:
.1 Construct mock-up as indicated by Owner showing fully functional Integrated
Patient Care Modular System.
.2 Elevation of service wall(s) showing layout of utilities and access panels, location
of all outlets and accessories.
.3 Do not proceed with work prior to receipt of written acceptance of mock-up.
.3 Product Data:
.1 Provide catalog and model numbers for all components.
.2 Provide addresses and telephone numbers of nearest stocking/service parts
locations.
.4 Samples:
.1 Provide samples of all finishes and colors as requested by Owner.
.5 Project Close-Out Data:

FURNISHINGS PAGE 3
.1 Provide technical and operational instructions and user’s manuals for all
components.
.2 Manufacturer’s instructions outlining maintenance requirements.
.3 Warranties: See Section 1.08.
.4 Minimum of two copies of manufacturer’s complete catalogs and price lists.
.5 Location and telephone number of nearest service organization.
1.6 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING

.1 Deliver all components to site in manufacturer’s clearly identified containers.
.2 Deliver, receive, and store in a secured space in a manner to prevent damage.
.3 Time deliveries to assure components are available at site when required for installation.
1.7 JOB CONDITIONS

.1 Existing Conditions:
.1 Assure that walls scheduled to receive attachment of system components are
adequately reinforced to accept installation of this work.
.2 Assure that wall, floor, and ceiling work is finished.
.3 Report all deficiencies to Contractor for necessary correction.
.2 Protection:
.1 Assure that adjoining work is not damaged by installation of this work.
.2 Provide temporary protection as required, and repair all damage to such work.
.3 Sequencing:
.1 Sequence this work to allow work by electrical, plumbing contractors to be
performed without interference.
.2 Coordinate this work with other operations in same area to avoid conflicts.
1.8 WARRANTY
.1 All warranties run from date of substantial completion.
.2 Written warranty on entire system, signed jointly by installer, manufacturer, and contractor
for period of twelve (12) years.
.3 Written warranty on items incorporated into system, not manufactured by contractor or

subcontractor for a period of one year.

.1 Approval by Contracting Officer is required of manufacturer and installer based upon
certification of qualifications specified.
.2 Manufacturer is regularly engaged in design and manufacture of the types of products and
scope similar to the requirements of this project for a period of not less than five years.
.3 Installer is approved by manufacturer of products to be installed.
.4 Installer has successfully completed at least three projects of scope and type similar to
requirements of this project.
.5 Construct a mock-up where directed by Owner for the purpose of demonstrating the quality
of work and product application to the healthcare environment.

FURNISHINGS PAGE 4
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 INTEGRATED PATIENT CARE MODULAR SYSTEM (HH)

.1 Integrated Patient Care Modular System is based on Compass System by Herman Miller
Healthcare, 855 East Main Avenue, PO Box 302, Zeeland, Michigan 49464-0302.
.1 Single Source Responsibility
.2 Integrated Patient Care Modular System components must be provided by one

manufacturer.
.1 If products of several manufacturers are used to satisfy this section, then all items
shall meet the requirements specified herein.
.2 Supplier of the system is responsible for performance of all components.
.3 Horizontal Rails:
.1 Wall Rail:
.1 Shall provide horizontal interface capability to suspend horizontal and
vertical hung components.
.2 Material shall be anodized aluminum.
.3 Shall have available End Caps, Connectors, Inserts, appropriate Wall
Anchors and Anti-dislodgement clips.
.4 Shall be capable of supporting a static load of 250 pounds per linear foot.
.4 Vertical Rails:
.1 Stiles:
.1 Rail Attached Stiles:
.1 Available in two heights of 24” and 64”.
.2 Can be mounted anywhere along Wall Rails.
.3 Supports all types of Tiles and PCMS components.
.4 Fabricated of 18 ga. cold rolled steel with a powdercoat finish.
.5 Creates a minimum space of 3” to accommodate plumbing,
power, data and electrical connections.
.6 Provide stile lockdown and connector kits as required.
.2 Chase Stiles:
.1 Is 16-1/2” high and required for attaching Chase Tile.
.2 Shall be 18 gauge steel with a black finish.
.3 Lockdown Stiles: The stile lockdowns shall be constructed of 1008/1010
CRS L-brackets. Attachment hardware is included.
.5 Tiles: All tiles shall have an overlapping ship-lap design at all horizontal joints to prohibit
moisture from wicking behind tiles.
.1 Face Tile: Not required.
.2 Above-Sink Tile:
.1 Shall be in nominal height of 20”, width of 24” and depth of .75 inches.
.2 Surface material shall be in Durawrap™ 3D Laminate.
.1 Durawrap™ 3D Laminate shall be 99.9% PVC free material.
.6 Sink Modules:
.1 Corian Sinks shall be with a nominal width of 24” and depth of 13”.
.2 Shall have a curved integrated backsplash.
.3 Corian sinks shall be constructed of .5’’ Corian with .5’’ melamine faced sub-core.
Surfaces shall have a finished bottom, and be 1” thick and capable of supporting
200 pounds. All sink bowls are IAPMO certifed. Sink does not have an overflow
hole.

FURNISHINGS PAGE 5
.4 Faucet: The spout is constructed of C2700 Brass and trim plate is constructed of
C46400 naval brass. Faucet includes a hands-free sensor. Supply-line hoses, shut
off valves, mixing valve are included. Faucet is wall-mounted in chrome finish.
.5 Shall be available with a sink enclosure that is 24” wide and mounts under the sink
capable of supporting 150-pound load.
.6 Sink enclosure surface material shall be Durawrap™ 3D Laminate to prevent
moisture contamination.
.7 Sidesplashes: Not required.
.8 Sink enclosure shall be in a nominal depth of 13”, width of 24” and height of 15”.
.9 Sink enclosure shall be constructed of .75”-thick, 45-pound medium-density
particle board core with a laminate face and the 2-mm thick non-PVC,
thermoplastic edges. Support structure constructed of 14-gauge CRS. The front
panel to be removable. All attachment hardware include.
.10 Faucet holes: To be included.
.7 Cabinets:
.1 Glove Cabinet:
.1 Shall be in a nominal height of 20”, depth of 9” and width of 24”.
.2 The 24” wide glove cabinet shall have three cutouts for gloves that clearly
distinguish large, medium and small glove sizes.
.3 Pull: No pull option.
.4 Shall have a magnetic closure.
.5 Door shall be all right hinged.
.6 Surface material shall be in Durawrap™ 3D Laminate.
.1 Durawrap™ 3D Laminate shall be 99.9% PVC free material.
.7 Shall support a 30 pound load.
.8 Door shall be constructed of .75”-thick, 45-pound MDF core.
.9 Door hardware shall be hidden 107° (3-way) adjustable all-metal, nickel
plated hinges.
.10 The 5-sided case shall be constructed of .75”-thick, 45-pound MDF core
with a laminate face of Durawrap (99.9% PVC-free) 3D laminate. The 5
elements of the case are cam and dowel construction.
.2 Locks and keying.
.1 Key all locks alike.
.2 Furnish each lock with two keys.
.8 Close-Outs:
.1 Side:
.1 Height: 89”.
.2 Color: 91 White.
.3 No Cutout(s) for wall rail.
.2 Top:
.1 Shall be available in widths of 24”, 36”, 48”, 60”, 72” 84” and 96”.
.2 Shall be available in at least two colors.
.3 To be included to complete and match system.
.3 Bottom:
.1 Shall be available in widths of 24”, 36”, 48”, 60”, 72” 84” and 96”.
.2 Shall be available in at least two colors.
.3 To be included to complete and match system.
.4 Sloped Cabinet Top:
.1 Shall be made of 20 gauge steel and angled at 20 degrees to permit
cleaning and avoid dust collection. All hardware included.
.2 Depth: 9”, width: 24”.

FURNISHINGS PAGE 6
.3 Color: 91 White.
.9 Miscellaneous and Support Accessories:

.1 Accessory Rail:
.1 Shall be constructed of aluminum. The rail shall come with a satin oxide
laminate insert and 2 grey plastic end caps.
.2 Shall be in 24” width, 1-1/8” depth.
.3 Shall attach to the front of a tile and be able to support 15 pounds per linear
foot.
.4 Shall be able to support accessory devices such as universal rail clamp,
soap and sanitizers, paper towel dispensers, wire baskets, sharps
container holders, vacuum bottles, glove boxes, clip organizers, instrument
mounting brackets, mounting clamps, IV poles, chart holders, and utility
hooks.
.5 All attachment hardware shall be included.
.2 Universal Rail Clamp: to be included.
.3 Soap and Sanitizer Mounting Bracket: to be included; mounting location to refer to
drawings.
2.2 FINISH
.1 Durawrap Tile: Tiles shall be constructed of .75”-thick, 45-pound medium-density MDF with
a laminate face of Durawrap (99.9% PVC-free) 3D laminate. The horizontal edges of the
tiles are ship lapped (shingled) to prohibit moisture from wicking behind the tiles.
.1 Durawrap in Natural Maple Finish.
.2 Corian: Glacier White.
.3 Finishes shall meet the facility’s requirement for infection control.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
.1 Inspect areas in which work is to be performed for acceptability to receive work.
.2 Report all discrepancies to Contractor for correction.
.3 Proceeding with work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
.1 Assemble and install all items in strict accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions.
.1 Anchor all fixed components firmly, square, level, plumb.
.2 Horizontal support elements

.1 Install at heights indicated with all tops, shelves, and writing surfaces level within
1/8" (3) across width.
.3 Vertical support elements

.1 Install plumb, spaced as indicated on shop drawings.
.2 Align slots to assure hanging units are level.
.3 Adjust components and system for correct function and operation in strict
accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.

FURNISHINGS PAGE 7
.1 Repair, if acceptable, or replace all damaged or improperly operating items.
3.4 CLEANING
.1 Immediately after installation and adjustment, clean all surfaces to remove all marks, soil,
and foreign matter.
.2 Just prior to substantial completion, recheck all components and perform all required
additional cleaning.
.3 Upon completion, remove surplus materials, debris, tools and equipment.
END OF SECTION 12 56 70.13

RICHMOND, BC CHAINLINK FENCES
EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS PAGE 1
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DOCUMENTS
.1 This section of the specification forms part of the Contract Documents and is to be read,

.1 Furnish all labour, materials, equipment and service necessary for the complete installation of
fencing as indicated on the drawings and as hereinafter specified.
.2 The work of this section shall include the supply and installation of the following:
.3 Interior galvanized chain link steel fencing, posts and gates.
.4 Privacy PVC slats for all perimeter chain link fence as shown on drawings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1 Provide shop drawings of fencing to the Consultant for approval- Drawings shall show the
general arrangement with proper details of all components necessary to complete installation.
.2 Provide data sheet of privacy PVC slats.
.3 Provide samples of proposed galvanized steel chain link fence components for approval prior
to installation.
.4 Provide samples of PVC slats and full standard colour samples for selection.

.2 Prevent damage to materials during handling and storage. Keep materials under cover and
free from dampness.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1 All pipe, tie wires, tension wires and bands, connectors, fittings, throw-bolts and hardware
shall be hot-dipped galvanized.
.2 Pipe: to CAN2-138.2 MBO, Table 1 Medium Duty. Schedule 40 (wall thicknesses as shown
below), standard continuous weld, modulus of elasticity 30,000.
Pipe Dia. Sched. 40 Wall Thickness

1-5/8" 0.140" (9/64")
1-7/8" 0.145" (19/128")
2-3/8" 0.154" (5/32")
2-7/8" 0.203" (13/64")
3-1/2" 0.226" (7/32")
4-1/2" 0.237" (15/64")
.3 Tension Bar: 16 x 5mm (5/8" x 3/16"), length to match entire height of fencing.
.4 Tie Wire: 3.55mm. (9 gauge) galvanized.

.5 Bottom Tension Wire (where applicable) 4.88mm (6ga.) fixed to fencing by hog rings.
.6 Woven fabric: to CAN2-138.1.M80. See 2.1.8. for gauge and mesh size. Top and bottom
selvedges to have knuckled finish. Wire diameters shall be as follows for the specified wire
gauges:
Specified Gauge Min. Core Wire Diameter

6 ga.: 3.60mm (0.142")
9 ga.: 2.64mm {0.104")
11 ga.: 1.98mm (0.078")
.7 Concrete Footings: compressive strength 18 MPa at 28 days.
.8 Table One: Component Size and Description for each Location. Note: pipe sizes shown are
outside diameter.
Component Fences
Bottom Rail 41mm (1-5/8")
Mid Rail 41mm (1-5/8")
Top Rail 41mm (1-5/8")
Line Posts 60mm (2-3/8")
End Posts 89mm (3-1/2")
Gate Posts 89mm (3-1/2")
Mid Brace 41mm (1-5/8")
Chain Link 50 mm (2")
Fabric Galvanized mesh, 9 ga. Tie Wire, Hog Rings
300mm. (12") o.c.at all tension bands and frame
members.
.9 Touch-up paint: Zinc rich organic ready-mixed coating to CGSB-1-GP-18M.
.10 Gate Hardware: Galvanized pin-type hinge. Latch for all gates, other than that specified under
08 71 00, to be designed to receive padlock. All sized to suit the gate they are installed on.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 POST
.1 Maximum post spacing 2.1 metres on centre. Set end posts of straight runs and adjust on
centre spacing of line posts equally between.
.2 All posts to be welded to galvanized flat anchor plate secured to concrete slab.
3.3 FENCE CONSTRUCTION

.1 All fences shall be all welded construction. Weld all ends continuously to adjoining member.
Grind all welds smooth.
.2 Cope all posts to accept top rail
.3 Cope all mid braces and bottom rails to fit posts
.4 Cut angle iron to fit backstop posts
.5 Cope all Connections. NO crimping or flattening will be permitted. Any connection not meeting

this specification will be rejected and replaced with specified construction at the contractors
expense.
.6 Mid braces shall be installed at all end sections and all sections adjacent to gates and comers,
for all fences. All fences 2.4m high or higher shall have horizontal mid rails installed
continuous in all sections.
3.4 TACK WELDING

.1 Tack weld ALL 6 gauge galv. wire mesh in lieu of tie wires as described in item Table One
above. Spacing for tack welds shall match specified tie wire spacing and as detailed.
3.5 TENSION BANDS

.1 Install tension bands where fabric terminates at all terminal, comer and gate posts.
3.6 FINISH
.1 Clean all welds and other breaks in the galvanized surface. Touch up with zinc rich paint. All
link fence and posts to be galvanized finish.
3.7 PRIVACY SLAT

.1 Slide the new slats down into the gap created by the existing chain link, keep straight along full
length. Adjust existing chain link as needed to fit slab through.
3.8 CLEANUP
.1 Clean up all excess and waste material and remove from the site.
Fence Construction
Definition of Terms
• See tables in this section for sizes and gauges of components
• Mid braces shall occur for a minimum one full panel, each side of a corner or bend
• Where a change in fence height occurs along a continuous run of fence, the line post shall be
sized and treated as an end post
• Top rails, bottom rails and mid rails shall be continuous between line posts
• Install a continuous mid rail on all fences equal to or greater than 2400mm high

3000mm max typ

bottom rail

RICHMOND EAST PRIMARY CARE CENTRE
RICHMOND, BC
APPENDIX 1.1
OWNER SUPPLIES CONTRACTOR INSTALLS (OSCI)
ITEMS CUT SHEETS
RICHMOND, BC
OWNER SUPPLIES CONTRACTOR INSTALLS (OSCI) ITEMS CUT SHEETS:

(For full list of owner supplies and contractor installed items, refer to drawings.
All OSCI products are subject to changes.)
BPT BOARD, PATIENT TRANSFER (WALL-MOUNT)
DS DIAGNOSTIC SET (WALL-MOUNT; REQ. POWER)
DW DISHWASHER
EBD EMESIS BAG DISPENSER
EY EYE WASH BOTTLE (WALL-MOUNT)
HK-XA WALL-MOUNT HOOK RACK FOR X-RAY APRON
HS HAND SANITIZER DISPENSER (WALL-MOUNT)
LFT LIFT, PATIENT TRANSFER, CEILING
LP LOUVERED PANEL WITH BINS (WALL-MOUNT)
MKS MONITOR ARM & KEYBOARD TRAY STATION
(P.LAM. FURNITURE SYSTEM; WALL-MOUNT)
PH-W PHONE - WALL-MOUNT
PPE PPE DISPENSER (WALL-MOUNT)
PTD PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER (WALL-MOUNT)
S-BS SHELF-BARCODE SCANNER; WALL-MOUNT;
6"x6"x6"; (REQ. DATA & POWER)
SD SOAP DISPENSER - WALL OR HH-MOUNT
SDT SOAP DISPENSER W/ DRIP TRAY (WALL-MOUNT)
SH-W SHARP CONTAINER W/ WALL-MOUNT BRACKET
TN TICKET NUMBER DISPENSER, FLOOR-STANDING
TN-D TICKET NUMBER DISPLAY (WALL-MOUNT, REQ. POWER)
TV TELEVISION – SUSPENDED CEILING-MOUNT OR WALL-MOUNTED
(REQ. POWER & DATA FOR TV)

BPT
Equipment Datasheet
Item Description Equipment Number
Boards, Patient Transfer 19-014
Manufacturer Model Number

----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
Stevens Red Plastic Transfer Board
----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
Surgo/Hill-Rom Patient Sifter/ Transfer Board
----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
Further Description:
Stevens
• Patient transfer board available in different colors
materials and sizes
Surgo
Specifications:
Stevens
Width: 22”
Length: 72”
Surgo Hillrom
Width: 22”
Length: 72”
Thickness: 3/16”
Capacity: 250 lb
Hillrom
Width (Long Wide): 20.5”

Width (Long Narrow ): 16.5”
Width: (Short Narrow ) 16.5”
Length (Long Wide): 71.5”
Length (Long Narrow ): 71.5”
Length (Short Narrow ); 40”
Capacity: 500 lb
Vendor Link:
https://stevens.ca/product/transfer-board-22-x-72-each--059-1
https://www.surgo.com/patient-transfer-aids--4/patient-shifter-
22-wide--1
https://www.hillrom.ca/en/products/patient-transfer-boards/ Installation Considerations:
• Backing required for w all mounted storage
This information is provided for planning purposes only and is not to be relied upon. Final installation specifications are dependent
upon selected supplier’s shop drawings.
Oct 2021
DS
Equipment Datasheet
Diagnostic Set, Wall Mounted 31-268

----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
Welch Allyn Green Series 777
----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
• Wall mounted diagnostic set that consists of manual

BP, Diagnostic Otoscopes, Ophthalmoscope Wall
transformer, thermometer, and specula Dispenser.
Specifications:
100-240V, 50-60Hz, 0.16A max
Choice of 30”/34”/36” (L) Panel 11.75” to 12” w idth
Installation Considerations:
Wall backing
Vendor Link:
https://www.hillrom.ca/en/products/green-series-777-integrated- AC Pow er
wall-system/ Data port
Mount Bracket 63” from floor
Sept 2021
DW
Equipment Datasheet
Kitchenware, Dishwasher GK-102
Potential Manufacturer Model Number

----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
Bosch
----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
Electrolux
----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
• Stainless Steel dishw asher compatible to be

used in health care environment
Specifications:
Dim ensions and w eight:
W x D x H: 610 x 590 x 870 mm

Weight: 50 kg
Electrical Requirem ents:
120 V AC, 60 Hz, 15 A
Design and Installation Notes:

Plum bing Requirem ents:
Water: Required
Drain: Required
This information is provided for planning purposes only and is not to be relied upon.
Final installation specifications are dependent upon selected supplier's shop draw ings.
RCH Redevelopment May 2019

EBD
Equipment Datasheet
Dispenser, Glove 18-022.2

----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
Medline Industries NONEMBGDISP
----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
 Handy wall mounted design

 Can hold up to 24 bags
 Compatible with emesis bags NON80327,
NON80328, NON80329, EMEBAG, and
EMEBAGCL (bags not included)
Specifications:
Dimensions:
6” x 6” x 6.5” (L x W x H)
Material: ABS
This information is provided for planning purposes only and is not to be relied upon. Final installation specifications are
dependent upon selected supplier’s shop drawings.
July 2021
EY
Equipment Datasheet
Eyewash station, Bottle 11-655

----------------------------------------------- ------------------------------------------
Cedderoth Single Bottle Eye Wash Station
---------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
Single-use, sterile, ready to use buffered solution for eye

irrigation. Provides a generous flow of liquid to flush
aw ay harmful contamination. Helps restore normal pH
levels from corrosive substances (alkalis or acids).
Container Size 500 ml
Composition 0.9% Isotonic Sodium Chloride
Specifications:
Wall Bracket Dimensions: 82mm x 262mm x 70mm
Vendor Link: Installation Considerations:

https://www.medline.com/product/Emergency-Eye-Wash-
Safety-Station-by-Bel-Art/Eye-Wash-Station/Z05-PF172040# Wall backing
Oct 2021
HK-XA
Equipment Datasheet
Racks, Garment, Apron 17-527

----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
Ultraray Apron Racks
----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
Further Description: Specifications/Features:
Racks designed to hold various sizes and styles of Many styles/sizes available. Specifications below are for
aprons/vests. Can be w all mounted or mobile. options pictured in cut sheet.
Specifications/Features:
Many styles/sizes available. Specifications below are for

options pictured in cut sheet.

https://ultraraymedical.com/products/mobile-apron-rack/
Wall backing for mounted options
Jan 2022
HS
Equipment Datasheet
Dispensers, Hand Sanitizer 15-827

----------------------------------------------- ------------------------------------------
SC Johnson Professional Deb ProLine Curve
---------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
• Similar to Soap dispenser

• Catch Tray option available
• Durable construction; Secure lock; Large push bar
• No latex components
• Collapsible cartridges
• BioCote® protection built into ProLine™ Hygenipak
Dispensers with anti-microbial dispenser technology.
• 1 Liter
Specifications:

https://www.scjp.com/sites/default/files/2021-
01/Manual%20Skincare-Dispenser.pdf Wall backing
Sept 2021
LFT
Equipment Datasheet
Patient Lift, Ceiling Rail System (Guldmann) 19-015

----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
Guldmann GH3 (440/550/660/770/Twin)
----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
Standard (440/550/660/770) G3 Standard G3 Tw in
SWL (lbs) available: 440,550, 660, 770
Single Motor
In-Rail Charging system
Emergency Electrical and Mechanical Lowering
Optional CLM and Preventative Maintenance Software
Standard Medium Hanger
Bariatric (Tw in)
SWL (lbs) available: 1100
Dual Motor
Cross Hanger
Specifications:
Supply voltage, transformer: 100-150/230 VAC 50-60Hz
Power Supply: 33 VAC 2.5 A
Battery: NiMH 24 V 2.0 Ah Installation Considerations:
Sound Level: 52 dB
Hoist Weight (440/550): 21.1 lbs
-A hoist motor capable of lifting a minimum of 450 lbs is the
Hoist Weight (660/770): 31 lbs
Hoist Weight (Twin): 42.2 lbs minimum for each room. There should be at least 30%
coverage for 625 lbs motors per unit and at least 1 hoist
GH3 Standard Physical Specifications capable of lifting betw een 800-1000 lbs in assigned
bariatric rooms.
-All safety and w orking standards should be considered;

including, but not limited to Worksafe BC Requirements
and CSA standards.
-3 Dimensional X-Y gantry ceiling mounted lift system
-Maximum possible 3D coverage should be considered for

rooms
-Minimum coverage is at least: 36” of coverage from edges

of bed (both sides) to lateral transfer zone. In-bed
positioning of the patient; point to point transfer to chair,
stretcher and toilet (for in-toilet access more constructional
details are required including door angles and additional
rail)
-Minimum capacity of rails 1000 lbs

Vendor Link:
https://www.guldmann.com/ca/products/ceiling-lift- -Requires Electrical outlet at ceiling
systems/lifting-motors/gh3
-Rail installation is project Co. responsibility.
https://www.guldmann.com/ca/products/ceiling-lift-
systems/lifting-motors/gh3-twin
Nov 2021
LP
Equipment Datasheet
Panel, Louvered FO-128

----------------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------------
Akro-Mils 30118, 30161, 30655, 30618
----------------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------------
Louvered Panel 30188 30161

• Single Sided
• Wall mounted
Dimensions Pictured
• 30188 (L: 18”, W: 0.312”, H: 61” - 500lb capacity)
• 30161 (L: 36”, W: 0.312”, H: 61” - 1000lb capacity)
• 30655 (L: 52”, W: 0.312”, H: 34.125” - 750lb capacity)
• 30618 (L: 18”, W: 0.312”, H: 19” – 160lb capacity)
CLEAN
• *More sizes available*
SUPPLY
ONLY
30655
• Backing may be required for louvered panel
Web Links
https://akro-mils.com/Products/Types/Cabinets-Racks-Shelving-
Panels/Louvered-Systems/30118
https://akro-mils.com/Products/Types/Cabinets-Racks-Shelving- 30618
This information is provided for planning purposes only and is not to be relied upon. Final installation specifications are dependent upon selected
supplier’s shop drawings.
September 2021
PH-W
Data sheet
Cisco public
Cisco IP Phone 7800 Series
© 2020 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 13

Contents
Features and benefits 4
Licensing 6
Product specifications 6
Ordering information 10
Warranty 12
Cisco Unified Communications Services 12
Cisco environmental sustainability 12
Cisco Capital 13
More information 13

The Cisco® IP Phone 7800 Series is a cost-effective, high-fidelity voice communications
portfolio designed to improve your organization’s people-centric communications, while
reducing your operating costs.
It combines an attractive new ergonomic design with “always-on” reliability and secure encrypted
communications. The Cisco® IP Phone 7800 Series delivers advanced IP Telephony features and crystal clear
wideband audio performance to deliver an easy-to-use, full-featured voice communications experience on
Cisco on-premises and hosted infrastructure platforms and third party hosted call control.
The Cisco® IP Phone 7800 Series introduces four models to the Cisco IP Phone portfolio. From left-to-right
(Figure 1), they are:
● Cisco IP Phone 7811 supporting one line (available in charcoal only)

● Cisco IP Phone 7821 supporting two lines (available in charcoal and white)
● Cisco IP Phone 7841 supporting four lines (available in charcoal and white)
● Cisco IP Phone 7861 supporting sixteen lines (available in charcoal and white)
Figure 1.
Cisco IP Phone 7800 Series

The line keys on each model are fully programmable. You can set up keys to support either lines, such as
directory numbers, or call features like speed dialing. You can also boost productivity by handling multiple calls
for each directory number, using the multi-call per-line appearance feature. Tri-color LEDs on the line keys
support this feature and make the phone simpler and easy to use.
Fixed function keys on all models give you one-touch access to service, messaging, directory, hold/resume,
transfer, and conference features. A full-duplex speakerphone lets you set up clear multi-party conferences for
flexible, productive collaboration.
The Cisco IP Phone 7800 Series sets a new standard in usability and delivers a context-sensitive user
experience. It features a high-resolution 3.5” (396x162) greyscale display with white backlighting on the IP
Phone 7821, 7841 and 7861, and a 3.2” (384 x106) display without backlighting on IP Phone 7811, for easy
reading. Localized language support, including right-to-left onscreen text, meets the needs of global users.
The Cisco IP Phone 7800 Series is also more energy-efficient and eco-friendly, to support your green
initiatives. Each phone supports Power-over-Ethernet (PoE) Class 1 and Cisco’s EnergyWise™, and is Energy
Star certified. A standard power-save option is available on the IP Phone 7821, 7841 and 7861 to reduce
power consumption during off-hours, save money and maximize energy efficiency.
The IP Phone 7800 Series portfolio is ideal for any mid-sized to large enterprise company that wants to update
its phone system from a traditional analog or digital-based system to an IP Communications system. It’s also an
excellent choice if you’re seeking to expand your voice communications support with your current Cisco Unified
Communications solution. Small businesses who have interest in the Cisco IP Phone 7800 Series, but have
investment in or are considering third party hosted call control services, are also candidates for the IP Phone
7800 Series.
Features and benefits

Table 1 lists features and benefits of the Cisco® IP Phone 7800 Series.
Table 1. Features and benefits
Features Benefits
Hardware Features
Ergonomic design ● The phone offers an easy-to-use interface and provides a traditional telephony-like user experience.
Graphical display ● White backlit, greyscale, 3.5” 396×162 pixel-based display on the IP Phone 7821, 7841 and 7861.
● Non-backlit, greyscale, 3.28” 384×106 pixel-based display on the IP Phone 7811.

● Provide scrollable access to calling features and text-based XML applications.
Handset ● The handset is a standard wideband-capable audio handset (connects through an RJ-9 port) for the
IP Phone 7821, 7841 and 7861.
● The default handset is a standard narrowband-capable audio handset (connects through an RJ-9
port) for the IP Phone 7811, and wideband on handset is available with purchase of additional
wideband handset.
● The handset is Hearing Aid-Compatible (HAC) and meets Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) loudness requirements for the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). You can achieve Section
508 loudness requirements by using industry-standard inline handset amplifiers such as Walker
Equipment W-10 or CE-100 amplifiers. The dial pad is also ADA-compliant.
● The narrowband handset (for the IP Phone 7811) produces a magnetic field that attracts small
metallic objects such as pins and staples. To avoid possible injuries do not keep small metallic
objects close to the handset.

Features Benefits
Headset ● The analog headset jack is a standard wideband-capable RJ-9 audio port for the IP Phone 7821,
7841, and 7861.
Backlit Indicator ● The phone supports backlit indicators for the audio path keys (handset, headset and speakerphone),
select key, line keys, and message waiting.
● Headset key is not available on the IP Phone 7811.
Volume control ● A volume-control toggle provides easy decibel-level adjustments of the handset, monitor speaker,
and ringer.
Full duplex speakerphone ● Full-duplex speakerphone allows gives you flexibility in placing and receiving calls. For added
security, the audible Dual Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) tones are masked when the speakerphone
mode is used.
Bezel ● The IP Phone 7821, 7841 and 7861 include a default black bezel (replaceable), and an optional silver
bezel is also available separately.
● The IP Phone 7811 is available with a black bezel.
Dual-position foot stand ● The display is easy to view and the buttons and keys are easy to use. The two-position foot stand
supports viewing angles of 30 degrees and 45 degrees; you can remove the foot stand for wall
mounting, with mounting holes located on the base of the phone. (IP Phone 7821, 7841 and 7861)
● Only 1 foot-stand position (45 degrees) is supported on the IP Phone 7811.
Wall-mountable ● The phone can be installed on a wall using optional wall-mount kit (available separately).
Electronic hook switch ● The hookswitch can be controlled electronically with a third party headset connected to the auxiliary
port for the IP Phone 7821, 7841, and 7861.
Keys ● The phone has the following keys

◦ Line keys
◦ Soft-keys
◦ Two-way navigation and select keys
◦ Hold/Resume, Transfer and Conference keys
◦ Messaging, Service and Directory keys
◦ Standard key pads
◦ Volume control toggle key
◦ Speakerphone, headset and mute keys (Headset key is not available on the IP Phone 7811)
Ethernet cables ● The IP Phone 7811, 7821, 7841, and 7861

◦ Category 3/5/5e/6 for 10-Mbps cables with 4 pairs
◦ Category 5/5e/6 for 100-Mbps cables with 4 pairs
● The IP Phone 7841
◦ Category 5/5e/6 for 1000-Mbps cables with 4 pairs
Power Features
IEEE PoE class 1 ● The phone supports IEEE 802.3af PoE (Class 1); power consumption does not exceed 3.84 watts.
AC Power Adapter ● Cisco power cube 3 (CP-PWR-CUBE-3=) and Cisco power adapter 3 (CP-PWR-ADPT-3) are used
as standard Cisco IP Phone Power Supplies for non-PoE deployments.
Cisco power injector ● The IP Phone 7811, 7821 and 7861 are compatible with Cisco Unified IP Phone Power Injector (CP-
PWR-INJ), and 7841 is compatible with Cisco Aironet Power Injector (AIR-PWRINJ5=).

Features Benefits
Call-Control Support
● 8.5.1
Cisco Unified
● 8.6.2
Communications Manager
● 9.1.2
● 10.x and later
Cisco Business Edition ● 8.6.2

6000 ● 9.1.2
● 10.x and later
Cisco Hosted ● 8.6.2 and later (using supported UCM versions above)
Collaboration Solution
Cisco Unified Survivable ● 8.x and later

Remote Site Telephony
Licensing
The Cisco IP Phone 7811 and 7821 require a Basic User Connect License (UCL) in order to connect to
Cisco Unified Communications Manager. The Cisco IP Phone 7841 and 7861 require an Enhanced
User Connect License (UCL) in order to connect to Cisco Unified Communications Manager.
Product specifications
Table 2 lists the features and specifications of The Cisco® IP Phone 7800 Series.
Table 2. Features and specifications
Features Specifications
Audio ● Automatic Gain Control

● Comfort Noise Generation
● Silence Suppression/Voice Activity Detection
● Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC)

● Dynamic Noise Reduction
Signaling protocol support ● Session Initiation Protocol (SIP)
Codec support ● G.711a/μ, G.722, G.729a/b, iLBC, OPUS
Key call features support ● + Dialing (E.164)

● Abbreviated dial
● Adjustable ringing and volume levels

● Adjustable display contrast
● Agent greeting
● Auto-answer
● Auto-detection of headset (Not available on the IP Phone 7811)
● Busy Lamp Field (BLF) (Not available on the IP Phone 7811)
● Call back
● Call forward

● Call history
● Call park
● Call Pickup
● Call timer
● Call waiting
● Caller ID
● cBarge
● Corporate directory
● Conference
● Cross Cluster Extension Mobility (EMCC)
● Dial from the list
● Direct transfer
● Do not disturb
● Extension Mobility (EM)
● Forced access codes and client matter codes
● Group call pickup

● Hold/resume
● Immediate divert
● Intercom (Not available on the IP Phone 7811)

● Join (Not available on the IP Phone 7811)
● Message-waiting indicator
● Meet me conference
● Mobility
● Music on hold
● Mute
● Network profiles (automatic)
● On- and off-network distinctive ringing
● Personal directory
● Privacy
● Private Line Automated Ringdown (PLAR)
● Redial
● Ring tone per line appearance
● Shared line
● Silent monitoring and recording
● Speed dial
● Time and date display
● Transfer
● Voicemail
● Whisper coaching
Language support ● Arabic (Arabic Area)

● Bulgarian (Bulgaria)
● Catalan (Spain)
● Chinese (China) – GB 2312
● Chinese (Hong Kong)
● Chinese (Taiwan)

● Croatian (Croatia)
● Czech (Czech Republic)
● Danish (Denmark)
● Dutch (Netherlands)
● English (United Kingdom)
● Estonian (Estonia)
● French (France)
● Finnish (Finland)
● German (Germany)
● Greek (Greece)
● Hebrew (Israel)
● Hungarian (Hungary)
● Italian (Italy)
● Japanese (Japan)
● Latvian (Latvia)
● Lithuanian (Lithuania)
● Korean (Korea Republic)
● Norwegian (Norway)
● Polish (Poland)
● Portuguese (Portugal)
● Portuguese (Brazil)
● Romanian (Romania)
● Russian (Russian Federation)
● Spanish (Columbia)
● Spanish (Spain)
● Slovak (Slovakia)
● Swedish (Sweden)
● Serbian (Republic of Serbia)
● Serbian (Republic of Montenegro)
● Slovenian (Slovenia)
● Thai (Thailand)
● Turkish (Turkey)
Multiple ring tones ● The phone supports user-adjustable ring tones.
Directories ● The phone identifies incoming messages and categorizes them for users on the screen. This makes
it fast and easy to return calls using direct dial-back capability. The corporate directory integrates
with the Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) standard directory.
Quality-of-service (QoS) ● The phone supports CDP and 802.1Q/p standards, and can be configured with an 801.1Q VLAN
options header containing the VLAN ID overrides configured by the Admin VLAN ID.
Security ● Certificates
● Image authentication
● Device authentication
● File authentication
● Signaling authentication
● Media encryption using Secure Real-Time Transfer Protocol (SRTP) using AES-128
● Signaling encryption using Transport Layer Security (TLS) Protocol using AES-128 or AES-256

● Encrypted configuration files
● 802.1X authentication
● Cryptography
Configuration options ● The user can configure IP address assignment statically or through the DHCP client.
Physical dimensions ● IP Phone 7811: 207 x 195 x 33mm (exclude foot stand)
(H×W×D) ● IP Phone 7821: 207 x 206 x 28mm (exclude foot stand)
● IP Phone 7841: 207 x 206 x 28mm (exclude foot stand)
● IP Phone 7861: 207 x 265 x 28mm (exclude foot stand)
Weight ● IP Phone 7811: 806g

● IP Phone 7821: 867g
● IP Phone 7841: 868g
● IP Phone 7861: 1053g
Display ● IP Phone 7821, 7841, 7861: 3.5” 396×162 pixels

● IP Phone 7811: 3.28” 384×106 pixels
Ethernet switch ● The phone has a 10/100BASE-T (The Cisco® IP Phone 7811, 7821 and 7861) or
a10/100/1000BASE-T
(The Cisco® IP Phone 7841) Ethernet connection through two RJ-45 ports, one for the LAN
connection and the other for a downstream Ethernet device connection like a PC.
Phone casing composition ● Polycarbonate Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene (ABS) textured plastic.
Power requirements ● The phone is an interoperable IEEE 802.3af PoE (Class 1 device); 48 VDC is required; it can be
supplied locally at the desktop using an optional AC-to-DC power supply (CP-PWR-CUBE-3=).
Use of the power supply also requires the use of one of the corresponding AC country cords.
Operational temperature ● 32 to 104°F (0 to 40°C)
Nonoperational temperature ● 14 to 140°F (-10 to 60°C)

shock
Humidity ● Operating 10% to 90%, non-condensing

● Non-operating 10% to 95%, non-condensing
Cosmetic ● Cisco cosmetic class A
Certification and compliance ● Regulatory Compliance

◦ CE Markings per directives 2004/108/EC and 2006/95/EC
● Safety
◦ UL 60950 Second Edition
◦ CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60950 Second Edition
◦ EN 60950 Second Edition (including A11 and A12)
◦ IEC 60950 Second Edition (including A11 and A12)
◦ AS/NZS 60950
◦ GB4943
● EMC - Emissions
◦ 47CFR Part 15 (CFR 47) Class B
◦ AS/NZS CISPR22 Class B
◦ CISPR22: 2005 w/Amendment 1: 2005 Class B
◦ EN55022: 2006 w/Amendment 1: 2007 Class B

◦ ICES003 Class B
◦ VCCI Class B
◦ EN61000-3-2
◦ EN61000-3-3
◦ KN22 Class B
● EMC - Immunity
◦ EN55024
◦ CISPR24
◦ EN60601-1-2
◦ KN24
◦ Armadillo Light
● Telecom
◦ FCC Part 68 HAC
◦ CS-03-HAC
◦ AS/ACIF S004
◦ AS/ACIF S040
◦ NZ PTC 220
◦ Industry Standards: TIA 810 and TIA 920
◦ Industry Standards: IEEE 802.3 Ethernet, IEEE 802.3af and 802.3at
Ordering information
Table 3 gives ordering information for the phone and its accessories.
Table 3. Ordering information
Product Number Description
CP-7811-K9= ● Cisco IP Phone 7811
CP-7821-W-K9= ● Cisco IP Phone 7821, White
CP-DX-HS-NB= ● Spare Narrowband Handset for Cisco IP Phone 7811
CP-DX-HS= ● Spare Wideband Handset for Cisco IP Phone 7800 Series
CP-DX-W-HS= ● Spare White Wideband Handset for Cisco IP Phone 7800 Series
CP-7800-HS-CORD= ● Spare Handset Cord for Cisco IP Phone 7800 Series

CP-DX-W-CORD= ● Spare White Handset Cord for Cisco IP Phone 7800 Series
CP-7800-HS-HOOK= ● Spare Handset Hook for Cisco IP Phone 7800 Series, 20 Pieces
CP-7811-WMK= ● Spare Wallmount Kit for Cisco IP Phone 7811
CP-7800-WMK= ● Spare Wallmount Kit for Cisco IP Phone 7800 Series
CP-7861-WMK= ● Spare Wallmount Kit for Cisco IP Phone 7861
CP-7811-FS= ● Spare Foot stand for Cisco IP Phone 7811
CP-7800-FS= ● Spare Foot stand for Cisco IP Phone 7800 Series
CP-7861-FS= ● Spare Foot stand for Cisco IP Phone 7861
CP-7821-B-BEZEL= ● Spare Black Bezel for Cisco IP Phone 7821
CP-7821-S-BEZEL= ● Spare Silver Bezel for Cisco IP Phone 7821
CP-PWR-CUBE-3 ● Cisco Power Cube 3
CP-PWR-CORD-AP= ● Power Cord Asia Pacific
CP-PWR-CORD-AR= ● Power Cord Argentina
CP-PWR-CORD-AU= ● Power Cord Australia
CP-PWR-CORD-BZ= ● Power cord for Brazil
CP-PWR-CORD-CE= ● Power Cord European
CP-PWR-CORD-CN= ● Power Cord China
CP-PWR-CORD-JP= ● Power Cord Japan
CP-PWR-CORD-NA= ● Power Cord North America
CP-PWR-CORD-SW= ● Power Cord Switzerland
CP-PWR-CORD-UK= ● Power Cord United Kingdom
CP-PWR-ADPT-3-AR= ● Cisco Power Adapter 3 with Argentina Clip
CP-PWR-ADPT-3-AU= ● Cisco Power Adapter 3 with Australia Clip

CP-PWR-ADPT-3-BZ= ● Cisco Power Adapter 3 with Brazil Clip
CP-PWR-ADPT-3-CN= ● Cisco Power Adapter 3 with China Clip
CP-PWR-ADPT-3-EU= ● Cisco Power Adapter 3 with European Clip
CP-PWR-ADPT-3-IN= ● Cisco Power Adapter 3 with India Clip
CP-PWR-ADPT-3-KR= ● Cisco Power Adapter 3 with Korea Clip
CP-PWR-ADPT-3-NA= ● Cisco Power Adapter 3 with North America Clip
CP-PWR-ADPT-3-UK= ● Cisco Power Adapter 3 with United Kingdom Clip
Warranty
The Cisco® IP Phone 7800 Series are covered by a Cisco standard 1-year replacement warranty.
Cisco Unified Communications Services

Cisco and our certified partners can help you set up a secure, dependable Cisco Unified Communications
solution, meeting aggressive deployment schedules and accelerating business advantage. Cisco's portfolio of
services is based on proven methodologies for unifying voice, video, data, and mobile applications on fixed and
mobile networks.
Our unique lifecycle approach to services defines what’s needed at each phase of the solution lifecycle.
Customized planning and design services help you create a solution that meets your business needs. Award-
winning technical support helps you boost your operational efficiency. Remote management services simplify
day-to-day operations. And optimization services let you modify and improve your network solution when
business needs change.
Cisco environmental sustainability

Information about Cisco’s environmental sustainability policies and initiatives for our products, solutions,
operations, and extended operations or supply chain is provided in the “Environment Sustainability” section of
Cisco’s Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) Report.
Reference links to information about key environmental sustainability topics (mentioned in the “Environment
Sustainability” section of the CSR Report) are provided in the following table:
Sustainability topic Reference
Information on product material content laws and regulations Materials
Information on electronic waste laws and regulations, including products, batteries, and packaging WEEE compliance
Cisco makes the packaging data available for informational purposes only. It may not reflect the most current
legal developments, and Cisco does not represent, warrant, or guarantee that it is complete, accurate, or up to
date. This information is subject to change without notice.

Cisco Capital
Flexible payment solutions to help you achieve your objectives
Cisco Capital makes it easier to get the right technology to achieve your objectives, enable business
transformation and help you stay competitive. We can help you reduce the total cost of ownership, conserve
capital, and accelerate growth. In more than 100 countries, our flexible payment solutions can help you acquire
hardware, software, services and complementary third-party equipment in easy, predictable payments.
Learn more.
More information
For additional details on the Cisco® IP Phone 7800 Series, go to https://www.cisco.com/go/ipphones/7800.
Printed in USA C78-729488-14 12/21

PPE
Equipment Datasheet
Dispenser, PPE FO-136

----------------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------------
Medic Acces ISO-18
----------------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------------
Omnimed (through global industrial) PPE Isolation Organizer
• Wall mounted or door hanged modular dispenser for

gloves, masks gow ns, head covers, and shoe covers
Specifications:
Overall Height: 36'' / 91,44cm

Overall Width: 17.25''/ 43,81cm
Main Surface: Aluminum, 0.100"
Hinges: Continuous, steel, 0.100'' 36 x 1'' / 91,44 X 2,54 cm
Finish: Pure glossy w hite, thermal baking of electrostatic
pow der.
• Wall backing required
November 2021
PTD
Equipment Datasheet
Dispensers, Paper Towel 27-461

----------------------------------------------- ------------------------------------------
Kimberly-Clark IN-SIGHT* SANITOUCH* Hard Roll
---------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
• Use with universal hard roll towels with a 1.5”/1.75”

core
• 2 colors available
• Emergency knob
• Made from Durable ABS Plastic
• Comes with MICROBAN* technology
• One-at-a time, hands free pull dispensing for
controlled usage and less waste
Specifications:
WEIGHT: 8.5 lbs.
Size: W12.63”x H16.3”x W10.2”
Vendor Link:
https://www.kcprofessional.com/en- Installation Considerations:
us/products/dispensers/paper-towel-dispensers/hard-
roll/sanitouch-manual-hard-roll-towel-dispenser/09990 • Wall Mounted/backing required
• Suggested mounting bottom edge 48” from floor
Sept 2021
SD SDT
Equipment Datasheet
Dispensers, Soap 15-827.2

----------------------------------------------- ------------------------------------------
SC Johnson Professional Deb ProLine Curve
---------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
• Similar to Hand Sanitizer dispenser

• Durable construction; Secure lock; Large push bar
• No latex components
• Collapsible cartridges
• BioCote® protection built into ProLine™ Hygenipak
Dispensers with anti-microbial dispenser technology.
• 1 Liter
Specifications:

https://www.scjp.com/sites/default/files/2021-
01/Manual%20Skincare-Dispenser.pdf Wall backing
Sept 2021
SH-W
Equipment
Datasheet
Container, Sharps (Mount) 14-423.1

----------------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------------
McKesson 85161H/85301H
----------------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------------
Wall-mounted enclosure (5 qt)
85161H 85161H
 Works with Kendall 5 quart 8506SA, 8507SA and
Kendall 2 quart 85021, 85031
85301H
 Mounted wall enclosures secure sharps containers,
keep counter space clear, and help prevent access to
contents in high traffic areas
 Contents can be viewed by hospital personnel, but
unsightly items are not fully visible to patients and
visitors
 These sturdy enclosures are made of ABS plastic - the
same material used in football helmets. Optional glove
box holders keep gloves readily available
Specifications:
Dimensions: Wall-mounted enclosure

 85161H: 12” x 5.5” x 13” (2-3 Gal) 85301H
 85301: 17.5” x 6.5” x 14.5”
 May be wall mounted (using factory designed

bracket)
 May require backing
June 2018
TN TN-D
Equipment Datasheet
Dispenser, Ticket Tdisp

------------------------------------------- ------------------------------------------
Take-A-Number (Uline) H-1713 - 2 digit Wireless
------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
Reduce waiting time and improve
customer service.
Electronic system includes large 5"
numeric display, countertop stand
and ticket dispenser.
Ticket rolls sold separately.
DIMENSIONS:
LED Display: 12 x 9 3/4" x 2 1/8"

Dispenser sign: 14 x 8 3/8"
Dispenser stand:
Pole: 11" tall x 1/2" square
Base: 3 1/2 x 4 7/8"
SYSTEM INCLUDES:
LED Display
D80 ticket dispenser, red (H-1714)
Take a Number System sign.
Counter stand.
Take-A-Number sign for dispenser (English).
12 volt transformer
Controls: 3 push buttons
FEATURES:
LED display counts 00 - 99
SPECIFICATIONS:
CSA Approved
July 2020
TV - SUSPENDED CEILING MOUNT
PLCM-UNL
PLCM-UNL-CP
Universal Ceiling Mounts
FOR 32" TO 90" DISPLAYS
The SmartMount® PLCM-UNL(-CP) Universal Ceiling Mounts utilize 1.5" NPT extension
pipes for versatility, support, and connection. The 1.5" NPT threaded pipes make it simple
to customize each mount to your specific application. The PLCM-UNL kit combines
the PLP-UNL Universal I-Shaped Adaptor plate, the PLCM-2 tilt box, and the EXT103
fixed length 1.5" NPT column, to deliver a drop of 36" for display mounting patterns of
Mounting Pattern Max load
up to 600 x 400mm. When combined with a Peerless-AV® ceiling plate, it provides the
Up to 600 x 400mm 150lb
(23.62" x 15.75") (68.2kg) perfect combination for flat panel ceiling mounting in sports facilities, airports, lobbies,
or retail environments.
PLCM-UNL-CP
- -5° to 20° adjustable tilt and 360°

swivel
LIGHTWEIGHT ALUMINUM COLUMN
- Peerless-AV EXT103 Aluminum For ease of installation
Extension Column included, providing a
36" drop
- Simple hook-on display installation
- Universal I-Shaped Adaptor fits displays MAXIMUM VIEWING POSSIBILITIES

with mounting holes up to 600 x 360º of side-to-side swivel creates endless
400mm viewing possibilities from anywhere in the room
- Landscape or portrait orientation
- Integrated cable management protects,

contains and conceals cables for a
clean, professional installation
EASY ADJUSTMENT
5º back and up to 20º forward tilt helps
set the perfect viewing angle
UNIVERSAL COMPATIBILITY
Fits displays from 32" to 90"
info@peerless-av.com
peerless-av.com
Driving Technology Through Innovation
Model Numbers WARRANTY: Limited 5-year
PLCM-UNL/PLCM-UNL-CP SmartMount® Universal Ceiling Mount for 32" to 90" Displays

Product Specifications
DIMENSIONS (W x H x D) PRODUCT WEIGHT LOAD CAPACITY FINISH AVAILABLE COLORS
24.38" x 43.23" x 4.03" 22.8lb (10.3kg)

PLCM-UNL (619 x 1098 x 103mm)
150lb (68.2kg) Powder Coat Black
24.38" x 44.23" x 4.03"
PLCM-UNL-CP 25.6lb (11.6kg)
(619 x 1123 x 103mm)
Package Specifications
PACKAGE SIZE PACKAGE PACKAGE UNITS IN
PACKAGE CONTENTS
(W x H x D) SHIP WEIGHT UPC CODE PACKAGE
EXT103 Extension column, PLCM-2 tilt box,
46.25" x 7.75" x 3.63"
PLCM-UNL 735029241713 PLP-UNL Universal I-Shaped Adaptor, mounting
(1175 x 197 x 92mm) 29.6lb (13.4kg) hardware & instructions
1
CMJ470 Ceiling plate, EXT103 extension column,
46.25" x 7.75" x 3.63" 31.7lb (14.4kg) 735029241720
PLCM-UNL-CP PLCM-2 tilt box, PLP-UNL Universal I-Shaped
(1175 x 197 x 92mm) Adaptor, mounting hardware & instructions
Accessories ACC, CMJ, DCS, DCT Models: Ceiling Plates
All dimensions = inch (mm)
Architect Specifications
The Smartmount® Universal Ceiling Mount shall be a Peerless-AV model PLCM-UNL or PLCM-UNL-CP and shall be located where indicated on the plans.
Assembly and installation shall be done according to instructions provided by the manufacturer.
Visit peerless-av.com to see the Peerless-AV Peerless-AV EMEA Peerless-AV Latin America
complete line of AV solutions from 2300 White Oak Circle Unit 3 Watford Interchange Ave de las Industrias 413
Aurora, IL 60502 USA Colonial Way, Watford Parque Industrial Escobedo
Peerless-AV, including outdoor displays,
Herts, WD24 4WP Escobedo, N.L.,
wireless, kiosks, digital audio, display (800) 865-2112 United Kingdom Mexico 66062
mounts, projector mounts, carts/stands, (630) 375-5100 +44 (0) 1923 200100 +52 (81) 8384-8300
and a full assortment of accessories. Fax: (800) 359-6500 Fax: +44 (0) 1923 200101 Fax: +52 (81) 8384-8360
LIT-1203 rev.4
© 2018 Peerless Industries, Inc. Peerless-AV® and SmartMount® are registered trademarks of Peerless Industries, Inc. All rights reserved.
PLCM-1CP, PLCM-UNL-CP
PLCM-UNL-CP-AB
PLCM-UNL-CP-AW
90" MAX 150 lb
PLCM-1CP MAX
(228 cm) MAX (68 kg)
32" - 90" 150 lb

PLCM-UNL-CP MAX
(81cm - 228cm) (68 kg)
ENG
ESP
FRN
DEU
NEL
ITL
ČEŠ
SLK
POR
TÜR
1 2015-05-18 #:203-9500-4 (2016-11-29)

WARNING
ENG - This product is designed to be installed on wood joist/beam or solid concrete ceilings. Hardware is
included for wood joist/beam. Before installing make sure the supporting surface will support the combined load
of the equipment and hardware. Screws must be tightly secured. Do not overtighten screws or damage can
occur and product may fail. Never exceed the Maximum Load Capacity. Always use an assistant or mechanical
lifting equipment to safely lift and position equipment. This product is intended for indoor use only. Use of this
product outdoors could lead to product failure or personal injury. Be careful not to pinch fingers when operating
the mount. For support please call customer care at 1-800-865-2112.
ADVERTENCIA
ESP - Este producto está diseñado para ser instalado en techos de viguetas / vigas de madera y en techos
de concreto macizo. Se incluyen los accesorios para la instalación en viguetas / vigas de madera y concreto
macizo. Antes de instalarlo, asegúrese de que la superficie de apoyo sostendrá la carga combinada del equipo
y los fijadores. Los tornillos se tienen que fijar firmemente. No apriete los tornillos en exceso, ya que se pueden
dañar y el producto podría fallar. Nunca exceda la Capacidad Máxima de Carga. Siempre cuente con la ayuda
de un asistente o utilice un equipo mecánico de izar para levantar y colocar el equipo con más seguridad. Este
producto está diseñado para uso en interiores solamente. Utilizar este producto en exteriores podría causar
fallas del producto o lesiones a individuos. Tenga cuidado de no pincharse los dedos cuando mueva el soporte.
Si necesita ayuda, por favor, llame a Servicio al Cliente de Peerless al 1-800-865-2112.
ADVERTISSEMENT
FRN - Ce produit est conçu pour une installation sur des plafonds à solives/montants en bois ou en béton
plein. Les pièces de fixation nécessaires à l’installation sur des solives/montants en bois et du béton plein sont
incluses. Avant de procéder à l’installation, assurez-vous que la surface de support peut soutenir la charge
totale de l’équipement ainsi que des pièces de fixation. Les vis doivent être serrées au maximum. Ne serrez pas
trop les vis pour éviter tout risque d’endommager le produit et de causer sa défaillance. Ne dépassez jamais la
capacité de charge maximale. Pour lever et positionner l’équipement en toute sécurité, faites-vous toujours aider
par une autre personne ou utilisez un dispositif de levage mécanique. Ce produit est conçu uniquement pour un
usage intérieur. L’utilisation de ce produit à l’extérieur peut causer une défaillance du produit ou des blessures
corporelles. Prenez garde à ne pas vous pincer les doigts lorsque vous manipulez le support. Pour toute assis-
tance, veuillez contacter le service à la clientèle au 1-800-865-2112.
ACHTUNG
DEU - Dieses Produkt ist für die Anbringung an Holzträger-/Holzbalken- oder Massivbetondecken ausgelegt.
Die Befestigungsteile zur Anbringung an Holzträgern/-balken oder Massivbeton sind im Lieferumfang enthalten.
Vergewissern Sie sich vor der Anbringung, dass die tragende Fläche das Gesamtgewicht der Geräte und der Be-
festigungsteile tragen kann. Die Schrauben müssen sicher angezogen werden. Ziehen Sie die Schrauben nicht
zu fest an, damit es nicht zu Beschädigungen und Versagen des Produkts kommt. Die maximale Tragfähigkeit
darf niemals überschritten werden. Ziehen Sie immer eine zusätzliche Person heran oder verwenden Sie mecha-
nische Hebegeräte, um Geräte sicher zu heben und zu positionieren. Dieses Produkt ist nur für den Gebrauch
innerhalb von Gebäuden bestimmt. Eine Verwendung dieses Produkts im Freien kann zu Produktausfall oder
Personenschaden führen. Achten Sie beim Umgang mit dem Halter darauf, dass die Finger nicht eingeklemmt
werden. Falls Sie Unterstützung benötigen, wenden Sie sich bitte an den Kundendienst unter der Telefonnummer
1-800-865-2112 (innerhalb der USA).
WAARSCHUWING
NEL - Dit product is ontworpen voor installatie op plafonds met houten balken/dwarsbalken of plafonds van mass-
ief beton. De hiervoor benodigde hardware is meegeleverd. Vóór de installatie dient u zich ervan te overtuigen
dat het dragende oppervlak het totaalgewicht van de apparatuur en de hardware aankan. Alle schroeven moeten
stevig vastzitten. Draai de schroeven niet te strak aan, want dit zou kunnen resulteren in schade en/of falen van
het product. Het maximale draagvermogen mag nooit worden overschreden. Belangrijke veiligheidstip: zorg er
tijdens het optillen en plaatsen van de apparatuur altijd voor dat u een helper of een mechanische hefinricht-
ing ter beschikking hebt. Dit product is uitsluitend bedoeld voor gebruik binnenshuis. Als dit product buitenshuis
wordt gebruikt, zijn falen van het product en letsel bij personen mogelijk. Let er tijdens het gebruiken van de
bevestiging op dat uw vingers niet beklemd raken. Voor ondersteuning kunt u terecht bij de afdeling Klantenzorg
op +1-800-865-2112 (in de VS).
2 2015-05-18 #:203-9500-4 (2016-11-29)

AVVERTENZA
ITL - Questo prodotto è indicato per l’installazione su soffitti in calcestruzzo solido o a travi/traverse di legno.
Sono compresi i dispositivi di fissaggio per l’installazione su calcestruzzo solido e a travi/traverse di legno. Prima
di iniziare l’installazione, accertarsi che la superficie di supporto sia in grado di sorreggere il carico combinato
unità/dispositivi di fissaggio. Le viti devono essere strette in maniera ben salda. Non serrare le viti oltre il
necessario, altrimenti si rischiano danni o guasti al prodotto. Non superare mai la capacità massima di carico. Per
sollevare e posizionare senza rischi il prodotto, farsi aiutare da un’altra persona o usare un’unità meccanica di
sollevamento. Questo prodotto è indicato esclusivamente per uso all’interno. L’uso di questo prodotto all’esterno
potrebbe causare il malfunzionamento del prodotto o danni fisici alla persona. Fare attenzione a non schiacciarsi
le dita durante l’uso del sostegno. Per assistenza, chiamare il servizio clienti al numero 1-800-865-2112.
VÝSTRAHA
ČEŠ - Tento produkt je určen pro instalaci na stropy z dřevěné stropnice/trámy nebo masivního betonu. Přibalené
je technické vybavení pro instalaci na dřevěné stropnice/trámy a masivní beton. Před instalací se ujistěte, že
nosná plocha unese kombinované zatížení zařízení a technického vybavení. Šrouby musí být pevně zajištěny.
Šrouby příliš neutahujte, nebo může dojít k poškození a produkt se může poškodit. Nikdy nepřekročte maximální
nosnost. Na bezpečné zvedání a umísťováni zařízení vždy používejte asistenta nebo mechanické zvedací
zařízení. Tento produkt je určen pouze pro použití v interiéru. Použití tohoto produktu v exteriéru by mohlo
způsobit selhání produktu nebo zranění osob. Při práci s držákem dávejte pozor, abyste si nesevřeli prsty. Pro
podporu volejte oddělení péče o zákazníky na čísle 1-800-865-2112.
VÝSTRAHA
SLK - Tento produkt je určený na inštaláciu na stropy z drevených nosníkov/trámov alebo masívneho betónu.
Pribalené je technické vybavenie pre inštaláciu na stropy z drevených nosníkov/trámov alebo masívneho betónu.
Pred montážou overte, či nosný povrch unesie kombinované zaťaženie zariadenia a vybavenia. Skrutky je
potrebné pevne utiahnuť. Skrutky nedoťahuje príliš silno, inak môže dôjsť k poškodeniu a poruche zariadenia.
Nikdy neprekračujte maximálnu nosnosť. Na bezpečné zdvíhanie a umiestňovanie zariadení vždy použite
pomocníka alebo mechanické zdvíhacie zariadenie. Tento produkt je určený len na použitie v interiéri. Pri použití
tohto produktu v exteriéri by mohlo dôjsť k jeho poruche alebo osobnému poraneniu. Pri práci s držiakom dávajte
pozor, aby ste si nezovreli prsty. Podporu získate v centre na podporu zákazníkov na čísle 1-800-865-2112.
AVISO
POR - Este produto foi concebido para ser instalado em traves/vigas de madeiras ou em tetos de betão.
São incluídas ferragens para a instalação em traves/vigas de madeira e tetos de betão. Antes de instalar,
certifique-se de que a superfície de apoio suporta a carga combinado do equipamento e das ferragens. Os
parafusos devem ser bem apertados. Não aperte demasiado os parafusos, pois podem ocorrer danos ou falhas
do produto. Nunca exceder a Capacidade de carga máxima. Utilize sempre um assistente ou equipamento de
elevação mecânica para elevar e posicionar o equipamento em segurança. Este produto destina-se a utilização
exclusivamente em zonas interiores. A utilização deste produto em espaços exteriores poderá conduzir à falha
do produto ou ferimentos pessoais. Atenção para não prender os dedos ao utilizar o suporte. Para obter as-
sistência, contacte a equipa de apoio ao cliente através do número 1-800-865-2112.
UYARI
TUR - Bu ürün ahşap kiriş veya masif beton tavanlara takılmak üzere tasarlanmıştır. Ahşap kirişin ve masif beto-
nun üstüne takılması için gereken aksam mevcuttur. Montaja başlamadan önce taşıyıcı yüzeyin hem takacağınız
donanımı hem de aksamı birlikte taşıyacağından emin olunuz. Vidalar sağlam bir şekilde sıkıştırılmalıdır. Vidaları
aşırı sıkmanız durumunda vidalara hasar verebilirsiniz ve ürün arızalanabilir. Azami Yük Kapasitesini asla
aşmayınız. Ekipmanı güvenli bir şekilde kaldırmak ve yerleştirmek için her zaman başka birinden yardım alınız
veya mekanik bir kaldırma donanımı kullanınız. Bu ürün yalnızca iç mekânlarda kullanılmak üzere imal edilmiştir.
Bu ürünün dış mekânda kullanılması ürün arızalarına veya yaralanmalara sebep olabilir. Montaj sırasında
parmaklarınızı sıkıştırmamaya dikkat ediniz. Destek almak için lütfen 1-800-865-2112 numaralı telefondan
müşteri hizmetlerini arayınız.
3 2015-05-18 #:203-9500-4 (2016-11-29)

ENG Symbols
ESP Símbolos
FRN Symboles
#
DEU Symbole
NEL Symbolen ENG
ITL
ČEŠ
Simboli
Symboly
ESP
FRN
WARNING
ADVERTENCIA
ADVERTISSEMENT ENG Skip to step.
x3
SLK Symboly DEU ACHTUNG ESP Continúe con el
POR Símbolos ENG Screws must get at least three
NEL WAARSCHUWING paso.
TÜR Semboller full turns and fit snug.
ITL AVVERTENZA FRN Passez à l’étape.
ESP Los tornillos tienen que dar,
ČEŠ VÝSTRAHA DEU Weiter mit Schritt.
por lo menos, tres vueltas
SLK VÝSTRAHA NEL Ga door naar stap.
completas y quedar ajustados.
POR AVISO ITL Vai al passo.
FRN Il faut effectuer au moins trois
TÜR UYARI ČEŠ Přeskočte na krok.
tours de vis complets et bien
SLK Preskočte na krok.
serrer les vis.
POR Saltar para o
DEU Schrauben sind mindestens drei
passo.
volle Umdrehungen einzudrehen
TÜR Su adıma geç.
und müssen fest anliegen.
NEL De schroeven moeten ten
minste drie hele slagen worden
aangedraaid en stevig vastzitten.
ENG Do not overtighten screws. ITL Girare tre volte le viti che
ESP No apriete de más los tornillos. devono risultare aderenti.
FRN Ne pas trop serrer les vis. ČEŠ Šrouby se musí otočit minimálně
DEU Ziehen Sie die Schrauben nicht zu tři plné otáčky a plně dosednout.
fest an. SLK Skrutky sa musia otočiť aspoň
NEL Draai de schroeven niet te strak aan. tri celé otáčky a tesne dosadnúť.
ITL Non stringere troppo le viti. POR Os parafusos devem completar,
ČEŠ Šrouby neutahujte příliš silně. no mínimo, três voltas
SLK Skrutky neuťahujte príliš silno. completas e ajustar-se no local.
POR Não apertar demasiado os parafusos. TÜR Vidalar en az üç tam dönüş
TÜR Vidaları gereğinden fazla sıkmayın. yapmalı ve sıkı oturmalıdır.
4 2015-05-18 #:203-9500-4 (2016-11-29)

ENG Tools Needed for Assembly.
ESP Herramientas necesarias para el ensamblaje.
FRN Outils nécessaires au montage. ENG To properly tighten screws: Tighten until screw
DEU Für den Zusammenbau erforderliche Werkzeuge. head makes contact, then tighten another 1/2
NEL Voor montage benodigd gereedschap. turn. Do not overtighten screws.
ITL Attrezzi necessari per l’assemblaggio. ESP Apriete adecuado de los tornillos: Apriete hasta
ČEŠ Nástroje potřebné k montáži. que la cabeza del tornillo haga contacto y luego
SLK Nástroje potrebné na montáž. apriete otra 1/2 vuelta. No apriete de más los
POR Ferramentas necessárias para a montagem. tornillos.
TÜR Montaj İçin Gerekli Aletler. FRN Pour bien serrer les vis : Serrez jusqu’à ce que
la tête de la vis entre en contact, puis serrez
encore d’un 1/2 tour. Ne serrez pas trop les vis.
DEU Korrektes Festziehen der Schrauben: Ziehen
Sie die Schrauben fest, bis der Schraubenkopf
Kontakt hat, und dann um eine weitere 1/2
Umdrehung. Ziehen Sie die Schrauben nicht
zu fest an.
NEL Ga als volgt te werk om de schroeven naar
behoren aan te draaien: Draai de schroef aan
totdat de kop het oppervlak raakt; maak daarna
nog een halve slag. Draai de schroeven niet te
strak aan.
ITL Per stringere correttamente le viti: stringere fino
a quando la testa della vite fa contatto, quindi
stringere di un altro 1/2 giro. Non stringere
eccessivamente.
ČEŠ Správné utažení šroubů: Utahujte, dokud se
šroub nedostane do kontaktu, poté utáhněte
ještě půl otočky. Šrouby neutahujte příliš silně.
SLK Správne utiahnutie skrutiek: Uťahujte, kým sa
skrutka nedostane do kontaktu, potom utiahnite
ešte pol otočky. Skrutky neuťahujte príliš silno.
POR Para apertar correctamente os parafusos:
aperte até que a cabeça do parafuso
estabeleça contacto e, em seguida, aperte mais
1/2 volta. Não aperte demasiado os parafusos.
TÜR Vidaları doğru bir şekilde sıkılamak için: Vida
başı temas edene kadar döndürün, sonra yarım
tur daha döndürün. Vidaları gereğinden fazla
sıkılamayın.
1
3/8"
(10mm)
5/32"
(4mm)
5/16"
(8mm)
2
3
+1/2
5 2015-05-18 #:203-9500-4 (2016-11-29)

Parts List PLCM-1CP PLCM-UNL-CP PLCM-UNL-CP-AB PLCM-UNL-CP-AW
Description Qty Part # Part # Part# Part#
A tilt box 1 100-1125 100-1125 100-S1125 100-S2125
B tilt bracket 1 100-1047 100-1047 100-S1047 100-S2047
C support pipe 1 026-1018 026-1018 026-S1018 026-S2018
D retaining collar 1 1800-375 1800-375 1800-375 1800-375
E fiber washer 1 540-9432 540-9432 540-9432 540-9432
F M5 x 8mm 3 520-1062 520-1062 520-1062 520-1062
G ceiling plate 1 128-1039 128-1039 128-S1039 128-S2039
H ceiling plate end cap 2 2PT-22CA01D 2PT-22CA01D 2PT-22CA01H 2PT-22CA01J
I wood screw 4 5S1-015-C03 5S1-015-C03 5S1-015-C03 5S1-015-C03
J 4mm allen wrench 1 560-9646 560-9646 560-9646 560-9646
AA vertical plate 1 - 096-1437 096-S1437 096-S2437
BB plate nut 2 - 096-1440 096-S1440 096-S2440
CC horizontal plate 2 - 096-1439 096-S1439 096-S2439
DD M5 x 10mm 8 - 520-1063 520-1063 520-1063
EE M4 x 12mm 4 - 520-1079 520-1079 520-1079
FF M4 x 25mm 4 - 520-1082 520-1082 520-1082
GG M6 x 12mm 4 - 520-1050 520-1050 520-1050
HH M6 x 25mm 4 - 520-1211 520-1211 520-1211
II M8 x 12mm 4 - 520-1724 520-1724 520-1724
JJ M8 x 25mm 4 - 520-1101 520-1101 520-1101
KK M4 washer 4 - 540-9400 540-9400 540-9400
LL M6/M8 washer 8 - 540-9406 540-9406 540-9406
MM spacer 8 - 600-1215 600-1215 600-1215
NN M8 x 50mm 4 - 521-1013 521-1013 521-1013
A (1) B (1)
tilt box tilt plate
D (1) E (1) F (3)

retaining collar fiber washer M5 x 8mm
C (1)
extension
column
6 2015-05-18 #:203-9500-4 (2016-11-29)

G (1) H (2)
ceiling plate ceiling plate
end cap
I (4) J (1)
wood screw 4mm allen
wrench
AA (1) BB (2) CC (2) DD (8)

vertical plate plate nut horizontal plate M5 x 10mm
NN (4)
M8 x 50mm
EE (4) FF (4) GG (4) HH (4)

M4 x 12mm M4 x 25mm M6 x 12mm M6 x 25mm
II (4) JJ (4) KK (4) LL (8) MM (8)

M8 x 12mm M8 x 25mm M4 washer M6/M8 washer spacer
7 2015-05-18 #:203-9500-4 (2016-11-29)

1 ENG Wood joist/beam ENG Concrete Ceiling
ESP Vigueta de madera ESP Techo de concreto
FRN Solive de bois FRN Plafond en béton
DEU Holzbalken DEU Betondecke
NEL Houten dwarsbalk NEL Plafond van beton
ITL Travetto di legno ITL Soffitto in calcestruzzo
ČEŠ Dřevěný nosník ČEŠ Betonový strop
SLK Drevený nosník SLK Betónový strop
POR Trave de madeira POR Teto em betão
TÜR Ahşap kiriş TÜR Beton tavan
1a 1b
1a
WARNING
ENG - When installing Peerless ceiling mounts on a wood joist/beam covered with gypsum board (drywall), verify
that the joists or beams are a minimum of 2" x 4" nominal size. Do not install over gypsum board thicker than 5/8".
ADVERTENCIA
ESP - Cuando vaya a instalar soportes de techo de Peerless en viguetas / vigas de madera recubiertas con
yeso-cartón (gypsum board) verifique que todos las viguetas / vigas tengan un tamaño mínimo de 2" x 4". No
instale en yeso-cartón (gypsum board) de más de 5/8" de grosor.
ADVERTISSEMENT
FRN - Lors de l’installation de supports de plafond Peerless sur des solives ou montants en bois recouverts de
plaque de plâtre (cloison sèche), assurez-vous que ceux-ci ont une taille nominale d'au moins 2 po x 4 po (5 cm
x 10 cm). Ne pas installer sur une plaque de plâtre dont l'épaisseur est supérieure à 5/8 po (16 mm).
ACHTUNG
DEU - Bei der Anbringung von Peerless-Deckenhaltern an Holzträgern oder -balken mit Gipsplattenverkleidung
(Trockenwand) muss darauf geachtet werden, dass die Träger bzw. Balken über eine Nenngröße von mindestens
51 x 102 mm (2 x 4 Zoll) verfügen. Das Produkt darf nicht an einer Gipsplatte mit einer Dicke von mehr als 15,9
mm (5/8 Zoll) angebracht werden.
WAARSCHUWING
NEL - Als de Peerless-plafondbevestiging op een plafond bestaand uit houten balken/dwarsbalken en gipsplaat
wordt geïnstalleerd, horen deze balken/dwarsbalken een afmeting van ten minste 5 x 10 cm te hebben. De pla-
fondbevestiging mag niet worden geïnstalleerd op gipsplaat met een dikte van meer dan 15,88 mm.
AVVERTENZA
ITL - In sede d’installazione dei sostegni Peerless su travi/traverse di legno ricoperte con muro a secco (car-
tongesso), verificare che le travi o le traverse abbiano una dimensione nominale minima di 5 cm x 10 cm. Non
installare su cartongesso spesso più di 1,60 cm.
VÝSTRAHA
ČEŠ - Při instalaci stropních držáků Peerless na dřevěný nosník/trám pokrytý sádrokartonovou deskou (sá-
drokartónem) zkontrolujte, zda nosníky nebo trámy mají minimální jmenovitý rozměr 5 x 10 cm. Nemontujte na
sádrokartonovou desku hrubší než 1,6 cm.
VÝSTRAHA
SLK - Pri montáži stropných držiakov Peerless na drevený nosník alebo trám pokrytý sadrovou doskou (sa-
drokartónom) skontrolujte, či nosníky alebo trámy majú minimálny menovitý rozmer 5 x 10 cm. Nemontujte na
sadrokartón hrubší ako 1,6 cm.
8 2015-05-18 #:203-9500-4 (2016-11-29)

AVISO
POR - Ao instalar suportes para teto Peerless numa trave ou viga de madeira cobertas com painéis de gesso,
verifique se as traves ou vigas têm um tamanho nominal mínimo de 50,8 mm x 101,6 mm. Não instale em pai-
néis de gesso com mais de 170 mm.
UYARI
TÜR - Peerless tavan kaidelerini alçı panelle (alçıpan) kaplı ahşap bir kirişe monte ederken söz konusu kirişin
nominal ebadının en azından 2" x 4" olmasına dikkat ediniz. 5/8" den daha kalın alçı panellerin üzerine monte
etmeyiniz.
1a-1 ENG Use stud finder to locate and

mark stud center lines.
ESP Marque las líneas centrales
del montante.
FRN Marquez la ligne médiane du
montant.
DEU Markieren Sie die
Ständer-Mittellinien.
NEL Markeer het midden van de
balken.
ITL Contrassegna le linee
centrali dei montanti.
ČEŠ Vyznačte střední linii stěny.
SLK Vyznačte stredné čiary steny.
POR Marque as linhas centrais da
escora.
TÜR Direk merkez hatlarını
işaretleyin.
1a-2
ENG Mark mounting holes on stud center lines.

ESP Marque los orificios de montaje en las líneas G
centrales del montante.
FRN Marquez les trous de fixation le long de la ligne
médiane du montant.
DEU Markieren Sie die Montagelöcher auf den
NEL Ständer-Mittellinien.
ITL Markeer montagegaten op het midden van de
balken.
ČEŠ Contrassegna i fori di montaggio sulle linee
SLK Na střední linii stěny vyznačte montážní otvory.
POR Na stredné čiary steny vyznačte montážne otvory.
TÜR Marque os furos de montagem nas linhas
centrais da escora.
Direk merkez hatları üzerinde montaj deliklerini
işaretleyin.
9 2015-05-18 #:203-9500-4 (2016-11-29)

1a-3
5/32" 2.5"
(4mm) (64mm)
ENG Mounting hole must center
on stud.
ESP El orificio debe quedar
centrado en el montante.
FRN Le trou doit être centré sur le
ENG Drill mounting holes into supporting surface 5/32" montant.
(2.5" (64mm) minimum depth required). (4mm) DEU Das Loch muss am Ständer
ESP Taladre los agujeros de montaje en la superficie zentriert sein.
de apoyo; se requiere una profundidad mínima de NEL Boorgat moet midden op de
2.5" (64mm). balk liggen.
FRN Percez les trous de fixation dans la surface ITL Il foro trapanato deve
de support, une profondeur minimale de centrarsi sul montante.
2,5 po (64mm) est requise. ČEŠ Vyvrtaný otvor musí být v
DEU Bohren Sie Montagelöcher in die Montagefläche; středě stěny.
Mindesttiefe von 64mm (2,5 Zoll) erforderlich. SLK Vyvŕtaný otvor musí byť v
NEL Boor montagegaten in het ondersteunende strede steny.
oppervlak met een diepte van ten minste 64mm. POR O furo tem de ser perfurado
ITL Trapanare I fori di sostegno nella superficie di no centro da escora.
supporto; profondità minima richiesta 64mm (2.5"). TÜR Açılan delik direğin tam
ČEŠ Vyvrtejte montážní otvory do nosné plochy, merkezinde olmalıdır.
minimální požadovaná hloubka je 64mm (2.5").
SLK Navŕtajte montážne otvory do nosnej plochy,
minimálna vyžadovaná hĺbka je 64mm (2.5").
POR Perfure os furos de montagem na superfície de
apoio, 64mm de profundidade mínima necessária.
TÜR Montaj deliklerini destekleyici yüzeye delin,
64mm (2.5 inç) minimum derinlik gereklidir.
1a-4
ENG Install using wood screws provided.
ESP Nivele e instale.
FRN Mettez à niveau et procédez au montage. 7/16"
DEU Waagerecht ausrichten und anbringen. (11mm)
NEL Installeer de schroeven waterpas.
ITL Livella e installa.
ČEŠ Vyrovnejte a namontujte.
SLK Vyrovnajte a namontujte.
POR Nivelar e instalar.
TÜR Dengeleyin ve takın.
ENG Maximum 80 in-lb (9 Nm).

ESP Máxima 80 in-lb (9 Nm).
FRN Maximum 80 in-lb (9 Nm).
DEU Maximale 80 in-lb (9 Nm).
NEL Maximale 80 in-lb (9 Nm).
ITL Massima 80 in-lb (9 Nm).
ČEŠ Maximální 80 in-lb (9 Nm).
SLK Maximálnu 80 in-lb (9 Nm). I (4)
POR Máxima 80 in-lb (9 Nm).
TÜR Maksimum 80 in-lb (9 Nm).
H (2)
2-1
10 2015-05-18 #:203-9500-4 (2016-11-29)
1b
WARNING
ENG - When installing Peerless ceiling mounts on a concrete ceiling, the ceiling must be at least 8" thick with a
minimum compressive strength of 2000 psi. Never attach concrete expansion anchors to concrete covered with
plaster, drywall, or other finishing material.
ADVERTENCIA
ESP - Cuando vaya a instalar soportes de techo de Peerless en techos de concreto, los techos tienen que
tener, por lo menos, 8" de grosor con una resistencia a la compresión de 2000 psi como mínimo. Nunca fije los
anclajes de expansión para concreto a superficies de concreto recubiertas con yeso, yeso-cartón u otro material
de acabado.
ADVERTISSEMENT
FRN - Lors de l’installation de supports de plafond Peerless sur un plafond en béton, celui-ci doit avoir au moins
8 po (20 cm) d'épaisseur et une résistance à la compression d'au moins 2 000 psi. Ne fixez jamais des chevilles
à expansion pour béton à du béton recouvert d’une couche de plâtre, d’une cloison sèche ou de tout autre
matériau de finition.
ACHTUNG
DEU - Werden Peerless-Deckenhalter an einer Betondecke angebracht, so muss deren Dicke mindestens 203
mm (8 Zoll) und ihre Druckfestigkeit mindestens 13,8 N/mm2 (2000 psi) betragen. Betonspreizdübel dürfen
auf keinen Fall an Beton befestigt werden, der mit Verputz, Trockenwand- oder anderem Deckschichtmaterial
bedeckt ist.
WAARSCHUWING
NEL - Als de Peerless-plafondbevestiging op een betonnen plafond wordt geïnstalleerd, moet dit plafond een
dikte van ten minste 20 cm hebben en een druksterkte van ten minste 2000 psi. Gebruik nooit expansie-ankers
voor beton bij installatie op een betonnen plafond bedekt met gips, gipsplaat of ander afwerkingsmateriaal.
AVVERTENZA
ITL - In sede d’installazione dei sostegni Peerless su un soffitto in calcestruzzo solido, il soffitto deve avere
uno spessore minimo di 20 cm, con una resistenza alla compressione di almeno 2000 psi (140 kg/cm2). Non
attaccare mai ancoranti a espansione per calcestruzzo su calcestruzzo ricoperto con intonaco, cartongesso o
altro materiale di finitura.
VÝSTRAHA
ČEŠ - Při instalaci stropních držáků Peerless na betonový strop musí být tento trop hrubý minimálně 20 cm s
minimální pevností v tlaku 2000 psi. Expanzní kotvy do betonu nikdy nepřipojujte do betonu pokrytého omítkou,
sádrokartonem nebo jiným dokončovacím materiálem.
VÝSTRAHA
SLK - Pri montáži stropných držiakov Peerless na betónový strop musí mať tento strop hrúbku minimálne 20 cm
s minimálnou tlakovou pevnosťou 2000 psi. Expanzné kotvy do betónu nikdy nenasadzujte do betónu pokrytého
omietkou, sadrokartónom či iným finalizačným materiálom.
AVISO
POR - Ao instalar os suportes para o teto Peerless em tetos de betão, o teto deve ter, no mínimo, 203 mm de
espessura e uma força de compressão mínima de 2000 psi. Nunca instale âncoras de expansão para betão em
superfícies cobertas com estuque, gesso ou outros materiais de acabamento.
UYARI
TÜR - Peerless tavan kaidelerini beton duvara monte ettiğinizde, tavan en azından 2000 psi asgari basınç
dayanımına sahip olmalı ve kalınlığı da en azından 8" olmalıdır. Beton dübelleri hiç bir zaman alçı, alçıpan veya
başka bir bitirme materyali ile kaplı betona takmayınız.
11 2015-05-18 #:203-9500-4 (2016-11-29)

1b-1
ENG Mark mounting holes.

ESP Marque los orificios de montaje. G
FRN Marquez les trous de fixation.
DEU Markieren Sie die Montagelöcher.
NEL Markeer montagegaten.
ITL Contrassegna I fori di montaggio.
ČEŠ Vyznačte montážní otvory.
SLK Vyznačte montážne otvory.
POR Marque os furos de montagem.
TÜR Montaj deliklerini işaretleyin.
1b-2
ENG Drill mounting holes into supporting surface (1.75" (45mm)
minimum depth required).
ESP Taladre los agujeros de montaje en la superficie de apoyo; se 1.75"
requiere una profundidad mínima de 1.75" (45mm). (45mm)
FRN Percez les trous de fixation dans la surface de support, une
profondeur minimale de 1,75 po (45mm) est requise.
DEU Bohren Sie Montagelöcher in die Montagefläche; Mindesttiefe
von 45mm (1,75 Zoll) erforderlich. 5/16"
NEL Boor montagegaten in het ondersteunende oppervlak met een (8mm)
diepte van ten minste 45mm. 5/16"
ITL Trapanare I fori di sostegno nella superficie di supporto; (8mm)
profondità minima richiesta 45mm (1.75").
ČEŠ Vyvrtejte montážní otvory do nosné plochy, minimální
požadovaná hloubka je 45mm (1.75").
SLK Navŕtajte montážne otvory do nosnej plochy, minimálna
vyžadovaná hĺbka je 45mm (1.75").
POR Perfure os furos de montagem na superfície de apoio, 45mm
de profundidade mínima necessária.
TÜR Montaj deliklerini destekleyici yüzeye delin, 45mm (1.75 inç)
minimum derinlik gereklidir.
12 2015-05-18 #:203-9500-4 (2016-11-29)

1b-3
3/8"
(10mm)
H (2)
ENG Peerless model ACC210 (RAWL 5005/HILTI HLC 8/40 CON LK-BLT) sold separately.;(800)865-2112
ESP Modelo ACC210 (RAWL 5005/HILTI HLC 8/40 CON LK-BLT) vendido por separado.; (800)865-2112
FRN Modèle Peerless ACC210 (RAWL 5005/HILTI HLC 8/40 CON LK-BLT) vendu séparément.; (800)865-2112
DEU Peerless-Modell ACC210 (RAWL 5005/HILTI HLC 8/40 CON LK-BLT) separat verkauft.; (800)865-2112
NEL Peerless model ACC210 (RAWL 5005/HILTI HLC 8/40 CON LK-BLT) apart aan te schaffen.; (800)865-2112
ITL Il modello Peerless ACC210 (RAWL 5005/HILTI HLC 8/40 CON LK-BLT) è venduto a parte.; (800)865-2112
ČEŠ Model Peerless ACC210 (RAWL 5005/HILTI HLC 8/40 CON LK-BLT) je prodáván zvlášť.; (800)865-2112
SLK Jedinečný model ACC210 (RAWL 5005/HILTI HLC 8/40 CON LK-BLT) predávaný osobitne.; (800)865-2112
POR Modelo ACC210 (RAWL 5005/HILTI HLC 8/40 CON LK-BLT) vendido separadamente.; (800)865-2112
TÜR Peerless model ACC210 (RAWL 5005/HILTI HLC 8/40 CON LK-BLT) ayrı satılır.; (800)865-2112
13 2015-05-18 #:203-9500-4 (2016-11-29)

2-1
x5
2-2
ENG Align slot of extension column with one of
J
holes in ceiling plate.
ESP Alinee la ranura de la columna de extensión
con uno de los agujeros de la placa de techo.
FRN Alignez la fente de la colonne d'extension sur
un des trous de la plaque de plafond.
DEU Richten Sie den Schlitz der
Verlängerungssäule mit einem der Löcher in
der Deckenplatte aus.
NEL Lijn de sleuf in verlengbuis uit met één van de
gaten in plafondplaat.
ITL Allineare la scanalatura della colonna di F
prolunga con uno dei fori nella piastra da
soffitto.
ČEŠ Srovnejte štěrbinu prodlužovacího sloupce s
jedním z otvorů ve stropní desce.
SLK Zarovnajte štrbinu predlžovacieho stĺpca s
jedným z otvorov v stropnej doske.
POR Alinhe a ranhura da coluna de extensão com
um dos orifícios na chapa para o teto.
TÜR Uzatma kolonunu tavan plakasındaki
deliklerden biri ile hizalayın.
14 2015-05-18 #:203-9500-4 (2016-11-29)

3-1
A x5
3-2
F
15 2015-05-18 #:203-9500-4 (2016-11-29)
4
PLCM-1CP
X = 75-100mm
4a
16 2015-05-18 #:203-9500-4 (2016-11-29)

4
y y z
24.37"
(619mm)
MIN
PLCM-UNL-CP
X = 100-200mm X = 200-300mm X = 300-400mm
4b-1 4c-1 4d-1
17 2015-05-18 #:203-9500-4 (2016-11-29)

4a
J
x3
ENG Use of spacers and washers is optional.
ESP Uso de espaciadores y arandelas opcional.
FRN Facultatif utilisation d’entretoises de rondelles.
DEU Fakultativ verwendung von abstandhaltern und Waschmaschinen.
NEL Facultatief gebruik van tussenringen en ringen.
ITL Uso opzionale di distanziatori e rondelle.
ČEŠ Voltitelné použití rozpěr distančních podložek.
SLK Voltitel'né použitie rozpierok dištančných podložiek.
POR Opcional utilize espaçadores e arruelas.
TÜR Ayırıcıların ísteğe bağli kullanımı ve yıkayıcı.
ENG Peerless model ACC918 (M4 x 10mm / M4 x
20mm screw, #10 SAE washer, .5" OD .191" ID
.312" thick spacer) sold separately.; (800)865-
2112
ESP Modelo ACC918 de Peerless (tornillo de M4 x
10mm / M4 x 20mm, arandela n.o 10 SAE, .5"
OD .191" ID .312" espaciador grueso) vendido
por separado.; (800)865-2112
FRN Modèle Peerless ACC918 (vis M4 x 10mm / M4 x
20mm, rondelle SAE #10, entretoises de 0,5 po,
B avec DE de 0,191 po et DI de 0,312 po) vendu
séparément.; (800)865-2112
DEU Peerless-Modell ACC918 (M4 x 10 mm/M4 x 20
mm Schraube, Nr. 10 SAE Scheiben, 0,5 Zoll AD
0,191 Zoll ID 0,312 Zoll dicke Scheibe) separat
verkauft.; (800)865-2112
NEL Peerless model ACC918 (M4 x 10 mm / M4
x 20 mm schroeven, #10 SAE ringetjes, 0,5"
buitendiameter 0,191" binnendiameter 0,312"
dikke vulring) apart aan te schaffen.; (800)865-
2112
ITL Il modello Peerless ACC918 (vite M4 x 10mm /
M4 x 20mm, rondella SAE n.10, diam. esterno
12.7mm, diam. interno 4.8mm, distanziatore
spesso 7.92mm) è venduto a parte.; (800)865-
2112
ČEŠ Model Peerless ACC918 (šroub M4 x 10 mm
/ M4 x 20 mm, podložka č. 10 SAE, tlustá
podložka .5" OD .191" ID .312") je prodáván
zvlášť.; (800)865-2112
SLK Jedinečný model ACC918 (M4 × 10 mm/M4 ×
20 mm skrutka, #10 SAE podložka, .5" OD .191"
ID .312" hrubá rozpera) predávaný osobitne.;
(800)865-2112
M4 X 10mm M4 X 20mm
POR Modelo ACC918 Peerless (parafuso M4 x 10
mm / M4 x 20 mm, arruela Nº. 10 SAE, 0,5" OD
0,191" ID 0,312" espaçador espesso) vendido
separadamente.; (800)865-2112
TÜR Peerless model ACC918 (M4 x 10mm / M4 x
20mm vida, #10 SAE conta, .5" OD .191" ID
.312" kalın ara parça) ayrı satılır.; (800)865-2112
18 2015-05-18 #:203-9500-4 (2016-11-29)

4b-1 4c-1 4d-1
CC (2) CC (2) CC (2)
AA AA AA
4b-2 4c-2 4d-2

ENG Do not tighten the screws. ENG Do not tighten the screws. ENG Do not tighten the screws.
ESP No apriete los tornillos. ESP No apriete los tornillos. ESP No apriete los tornillos.
FRN Ne serrez pas les vis. FRN Ne serrez pas les vis. FRN Ne serrez pas les vis.
DEU Ziehen Sie die Schrauben DEU Ziehen Sie die Schrauben DEU Ziehen Sie die Schrauben
nicht an. nicht an. nicht an.
NEL Schroeven niet aandraaien. NEL Schroeven niet aandraaien. NEL Schroeven niet aandraaien.
ITL Non stringere le viti. ITL Non stringere le viti. ITL Non stringere le viti.
ČEŠ Šrouby neutahujte. ČEŠ Šrouby neutahujte. ČEŠ Šrouby neutahujte.
SLK Skrutky neuťahujte. SLK Skrutky neuťahujte. SLK Skrutky neuťahujte.
POR Não apertar os parafusos. POR Não apertar os parafusos. POR Não apertar os parafusos.
TÜR Vidaları sıkmayın. TÜR Vidaları sıkmayın. TÜR Vidaları sıkmayın.
DD (4) DD (4) DD (4)
BB (2)
BB (2)
J BB (2)
19 2015-05-18 #:203-9500-4 (2016-11-29)

5
J
x3
MM MM MM MM (2)
KK LL LL KK
FF HH JJ FF
MM (2)
KK LL LL
EE GG NN,II LL (2) HH,JJ

20 2015-05-18 #:203-9500-4 (2016-11-29)
6
ENG Tighten.
ESP Apretar.
FRN Serrer.
DEU Anziehen.
NEL Aandraaien.
ITL Stringere.
ČEŠ Utáhněte.
SLK Utiahnite.
POR Apertar.
TÜR Sıkmak.
21 2015-05-18 #:203-9500-4 (2016-11-29)

7
B
AA
DD (4)
DD (4)
22 2015-05-18 #:203-9500-4 (2016-11-29)

8 +20°/-5°
ENG Tighten.
ESP Apretar.
FRN Serrer.
DEU Anziehen.
NEL Aandraaien.
ITL Stringere.
ČEŠ Utáhněte.
SLK Utiahnite.
POR Apertar.
TÜR Sıkmak.
23 2015-05-18 #:203-9500-4 (2016-11-29)

10
ENG Recommended Cleaning Guidelines.
ESP Recomendaciones para la limpieza.
FRN Méthodes de nettoyage recommandées.
DEU Empfohlene Richtlinien für die Reinigung.
NEL Richtlijnen voor reiniging.
ITL Linee guida raccomandate per la pulizia.
ČEŠ Doporučené čistící pokyny.
SLK Odporúčané pokyny na čistenie.
POR Diretrizes de limpeza recomendadas.
TÜR Önerilen Temizleme Esasları.
WARNING
ENG - To avoid risk of electric shock, do not expose electrical components to water, cleaning solutions or other
potentially corrosive liquids or substances. Do not use flammable cleaners on product surfaces due to close
proximity of electrical power and equipment.
ADVERTENCIA
ESP - Para evitar el riesgo de choque eléctrico, no exponga los componentes eléctricos al agua, a soluciones
limpiadoras ni a otros líquidos o sustancias potencialmente corrosivos. No use limpiadores inflamables en las
superficies del producto debido a la proximidad a tomas de corriente y otros equipos eléctricos.
ADVERTISSEMENT
FRN - Pour éviter le risque de choc électrique, ne pas exposer les composants électriques à l’eau, à des solu-
tions de nettoyage ni à d’autres liquides ou substances potentiellement corrosifs. Ne pas utiliser de nettoyants in-
flammables sur les surfaces du produit en raison de la proximité de l’alimentation et de l’équipement électriques.
ACHTUNG
DEU - Vermeiden Sie Stromschläge, passen Sie die elektrischen Komponenten sind nie gegen Wasser, Reini-
gungsmittel oder andere potentiell korrosiven Flüssigkeiten oder andere Substanzen ausgesetzt. Verwenden Sie
auf der Oberfläche des Produktes nicht brennbare Reinigungsmittel und dies ist wegen der Nähe der elektrischen
Leistung und Ausstattung gefährlich.
WAARSCHUWING
NEL - Um die Gefahr eines Stromschlags zu vermeiden, keine elektrischen Komponenten mit Wasser, Reini-
gungslösungen oder anderen potenziell korrosiven Flüssigkeiten oder Substanzen in Kontakt kommen lassen.
Aufgrund der unmittelbaren Nähe zu Strom und elektrischen Geräten auf den Produktoberflächen keine bren-
nbaren Reiniger verwenden.
AVVERTENZA
ITL - Per evitare il rischio di scosse elettriche, non esporre componenti elettrici all’acqua, a soluzioni detergenti
o ad altri liquidi o sostanze potenzialmente corrosivi. Non usare detergenti infiammabili su superfici di prodotti
collocati molto vicino alla corrente elettrica o ad apparecchiature elettriche.
VÝSTRAHA
ČEŠ - Abyste zabránili nebezpečí úrazu elektrickým proudem, nevystavujte elektrické součástky vodě, čistícím
roztokům nebo jiným potenciálně žíravým kapalinám nebo látkám. Nepoužívejte hořlavé čisticí přípravky na
površích výrobku kvůli bezprostřední blízkosti elektrické sítě a zařízení.
VÝSTRAHA
SLK - Aby nedošlo k nebezpečenstvu úrazu elektrickým prúdom, nevystavujte elektrické súčiastky vode, čistiacim
roztokom alebo iným potenciálne žieravým kvapalinám alebo látkam. Nepoužívajte horľavé čistiace prípravky na
povrchoch výrobku kvôli bezprostrednej blízkosti elektrickej siete a zariadení.
AVISO
POR - Para evitar o risco de choque elétrico, não exponha os componentes elétricos a água, soluções de
limpeza ou outros líquidos ou substâncias potencialmente corrosivos. Não utilize agentes de limpeza inflamáveis
nas superfícies do produto devido à proximidade com a energia elétrica e equipamentos.
UYARI
TUR - Elektrik çarpması riskini önlemek için, elektriksel bileşenleri su, temizleme solüsyonları ya da diğer potan-
siyel olarak aşındırıcı sıvı veya maddelere maruz bırakmayın. Elektrik kaynağı ve ekipmanın yakınlığı nedeniyle,
ürün yüzeylerinde alev alıcı temizleyiciler kullanmayın.
24 2015-05-18 #:203-9500-4 (2016-11-29)

ENG The following procedures are not guaranteed to control infection. An infection control administrator or
epidemiologist should be consulted regarding cleaning procedures and processes.
Most painted components will withstand cleaning by commonly used, diluted, non-abrasive solutions such
as quaternary ammonia compounds, ammonia enzyme cleaners, and bleach or alcohol solutions. However,
it is recommended that any surface be tested in an inconspicuous area prior to determine the propensity for
discoloration.
• Pen or permanent and dry erase markers can be removed with 91% isopropyl alcohol and a soft cloth.
• Iodine stains can be removed with commonly used cleaners and a soft cloth.
• Never use steel wool or other abrasive materials that will damage the surface finish.
• Do not use Acetone, mineral spirits, abrasive cleansers, paint thinner or any other harsh or toxic chemicals
to clean your product. These solvents will damage the surface finish.
ESP No se garantiza que los siguientes procedimientos controlarán las infecciones. Se debe consultar a un
manejador de control de infecciones o un epidemiólogo respecto a los procedimientos y procesos de
limpieza.
La mayoría de los componentes pintados resistirán la limpieza con soluciones sin abrasivos diluidas de uso
común como los compuestos de amoniaco cuaternario, limpiadores con enzimas de amoniaco y soluciones
con blanqueador o alcohol. Sin embargo, se recomienda que se haga una prueba en un área discreta de la
superficie antes de determinar la propensión a descolorarse.
• Las marcas de bolígrafo o marcadores permanentes y de borrado en seco se pueden eliminar con alcohol
isopropílico al 91% y un paño suave.
• Las manchas de yodo se pueden eliminar con limpiadores de uso común y un paño suave.
• No use esponjas de acero ni otros materiales abrasivos que puedan dañar el acabado de la superficie.
• No use acetona, alcoholes minerales, limpiadores abrasivos, solvente de pintura ni ningún otro químico
áspero o tóxico para limpiar el producto. Estos solventes dañarán el acabado de la superficie.
FRN Les procédures suivantes ne garantissent pas la prévention des infections. Il convient de consulter un
administrateur de la prévention des infections ou un épidémiologiste concernant les procédures et processus
de nettoyage.
La plupart des composants peints résistent au nettoyage avec des solutions non abrasives courantes, sous
forme diluée, telles que : composés d’ammonium quaternaire, nettoyants enzymatique à base d’ammoniac,
eau de Javel ou autres solutions à base d’alcool. Il est toutefois conseillé de faire un essai préalable sur une
partie peu visible afin de déterminer la tendance à la décoloration.
• Les marques de stylo ou de marqueurs permanents et à essuyage à sec peuvent être éliminées à l’aide
d’alcool isopropylique à 91 % et d’un chiffon doux.
• Les taches d’iode peuvent être éliminées à l’aide de nettoyants courants et d’un chiffon doux.
• Ne jamais utiliser de laine d’acier ni d’autres matériaux abrasifs susceptibles d’endommager le fini de la
surface.
• Ne pas utiliser d’acétone, d’essences minérales, de nettoyants abrasifs, de diluant pour peintures ni aucun
produit chimique toxique ou puissant pour nettoyer votre produit. Ces solvants endommagent le fini de la
surface.
DEU Es wird keine Gewährleistung dafür übernommen, dass die folgenden Verfahren eine Infektion verhindern.
Ein Fachmann für Infektionskontrolle oder ein Epidemiologe sollte bezüglich der Reinigungsverfahren und
-prozesse herangezogen werden.
Die meisten lackierten Komponenten sind reinigungsbeständig, wenn allgemein gebräuchliche, verdünnte,
nicht scheuernde Lösungen wie quaternäre Ammoniumverbindungen, Ammoniak-Enzymreiniger und
Bleichmittel- oder Alkohollösungen verwendet werden. Es wird jedoch empfohlen, alle Flächen an einer
unauffälligen Stelle auf Verfärbung zu testen.
• Kugelschreiber oder Permanent- und Whiteboard-Marker können mit 91 % Isopropylalkohol und einem
weichen Tuch entfernt werden.
• Jodflecken können mit üblichen Reinigungsmitteln und einem weichen Tuch entfernt werden.
• Auf keinen Fall dürfen Stahlwolle oder andere scheuernde Materialien verwendet werden, die das
Oberflächen-Finish beschädigen.
• Azeton, Waschbenzin, Scheuermittel, Farbverdünner oder andere aggressive oder giftige Chemikalien
dürfen nicht zur Reinigung des Produkts verwendet werden. Diese Lösungsmittel beschädigen das
Oberflächen-Finish.
25 2015-05-18 #:203-9500-4 (2016-11-29)

NEL De volgende procedures vormen geen garantie tegen infectie. Raadpleeg de plaatselijke persoon die
verantwoordelijk is voor infectiebeheersing of een epidemioloog voor reinigingsprocedures en -processen.
De meeste gelakte componenten zijn bestand tegen reiniging met veelgebruikte, verdunde, niet-bijtende
oplossingen zoals quaternaire ammoniumverbindingen, bleekmiddelen met ammoniakenzymen en
bleekmiddel- of alcoholoplossingen. Het verdient echter aanbeveling alle te reinigen oppervlakken eerst op
een onopvallende plek te testen op verkleuring.
• Pen- en (permanente- en dry erase-) markervlekken kunnen worden verwijderd met 91% isopropylalcohol
en een zachte doek.
• Jodiumvlekken kunnen worden verwijderd met gangbare reinigingsmiddelen en een zachte doek.
• Gebruik nooit staalwol of andere ruwe materialen; deze veroorzaken schade aan de afwerking van het
oppervlak.
• Probeer nooit het product te reinigen met aceton, white spirit, bijtende reinigingsmiddelen, verfverdunner of
andere bijtende of giftige chemicaliën. Dergelijke oplossingsmiddelen zullen de afwerking van het oppervlak
beschadigen.
ITL Le procedure qui descritte non sono garanzia contro l’infezione. In merito alle procedure e ai processi per la
pulizia, si raccomanda di rivolgersi a un amministratore per il controllo delle infezioni o a un epidemiologo.
La maggior parte dei componenti verniciati può essere pulita usando comuni soluzioni diluite non abrasive,
quali composti di ammoniaca quaternaria, detergenti a base di enzimi di ammoniaca e soluzioni di
candeggina o alcol. Si raccomanda, tuttavia, di provare il detergente su una superficie non appariscente prima
di determinare l’assenza di scoloramento.
• Segni di penna e di pennarelli a inchiostro permanente o cancellabile a secco possono essere rimossi con
alcol isopropilico al 91% e un panno morbido.
• Macchie di iodio possono essere rimosse con un detergente comune e un panno morbido.
• Non usare mai lana d’acciaio o altro materiale abrasivo; danneggerebbe la finitura superficiale.
• Non usare acetone, acquaragia, detergenti abrasivi, solventi o altri prodotti chimici ruvidi o tossici per pulire il
prodotto. Questi solventi danneggiano la finitura superficiale.
ČEŠ Následující postupy nezaručí kontrolu infekce. Ohledně čistících postupů a metod byste se měli poradit se
správcem kontroly infekce nebo s epidemiologem.
Většina natřených součástek snese čištění běžně používanými, rozředěnými, neabrazivními roztoky, jako
jsou kvartérní čpavkové sloučeniny, čpavkové enzymatické čisticí prostředky a bělící nebo alkoholové roztoky.
Doporučujeme však předem otestovat jakýkoliv povrch na nepatrné oblasti k určení sklonu k odbarvení.
• Pero nebo permanentní a suché vymazatelné značkovače se dají odstranit 91% izopropylalkoholem a
jemným hadříkem.
• Skvrny od jódu se dají odstranit běžně používanými čistícími prostředky a jemným hadříkem.
• Nikdy nepoužívejte drátěnku nebo jiné abrazivní materiály, které poškozují povrchovou úpravu.
• Nepoužívejte k čištění vašeho výrobku aceton, minerální líh, abrazivní čisticí prostředky nebo jakékoliv jiné
hrubé nebo jedovaté chemikálie. Tato rozpouštědla poškozují povrchovou úpravu.
SLK Nasledujúce postupy nezaručia kontrolu infekcie. Ohľadne čistiacich postupov a metód sa musíte poradiť so
správcom kontroly infekcie alebo s epidemiológom.
Väčšina natretých súčiastok znesie čistenie bežne používanými, rozriedenými, neabrazívnymi roztokmi, ako
sú kvartérne amónne zlúčeniny, amónne enzymatické čistiace prostriedky a bieliace alebo alkoholové roztoky.
Odporúčame však vopred otestovať každý povrch na nepatrnej oblasti, a určiť tak sklon k odfarbovaniu.
• Pero alebo permanentné a suché vymazateľné značkovače sa dajú odstrániť 91 % izopropylalkoholom a
jemnou handričkou.
• Škvrny od jódu sa dajú odstrániť bežne používanými čistiacimi prostriedkami a jemnou handričkou.
• Nikdy nepoužívajte drôtenku alebo iné abrazívne materiály, ktoré poškodzujú povrchovú úpravu.
• Nepoužívajte k čisteniu výrobku acetón, minerálne liehy, abrazívne čistiace prostriedky alebo akékoľvek iné
ostré alebo jedovaté chemikálie. Tieto rozpúšťadlá poškodzujú povrchovú úpravu.
26 2015-05-18 #:203-9500-4 (2016-11-29)

POR Os procedimentos que se seguem não garantem o controlo de infeções. Deve ser consultado um
administrador de controlo de infeções ou um epidemiologista relativamente aos procedimentos e processos
de limpeza.
A maior parte dos componentes pintados suporta a limpeza com as soluções não abrasivas, diluídas mais
comuns, tais como compostos de amoníaco quaternário, agentes de limpezas com enzimas de amoníaco e
soluções de lixívia ou álcool. Recomenda-se, no entanto, que qualquer superfície seja testada numa zona
discreta antes de determinar a propensão para a descoloração.
• A tinta de caneta, tinta permanente e de marcadores seca pode ser removida com uma solução de álcool
isopropílico a 91% e um pano macio.
• As manchas de iodo podem ser removidas com soluções de limpeza comuns e um pano macio.
• Nunca utilize materiais de lã de aço ou outros materiais abrasivos, pois danificam o acabamento da
superfície.
• Não utilize acetona, essências minerais, agentes de limpeza abrasivos, diluentes ou quaisquer outras
substâncias químicas fortes ou tóxicas para limpara o seu produto. Estes solventes danificam o acabamento
da superfície.
TÜR Aşağıdaki usullerin enfeksiyonu kontrol edeceği garanti edilmez. Temizleme işlemleri ve süreçleri ile ilgili
olarak bir enfeksiyon kontrol yöneticisi veya epidemiyoloji uzmanına danışılmalıdır.
Çoğu boyalı bileşen, kuaterner amonyum bileşikleri, amonyak enzim temizleyiciler ve çamaşır suyu veya alkol
solüsyonları gibi sık kullanılan, seyreltilmiş, aşındırıcı olmayan solüsyonlar ile temizliğe dayanıklıdır. Ancak,
herhangi bir yüzeyin renk değişimi eğilimini belirlemek için önceden ayrı bir alanda test edilmesi tavsiye edilir.
• Tükenmez kalem ya da kalıcı ve kuru silme işaretleri %91 izopropil alkol ve yumuşak bir bezle silinebilir.
• İyot lekeleri sık kullanılan temizleyiciler ve yumuşak bir bezle silinebilir.
• Asla yüzeye zarar verecek çelik yün diğer aşındırıcı maddeleri kullanmayın.
• Ürününüzü temizlemek için aseton, mineral bazlı ispirtolar, aşındırıcı temizleyiciler, boya tineri veya diğer
herhangi bir sert veya toksik kimyasal maddeler kullanmayın. Bu solventler yüzey cilasına zarar verir.
27 2015-05-18 #:203-9500-4 (2016-11-29)

LIMITED FIVE-YEAR WARRANTY
Peerless Industries, Inc. (“Peerless”) warrants to original end-users of Peerless® products will be free from defects in material and
workmanship, under normal use, for a period of five years from the date of purchase by the original end-user (but in no case longer than
six years after the date of the product's manufacture). At its option, Peerless will repair or replace, or refund the purchase price of, any
product which fails to conform with this warranty.
In no event shall the duration of any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose be longer than the
period of the applicable express warranty set forth above. Some states do not allow limitations on how long a implied warranty lasts,
so the above limitation may not apply to you.
This warranty does not cover damage caused by (a) service or repairs by the customer or a person who is not authorized for such service
or repairs by Peerless, (b) the failure to utilize proper packing when returning the product, (c) incorrect installation or the failure to follow
Peerless' instructions or warnings when installing, using or storing the product, or (d) misuse or accident, in transit or otherwise, including
in cases of third party actions and force majeure.
In no event shall Peerless be liable for incidental or consequential damages or damages arising from the theft of any product,
whether or not secured by a security device which may be included with the Peerless® product. Some states do not allow the
exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you.
This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, expressed or implied, and is the sole remedy with respect to product defects. No dealer,
distributor, installer or other person is authorized to modify or extend this Limited Warranty or impose any obligation on Peerless in
connection with the sale of any Peerless® product.
This warranty gives specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state.
GARANTÍA LIMITADA DE CINCO AÑOS

Peerless Industries, Inc. (Peerless) les garantiza a los usuarios finales originales de los productos Peerless® que los productos Peerless®
estarán libres de defectos de materiales o de manufactura, en condiciones de uso normal, durante un periodo de cinco (5) años a partir de
la fecha en la que el usuario final original compre cualquier producto (pero, en ningún caso, durante un periodo mayor de 6 años después
de la fecha de manufactura del producto). Queda a la discreción de Peerless, reparar, reemplazar o rembolsar el precio de compra de
cualquier producto que no cumpla esta garantía.
La duración de toda garantía implícita de comerciabilidad o de idoneidad para un propósito en particular no sobrepasará en caso
alguno el periodo de vigencia de la garantía explícita correspondiente indica en lo anterior. Algunos Estados no permiten que
se establezcan limitaciones en relación con el periodo de duración de una garantía implícita, de manera que es posible que la
limitación expuesta en lo anterior no sea pertinente a usted.
Esta garantía no cubre daños causados por (a) trabajos de mantenimiento o de reparación hechos por el cliente o alguna persona que
no esté autorizada por Peerless para realizar dichos trabajos de mantenimiento o de reparación, (b) no empacar el producto como es
debido si lo devuelve, (c) hacer una instalación incorrecta o no seguir las instrucciones o las advertencias de Peerless al instalar, utilizar
o guardar el producto o (d) el mal uso o los accidentes, en tránsito o en otras circunstancias, incluidos los casos relacionados con las
acciones de terceros o una fuerza mayor.
Peerless no tendrá responsabilidad en ningún caso de daños y perjuicios incidentales o indirectos o de daños y perjuicios que
surjan por el robo de cualquier producto, ya sea que el mismo esté o no esté asegurado con un dispositivo de seguridad que
se haya incluido con el producto de Peerless®. Algunos Estados no permiten que se excluyan o se establezcan limitaciones en
relación con los daños y perjuicios incidentales o indirectos, de manera que es posible que la limitación o la exclusión expuesta
en lo anterior no sea pertinente a usted.
Esta garantía remplaza toda otra garantía, expresa o implícita, y es el único recurso en lo que respecta a los defectos del producto.
Ningún concesionario, distribuidor, instalador ni ninguna otra persona está autorizada a modificar o extender esta Garantía Limitada ni a
imponer obligación alguna a Peerless en relación con la venta de cualquier producto de Peerless®.
Esta garantía concede derechos específicos creados por ley y es posible que usted, además, tenga otros derechos que varían de acuerdo
con el Estado donde se encuentre.
GARANTIE LIMITÉE DE CINQ ANS

Peerless Industries, Inc. (« Peerless ») garantit aux utilisateurs finaux d’origine des produits PeerlessMD que lesdits produits ne
présenteront aucun défaut de matériau ou de main-d’œuvre, dans la mesure où ils sont utilisés normalement, pendant une période de
cinq ans à compter de la date d’achat par l’utilisateur final d’origine (mais en aucun cas plus de six ans après la date de fabrication du
produit). Peerless, à sa discrétion, réparera ou remplacera tout produit non conforme aux termes de cette garantie, ou en remboursera
le prix d’achat.
La durée de toute garantie implicite de qualité commerciale ou d'application à un usage particulier n'excédera en aucun cas la
durée de la garantie applicable expressément stipulée plus haut. Certains états ou provinces n’autorisent pas la limitation de la
durée d’une garantie implicite, et la limitation ci-dessus peut donc ne pas vous être applicable.
Cette garantie ne couvre pas les dommages causés par (a) un entretien ou des réparations effectués par l'acheteur ou une personne non
autorisée par Peerless à effectuer un tel entretien ou de telles réparations, (b) un emballage inadéquat lors de l’expédition d’un produit
retourné, (c) une installation incorrecte ou le non-respect des instructions ou mises en garde de Peerless lors de l'installation, l'utilisation ou
le rangement du produit, ou (d) une mauvaise utilisation ou un accident survenu lors d’un transport ou autrement, y compris l'intervention
de tiers et les cas de force majeure.
Peerless ne peut en aucun cas être tenu responsable de quelque dommage accessoire ou indirect que ce soit ni de dommages
résultant du vol d’un quelconque produit, que celui-ci ait été ou non protégé par un dispositif de sécurité intégré à un produit
PeerlessMD. Certains états ou provinces n’autorisent pas l'exclusion ou la restriction des dommages accessoires ou indirects,
et il est possible que les restrictions ou exclusions ci-dessus ne s'appliquent pas à votre cas.
Les dispositions de cette garantie remplacent toute autre garantie expresse ou implicite et constituent le seul recours possible en cas de
défectuosité d’un produit. Aucun marchand, distributeur, installateur ou autre personne n’est autorisé à modifier ou étendre la portée de
cette garantie limitée, ni à imposer quelque obligation ce que soit à Peerless en ce qui concerne la vente de tout produit PeerlessMD.
Cette garantie offre des droits juridiques particuliers auxquels peuvent s’ajouter d’autres droits, susceptibles de varier d’une province ou
d’un état à l’autre.
28 2015-05-18 #:203-9500-4 (2016-11-29)

TV - WALL MOUNT
PA750
Articulating Wall Mount

FOR 39" TO 75" DISPLAYS
The Paramount™ series wall mounts provide versatile and multi-functional features.
With PA750, extend the display up to 21.35" (542mm) or fully-retract it to just 3.00"
(76mm) from the wall for the perfect viewing angle. The Hook-and-Hang™ system
offers easy, one-person installation of the display. A ratcheting handle provides
Mounting Pattern Max Load locking tilt capability for quick adjustments to the amount of tilt, reducing glare and
600 x 400mm 100lb optimizing the viewing angle. Integrated cable management protects, contains and
(23.62" x 15.75") (45kg)
conceals cables for a clean installation.
HOOK-AND-HANG TM INSTALLATION
Display is easily installed by a single person
- Universal mount accommodates
200 x 100 to 600 x 400mm LOCKING TILT
VESA® mounting patterns Lock the display at any angle
with the ratcheting handle
- Extends 21.35" (542mm) from EXTENDS UP TO 21.35" (542mm)
the wall Offers the perfect viewing angle
- Retracts to 3.00" (76mm) to

FLEXIBLE
save space MOUNTING
LOCATIONS
- +15/-5° of tilt for optimal Mounts to wood stud,
viewing angles concrete, cinder or
breeze block
- Up to ±90° of pivot allows for
perfect display positioning
- ±5° of roll for post installation INTEGRATED

display leveling CABLE MANAGEMENT
Protects, contains and
- Includes all necessary wall and conceals cables for a clean,
professional installation
display attachment hardware I-SHAPED ADAPTOR PLATE
Helps avoid blocking connections
on back of display
- Design is UL listed and tested to
four times stated load capacity
Swivel, tilt, extend or Comes in color packaging with

retract the display for the included installation hardware and
perfect viewing angle. easy to follow instructions.
Please visit peerless-av.com/en-us/patents for patent information.
info@peerless-av.com
peerless-av.com
Driving Technology Through Innovation
Model Numbers WARRANTY: Limited 5-year
PA750 ParamountTM Articulating Wall Mount for 39" to 75" Displays
Product Specifications
DIMENSIONS (W x H x D) PRODUCT WEIGHT LOAD CAPACITY FINISH AVAILABLE COLORS
24.38" x 16.75" x 3.00"-21.35" Scratch Resistant

PA750 16.75lb (7.60kg) 100lb (45kg) Gloss Black
(619 x 425 x 76-542mm) Fused Epoxy
Package Specifications
PACKAGE SIZE (W x H x D) PACKAGE SHIP WEIGHT PACKAGE UPC CODE PACKAGE CONTENTS UNITS IN PACKAGE
Wall Mount, Wall and

27.50" x 4.31" x 13.88" Display Installation
PA750 19.00lb (8.62kg) 735029308393 1
(699 x 109 x 353mm) Hardware, Installation
Instructions
Accessories
ACC-UCM: Universal AV Component Mount
ESHV models: AV Wall Shelves
All dimensions = inch (mm)
Architect Specifications
The ParamountTM Articulating Wall Mount shall be a Peerless-AV model PA750 and shall be located where indicated on the plans.
Assembly and installation shall be done according to instructions provided by the manufacturer.
Visit peerless-av.com to see the Peerless-AV Peerless-AV EMEA Peerless-AV Latin America
complete line of AV solutions from 2300 White Oak Circle Unit 3 Watford Interchange Ave de las Industrias 413
Aurora, IL 60502 USA Colonial Way, Watford Parque Industrial Escobedo
Peerless-AV, including outdoor displays,
Herts, WD24 4WP Escobedo, N.L.,
wireless, kiosks, digital audio, display (800) 865-2112 United Kingdom Mexico 66062
mounts, projector mounts, carts/stands, (630) 375-5100 +44 (0) 1923 200100 +52 (81) 8384-8300
and a full assortment of accessories. Fax: (800) 359-6500 Fax: +44 (0) 1923 200101 Fax: +52 (81) 8384-8360
LIT-1445 rev.1
© 2019 Peerless Industries, Inc. Peerless-AV® is a registered trademark and ParamountTM is a trademark of Peerless Industries, Inc. All rights reserved.
Alternate Hardware for PA750
Adaptor
Parts List A (4)
Description Qty Part # M5 x 10mm
A M5 x 10mm 4 520-1216
3mm
A (4) A (4)
Peerless-AV Peerless-AV Europe Peerless-AV de Mexico

2300 White Oak Circle Unit 3 Watford Interchange, Ave de las Industrias 413
Aurora, IL 60502 Colonial Way, Watford, Herts, Parque Industrial Escobedo
Email: tech@peerlessmounts.com WD24 4WP, United Kingdom Escobedo N.L Mexico 66050
Ph: (800) 865-2112 Customer Care Servicio al Cliente
Fax: (800) 359-6500 44 (0) 1923 200 100 01-800-849-65-77
www.peerless-av.com www.peerless-av.com www.peerless-av.com
© 2016, Peerless Industries, Inc. © 2016, Peerless Industries, Inc. © 2016, Peerless Industries, Inc.
1 of 1 2016-06-22 #: 204-9039-1
39" - 75" MAX
100 lb
(99 - 191 cm) (45 kg)
ENG
ESP
FRN
DEU
NEL
ITL
ČEŠ
SLK
POR
TÜR
1 2015-09-21 #:204-9013-4 (2016-11-16)

WARNING
ENG - This product is designed to be installed on wood stud, solid concrete or cinder block walls. Hardware is
included for wood stud, solid concrete and cinder block installation. Before installing make sure the supporting
surface will support the combined load of the equipment and hardware. Screws must be tightly secured. Do
not overtighten screws or damage can occur and product may fail. Never exceed the Maximum Load Capacity.
Always use an assistant or mechanical lifting equipment to safely lift and position equipment. This product is
intended for indoor use only. Use of this product outdoors could lead to product failure or personal injury. Be
careful not to pinch fingers when operating the mount. For support please call customer care at 1-800-865-2112.
ADVERTENCIA
ESP - Este producto está diseñado para ser instalado en paredes con montantes de madera, en paredes de
concreto macizo o en paredes de hormigón de escorias. Se incluyen los accesorios para la instalación en
montantes de madera, en concreto macizo o en hormigón de escorias. Antes de instalarlo, asegúrese de que
la superficie de apoyo sostendrá la carga combinada del equipo y los fijadores. Los tornillos se tienen que fijar
firmemente. No apriete los tornillos en exceso, ya que se pueden dañar y el producto podría fallar. Nunca exceda
la Capacidad Máxima de Carga. Siempre cuente con la ayuda de un asistente o utilice un equipo mecánico de
izar para levantar y colocar el equipo con más seguridad. Este producto está diseñado para uso en interiores
solamente. Utilizar este producto en exteriores podría causar fallas del producto o lesiones a individuos. Tenga
cuidado de no pincharse los dedos cuando mueva el soporte. Si necesita ayuda, por favor, llame a Servicio al
Cliente de Peerless al 1-800-865-2112.
ADVERTISSEMENT
FRN - Ce produit est conçu pour une installation sur des murs à montants en bois, en béton plein ou en blocs
de béton. Les pièces de fixation nécessaires à l’installation sur des montants en bois, du béton plein et du bloc
de béton sont incluses. Avant de procéder à l’installation, assurez-vous que la surface de support peut soutenir
la charge totale de l’équipement ainsi que des pièces de fixation. Les vis doivent être serrées au maximum. Ne
serrez pas trop les vis pour éviter tout risque d’endommager le produit et de causer sa défaillance. Ne dépassez
jamais la capacité de charge maximale. Pour lever et positionner l’équipement en toute sécurité, faites-vous
toujours aider par une autre personne ou utilisez un dispositif de levage mécanique. Ce produit est conçu
uniquement pour un usage intérieur. L’utilisation de ce produit à l’extérieur peut causer une défaillance du produit
ou des blessures corporelles. Prenez garde à ne pas vous pincer les doigts lorsque vous manipulez le support.
Pour toute assistance, veuillez contacter le service à la clientèle au 1-800-865-2112.
ACHTUNG
DEU - Dieses Produkt ist für die Anbringung an Holzständer-, Massivbeton- oder Porenbetonsteinwänden
ausgelegt. Die Befestigungsteile zur Anbringung an Holzständern, Massivbeton oder Porenbetonstein sind im
Lieferumfang enthalten. Vergewissern Sie sich vor der Anbringung, dass die tragende Fläche das Gesamtgewicht
der Geräte und der Befestigungsteile tragen kann. Die Schrauben müssen sicher angezogen werden. Ziehen
Sie die Schrauben nicht zu fest an, damit es nicht zu Beschädigungen und Versagen des Produkts kommt. Die
maximale Tragfähigkeit darf niemals überschritten werden. Ziehen Sie immer eine zusätzliche Person heran oder
verwenden Sie mechanische Hebegeräte, um Geräte sicher zu heben und zu positionieren. Dieses Produkt ist
nur für den Gebrauch innerhalb von Gebäuden bestimmt. Eine Verwendung dieses Produkts im Freien kann zu
Produktausfall oder Personenschaden führen. Achten Sie beim Umgang mit dem Halter darauf, dass die Finger
nicht eingeklemmt werden. Falls Sie Unterstützung benötigen, wenden Sie sich bitte an den Kundendienst unter
der Telefonnummer 1-800-865-2112 (innerhalb der USA).
WAARSCHUWING
NEL - Dit product is ontworpen voor installatie op muren met houten balken en muren van massief beton of
B2-blokken. De hiervoor benodigde hardware is meegeleverd. Vóór de installatie dient u zich ervan te overtuigen
dat het dragende oppervlak het totaalgewicht van de apparatuur en de hardware aankan. Alle schroeven moeten
stevig vastzitten. Draai de schroeven niet te strak aan, want dit zou kunnen resulteren in schade en/of falen van
het product. Het maximale draagvermogen mag nooit worden overschreden. Belangrijke veiligheidstip: zorg er
tijdens het optillen en plaatsen van de apparatuur altijd voor dat u een helper of een mechanische hefinricht-
ing ter beschikking hebt. Dit product is uitsluitend bedoeld voor gebruik binnenshuis. Als dit product buitenshuis
wordt gebruikt, zijn falen van het product en letsel bij personen mogelijk. Let er tijdens het gebruiken van de
bevestiging op dat uw vingers niet beklemd raken. Voor ondersteuning kunt u terecht bij de afdeling Klantenzorg
op +1-800-865-2112 (in de VS).
2 2015-09-21 #:204-9013-4 (2016-11-16)

ENG Symbols
ESP Símbolos
FRN Symboles
#
DEU Symbole
NEL Symbolen ENG
ITL
ČEŠ
Simboli
Symboly
ESP
FRN
WARNING
ADVERTENCIA
ADVERTISSEMENT ENG Skip to step.
x3
SLK Symboly DEU ACHTUNG ESP Continúe con el
POR Símbolos ENG Screws must get at least three
NEL WAARSCHUWING paso.
TÜR Semboller full turns and fit snug.
ITL AVVERTENZA FRN Passez à l’étape.
ESP Los tornillos tienen que dar,
ČEŠ VÝSTRAHA DEU Weiter mit Schritt.
por lo menos, tres vueltas
SLK VÝSTRAHA NEL Ga door naar stap.
completas y quedar ajustados.
POR AVISO ITL Vai al passo.
FRN Il faut effectuer au moins trois
TÜR UYARI ČEŠ Přeskočte na krok.
tours de vis complets et bien
SLK Preskočte na krok.
serrer les vis.
POR Saltar para o
DEU Schrauben sind mindestens drei
passo.
volle Umdrehungen einzudrehen
TÜR Su adıma geç.
und müssen fest anliegen.
NEL De schroeven moeten ten
minste drie hele slagen worden
aangedraaid en stevig vastzitten.
ENG Do not overtighten screws. ENG Display center. ITL Girare tre volte le viti che
ESP No apriete de más los tornillos. ESP Centro de la pantalla. devono risultare aderenti.
FRN Ne pas trop serrer les vis. FRN Centre de l’écran. ČEŠ Šrouby se musí otočit minimálně
DEU Ziehen Sie die Schrauben nicht zu DEU Bildschirmmitte. tři plné otáčky a plně dosednout.
fest an. NEL Midden van het SLK Skrutky sa musia otočiť aspoň
NEL Draai de schroeven niet te strak aan. scherm. tri celé otáčky a tesne dosadnúť.
ITL Non stringere troppo le viti. ITL Centro del display. POR Os parafusos devem completar,
ČEŠ Šrouby neutahujte příliš silně. ČEŠ Střed obrazovky. no mínimo, três voltas
SLK Skrutky neuťahujte príliš silno. SLK Stred obrazovky. completas e ajustar-se no local.
POR Não apertar demasiado os parafusos. POR Centro do ecrã. TÜR Vidalar en az üç tam dönüş
TÜR Vidaları gereğinden fazla sıkmayın. TÜR Ekran merkezde yapmalı ve sıkı oturmalıdır.
4 2015-09-21 #:204-9013-4 (2016-11-16)

ENG Tools Needed for Assembly.
ESP Herramientas necesarias para el ensamblaje.
FRN Outils nécessaires au montage. ENG To properly tighten screws: Tighten until screw
DEU Für den Zusammenbau erforderliche Werkzeuge. head makes contact, then tighten another 1/2
NEL Voor montage benodigd gereedschap. turn. Do not overtighten screws.
ITL Attrezzi necessari per l’assemblaggio. ESP Apriete adecuado de los tornillos: Apriete hasta
ČEŠ Nástroje potřebné k montáži. que la cabeza del tornillo haga contacto y luego
SLK Nástroje potrebné na montáž. apriete otra 1/2 vuelta. No apriete de más los
POR Ferramentas necessárias para a montagem. tornillos.
TÜR Montaj İçin Gerekli Aletler. FRN Pour bien serrer les vis : Serrez jusqu’à ce que
la tête de la vis entre en contact, puis serrez
encore d’un 1/2 tour. Ne serrez pas trop les vis.
DEU Korrektes Festziehen der Schrauben: Ziehen
Sie die Schrauben fest, bis der Schraubenkopf
Kontakt hat, und dann um eine weitere 1/2
Umdrehung. Ziehen Sie die Schrauben nicht
zu fest an.
NEL Ga als volgt te werk om de schroeven naar
behoren aan te draaien: Draai de schroef aan
totdat de kop het oppervlak raakt; maak daarna
nog een halve slag. Draai de schroeven niet te
strak aan.
ITL Per stringere correttamente le viti: stringere fino
a quando la testa della vite fa contatto, quindi
stringere di un altro 1/2 giro. Non stringere
eccessivamente.
ČEŠ Správné utažení šroubů: Utahujte, dokud se
šroub nedostane do kontaktu, poté utáhněte
ještě půl otočky. Šrouby neutahujte příliš silně.
SLK Správne utiahnutie skrutiek: Uťahujte, kým sa
skrutka nedostane do kontaktu, potom utiahnite
ešte pol otočky. Skrutky neuťahujte príliš silno.
POR Para apertar correctamente os parafusos:
aperte até que a cabeça do parafuso
estabeleça contacto e, em seguida, aperte mais
1/2 volta. Não aperte demasiado os parafusos.
TÜR Vidaları doğru bir şekilde sıkılamak için: Vida
başı temas edene kadar döndürün, sonra yarım
tur daha döndürün. Vidaları gereğinden fazla
5/32" 5/16" sıkılamayın.
(4mm) (8mm) 1
3/8"
(10mm)
3
+1/2
5mm
1/2"
(13mm) 4
5 2015-09-21 #:204-9013-4 (2016-11-16)

Parts List O (4)
Description Qty Part # plastic head cover
A wall arm assembly 1 096-P1504
B tilt plate 1 096-P1496
C plate nut 2 096-1440
D 8mm concrete anchor 4 590-0320
E #14 x 2-1/2" wood screw 4 5S1-015-C03
F M4 x 12mm 4 504-9013
M4 x 25mm 4 504-1015
G
H M6 x 12mm 4 520-1128
U (2)
horizontal plate
I M6 x 25mm 4 520-1208
J M8 x 12mm 4 520-9571
K M8 x 25mm 4 520-1031
L M4 x 1mm washer 4 540-9400
M M6/M8 x 1.5mm washer 8 540-9406
N 1/4" (6mm) height spacer 8 600-1215
O plastic head cover 4 560-1029
P tie holder 1 590-1976
Q 8-32 x 1/4" 1 520-1622
R cable tie 3 560-9711
S M5 x 10mm phillips 8 520-1233 C (2)
T vertical plate 1 096-P1437 plate nut
U horizontal plate 2 096-P1439
V M8 x 50mm 4 521-1009
A (1) B (1) T (1)

vertical plate
wall arm assembly tilt plate
D (4) E (4)
8mm concrete anchor #14 x 2-1/2" wood screw
R (3) P (1) Q (1) S (8)

cable tie tie holder 8-32 x 1/4" M5 x 10mm
6 2015-09-21 #:204-9013-4 (2016-11-16)

F (4) G (4) H (4) I (4)
M4 x 12mm M4 x 25mm M6 x 12mm M6 x 25mm
J (4) K (4) L (4) M (8) N (8)

M8 x 12mm M8 x 25mm M4 x 1mm M6/M8 x 1/4" (6mm)
washer 1.5mm washer height spacer
V (4)
M8 x 50mm
7 2015-09-21 #:204-9013-4 (2016-11-16)

1 1-1
ENG Optional 5mm
ESP Opcional
FRN Facultatif
DEU Fakultativ
NEL Facultatief
ITL Opzionale
ČEŠ Volitelné
SLK Volitel'né
POR Opcional
TÜR Ísteğe bağli
1/2"
(13mm)
1-2
1-3
8 2015-09-21 #:204-9013-4 (2016-11-16)

2
ENG Wood stud wall. ENG Concrete/Cinder block.
ESP Pared de madera. ESP Concreto/Bloque de hormigón.
FRN Mur en bois. FRN Béton/bloc de béton.
DEU Holzwand. DEU Beton/Porenbetonstein.
NEL Houten muur. NEL Beton/B2-blokken.
ITL Parete di legno. ITL Calcestruzzo solido/forato.
ČEŠ Dřevěná stěna. ČEŠ Betonový/škvárový blok.
SLK Drevená stena. SLK Betónový/škvarový blok.
POR Parede de madeira. POR Betão/bloco de cimento.
TÜR Ahşap duvar. TÜR Beton/Briket.
2a 2b
2a
WARNING
ENG - When installing Peerless wall mounts on a wood stud wall covered with gypsum board (drywall), verify that
the wood studs are a minimum of 2" x 4" nominal size. Do not install over gypsum board thicker than 5/8".
ADVERTENCIA
ESP - Cuando vaya a instalar soportes de pared de Peerless en paredes con montantes de madera recubiertas
con yeso-cartón (gypsum board) verifique que los montantes tengan un tamaño mínimo de 2" x 4". No instale en
yeso-cartón (gypsum board) de más de 5/8" de grosor.
ADVERTISSEMENT
FRN - Lors de l’installation de supports muraux Peerless sur un mur à montants en bois recouvert de plaque de
plâtre (cloison sèche), assurez-vous que les montants en bois ont une taille nominale d'au moins 2 po x 4 po (5
cm x 10 cm). Ne pas installer sur une plaque de plâtre dont l'épaisseur est supérieure à 5/8 po (16 mm).
ACHTUNG
DEU - Bei der Anbringung von Peerless-Wandhaltern an Holzständerwänden mit Gipsplattenverkleidung (Trock-
enwand) muss darauf geachtet werden, dass die Holzständer über eine Nenngröße von mindestens 51 x 102
mm (2 x 4 Zoll) verfügen. Das Produkt darf nicht an einer Gipsplatte mit einer Dicke von mehr als 15,9 mm (5/8
Zoll) angebracht werden.
WAARSCHUWING
NEL - Als de Peerless-wandbevestiging op een muur bestaand uit houten balken en gipsplaat wordt geïnstal-
leerd, horen deze houten balken een afmeting van ten minste 5 x 10 cm te hebben. De wandbevestiging mag
niet worden geïnstalleerd op gipsplaat met een dikte van meer dan 15,88 mm.
AVVERTENZA
ITL - In sede d’installazione dei sostegni Peerless per parete su una parete con montanti di legno ricoperti con
muro a secco (cartongesso), verificare che i montanti di legno abbiano una dimensione nominale minima di 5 cm
x 10 cm. Non installare su cartongesso spesso più di 1,60 cm.
VÝSTRAHA
ČEŠ - Při instalaci nástěnných držáků Peerless na dřevěný trám pokrytý sádrokartonovou deskou (sádrokartó-
nem) zkontrolujte, zda dřevěné trámy mají minimální jmenovitý rozměr 5 x 10 cm. Nemontujte na sádrokartono-
vou desku hrubší než 1,6 cm.
VÝSTRAHA
SLK - Pri montáži nástenných držiakov Peerless na stenu z drevených stĺpikov pokrytú sadrovou doskou (sadro-
kartónom) skontrolujte, či drevené stĺpiky majú minimálny menovitý rozmer 5 x 10 cm. Nemontujte na sadro-
kartón hrubší ako 1,6 cm.
9 2015-09-21 #:204-9013-4 (2016-11-16)

AVISO
POR - Ao instalar suportes para parede Peerless numa trave ou viga de madeira cobertas com painéis de gesso,
verifique se as traves ou vigas têm um tamanho nominal mínimo de 50,8 mm x 101,6 mm. Não instale em pai-
néis de gesso com mais de 170 mm.
UYARI
TÜR - Peerless duvar kaidelerini alçı panelle (alçıpan) kaplı ahşap dikme bir duvarın üzerine monte ederken söz
konusu ahşap dikmenin nominal ebadının en azından 2" x 4" olmasına dikkat ediniz. 5/8" den daha kalın alçı
panellerin üzerine monte etmeyiniz.
2a-1 ENG Use stud finder to locate and

mark stud center lines.
ESP Marque las líneas centrales
del montante.
FRN Marquez la ligne médiane du
montant.
DEU Markieren Sie die
NEL Markeer het midden van de
balken.
ITL Contrassegna le linee
ČEŠ Vyznačte střední linii stěny.
SLK Vyznačte stredné čiary steny.
POR Marque as linhas centrais da
escora.
TÜR Direk merkez hatlarını
işaretleyin.
2a-2
ENG Level wallplate. Mark mounting holes on stud
center lines.
ESP Marque los orificios de montaje en las líneas
centrales del montante.
FRN Marquez les trous de fixation le long de la ligne
médiane du montant.
DEU Markieren Sie die Montagelöcher auf den
NEL Markeer montagegaten op het midden van de
balken. 16
ITL Contrassegna i fori di montaggio sulle linee (41 "
cm
centrali dei montanti. )
ČEŠ Na střední linii stěny vyznačte montážní otvory.
SLK Na stredné čiary steny vyznačte montážne otvory.
POR Marque os furos de montagem nas linhas
centrais da escora.
TÜR Direk merkez hatları üzerinde montaj deliklerini
işaretleyin.
4
(1 .81"
22
mm
)
10 2015-09-21 #:204-9013-4 (2016-11-16)

2a-3 2.5"
(64mm)
5/32"
5/32"
(4mm)
(4mm)
ENG Drill mounting holes into supporting surface

(2.5" (64mm) minimum depth required).
ESP Taladre los agujeros de montaje en la superficie
de apoyo (se requiere una profundidad mínima de ENG Mounting hole must center on stud.
2.5" (64mm)). ESP El orificio debe quedar centrado en el montante.
FRN Percez les trous de fixation dans la surface FRN Le trou doit être centré sur le montant.
de support (une profondeur minimale de DEU Das Loch muss am Ständer zentriert sein.
2,5 po (64mm) est requise). NEL Boorgat moet midden op de balk liggen.
DEU Bohren Sie Montagelöcher in die Montagefläche ITL Il foro trapanato deve centrarsi sul montante.
(Mindesttiefe von 64mm (2,5 Zoll) erforderlich). ČEŠ Vyvrtaný otvor musí být v středě stěny.
NEL Boor montagegaten (2.5" (64mm) minimale diepte). SLK Vyvŕtaný otvor musí byť v strede steny.
ITL Trapana i fori di montaggio (profondità minima di POR O furo tem de ser perfurado no centro da escora.
2,5" (64mm)). TÜR Açılan delik direğin tam merkezinde olmalıdır.
ČEŠ Vyvrtejte otvory do nosné plochy
(2,5 "(64mm) vyžaduje minimální hloubku).
SLK Vyvŕtajte otvory na nosnú plochu
(2,5 "(64mm) vyžaduje minimálnu hĺbku).
apoio (64mm de profundidade mínima necessária).
TÜR Montaj deliklerini matkapla delin (2.5" (64mm)
minimum derinlik).
2a-4
ENG Level wallplate. Install using wood screws
provided.
ESP Nivele e instale. 3/8"
FRN Mettez à niveau et procédez au montage. (10mm)
DEU Waagerecht ausrichten und anbringen.
O (4) A
ENG Maximum 80 in. • lb (9 N.M.).

ESP Máxima 80 in. • lb (9 N.M.).
FRN Maximum 80 in. • lb (9 N.M.).
DEU Maximum 80 in. • lb (9 N.M.).
NEL Maximaal 80 in. • lb (9 N.M.).
ITL Massima 80 in. • lb (9 N.M.).
ČEŠ Maximum 80 in. • lb (9 N.M.).
SLK Maximum 80 in. • lb (9 N.M.). E (4)
POR Máxima 80 in. • lb (9 N.M.).
TÜR Maksimum 80 in. • lb (9 N.M.). 3
11 2015-09-21 #:204-9013-4 (2016-11-16)
2b
WARNING
ENG - When installing Peerless wall mounts on a concrete wall, the wall must be at least 8" thick with a minimum
compressive strength of 2000 psi. When installing Peerless wall mounts on a cinder block wall, the cinder blocks
must meet ASTM C-90 specifications and have a minimum nominal width of 8". Do not drill into mortar joints!
Be sure to mount in a solid part of the block, generally 1" (25 mm) minimum from the side of the block. It is
suggested that a standard electric drill on slow setting is used to drill the hole instead of a hammer drill to avoid
breaking out the back of the hole when entering a void or cavity. Never attach concrete expansion anchors to
concrete or cinder block covered with plaster, drywall or other finishing material.
ADVERTENCIA
ESP - Cuando vaya a instalar soportes de pared de Peerless en paredes de concreto, las paredes tienen que
tener, por lo menos, 8" de grosor con una resistencia a la compresión de 2000 psi como mínimo. Cuando vaya a
instalar soportes de pared de Peerless en paredes de hormigón de escorias, los bloques tienen que cumplir las
especificaciones de ASTM C-90 y tener un ancho mínimo de 8". ¡No taladre en juntas de argamasa! Asegúrese
de hacer la instalación en la parte sólida del bloque, por lo general, a un mínimo de 1" (25 mm) del extremo del
bloque. Se sugiere utilizar un taladro eléctrico convencional a baja velocidad para hacer los agujeros en vez de
un taladro percutor para no perforar el fondo de los agujeros al entrar en un vacío o una cavidad. Nunca fije los
anclajes de expansión para concreto a superficies de concreto o de bloques de hormigón de escorias recubiertas
con yeso, yeso-cartón u otro material de acabado.
ADVERTISSEMENT
FRN - Lors de l’installation de supports muraux Peerless sur un mur en béton, celui-ci doit avoir au moins 8 po
(20 cm) d'épaisseur et une résistance à la compression d'au moins 2 000 psi. Lors de l’installation de supports
muraux Peerless sur un mur en blocs de béton, ceux-ci doivent respecter les normes ASTM C-90 et avoir une
épaisseur nominale d'au moins 8 po (20 cm). Ne percez pas dans les joints de mortier! Veillez à installer le
support dans une partie solide du bloc, généralement à un minimum de 1 po (25 mm) à partir du côté du bloc. Il
est conseillé de percer le trou à l’aide une perceuse électrique standard à vitesse basse plutôt que d’un marteau
perforateur afin d’éviter de briser le fond du trou lorsque vous entrez dans un vide ou une cavité. Ne fixez jamais
des chevilles à expansion pour béton à du béton ou du bloc de béton recouvert d’une couche de plâtre, d’une
cloison sèche ou de tout autre matériau de finition.
ACHTUNG
DEU - Werden Peerless-Wandhalter an einer Betonwand angebracht, so muss deren Dicke mindestens 203
mm (8 Zoll) und ihre Druckfestigkeit mindestens 13,8 N/mm2 (2000 psi) betragen. Bei der Anbringung von
Peerless-Wandhaltern an einer Porenbetonsteinwand müssen die Porenbetonsteine den Spezifikationen der
ASTM C-90 entsprechen und eine Mindestnennbreite von 203 mm (8 Zoll) aufweisen. Bohren Sie nicht in
Mörtelfugen! Achten Sie darauf, dass die Anbringung an einem massiven Teil des Blocks erfolgt, im Allgemeinen
mindestens 25 mm (1 Zoll) von der Blockseite entfernt. Wir empfehlen, zum Bohren des Lochs anstelle eines
Schlagbohrers einen standardmäßigen Elektrobohrer bei niedriger Einstellung zu verwenden, um zu verhindern,
dass die Bohrungsrückseite beim Eintritt in einen Leer- oder Hohlraum ausbricht. Betonspreizdübel dürfen auf
keinen Fall an Beton oder Porenbetonstein befestigt werden, die mit Verputz, Trockenwand- oder anderem
Deckschichtmaterial bedeckt sind.
WAARSCHUWING
NEL - Als de Peerless-wandbevestiging op een betonnen muur wordt geïnstalleerd, moet deze muur een dikte
van ten minste 20 cm hebben en een druksterkte van ten minste 2000 psi. Als de Peerless-wandbevestiging op
een muur van B2-blokken wordt geïnstalleerd, moeten deze B2-blokken voldoen aan de ASTM C-90-specificaties
en een breedte hebben van ten minste 20 cm. Niet in de mortelvoegen boren! De bevestigingsschroeven
moeten in een massief deel van het blok grijpen (gewoonlijk ten minste 2,5 cm vanaf de zijkant van het blok).
Het verdient aanbeveling om voor het boren van het gat een standaard elektrische boor te gebruiken op lage
snelheid in plaats van een boorhamer; dit om te voorkomen dat u de achterkant van het boorgat beschadigt,
mocht u een holte treffen. Gebruik nooit expansie-ankers voor beton bij installatie op een betonnen muur of een
muur van B2-blokken bedekt met gips, gipsplaat of ander afwerkingsmateriaal.
12 2015-09-21 #:204-9013-4 (2016-11-16)

2b-1
ENG Level wallplate. Mark mounting holes.

ESP Marque los orificios de montaje. A
FRN Marquez les trous de fixation.
DEU Markieren Sie die Montagelöcher.
NEL Markeer montagegaten.
ITL Contrassegna I fori di montaggio.
ČEŠ Vyznačte montážní otvory. 4
(1 .81"
SLK Vyznačte montážne otvory. 22
mm
POR Marque os furos de montagem. )
TÜR Montaj deliklerini işaretleyin.
8" - 10" 8" - 10"

(20cm - 25cm) (20cm - 25cm)
2b-2 2.5"
(64mm)
5/16"
(8mm) 5/16"
(8mm)
ENG Drill mounting holes into supporting surface

(2.5" (64mm) minimum depth required).
ESP Taladre los agujeros de montaje en la superficie
de apoyo (se requiere una profundidad mínima de
ENG Do not drill into mortar joints.
2.5" (64mm)).
ESP No perfore en las juntas de mortero.
FRN Percez les trous de fixation dans la surface
FRN Ne percez pas dans les joints de mortier.
de support (une profondeur minimale de
DEU Bohren Sie nicht in Mörtelfugen.
2,5 po (64mm) est requise).
NEL Boor niet in de mortelvoegen.
DEU Bohren Sie Montagelöcher in die Montagefläche
ITL Non trapanare nei giunti di malta.
(Mindesttiefe von 64mm (2,5 Zoll) erforderlich).
ČEŠ Nevrtejte do nebezpečných spojů.
NEL Boor montagegaten (2.5" (64mm) minimale diepte).
SLK Nevŕtajte do nebezpečných spojov.
ITL Trapana i fori di montaggio (profondità minima di
POR Não perfurar em juntas de argamassa.
2,5" (64mm)).
TÜR Derz harcını delmeyin.
ČEŠ Vyvrtejte otvory do nosné plochy
(2,5 "(64mm) vyžaduje minimální hloubku).
SLK Vyvŕtajte otvory na nosnú plochu
(2,5 "(64mm) vyžaduje minimálnu hĺbku).
apoio (64mm de profundidade mínima necessária).
TÜR Montaj deliklerini matkapla delin (2.5" (64mm)
minimum derinlik).
14 2015-09-21 #:204-9013-4 (2016-11-16)

2b-3
1b-3
D
ENG Insert anchor flush to concrete.
ESP Inserte el anclaje a ras con el concreto.
FRN Insérez la cheville d’ancrage au ras du béton.
DEU Setzen Sie den Dübel bündig mit dem Beton
abschließend ein.
NEL Breng anker aan gelijk met beton.
ITL Inserire il fermo a paro col calcestruzzo.
ČEŠ Přestrčte ukotvenia priamo do betónu.
SLK Prestrčte ukotvenia priamo do betónu.
POR Introduza a bucha encastrada no betão.
TÜR Tespit demirini betona takın.
D (4)
2b-4
1b-4
ENG Level wallplate. Install using concrete
anchors and wood screws provided.
ESP Nivele e instale. 3/8"
FRN Mettez à niveau et procédez au montage. (10mm)
DEU Waagerecht ausrichten und anbringen.
O (4) A
ENG Maximum 80 in. • lb (9 N.M.).

ESP Máxima 80 in. • lb (9 N.M.).
FRN Maximum 80 in. • lb (9 N.M.).
DEU Maximum 80 in. • lb (9 N.M.).
NEL Maximaal 80 in. • lb (9 N.M.).
ITL Massima 80 in. • lb (9 N.M.).
ČEŠ Maximum 80 in. • lb (9 N.M.).
SLK Maximum 80 in. • lb (9 N.M.).
POR Máxima 80 in. • lb (9 N.M.).
TÜR Maksimum 80 in. • lb (9 N.M.).
E (4)
15 2015-09-21 #:204-9013-4 (2016-11-16)

3
ENG Optional
ESP Opcional
FRN Facultatif
DEU Fakultativ
NEL Facultatief 24.6"
ITL Opzionale (626mm)
ČEŠ Volitelné MIN
SLK Volitel'né
POR Opcional
TÜR Ísteğe bağli
X = 100-200mm X = 200-300mm X = 300-400mm
3a-1 3b-1 3c-1

16 2015-09-21 #:204-9013-4 (2016-11-16)
3a-1 3b-1 3c-1
U (2) U (2) U (2)
T T T
3a-2 3b-2 3c-2

ENG Do not tighten the screws. ENG Do not tighten the screws. ENG Do not tighten the screws.
ESP No apriete los tornillos. ESP No apriete los tornillos. ESP No apriete los tornillos.
FRN Ne serrez pas les vis. FRN Ne serrez pas les vis. FRN Ne serrez pas les vis.
DEU Ziehen Sie die Schrauben DEU Ziehen Sie die Schrauben DEU Ziehen Sie die Schrauben
nicht an. nicht an. nicht an.
NEL Schroeven niet aandraaien. NEL Schroeven niet aandraaien. NEL Schroeven niet aandraaien.
ITL Non stringere le viti. ITL Non stringere le viti. ITL Non stringere le viti.
ČEŠ Šrouby neutahujte. ČEŠ Šrouby neutahujte. ČEŠ Šrouby neutahujte.
SLK Skrutky neuťahujte. SLK Skrutky neuťahujte. SLK Skrutky neuťahujte.
POR Não apertar os parafusos. POR Não apertar os parafusos. POR Não apertar os parafusos.
TÜR Vidaları sıkmayın. TÜR Vidaları sıkmayın. TÜR Vidaları sıkmayın.
S (4) S (4) S (4)
C (2)
C (2)
C (2)
17 2015-09-21 #:204-9013-4 (2016-11-16)

4
ENG Screws must get at least three full turns and fit snug.
ESP Los tornillos tienen que dar, por lo menos, tres vueltas completas y quedar ajustados.
FRN Il faut effectuer au moins trois tours de vis complets et bien serrer les vis.
DEU Schrauben sind mindestens drei volle Umdrehungen einzudrehen und müssen fest anliegen.
NEL De schroeven moeten ten minste drie hele slagen worden aangedraaid en stevig vastzitten.
ITL Girare tre volte le viti che devono risultare aderenti.
ČEŠ Šrouby se musí otočit minimálně tři plné otáčky a plně dosednout.
x3 SLK Skrutky sa musia otočiť aspoň tri celé otáčky a tesne dosadnúť.
POR Os parafusos devem completar, no mínimo, três voltas completas e ajustar-se no local.
TÜR Vidalar en az üç tam dönüş yapmalı ve sıkı oturmalıdır.
N (2)
N N N
L M M L
G I K G
N (2)
M (2)
L M M
F H J,V I,K
18 2015-09-21 #:204-9013-4 (2016-11-16)
5
ENG Tighten.
ESP Apretar.
FRN Serrer.
DEU Anziehen.
NEL Aandraaien.
ITL Stringere.
ČEŠ Utáhněte.
SLK Utiahnite.
POR Apertar.
TÜR Sıkmak.
B
B
S (4)
S (4)
19 2015-09-21 #:204-9013-4 (2016-11-16)
7-1
7-2
ENG Tilt Adjustment: Loosen ratchet handle. Adjust tilt. Retighten ratchet handle.
ESP Ajuste de la inclinación: Afloje la palanca de trinquete. Ajuste la inclinación. Vuelva a apretar la palanca de
trinquete.
FRN Réglage de l'inclinaison : Desserrez la clé à cliquet. Réglez l’inclinaison. Resserrez la clé à cliquet.
DEU Neigungseinstellung: Lösen Sie den Ratschengriff. Stellen Sie die Neigung ein. Ziehen Sie den
Ratschengriff wieder an.
NEL Het kantelmechanisme bijstellen: Draai de ratelhendel los. Pas de hoek van het scherm naar wens aan.
Draai de ratelhendel weer vast.
ITL Regolazione dell’inclinazione: allentare il manico a cricchetto. Regolare l’inclinazione. Stringere di nuovo il
manico a cricchetto.
ČEŠ Nastavení sklonu: Uvolněte páku řehtačky. Nastavte sklon. Znovu utáhněte páku řehtačky.
SLK Nastavenie sklonu: Uvoľnite západkovú páčku. Nastavte sklon. Znova utiahnite západkovú páčku.
POR Ajuste da inclinação: Desaperte com a chave de roquete. Aperte novamente com a chave de roquete.
TÜR Eğim Ayarı: Kilit mandalı kolunu gevşetin. Eğimi ayarlayın. Kilit mandalı kolunu tekrar sıkın.
ENG Repositioning the ratchet handle without

tightening.
ESP Cambiar la posición de la palanca de trinquete
sin apretar.
FRN Repositionner la clé à cliquet sans serrer.
DEU Neupositionierung des Ratschengriffs ohne
Festziehen.
NEL De ratelhendel verplaatsen zonder hem vast te
draaien.
ITL Riposizionamento del manico a cricchetto senza
stringerlo.
ČEŠ Změna polohy páky řehtačky bez.
SLK Zmena polohy západkovej páčky bez.
POR Reposicionar a chave de roquete sem apertar.
TÜR Kilit mandalı kolu konumunun sıkmadan yeniden
+ 15°/- 5° ayarlanması.
1 2 3
20 2015-09-21 #:204-9013-4 (2016-11-16)

8-1
ENG Cable management.
ESP Manejo de cables.
FRN Gestion des câbles.
DEU Kabelführung.
NEL Kabelbeheer.
ITL Gestione dei cavi.
ČEŠ Vedení kabelů.
SLK Vedenie káblov.
POR Gestão de cabos.
TÜR Kablo yönetimi.
P
Q
8-2
R P
R (8)
21 2015-09-21 #:204-9013-4 (2016-11-16)

9
+/- 45°
10
ENG Loosen, adjust, tighten.

ESP Afloje, ajuste, apriete.
FRN Desserrez, réglez, puis
serrez.
DEU Lösen, einstellen, anziehen.
NEL Losdraaien, aanpassen,
aandraaien.
ITL Allentare, regolare, stringere.
ČEŠ Uvolnit, nastavit, přitáhnout.
SLK Uvoľniť, nastaviť, pritiahnuť.
POR Desaperte, ajuste, aperte.
TÜR Gevşetin, ayarlayın, sıkın.
+/- 5°
22 2015-09-21 #:204-9013-4 (2016-11-16)
11
ENG Optional: To adjust arm tension tighten or loosen
ENG Do not remove screw or loosen screw until it is
tension screws using 5mm allen wrench.
no longer engaged with the mount. Doing so
ESP Opcional: Para ajustar la tensión del brazo, may cause the display to fall.
apriete o afloje los tornillos de tensión utilizando
ESP No quite ni afloje el tornillo hasta que ya no esté
llaves allen de 5mm.
enganchado al soporte. Hacerlo podría causar
FRN Facultatif : Pour régler la tension du bras, serrez que se caiga la pantalla.
ou desserrez les vis de tension à l'aide d'une clé
FRN Ne pas retirer ni desserrer la vis avant qu’elle
hexagonale de 5mm.
ne soit complètement dégagée du support. Cela
DEU Fakultiv: Zur Verstellung der Armspannung risquerait de faire tomber l’écran.
werden die Spannungsschrauben mit einem 5mm
DEU Die Schraube darf nicht entfernt bzw. soweit
Inbusschlüssel festgezogen bzw. gelöst.
gelöst werden, dass sie nicht mehr in den
NEL Facultatief: u kunt de spanning van de arm Halter eingreift. Ansonsten kann der Bildschirm
variëren door de spanningsschroeven aan- of los
herabfallen.
te draaien met een inbussleutel van 5mm. NEL De schroef mag pas worden verwijderd of losge-
ITL Opzionale: per regolare la tensione del braccio, draaid wanneer hij niet meer in de bevestiging
stringere o allentare le viti di tensione usando
vastgrijpt. Als de schroef eerder wordt verwij-
chiavi esagonali da 5mm.
derd of losgedraaid, kan het scherm vallen.
ČEŠ Volitelné: Pro nastavení napnutí ramena utáhněte ITL Non rimuovere o svitare la vite fino a quando
nebo uvolněte šrouby za použití 5mm imbusových
non è più ingranata nel sostegno, altrimenti il
klíčů.
display potrebbe cadere.
SLK Volitel'né: Na nastavenie napnutia ramena ČEŠ Neodstraňujte ani neuvolňujte šroub, dokud se
utiahnite alebo uvoľnite skrutky pomocou 5mm
úplné neoddělí od držáku. Jinak může dojít k
imbusových kľúčov.
pádu obrazovky.
POR Opcional para ajustar a tensão do braço, aperte SLK Neodstraňujte ani neuvoľňujte skrutku, kým sa
ou desaperte os parafsos de tensão utilizando
úplne neoddelí od držiaka. Inak môže dôjsť k
chaves Allen de 5mm.
pádu obrazovky.
TÜR Ísteğe bağli: Kol gerginliğini ayarlamak için, 5mm POR Não retire nem desaperte o parafuso sem que
alyan anahtarlarını kullanarak germe vidalarını
esteja desengrenado do suporte. Fazê-lo pode
sıkın veya gevşetin.
provocar a queda do ecrã.
TÜR Vidanın montaj bağlantısı tamamen bitmeden
ENG Maximum 50 in. • lb (5.6 N.M.). vidayı çıkarmayın veya gevşetmeyin. Bunu
ESP Máxima 50 in. • lb (5.6 N.M.). yapmak, ekranın düşmesine neden olabilir.
FRN Maximum 50 in. • lb (5.6 N.M.).
DEU Maximale 50 in. • lb (5.6 N.M.).
NEL Maximale 50 in. • lb (5.6 N.M.).
ITL Massima 50 in. • lb (5.6 N.M.). 5mm
ČEŠ Maximální 50 in. • lb (5.6 N.M.).
SLK Maximálnu 50 in. • lb (5.6 N.M.).
POR Máxima 50 in. • lb (5.6 N.M.).
TÜR Maksimum 50 in. • lb (5.6 N.M.).
PA750, PRMA450
23 2015-09-21 #:204-9013-4 (2016-11-16)
LIMITED FIVE-YEAR WARRANTY
Peerless Industries, Inc. (“Peerless”) warrants to original end-users of Peerless® products will be free from defects in material and
workmanship, under normal use, for a period of five years from the date of purchase by the original end-user (but in no case longer than
six years after the date of the product's manufacture). At its option, Peerless will repair or replace, or refund the purchase price of, any
product which fails to conform with this warranty.
In no event shall the duration of any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose be longer than the
period of the applicable express warranty set forth above. Some states do not allow limitations on how long a implied warranty lasts,
so the above limitation may not apply to you.
This warranty does not cover damage caused by (a) service or repairs by the customer or a person who is not authorized for such service
or repairs by Peerless, (b) the failure to utilize proper packing when returning the product, (c) incorrect installation or the failure to follow
Peerless' instructions or warnings when installing, using or storing the product, or (d) misuse or accident, in transit or otherwise, including
in cases of third party actions and force majeure.
In no event shall Peerless be liable for incidental or consequential damages or damages arising from the theft of any product,
whether or not secured by a security device which may be included with the Peerless® product. Some states do not allow the
exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you.
This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, expressed or implied, and is the sole remedy with respect to product defects. No dealer,
distributor, installer or other person is authorized to modify or extend this Limited Warranty or impose any obligation on Peerless in
connection with the sale of any Peerless® product.
This warranty gives specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state.
GARANTÍA LIMITADA DE CINCO AÑOS

Peerless Industries, Inc. (Peerless) les garantiza a los usuarios finales originales de los productos Peerless® que los productos Peerless®
estarán libres de defectos de materiales o de manufactura, en condiciones de uso normal, durante un periodo de cinco (5) años a partir de
la fecha en la que el usuario final original compre cualquier producto (pero, en ningún caso, durante un periodo mayor de 6 años después
de la fecha de manufactura del producto). Queda a la discreción de Peerless, reparar, reemplazar o rembolsar el precio de compra de
cualquier producto que no cumpla esta garantía.
La duración de toda garantía implícita de comerciabilidad o de idoneidad para un propósito en particular no sobrepasará en caso
alguno el periodo de vigencia de la garantía explícita correspondiente indica en lo anterior. Algunos Estados no permiten que
se establezcan limitaciones en relación con el periodo de duración de una garantía implícita, de manera que es posible que la
limitación expuesta en lo anterior no sea pertinente a usted.
Esta garantía no cubre daños causados por (a) trabajos de mantenimiento o de reparación hechos por el cliente o alguna persona que
no esté autorizada por Peerless para realizar dichos trabajos de mantenimiento o de reparación, (b) no empacar el producto como es
debido si lo devuelve, (c) hacer una instalación incorrecta o no seguir las instrucciones o las advertencias de Peerless al instalar, utilizar
o guardar el producto o (d) el mal uso o los accidentes, en tránsito o en otras circunstancias, incluidos los casos relacionados con las
acciones de terceros o una fuerza mayor.
Peerless no tendrá responsabilidad en ningún caso de daños y perjuicios incidentales o indirectos o de daños y perjuicios que
surjan por el robo de cualquier producto, ya sea que el mismo esté o no esté asegurado con un dispositivo de seguridad que
se haya incluido con el producto de Peerless®. Algunos Estados no permiten que se excluyan o se establezcan limitaciones en
relación con los daños y perjuicios incidentales o indirectos, de manera que es posible que la limitación o la exclusión expuesta
en lo anterior no sea pertinente a usted.
Esta garantía remplaza toda otra garantía, expresa o implícita, y es el único recurso en lo que respecta a los defectos del producto.
Ningún concesionario, distribuidor, instalador ni ninguna otra persona está autorizada a modificar o extender esta Garantía Limitada ni a
imponer obligación alguna a Peerless en relación con la venta de cualquier producto de Peerless®.
Esta garantía concede derechos específicos creados por ley y es posible que usted, además, tenga otros derechos que varían de acuerdo
con el Estado donde se encuentre.
GARANTIE LIMITÉE DE CINQ ANS

Peerless Industries, Inc. (« Peerless ») garantit aux utilisateurs finaux d’origine des produits PeerlessMD que lesdits produits ne
présenteront aucun défaut de matériau ou de main-d’œuvre, dans la mesure où ils sont utilisés normalement, pendant une période de
cinq ans à compter de la date d’achat par l’utilisateur final d’origine (mais en aucun cas plus de six ans après la date de fabrication du
produit). Peerless, à sa discrétion, réparera ou remplacera tout produit non conforme aux termes de cette garantie, ou en remboursera
le prix d’achat.
La durée de toute garantie implicite de qualité commerciale ou d'application à un usage particulier n'excédera en aucun cas la
durée de la garantie applicable expressément stipulée plus haut. Certains états ou provinces n’autorisent pas la limitation de la
durée d’une garantie implicite, et la limitation ci-dessus peut donc ne pas vous être applicable.
Cette garantie ne couvre pas les dommages causés par (a) un entretien ou des réparations effectués par l'acheteur ou une personne non
autorisée par Peerless à effectuer un tel entretien ou de telles réparations, (b) un emballage inadéquat lors de l’expédition d’un produit
retourné, (c) une installation incorrecte ou le non-respect des instructions ou mises en garde de Peerless lors de l'installation, l'utilisation ou
le rangement du produit, ou (d) une mauvaise utilisation ou un accident survenu lors d’un transport ou autrement, y compris l'intervention
de tiers et les cas de force majeure.
Peerless ne peut en aucun cas être tenu responsable de quelque dommage accessoire ou indirect que ce soit ni de dommages
résultant du vol d’un quelconque produit, que celui-ci ait été ou non protégé par un dispositif de sécurité intégré à un produit
PeerlessMD. Certains états ou provinces n’autorisent pas l'exclusion ou la restriction des dommages accessoires ou indirects,
et il est possible que les restrictions ou exclusions ci-dessus ne s'appliquent pas à votre cas.
Les dispositions de cette garantie remplacent toute autre garantie expresse ou implicite et constituent le seul recours possible en cas de
défectuosité d’un produit. Aucun marchand, distributeur, installateur ou autre personne n’est autorisé à modifier ou étendre la portée de
cette garantie limitée, ni à imposer quelque obligation ce que soit à Peerless en ce qui concerne la vente de tout produit PeerlessMD.
Cette garantie offre des droits juridiques particuliers auxquels peuvent s’ajouter d’autres droits, susceptibles de varier d’une province ou
d’un état à l’autre.
24 2015-09-21 #:204-9013-4 (2016-11-16)

Peerless-AV Peerless-AV Europe Peerless-AV de Mexico
2300 White Oak Circle Unit 3 Watford Interchange, Ave de las Industrias 413
Aurora, IL 60502 Colonial Way, Watford, Herts, Parque Industrial Escobedo
Email: tech@peerlessmounts.com WD24 4WP, United Kingdom Escobedo N.L Mexico 66050
Ph: (800) 865-2112 Customer Care Servicio al Cliente
Fax: (800) 359-6500 44 (0) 1923 200 100 01-800-849-65-77
www.peerless-av.com www.peerless-av.com www.peerless-av.com
© 2016, Peerless Industries, Inc. © 2016, Peerless Industries, Inc. © 2016, Peerless Industries, Inc.
RICHMOND, BC
APPENDIX 1.2
OWNER SUPPLIES & INSTALLS (OSOI)
ITEMS CUT SHEETS

RICHMOND, BC
OWNER SUPPLIES & INSTALLS (OSOI) ITEMS CUT SHEETS:

(For full list of owner supplies and installed items, refer to drawings.
All OSOI products are subject to changes.)
BSN BLADDER SCANNER (REQ. POWER)
BWM BLANKET WARMER (REQ. POWER)
CC CRASH CART
CCA CART, CAST
CD CHEMICAL DISPENSER (WALL-MOUNT)
CM COFFEE MAKER- ON DEDICATED CIRCUIT
CSU CART, SOILED UTILITY - DIRTY
CSV CAST SAW WITH VACUUM (REQ. POWER)
CW CART, WIRE SHELVING
CWB CONFIDENTIAL WASTE BIN
ECG ECG MACHINE, PORTABLE (REQ. POWER + WIFI)
EL-B EXAM LIGHT - MOUNTED ON EXAM BED
EL-M EXAM LIGHT - MOBILE
ET-P EXAM TABLE - POWERED
FR KITCHEN FRIDGE
FR-M FRIDGE, MEDICATION
FR-U FRIDGE, UNDER COUNTER
GRB-W GARBAGE/RECYCLING BIN - 23 GAL. WASTE WATCHER
(20"D x 13"W x 30"H)
HS-S HAND SANITIZER W/STOP SIGN
IP INFUSION PUMP (REQ. DATA & POWER)
IV MOBILE IV POLE
KT ELECTRIC KETTLE- ON DEDICATED CIRCUIT
LH LINEN HAMPER
LSU LAERDAL SUCTION UNIT (REQ. POWER)
MW MICROWAVE - ON DEDICATED CIRCUIT
OXY OXYGEN CYLINDERS IN RACK/HOLDER
RC-16 RECYCLING CONTAINER - 16 GAL
RC-20 RECYCLING CONTAINER - 20 GAL
RCL RECLINER CHAIR
RUD RADIOGRAPHIC UNIT, DIGITAL (REQ. POWER+DATA+MECH)
SC CART, BEDSIDE SUPPLY
SL SCALE (DEDICATED POWER OUTLET)
SL-I INFANT SCALE (DEDICATED POWER OUTLET)
SLT SLIT LAMP (REQ. POWER)
STR STRETCHER, STANDARD
ST-T42 STORAGE CABINET, TAMBOUR DOOR 42" H
TO TOASTER - ON DEDICATED CIRCUIT
UA URINALYSIS ANALYZER (REQ. DATA & POWER)
US-P ULTRASOUND, PORTABLE (REQ. DATA & POWER)
VSM VITAL SIGNS MONITOR (REQ. POWER)
WMC WASTE MANAGEMENT CENTRE
WSH WIRE SHELVING
XRC X-RAY POSITIONING CHAIR, ADULT
XRC-P X-RAY POSITIONING CHAIR, PEDIATRIC

BSN
Equipment Datasheet
Bladder Scanner 16-241

----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
Verathon (CHS) Bladderscan Prime Plus
The Verathon BadderScan Prime Plus is a non-invasive bladder

scanner that measures the bladder volume and can calculate
3D volume. The Prime Plus provides optimal performance and
accurate results. The bladder scanner can provide both pre and
post-scan aim-assist. The BladderScan Prime Plus bladder
scanner has a color LCD touch screen that displays the patient
data, images, and graphics of the bladder as it is measured
through the ultrasonic beams. The system comes with two
USBs and an SD card slot, making it easy to store the patient's
data externally.
-ImageSense deep learning technology automatically calculates

3D volume.
-Enhanced EdgeScan off-center scan alerts.
-Pioneering pubic bone interference indicator.
-12 BMODE-slice review.
-No sonographer required.
-Time-saving, one-step automated volume results
Specifications:
Dimensions (Console)
H x W x D: 4.92” (12.5 cm) x 8.94” (22.7 cm) x 10.2” (25.9 cm)
Weight: 3.9 lbs (1.77 kg)
Screen Resolution: 1280 x 800 pixels
Dimensions (Probe)
H x W x D: 7.7” (19.6 cm) x 2.43” (6.2 cm) x 2.43” (6.2 cm)
Screen Resolution: 144 x 168 pixels
Cable: 1.8 m (6.0 ft)
Pow er
Input Voltage: 100 to 240 VAC 50/60 Hz 1.4 A max
Accuracy
Volume Range: 0 to 999 ml
Accuracy: Greater than 100 ml: ±7.5% 0 to 100 ml: ±7.5 ml
Battery
Type: Lithium-ion (Li-ion)
Charge Time: 2.5 Hours
Battery Life: More than 24 hours normal operation between
charges
Capacity: 4.6 Ah, 51 Wh
Nominal Voltage: 11.1v
https://www.verathon.com/bladderscan-prime-plus/
Nov 2021
BWM
Equipment Datasheet
Warmer, Blanket 10-414

-------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
Imperial Surgical OR 7xxx
----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
Steris AMSCO® Dual Compartment
----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
 Stainless steel cabinet to store blankets and

keep them warm for patient care
Specifications:
Dimensions and weight:
Small: W x D x H: 770 x 720 x 930 mm

Large: W x D x H: 770 x 720 x 1900 mm
 Small warmer will require a pedestal or
Weight: 220 Kg (empty) table or counter to be placed on
Electrical Requirements:
120 V AC, 60 Hz, 15 A
Final installation specifications are dependent upon selected supplier's shop drawings.

CC
Equipment Datasheet
Cart, Crash 10-647

----------------------------------------------- ------------------------------------------
Metro LECCRP5 Lifeline Crash Cart
---------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
Cart equipped with the following:

•LECCRP5 Lifeline Crash Cart w/
-Top Cavity Tray
-3" Drawer Divider Tray w/Dividers
-6" Drawer Divider Tray w/Dividers
-Locking Side Bins
-Single Glove Box Holder
-Cord Manager
-Adjustable Defibrillator Tray
-Suction Pump Shelf
-Backboard w/Front Assembly Kit
-IV Pole w/Cart Mount
-100 Plastic Security Seals
Extra Equipment
•Biphasic defibrillator
•Cardiac board
•Spoons
•Laryngoscope with blade size assortment
•Portable suction unit, battery and line powered
•Ambubags, pediatric & adult PMR2
Specifications: Installation Considerations:
Dimensions of carto22-5/8" W x 38" L x 42-1/8" H •See equipment #18-499 for Defibrillator and # 10-
215 for Suction unit.
•Cart to be easy to maneuver and able to support

defibrillator and Suction unit
Vendor Link:
https://metro.com/shop/metro-leccrp5-lifeline-crash-cart/
Sept 2021
CCA
Equipment Datasheet
Item Description: Equipment Number:
Cart, Cast 16-340.1

----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
Global Industrial
----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
Harloff
----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
Stevens
Further information:
• Lightw eight Aluminum Cart w ith
accessory panels used to store cast
equipment and accessories
Specifications:
W x D x H: 700 x 1000 x 1200 mm
Weight: 120 kg

CD
Equipment Datasheet
Dispensers, Detergent 39-726

----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
Diversey - Sealed Air (Lalema) QuattroSelectJ-Fill
----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
A close-looped system which dispenses four different J-Fill®
products
Features Include:
- Rugged steel doors with lockable cabinet doors (comes with

keys) and product identification windows. Drip tray with drain
hose and a remote high flow bucket / auto scrubber fill gun
- Built with one handed 1.5 GPM low flow and low foam bottle fill
- 8' 3.1 GPM high flow bucket fill hose with easy to use point of
use activation
- Smartvalve technology automatically chooses correct flow rate

in one operation
- SafeGap and Air Gap eductors meets ASSE 1055B standard

for back flow prevention
- Uses super-concentrated and hyper-concentrated chemicals,

reduces “in-use" cost and solid waste disposal. Spill-Tite
cartridges are leak proof and virtually eliminates chemical
exposure, tampering and manually diluting products
- For use in schools, office buildings, foodservice, hospitality,

industrial, retail stores and health care facilities
Specifications:
Dimensions (H x W x D): 24.25" x 18.5" x 7.5" (62cm x

47cm x 19 cm)
Flow : 1.5 gpm (low flow ) - 4 gpm (high flow )
Weight: 15 lb (6.8 kg)
Water In-Let Hose 4’ (1.22 m)

Remote Bucket Fill Hose 8’ (2.44 m) Installation Considerations:
Drip Tray Drainage Hose 8’ (2.44 m)
-Wall backing
Platform: J-fill -Hot and cold w ater supply protected by a separate RPBA
on each supply line
-Vacuum breaker is built into the faucet
-Use of w ater hammer arrestors
-Drainage piping should be sized adequately to take the
Vendor Link:
full discharge of the system
https://www.lalema.com/product/dilution-system-quattro-select-j- ** More information in Technical Bulletin (TB) 2021-02**
fill-32157
May 2022
Equipment Datasheet
Both the hot and cold water supply need a separate RPBA on each supply line. The vacuum
breaker must be built into the faucet to protect against back-siphonage from the hose connected
to the faucet.
An addition to the installation is the use of water hammer arrestors to help absorb shock from
potential hydraulic fluctuation.
The RPBA’s relief valve has the potential to discharge a significant amount of water. Care should
be taken as to its location and provision for indirect drainage. The drainage piping should be
sized adequately to take the full discharge of the system.
Larger Detergent/Soap Dispensing units which utilize hot and cold water should have each water
supply protected by an RPBA.
Pictured below is a Watts Reduced Pressure Backflow Assembly (RPBA)
For housekeeping rooms which have independent hot and cold supplies (where a hose has a
possibility of being connected). A Hose Bibb Vacuum Breaker should be installed on both the hot
and cold supplies to allow for adequate cross connection protection when a hose is connected.
May 2022
CM
Equipment Datasheet
Kitchenware, Coffee Maker GK-101

----------------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------------
Cuisinart CHW-12C
----------------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------------
• 12-Cup Carafe w ith a drip-free pour spout and a

handle
• Hot Water System
• Fully Automatic w ith 24-hour programmability, self-
clean function, auto shutoff, and 1 – 4 cup setting
• Carafe Temperature Control w ith High, Medium and
Low settings
• Brew Pause™ feature to have a cup of coffee
before the brew ing cycle has finished
• Removable Drip Tray
• Charcoal Water Filter and Gold Tone Filter
• Automatic Shut Off: Yes
• Brew Strength Selector: No
• Colour: Brushed Stainless
• Cone-Shaped Filter: Yes
• Cord Storage: No
• Cup Capacity: 12
• Dishw asher Safe Carafe: Yes
• Filter Holder Type: Lift Out
• Illuminated On/Off Sw itch: Yes
• Keep Warm Feature: Yes
• Programmable Clock/Timer: Yes
• Removable Water Reservoir: Yes
• Thermal Carafe: No
• Under-the-Cabinet Option: No
• Visible Water Level: Yes
• Warranty Labor 3 Year(s)
• Water Filter: Yes
Dimension and Weight

• Dimension (W x D x H) 10.25" X 9.50" X 14.30"
• 9.5 pounds
Electrical
• 110V 60Hz
January 2011
CSU
Equipment Datasheet
Carts, Central Supply, Linen/Laundry, Bulk (Soiled) 33-650.1

----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
Fibertech/Uline LT67/H-5201
----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
Further Description: Fibertech

Fibertech:
Benefits:
Durable, easy to clean, lightweight, rust resistant & great
mobility caster.
Standard Options:
Metal base, Hand holes, 6” Colson swivel/rigid non-marking
casters & drain holes. Other options are available.
Unline
Dependable workhorses for commercial laundries, hotels and
hospitals.
Tough polyethylene won't crack, dent or corrode. Hand grips for
easy transport.
Rust resistant, powder coated steel base provides added
support.
Bottom drain holes for efficient cleaning.
6" non-marking polyurethane casters: 2 swivel, 2 rigid.
Standard – Low cut front for complete accessibility
Specifications:
Uline
Fibertech:
LT67-HD:
Dimensions (L x W x H): 48” x 28 ½” x 67”
Capacity: 48 cu/ft 1,500 lbs 38 Bushels
Weight: 142 lbs
LT67:
Weight: 126 lbs
LLT67:
Weight: 117 lbs
Uline:
H-5201
Dimensions (L x W x H): 48” x 29” x 68”
Weight: 135 lbs

- Add min of 7” on each side of cart (left, right and back)
https://fibertechplastics.com/plastics/rolling-laundry-trucks/lt67- for easy placement of cart into the alcove
laundry-trucks/ - Alcove requires both upper and lower wall protection to
https://www.uline.ca/BL_1281/Poly-Bulk-Trucks prevent damages
Oct 2021
CSV
Equipment Datasheet
Saws, Cast, Electric 16-340

----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
American Orthopaedic (Cardinal) 0295-200/0295-400
----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
DeSoutter Medical CC5 System
----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
Further Description: American Orthopaedic (Cardinal)
Saw driven by electricity, designed to cut casts w ith

vacuum filtration system to remove particulates.
Includes: hand piece, a variety of blades, vacuum and
hose.
Specifications:
Am erican Orthopaedic (Cardinal)

Cast Cutter:
Electrical: 115 VAC 50/60 HZ
Cord Length: 10’ (305 cm)
Dust Vacuum :
Dimensions (W x L x H): 15” (38 cm) x 23” (58 cm) x
23.5”(60 cm)
Weight: 25 lbs. (11.3 kg) DeSoutter Medical
Hose Dimension: 10’ (305 cm) 1.25” ID (3 cm)
Electrical: 115 VAC 50/60 Hz 8.5 A
DeSoutter Medical
Handpiece
High oscillating speed: 16,000 cpm
Low oscillating speed: 11,800 cpm
Voltage: 22/29 Vdc
Weight: 850g
Sound level: 68 dB (A)
Length: 245 mm
Extractor
Motor pow er (max): 1 kW
Supply voltage: 240 or 100 - 120 Vac
Supply frequency: 50 - 60 Hz
Suction: 2,500 w ater gauge mm
Filtration: 99.997% >0.5 microns
Dust bag capacity: 7.5 litres
Sound level: 58 dB (A)

https://www.de-soutter.com/US-Products-power-tools-Cast-
Saw-Electric-CleanCast-CC5-system
Model numbers 0295-200/0295-400 searchable on Cardinal’s
Website
Dec 2021
CW
Equipment Datasheet
Carts, Central Supply, Linen-Laundry, Wire 15-888

----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
MIP Clean Linen Ward Carts
----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
• Welded steel structure w ithstands the rigors of a

healthcare environment
• Sturdy base supports bag frames and/or holds flat
folded linens
• 2 casters w ith brakes keep the cart stationary for safety
and convenience (See red arrow ), and 2 directional
casters facilitate steering (See green arrow )
• Bumper guards minimize w all damage
• Various sizes are available to accommodate your
unique linen handling needs
•Top shelf, bag frames, utility baskets, and PVC Cart
Covers and Mesh bags available
Specifications:
24” base unit (incl. casters) 26” W x 20” D x 41” H

24” top shelf (incl. 6” high shelf) 24” w x 12.5” D x 19” H

Bag Frame 10” W x 20” D x 18” H PVC Cart Cover Mesh Bags
Utility Basket options:
11” W x 5” D x 8” H
17” W x 5” D x 8” H
17” W x 9” D x 8” H
Lid for utility basket 16” W x 8” D
for clean scrubs; 18x30"

https://www.mip.ca/products/categories/carts-and-bags/clean-
linen-carts/clean-linen-carts.html?classid=75
Oct 2021
CW-LINEN
Equipment Datasheet
Carts, Central Supply, Linen/Laundry Bulk (Tow) 33-650

----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
EBCO Convertible Linen Carts
----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
-Durable and easy to use

-Corrosion resistant and long lasting
-Best utilized for linen distribution and collection
-Shelving able to fold dow n and turn cart into a bin
-Multiple configurations available.
Specifications:
Weight ~ 150 lb
Carrying Capacity: 500 lb +
Dimensions (D X W X H): 24” x 63” x 67.5” (other

dimensions available)
62.5L x 24W x 70H" (model

G7605-22-60-DS-DTB-A)
- Add min of 7” on each side of cart (left, right and back)
Vendor Link: for easy placement of cart into the alcove
- Alcove requires both upper and lower wall protection to
https://ebco.com/about-us/laundry-linen-carts/#! prevent damages
Oct 2021
CW-METRO
″ ″
″
Select Language Powered by
CWB
Equipment Datasheet
Container, Confidential Waste FH-111

----------------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------------
Rubbermaid Confidential Waste
----------------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------------
Global industrial Steel Secure Document Container
----------------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------------
Seton Canada Slim Jim Confidential Document Container
• Secure document containers provide secure storage
for confidential files w aiting to be shredded
Specifications:
Model Width Depth Height Volume

mm mm mm Capacity
gal
BRUTE 700 900 1160 95
BRUTE 650 830 1070 65
Metal Confidential 550 550 920 36
Nov 2021
ECG
Equipment Datasheet
ECG machine, portable 11-407

----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
GE Healthcare MAC VU360
----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
• Adjustable height trolley available– handle @ 35 in

(99 cm) - 41 in (104 cm)
• 15.6” LCD Adjustable Tilt Display
• Ethernet and w ireless netw orking options to connect
to GE/MUSE
• Bar code scanner
• 12SL ECG Analysis program w ith Gender-Specific
softw are
• 15-Lead ECG Analysis
• Optional stress testing capabilities
Specifications:
• Handle height: 36 in (91 cm)

• Maximum height: 57 in (145 cm)
• Width: 20.5 in (52 cm)
• Depth: 23.5 in (60 cm)
• Weight: 75.3 lbs. (34.2 kg)
• Pow er Supply: AC or battery operation
• Hot sw appable battery – 6 hours run time / 240 min
charge
• Voltage: 100 to 240 VAC +10, –15%; 1.5A @ 115
VAC
Vendor Link:
https://www.gehealthcare.com/products/diagnostic-ecg/resting-
ecg/mac- Installation Considerations:
vu360#:~:text=MAC%20VU360%20features%20the%20full,the Data
%20Zero%20Phase%20Distortion%20(ZPD) AC Pow er
April 2022
EL-B EL-M
Equipment Datasheet
Light, Exam, Portable 12-276.4

----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
Midmark Ritter 253 LED Exam Light
----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
The Ritter 253 is the versatile choice for having the right size of
light in the right place during exams. It can be mounted directly
to the exam chair. And its neutral color integrates seamlessly
with other products in the exam space.
Easy-to-use, easy-to-clean, durable and aesthetically pleasing—

the Ritter 253 exam light is designed to be the simple solution for
your exam lighting needs.
Cost-effective-lights are designed to consume 45-60% less

energy than other lights
Effortless-Flex arm design for easy positioning without drifting
Ergonomic-Controls conveniently located on the light head,

including power and focal spot adjustment, designed for ease of
use and proper ergonomics
Specifications:
Illumination At 16" (40.64 cm) Focal Length:
1,700 fc (18,298 lux) nominal
Color Temperature:
4,250 K to 4,750 K
Adj ustable Spot Size:
diameter: 4" (10 cm) to 12" (30 cm)
Light Head:
2" (5.08 cm) diameter; 5.32" (13.51 cm) long
Flex Arm:
54.5" (138 cm)
Diameter: 0.75" (1.90 cm)
Control Box:
Height: 4.75" (12.06 cm)
Width: 6.75" (17.15 cm)
Depth: 2.62" (6.65 cm
Mobile caster stand (only)
Caster base dia: 19" (48.26 cm)
Casters: (5) 2" (5.08 cm) dia.
Base tube: 29" (73.66 cm) from floor
Light Source:
single LED
Electrical:
110-240 VAC, 0.05-0.10 A, 50/60 Hz
Weight:
Light head/flex arm/control box unit: 3 lb (1.4 kg)
Light head/flex arm/control box/: caster base 12.2 lb (5.5 kg)
Vendor Link: -AC power outlet
https://www.midmark.com/medical/products/detail/ritter-253 -Wall backing (if wall mounted)
-Mounts to tables with a 2006 or newer manufacture date
Jan 2022
ET-P
Equipment Datasheet
Tables, Examination/Treatment 13-958

----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
Midmark (Stevens) Ritter 204
----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
Features Include:
-Removable Top system
-Enlarged Footstep
-Storage access and volume
-Easy to clean
-Spacious Side drawers that are a one piece seamless design
Options Include:
-Soft Touch, Seamless or Seamless UltraFree Upholstery
Options
-Pelvic tilt (1.5 degrees or 7 degrees)
-Drawer heater (45 W)*
Accessories Include:
-Knee crutches
-Lower body drain pan
-Stainless steel pan
-Assist handles
-Adjustable arm system
-Flat orthopedic upholstery
-Ritter 253 Exam light
-I Qvitals Table mount
Specifications:
Height w ith Upholstery:

Soft Touch Top -32.13" (81.6 cm)
Seamless Top -33.13" (84.2 cm)
Patient Weight Capacity: 500 lb(226.8 kg)
Electrical Receptacle: (115 VAC 5 A Max.)Duplex,

hospital grade electrical receptacle on left side
Soft Touch Upholstery Top: 30.5" W x 56" L (77.5 x

142.5 cm)
Paper Roll Holder: Holds 21" x 4.75" Paper Roll (53.3
cm x 12 cm)
Length w ith footrest extended: 73.75" (187.3 cm)
Seam less Upholstery Top: 28.5" W x 59.5" L (72.4 x

151.1 cm)
Paper Roll Holder: Holds 21" x 3.5" Paper Roll (53.3 cm
x 8.9 cm)
Length w ith Footrest extended: 76" (193 cm)
• Electrical receptacle on left side (115 VAC 5 AMPS Max.)

Vendor Link:
• Consider space for Drawer to be opened
https://www.midmark.com/medical/products/manual- • Power cord at the head of the bed
examination-tables/detail/ritter-204-examination-table • May be required floor mounting
Nov 2021
FR
Equipment Datasheet
Refrigerator, 23 Cu ft 22-028

----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
Whirlpool Bottom Freezer Refrigerator
----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
GE
----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
Samsung
• A general use refrigerator w ith built in

automatic defrost system w ith optional ice
maker
Frigidaire Whirlpool
Specifications:
W x D x H: 840 x 950 x 1780 mm

Weight: 120 kg
120 V AC, 60 Hz

FR-M
LRB05W1HC
MediLine
Undercounter Laboratory Refrigerator with Electronic Controls
Undercounter Laboratory LRB05W1HC

refrigerator MediLine
Total gross/net capacity l (cu.ft.) 142/133 (5.0/4.7)

Exterior dimensions in mm (w/d/h) 597/614/825
in inches (w/d/h) 23 9/16"/24 3/16"/32 1/2"
Interior dimensions in mm (w/d/h) 440/435/670
in inches (w/d/h) 17 3/8"/17 3/16"/26 7/16"
Energy consumption in 365 days * 261 kWh
Ambient temperature in °C (°F) 10°C to 35°C (50°F to 95°F)
Refrigerant R600a
Sound rating ** 52 dB(A) Unit Dimensions
Connection rating 1.5 A
Frequency/voltage 60 Hz/115V~
Cooling system forced-air
Defrost automatic
Temperature range in °C (°F) 3°C to 16°C (37°F to 61°F)
External cabinet finish steel/white
Door/lid material steel
Internal liner material commercial grade molded polystyrol
Type of control electronic control
Temperature display external digital
Alarm visual and audible
Alarm forwarding yes
Interior light LED ceiling light
Adjustable shelves 3
Shelf material wire shelves plastic-coated
Shelf load weight in kg (lbs) 45 (99.2)
Usable shelf area in mm (inches) 440/420 (17 3/8"/16 9/16")
Handle ergonomic slimline handle
Lock recessed
Self-closing door yes
Door hinges right, reversible on site
Insulation in mm (inches) 40 (1 5/8")
Gross/net weight in kg (lbs) 38/35 (83.8/77.2)
Subject to alterations.
Accessories
Shelf, plastic-coated 7112313
Additional lock barrels (up to 10) on request
* Measured unloaded at 26.6°C (80°F) ambient temperature with set point of 3.3°C (38°F).
** Noise level – sound power re 1pW – according to IEC 60704-2-14.
home.liebherr.com
FR-U
Equipment Datasheet
Refrigerator, 3 Cu.Ft, Under-counter 22-032.1

----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
DANBY DCR034W
----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
• Volume: 87.8 Liters (3.2 cu. ft.)
Specifications:
Dimensions:
• Width: 45 cm (18.5")
• Depth: 47 cm (19.25")
• Height: 83 cm (32.5")
Weight:
• Shipping Weight: 28.5 Kg (62.8 Lbs.)
Electrical: Installation Considerations:
• 120V 60Hz • Consider space for device ventilation
August 2010
GRB-W
Waste
Watcher
®
Series
An Icon in Recycling Equipment
Patent: US D670,766 S
Product Data Sheet | Version 1.0
Busch Systems International Inc.

81 Rawson Avenue, Barrie ON., Canada
1.800.565.9931
buschsystems.com
View the Waste Watcher® Series Online!

Waste Watcher® Series | Product Data Sheet

The iconic Waste Watcher® series is our most customizable recycling & waste station.
Since its launch in 2008, the Waste Watcher® continues to exceed expectations in regards
to increasing diversion rates, reducing contamination and lower operational costs.
As collection programs often vary and change from one location to the next — the
adaptable, multi-stream design of the Waste Watcher® has been expertly designed
to complement and shift with your program.
POPULAR SKU’S
100964 100988 100956 101323 101346
1-800-565-9931 buschsystems.com 81 Rawson Avenue, Barrie, Ontario, Canada L4N 6E5
Product Data Sheet Version 1.0 | August 12, 2021 Page 2

Build your Station

The Waste Watcher® series reduces the stress of adding or removing streams,
rearranging stations and making adjustments to your program. Being able to alter
your program to keep up with the demand of your evolving needs has never been
so easy!
1 + 2 + 3 + 4 Stream
Signage
ONE: THE BODY TWO: THE LID THREE: THE LABEL FOUR: OPTIONAL KITS
• 16 Gallon (24" High) • See lid opening • Choose from our • Sign Frame
• 20 Gallon (27" High) specifications for stock options or • Connector Kits
• 23 Gallon (30" High) available openings customize your own! • Wheel Dollies
• XL 24 Gallon (24" High)

BODY SPECIFICATIONS
Below are the available Body Options for the Waste Watcher® Collection. With this measurement guide you will find the right size Waste
Watcher® container to fit your space. The measurement guide is the essence of various standard measuring methods. All measurements
are in inches. Talk to your dedicated Busch Systems® sales representative for more information on how to choose the right size container for
your space.
16G / 24" 20G / 27" 23G / 30" 24G / 24" 28G / 27" 32G / 30"
W
D
Body Shape Height Width Depth Weight Capacity
16G/24" (Limited Stock) 24”H (609.6mm) 11”W (279.4mm) 20”D (508mm) 5.4lbs (2.45kg) 16 gal
23G/30" 30”H (762mm) 11.25”W (285.75mm) 21.25”D (539.75mm) 6.65lbs (3.02kg) 23 gal
*XL 24G/24" (Limited Stock) 24”H (609.6mm) 15.25”W (387.35mm) 21.25”D (539.75mm) 6.8lbs (3.08kg) 24 gal
XL 32G/30" 30”H (762mm) 15.5”D (393.7mm) 21.75”D (552.45mm) 8.4lbs (3.81kg) 32 gal
STOCK BODY COLORS
*Waste Watcher® XL 24G and 28G are only stocked in Grey.

Other stock colors are available on request with minimum order quantities.
Royal Dark Executive Black

Blue Green Grey

LID OPENING SPECIFICATIONS

The chart below outlines the available Lid Opening Options for each Waste Watcher® body as well as the associated opening dimensions. Be
sure to run a preliminary audit of the popular materials that are discarded where your Waste Watcher® containers will be placed. For example,
if you’re collecting large quantities of standard-sized Cans & Bottles, the Circle Opening is the ideal choice, as it will reduce contamination of
materials that are larger than the dimensions of the opening. If there is a blank cell on the body or lid style of your choice, this means there is
currently no stock option available. Talk to your dedicated Busch Systems® sales representative for more information.
Full Mixed Slot Circle Solid-Lift Vented-Lift Swing Diamond
Waste
Watcher®
Opening 1.75”W x 11.25”D

7.5”W x 12.5”D 1.75”W x 11.75”D 5”W x 5”D 7.5”W x 12.5”D 7.5”W x 12.5”D 6”W x 14.5”D 4.75”W x 4.75”D
Dimensions 5"W (circle)
Full Mixed Slot Circle Solid-Lift Vented-Lift
Waste
Watcher® XL

11.125”W x 12.5”D 1.75”W x 11.75”D 5.5”W x 5.5”D 7.5”W x 12.5”D 7.5”W x 12.5”D
STOCK LID COLORS
Royal Dark Executive Black Red* Yellow*

Blue Green Grey
*Available in select lids only.

PRODUCT ACCESSORIES
If you’re interested in maximizing the full potential of your Waste Watcher® containers, you can enhance the quality & performance and expand
the possibilities with top quality accessories that will add functionality and convenience with ease. These product accessories are designed to
help you get the most out of your recycling & waste management equipment. Busch Systems® offers a number of different accessories to add
convenience and portability.
To add movement to your Waste Watcher® station, consider the Busch Systems® professional quality wheel dollies that allow you to easily move
your station to a better location or for cleaning and maintenance. The unique expansion system allows you to add or remove sections, making
the dollies adapt to your Waste Watcher® stations with time.
For more customization, all of the Waste Watcher® collection bodies are compatible with a vast choice of customizable sign frame and signage
options that increase stream visibility.
SIGN FRAME CONNECTOR KIT WHEEL DOLLIES CARBON FILTER PACK
(fits 8.5” x 11” sign) (connect 2 units together) (available in all combinations) (3 pack of carob filters for vented-lift lid)
STOCK GRAPHICS
To clearly indicate streams, all signage is available in corresponding stream colors. Labels come standard with white printed on a clear
background. All signage and labels are able to be customized.
STOCK SIGNAGE
MIXED CANS &

RECYCLABLES BOTTLES PLASTIC PAPER COMPOST ORGANICS TRASH WASTE LANDFILL
STOCK LABELS
CANS & CANS GLASS, PLASTIC MIXED PAPER

BOTTLES CANS & PAPER
PLASTIC
COMPOST ORGANICS TRASH WASTE LANDFILL
*Grey represents clear. Clear will show color of lid. All other areas on labels are printed white.
NOTE: Because different computers, monitors, and printers render colors and textures differently, actual finishes may vary from those shown here.

IDEAL BAG SIZES
16G/24" 20G/27" 23G/30" XL 24G/24" XL 28G/27" XL 32G/30"
Ideal Bag Size

31 x 33 31 x 36 31 x 39 36 x 33 36 x 36 36 x 39
(inches)
MATERIAL & CONSTRUCTION DETAILS

Not all recycling & waste receptacles are created equal. Our company policy is never to compromise on our workmanship or the quality
material standards we’ve set. We only recommend and use quality first grade materials on our recycling & waste containers, and source these
from OEM’s at highly-competitive prices. Being a manufacturer that buys at high-quantities gives significant buying power with companies
which in turn saves you money.
The design process, materials used, finishes and manufacturing standards all affect the final product. Every decision is vital to getting the most
value for your investment. You deserve recycling & waste containers that meets your demands for quality and durability and will enhance your
working environment for years to come.
Component Material(s) Construction
• Bodies are molded from durable HDPE and

Body HDPE
contain up to 35% recycled content
• Bodies are molded from durable black HDPE and

XL Body (black) HDPE
100% Post Consumer Recycled content
• Lids are molded from durable HDPE and contain

Lids HDPE
up to 35% recycled content
• Sign frames are molded from durable lightweight

ABS plastic with strong impact & scratch resistance
Sign Frames ABS
Sign frames are easily snapped to pre-drilled
bodies (no tools required). Fits 8.5” x 11” signage.
Signage 100lb. Digital Cover Coated Paper • 30% PCW FSC®
• Fire-safe steel construction. Available in Single,

Wheel Dollies Powder Coated Steel
Double, Triple or Quad
• Connector Kits are molded from durable HDPE

Connector Kit HDPE
and contain up to 35% recycled content
ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS
• All Waste Watcher® Receptacles use a low energy, resource efficient manufacturing and curing process
• All Waste Watcher® receptacle components disassemble at end of life and are fully recyclable
• Low maintenance and extremely long service life
• Manufactured in North America
Post-Industrial Post-Consumer Total Recycled 3rd Party

Configurations
Recycled Content Recycled Content Content Certifications
Waste Watcher® Contact us Contact us Contact us -
Busch Systems® is dedicated to environmental responsibility. We maintain an Environmental Management System and are continually working
to improve our impact through efficiency, material selection, vendor education, employee involvement, and an unwavering commitment to
being a B-Corporation®. If you would like additional information on our product development process or if you don’t see the information you
need for your project on this page, please contact our Sustainability Team at sustainability@buschsystems.com.

LEAD TIME
Our standard lead times on stock SKU's for the Waste Watcher® Series are 3-5 days. Our standard lead times on large/custom orders for all
Waste Watcher® Series are 6-8 weeks. Please contact us to discuss your specific timing requirements.
PRICING
Please contact us at 800.565.9931 or sales@buschsystems.com. At Busch Systems®, we design, manufacture and sell our products directly
to you. Our sales team is available to assist you with questions about our products, requests for quotes, and orders. Vertical Managers are
located across North America to assist with the front-end specification and quoting process, and our in-house Project Sales Coordinators
follow your project through from the time you place an order to shipment.
TO ORDER PLEASE SPECIFY

Quantity, body model, lid model, label choice and any optional product accessories. Talk to your dedicated Busch Systems® sales representative
for more information. If you do not have a dedicated Sales Representative please contact us via our website at buschsystems.com/contact-us/
INSTALLATION
For quick access and video instruction on installation of your Waste Watcher Series containers, visit:
https://www.buschsystems.com/blog/product-guides/waste-watcher-series-installation-ongoing-care-guide/
Busch Systems® Waste Watcher® containers are hassle-free when it comes to installation. Each container is individually boxed using cardboard
with high recycled content and each associated lid is boxed within the container box to ensure safe transport.
TO INSTALL YOUR WASTE WATCHER® CONTAINERS:

1. Unbox the body and lid components
2. Insert the recycling/waste bag into the body and wrap the top edge of the bag around the body
3. Place the lid on top of the body
CARE & MAINTENANCE

Advantages of Busch Systems HDPE & LDPE receptacles include:
• Great low temperature impact resistance and excellent chemical resistance
• Great high temperature impact resistance
• Lower stiffness rating which reduces potential for stress cracking
• High strength-to-density ratio
Their appearance and lifespan will be greatly affected by their care. The frequency of cleaning required depends on the environment in
which the containers are used. Outdoor containers will be subject to different environmental conditions than indoor units, i.e. sun, rain,
wind, pollution, winter temperatures, and salt/sea air.
To avoid the accumulation of dirt and grime on your Busch Systems products, and help prevent corrosion, we recommend that a mild detergent
be used (not an abrasive), such as a pH-neutral liquid (hand dishwashing or hand car washing soaps, for example) diluted in warm water.
Rinse well with clean water. Any dirt adhering to the powder coating should be removed. In order to remove deposits such as salt or dust, use
a soft brush (non-abrasive). If this is not sufficient to remove stubborn soiling, the following products have been tested for use:
• Ajax Cream • Flash (in water) • Cutting compound (‘T. Cut’) Note: Always test soaps/cleaners on a
• Liquid Gumption • Ajax Liquid (in water) hidden and/or small area beforehand
If solvents are absolutely needed to remove marks, a soft cloth dampened with white spirit may be used.
GENERAL CARE
• Clean with a power washer or light scrub brush (outdoor/municipal bins)
• Clean with a mild detergent with damp sponge or cloth (indoor/office bins)
• For soil and stain remover, cleaners like Fantastik, Armor All or Acetone may be tried
• UV safe cleaners MUST be used on all outdoor bins
THINGS TO AVOID
• Cleaners with chloride or bleach • Abrasive detergents

• Solvents • Steel wool or Scouring pads

Contact Us Today for a Quote on Your Waste Watcher® Station!
buschsystems.com | 1.800.565.9931
HS-S
Isolation Personal Protective Equipement Dispenser
Scalable and adaptable modular systems
HAND HYGIENE MOBILE STATION AND COMMUNICATION

MODEL #B
Bidirectional Mobile Hygiene Station
for the distribution of products
and the procedure to follow.
Product Description:
• Basic Hand Hygiene Mobile Station and Communication

• Most often used for entrances.
• Move the station to the entrance of a risk area.
Switch Incoming and Outgoing messages with
relevant messages about conditions in the area.
Dispenses
• Incoming and outgoing messages

Messages • Masks
and dispenser • Hydro Alcoholic Solution
on both sides. • Flyer
• Recovers Masks to the exit.
Mounting Specifications
• Magnetic stops held on the vertical post.

-Two magnetic strips glued on the stop vertically
1 '' / 2,54cm X 18 '' / 45,72cm
Two (2)
magnetic • Any other dispensor or accessory
octagonal signs -Self piercing screw
included with
the purchase
of a model B
station Mounting Specifications
Also sold
separately Carbon steel column 12 gauge
• Height : 6'. (1,83m)

• Dimension : 3'' x 1.5'' (7,6 cm x 3,2 cm) welded to station footing
73''
185cm Stable footing
• 1'' in. carbon steel base plate with rounded corners;

• Dimension 16'' x 16'' x 1''; 78 lb (40,6 cm x 40,6 cm x 2,54 cm; 35 kg)
• 4 anti-skidding, scratch proof rubber feet (dia. 2''; 5,08cm);
• Rubber wheels (2) welded to one side for easy maneuvering
• All steel surfaces coated with electrostatic application of thermoplastic

powder High temperature thermal baking Glass-like, glossy white finish
resistant to corrosion and impacts.
Configured in accordance with your need.
Call us toll free for a quote : 1-877-782-3017

or write us at : info@medicacces.com
Consumable items are for demonstration purposes only and are not available for purchase through Médic Accès.
All rights, including copyright, in the materials and information contained on this site are the property of Médic Accès inc. unless otherwise noted.
All trademarks belong to their respective owners.
Isolation Personal Protective Equipement Dispenser
Scalable and adaptable modular systems
The reference in health care facilities in Canada.

Since 2007, more than 5,000 units sold from coast to coast.
Complete stability and security
The mobile station conceived for maximum stability and safety.
The antiseptic gel obtained by depressing the lever of a pump dispenser; existing dispensers
vary significantly among manufacturers.
Regardless of the amount of pressure required to activate the gel dispensers, station stability
is achieved at all times due largely to the steel footing (35,4 kg, 78 lbs) installed at the base
of the station for the conservation of inertia and safety.
The steel footing resides on top of four non-slip polymer pads which, combined to the base
inertia, provide anti-skid properties even on very smooth floor surfaces.Moreover, the vertical
steel post has continuous weld at an angle to provide the station with optimal stability when dispensers
are activated.
Mobility
The entire assembly becomes mobile and may be easily moved around by maintenance personnel
or in an emergency by simply tilting the station on its side where 2 cart wheels are attached.
Robust and durable
The carbon steel vertical post is extremely robust and presents properties that softer
aluminum can never match.
In our experience, using auto tapping screws will provide a long lasting and secure contact between the
steel and most gel dispensers available on the market.
All steel surfaces coated with white electrostatic powder without solvent and cured by thermal baking to
provide exterior-grade resistance.
Interchangeable information display
Signage displays are cut from plastic styrene polymer. High definition printing uses anti-UV base ink
pigments directly transferred onto styrene which is sandwiched in a final transparent protective liquid film.
Displays resist to repeated disinfectant treatment and offer excellent durability.

The styrene displays are fitted with two magnets strips; the magnet that maintains contact to the station
steel post and allows rapid switching whenever a new message/display is required in response to
any situation.
We convinced that the mobile hand hygiene station is a high-quality apparatus which will
provide complete satisfaction in PPE dispensing as well as timely information for procedures
in infection control for many years ahead.
Call us toll free for a quote : 1-877-782-3017

or write us at : info@medicacces.com
Consumable items are for demonstration purposes only and are not available for purchase through Médic Accès.
All rights, including copyright, in the materials and information contained on this site are the property of Médic Accès inc. unless otherwise noted.
All trademarks belong to their respective owners.
IP
Equipment Datasheet
Pump, Infusion, Multitherapy 13-215

----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
CareFusion (BD) Alaris
----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
Intended to be used in professional healthcare facilities

that utilize infusion devices for the delivery of fluids,
medications, blood, and blood products.
Up to 4 modules that can be attached to the main PC
unit (Pump/Syringe/PCA/EtCo2/Auto-ID)
Wirelessly transmits key drug and IV therapy data using

Alaris™ Guardrails™ Suite MX softw are
Guardrails Suite MX includes pow erful analytic softw are

to help identify trends in IV formulary data to help
optimize patient care
Specifications:
PC Unit Dim ensions:

6.9" W x 8.8" H x 9" D (including pole clamp) PC
Pum p Dim ensions:
3.3" W x 8.9" H x 5.5" D
Syringe Dim ensions:
4.5" W x 15.0" H x 7.5" D
PCA Dim ensions:
4.5" W x 15.0" H x 7.5" D (exclusive of security door)
SpO2/EtCo2 Dim ensions:
3.3" W x 8.9" H x 5.5" D
Auto ID Module Dim ensions:
2.0" W x 7.25" H x 5.0" D
Handheld Scanner Dim ensions:
3.25" W x 7.25" H x 4.25" L
Weight:
7.2 lb (PC only) Max Weight 27.5 lb
Electrical:
100 - 240V ~, 50/60 Hz, 150 VA MAX
Vendor Link: • Wireless Considerations
https://www.bd.com/en-us/offerings/capabilities/infusion- • Wireless Network (for Alaris) [Requires: Server and
Network configuration]
therapy/infusion-system-devices/alaris-pc-unit
• Essential Power
Oct 2021
IV
Equipment Datasheet
Pole, IV, Mobile 12-177

----------------------------------------------- ------------------------------------------
Pryor Products Patient Pal I.V. Stand 115
---------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
-6-leg
-Low -center-of-gravity steel base w ith epoxy finish
-3″ premium rubber casters w ith ball bearings (10 yr.
w arranty)
-Welded steel base pole w ith epoxy finish Slow -
descending stainless telescoping top pole
-4 hook top Patient support w heel and utility tray
Specifications:
99″ fully extended;

68″ compressed
Shipping box is 23″ x 20″ x 35″;
Shipping w eight is 35 lbs
22″ diameter base
https://pryorproducts.com/product/i-v-stand-115/
Oct 2021
KT
Equipment Datasheet
Kitchenware, Kettle, Electric GK-106

----------------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------------
Toastess Delfino DLJK-459
----------------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------------
• 1.98 Liters
• Concealed elements
• Lid snaps tight into place for safe use
• 3 level automatic safety system:

o Auto boil and off sw itch
o Kettle shuts off if plugged in dry
o Kettle shuts off w hen lifted off the round
pow er base
Specifications:
Dimension and Weight
• 15 x 7.5 x 9.5 inches
• 3.2 pounds
Electrical
• 110V 60Hz, 1500W
January 2011
LH
Equipment Datasheet
Linen Hamper 15-838

----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
ACART/ Global Industrial 682-684-686/ Chrome Hamper Stand
-------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
Further Description: ACART

ACART
•Constructed from high quality 7/8” tubular steel with bright
chrome finish
• Leakproof bags are fully welded to contain fluids and feature
hooded design for proper transportation
• White ABS high impact, crack resistant lids standard
• 4” non-marking industrial strength casters - 2 w/ brakes
•Multiple bag and lid options
Global Industrial
• Hamper stand offers superior performance and an easy way to
transport large bags of linens and other laundry
•Chrome plated steel is sturdy and easy to maintain
•Hands-free foot pedal raises the white, poly-coated steel lid for
easy access
• Includes hamper bag storage pouch
•Hampers easily move with 3" swivel casters, 2 locking
•Supports 36-42 gallon bags (not included), optional nylon
hamper bag is available
Specifications:
ACART
Single
Dimensions (L”xW”xH” )18.5 x 21.5 x 37.5\
Weight 31 lb Global Industrial
Double
Dimensions (L”xW”xH” )37.5 x 21.5 x 37.5
Weight 46
Triple
Dimensions (L”xW”xH” )55.5 x 21.5 x 37.5
Weight 63
Global Industrial
Lid Dimensions: 19"W x 19-1/2"D
Overall Height: 38"H
Base Dimensions: 16-1/2"W x 19-1/2"D
Unit Weight: 22 lbs.

https://acart.ca/products/linen-
hamper?_pos=1&_sid=89d930b1b&_ss=r
https://www.globalindustrial.ca/p/global-153-chrome-hamper-
stand-with-foot-pedal-poly-coated-steel-lid?ref=42
Oct 2021
LSU
Equipment Datasheet
Suction, portable 10-215

----------------------------------------------- ------------------------------------------
Laerdal LSU (Laerdal Suction Unit)
---------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
Key Features (All Versions):
-One-hand-grip design
-2 canister options:
Serres Suction Bag Canister system
Laerdal Reusable Canister system
-Easy to convert between the canister systems
-Does not contain latex
-Big v acuum regulator dial
-Suction lev els for tracheal suctioning and suctioning of children and
inf ants marked in light blue
-LED display for use day or night
-TEST - Dev ice Diagnostics program
-Approximate noise levels at 80 mmHg of 48 dBA and 500+ mmHg of 56
dBA (f ree air f low)
-No-tools-necessary field changeable battery
-Rechargeable Battery, NiMH, 12 VDC 2 Ah
-External Battery Charger
-12V DC Power-cord f or connection to vehicle connection
-5 y ear limited warranty (excluding the canisters, tubing systems and
battery )
-Serres f ilter filters aerosols down to 0.4μm
-LSU Reusable aerosol filter filters aerosols down to 0.3μm
Product Versions:
LSU with Reusable Canister system
In this suction system the canister and tubing are reusable.
LSU with Serres Suction Bag Canister system
The LSU with Serres canister and suction bag is a semi-disposable
sy stem
Specifications:
•Operating/Charging Temperature 0° C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F)

•Recommended Charging Temperature 15° C to 25 °C (59 °F to 77 °F)
•Long term Storage Temperature 0° C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F)
•Max. 24 hour Storage Temperature -30° C to 70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)
•Minimum suction 80 mmHg (110 BAR)
•Maximum suction 550 mmHg (733 BAR)
•The degree of protection provided by the chassis according to IP34
•Size: 315 mm (12,4 in) x 330 mm (13 in) x 160 mm (6,3 in), (h x w x d)
•Weight 4kg (8.4 lbs) including battery NiMH
•Canister Capacity: 1000 ml.
•Patient Suction Tubing (non-sterile) 8 mm (0.315 in.) inside diameter x
1.5 m (59 in.) length.
•Electrical: AC 100-240 VAC, 50-60 Hz DC 12-28 VDC

https://laerdal.com/ca/products/medical-devices/airway- Wall mounted bracket require wall backing
management/laerdal-suction-unit-lsu/ An electrical wall outlet should be less than 1meter away from the bracket
Sept 2021
MW
Equipment Datasheet
Microwave, Commercial GK-100

----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
Panasonic NE-1054
----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
• Commercially graded microw ave w ith

programmable menu items simplifies cooking
and ensures consistent results.
• Electrical outlet to be placed behind the

Specifications: microw ave
Dim ensions:
W x D x H: 510 x 400 x 300 mm
120 V AC, 60 Hz, 15 A

OXY
Equipment Datasheet
Gas Cylinder Stand/Holders 11-838

----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
WT Farley
----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
Holders and stands used to hold cylinders of compressed

gas (e.g., oxygen, air, helium) to prevent the cylinders
from falling or to hold them stationary in a convenient
location
Specifications:
Many options available, ones pictured in cut sheet
Deluxe E Cylinder Patient Cart

38" to 42" T x 12" W x 12" D (965-1067mm x 305mm x
305mm)
Holds single E or D size cylinder 4.38" diameter
12 E Cylinder Cart
16" W x 21" D x 39" H (406 mm x 533 mm x 991 mm)
Holds 12 E or D size cylinder 4.38" diameter
6 E Cylinder Rack
11" W x 16" D x 15" H (279 mm x 406 mm x 381 mm)
Holds 6 E, D, C, or M9 size cylinders
56 M6 Cylinder Stacker
26" W x 32" D x 24" T (660 mm x 813 mm x 610 mm)
Holds 56 M6 size cylinders 3.25" Diameter
CR-WM4E Version
19.25” W x 13.5” T x 5” D (489 mm x 343 mm x 127 mm)
Holds 4 E or D Cylinder 4.38” Diameter

https://www.wtfarley.com/cylinder-carts-racks-holders
Wall backing if attached to w all
Dec 2021
RC-16
RC-20
Waste
Watcher
®
Series
Patent: US D670,766 S

1.800.565.9931
buschsystems.com
View the Waste Watcher® Series Online!


The iconic Waste Watcher® series is our most customizable recycling & waste station.
Since its launch in 2008, the Waste Watcher® continues to exceed expectations in regards
to increasing diversion rates, reducing contamination and lower operational costs.
As collection programs often vary and change from one location to the next — the
adaptable, multi-stream design of the Waste Watcher® has been expertly designed
to complement and shift with your program.
POPULAR SKU’S
100964 100988 100956 101323 101346

Build your Station

The Waste Watcher® series reduces the stress of adding or removing streams,
rearranging stations and making adjustments to your program. Being able to alter
your program to keep up with the demand of your evolving needs has never been
so easy!
1 + 2 + 3 + 4 Stream
Signage
ONE: THE BODY TWO: THE LID THREE: THE LABEL FOUR: OPTIONAL KITS
• 16 Gallon (24" High) • See lid opening • Choose from our • Sign Frame
• 20 Gallon (27" High) specifications for stock options or • Connector Kits
• 23 Gallon (30" High) available openings customize your own! • Wheel Dollies

BODY SPECIFICATIONS
Below are the available Body Options for the Waste Watcher® Collection. With this measurement guide you will find the right size Waste
Watcher® container to fit your space. The measurement guide is the essence of various standard measuring methods. All measurements
are in inches. Talk to your dedicated Busch Systems® sales representative for more information on how to choose the right size container for
your space.
16G / 24" 20G / 27" 23G / 30" 24G / 24" 28G / 27" 32G / 30"
W
D
RC-16 RC-20
23G/30" 30”H (762mm) 11.25”W (285.75mm) 21.25”D (539.75mm) 6.65lbs (3.02kg) 23 gal
XL 32G/30" 30”H (762mm) 15.5”D (393.7mm) 21.75”D (552.45mm) 8.4lbs (3.81kg) 32 gal
STOCK BODY COLORS
*Waste Watcher® XL 24G and 28G are only stocked in Grey.

Other stock colors are available on request with minimum order quantities.
Royal Dark Executive Black

Blue Green Grey


The chart below outlines the available Lid Opening Options for each Waste Watcher® body as well as the associated opening dimensions. Be
sure to run a preliminary audit of the popular materials that are discarded where your Waste Watcher® containers will be placed. For example,
Full Mixed Slot Circle Solid-Lift Vented-Lift Swing Diamond
Waste
Watcher®

7.5”W x 12.5”D 1.75”W x 11.75”D 5”W x 5”D 7.5”W x 12.5”D 7.5”W x 12.5”D 6”W x 14.5”D 4.75”W x 4.75”D
Full Mixed Slot Circle Solid-Lift Vented-Lift
Waste
Watcher® XL

11.125”W x 12.5”D 1.75”W x 11.75”D 5.5”W x 5.5”D 7.5”W x 12.5”D 7.5”W x 12.5”D
STOCK LID COLORS
Royal Dark Executive Black Red* Yellow*

Blue Green Grey
*Available in select lids only.

PRODUCT ACCESSORIES
If you’re interested in maximizing the full potential of your Waste Watcher® containers, you can enhance the quality & performance and expand
the possibilities with top quality accessories that will add functionality and convenience with ease. These product accessories are designed to
help you get the most out of your recycling & waste management equipment. Busch Systems® offers a number of different accessories to add
convenience and portability.
To add movement to your Waste Watcher® station, consider the Busch Systems® professional quality wheel dollies that allow you to easily move
your station to a better location or for cleaning and maintenance. The unique expansion system allows you to add or remove sections, making
the dollies adapt to your Waste Watcher® stations with time.
For more customization, all of the Waste Watcher® collection bodies are compatible with a vast choice of customizable sign frame and signage
SIGN FRAME CONNECTOR KIT WHEEL DOLLIES CARBON FILTER PACK
(fits 8.5” x 11” sign) (connect 2 units together) (available in all combinations) (3 pack of carob filters for vented-lift lid)
STOCK GRAPHICS
To clearly indicate streams, all signage is available in corresponding stream colors. Labels come standard with white printed on a clear
STOCK SIGNAGE
MIXED CANS &

RECYCLABLES BOTTLES PLASTIC PAPER COMPOST ORGANICS TRASH WASTE LANDFILL
STOCK LABELS
CANS & CANS GLASS, PLASTIC MIXED PAPER

BOTTLES CANS & PAPER
PLASTIC
COMPOST ORGANICS TRASH WASTE LANDFILL
*Grey represents clear. Clear will show color of lid. All other areas on labels are printed white.

IDEAL BAG SIZES
16G/24" 20G/27" 23G/30" XL 24G/24" XL 28G/27" XL 32G/30"
Ideal Bag Size

31 x 33 31 x 36 31 x 39 36 x 33 36 x 36 36 x 39
(inches)

• Bodies are molded from durable HDPE and

Body HDPE
• Bodies are molded from durable black HDPE and

XL Body (black) HDPE
• Lids are molded from durable HDPE and contain

Lids HDPE
up to 35% recycled content
• Sign frames are molded from durable lightweight

ABS plastic with strong impact & scratch resistance
Sign Frames ABS
Sign frames are easily snapped to pre-drilled
bodies (no tools required). Fits 8.5” x 11” signage.
• Fire-safe steel construction. Available in Single,

Wheel Dollies Powder Coated Steel
Double, Triple or Quad
• Connector Kits are molded from durable HDPE

Connector Kit HDPE
and contain up to 35% recycled content
• All Waste Watcher® Receptacles use a low energy, resource efficient manufacturing and curing process
• All Waste Watcher® receptacle components disassemble at end of life and are fully recyclable

Configurations
Waste Watcher® Contact us Contact us Contact us -

LEAD TIME
Our standard lead times on stock SKU's for the Waste Watcher® Series are 3-5 days. Our standard lead times on large/custom orders for all
Waste Watcher® Series are 6-8 weeks. Please contact us to discuss your specific timing requirements.
PRICING

INSTALLATION
For quick access and video instruction on installation of your Waste Watcher Series containers, visit:
https://www.buschsystems.com/blog/product-guides/waste-watcher-series-installation-ongoing-care-guide/
Busch Systems® Waste Watcher® containers are hassle-free when it comes to installation. Each container is individually boxed using cardboard
with high recycled content and each associated lid is boxed within the container box to ensure safe transport.
TO INSTALL YOUR WASTE WATCHER® CONTAINERS:

2. Insert the recycling/waste bag into the body and wrap the top edge of the bag around the body
CARE & MAINTENANCE

Advantages of Busch Systems HDPE & LDPE receptacles include:
• Great low temperature impact resistance and excellent chemical resistance
• Great high temperature impact resistance
• Lower stiffness rating which reduces potential for stress cracking
• High strength-to-density ratio
Their appearance and lifespan will be greatly affected by their care. The frequency of cleaning required depends on the environment in
which the containers are used. Outdoor containers will be subject to different environmental conditions than indoor units, i.e. sun, rain,
wind, pollution, winter temperatures, and salt/sea air.
To avoid the accumulation of dirt and grime on your Busch Systems products, and help prevent corrosion, we recommend that a mild detergent
be used (not an abrasive), such as a pH-neutral liquid (hand dishwashing or hand car washing soaps, for example) diluted in warm water.
Rinse well with clean water. Any dirt adhering to the powder coating should be removed. In order to remove deposits such as salt or dust, use
a soft brush (non-abrasive). If this is not sufficient to remove stubborn soiling, the following products have been tested for use:
• Ajax Cream • Flash (in water) • Cutting compound (‘T. Cut’) Note: Always test soaps/cleaners on a
• Liquid Gumption • Ajax Liquid (in water) hidden and/or small area beforehand
GENERAL CARE
• Clean with a power washer or light scrub brush (outdoor/municipal bins)
• Clean with a mild detergent with damp sponge or cloth (indoor/office bins)
• For soil and stain remover, cleaners like Fantastik, Armor All or Acetone may be tried
• UV safe cleaners MUST be used on all outdoor bins
THINGS TO AVOID
• Cleaners with chloride or bleach • Abrasive detergents

• Solvents • Steel wool or Scouring pads

Contact Us Today for a Quote on Your Waste Watcher® Station!
RCL
Equipment Datasheet
Furniture, Chair, Recliner (Lumex) FS-108

----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
Lumex Deluxe Clinical Care Recliner
----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
• The unique patent pending recline mechanism enables the

patient to position the back from TV position to full recline.
The w ide, contoured seat and back, along w ith an integrated
footrest, provide an enhanced level of comfort. Built-in arm
pads in the back give improved support for the arms w hile in
Trendelenburg. Wall saver armrest caps increase durability
of the armrests and protect w alls from marring.
•Higher floor to back height enables the caregiver to raise
the patient up w ith less effort, reducing the chance for a back
injury.
• Extra deep Trendelenburg position- steeper angle improves
patient stabilization.
* Four Tente® sw ivel casters facilitate transport and
maneuverability in confined areas. Left and right rear top-
locking casters provide positive lock. Directional w heel lock
on right rear caster reduces "crabbing" of recliner and
enables the chair to be moved dow n hallw ays with less
effort.
• Durable, high-impact side tables sit flush w ith chair arm to
conveniently hold prep materials. Easy to actuate by
caregiver.
• Extra heavy duty recliner mechanism.
• Weight bearing capacity: 350 Pounds.
Specifications
Overall Height...................... 50"
Overall Width.......................31"
Overall Depth.......................43"
Width betw een Arms...........21"
Arm Height from Floor.....27.5"
Arm Height from Seat...........8"
Seat Height..........................22"
Seat Width........................20.5"
Seat Depth...........................20"
Depth Fully Reclined
In Trendelenburg .................75"
Width w ith Both Side Tables
In Upright Position ...............51"
Shipping Weight............ 145 Ib
Max. Weight Capacity..... 350 Ib

Further information with Equipment Planning
Dec 2021
© Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. 2019. All rights reserved. Reproduction in whole or in part is prohibited without prior written consent of the copyright holder.
Rev.
Date
THIS SHEET IS PART OF THE DOCUMENT SET LISTED ON SHEET C1 AND SHOULD NOT BE SEPARATED.
www.healthcare.philips.com
Revision History
Revision Descriptions
Note for Architects and/or Contractors: If revisions are listed, these drawings must be thoroughly reviewed so that all changes can be incorporated into your project
*Photo shown is not site specific.
By
Section A - Equipment Plan
Table of Contents
Equipment Layout --------------------------------- A2

General Notes ----------------------------------------- AN
Ceiling Height Guide -------------------------- A3

Site Layout ---------------------------------------- A1
RUD
Project Details Philips Contacts Project

Drawing Number Project Manager: Diaa El Gherissy High Performance Room
N-CAN220155 Contact Number: +1 (306) 2162558 DigitalDiagnost C90 VS
Date Drawn: 12/8/2022 Email: diaa.rahman@philips.com RICHMOND HOSPITAL THE
C1
Quote: Q-00128598 Richmond, BC

Order: None Drawn By: David Olivares Room:4504
5.3.2021
THE INFORMATION IN THIS PACKAGE IS PROVIDED AS A CUSTOMER CONVENIENCE, AND IS NOT TO BE CONSTRUED AS ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS OR CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS.
Philips assumes no liability nor offers any warranty for the fitness or adequacy of the premises or the utilities available at the premises in which the equipment is to be installed, used, or stored.
General Specifications Minimum Site Preparation Requirements HVAC Requirement for General Equipment Locations
1. Responsibility A smooth efficient installation is vital to Philips and their customers. Understanding what the Heating, ventilation, air conditioning requirement for general equipment locations must
The customer shall be solely responsible, at its expense for preparation of site, including any minimum site preparation requirements are will help achieve this goal. The following list maintain temperature at 75° +/- 11°Fahrenheit (24° +/- 6°Celsius) and non-condensing relative
required structural alterations. The site preparation shall be in accordance with plans and clearly defines the requirements which must be fulfilled before the installation can begin. humidity at 52.5%, +/- 22.5%.
specifications provided by Philips. Compliance with all safety electrical and building codes (13.0)
relevant to the equipment and its installation is the sole responsibility of customer. The 1. Walls shall be painted or covered, baseboards installed, floors shall be tiled and/or
customer shall advise Philips of conditions at or near the site which could adversely affect the covered, ceiling shall have grid tiles and lighting fixtures installed and operational.
carrying out of the installation work and shall ensure that such conditions are corrected and
that the site is fully prepared and available to Philips before the installation work is due to 2. Doors and windows, especially radiation protection barriers, installed and finished with
Electrical Requirements
begin. The customer shall provide all necessary plumbing, carpentry work, or conduit wiring lock sets operational.
required to attach and install products ready for use. M-Cabinet CXA 65
3. All electrical convenience, conduit, raceway, knockouts, cable openings, chase nipples,
2. Permits and junction boxes installed and operational. Supply Configuration: 3 phase, 3 wire power, neutral and ground. Wye.
Customer shall obtain all permits and licenses required by federal, state/provincial or local or
authorities in connection with the construction, installation and operation of the products and 4. Incoming mains power operational and connected to room x-ray breaker. 3 phase, 3 wire power, ground. Delta.
related rules, regulations, shall bear any expense in obtaining same or in complying with any
ordinances and statutes. 5. 115v convenience outlets operational. Nominal Line Voltage: 400, 440, 460 or 480 VAC, 60 Hz
3. Radiation Protection 6. All support structure correctly installed. All channels, pipes, beams and/or other Branch Power Requirement: 112.5 kVA minimum
The customer or his contractor, at his own expense, shall obtain the service of a licensed supporting devices should be level, parallel, and free of lateral or longitudinal movements.
radiation physicist to specify radiation protection. (X-Ray Tube output 150 KVp max.) Circuit Breaker: 3 pole, 50 Amps (@ 480V) (Slow Blow)
7. All contractor-supplied cables pulled and terminated.
Residual Current Device to be installed
4. Asbestos and Other Toxic Substances
Philips assumes no hazardous waste (i.e., PCB's in existing transformers) exists at the site. If 8. A dust-free environment in and around the procedure room. depending on local regulations.
(19.0)
any hazardous material is found, it shall be the sole responsibility of the customer to properly
remove and dispose of this material at its expense. Any delays caused in the project for this 9. All HVAC (heating, ventilating and air conditioning) installed and operational as per
special handling shall result in Philips time period for completion being extended by like period specifications. BTUs shown on sheet A1 are average heat capacity.
RICHMOND HOSPITAL THE

of time. Philips assumes that no asbestos material is involved in this project in any ceilings,
walls or floors. If any asbestos material is found anywhere on the site, it shall be the 10. Architectural features such as computer floor, wood floor, casework, bulkheads, installed
High Performance Room

DigitalDiagnost C90 VS
customer's sole responsibility to properly remove and/or make safe this condition, at the and finished. When technical cabinets are installed in a closet with doors, it is suggested
customer's sole expense. that the customer install a temperature alarm in the event of an air conditioner failure.
5. Labor 11. All plumbing installed and finished.

In the event local labor conditions make it impossible or undersirable to use Philips' regular
Richmond, BC
employees for such installation and connection, such work shall be performed by laborers 12. Philips does not install or connect developing tanks, automatic processors or associated
supplied by the customer, or by an independent contractor chosen by the customer at the equipment, built in illuminators, cassette pass boxes, loading benches and cabinets, lead
Room:4504
customer's expense, and in such case, Philips agrees to furnish adequate engineering protective screens, panels or lead glass window and frame. This is to be done by the
supervision for proper completion of the installation. customer/contractor.
Project
6. Schedule 13. Refer to Transport Information page for clear door openings and corridor widths.
The general contractor should provide Philips with a schedule of work to assist in the
coordination of delivery of Philips supplied products which are to be installed by the contractor Note
and delivery of the primary equipment. Once Philips has moved equipment into the suite and started the installation, the contractor
shall schedule his work around the Philips installation team on site. It is suggested that a
7. Extended Installation or Turnkey Work by Philips telephone be provided in the room to receive telephone calls. This would alleviate facility staff
Contact Number: +1 (306) 2162558

Project Manager: Diaa El Gherissy
Any room preparation requirements for Philips equipment indicated on these drawings is the from answering calls for Philips personnel.
Email: diaa.rahman@philips.com
responsibility of the customer. If an extended installation or turnkey contract exists between
Philips and the customer for room preparation work required by the equipment represented on Remote Service Diagnostics
Drawn By: David Olivares

these drawings, some of the responsibilities of the customer as depicted in these drawings Medical imaging equipment to be installed by Philips Healthcare is equipped with a service
may be assumed by Philips. In the event of a conflict between the work described in the diagnostic feature which allows for remote and on site service diagnostics. To establish this
Philips Contacts
turnkey contract workscope and these drawings, the turnkey contract workscope shall govern. feature, a RJ45 type ethernet 10/100/1000 Mbit network connector must be installed as shown
on plan. Access to customer's network via their remote access server is needed for Remote
8. Electromagnetic Interference and Image Quality Service Network (RSN) connectivity. All cost with this feature is the responsibility of the
The Philips digital X-Ray detectors are highly sensitive receivers. Therefore, when determining customer.
where in the facility to install the x-ray system, care must be taken to avoid electromagnetic
interference (EMI) to ensure optimal image quality. Possible EMI sources can be high power (13.0)
generators, power transformers, high power mains lines or other electromagnetic sources,
which are located in the examination room directly or in the environment around the
examination room. These EMI sources may emit excessive magnetic noise that could cause
artifacts in the digital detector.
Date Drawn: 12/8/2022

Quote: Q-00128598
9. Avoid Adjacent EMI Sources
N-CAN220155
Do not locate the digital detector in a room adjacent to such an EMI source (next to, above or
Drawing Number
Project Details
below). EMI sources can be located also in the wall, floor or ceiling.
Order: None
10. Detector Location and Additional Sheiding
If a location next to an EMI source is unavoidable, ensure the table and/or wallstand and
proposed locations for portable detector exposures are away from these sources. The
magnetic noise interference is reduced dramatically by locating as far away as possible from
the EMI sources. It might be necessary to implement additional means to prevent an
interference with the x-ray detector (e.g. additional shielding).
(19.0)
AN
THIS SHEET IS PART OF THE DOCUMENT SET LISTED ON SHEET C1 AND SHOULD NOT BE SEPARATED. 5.3.2021
3.5m 3m 2.5m 2m 1.5m 1m .5m

1'
2'
3'
4'
Soffit
Walls
5'
6'
7'
8'
Legend
9'
Existing (to be removed)

10' 11' 12'
Beams or other building construction elements

16'-97
8"
[5128mm]
THIS SHEET IS PART OF THE DOCUMENT SET LISTED ON SHEET C1 AND SHOULD NOT BE SEPARATED.
3'-0"
[915mm]
Control room
6'-0"
to be removed
[1830mm]
135 [1
°
2'-0"
13
[610mm]
0m
m 3'
-9
] "
5'-2"
[1577mm]
1'-33
4"
1'-43
4"
[400mm]
[425mm]
21'-3"
to be added
Control room
[6477mm]
1:50
315
16"
Table Transverse ℄
[100mm]
14'-10"
3
[4521mm]
Reported Ceiling Height: 9'-6 16

Site Layout
9'-7"
8'-1013
[2921mm]
16"
[2712mm]
" (2900mm)
Recommended Minimum Ceiling Height: 8'-9" (2667mm)
Recommended Maximum Ceiling Height: 10'-6" (3200mm)
functionality - see Ceiling Height Guide and consult with Philips.

Ceiling Heights other than recommended may impact equipment
Ceiling Height measured from finished floor to bottom of Unistrut.

1"
4'-016
[1220mm]
5'-5"
[1651mm]
Table Longitudinal ℄
1
15'-1016"
[4827mm]
Project Details Philips Contacts Project

Drawing Number Project Manager: Diaa El Gherissy High Performance Room
N-CAN220155 Contact Number: +1 (306) 2162558 DigitalDiagnost C90 VS
Date Drawn: 12/8/2022 Email: diaa.rahman@philips.com RICHMOND HOSPITAL THE
A1
Quote: Q-00128598 Richmond, BC

Order: None Drawn By: David Olivares Room:4504
5.3.2021
1' 2' 3' 4' 5' 6' 7' 8' 9' 10' 11' 12'
Equipment Legend
.5m
A Furnished and installed by Philips
B Furnished by customer/contractor and installed by customer/contractor
1m
C Installed by customer/contractor
Table Transverse ℄ 9'-7" D Furnished by Philips and installed by contractor
E Existing
[2921mm] F Future
1.5m
G Optional item furnished by Philips
Equipment Designation Detail Sheet

2m
Weight Heat Load

Description
(lbs) (btu/hr)
ME
2.5m
A ME Generator M-Cabinet CXA 259 342
[1651mm]
1
A CS CSM3 Long ! 879 444
5'-5"
3m
DigitalDiagnost TH/TH2 (Wide Tabletop)
Table Longitudinal ℄
A MS 761 956
4'-0" Serviceability
DVS BuckyDiagnost VS Digital Tiltable (Right) 618 956
3.5m
A ELW Eleva Workspot 127 786

MS - Eleva Examination Control
- Acquisition Workspot (on shelf under counter)
[1219mm]
- Uninterruptible Power Supply (on shelf under counter)
4'-0"
- Keyboard and Mouse
DVS - mShield (optional, not shown)
Wall Bucky ℄
A WAP Wi-Fi Access Point 2 --
CS
A SBC SkyPlate Battery Charger 2 --

SBC A MH Mobile Holder 146 --
B CB Circyut Breaker --
ELW
WAP
MH
Richmond, BC
CB
Room:4504
General Notes
Project
* Any counters, keyboard trays and cabinetry shown to be supplied and installed by
contractor. Shelf under control counter for UPS and CPU is required.
* Field to verify all existing Philps and/or third party equipment will not affect the
functionality of the system and its components.
Site Planning Issues and Considerations

* Limited stretcher access to Wall Bucky. Recommend to move tabletop for improved
access.
* Recommend a customer-provided and -installed door stop to avoid a collision

between the door and DVS.
Philips Contacts
* Room to be modified as shown on sheet A1.
1 Exact equipment configuration to be verified with local Philips Sales. Extension
! Rails is listed on quote, but not shown and not recommended to be installed.
Notes to Philips Field Personnel

* Longer cables will need to be ordered for cable runs from:
- "ME" to "MS" [55' (17m)]
- "ME" to "ELW" [88' (27m)]

Equipment Layout
Quote: Q-00128598
N-CAN220155
1:50
Drawing Number
Project Details
Recommended Minimum Ceiling Height: 8'-9" (2667mm)
Order: None
Recommended Maximum Ceiling Height: 10'-6" (3200mm)
3
Reported Ceiling Height: 9'-6 16 " (2900mm)
Ceiling Heights other than recommended may impact equipment

functionality - see Ceiling Height Guide and consult with Philips.
A2
Ceiling Height measured from finished floor to bottom of Unistrut.
1' 2' 3' 4' 5' 6' 7' 8' 9' 10' 11' 12'
Ceiling Height Guide for High Performance VS and Value Room
.5m
Not Site Specific
8'-9" to 10'-6" * Full Vertical Tube Movement

1m
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Limitations
1.5m
8'-8" to 8'-9" Tube cannot reach Highest Position of Wall Bucky

8'-7" to 8'-8" Limitation noted above, plus horizontal (tilted) Bucky must be lowered for 40" SID
7'-11" to 8'-7" Limitations noted above, plus tabletop must be lowered for 40" SID
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2m
Loss of Coverage
7'-10" to 7'-11" 40" SID to horizontal (tilted) Bucky not available
2.5m
7'-7" to 7'-10" Limitations noted above, plus 40" SID to tabletop not available
7'-7" Absolute Minimum Ceiling Height
3m
* Ceiling Heights higher than 10'-6" - consult with Site Planning for limitations/loss of coverage
3.5m
Tube can cover full range Allows comfortable working
40" S.I.D. to table at
of movement of the height for 40" S.I.D. to
standard working height
Wall Bucky Tilted Bucky
Highest Tube Highest Tube Highest Tube

Position Position Position

[2900mm]
[1261mm]
[1276mm]
3"
[1356mm]
9'-616
[1516mm]
50"
50"
53"
60"
Richmond, BC
[762mm]
[710mm]
Room:4504
30"
Lowest Tube
28"
Position
Project


Philips Contacts

Quote: Q-00128598
N-CAN220155
Drawing Number
Project Details
Order: None
A3
PURCHASE REQUISITION
Date Req. Please tick one box as appropriate:
NUMBER
Initiated SG 23 01 30 03
Initials YY MM DD Requisition
This requisition is used for:
Approv ed Capital equipment over $5,000
Purchase Requisition Send PR to Capital Purchasing Coordinator 3rd Floor, Enter your initials, date (yymmdd)
Capital and Minor and requisition number sent that day
Equipment 23 01 30 590 W 8 Av e, Vancouver, V5Z 1C5 or email to
VCHCapitalPurchase@vch.ca e.g. KW0407291. Please keep a
TYPE directly from the computer (USE CAPITALS). Click the appropriate gray box and Fax: 604-875-8244 copy of the PR and quote the PR
YY MM DD
type in the information. Print and have the form signed at the bottom number in any follow up.
Minor Equipment < $5000
Date Serv ice contracts for Equipment
Required: Send PR to Purchasing at 1795 Willingdon Av enue,
REQUESTOR INFORMATION Burnaby, B.C. V5C 6E3 or email to
scm_cs@hssbc.ca; Fax: 604-297-9314
Name Stephanie Griffiths 23 08 14
One requisition per Vendor. PR’s must be signed. Do not
Department Functional Planning Site/ Hospital 520 West 6th Ave send multiple copies (please send by mail or if urgent by
YY MM DD fax but not both).
Phone Number 604-813-7450
For Desktop Computer hardw are / softw are visit
Email address stephanie.griffiths@vch.ca Kelsey.McGivern@vch.ca , http://serv icecatalogue.healthbc.org/Pages/default.aspx
angela.mcqueen@vch.ca
FINANCIAL CODING (TO BE COMPLETED BY REQUISITIONER) FINANCIAL CODING AND APPROVALS

NB: Orders cannot be placed in PeopleSoft w ithout this inform ation (COMPLETED BY CAPITAL PLANNING)
Business Unit (5 digits) 10010 Fund Code (2 digits) 01 Capital Plan # Sequence # Project # E357-00
Account Code (7 digits) 0387000
Project ID # 128229 Sub Project # 1451270
Department Code (8 digits) Site (3 digits) 600
Delivery Instructions: Receiving Location #90 & #95 - 10551 Shellbridge, Richmond V6X 2W8 Special Delivery Instructions: Delivery Date request Week of August 14th 2023. Delivery
date to be coordinated and confirmed between Philips and Equipment Planning (Stephanie Griffiths 604-813-7450) stephanie.griffiths@vch.ca, Kelsey.McGivern@vch.ca ***CONTACT CAPITAL ACQUISITIONS USE
Stephanie Griffiths 604-813-7450TO CONFIRM DELIVERY DATE.SHIPMENT WILL BE REFUSED IF DELIVERED OUTSIDE AGREED DELIVERY DATE OR WITHOUT 48 HOURS
NOTICE PRIOR TO LEAVING VENDOR DISTRIBUTION CENTRE CONFIRMING SITE IS ACCESSIBLE>>> CONSTRUCTION SITE*** SEND INVOICE HARD COPY TO VCH FINANCE
WITH EMAIL CC to Stephanie.griffiths@vch.ca Kelsey.McGivern@vch.ca , angela.mcqueen@vch.ca
EQUIPMENT INFORMATION (TO BE COMPLETED BY REQUISITIONER)
Recommended Vendor Philips Contact Dave Sandhu Phone Email dave.sandhu@philips.com P.S.T. Y N
G.S.T. Y N
Description (include all accessories and attach additional pages as needed)
Item # 1 ) Description: DigitalDiagnost C90 High Performance X-Ray & Associated Accessories Items per quotation: Q-00128598 FOB VCH Y N
and per PHSA Contract C02582-01 Freight Cost $
Quantity Required: Vendor Product Number: per quotation:
Estimated per unit cost excluding taxes Estimated extended cost excluding taxes $ 270,000.00 PO #
Current Budgetary quotation and/or product literature attached New Equipment Replacement Equip Model_____________ Serial #______________
Item # 2) Description Regional perspective of purchases
Quantity Required Vendor Product Number
Shared Logistics (supplies
Estimated per unit cost excluding taxes $ Estimated extended cost excluding taxes $
contracts)
Current Budgetary quotation and/or product literature attached New Equipment Replacement Equip Model_____________ Serial #______________
Indicate other areas affected by this purchase and people in those areas that hav e been contacted regarding the purchase. Copy of PO or PO number sent to
End User / Physician Contact Requester
Biomedical Engineering Contact: Facilities Planning / Maintenance IMIS Infection Control
Nursing Professional Practice - Manager, Clinical Equipment & Supplies Staff Safety Contact Vendor #:
FOI Issues - Vendor may have access to personal information and a privacy schedule is required
Foundation - EQUIPMENT FUNDED BY THE FOUNDATION MUST BE SIGNED OFF BY FDN ACCT (SEND PR TO FINANCE) _________________________ E.T.A.
Approved In Accordance with Financial Signing Authority Policy by: Received in Capital Acquisitions
Vishaal Dasoar $ 270,000.00
Name Signature (FORM MUST BE SIGNED) TOTAL AMOUNT APPROVED ON PR (EXCLUSIVE OF Buyer
TAXES)
Sold to: Presented By
RICHMOND HOSPITAL THE Dave Sandhu
7000 Westminster Hwy Philips Electronics Ltd., doing business as ‘Philips
Richmond, BC V6X 1A2 Canada’
1875 Buckhorn Gate
Mississauga, Ontario L4W 5P1
Email: dave.sandhu@philips.com
Quote #: Q-00128598
Customer #: 94113535
Quote Date: 30/01/2023
Effective: 03/05/2023
Richmond UPCC #2 Shellbridge X-Ray C90

Dear valued Customer,
I am pleased to submit the attached proposal for your consideration. I trust this meets your expectation, however
should you have any queries or require further information or clarification, please do not hesitate to contact me using
using the contact information above. Please note that all necessary initial applications training is included in the offer
price. Further application training can be purchased separately by contacting our Customer Care Center. Orders relating
to this proposal should be sent to me.
Yours sincerely,
Dave Sandhu
In addition to the Philips' submitted tender or quotation, the attached additional Terms and Conditions including license for certain software shall apply. Philips'
standard Warranty terms on the Equipment is attached and shall apply. This quotation contains confidential and proprietary information of Philips Electronics Ltd.,
doing business as ‘Philips Canada’ and is intended for use only by the customer whose name appears on this quotation. It may not be disclosed to third parties without
the prior written consent of Philips.
Philips Electronics Ltd., doing business as ‘Philips Canada’

1875 Buckhorn Gate
Mississauga, Ontario L4W 5P1
Table of Content
1. Quote Summary.................................................................................................................................... 3
2. Offer Overview...................................................................................................................................... 4
3. Offer Details...........................................................................................................................................5
4. Local Sales Terms and Conditions........................................................................................................25
5. Signature Page.....................................................................................................................................26
6. Philips Standard Terms and Condition................................................................................................ 27
7. Warranty............................................................................................................................................. 34
Q-00128598 Page 2 of 36
1. Quote Summary
Line Article No. Description Qty
1 712034 DigitalDiagnost C90 High Performance

1.1 NNAS775 DD C90 HP VS Classic 1
1.2 NRDN301 Three-phase 65 kW X-ray generator 1
1.3 NRDN520 Comfort Track 1
1.4 NRDN265 SkyFlowPlus 1
1.5 NRDN524 Motorized Tilting Of VS Stand 1
1.6 NRDN221 Rails Extension CS 1
1.7 NDCC008 Advanced DICOM Pack 1
1.8 989001001612 Set of CS Ceiling Rails 1
1.9 989001001622 Extension Set of Ceiling Rails; 2.70 M Length 1
1.10 NRDN407 Wireless Detect. Mobile Holder 1
Total Section Price : $ 270,000.00
Total Price
Total Net Price $ 270,000.00
Q-00128598 Page 3 of 36
2. Offer Overview
Line Description Qty Included Optional
1 DigitalDiagnost C90 High Performance

1.1 DD C90 HP VS Classic 1 l
1.2 Three-phase 65 kW X-ray generator 1 l
1.3 Comfort Track 1 l
1.4 SkyFlowPlus 1 l
1.5 Motorized Tilting Of VS Stand 1 l
1.6 Rails Extension CS 1 l
1.7 Advanced DICOM Pack 1 l
1.8 Set of CS Ceiling Rails 1 l
1.9 Extension Set of Ceiling Rails; 2.70 M Length 1 l
1.10 Wireless Detect. Mobile Holder 1 l
Q-00128598 Page 4 of 36
3. Offer Details
Line Description Qty
1 DigitalDiagnost C90 High Performance 1

Article No. 712034
1.1 DD C90 HP VS Classic 1

Article No. NNAS775
C90 HP VS Classic
DigitalDiagnost is a premium direct digital radiography system with flat detector technology, based on
modular components to allow for customization for all radiographic applications and workload
requirements. It benefits from years of developmental experience and suggestions from satisfied
customers all over the world who have had conventional and digital Philips Bucky systems.

The system combines all the advantages of a digital radiography unit with the latest Philips advanced
features for easy and ergonomic workflow. Please note that depending on the particular room setup
chosen, some options might not be available or already be included in the setup.

Main benefits at a glance
• Flexible component-based geometry to fit specific needs

• High efficiency and high patient throughput due to powerful automated features
• Uncompromising ergonomics due to complete system integration and special design
• Integrated one, two or three Cesium Iodide (CsI) digital flat panel detector(s), depending on
setup
• Ample detector area for full diagnostic information even with large patients
• Dose reduction due to high detector quantum efficiency
• Decrease in the number of repeat exposures due to the reduction of overexposed and
underexposed images
• Superb image quality due to state-of-the-art detector technology and exclusive UNIQUE 2
image processing
• Total radiation dose monitoring by an integrated area dose calculator
• Ceiling suspension with handy handle, control buttons, and release brake, as well as
convenient color-coding of movements
• Wide 30,7 cm (12.1“) full color LCD touch display integrated into the tube head for user control
and status information
• Integrated centering laser in the tube head for easy positioning
• Two generators to choose from, depending on setup
• Customizable Eleva touch screen user interface
• High flexibility for integrating into hospital network infrastructure
• Support of relevant IHE profiles
• State-of-the-art IT security and patient privacy architecture
• Professional serviceability and remote service capabilities

The ceiling suspension carrying the X-ray tube allows the freedom for a wide range of longitudinal and
transverse movements in the room, allowing performing table and vertical stand examinations, as well
as lateral projections and free exposures using the SkyPlate detector or PCR cassettes. Thanks to a
four-part telescopic column and an award-winning (iF award 2019) control handle, the system can be
operated with only one hand and easily positioned close to the patient with the option to be fully
Q-00128598 Page 5 of 36
motorized. Furthermore, automatic tube tracking, detector alignment and move to position functions,
provide high projection flexibility plus quick and easy handling. A convenient room height adjustment at
installation allows the system to fit almost any room height, to achieve the necessary source-image
distance above the table, and to go down to the floor for lower extremity work.

The modern control handle integrated into the Eleva Tube Head that comes with a 12”touch screen
allows the user to operate the system directly at the tube head. With this, operating the system is now
also possible from inside the exam room and the Eleva Tube Head provides the most common used
Eleva functionalities known from the Eleva console. A camera that displays live images directly at the
Eleva Tube Head screen as well as at the workstation (both optional) further helps to speed up the
workflow. The clear 12”touch screen is also offering all relevant patient information.

The proven Eleva workspot of DigitalDiagnost lets you experience simplicity like never before. Designed
with input from customers, it provides a clear and intuitive touch screen user interface. The Eleva user
interface has been refined since its first introduction and is considered highly efficient in daily
workflow. It is easy to learn and use, and is highly configurable to adapt to particular needs and specific
workflows, resulting in high room efficiency.

The high workflow automation possible through the Advanced Eleva concept allows concentrating on
patients instead of on the system. The touch screen user interface, the integrated generator controls,
and the automatic setting of exposure parameters based on patient and examination information
coming from the RIS, provide quick and easy access to all functions a busy technologist needs to achieve
an efficient workflow. In addition, the Eleva alternative workflow concept provides the flexibility to
adapt to particular situations and change the planned examination protocol without readjusting any
exposure settings.

The Philips Eleva Workflow plus package provides smart tools for an improved and fast workflow and is
complementary to the Advanced Eleva functionality standardly provided with the X-ray system.
Especially designed for high throughput environments, the Eleva Workflow plus package helps the user
to focus on the patient and the examination instead of on system handling and workflow. Automatic
markers are generated, displayed and stored/ printed automatically for CR and DR images. The intuitive
RIS- code learning feature allows for “on-the-fly”configuration of new or changed RIS codes directly
within the worklist environment. The RIS can be filtered on a detailed level for improved schedule
planning and fast access to specific patient information. The “Generator only”mode allows additionally
for free exposures on e.g. CR cassettes or film cassettes without the need to schedule the patient in the
system worklist. Furthermore, the Eleva Workflow Plus package allows access to Eleva’s “advanced
user”environment for individual customization and configuration of the user interface, such as tool bar
configuration, user management, analyzing system statistics and adaptation of the anatomical data
base and image processing.

The Philips Eleva Review plus package was developed for workflows, where intense image review plays
an important role. Dedicated tools help to manipulate, compare, measure and prepare images before
being archived in a PACS or being printed on film. The full screen mode allows for improved clinical
review and quality management of images. Thanks to the multiple image display (display 1, 2 or 4
images), previous images can be directly compared to newly acquired images. Additional zoom and pan
functions, dedicated zoom settings to the point of interest, size calibration and extended measurement
functions like distance and angle are required for precise quantitative image analysis. Semi-automatic
rotation and free image rotation in 0.5 degree steps provide fast image correction in the case of
angulated or oblique projections. Annotations such as free text or pre-defined markers (e.g. L/R) can be
customized and freely placed within images. The simple ranger tool allows for dedicated image
Q-00128598 Page 6 of 36
processing of an anatomically relevant image area for optimal display of challenging structures, e.g.
metal implants or small foreign particles.

With UNIQUE 2 (UNified Image QUality Enhancement) Philips introduces the second generation of our
well-established image post processing software. By increasing the image contrast and reducing noise
and artifacts, we address today’s radiologists’needs. UNIQUE 2 processed images result in improved
visibility of details while the overall impression remains natural. UNIQUE 2 is seamlessly integrated into
DigitalDiagnost. By means of a newly designed interface, image parameters can be more easily adapted
for each anatomy type, depending on the preferred focus. For ease of use, settings can be customized
through well-structured sliders within the interface.

DigitalDiagnost provides interoperability standards such as cryptography modules system components
to ensure compliant transmission of data in accordance with the specifications of the Federal
Information Processing Standard (FIPS) 140, as required by governmental institutions in the United
States of America. It integrates seamlessly into the hospital network and provides embedded anti
malware measures as well as restricted access to prevent the system from unauthorized use. It
supports connection to a Radiology Information System (RIS), to DICOM-compatible diagnostic units
and archives. The IHE Integration - and the DICOM Conformance Statement - explain the according
capabilities.

Specifications
Ceiling Suspension CSM
• Four-part aluminum telescopic column with spring counter balanced holder for X-ray tube
assembly, adaptable to individual room heights
• Ceiling height at source-image distance 110 cm (44”): 2.84 m to 3.21 m (9' 3.8" to 10' 6.3")
• Minimum ceiling source distance: 87.1 cm (34.3”)
• Possible room height adjustment: 37.5 cm (14.8”)
• Lowest tube position: 30 cm (11.8”) measured from center of beam to the floor
• Length of rails: base rails 4.3 m (14’1.3”), optional rails extension 2.7 m (8’10.3”)
• Longitudinal travel with Comfort Track and Comfort Move: 3.44 m (11’3.4"), 6.14 m (20’1.7”)
with rails extension option
• Longitudinal travel with Comfort Position (option): 3.28 m (10’9.1"), 5.98 m (19’7.4”) with rails
extension option
• Transverse travel: 1.49 m (4’11”) with short transverse rails, 3.21 m (10’6.4”) with long
transverse rails
• Vertical travel: 1.65 m (5’5.2”)
• Rotation of focal spot around vertical axis of column: 360° (±180°), with rotation stop
+180°/-165° and lock position every 45°
• Angulations of focal spot around horizontal axis: ±125°, lock positions 0° and ±90°
• Prepared for motorized movements in 5 axis

Control handle
• Centering device in longitudinal and transversal directions

• Brake/locking controls and central three-axis brake-release at lowest position of handle (with
capacitive sensor)
• Wide 30,7 cm (12.1“) full color LCD touch display and backlit flat control buttons
• Collimator
• Motorized automatic collimation, manual overrule possible, with light field indicator
Q-00128598 Page 7 of 36
• Angle rotation: ±45°
• Timer switch: up to 30 s
• Inherent filter value: <=0.1 mm at 75 kV
• Added filters: 2 mm Al + 0,5 mm Cu or 1 mm Al + 0.1 mm Cu or 1 mm Al + 0.2 mm Cu
• Source-image distance measurement tape

Eleva workspot computer
• Processor: Intel® Core i5-6500 (up to 3.60 GHz, 6 MB Cache)

• Hard disk: 480 GB SATA SSD
• Image storage: typically around 10,000 images
• 16 GB RAM
• 24 x CD / 8 x DVD reader/ writer
• Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base-T Gigabit
• Geometry interface
• Detector interface
• Integrated generator control

Comprising
Ceiling suspension CSM
• Four-part telescopic column

• X-ray tube assembly with collimator
• Control handle with backlit flat control buttons and LCD screen
• Rail system
• Installation cables and high voltage cables
• Set of marker for preferred source-image distance
• Philips Comfort Track system motorization or optionally higher
• For systems with vertical moveable stand VM: Philips Comfort Move system motorization

Eleva workspot
• Eleva workspot computer

• Keyboard and mouse
• Cables
• EEC-A 2MP Monitor
• Eleva application and examination database software and licenses
• Eleva Workflow Plus license
• Eleva Review Plus license
• DICOM Package Plus
• Eleva Advanced Dose Reporting license
• Windows 10 system software and licenses
• UNIQUE 2 advanced multi-resolution image processing
• Dynamic reconstruction image processing software
• Shutter and Image Verification tool
• McAfee Application Control
• Instruction for use
• Quick reference guide
Q-00128598 Page 8 of 36
• User documentation
• Memory stick support to access quality control and statistic data

Digital TH Table SkyPlate-Tray
Philips height-adjustable TH digital table has a proven and smart design that makes no compromise on
robustness, quality and work efficiency, even with challenging patients and difficult examination
conditions. It allows a variety of routine skeletal table examinations.
• X-ray from head to toe, for all radiographic applications

• Easy fine positioning through an eight-way floating tabletop with wide movement range
• Two tabletop widths available, 75 cm (29.5") or 85 cm (33.5")
• Tray to place a 35 x 43 cm (14 x17") Philips SkyPlate
• Easy-to-operate tray, allowing the positioning of SkyPlate in portrait or landscape orientation
• SkyPlate can be taken out of the table at any time for free exposures
• Motorized height adjustment
• Easy horizontal and vertical patient positioning with large movement range
• Extremely robust with maximum patient load of 375 kg (820 lbs)
• Hands-free operation via large footswitches
• Footswitches lock button to avoid accidental movements and ensure patient safety
• Optional hand switch controlling all movements, which can be clamped at any place on both
tabletop sides
• Three-field automatic exposure control chamber for optimal image quality and dose
• Automatic tube height adjustment depending on table height (tracking)
• Automatic collimation for X-ray beam limitation to digital flat detector, according to
pre-programmed examination parameters
• Removable grid for optimal image quality and dose
• Convenient grid storage within the detector unit for immediate and safe storage
• Electromagnetic brakes for a high level of patient security

The floating tabletop provides significantly more coverage due to a wide travel range, allowing quick
and effortless positioning. Thus the patient can be better examined and not moved during the
examination, which is particularly important for emergency and trauma. The high weight capacity
enables examination of bariatric patients.

The motorized height adjustment gives a total lift of 40 cm (15.7") to adjust to a comfortable and safe
working height. The lowest position allows loading a patient who is in a wheelchair. All motorized
height movements and floating tabletop are activated with wide and easy-to-use footswitches. The
footswitches can be locked for more safety during examination.

An integrated three-field automatic exposure control chamber ensures optimum image quality at the
lowest possible dose even for difficult projections. The removable grid can be conveniently and safely
stored directly in the detector unit.

The integrated tray allows placing a Philips SkyPlate in portrait or landscape orientation, to offer full
diagnostic information even with large patients. At any time, the detector can be taken out of the table
tray to perform free exposures in the room with high flexibility, even for the most challenging
Q-00128598 Page 9 of 36
projections. This feature is particularly useful to perform laterals, oblique, weight bearing feet or
examinations in bed or wheelchair.

Specifications
• Maximum patient weight: 375 kg (820 lbs) in static center position, 318 kg (700 lbs) in center
with all movements, 210 kg (460 lbs) off center with all movements
• Motorized height adjustment from 51.5 to 91.5 cm (20.3" to 36")
• Floating tabletop of sandwich design with Getalit overlay
• Tabletop size: 240 x75 cm (7' 10.5" x 29.5"), optional wide tabletop 240 x 85 cm (7' 10.5" x
33.5")
• Tabletop travel: longitudinal ±60 cm (±23.6"), transverse ±13 cm (±5.1") or ±18 cm (±7.1") with
optional wide tabletop
• Tabletop attenuation equivalent: =1.1 mm Al (at 100 kV)
• Tabletop edge section: flat locking rails for attaching Philips accessories
• Tray where a Philips SkyPlate can be placed in portrait or landscape orientation
• Footswitches functions: table height adjustment up/down, disengagement of tabletop brakes
in longitudinal and transverse directions, ability to switch on cross light in the collimator (all
footswitches), footswitch interlock
• Optional hand switch: all footswitch functions for manual operation at the backside of the
table
• Detector horizontal travel range: ±22.7 cm (±8.9")
• Removable grid 40/12/110: 40 lines/cm (100 lines/inch), ratio 12, focus 110 cm (44") for use
with source-image distance from 90 to 150 cm (36" to 59")

Comprising
• Digital BuckyDiagnost TH height-adjustable table base and tabletop

• Tray for SkyPlate
• Default grid 40/12/110: 40 lines/cm (100 lines/inch), ratio 12, focus 110 cm (44"). A different
default grid can be chosen in order questionnaire. Additional grids are available in accessories.
• Software licenses
• Documentation

Digital VS Ext. Fixed Detector
Philips height-adjustable VS vertical stand has a proven and smart design that makes no compromise on
robustness, quality and work efficiency, even with challenging patients and difficult examination
conditions. It is optimal for X-ray departments specializing in thorax examinations. The motorized tilting
option extends possible application range to extremities, skeletal examinations, and even under-table
examinations using a trolley.

• Vertical stand mounted on the floor, optimal for chest X-ray and all wall Bucky applications
• Wide size 43 x 43 cm (17 x 17”) integrated digital flat detector
• Motorized height adjustment from 30 to 180 cm (11.8”to 5’11”) with two different speeds plus
manual operation for precise positioning
• Customizable pre-defined positions (move-to-position) and numerous other well-planned
features significantly reduce the physical demands placed on the technologist
Q-00128598 Page 10 of 36
• Easy patient positioning with counterbalanced large vertical movement range
• Large and ergonomic patient grips on both left and right sides of the detector for safe and
comfortable patient positioning
• Optional rotatable patient stretch grip on top left or right side of the detector
• Convenient user interfaces on both left and right sides of the detector, for quick and easy
adjustment of movements, collimation, field alignment and orientation, selection of automatic
exposure control chambers, and tracking mode
• Wireless remote control providing all commands of the side user interfaces
• Five-field automatic exposure control chamber for optimal image quality and dose, as well as
positioning flexibility
• Automatic tube height adjustment to detector height (tracking)
• Automatic collimation for X-ray beam limitation to digital flat detector, according to
pre-programmed examination parameters
• Optional motorized detector tilting (-20° to +90°) to support examination of patients on a
stretcher, plus straightforward exams of extremities for seated or standing patients
• Removable oscillating grid for optimal image quality and dose
• Convenient storage for two grids within the detector unit for immediate and safe storage
The motorized height adjustment from 30 to 180 cm (11.8”to 5’11”) measured at center of
detector above the floor, gives a total lift of 150 cm (4’11.1”) to adjust to a comfortable and
safe working height with a choice of two different speeds.

The wide size 43 x 43 cm (17 x 17”) integrated detector covers all relevant anatomy and offers full
diagnostic information. Its Cesium Iodide (CsI) technology provides excellent quantum efficiency (DQE)
and helps to reduce the required patient dose.

An integrated five-field automatic exposure control chamber ensures optimum image quality at the
lowest possible dose even for difficult projections, and provides positioning flexibility for various
examinations without moving the patient. The removable oscillating grid can be stored conveniently
and safely directly in the detector unit.

Specifications:
VS Vertical Stand
• Counterbalanced rugged column for motorized and manual vertical movement of the detector
• Vertical movement range: 30 to 180 cm (11.8”to 5’11”), measured at center of detector
• Installation: floor and wall attachment, or floor only (optional)
• Detector unit: 59.6 x 57.5 cm (23.5 x 22.6”)
• Optional tilting: -20° to +90° motorized
• Automatic exposure control (AEC): 5 AEC measuring fields
• Operating: two user interfaces (left and right)and wireless remote control
• Removable oscillating grid 40/8/140: 40 lines/cm (100 lines/inch), ratio 8, focus 140 cm (56”)
for use with source-image distance from 110 to 180 cm (44”to 71”)
• Grid storage: for up to two grids within the detector unit

Detector
• Wide size 43 x 43 cm (17 x 17”) integrated digital flat detector with Cesium Iodide (CsI)
technology
• Active detector area 42.0 x 42.5 cm (16.5 x 16.7”)
Q-00128598 Page 11 of 36
• Resolution 8.2 megapixel (2840 x 2874 pixels)
• Pixel pitch 0.148 mm
• Pixel depth 16 bits
• Image resolution: up to 3.4 line pairs per mm

Comprising:
• Digital BuckyDiagnost VS vertical stand

• Digital flat detector 43 x 43 cm (17 x 17”)
• Default oscillating grid 40/8/140: 40 lines/cm (100 lines/inch), ratio 8, focus 140 cm (56”).
A different default grid can be chosen in order questionnaire. Additional grids are available in
accessories.
• Documentation

SkyPlate Infrastructure Kit
The SkyPlate Infrastructure Kit is comprised of a wireless access point, a battery charger and a back-up
cable.

Main benefits:
All-in-one kit to set the customer up with the necessary parts for working with the Skyplate State-of-the
art components. The access point enables the wireless transmission of clinical images from the SkyPlate
to the access point. The access point is hard wired to the radiography system and images are sent from
there to the Eleva workstation for review, editing and further distribution. The battery charger is
designed to charge up to three batteries simultaneously. The backup cable enables the transmission of
clinical images in the case that there is no wireless transmission between the SkyPlate and the wireless
access point possible.

Specifications:
• Wi-Fi access point according to regional requirements for Wi-Fi transmissions.

• SkyPlate battery charger. It offers a 4 bar charge status color indication per battery: 0-25%,
25-50%, 50-75%, 75-100%.
• IP43 compliant
• Dimensions 172 x 322 x 48 mm (12.7 inch x 6.8 inch x 1.9 inch)
• SkyPlate backup cable

Compatible with
• SkyPlate large 35 cm x 43 cm (14 inch x 17 inch)

• SkyPlate small 24 cm x 30cm (10 inch x 12 inch)

Large SkyPlate Set
Philips SkyPlate is the next generation of wireless portable detectors. It is an integrated part of the
Eleva platform and defines a new dimension of flexibility and freedom within the radiography room.
Q-00128598 Page 12 of 36
• DR speed and excellent image quality with the positioning flexibility of CR

• ISO compliant cassette size format (35 cm x 43 cm, 14 inch x 17 inch) to fit into standard
operating room tables
• Reduced patient infection risk and easy handling thanks to the detector's cable-free design
• Easy handling thanks to the detector's cable-free design
• Easy handling for free exposures
• Flexible positioning for lateral or oblique projections
• Instant image display
• State-of-the-art CsI detector technology and UNIQUE 2image processing for optimal image
quality at low dose
• Robust shell of the detector to protect it from water drops and dust
• Easy, precise and safe positioning around the patient, even for difficult projections, provided
by a rich set of dedicated accessories
• SkyPlate sharing license, to use the wireless detector on another compatible Philips X-ray
system

The SkyPlate large covers all relevant anatomy with its large detector area of 35 cm x 43 cm (14 inch x
17 inch). Depending on anatomy, it can be positioned in different orientations and offers full diagnostic
information even with large patients. Combined with Philips advanced UNIQUE 2image processing,
grid-lineremoval algorithm and state-of-the-art Cesium Iodide (CsI) technology, it has an excellent
detective quantum efficiency (DQE) and helps to reduce the required patient dose. It provides instant
image display with superb image quality on the Eleva workspot for increased diagnostic confidence.
Thanks to its cable-free design, the SkyPlate allows quick and efficient procedures with high hygienic
standards. Its robust design and a rich set of optional dedicated accessories (mobile holder, bed
holder,attachable grids and hygienic bags) offer easy, safe and quick positioning throughout the
hospital. Special projections like laterals can easily be performed without moving the patient. Its slim
design is optimized for critical environments to reduce the risk of interfering with life supporting
equipment, cables, tubes and catheters.
The detector features advanced low-power WiFi connection technology and is designed according to
IEC 60601-1-2. It is compliant with life supporting devices designed according to IEC 60601-1-2 and with
pacemakers designed according to IEC (EN) 45502-2-1 when keeping indicated distances. The SkyPlate
battery can be removed and recharged in the battery charging station. Once a battery is empty, a new
one can be inserted to immediately continue working with the SkyPlate.
SkyPlate sharing allows taking the SkyPlate from the system and using it with other compatible Philips
MobileDiagnost wDR, DigitalDiagnost or ProGrade systems. Thereby, SkyPlates can be used efficiently
wherever needed and help driving down investment costs. Compatible systems need to carry the
SkyPlate Sharing license to participate in SkyPlate sharing.

Specifications
• Size: 35 cm x 43 cm (14 inch x 17 inch) SkyPlate large wireless digital flat detector with Cesium
Iodide (CsI) technology
• Active detector area 34.5 cmx 42.1 cm (13.6 inch x 16.6 inch) (2330 x 2846 pixels), pixel pitch
0.148 mm
• Image resolution: up to 3.38 line pairs per mm
Q-00128598 Page 13 of 36
• Typical weight: 2.8.kg (6.2 lbs) includingbattery
• Maximum patient weight: 100 kg (220 lbs) on 4 cm (1.6 inch) disk for weight-bearing
examinations / 300 kg (661 lbs) for distributed load, e.g. chest examnations in bed
• WLAN network standard: IEEE802.11 a, b, g or n (configurable)
• Encryption: default WPA2
• Optional attachable grids: Portrait orientation: 44/8/130: 44 lines/cm (112 lines/inch), ratio 8,
focus 130 cm (51 inch) / Landscape orientation: 40/8/130: 40 lines/cm (100 lines/inch), ratio 8,
focus 130 cm (51 inch)

Comprising
• SkyPlate large 35 cm x 43 cm (14 inch x 17 inch)

• Two exchangeable batteries
• Set of 100 hygienic bags
• SkyPlate sharing license
• SkyPlate Protection Cover
• Documentation

Compatible with
• DigitalDiagnost Release 4.x

• MobileDiagnost wDR Release 2.x
• ProGrade 1.x
• CombiDiagnost R90
• ProxiDiagnost N90
• Attachable grids for SkyPlate 35 cm x 43 cm (14 inch x 17 inch) in portrait and landscape
orientation

UPS
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) for the Eleva workspot computer and monitor.
The device provides emergency power to the Eleva workspot in case of electrical network power
failure, allowing to bridge time to safely store images and complete the last tasks.
It provides instantaneous protection from input power interruptions by means of an integrated battery
and electronic circuitry, allowing to continue working for approximately 60 minutes.

Specifications
• Allows using the Eleva workspot for approximately 60 minutes after main power interruption
• Typical charging time: approximately 4 hours
• Typical heat emission: 4 W (5 W max) in standby, 86 W (99 W max) in operation
• Dimensions: depth 48.3 cm (19”), width 21 cm (8.3”), height 43.2 cm (17”)
• Weight: 25 kg (55 lbs)

Comprising
• UPS device including holder for vertical positioning, power cable
Q-00128598 Page 14 of 36

Live Camera Package
The Live Camera Package takes the system to the next level. The Eleva Tube Head of the CS is enhanced
with a live camera for extended Eleva control right in the exam room. This helps alleviate potential
imprecise collimation (as with obese patients) and assists with patient positioning. Time consuming
retakes that add unnecessary dose can be reduced. Moreover the Live Camera Package contributes to a
fast setup time:
• Live images of the collimated anatomy are displayed continuously during the exam, for
guidance
• Display of collimated area at the tube head and at the Eleva workspot helps detect patient
movement and supports correct collimation Specifications
• Camera, 800 x 600 pixels resolution, IR cut filter for natural colors, Highly light sensitive for low
light environments, Low latency for precise positioning

Comprising
• Camera
• Documentation Compatible with
• Ceiling suspension with Eleva Tube Head

Second Controller for TH Table
This extra controller allows the same controls as the table footswitches (table up and down, release of
floating tabletop), even if the footswitches are locked. It can be conveniently clamped anywhere on the
tabletop side rails and provides a spiral cable for flexible handling.

Comprising:
Controller with push buttons, spiral cable and integrated clamp mechanism.

Wide Tabletop
Completely flat, wide carbon fiber tabletop with plain surface, with convenient aluminum rails on both
long sides for fixing accessories.

Specifications
• Type: X-ray transparent floating tabletop

• Material: carbon fiber
• Dimensions: 240 x 85 cm (7’10.5”x 33.5”)
• Tabletop travel: longitudinal ±60 cm (±23.6”), transverse ±18 cm (±7.1”)
• Attenuation equivalent: less or equal to 1,2mm (0,039“) and typically 0,9mm (0,035“)

Comprising
• Wide tabletop
• This option replaces the standard 240 x 75 cm (7’10.5”x 29.5”) tabletop
Q-00128598 Page 15 of 36
Remark
With DigitalDiagnost, the wide tabletop must be selected to allow the combination with an additional
VM vertical stand.

Stretch Grip for VS/VM Stand
The stretch grip for vertical stand improves examination conditions and patient comfort.

• Allow the patient to comfortably keep his arms overhead or beside the Bucky unit by holding
the grip
• Ergonomic U-shape providing different grip heights to adapt to patient size
• Can be inserted at the top left or right side of the Bucky unit, depending on the situation
• Convenient wall mounted holder for immediate and safe storage

Specifications
• Metallic U-shape grip

• Rotatable from -90° to +90° around the vertical axis

Comprising
• Stretch grip
• Storage holder to be wall mounted

Compatible with
• VS and VM vertical stands

• This option is only selectable for BuckyDiagnost when the VS Advanced package is taken

VarioFocus
Philips' unique VarioFocus generator technology ensures optimal image resolution for all kind of
examinations, by avoiding to compromise on which tube focus spot size to use, power load and
exposure time.

• Optimal image quality through mixed focus spot adapted to each examination
• Optimal resolution at the needed power
• Minimum exposure time
• Minimum motion artifacts
• Minimum geometrical blur
• Fully automatic

By using both focus spots simultaneously to define a variable focus spot, Philips VarioFocus
automatically balances the power on both focus spots in a defined ratio, ensuring optimal image
Q-00128598 Page 16 of 36
resolution at any required power. In addition, tube filaments are preserved through power balancing on
both focus spots and reduced power load on each of them, which may result in longer tube life.

Comprising
• Software license

Compatible with:
• Philips 50, 65, 80 kW generators

• Philips X-ray tubes RO1750, SRO0951, SRO2550, SRO33100

Adaptive. Transfer. 415-480 V
Comprising:
• Three-phase transformer for mains supply voltage adaptation of415/440/460/480 V to 400 V

and for 380/400 V for mains supply without
N (neutral) to be built into the base of generator.

Compatible with:
• Generator OPTIMS 50, 1tube

• Second tube connection
• Extension to 65 kW
• Extension to 80 kW

Cable Carrier CS
Additional carrier for suspension of cable hose from CS 2/4 or TV- monitor.
Comprising:
• Carriage for CS- ceiling rail with adapter for different cable hoses

Clinical QC
This powerful image statistic tool provides the advanced user with functionality to analyze rejected
images regarding operators and rejection reasons. It serves as well for monitoring and analyzing
general parameters. The data files can be downloaded in standard format for further usage or archiving
on a PC.

It perfectly supports the quality standards of the department and teaching situations.

Buying this feature once for a system will make the functionality available on all Eleva workspots that
have been purchased for this system.

Comprising
Q-00128598 Page 17 of 36

Compatible with
• DigitalDiagnost 2.0 and above

• DigitalDiagost C50
• DuraDiagnost 1.0 and above
• MobileDiagnost wDR

Clinical Education Program for Digital Diagnost C90 Systems:
Introductory eLearning: Introductory electronic learnings are provided on the Philips Learning Center
educational portal. These courses introduce the Philips dXR systems. Course topics include system
startup and shutdown, system functionalities, helpful quick-steps and more. The modules will provide
the technologist familiarity with the workflow and software prior to onsite training. It is recommended
that this online self-paced learning be completed prior to the onsite applications training. The
eLearning modules can be accessed by technologists as needed for reference and refresher.

Handover Onsite Education: Philips Education Specialists will provide twenty-four (24) hours of
education for up to four (4) students, selected by customer, including technologists from
night/weekend shifts if necessary. Students should attend all 24 hours, and must include any OffSite
education attendees if applicable. CEU credits may be available if the participant meets the guidelines
provided by Philips. Depending on your system configuration, the first four (4) hours onsite may be
spent configuring new equipment for specific clinical needs, as well as reviewing important safety
features and quality procedures. Please read guidelines for more information. Site must be
patient-ready. Philips personnel are not responsible for actual patient contact or operation of
equipment during education sessions except to demonstrate proper equipment operation.

Education expires one (1) year from equipment installation date (or purchase date if sold separately).

C90 HP VS Classic
Comprising:
DiDi C90 High Perform. Room
Stretch grip for VS/VM stand
Live Camera Package
Adapt. Transf. 415-480 V
UPS
Cable Carrier CS
Digital VS Ext. Fix Detector
SkyPlate Infrastructure Kit
Large SkyPlate Set
Wide Tabletop
Digital TH Table SkyPlate-Tray
2nd controller for TH table
VarioFocus
Clinical QC
DXR Introductory eLearning Module
DXR Digital Diagnost Handover 24h Onsite
Q-00128598 Page 18 of 36

1.2 Three-phase 65 kW X-ray generator 1

Article No. NRDN301
Generator featuring modern architecture based on a modular design using high performance
components to enable a customer specific solution. Main benefits at a glance
• Modern architecture based on a modular design using high performance components

• Tube overload protection
• Automatic mains voltage compensation
• Automatic Exposure Control (AEC)
• Fully compatible with VarioFocus (optional)
• Small footprint The tube overload protection monitors temperature conditions in order to
protect tube and housing parts from being damaged or destroyed by overstress. The automatic
exposure control sets the exposure time according to exposure voltage and object
characteristics in order to automatically obtain the correct exposure.
Specifications
• Computer controlled converter X-ray generator

• Converter generator generates high voltage equivalent to DC voltage
• Nominal power (IEC): 65 kW
• Power: 65 kW
• Three phases, 400 - 480 VAC, 50/60 Hz
• Low or dual speed rotor control, depending on tube
• Max voltage: 150 kV
• Max current (at 80 kV): 812 mA
• mAs product: 0.5 to 850 mAs
• Exposure time: 1 ms to 4 s
• Maximum mains resistance at 400V: 0.2 Ohm
• Maximum mains current at 400V: 134 A Comprising
• Generator 65 kW in cabinet Compatible with
• VarioFocus option
• Philips tube SRO 33100
1.3 Comfort Track 1

Article No. NRDN520
With Philips Comfort Track, relevant parts of the system geometry are motorized to support a fast,
smooth and automated workflow within the daily routine in the X-ray room. Built-in safety measures
include collision detection, force limitation, break management and dead-man control to position the
system safely with the patient in the room. Collimation and collimation- light are set automatically to
further release the user from making manual adjustments for routine procedure steps.
For systems with X-ray table

The motorization of the X-ray table allows for easy table height adjustments to accommodate the
requested working height. This capability removes the need for physical involvement from the user or
Q-00128598 Page 19 of 36
the patient. With a single click, tube and detector can be linked to keep the source- image- distance
(SID) constant while adjusting the proper working height of the X-ray table (tube tracking).
For systems with vertical stand

The motorization of the vertical stand makes it easy to set the appropriate detector height according to
the height of the patient. In addition, the movable vertical stand VM can be tilted with motor assistance
for fast placement in the upright position as well as the horizontal position (below the table).
The collimation- light switches on automatically as soon as the operator inserts the SkyPlate into the
SkyPlate Tray of the vertical stand. At the same time the X-ray collimation is set automatically according
to the requested examination. With a single click, tube and detector can be linked to keep the tube
centered to the detector while simultaneously setting the correct height of the detector (tube tracking).
For specific examinations, the tube can automatically be positioned off-center to align the X-ray beam
with the upper or lower border of the detector.
• Motorized height adjustable table

• Manual and motorized height adjustable VS vertical stand adjusts from 30 to 180 cm (11.8" to
5' 11")
• Manual and motorized height adjustable VM movable vertical stand adjusts from 35 to 185 cm
(13.8" to 6' 08")
• Manual and motorized tilting VM movable vertical stand adjusts along the horizontal axis from
-20° to +90°
• Convenient user interfaces are located on both the left and right sides of the Bucky unit, for
quick and easy adjustments of movements
• Two different speeds, plus manual operation for precise positioning of the vertical stand
• Automatic tube height adjustment in vertical direction (Tube Tracking)
• Automatic tube positioning for upper aligment, centered or lower detector alignment at
vertical stand
• Auto-collimation of the tube, depending on the selected examination
Comprising
• Motorization of the X-ray table TH or TH-S

• Motorization of vertical stand VS or VM
• Motorization of the column of the ceiling suspension
• Software license and documentation
1.4 SkyFlowPlus 1
Article No. NRDN265
To avoid extensive scatter radiation on images, an anti-scatter grid is sometimes used, typically for
anatomies such as chest, abdomen or pelvis. With SkyFlow Plus, Philips presents an innovative and
exciting way to enhance image quality for images that would have normally been acquired with a grid
and can now be performed without applying an anti-scatter grid.
For customers who are using a grid for chest images, especially with obese patients, SkyFlow Plus can
provide an image contrast level close to grid images. This implies that no grid needs to be carried,
Q-00128598 Page 20 of 36
positioned and aligned. Also, chances for potential re-takes due to grid cut-off or misalignment will be
reduced.
Customers who are not using a grid today will see an improved image impression by using the SkyFlow
Plus functionality. Even though no grid is applied and dose levels remain unchanged, image quality will
improve.
The SkyFlow Plus functionality is especially suitable for bariatric patients. Once the license is installed at
the system, it does not need a single technologist interaction and is automatically applied on images.
Comprising
• SkyFlow license
• Documentation
Compatible with
• DigitalDiagnost C90
1.5 Motorized Tilting Of VS Stand 1

Article No. NRDN524
The motorized tilting option for VS vertical stand brings workflow enhancements on the system by
enabling the upright Bucky unit to be automatically or manually placed in different angulations.
• Extends the possible application range to extremities, skeletal examinations, and even
under-table examinations using a trolley.
• Reduces technologist physical involvement by providing motorized tilting movements.
• Tilting by just pressing a move-to-position button to a pre- defined angulation or by pressing
and holding a dedicated movement button.
Specifications
• Tilt from -20° to +90° horizontal position, via 0° vertical position
Comprising
• Tilting mechanism between vertical stand column and Bucky unit

• Electronic controlled motor drive
• Set of cables
1.6 Rails Extension CS 1

Article No. NRDN221
This mechanical extension of the longitudinal rails allows extending the longitudinal travel of the ceiling
suspension. In combination with the long transverse rails (see questionnaire), this longitudinal rail
extension makes possible to cover a large area of the room.
Q-00128598 Page 21 of 36
Specifications
• Extension size: 2.73 m (107.4”)

• Maximal longitudinal travel with extension: approximately 6.14 m (241.7”)
Comprising
• Set of ceiling suspension extension rails

• Mounting and connection hardware
Compatible with
• BuckyDiagnost ceiling suspension CS2/4

• BuckyDiagnost ceiling suspension CSIII (only available for DigitalDiagnost)
Remark
If necessary, it is also possible to adapt the rails extension length to the exact room requirement by
requesting the option “Rails separation CS”.
1.7 Advanced DICOM Pack 1

Article No. NDCC008
Advanced DICOM Pack
Dose Report in DICOM SR Format
This DICOM service allows exporting patient radiation dose details in the Structured Report DICOM
standard format.
• Standard, modern and comprehensive format for exporting patient radiation exposure
information
• Exports dose information on study (accumulated) and exposure levels
• Allows detailed exposure dose monitoring on the PACS or dedicated dose management system
Typically, one dose report is created at the end of each procedure step performed on the system. This
dose report collects together all the irradiation events from the procedure step and cumulates all dose
values for the procedure step as a whole.
By exporting patient radiation dose in a comprehensive, very detailed and standard format, DICOM
Structured Report allows to perform precise dose monitoring and analysis on the PACS or with a
dedicated dose management system. This assists institutions to ensure their policies, procedures and
protocols are adequate and being followed appropriately in the department. Moreover, it can help
determining how changes in techniques and protocols impact radiation dose as well as image quality, to
maintain patient doses As Low As Reasonably Achievable (ALARA).
Comprising
Q-00128598 Page 22 of 36
Compatible with

• MobileDiagnost wDR 1.1. and above (Dose Area Product Meter required)
• EasyDiagnost 5.0
• ProGrade Rel 1 and above
DICOM Q/R
DICOM Query/Retrieve allows for dedicated search and download of previous patient examinations
from the customers PACS to the Eleva Workspot. Thanks to the multiple- image display feature of the
Eleva review package previous images can be directly compared to new acquired images within the
Eleva Review environment.
To ensure and respect the confidentiality of electronic patient information, only data of currently
scheduled patients from the RIS (Radiology Information System) can be queried and retrieved.
Comprising
• Eleva software license
1.8 Set of CS Ceiling Rails 1

Article No. 989001001612
For longitudinal carriages of CS monitor ceiling suspension or auxiliary ceiling suspension; length 4.3 M.
Comprising:
• 2 CS rails.
• Adjustable end/stops.
• Spacer strips.
• Fixing parts.
• Brake rails.
Compatible with:
• CS 2 CS 4.
• Monitor ceiling suspension.
• Rail extension 9890 010 01622.
• Rail for cable carrier 9890 010 02422.
1.9 Extension Set of Ceiling Rails; 2.70 M Length 1

Article No. 989001001622
Comprising:
• 2 CS rails
Q-00128598 Page 23 of 36
• fixing parts
• connectors
1.10 Wireless Detect. Mobile Holder 1

Article No. NRDN407
The wireless detector mobile holder is designed to take full advantage of the wireless portable detector
to perform free exposures in optimal conditions.
• Mounted on wheels for easy moving and positioning in the room

• Holds the wireless portable detector in a safe and precise position
• Very easy to put the detector in and to take it out
• High detector positioning flexibility
• Can hold the wireless portable detector with or without a grid on it
• Brakes on the wheels for fixed and safe positioning
• Also compatible with 35 x 43 cm (14 x 17”) CR cassettes
The mobile holder provides outstanding positioning flexibility for the wireless portable detector.
Mounted on wheels, it is easily positioned in the room and all around the patient. With or without a
grid on it, the wireless portable detector can be held in various positions depending on projection
requirements. The positioning is achieved quickly and easily, thanks to very intuitive use and
self-locking joins. Featuring a height adjustable arm with swivel, the detector is safely held and can be
lifted, tilted, swiveled or rotated to the best convenience.
Specifications
• Dimensions: length 68 cm (26.8”), width 67 cm (26.4”), height 150.7 cm (59.3”)

• Vertical movement range of holder arm: 68 to 128 cm (26.8 to 50.4”), center of large portable
detector
• Weight: 53.2 kg (117 lbs)
Comprising
• Mobile detector holder
Compatible with
• Wireless portable detector 35 x 43 cm (14 x 17”) and CR cassettes 35 x 43 cm (14 x 17”)
Q-00128598 Page 24 of 36
4. Local Sales Terms and Conditions
Line Product Code Billing Plan
1 712034 DigitalDiagnost C90 High Performance 10/70/20
Payment Terms: Net 30 Days
INCO Terms: Free On Board Destination
This is a cash price quote, which includes ACH, check, and wire transfer. Any other form of payment will result in different price,
which may be higher.
Billing Terms: Are as displayed under the Billing Plan table above. For each item, X/Y/Z milestones are defined as follows (unless
an Agreement specifying alternative payment terms has been negotiated between the parties):
X is the percentage invoiced upon signed acceptance of quotation or upon receipt of Customer Purchase Order
Y is the percentage invoiced upon delivery of major components
Z is the percentage invoiced upon completion of installation or product available for first patient use, whichever occurs first.
If DEMO Equipment is included in this quotation it is sold under the Contact No. Contract Name/Contract Number ("Contract")
of the products/solution included in this quotation.
All amounts in this quote are in CAD
Q-00128598 Page 25 of 36
5. Signature Page
Invoice to:
7000 Westminster Hwy
Richmond, BC V6X 1A2
Total Price
Total Net Price $ 270,000.00
Acceptance by Parties
Each Quotation solution is issued pursuant to and will reference a specific Contract Name/Contract Number (“Contract”)
representing an agreement containing discounts, fees and any specific terms and conditions which will apply to that single
quoted solution. Any PO for the items herein will be accepted subject to the terms of that Contract. If no Contract is shown,
Philips Terms and Conditions of Sale including applicable product warranty or Philips Terms of Service (“Philips Terms”)
located in the Philips Standard Terms and Conditions of the quotation shall solely apply to the quoted solution.
Each equipment system and/or service listed on purchase order/orders represents a separate and distinct financial
transaction. We understand and agree that each transaction is to be individually billed and paid. This quotation contains
confidential and proprietary information of Philips Healthcare and is intended for use only by the customer whose name
appears on this quotation. It may not be disclosed to third parties without prior written consent of Philips Healthcare.
This quotation provides contract agreement discounts and does not reflect rebates that may be earned by Customer, under
separate written rebate agreements, from cumulative volume purchases beyond the individual quantity being ordered under
this quote. Customer is reminded that rebates constitute discounts under government laws which are reportable by
Customers.
Price above do not include sales taxes

Tax Status: Taxable ____________ Tax Exempt ____________
If Exempt, please indicate the Exemption Certification Number: _____________________________________, and attach a
copy of the certificate.
If you do not issue formal purchase orders indicate by initialing here: ______________________
Requested Delivery Date ____________
Our facility does issue formal purchase orders, however, due to our business/system limitation, we cannot issue a formal
purchase order until _______ days prior to warranty expiration. Initialed: ________
CUSTOMER SIGNATURE PHILIPS SIGNATURE

by its authorized representative by its authorized representative
Signature: __________________________ Signature: __________________________
Print Name: __________________________ Print Name: __________________________
Title: __________________________ Title: __________________________
__________________________ __________________________
__________________________ __________________________
Date: __________________________ Date: __________________________
Q-00128598 Page 26 of 36
6. Philips Standard Terms and Condition
General Terms and Conditions of Sale and Software License
("Conditions of Sale")
1. Initial Provisions Philips shall be entitled to make changes to the design or specifications of
the Products at any time, provided such change does not adversely affect
1.1 The Products (equipment, service, and software) offered on the the performance of the Products.
quotation by the Philips legal entity identified thereon are subject to these
Conditions of Sale. 5. Lease and Trade In
1.2 The purchase prices set out on the quotation are net of all taxes. All 5.1 If the Customer desires to convert the purchase of any Products to a
taxes on the Products will be borne by the Customer. Customer shall provide lease, the Customer shall within ninety (90) prior to the delivery of the
Philips with an appropriate exemption certificate in advance of the date the Products provide all relevant rental documents for review and approval by
Product is available for delivery or Customer shall pay all taxes per Philips’ Philips. Philips may provide the rental agreement at its discretion.The
invoice. Customer is responsible for converting the transaction to a lease and is
required to secure the leasing company's approval of all of these Terms and
2. Quotation, Order and Payment Conditions of Sale. No product will be delivered to the Customer until Philips
has received copies of the fully executed lease documents and has approved
2.1 Any quotation on the Products will be open for acceptance within the the same. For any lease, if the lease does not fund then: (i) Customer
period indicated therein and may be amended or revoked by Philips prior to guarantees the payment of all monies due or that may become due under
Customer's acceptance. Any purchase orders shall be subject to Philips' this agreement; (ii) Philips may convert the lease back to a purchase and
confirmation in writing. Any terms and conditions set forth on the invoice Customer; accordingly, and (iii) Customer will pay all such invoiced
Customer's purchase order or otherwise issued by the Customer shall not amounts per the invoice terms. In the event that there are multiple solutions
apply to the Products. on one quote, the solution with the longest period for converting the
transaction to a lease shall prevail.
2.2 The prices and payment terms are set out on the quotation. Orders are
subject to Philips' ongoing credit review and approval.If the quotation 5.2 Rentals. Philips may provide a rental agreement at its discretion.
indicates net prices that are each associated with a payment method then
Philips will invoice Customer, and Customer will pay the net price that 5.3 In the event Customer will be trading-in equipment ("Trade-In"), the
corresponds to the payment method that Customer elected in its purchase Customer will provide the following:
order or signed quote. Prior to invoice, Customer may modify the payment
method by providing Philips with an amended purchase order that reflects 5.3.1 Customer undertakes to possess good and marketable title to the
the new payment method and corresponding price. Trade-In as of the date of the quotation and when Philips takes possession of
the Trade-in from Customer’s site. In the event Customer is in breach of this
2.3 Customer shall pay interest on any amount not paid when due at the undertaking, Customer shall not be entitled to keep a trade-in credit for
annual rate of twelve percent (12%) in the case of the U.S. which may be such Trade-In and shall promptly refund Philips such credited amounts upon
billed on a monthly basis or at the maximum rate permitted by applicable receipt of an invoice from Philips. Customer consents to Philips registering
law for all other markets. If the Customer fails to pay any amounts due or its security interest in the Trade-In and to providing all assistance
breaches these Conditions of Sale, Philips will be entitled to suspend the reasonably required by Philip to do so. Possession and title to the Trade-In
performance of its obligations and deduct the unpaid amount from any shall pass from the Customer to Philips on the date the Trade-In system is
amounts otherwise owed to Customer by Philips, in addition to any other removed from the Customer site by Philips or its representative.
rights or remedies available to Philips. Philips shall be entitled to recover all
costs and expenses, including reasonable attorneys' fees related to the 5.3.2. The trade-in value set forth on Philips quotation is conditioned upon
enforcement of its rights or remedies. Customer providing Trade-In no later than the date specified by Philips in
writing. Customer shall bear the costs of any reduction in trade-in value
2.4 Customer has no right to cancel an order, unless such cancellation right arising due to a delay by the Customer causing the trade-in not to occur by
is granted to the Customer by mandatory law in which case the Customer the specified date and promptly pay the revised invoice.
shall pay the costs incurred by Philips up to the date of cancellation. In other 5.3.3 Customer shall permit Philips to inspect the Trade-In before the
cases of cancellation, Customer shall pay a 15% cancellation fee. Customer Trade-In is removed from the Customer site. In the event Philips receives a
acknowledges that the cancellation fee amount set out in this Section is a Trade-In having a different configuration (including software version) or
payment of liquidated damages which is a genuine pre-estimate of model number than the Trade- In described on the Philips quotation, Philips
the damages that the Philips will suffer as a result of the event giving rise to reserves the right to adjust the trade in value and revise the invoice
accordingly and Customer shall pay such revised invoice promptly upon
such payment and is not a penalty. receipt.
The following additional terms apply to Canadian sales of Philips Products: 5.3.4 Upon handover of the Trade-In to Philips, Customer shall provide a
clear path for the removal of the Trade-In, and make any necessary
2.5 Philips may make partial or early shipments and Customer will pay such modifications to the room or building for the removal or rigging of the
invoice based on the date of invoice for each product in accordance with the Trade-In system out of the building. Customer undertakes to (i) clean and
payment terms set forth in the quotation. sanitize all components that may be infected and all biological fluids from
the Trade-In; (ii) drain any applicable chiller lines and cap any associated
2.6 Payments may be made by check, ACH or wire. Philips does not accept plumbing and (iii) delete all Customer confidential data and all personal data
transaction fees for wire transfers. All check payments over $50,000 CAD in the Trade-In. Customer agrees to reimburse Philips against any
must be paid via eCheck or via Philips prepaid FedEx account with tracking out-of-pocket costs incurred by Philips arising from Customer’s breach of its
to secure against fraud and misappropriation. obligations herein. To the extent applicable to a Trade-In, Customer agrees
that any existing maintenance agreement will be automatically terminated
3. Retention of title until full payment upon removal of the Trade-In.
Philips is entitled to retain a security interest in the Philips Products until 6. Shipment and delivery date
Philips receives full payment.
6.1 Philips shall deliver the Products in accordance with the Incoterms set
4. Technical changes; obsolescence of the Product forth on the quotation. If Philips and the Customer agree any other terms of
delivery, additional costs shall be for the account of the Customer.
Q-00128598 Page 27 of 36
6.2 Philips will make reasonable efforts to meet delivery dates quoted or 9.3 Stand-alone Licensed Software Products. Philips warrants that the
acknowledged. Failure to deliver by the specified date will not be a sufficient Stand-alone Licensed Software shall substantially conform to the technical
cause for cancellation nor will Philips be liable for any penalty, loss, or specification for a period of ninety (90) days from the date Philips makes
expense due to delay in delivery. If the Customer causes the delay, any such Stand-alone Licensed Software available to the Customer. “Stand-alone
reasonable expenses incurred by Philips will be paid by Customer, including Licensed Software” means Licensed Software sold without a
all storage fees, transportation expenses, and related costs. If the delay is contemporaneous purchase of a server for the Licensed Software.
more than fourteen (14) days, the Customer shall pay the full purchase price
for the Products immediately to Philips. 9.4 Service. Philips warrants that all services will be carried out with
reasonable care and skill. Philips’ sole liability for breach of this warranty
7. Installation shall be at its option to give credit for or re-perform the services in question.
This warranty shall only extend for a period of ninety (90) days after the
7.1 If Philips has undertaken installation of the Products, the Customer shall completion of the services.
be responsible for the following at its sole expense and risk:
7.1.1 The provision of adequate and lockable storage for the Products on or 9.5 Customer shall only be entitled to make a Product warranty claim if
near the installation site. Additionally, Customers shall consider the mfg. Philips receives written notice of the defect during the warranty period
labeling requirements for environmental and storge conditions, as within ten (10) days from the Customer discovering the defect, and, if
applicable. The Customer will repair or replace any lost or damaged item required, the Product or the defective parts shall be returned to an address
during the storage period. stated by Philips. Such defective parts shall be the property of Philips after
7.1.2 Philips or its (affiliate’s) representative shall have access to the their replacement.
installation site without obstacle or hindrance in due time to start the
installation work at the scheduled date. 9.6 Philips’ warranty obligations for the Product shall be limited at Philips’
7.1.3 The timely execution and completion of the preparatory works, in option to the repair or replacement of the Product or any part thereof, in
conformity with Philips’ installation requirements. The Customer shall which case the spare parts shall be new or equivalent to new in
ensure that the prepared site shall comply with all safety, electrical and performance, or to the refund of a pro rata portion of the purchase price
building codes relevant to the Products and installation thereof. paid by the Customer solely after a reasonable cure period is given to
7.1.4 The proper removal and disposal of any hazardous material at the Philips.
installation site prior to installation by Philips.
7.1.5 The timely provision of all documentation necessary for visa, entry, 9.7 Philips’ warranty obligations shall not apply to any defects resulting
exit, residence, work or any other permits and licenses necessary for Philips’ from:
or Philips’ representatives’ personnel and for the import and export of tools, 9.7.1 improper or unsuitable maintenance, configuration or calibration by
equipment, Products and materials necessary for the installation works and the Customer or its agents.
subsequent testing. 9.7.2 use, operation, modification, or maintenance of the Product not in
7.1.6 The assistance to Philips or Philips’ representative for moving the accordance with the Product specification and the applicable written
Products from the entrance of the Customer's premises to the installation instructions of Philips or performed prior to the completion of Philips’
site. The Customer shall be responsible, at its expense, for rigging, the validation process.
removal of partitions or other obstacles, and restoration work. 9.7.3 abuse, negligence, accident, damages (including damage in transit)
caused by the Customer.
7.2 If Products are connected to a computer network, the Customer shall be 9.7.4 improper site preparation, including corrosion to Product caused by
responsible for network security, including but not limited to, using secure Customer.
administrative passwords, installing the latest security updates of operating 9.7.5 any damage to the Product or any medical data or other data stored,
software and web browsers, running a Customer firewall and maintaining caused by an external source (including viruses or similar software
up-to-date drivers, anti-virus and anti-spyware software. interference) resulting from the connection of the Product to a Customer
network, Customer client devices, a third party product or use of removable
7.3 If any of the above conditions are not complied with, Philips or Philips’ devices.
representative may interrupt the installation and subsequent testing for
reasons not attributable to Philips, and the parties shall extend the period 9.8 Philips is not responsible for the warranty for the third-party product
for completing the installation. Any additional costs shall be for the provided by Philips to the Customer and Customer shall make any warranty
Customer's account and Philips shall have no liability for any damage claims directly with such vendors. However, if Philips, under its license
resulting from or in connection with the delayed installation. agreement or purchase agreement with such third party, has right to
warranties and service solutions, Philips shall make reasonable efforts to
7.4 Philips shall have no liability for the fitness or adequacy of the premises extend to the Customer the third-party warranty and service solutions for
or the utilities available at the premises for installation or storage of the such Products.
Products.
9.9 During the term of the warranty and any customer service arrangement
8. Product Damages and returns the Customer shall provide Philips with a dedicated high-speed broadband
internet connection suitable to establish a remote connection to the
Products in order for Philips to provide remote servicing of the Products by:
The following Section shall apply solely to medical consumables. 9.9.1 supporting the installation of a Philips approved router (or a
Customer-owned router acceptable for Philips) for connection to the
The Customer shall notify Philips in writing substantiating its complaints Products and Customer network (which router remains Philips property if
within ten (10) days from its receipt of the Products. If Philips accepts the provided by Philips and is only provided during the warranty term).
9.9.2 maintaining a secure location for hardware to connect the Products to
claim as valid, Philips shall issue a return authorization notice, and the the Philips Remote Service Data Center (PRSDC).
Customer shall return the Products. Each returned Product shall be packed 9.9.3 providing and maintaining a free IP address within the site network to
in its original packaging. be used to connect the Products to the Customer’s network.
9.9.4 maintaining the so established connection throughout the applicable
9. Product warranty period.
9.9.5 facilitating the reconnection to Philips in case any temporary
9.1 In the absence of any specific Product warranty in the quotation, the disconnection occurs.
following warranty provisions will apply to the Product. If Customer fails to provide the access described in this section and the
Product is not connected to the PRSDC (including any temporary
9.2 Hardware Products. Philips warrants to Customer that the Product shall disconnection), Customer accepts any related impact on Products
materially comply with its product specification on the quotation and the availability, additional cost, and speed of resolution.
user documentation accompanying the shipment of such Product for a 9.9.6 THE WARRANTIES SET FORTH IN THIS CONDITIONS OF SALE AND
period of one (1) year from the date of acceptance or first clinical use, QUOTATION ARE THE SOLE WARRANTIES MADE BY PHILIPS IN CONNECTION
whichever occurs first, but under any circumstances, no more than fifteen WITH THE PRODUCT, ARE EXPRESSLY IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTIES,
(15) months from the date of shipment, provided the Product has been WHETHER WRITTEN, ORAL, STATUTORY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING
subject to proper use and maintenance. Any disposable Product intended for ANY WARRANTY OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, QUIET ENJOYMENT,
single use supplied by Philips to the Customer will be of good quality until MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. PHILIPS
the expiration date applicable to such Product.
Q-00128598 Page 28 of 36
EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY (i) supplied in accordance with Customer's design, specifications or
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULR PURPOSE. MOREOVER, PHILIPS DOES NOT instructions and compliance therewith has caused Philips to deviate from its
WARRANT ANY PRODUCT USING THE CLOUD TO BE UNINTERRUPTED OR normal course of performance.
ERROR FREE. (ii) modified by Customer or its contractors after delivery.
(iii) not updated by Customer in accordance with instructions provided by
10. Limitation of Liability Philips (e.g. software updates).
(iv) combined by Customer or its contractors with devices, software,
10.1 THE TOTAL LIABILITY OF PHILIPS ARISING UNDER OR IN CONNECTION methods, systems, or processes not furnished hereunder and the third-party
claim is based on such modification or combination.
WITH THE PRODUCT FOR ANY BREACH OF CONTRACTUAL OBLIGATIONS, The above states Philips’ sole liability and Customer’s exclusive remedy in
WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, UNLAWFUL ACT OR OTHERWISE IN CONNECTION respect of third-party intellectual property claims.
WITH THE PRODUCT IS LIMITED TO THE ACTUAL PURCHASE PRICE RECEIVED
FOR THE PRODUCT THAT GAVE RISE TO THE CLAIM. 12. Use and exclusivity of Product documents
10.2 PHILIPS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, PUNITIVE, All documents and manuals including technical information related to the
INCIDENTAL, EXEMPLARY, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES AND/OR Products and its maintenance as delivered by Philips is the proprietary
FOR ANY DAMAGES INCLUDING, LOSS OF DATA, PROFITS, REVENUE, information of Philips, covered by Philips’ copyright, and remains the
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR USE IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT property of Philips, and as such, it shall not be copied, reproduced,
OF THESE CONDITIONS OF SALE, REGARDLESS OF WHETHER THEY ARE transmitted or disclosed to or used by third parties without the prior written
FORESEEABLE OR NOT AND WHETHER THE CLAIM IS MADE IN TORT consent of Philips.
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), BREACH OF CONTRACT, AT LAW OR IN EQUITY.
NEITHER PHILIPS NOR PHILIPS’ SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOSS 13. Export Control and Product Resale
OR INABILITY TO USE MEDICAL OR OTHER DATA STORED ON OR BY THE
PRODUCT. 13.1 Customer agrees to comply with relevant export control and sanction
laws and regulations, including the UN, EU or US (“Export Laws”), to ensure
10.3 THE EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY IN THESE CONDITIONS OF SALE SHALL that the Products are not (i) exported or re-exported directly or indirectly in
ONLY APPLY TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED UNDER THE APPLICABLE LAW. violation of Export Laws; or (ii) used for any purposes prohibited by the
Export Laws, including military end-use, human rights abuses, nuclear,
10.4 FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS, THE FOLLOWING ARE NOT SUBJECT TO chemical or biological weapons proliferation.
THE LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY UNDER SECTION 10.1:
10.4.1 THIRD PARTY CLAIMS FOR DIRECT DAMAGES FOR BODILY INJURY 13.2 Customer represents that (i) Customer is not located in a country that
OR DEATH TO THE EXTENT CAUSED BY PHILIPS’ NEGLIGENCE OR PROVEN is subject to a UN, US or EU embargo and trade restriction; and (ii) Customer
PRODUCT DEFECT. is not listed on any UN, EU, US export and sanctions list of prohibited or
10.4.2 CLAIMS OF TANGIBLE PROPERTY DAMAGE REPRESENTING THE restricted parties.
ACTUAL COST TO REPAIR OR REPLACE PHYSICAL PROPERTY TO THE EXTENT
CAUSED BY PHILIPS NEGLIGENCE OR PROVEN PRODUCT DEFECT. 13.3 Philips may suspend its obligation to fulfil any order or subsequent
10.4.3 OUT OF POCKET COSTS INCURRED BY CUSTOMER TO PROVIDE service if the delivery is restricted under Export Laws or an export/import
PATIENT NOTIFICATIONS, REQUIRED BY LAW, TO THE EXTENT SUCH NOTICES license is not granted by relevant authorities.
ARE CAUSED BY PHILIPS UNAUTHORIZED DISCLOSURE OF PROTECTED 14. License Software Terms
HEALTH INFORMATION.
10.4.4 FINES/PENALTIES LEVIED AGAINST CUSTOMER BY GOVERNMENT 14.1 Subject to any usage limitations set forth on the quotation, Philips
AGENCIES CITING PHILIPS’ UNAUTHORIZED DISCLOSURE OF PROTECTED grants to Customer a non-exclusive, non-transferable license, without the
HEALTH INFORMATION AS THE BASIS OF THE FINE/PENALTY, ANY SUCH right to grant sub-licenses, to incorporate and use the Licensed Software (as
specified on the quotation, whether embedded or stand-alone) in Licensed
FINES OR PENALTIES SHALL CONSTITUTE DIRECT DAMAGES. Products and the permitted use (as referenced in the quotation) in
accordance with these Conditions of Sale.
11. Infringement of Intellectual Property Rights to the Products
The Licensed Software is licensed and not sold. All intellectual property
11.1 Philips will, at its option and expense, defend or settle any suit or rights in the Licensed Software shall remain with Philips.
proceeding brought against Customer based on any third party claim that
any Product or use thereof for its intended purpose constitutes an Customer may make one copy of the Licensed Software in machine-readable
infringement of any intellectual property rights in the country where the form solely for backup purposes. Philips reserves the right to charge for
Product is delivered by Philips. backup copies created by Philips. Customer may not reproduce, sell, assign,
transfer or sublicense the Licensed Software. Customer shall preserve the
11.2 Customer will promptly give Philips written notice of such claim and confidential nature of the Licensed Software and shall not disclose or
the authority, information and assistance needed to defend such claim. transfer any portion of the Licensed Software to any third party.
Philips shall have the full and exclusive authority to defend and settle such
claim. Customer shall not make any admission which might be prejudicial to Customer shall maintain Philips’ copyright notice or other proprietary
Philips and shall not enter a settlement without Philips’ prior written legends on any copies of the Licensed Software. Customer shall not (and
consent. shall not allow any third party to) decompile, disassemble, or reverse
engineer the Licensed Software.
11.3 If the Product is held to constitute infringement of any intellectual
property right and its use by Customer is enjoined, Philips will, at its option 14.2 The Licensed Software may only be used in relation to Licensed
and expense, either: (i) procure for Customer the right to continue using the Products or systems certified by Philips. If Customer modifies the Licensed
Product; (ii) replace it with an equivalent non-infringing Product; (iii) modify Software in any manner, all warranties associated with the Licensed
the Product so it becomes non-infringing; or (iv) refund to the Customer a Software and the Products shall become null and void. Customer installation
pro rata portion of the Products’ purchase price upon the return of the of Philips’ issued patches or updates shall not be deemed to be a
original Products. modification.
11.4 Philips will have no duty or obligation under this clause 11 if the Philips and its affiliates shall be free to use any feedback or suggestions for
infringement is caused by a Product being: modification or enhancement of the Licensed Software provided by
Customer, for the purpose of modifying or enhancing the Licensed Software
as well as for licensing such enhancements to third parties.
Q-00128598 Page 29 of 36
With respect to any third party licensed software, the Customer agrees to Customer Data to enable business continuity (“Run-Out Period”) after which
comply with the terms applicable to such licensed software. Customer shall it will terminate by operation of law.
indemnify Philips for any damage arising from its failure to comply with such
terms. If the third party licensor terminates the third party license, Philips 16.6 Obligations of Customer
shall be entitled to terminate the third party license with the Customer and Customer shall Process Customer Data in compliance with the applicable
make reasonable effort to procure a solution. laws, including when acquiring Customer Data and when instructing Philips
to Process Customer Data.
15. Confidentiality
16.7 Obligations of Philips
If any of the parties have access to confidential information of the other 16.7.1 Philips shall Process Customer Data only: (i) on behalf and for the
party, it shall keep this information confidential. Such information shall only benefit of Customer; (ii) in accordance with the instructions of Customer as
be used if and to the extent that it is necessary to carry out the concerned
transactions. This obligation does not extend to public domain information documented in this privacy clause; (iii) for the provision of the services; and
and/or information that is disclosed by operation of law or court order. For (iv) to the extent required or permitted by the applicable laws that Philips is
Canadian Customers, nothing herein shall prohibit Customer from disclosing subject to.
confidential information required by provincial or federal open records or 16.7.2 Philips shall not disclose Customer Data to any third party without
access to information laws, to the extent disclosed in compliance with the
rules and procedures applicable thereto, including notifying Philips and the prior written approval of Customer, except where such disclosure is
providing Philips an opportunity to argue certain information may be required or permitted to: (i) perform the services; (ii) comply with a legal
exempt as a trade secret, if applicable thereunder. obligation; or (iii) comply with a valid and binding order of a governmental
16. Compliance with Laws and Privacy body or court.
16.7.3 Philips shall ensure that its employees and any other person
16.1 Each party shall comply with all laws, rules, and regulations applicable authorized to Process Customer Data: (i) are informed of the confidential
to the party in connection with the performance of its obligations in nature of the Customer Data; (ii) will have access to Customer Data only to
connection with the transactions contemplated by the quotation, including, the extent necessary to perform the services; and (iii) have committed
but not limited to, privacy, health and safety, anti-bribery, and corruption
laws. themselves to confidentiality or are under an appropriate statutory
obligation of confidentiality.
16.2 Processing of personal data: In relation to the provision of services, 16.7.4 Philips shall maintain appropriate technical and organizational
Philips may process information, in any form, that can relate to identified or measures to safeguard security (including protection against unauthorized
identifiable individuals, which may qualify as personal data. Philips and/or
its affiliates will: a) process personal data on behalf and by instruction of the or unlawful Processing and Personal Data Breaches, confidentiality and
Customer, the terms, rights and responsibilities of the Parties for such integrity of Customer Data), as set forth in the relevant security
processing of personal data are set forth in this clause 16; and b) process documentation provided by Philips or as otherwise agreed between the
information such as log files or device parameters (which may contain parties.
personal data), to provide the services and to enable its compliance with
and performance of its task as manufacturer of (medical) devices under the 16.7.5 Philips shall notify Customer, without undue delay, if Philips
applicable regulations and standards (including but not limited to the becomes aware of a Personal Data Breach. Such notification may be
performance of vigilance, post market surveillance and clinical evaluation delivered to one or more of Customer’s representatives by any means
related activities). Philips selects, including via email. Philips shall undertake reasonable efforts
16.3 Customer agrees that Philips and/or its affiliates may use any data, to identify the cause of a Personal Data Breach and take those steps, as
other than personal data, generated by a Product and/or otherwise Philips deems necessary and reasonable, to remediate the cause of such
provided by Customer to Philips for Philips’ own legitimate business Personal Data Breach to the extent the remediation is within Philips’
purposes including, but not limited to, for data analytics activities to reasonable control.
determine trends of usage and advise on the use of products and services,
for research, product and service development and improvement (including 16.7.6 Taking into account the nature of the services, Philips shall take
the development of new offerings), substantiation of marketing claims and reasonable steps to assist Customer, at Customer’s expense, with
for benchmarking purposes. Customer further acknowledges and agrees appropriate technical and organizational measures, insofar as reasonably
that all telephone conversations between Philips and Customer may, in possible, in the fulfilment of Customer’s obligation to respond to requests
Philips’ discretion, be recorded.
from an Individual to exercise its rights as set forth by the applicable laws.
16.4 Scope, roles of the parties and definition 16.7.7 Upon the termination of the relevant services, Customer
16.4.1 This data privacy clause applies when Personal Data are provided to instructs Philips to delete Customer Data that are no longer required for the
Philips and Processed by Philips on behalf and by instruction of Customer for performance of the services or alternatively to anonymize such Customer
the provision of the services (“Customer Data”).
16.4.2 Parties acknowledge and agree that regarding the Processing of Data in such a way that the Individual cannot be identified, unless Philips is
Customer Data, Philips will act as Processor for Customer, who acts as required or permitted to retain certain Personal Data in accordance with the
Controller (or Processor). If Customer is a Processor, Customer warrants applicable laws. Once such Customer Data are anonymized, Customer
that its instructions and actions with respect to the Customer Data have authorizes Philips to process the anonymized data for its own purposes.
been authorized by the relevant Controller.
16.4.3 The definitions used in this clause have the same meaning as in the 16.7.8 Philips shall make available to Customer all information
EU General Data Protection Regulation 2016/67 (“GDPR”). necessary to demonstrate compliance with its obligations under Article 28
GDPR. Philips shall take reasonable steps to cooperate with and assist
16.5 Processing of Customer Data and termination Customer, at Customer’s expense, to comply with Customer’s obligations
16.5.1 The subject matter of the Processing of Customer Data is the
provision of the services, as described in the quotation. The nature of the under GDPR. Philips will, at its discretion: a) provide to Customer a
Processing of Customer Data may include: hosting and storage; computing; certification issued by a qualified independent third party assessor that
service change management; technical support/issue resolution and such Philips’ business processes and procedures involving the Processing of
other services set forth in the relevant documentation made available by Customer Data comply with this data privacy clause; or b) make available
Philips or otherwise agreed between the parties. The categories of
Individuals whose Personal Data will be subject to Processing by Philips the facilities it uses for the Processing of Customer Data for an audit by a
include: any individuals whose Personal Data is provided to Philips via the qualified independent third party assessor at Philips’ selection and at
services, such as patients or Customer’s personnel, suppliers, and end-users. Customer’s cost, provided such auditor has executed a written
The categories of Customer Data may include: any Personal Data provided confidentiality agreement acceptable to Philips. Audits will be conducted no
to Philips such as health-related data.
16.5.2 This data privacy clause remains in effect during the term of the more than once per year, during regular business hours and with minimal
(warranty) service being rendered by Philips and, if applicable, a period of disruption to Philips’ business, and will be subject to 6 weeks prior notice to
three (3) months after the term, during which Philips may keep Processing
Q-00128598 Page 30 of 36
Philips and to a detailed written audit plan approved by Philips and Philips’ notices to individuals to allow Philips and its subcontractors to process
policies, including those on health and safety, security and confidentiality. Personal Data for the purposes set out herein.
16.8 Sub-Processors 17. Force majeure

16.8.1 Customer hereby grants to Philips a specific authorization for the
following Processors engaged by Philips and its affiliates to Process 17.1 Each party shall not be liable in respect of the non-performance of any
of its obligations to the extent such performance is prevented by any
Customer Data (“Sub-Processors”): (a) Philips’ affiliates; and (b) those circumstances beyond its reasonable control, including, but not limited to,
entities listed on https://www.philips.com/a-w/privacy.html. Customer acts of God, war, civil war, insurrection, fire, flood, labor disputes,
hereby grants to Philips a general authorization to engage third party epidemics, pandemic, cyber-attack, act of terrorism, governmental
Sub-Processors. This authorization constitutes Customer’s prior written regulations and/or similar acts, embargoes, export control sanctions or
restrictions, Philips’ unavailability regarding any required permits, licenses
consent to the subcontracting by Philips of the Processing of Customer Data. and/or authorizations, default or force majeure of suppliers or
16.8.2 Philips shall inform Customer of any changes to the Sub-Processors subcontractors.
on the URL specified in clause 16.8.1. Customer may object to Philips’ use of
a new Sub-Processor in case of reasonable and substantiated concerns 17.2 If force majeure prevents Philips from fulfilling any order from the
Customer or otherwise performing any obligation arising out of the sale,
regarding the protection of Personal Data, by notifying Philips in writing Philips shall not be liable to the Customer for any compensation,
within ten (10) business days after Philips’ notification to Customer. If reimbursement, or damages.
Customer does not inform Philips of any objections within the stipulated
period, the new Sub-Processor will be deemed accepted by Customer. In the 18. Miscellaneous
event Customer objects to a new Sub-Processor, Philips will undertake 18.1 Any newly manufactured Product provided may contain selected
reasonable efforts to find a mutually acceptable solution and if not found remanufactured parts equivalent to new in terms of performance.
within sixty (60) days, Customer may terminate those services that cannot
be provided without the use of the objected-to new Sub-Processor. This 18.2 If the Customer becomes insolvent, unable to pay its debts as they fall
due, files for bankruptcy or is subject to it, has appointed a recipient, is
termination right is Customer’s sole and exclusive remedy if Customer subject to a late fee on payments (temporary or permanent), or has its
objects to any Sub-Processor. assets assigned or frozen, Philips may cancel any unfulfilled obligations or
16.8.3 When Philips engages a new Sub-Processor, Philips: (a) shall enter suspend its performance; provided that, however, the Customer’s financial
into a written agreement with each Sub-Processor containing data obligations to Philips shall remain in full force and effect.
protection obligations not less protective than those in this clause 16; and 18.3 If any provision of these Conditions of Sale is found to be unlawful,
(b) subject to the terms set forth in this Conditions of Sale, shall be liable for unenforceable, or invalid, in whole or in part, the validity and enforceability
the acts and omissions of its Sub-Processors regarding the Processing of of the remaining provisions shall remain in full force and effect. In lieu of any
Customer Data to the same extent Philips would be liable when performing provision deemed to be unlawful, unenforceable or invalid, in whole or in
part, a provision reflecting the original intent of these Conditions of Sale, to
the services of each Sub-Processor itself under the terms of this clause. the extent permitted by the applicable law, shall be deemed to be a
16.8.4 Transfers of Customer Data substitute for that provision.
Without prejudice to any applicable data restrictions specified in the
Conditions of Sale, Philips may Process Customer Data globally as necessary 18.4 Notices or other communications shall be given in writing and shall be
deemed effective if they are delivered in person or if they are sent by courier
to perform the services. To the extent Customer transfers Customer Data to or mail to the relevant party.
Philips or Philips’ affiliates that will Process such Customer Data outside the
European Economic Area, the Philips Processor BCRs (which are 18.5 The failure by the Customer or Philips at any time to require
incorporated by reference and form an integral part of this Conditions of compliance with any obligation shall not affect the right to require its
enforcement at any time thereafter.
Sale; and are accessible on https://www.philips.com/privacy) shall apply to
such transfer. To the extent a Philips entity in the European Economic Area 18.6 Philips may assign or novate its rights and obligations in whole or in
will make use of a third party Sub-Processor which will Process Customer part, to any of its affiliates or may assign any of its accounts receivable to
Data outside the European Economic Area, Philips shall enter into the any party without Customer’s consent. Customer agrees to execute any
documents that may be necessary to complete Philips’ assignment or
applicable EC Standard Contractual Clauses with such Sub-Processor, unless novation. The Customer shall not, without the prior written consent of
the European Commission has issued an adequacy decision for the country Philips, transfer or assign any of its rights or obligations.
in which the Sub-Processor Processes Customer Data.
16.8.5 Canadian Customers 18.7 The Customer’s obligations do not depend on any other obligations it
may have under any other agreement or arrangement with Philips. The
For those Customers where Canadian Federal and/or Provincial privacy laws Customer shall not exercise any offset right in the quotation or sale in
(“Canadian Privacy Laws”) apply, Philips and Customer will comply with relation to any other agreement or arrangement with Philips.
Canadian Privacy Laws in fulfilling their respective obligations hereunder.
To the extent of any inconsistency between this Section and applicable 18.8 These Conditions of Sale shall be governed by the laws of the country,
province, or state wherein the Philips legal entity identified in the quotation
Canadian Privacy Laws in respect of the treatment of Personal Data, the is situated, and the parties submit to the exclusive jurisdiction of the courts
higher standard shall prevail. Customer acknowledges that Philips may be of that country, province, or state, provided that Philips will be entitled to
required, in limited circumstances, to store or grant access to Personal Data start legal proceedings against the Customer in any other court of
to the original equipment manufacturer (OEM) or its affiliates located competent jurisdiction. The United Nations Convention on Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods is expressly excluded.
outside of Canada. Unless otherwise permitted by law, such disclosure will
be limited to exceptional circumstances where it is necessary for the 18.9 Philips may use subcontractors, which may include its affiliates or an
purposes of installing, implementing, maintaining, repairing, trouble Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM), in the performance of its services
shooting or upgrading the equipment, or where data recovery assistance under these Conditions of Sale, including with respect to any after-sales
services.
from the OEM is necessary. Where required by law, any such disclosure will
be limited to temporary access and storage for the minimum time necessary 18.10 Customer will report immediately to Philips any event of which
for the purpose and only as required in order to meet the requirements of Customer becomes aware that suggests that any services or products
this Agreement. Customer acknowledges and agrees that Customer is provided by Philips, for any reason:
(a) may have caused or contributed to a death or serious injury, or (b) have
responsible for obtaining all required consents and providing all required malfunctioned where and such malfunctions would be likely to cause or
contribute to a death or serious injury if the malfunction were to occur
Q-00128598 Page 31 of 36
again. Additionally, Customer will also report to Philips complaints it
receives from its personnel and patients or any other person regarding the
identity, quality, performance, reliability, safety, effectiveness, labels or
instructions for use of the services or products provided by Philips. Philips
shall be solely responsible for submitting any filings or reports to any
governmental authorities with respect to the Philips products and services
provided by Philips hereunder, unless otherwise required by law.
18.11 These Conditions of Sale may be executed by electronic signature. The
parties confirm that it is their express wish that these Conditions of Sale as
well as any other documents relating to these Conditions of Sale, including
notices, schedules, and authorizations, have been and shall be drawn up in
English language only. Les parties aux présentes confirment leur volonté
expresse que cette Conditions de vente, de même que tous les documents
s’y rattachant, y compris tous avis, annexes et autorisations s’y rattachant,
soient rédigés en langue anglaise seulement.
19. Product specific terms

Product specific schedules are incorporated herein as they apply to the
Products listed in the quotation and their additional terms shall apply solely
to the Products specified therein. If any terms set forth in the Product
specific schedules conflict with terms set forth in these Conditions of Sale,
the terms set forth in the Product specific schedule shall take precedent.
Q-00128598 Page 32 of 36
Schedule 1
Imaging Systems Portfolio (IS)
Product Category Products

Interventional X-Ray (iXR)
Image Guided Therapy (IGT) Mobile C-Arms (Surg)
Philips Image Guided Therapy Corporation (IGTD)
fka Volcano
Imaging Clinical Applications (ICAP) IntelliSpace Portal (ISP)
Digital X-Ray (DXR)
Computed Tomography (CT)
Magnetic Resonance (MR)
Diagnostic Imaging OEM Imaging Components (Coils)
Positron Emission Tomography (PET/CT)
Advanced Molecular Imaging (SPECT & SPECT/CT)
Radiation Oncology (PROS)
1. Additional Customer Installation Obligations for Magnetic Resonance (MR)

1.1 Customer shall provide any and all site preparation and shall be in compliance with all radio frequency (RF) or magnetic shielding and acoustical suppression
and building codes relevant to the Product and its installation and use.
1.2 If applicable, Customer's contractor or Customer's architect is required to provide detailed information on the proposed Helium Exhaust Pipe for their MRI
system prior to installation to ensure safety specifications are being met.
Required Details include:
1.2.1 Architectural drawing or sketch with complete dimensions including lengths, bending radii, bending angles, and pipe diameters for entire Helium
Exhaust Pipe run from RF enclosure to discharge location.
1.2.2 Completed Helium Exhaust Pipe Verification Checklist (Provided by Local Philips Project Manager)
1.2.3 Picture showing the area where the Helium Exhaust Pipe will discharge.
1.3 If applicable, Magnets will not be released for delivery unless and until Helium Exhaust Pipe details are provided for verification and have been confirmed to
meet all life safety specifications.
1.4 Costs of equipment preservation, to ensure a high quality system, will be passed to the Customer if the installation site is not ready due to delays not caused
by Philips. Additionally, climate control costs during and after equipment installation are also the responsibility of the Customer. Preservation of equipment
is required to prevent exposing equipment to the negative effects of a non-climate-controlled construction environment, where there is dust or high
humidity. Climate control could include costs associated with ensuring a climate- controlled environment. Activities and expenses required for preservation
may include time, materials, and transportation to package and seal, and transport the equipment to a controlled environment to prevent dust from
entering the equipment. For MR, as may be applicable, this includes the consumption of Helium for life support.
2. Further use of System Data.

Mandatory Data. Customer acknowledges and agrees that by executing this Agreement and using the Licensed Software, it has agreed that product inventory
and crash signature data generated by the Licensed Software shall be delivered into the custody of Philips, or of systems maintained on Philips’ behalf, without
notice to Customer. Such data is referred to herein as “Mandatory Data” and such data is described in the Licensed Software’s documentation for each Licensed
Software release; the data comprising Mandatory Data is subject to change with each release of upgrades, updates, patches and modifications to the Licensed
Software.
2.1 Customer agrees that any Mandatory Data will be the property of Philips. Part of the Mandatory Data might constitute (non-sensitive) Personal Data, which is
anonymized data or aggregate log files, device parameters and other signals collected from the equipment used by Customer and associated with Customer.
Customer agrees that Philips may use and disclose Mandatory Data for Philips’ own business purposes (including, but not limited to, for data analytics activities to
determine trends of usage of Philips’ or its affiliates’ devices and services, to facilitate and advise on continued and sustained use of Philips’ or its affiliates’
products and services, for product and service development and improvement (including the development of new offerings), substantiation of marketing claims
and for benchmarking purposes). In connection with any disclosure of Mandatory Data, Philips will not associate such data with the Personal Data of Customer’s
patients, consumers, or employees.
Q-00128598 Page 33 of 36
7. Warranty
DIAGNOSTIC X-RAY (DXR) SYSTEMS PRODUCT WARRANTY
This product warranty document is an addition to the Conditions of Sales set forth in the quotation. Unless specifically listed below, this warranty does not apply to
replacement parts. The terms and conditions of the quotation are incorporated into this warranty document. The capitalized terms herein have the same meaning as set
forth in the quotation.
1. Twelve (12) Month System Warranty

1.1 Philips (Philips) warrants to Customer that the Philips’ Diagnostic X-Ray Systems (System) will perform in substantial compliance with its product specifications, in
the documentation accompanying the System, for a period of twelve (12) months after completion of installation or availability for first patient use, whichever
occurs first.
1.2 Any glassware or detectors provided with the System are subject to special warranty terms set forth below.
2. Planned Maintenance
2.1 During the warranty period, Philips’ personnel will schedule Planned Maintenance visits, in advance, at a mutually agreeable time on weekdays, between 8:00am
and 5:00pm local time, excluding Philips’ observed holidays.
2.2 Philips shall have full, free and safe access to the System and Customer's operation, performance and maintenance records for the System, on each scheduled or
requested warranty service visit.
2.3 Philips shall also have access to and use of any machine, service, attachment, features or other equipment required to perform the necessary service contemplated
herein at no charge to Philips.
2.4 Customer waives warranty service if it does not provide such access to the System and Customer's records.
2.5 Should Philips be denied access to the System and Customer's records at the agreed upon time, a charge equal to the appropriate hourly rate will be accepted by
Customer for "waiting time."
3. System Options, Upgrades or Accessories

3.1 Any Philips’ authorized options, upgrades, or accessories for the System which are delivered and/or installed on the System during the original term of the System
warranty shall be subject to the same warranty terms contained in the first paragraph of this warranty, except that such warranty shall expire on the later of:
3.1.1 upon termination of the initial twelve (12) month warranty period for the System on which the option, upgrade or accessory is installed; or
3.1.2 after ninety (90) days for parts only from the date of installation.
4. SRO X-Ray Tubes

4.1 Philips warrants to Customer that the Philips’ SRO X-Ray Tube (tube) will be substantially free from defects in material and manufacturing workmanship which
impair performance under normal use as specified in Philips’ System descriptions and product specifications for the shorter of twenty-four (24) months after
installation or twenty-six (26) months after date of shipment from Philips.
5. SRO X-Ray Tube Warranty Exclusions

5.1 The above warranty shall not apply to SRO X-Ray Tubes installed outside the United States and Canada.
5.2 Philips’ obligations under the System warranty do not apply to any System defects resulting from: improper or inadequate maintenance or calibration by Customer
or its agents; Customer or third party supplied software, interfaces, or supplies; use or operation of the System other than in accordance with Philips’ applicable
System specifications and written instructions; improper site preparation; abuse, negligence, accident, loss or damage in transit; improper site preparation;
unauthorized maintenance or modifications to the System; or, to viruses or similar software interference resulting from the connection of the System to a network.
6. SRO X-Ray Tube Warranty Remedies

6.1 If a tube is found to fail during the warranty period, and if, in the best judgment of Philips, the failure is not due to neglect, accident, improper installation, use
contrary to instructions, or the exclusions stated above, Philips’ tube warranty liability hereunder is limited to, at Philips’ option, the repair or replacement of the
tube.
6.2 Any replacement tube would have a warranty period equal to the balance of the warranty period left on the tube replaced.
7. Wireless X-Ray Detectors

7.1 Philips warrants its Wireless X-Ray Detectors (detector) to be free from defects in material and workmanship for twelve (12) months.
7.2 Claims under this warranty must be made within twelve (12) months after installation and thirteen (13) months after date of shipment from Philips.
7.3 A replacement will be provided at no charge for any failure acknowledged as a Philips’ liability.
Q-00128598 Page 34 of 36
7.4 Unless covered by a Philips’ service contract option, the Customer is responsible for replacement costs of a wireless detector damaged accidentally (e.g. dropped)
during the warranty period.
7.5 All Philips’ wireless x-ray detectors have internal shock sensors. Philips’ service will read these sensors to determine if a detector malfunction has been caused by
mishandling. A detector will be determined to be damaged by mishandling when:
7.5.1 For a Skyplate Detector: if 1 or more heavy shock is recorded; or if 3 or more medium shocks are recorded; and
7.5.2 For a Wireless Portable Detector (WPD): if either shock sensor is tripped.
7.6 Philips does not cover damage to wireless detectors caused by liquid ingress; please use detector bags to protect your detector.
7.7 Philips does not cover damage to the wireless detector if the detector is cleaned or disinfected by chemicals not recommended as instructed per the User Manual
that is supplied with the product.
7.8 Examination of the returned detector may necessitate its destruction, but Philips liability shall, in any case be limited to repair or replacement as aforesaid, only if
in its sole opinion the detector has been properly used, installed and applied and has not been subjected to neglect, accident, environmental extremes or improper
installation, or use.
7.9 The packing of the replacement detector must be reused to return the original detector.
7.10 The questionnaire must be filled out to reference the System and the problem.
7.11 Transportation charges and risk of loss, both ways, of returned or replaced detector shall be at the expense of the Customer.
8. System Software and Software Updates

8.1 The software provided with the System will be the latest version of the standard software available for that System as of the ninetieth (90th) day prior to the date
the System is delivered to Customer.
8.2 Updates to standard software for the System that do not require additional hardware or equipment modifications will be performed as a part of normal warranty
service during the term of the warranty.
8.3 All software is and shall remain the sole property of Philips or its software suppliers.
8.4 Use of the software is subject to the terms of a separate Software License Agreement.
8.5 No license or other right is granted to Customer or to any other party to use the software except as set forth in the license agreements.
8.6 Any Philips maintenance or service software and documentationprovided with the System and/or located at Customer’s premises is intended solely to assist Philips
and its authorized agents to install and to test the System, to assist Philips and its authorized agents to maintain and to service the System under a separate support
agreement with Customer, or to permit Customer to maintain and service the System.
8.7 Customer agrees to restrict the access to such software and documentation to Philips employees, those of its authorized agents and its authorized employees of
Customer only.
9. Warranty Limitations
9.1 Philips sole obligations and Customer’s exclusive remedy under any product warranty are limited, at Philips option, to the repair or the replacement of the product
or a portion thereof within thirty (30) days after receipt of written notice of such material breach from Customer (Product Warranty Cure Period) or, upon
expiration of the Product Warranty Cure Period, to a refund of a portion of the purchase price paid by the Customer, upon Customer’s request.
9.2 Any refund will be paid, to the Customer when the product is returned to Philips.
9.3 Warranty service outside of normal working hours (i.e. 8:00am - 5:00pm, Monday through Friday, excluding Philips observed holidays), will be subject to payment
by Customer at Philips standard service rates.
9.4 This warranty is subject to the following conditions: the product:
9.4.1 is to be installed by authorized Philips representatives (or is to be installed in accordance with all Philips installation instructions by personnel trained by
Philips);
9.4.2 is to be operated exclusively by duly qualified personnel in a safe and reasonable manner in accordance with Philips written instructions and for the
purpose for which the products were intended; and
9.4.3 is to be maintained and in strict compliance with all recommended and scheduled maintenance instructions provided with the product and Customer is
to notify Philips immediately if the product at any time fails to meet its printed product specifications.
9.5 Philips obligations under any product warranty do not apply to any product defects resulting from improper or inadequate maintenance or calibration by the
Customer or its agents; Customer or third party supplied interfaces, supplies, or software including without limitation loading of operating system patches to the
Licensed Software and/or upgrades to anti-virus software running in connection with the Licensed Software without prior approval by Philips; use or operation of
the product other than in accordance with Philips applicable product specifications and written instructions; abuse, negligence, accident, loss, or damage in transit;
improper site preparation; unauthorized maintenance or modifications to the product; or viruses or similar software interference resulting from connection of the
product to a network.
9.6 Philips does not provide a warranty for any third-party products furnished to Customer by Philips under the quotation; however, Philips shall use reasonable efforts
to extend to Customer the third party warranty for the product.
9.7 The obligations of Philips described are Philips only obligations and Customer’s sole and exclusive remedy for a breach of a product warranty.
Q-00128598 Page 35 of 36
9.8 THE WARRANTIES SET FORTH HEREIN WITH RESPECT TO A PRODUCT (INCLUDING THE SOFTWARE PROVIDED WITH THE PRODUCT), ARE THE ONLY WARRANTIES
MADE BY PHILIPS IN CONNECTION WITH THE PRODUCT; THE SOFTWARE, AND THE TRANSACTIONS CONTEMPLATED BY THE QUOTATION, AND ARE EXPRESSLY IN
LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTIES, WHETHER WRITTEN, ORAL, STATUTORY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTY OF
NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
9.9 Philips may use refurbished parts in the manufacture of the products, which are subject to the same quality control procedures and warranties as for new products.
10. Philips Remote Services Network (RSN)

10.1 Customer will:
10.1.1 provide Philips with a secure location at Customer's premises to store one Philips Remote Services Network Router and provide full and free access to this
router, (or a Customer owned router acceptable to Philips) for connection to the equipment and to Customer’s network; or
10.1.2 provide Philips with outbound internet access over SSL; at all times during the warranty period provide full and free access to the equipment and the
Customer network for Philips use in remote servicing of the product, remote assistance to personnel that operate the products, updating the products
software, transmitting automated status notifications from the product and regular uploading of products data files (such as but not limited to error logs
and utilization data for improvement of Philips products and services and aggregation into services).
10.2 Customer’s failure to provide such access will constitute Customer’s waiver of the scheduled planned maintenance service and will void support or warranty
coverage of product malfunctions until such time as planned maintenance service is completed or RSN access is provided.
10.3 Customer agrees to pay Philips at the prevailing demand service rates for all time spent by Philips service personnel waiting for access to the products.
11. Transfer of System

11.1 In the event Customer transfers or relocates the System, all obligations under this warranty will terminate unless Customer receives the prior written consent of
Philips for the transfer or relocation.
11.2 Upon any transfer or relocation, the System must be inspected and certified by Philips as being free from all defects in material, software and workmanship and
as being in compliance with the product specifications.
11.3 Customer will compensate Philips for these services at the prevailing service rates in effect as of the date the inspection is performed.
11.4 Any System which is transported intact to pre-approved locations and is maintained as originally installed in mobile configurations will remain covered by this
warranty.
Q-00128598 Page 36 of 36
SC
Equipment Datasheet
Cart, General 10-635

----------------------------------------------- ------------------------------------------
Armstrong Medical Premier Aluminum/Standard Steel
---------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
Aluminum Electronic/Auto Lock/Specialty
----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
•Lightweight Aluminum Cart

•Side shelf
•Plastic top
•Push handles (2)
•Accessory panels
•TENTE Casters
•Locking casters (2)
•Swivel caster
•Tracking caster
•Key locking bar (length of bar is equal to Cart size)
•Stabilizing frame with bumper
•Durable aluminum mounting tracks
•18 colors
•Auto-Locking Carts
•Electronic Touchpad carts
•Push-Button Locking Carts
•Narrow Carts
•Mini Carts
•Isolation Carts
•Bedside Carts
•Wide Carts
•Emergency
•Anesthesia / Procedure
•Pediatric Emergency
•Accessories
•Variety of sizes
•Lockable
Specifications:
•46.05"H x 25.03"D x 34.05"W (includes bumper, handles, and

casters)
•45.50"H x 25.40"D x 41.65"W (includes bumper, handles, and
casters Wide Versions)
•Net Weight ~ 85-170 lbs (dependent on size and material)
•Size and weight will vary with specific cart
https://www.armstrongmedical.com/cart-systems/ Size and spacing in room
Sept 2021
SL
Equipment Datasheet
Scale 13-455

----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
Health o meter Eye Level/Floor
----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
Seca Eye Level/ Floor
----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
Further Description/Specifications: Health o Meter
Health o Meter
Eye Level:
-EMR connectiv ity
-Built in Height Rod
-Low prof ile platf orm
-Calculates BMI
Net Weight: 21.0 lb
Dimensions (W X H X D): 14 1/8” X 53 5/8” X 21 1/8”
Resolution: 10.2 lb
Capacity : 550 lb
Floor:
-Heav y Duty Floor scale
-8” easy to read dial
-Textured non slip mat
Net Weight: 9 lb
Dimensions (W X H X D): 11” X 3” X 12 ½”
Graduation: 1 lb
Capacity : 400lb
Seca Seca
Eye Level:
-Medical-grade scale
-Built-in measuring rod with 4 – 90" measuring range
-USB interf ace f or EMR integration solutions or PC connectiv ity
-Large rubber coated castors
-Robust tilt-proof f ull metal platf orm, no plastic
-Optional: Handrail
Net Weight: 28.0 lb
Dimensions (W X H X D): 16.1” X 53.7” X 22.7 “
Graduation: 100g
Capacity : 250 lb
Floor:
-Robust, powder-coated steel housing
-Corrosion resistant inside and outside
-Clip f ixation sy stem for easy rubber-mat exchange
-High-quality medical grade personal scale
Net Weight: 7.7 lb
Dimensions (W X H X D): 12” X 4.7” X 18.5 “
Graduation: 1lb
Capacity : 320 lb

https://www.healthometer.com/specialty-scales.html
https://us.secashop.com/
Oct 2021
SL-I
Equipment Datasheet
Scale, Infant 13-462

----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
Olympic Model 28 Roll-Around Warm Scale
----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
Welch Allyn Scale-Tronix
----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
• Infant scale w ith up to 15 kg capacity w ith

w eight auto lock, typically cart mounted for
ease of use
Specifications:
W x D x H: 920 x 610 x 1050mm
Weight: 50 Kg
120 V AC, 60 Hz

SLT
Equipment Datasheet
Slit Lamp 12-281

----------------------------------------------- ------------------------------------------
Zeiss/Innova SL Series/Slit Lamp
----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
Further Description: Zeiss

Slit lamp w ith variable magnifications w ith led or halogen
light source for eye care procedures
Specifications:
Zeiss
Many different options, refer to w ebsite below . Example

provided in cut sheet is Model SL220
Rated voltage: From 100 V - 10% to 240 V + 10%, 50 /

60 Hz Innova
Weight: 12.5 kg / 27.55 lbs. (instrument including
headrest)
Dim ensions of basic instrum ent (W x H x D): 300 mm
x 705 mm (±15 mm) x 355 mm 11.8 in x 27.7 in (±0.6 in)
x 13.9 in
With mobile cart: W x D x H:400 x 400 x 1200 mm
Magnification: 5-step: 6x/10x/16x/25x/40x

3-step: 10x/16x/25x
Innova
Many different options, refer to w ebsite below . Example
provided in cut sheet is Model S4OPTIK SL-H2
Rated voltage: From 100 V - 10% to 240 V + 10%, 50 /

60 Hz
Weight: 49 lbs. / 22 kg
Magnification: 10x/16x

https://www.zeiss.com/meditec/us/products/ophthalmology-
optometry/essential-line-basic-diagnostics/slit-lamp-
Data
examination/slit-lamps-and-accessories.html
https://innovamed.com/products/slit-lamps
Nov 2021
STR
Equipment Datasheet
Stretcher, Standard 13-820

----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
Stryker/Hill-Rom Prime Series/Electric Stretcher
----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
Standard stretcher used for patient transport with IV pole
mounting option Stryker
Stryker
• Less than 21-inch low height
• Litter-mounted oxygen bottle holder
• Power-washable design (1105 and 1115 only)
• Center-locking brake system with dual end activators
• Dual, side-mounted foot control hydraulics with uni-lower pedal
• Dual end brake/steer controls
• Glideaway Siderails
• 4 integrated IV receptacles
• +/- Trendelenburg
• 8-inch Omni Surface Casters with integrated wheel covers
• Pneumatic backrest/stationary foot
• Thermoformed ABS base
• Integrated utility tray
• Integrated transfer board
Hill-Rom
• Heavy-gauge, steel-reinforced frame
• The ability to lower the stretcher to a height of 57.2 cm
• Optional integrated IV pole transport device and ergonomic
push handles
• Steering Plus™ directional system incorporates fully-locking
five castor braking
• Fully integrated siderails Hill-Rom
Specifications:
Stryker
Many options available, model 1105 26” litter mentioned
below
Weight Capacity: 318 kg
Height Range: 52.7 cm-86.4 cm
Width: siderails up 86.4 cm/ siderails dow n 77.5cm
Total Length: 215.9 cm
Hill-Rom
Safe Working Load: 317.5 kg
Weight w /o surface/accessories: 161 kg
Height Adjustment: 57.2-87 cm
Width: siderails stored 84.5 cm/ siderails up 91.4 cm
Total Length: 210.8 cm
Clearance: 2.9-8.9 cm

https://www.stryker.com/us/en/acute-care/products/prime-
series.html
AC pow er
http://www.hill-rom.com/international/Products/Products-by-
Category/Stretchers/Electric-Stretcher/
Dec 2021
ST-T42
1
TO
Equipment Datasheet
Pantry, Toaster, Pop-up GK-107

----------------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------------
Hobart
----------------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------------
Hatco
----------------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------------
• Commercial grade pop-up toaster for variety of bread

products w ith toast color control
Specifications:
W x D x H: 380 x 330 x 240 mm
Weight: 10 kg Design and Installation Notes:
• Pow er outlet to be located in the back bottom of

Electrical Requirem ents: the toaster
120 V AC, 60 Hz, 15 A

UA
Equipment Datasheet
Analyzer, urinalysis 16-378.2

------------------------------------------------------ ----------------------------------------------------
Roche Urisys 2400
------------------------------------------------------ -----------------------------------------------------
Siemens Clinitek Advantus
Clinitek Urisys 2400

Advantus
Further Description: Further Description:
• Requires data connection to network. • Fully automated urinalysis system providing outstanding
• Streamlined operation with immediate start-up convenience and efficiency for medium to high volume
• Improved efficiency with non pacing processing laboratories
• Improve accuracy with automatic calibration for every strip • Innovative, ready-to use cassette with 400 test strips for
• Continued productivity boost with throughput of 7 seconds fast one-grip loading of strips onto board
per sample • Easy loading of samples via Roche standard racks
• Minimize errors with simple, barcode identification of sample,
color and clarity values • Minimum sample volume of 1.5 ml
• Flexibility in reporting options, on-screen display, printout • Positive sample identification by integrated barcode
and/or uploading to laboratory information system reader
• Walk away time of up to 20 minutes
• Requires data connection to netw ork.
Specifications: Specifications:
• Dimensions: 12.75 (h) x 15.75 (w) x 13.75 (d) in,32 (h) x • User interface: LCD touch screen (90x120 mm)
39 (w) x 35 (d) cm • Memory: 1000 samples, 3x100 controls
• Weight: 7.2 kg (16 lbs) • System interfaces: RS 232 serial interfaces to
• Power Requirements: 100 V to 240 V; 50/60 Hz barcode reader, sediment terminal and PC/Host
• Maximum Power Input: 72 VA • Host protocols: ASTM + and Urisys® 2400 ASTM
• Ambient Operating Temperature Range: 18oC to 30oC • Electrical requirements: 110-240 V, 50/60 Hz
(64oF to 86oF) • Physical dimensions: Width: 42.5 cm, Depth: 34.0
cm, Height: 26.0 cm (36.0 cm with upright display)
• Weight: approx. 12 kg
• Data, UPS, Essential power and Meditech interface
This information is provided for planning purposes only and is not to be relied upon. Final installation specifications are dependent upon
selected supplier’s shop drawings.
August 2009
US-P
Equipment Datasheet
Ultrasound, portable 18-143.1

----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
Sonosite M-Turbo
----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
GE LOGIQ e
----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
BARD Site rite
• Multi displinary use point of care ultrasound: Cardiac,
OB/Gyn/Fertility, Vascular comes in laptop style or
docking station cart
Specifications:

Logic e: W x D x H: 350 x 375 x 100 mm
Weight: 6 kg
Site Rite 6 with GCX roll -stand:

W x D x H: 640 x 640 x 1730 mm
Weight: 70 kg
100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 130 VA

Data Requirem ents
1 data port, w ireless connectivity

VSM
Equipment Datasheet
Monitor, Vital Signs 25-209

----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
Welch Allyn/Phillips Connex/SureSigns
----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
GE Carescape
----------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------
Further Description: Welch Allyn
• A monitor used to acquire patient vital signs
parameters w ith different selectable options available
depending on the clinical needs.
Specifications:
Welch Allyn
Dimensions (unit only):
Height: 10 in. (25.4 cm) Phillips
Width: 11 in. (27.9 cm)
Depth: 6 in. (15.2 cm)
Weight (including battery): 9.5 lb. (4.3 kg)
Dimensions (Stand Only):
Wheel base width 21" Weight 27 lbs. Height 44"
Electrical: 120 V 50/60 HZ 0.8 –1.5 A
Phillips:
Dimensions (unit only): Width: 26 cm (10.2 in)
Height: 22 cm (8.6 in),
Depth: 14.5 cm (5.7 in)
Weight: 3.6 kg (8 lb)
Dimensions (stand only): Height 40.8" / 104 cm
21" / 53.3 cm base with 4" / 10.2 cm dual wheel casters (all
locking)
Electrical: 120 V 50/60 HZ
GE
GE
Dimensions (unit only):
Height: 9.75 in (24.7 cm)
Width: 11.5 in (24.2 cm)
Depth: 5.3 in (13.6 cm)
Weight: 2.8 kg (6.2 lb) including battery
Dimensions (stand only): Height to mounting platform: 101 cm
(40 in) from floor to lowest position 144 cm (45 in) from floor to
highest position
Base diameter: 53.3 cm (21 in) 5 - 7.1 cm (2.8 in) casters – 3
locking
Weight (without accessories): 8.0 kg (17.5 lbs)
Electrical: 120 to 240VAC, 1.1A 50/60 HZ
Vendor Link:
https://www.hillrom.ca/en/products/connex-vital-signs-monitor/ Installation Considerations:
https://www.usa.philips.com/healthcare/product/HC863283/sure
signs-vs4-vital-signs-monitor • Wall backing is required if w all mounted
https://www.gehealthcare.ca/en-CA/products/patient- • Data port
monitoring/carescape-vc150-vital-signs-monitor
Oct 2021
WMC
Spectrum®
Series
Being Green Just Got More Colorful

1.800.565.9931
buschsystems.com
View the Spectrum® Series Online!

Spectrum® Series | Product Data Sheet
ENJOY THE POSSIBILITIES

The Busch Systems® R&D team has spent countless hours crafting the Spectrum® Series with the specific
ability of adapting to collection programs of all types and sizes. In the ever-evolving world of recycling &
waste collection, it’s imperative to build the basis of your program with as much flexibility as possible.
Our team achieved this flexibility by designing five modular containers created at the most adaptable size
& profile, then hit them with the loudest variety of color options we’ve ever made available!
When choosing the Spectrum® Series, you’ll be confident knowing the highest quality, most-versatile set
of containers will outfit your program and your space perfectly. Be confident knowing the combination of
containers you’ve selected today, can easily be adjusted to suit your program of tomorrow.
POPULAR SKU’S
110065 101166 101207 101218 101193
Product Data Sheet Version 1.2 | September 27, 2022 Page 2

BUILD YOUR S TAT I O N
1 + 2 + 3 + 4
ONE: THE BODY TWO: THE OPENING THREE: THE LABEL FOUR: OPTIONAL KITS
• Cube • See lid opening • Choose from our • 15” x 8 ½” Sign Frame
• Cube-Slim specifications for stock options or • Slim Sign Frame
• Cube XL available openings customize your own! • Double Ellipse Sign Frame
• Ellipse • Wheel Casters
• Ellipse-Slim
• Round
D O U B L E S TAT I O N T R I P L E S TAT I O N Q U A D S TAT I O N

I N S P I R AT I O N I N S P I R AT I O N I N S P I R AT I O N

BODY SPECIFICATIONS
Below are the available Body Options for the Spectrum® Series. With this measurement guide you will find the right size Spectrum® Series
container to fit your space. The measurement guide is the essence of various standard measuring methods. All measurements are in inches.
Talk to your dedicated Busch Systems® sales representative for more information on how to choose the right size container for your space.
Cube Cube-Slim Cube XL Ellipse Ellipse-Slim Round
W D
BODIES
Cube 30.375”H (771.525mm) 15.75”W (400mm) 15.75”D (400mm) 31.8lbs (14.42kg) 24 gal
Cube-Slim 30.375”H (771.525mm) 8”W (203.2mm) 15.75”D (400mm) 22.15lbs (10.05kg) 10 gal
Cube XL 30.375”H (771.525mm) 21.5”W (546.1mm) 15.75”D (400mm) 38.75lbs (17.58kg) 32 gal
Ellipse 30.375”H (771.525mm) 15.75”W (400mm) 15.75”D (400mm) 27.45lbs (12.45kg) 22 gal
Ellipse-Slim 30.375”H (771.525mm) 8”W (203.2mm) 15.75”D (400mm) 18.2lbs (8.26kg) 8 gal
Round 30.375”H (771.525mm) 15.75”D (400mm) 15.75”D (400mm) 20.57lbs (9.33kg) 20 gal
STOCK BODY COLORS
Black Grey White Blue Green

*Round only stocked in Black


The chart below outlines the available Lid Opening Options for each Spectrum® Series body as well as the associated opening dimensions. Be
sure to run a preliminary audit of the popular materials that are discarded where your Spectrum® Series containers will be placed. For example,
Full Mixed Slot Circle Lift
Cube
Opening Dimensions 10.25”W x 6.25”D 10.815”W x 5.250”D 10.815”W x 2.625”D 5.875”W x 5.875”D 9.250”W x 8.250”D
Full Mixed Slot Circle Full + Wipes Liquids
Cube-Slim
Opening Dimensions 5.875”W x 10.25”D 5.250”W x 10.815”D 2.625”W x 10.815”D 5.875”W x 5.875”D 5”W x 7”H 5”W x 5”D
Full Full + Ashtray
Cube XL
Opening Dimensions 12.250”W x 8.250”D 6.250”W x 10.250”D
Full Mixed Slot Circle
Ellipse
Opening Dimensions 10.25”W x 6.250”D 10.815”W x 5.250”D 10.815”W x 2.625”D 5.875”W x 5.875”D
Full Circle Full
Ellipse-Slim Round
Opening Dimensions 6”W x 13.750”D 5.875”W x 5.875”D Opening Dimensions 10”W x 10”D
STOCK LID COLORS
Grey

PRODUCT ACCESSORIES
If you’re interested in maximizing the full potential of your Spectrum® Series containers, you can enhance the quality & performance and
expand the possibilities with top quality accessories that will add functionality and convenience with ease. These product accessories are
designed to help you get the most out of your recycling & waste management equipment. Busch Systems® offers a number of different
accessories to add convenience and portability.
To add movement to your Spectrum® Series station, consider the Busch Systems® professional quality caster kits that allow you to easily move
your station to a better location or for cleaning and maintenance.
For more customization, many of the Spectrum® Series bodies are compatible with a vast choice of customizable sign frame and signage
Ask your Busch Systems® sales representative about how to connect your Spectrum® bins.
SIGN FRAMES CASTERS
14¾” x 8 ½” SIGNS 7” x 8 ½” SIGN 15” x 8 ½” SIGN
STOCK GRAPHICS
To clearly indicate streams, all signage is available in corresponding stream colors. Labels come standard with white or silver icons on a clear
SIGNAGE - FULL AND DOUBLE ELLIPSE FRAME
CANS & BOTTLES WASTE ORGANICS PAPER MIXED RECYCLABLES

ORGANICS
SIGNAGE - SLIM FRAME
CANS & MIXED

BOTTLES WASTE ORGANICS PAPER RECYCLABLES
ORGANICS
LABELS

IDEAL BAG SIZES
Body Shape Single Double Triple Quad
Cube 30 x 39 30 x 39 30 x 39 30 x 39
Cube-Slim 22 x 38 22 x 38 22 x 38 22 x 38
Cube XL 33 x 38
Ellipse 30 x 38 30 x 38 30 x 38 30 x 38
Ellipse-Slim 22 x 38 22 x 38 22 x 38 22 x 38
Round 23 x 37

Bodies Powder Coated Steel • Fire-safe steel construction
• Platinum powder coat finish on easy

Lids Powder Coated Steel
to remove lids
Liners - Ellipse & Ellipse Slim LDPE • Liners are molded from durable black LDPE
• Liners are made of durable black HDPE and

Liners - Cube & Cube Slim HDPE
• Liners are made of durable black HDPE and

Liners - Cube XL HDPE
Sign Frames Powder Coated Steel • Fire-safe steel construction
• 4 durable, long-lasting swivel castors are included

Casters LDPE with every container
(2 of 4 casters include brakes to secure container into place)

• All Spectrum® Series Receptacles use a low energy, resource efficient manufacturing and curing process
• All Spectrum® Series receptacle components disassemble at end of life and are fully recyclable
• Powdercoat finishes are no- or low-VOC, depending on color

Configurations
Spectrum® Contact us Contact us Contact us -
LEAD TIME
Our standard lead times on stock SKU’s for the Spectrum® Series are 3-5 days. Our standard lead times on the large/custom orders for the
Spectrum® Series are 6-8 weeks. Please contact us to discuss your specific timing requirements.
PRICING

INSTALLATION
Busch Systems® Spectrum® Series containers are hassle-free when it comes to installation. Each container is individually boxed using cardboard
with high-recycled content and each associated lid is boxed within the container box to ensure safe transport.
TO INSTALL YOUR SPECTRUM® SERIES CONTAINERS:
2. Adjust levelling feet to desired height
3. Insert the recycling/waste bag into the liner and wrap the top edge of the bag around the liner

CARE & MAINTENANCE

Busch Systems® powder coated steel products are finished with a polyester powder coat paint that is intended to help keep your recycling and
waste containers protected and attractive looking for as long as possible in their environment. Their appearance and lifespan will be greatly
affected by their care. Powder coated finishes can be treated like most other paints and benefit from regular cleaning.
The frequency of cleaning required depends on the environment in which the containers are used. Outdoor containers will be subject to
different environmental conditions than indoor units, i.e. sun, rain, wind, pollution, winter temperatures, and salt/sea air.
To avoid the accumulation of dirt and grime on your Busch Systems® products, and help prevent corrosion, we recommend that a mild
detergent be used (not an abrasive), such as a pH-neutral liquid (hand dishwashing or hand car washing soaps, for example) diluted in warm
water. Rinse well with clean water. Any dirt adhering to the powder coating should be removed. In order to remove deposits such as salt
or dust, use a soft brush (non-abrasive). If this is not sufficient to remove stubborn soiling, the following products have been tested for use:
• Ajax Cream • Ajax Liquid (in water)
• Liquid Gumption • Cutting compound (‘T. Cut’)
• Flash (in water)
THINGS TO AVOID
• Solvents such as acetone, contact cleaners, thinners or Methyl Ethyl Ketone (MEK). These solvents are very damaging to the powder
coat and will soften and/or dissolve the surface of the coating, diminishing its shine and durability or removing the finish altogether.
• Cleaning water that contains sulfur, iron oxide, chlorine, fluoride
• Waxes that contain abrasives
• Abrasive cleaning tools or brushes
• Contact with electrical current and dissimilar metals

Contact Us Today for a Quote on Your Spectrum® Station!
WSH
Equipment Datasheet
Carts, Service/Utility, Open, Wire 27-865

----------------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------------
Vancouver Classic Inc. (Dis. Costco)
----------------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------------
• NSF® certified
• Clear coated chrome finish
• Steel construction
• Shelf weight capacity varies by the size of the
shelf ; for 48” wide models:
o 600 lbs per shelf
o 3600 lbs per cart (leveling feet)
o 500 lbs total using wheel
• 4-6 shelves per cart
Available in 3 sizes:
36 in W x 18 in D x 72 in H
May 2011
ERGO XR2 XRC
Medical imaging chair
SPECIFICATIONS
ADJUSTMENTS
• Height: 19.5 in to 26.5 in.
ERGO XR2
• Lateral side: 6 in.
• Retractable arms: 90o.
Medical imaging chair
• Retractable backrest: 90o on both sides.
MAXIMUM CAPACITY
• 450 lb (205 kg).
DIMENSIONS
• Base: 23 in x 23 in.
• Seat: 18 W in x 16.5 in D.
• Backrest: 12 in W x 13 H.
• Arms: 3 in W x 10 L.
SEAT
• 2-inch molded with viscose foam and integrated gel.
CUSHIONS
• Seamless with molded viscose foam.
• Fabric is tested for a range of common hospital and clinic
cleaning products. It is Oxivir and Virox resistant –
a must when infection control is a priority.
WHEELS
• 3-inch twin wheels with central lock.
LIFETIME WARRANTY
• Means you can trust our structure and welds.
MADE IN CANADA
• Completely designed and engineered in Canada. Locally
manufactured gives you an easy access
to replacement parts with customer service
COPYRIGHT © 2021 IBIOM INSTRUMENTS // ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
in English and French.
670 Joseph-Louis Mathieu St info@ibiom.com www.ibiom.com

Sherbrooke QC Canada J1R 0X3 1 877 563-5777 www.ibiom.com
ERGO XR2 V-shape allows the
Bucky to be brought as
Medical imaging chair low as possible.
Designed to improve patient positioning for x-rays

in a variety of seated positions.
Reduces risks of falls during patient transfers.
Facilitates perfect positioning for patients while
ensuring their safety.
Accelerate the examination process thanks to the new
12 in Seat placement:
central lock. 6 inches side-to-side
(on ball bearings).
13 in
Cleaning: Fabric is tested for a range
of common hospital and clinic cleaning
3 in
products. It is Oxivir and Virox resistant –
10 in
a must when infection control is a priority.
Maximum capacity
Standard colour: of 450 lb.
Black
Allows for height

adjustment and locks 16
.5 i
rotation. n 18 in
Retractable for
DESIGNED & side images.
ENGINEERED
19.5 to 26.5 inches
I N C A N A D A height adjustment.
NEW
Completely designed and
Central lock.
engineered in Canada. Locally
manufactured gives you an
easy access to replacement
parts with customer service
Ain U
English
CA and
N French.
ADA
LIFETIME WARRANT Y
means you can trust our
structure and welds. 23 in x 23 in base.
Molded viscose foam seat

with integrated gel which
maximizes comfort and
durability.
www.ibiom.com
XRC-P
24301
Quantity
Minimizes the need for retakes, reducing radiation exposure and saving time and money
Chair rotates, positioning for different views
Adjustable back and head-tilt support
Polyethylene chair components are x-ray lucent
Saddle horn supports a genital lead shield
Nonporous polyethylene is easy to clean
Lockable casters
Views: C-Spine (AP, Lateral, Oblique), Chest (AP, Lateral), Abdominal (AP), Magnified Airway (AP, Lateral), Standing Lower Extremities (AP)
The Pedia-Poser Pediatric X-Ray Positioning Chair was honored with a “Radiology Technology MVP” award. The Radiology MVP (Most Valuable Product) A
industry-sponsored award judged by a panel of radiology professionals. Awards are given to “products which display a blend of efficiency, innovation, practic
technological progress.”
One of our customers, a Radiology Director at Miami Children's Hospital, agrees:
“This device makes imaging pediatric patients for chest X-rays and other X-rays a cakewalk. No longer do we have to deal with scream
twisting children due to the archaic torture-type tie-down of previous types of devices. This device is child friendly and easy to use, both
technologists and my patients. We have minimized repeats, which means minimizing radiation dose to the patient. We love this device.
Infant Seat Width: 8.4"/ 21.3cm
Toddler Seat Width: 9.5"/ 24.1cm
Wheel Base Width: 27"/ 68.6cm
Seat Height: 25.25"/ 64.1cm
Total Chair Height: 61.75"/ 156.8cm
Image Type AP Lateral Oblique
C-Spine X X X
Chest X X
Abdominal X
Mag. Airway X X
Shipping Weights & Sizes
Step Platform for U-Arm System

$7,248.00
RICHMOND, BC
APPENDIX 2.1
Abatement Project Summary Report
Building 2 – Unit 95
Airport Executive Park
10551 Shellbridge Way,
Richmond, British Columbia
Abatement Project
Summary Report
Building 2 - Unit 95
10551 Shellbridge Way
Prepared for:
Colliers International
200 Grandville Street, 19th Floor
Vancouver, British Columbia V6C 2R6
May 11, 2021
Pinchin File: 216561.095
© 2021 Pinchin Ltd.

Abatement Project Summary Report May 11, 2021
Airport Executive Park, 10551 Shellbridge Way, Richmond, British Columbia Pinchin File: 216561.095
Issued to: Colliers International

Issued on: May 11, 2021
Issuing Office: Richmond, BC
Author: Charles Hankins, BES, Dipl. CVT

Project Technologist
604.238.2944
chankins@pinchin.com
Reviewer: Bryan Zecchel Dipl. T, A.Sc.T

Operations Manager
604.319.1398
bzecchel@pinchin.com
© 2021 Pinchin Ltd. Page i

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................................. 1

2.0 PROJECT SCOPE ........................................................................................................................... 1
3.0 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS ........................................................................................................ 1
4.0 INSPECTION AND AIR MONITORING REPORTS ........................................................................ 2
5.0 MILESTONE INSPECTIONS ........................................................................................................... 2
6.0 SAMPLING ....................................................................................................................................... 3
6.1 Asbestos Air Sampling ......................................................................................................... 3
6.2 Description of Types of Samples .......................................................................................... 3
7.0 MONITORING RESULT................................................................................................................... 3
7.1 Asbestos Air Sampling Results ............................................................................................ 3
8.0 DISCUSSION OF PROJECT ........................................................................................................... 4
8.1 General ................................................................................................................................. 4
8.2 Air Monitoring........................................................................................................................ 4
8.3 Project Completion ............................................................................................................... 4
9.0 TERMS AND LIMITATIONS ............................................................................................................ 4
APPENDICES
APPENDIX I Contractor Submittals

APPENDIX II Inspection Report
APPENDIX III Asbestos Air Monitoring Results
APPENDIX IV Waste Manifest
© 2021 Pinchin Ltd. Page ii

1.0 INTRODUCTION
Colliers International (Client) retained Pinchin Ltd. (Pinchin) to provide hazardous materials consulting
services within Building 2 Unit 95 of Airport Executive Park, located at 10551 Shellbridge Way, Richmond,
British Columbia.
The services provided during the project included the following:
• Provide consulting and project management throughout the abatement;
• Provide inspection and air monitoring as required throughout the abatement;
• Provide abatement services by sub-contracting a Hazardous Materials Contractor; and
• Provide an abatement summary report at the completion of all abatement.
The purpose of this report is to provide a summary of the project, provide a declaration of completion and
to place the important documents in one complete document.
2.0 PROJECT SCOPE
This abatement of hazardous materials was conducted in preparation for building renovation.
The following is a brief description of the asbestos materials abatement work:
• Removal and disposal of asbestos-containing drywall from perimeter walls and wall
cladding on columns throughout Unit 95 following Moderate Risk work procedures; and
• Removal and disposal of asbestos-containing drywall from corridor walls between Unit 10
and Unit 15 directly outside Unit 95 following Moderate Risk work procedures.
3.0 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
Refer to Appendix I for copies of the Contractor Submittals including:
• Notice of Project;
• Safe Work Procedures; and
• Waste Manifests.
© 2021 Pinchin Ltd. Page 1 of 4

4.0 INSPECTION AND AIR MONITORING REPORTS
Pinchin provided inspection and air monitoring services during the contaminated work portion of the
abatement project, from March 22, 2021 to March 29, 2021. A total of six Inspection Reports was issued
over the course of this project. Inspection reports are included in Appendix II.
The objectives of the inspections were to monitor the work for compliance with the scope of work and
provincial guidelines and regulation, to monitor environmental safety and the progress of the work, to
document the work for future reference, and to provide an air monitoring record of the work.
At the time of each inspection, the Pinchin Inspector examined the Hazardous Material Work Area. A
report was prepared after each inspection, noting the condition of the site and conduct of the Contractor.
Directions were given to the Contractor in each report where applicable, to bring the work in compliance
with the provincial guidelines and regulation.
5.0 MILESTONE INSPECTIONS
Inspections were performed at significant milestones during abatement. These Milestone Inspections
were performed during abatement, and are as follows:
Milestone Inspection A – Clean Site Preparation (Pre-Contamination) - Inspect the site preparations and
set-up prior to contaminated work in the Work Area to ensure the initial site isolation is effective.
Milestone Inspection B – Bulk Removal Inspection and Air Monitoring - Inspection of the Work Area/s and
air monitoring to ensure compliance with the contract documents and to monitor environmental safety
during the progress of work in accordance to provincial guidelines.
Milestone Inspection C – Visual Clearance - Visual inspection of the Work Area to ensure that accessible
asbestos-containing materials and lead-based paints have been removed and areas are adequately
cleaned of dust and debris prior to application of lock-down agent.
Milestone Inspection D – Dismantling Inspection – Final Inspection of the Work Area after removal of the
polyethylene enclosure and prior to demobilization of the Contractor.

6.0 SAMPLING
6.1 Asbestos Air Sampling
Air monitoring for asbestos was conducted in accordance with Phase Contrast Microscopy (PCM)
methods following National Institute for Occupation Safety and Health (NIOSH) 7400 methodology. Air
sample pumps were calibrated before and after use. Sampling volumes were adjusted for the anticipated
airborne fibre level, to give appropriate concentrations of fibres on the filter surface.
Fibres are not identified or characterized as asbestos in the PCM method. All particles equal to or longer
than 5 micrometres and with length-to-width ratios of 3:1 or greater are included in the count. Therefore, if
fibreglass, cellulose, or gypsum fibres are also present, the PCM method will overestimate the true
asbestos concentration. Fibres with diameters less than about 0.25 micrometres are not detected by the
method, regardless of length. This is the resolution limit of the optical microscope set up with phase
contrast illumination.
Air samples were analyzed by Pinchin staff. All Pinchin analysts participate in either the Institut de
recherché Robert-Sauvé en santé et en sécurité du travail (IRSST) program or the American Industrial
Hygiene Association (AIHA) Proficiency Analyst Testing Program.
6.2 Description of Types of Samples
The types of samples that are generally collected correspond to the categories described as follows:
Field Blank A sample collected for quality control purposes to ensure samples are not
contaminated during the handling process. A field blank is transported to
the site and handled in a manner representative of the associated
samples in the set.
Ambient Air sample collected at the perimeter or outside (on the clean side) of the
Asbestos Work Area to document “clean” conditions at locations outside
the enclosure occupied by staff, tenants, or the public.
Occupational Air sample collected on a worker, using a battery-operated pump worn by
the worker. Gives the best estimate of worker exposure level and ensures
airborne fibre concentrations do not exceed the respirator protection
factor.
7.0 MONITORING RESULT
7.1 Asbestos Air Sampling Results
Air sampling results are included on the inspection reports in Appendix III.

8.0 DISCUSSION OF PROJECT
8.1 General
Work was performed by Proactive Hazmat and Environmental Ltd. (Contractor). Proactive began site
mobilization on March 22, 2021 and completed all required hazardous material abatement, waste removal
and demobilization by March 29, 2021. The abatement of hazardous materials followed the procedures
outlined in the scope of work as prepared by Pinchin. Pinchin provided inspection and air monitoring
services on a daily basis during the contaminated work.
8.2 Air Monitoring
All air samples results collected outside of the work area were within acceptable criteria. All personal air
sample results were within acceptable criteria for the respiratory protection observed in use.
8.3 Project Completion
In our opinion, the performance of the Contractor was acceptable. At no point during the project was work
stopped due to non-compliance, leakage from a work area, or improper safety procedures. All asbestos
and lead waste were reportedly disposed of, recycled and/or treated in accordance with provincial
regulations.
The abatement work was performed successfully in compliance with the scope of work.
9.0 TERMS AND LIMITATIONS
This work was performed subject to the Terms and Limitations presented or referenced in the proposal for
this project.
Information provided by Pinchin is intended for Client use only. Pinchin will not provide results or
information to any party unless disclosure by Pinchin is required by law. Any use by a third party of
reports or documents authored by Pinchin or any reliance by a third party on or decisions made by a third
party based on the findings described in said documents, is the sole responsibility of such third parties.
Pinchin accepts no responsibility for damages suffered by any third party as a result of decisions made or
actions conducted. No other warranties are implied or expressed.
J:\216000s\0216561.000 Colliers,BCCUCC,HBMAandPhase1ESA\0216561.095 Colliers, AEP2, Unit 95 Abatement,HAZ\Deliverables\216561.095 Abatement Project Summary
Report, 10551 Shellbridge Way, Richmond, BC, CI, 11May2021.docx
Template: Master Report for Abatement Project Summary, HAZ, February 27, 2020

APPENDIX I
Contractor Submittals
Notice of Project: 881627
Hazardous substances
Submitted: Thursday, March 18, 2021 at 1:03 p.m. Pacific Time
Except as permitted by OHS regulation , WorkSafeBC must be provided with at least 48-hour
20.2.1(6)
written notice prior to the start of the work activity. Work on this project, including set-up activities, may
begin on March 20, 2021, 1:03 p.m. Pacific Time, or on the start date indicated on the Notice of Project
— whichever is later.
20.2.1(5)
OHS regulation requires that a copy of the notice of project is posted at the worksite for the
duration of the project.
Worksite details
Worksite Location
City Location Planned start date Duration
1 Richmond 10551 Shellbridge Way, Richmond, BC V6X 3/22/2021 6 Days
2W8, Canada - AEP 2 Unit 95
49.187133,-123.107548
Daily hours of work:

17:00 to 01:00
Workers at the worksite per shift:

6
Owner or agent representative of this worksite:

200 Granville St
Vancouver, British Columbia
Canada, V6C 1S4
Project information
Employer working with or in proximity to the hazardous substances:
WorkSafeBC Account Number: 860760
Proactive hazmat and environmental
9295 198 St
Langley City, British Columbia
Canada, V1M 3J9
Person in charge of the planned activity:

Trevor Lutumailagi
Foreman
604-866-2045
Consultants:
Pinchin ( Consulting )
Scope of work
Plan for the building or structure after the hazardous substances are removed:
Repair
page 1 of 2
Planned activity involving asbestos-containing material:

Removal
Highest risk classification of this project as determined by a qualified person:

Moderate
Attachments
Attachments
Category File name Comment
1 Safe work procedures 13159 - ACM - SWP-RA-ECP-
ModRisk - 10551 Shellbridge
WayRichmond -.pdf
2 Hazardous material survey 216561.055 HBMA Report AEP2
Units 90 95 10551 Shellbridge
Wy Richmond BC Colliers Apri.pdf
Other information
Submitted by:
Edson Figueroa
778-298-2268
edsonf@practivehazmat.com
Limitations
Neither the issuance of a Notice of Project number, nor the absence of follow-up action by WorkSafeBC
indicates acceptance or approval of the information provided. If you have any safety concerns
regarding this project, contact the person in charge of this project or WorkSafeBC prevention
information line at 604.276.3100 or 1.888.621.7233.
Significant changes
If the information on the Notice of Project significantly changes, the new information must be submitted
to WorkSafeBC as soon as possible and posted at the worksite.
To update the information, provide WorkSafeBC with the Notice of Project number, the worksite address,
and a summary of the changes you want to make by either:
Email: prevnop@worksafebc.com
Fax: 604.276.3247
page 2 of 2
RISK ASSESSMENT
Asbestos Abatement
4. SIGN OFFS
QUALIFIED PERSON (ASSESSOR): REVIEWER:

NAME/DESIGNATIONS:
POSITION/TITLE:
COMPANY:
SIGNATURE:
ASSESSMENT DATE:
REVISION DATE:
5. WARRANTY/DISCLAIMER
Page 2 of 2
APPENDIX II
Inspection Report
Inspection Report
Project Information
Date: Pinchin Representative: Report Number: 1

March 22, 2021 Charles Hankins Pinchin File: 216561.095
Project Name: Site Address:
AEP Building 2, Unit 95 abatement 10551 Shellbridge Way, Richmond, BC
Client: Client File Number:
Colliers International N/A
Contractor: Arrival on Site: 20:30
ProActive Hazmat and Environmental Number of Workers: 4
Distribution:
Description of Work in Progress
Material Work Area Work in Progress Type of Inspection Status

Asbestos AEP Building 2 – Unit 95 Removal and disposal of 1. Pre-contamination Acceptable
asbestos containing drywall and inspection
joint compound following 2. Bulk Removal
Moderate Risk work procedures
3. Asbestos air
monitoring
Action:
Work Area: AEP Building 2 – Unit 95
Containment setup is acceptable.

Negative air unit is fully operational, and DOP tested within the calendar
Site Isolation &
Acceptable year. HEPA vacuums are good condition and DOP tested within the
Facilities/Equipment
calendar year
Equipment utilized are in good condition
Personal Protective Full face PAPR with P100 filter
Acceptable
Equipment Tyvek suits, work gloves, work boots
Asbestos air monitoring conducted following Pinchin’s Standard
Samples and Testing Acceptable
Operating Procedures.
Waste is not accumulating and placed in waste bags immediately after
Waste Handling Acceptable removal
Use of water observed – to dampen dust levels
COVID-19 Protocols in place
Cleaning Acceptable
Work areas are kept clean and organized
Pinchin Ltd.
Richmond, BC
www.pinchin.com Page 1 of 2
Inspection Report; Report Number: 1 March 22, 2021
AEP Building 2, Unit 95 abatement Pinchin File: 216561.095
10551 Shellbridge Way, Richmond, BC Colliers International
J:\216000s\0216561.000 Colliers,BCCUCC,HBMAandPhase1ESA\0216561.095 Colliers, AEP2, Unit 95 Abatement,HAZ\Field Notes
Template: Inspection Report Template HAZ, January 10, 2020

Inspection Report
Project Information

Distribution:

asbestos containing drywall and 2. Bulk Removal
joint compound following
3. Asbestos air
monitoring
Action:
1. Pinchin instructed to HEPA vacuum thoroughly on carpet floor spaces upon removal of polyethylene
sheeting on carpeted floor spaces.

Site Isolation &
calendar year
Acceptable
Waste Handling Acceptable removal
Waste in double bags and wiped before exiting the work area
Cleaning Acceptable
Pinchin Ltd.
Richmond, BC

Inspection Report
Project Information

Distribution:

and associated Corridor asbestos containing drywall and 2. Bulk Removal
between Unit 10 and 15 joint compound following
3. Asbestos air
monitoring
4. Final visual
clearance
Action:
1. Specified areas to be abated within the corridor space between Unit 10 and 15 commenced.
2. Final visual clearance inspection approved on one half section of the Corridor space between Unit 10
and 15 (See photos)
3. Acceptable containment/ work area setup inside the unit for drywall removal on Column.
Work Area: AEP Building 2 – Unit 95 and Corridor

Site Isolation &
calendar year
Acceptable
Operating Procedures
Waste Handling Acceptable
removal
Pinchin Ltd.
Richmond, BC
No debris observed on horizontal and vertical steel stud tracks

Surfaces are wiped and HEPA vacuumed prior to removal of containment
Cleaning Acceptable
Carpet is HEPA vacuumed after the containment was taken down to
ensure no excess debris is left behind
ACM banner tape to be added prior to start of abatement
Areas above ceiling where ACM joint compound is

observed are removed and squared off. Drywall without
ACM joint compound will remain


Inspection Report
Project Information

Distribution:

and associated Corridor asbestos containing drywall and 2. Bulk Removal
between Unit 10 and 15 joint compound following
3. Asbestos air
monitoring
4. Final visual
clearance
Action:
1. Final visual clearance inspection approved on one column present within the Unit
2. Final visual clearance inspection approved on the corridor space between Unit 10 and 15
3. All areas where ACM material is removed from are encapsulated with fibre-lock solution prior to removal
of containment
4. Areas/ surfaces within the containment are HEPA vacuumed prior to demobilization of containment

Site Isolation & Negative air unit is fully operational, and DOP tested within the calendar
Acceptable
Facilities/Equipment year; vented directly outside of the building
Acceptable
removal
Pinchin Ltd.
Richmond, BC
Waste transfer observed. Bags are wiped before leaving containment

Waste bags are stowed away cleaned and placed on polyethylene drop
sheeting
Cleaning Acceptable
Carpet is HEPA vacuumed after the containment was taken down to
ensure no excess debris is left behind


Inspection Report
Project Information

Distribution:

3. Asbestos air
monitoring
Final clean to resume; areas Final visual clearance Unacceptable

selected by Pinchin during
visual clearance inspection
Action:
1. Final visual clearance inspection throughout the office space; perimeter walls under windows and walls
on concrete columns completed
2. Pinchin did not approve final visual clearance due to observation of ACM drywall joint compound in
select areas
3. Visual clearance to be completed on Monday – ProActive to setup work areas in preparation for
Moderate Risk work procedures to commence on Monday.

Acceptable
Acceptable
Pinchin Ltd.
Richmond, BC

removal
Waste Handling Acceptable Waste transfer observed. Bags are wiped before leaving containment
Waste bags are stowed away cleaned and placed on polyethylene drop
sheeting
COVID-19 Protocol in place
Cleaning Acceptable

Inspection Report
Project Information

Distribution:

3. Asbestos air
monitoring
4. Final visual
clearance
Action:
1. Final visual clearance inspection approved by Pinchin. All areas where ACM drywall debris previously
observed is now removed / squared off / encapsulated with fibre-locking solution

Acceptable
Acceptable

Cleaning Acceptable
Pinchin Ltd.
Richmond, BC

APPENDIX III
Asbestos Air Monitoring Results
Pinchin Ltd.
Air Sample Report
Pinchin File No.: 216561.095
Project Description: AEP Building 2 - Unit 95 Abatement
Sample Date Date Time Time Type Location Fibre
No. On Off On Off Level
(mm/dd/yy) (mm/dd/yy) (24 hrs) (24 hrs) (f/cc)
a
1 BLK Field Blank <
2 3-22-21 3-22-21 21:10 23:39 AMB Inside Unit 95, Adj. to Containment entrance < 0.02
3 3-22-21 3-22-21 22:04 22:48 OCC William (PAPR), Drywall removal < 0.45
4 3-23-21 3-23-21 18:15 20:50 AMB Inside Unit 95, Adj. to Containment entrance (SW Area) < 0.02
a
5 3-23-21 3-23-21 OCC Occupational - pump fault < FAULT
6 3-24-21 3-24-21 17:10 19:50 AMB Inside Unit 95, Adj. to Atrium door < 0.02
7 3-24-21 3-24-21 17:05 17:50 OCC William (PAPR), Drywall removal from column 0.80
8 3-25-21 3-25-21 16:40 20:30 AMB Inside Unit 95, Middle of the Unit < 0.01
9 3-25-21 3-25-21 17:00 17:45 OCC William (PAPR), Drywall removal 0.52
10 2-26-21 2-26-21 16:45 20:35 AMB Inside Unit 95, Adj. to Atrium door < 0.01
a
11 2-26-21 2-26-21 BLK Field Blank <
12 2-26-21 2-26-21 17:10 18:00 OCC Lami (PAPR), Drywall removal and final clean 0.60
Sample Type Criteria

CLR - Air Clearance Air clearance 0.02 f/cc
CLN - Clean Room Exposure Limit 0.1 f/cc
AMB - Ambient Ambient 0.02 f/cc
OCC - Occupational Clean Room 0.02 f/cc
BGD - Background Half-mask (negative pressure) 1 f/cc
BLK - Blank PAPR (full-face) 10 f/cc
Airline, Pressure Demand Full-face 100 f/cc
Airline, Continous Flow Full-face 100 f/cc
< - Less than the quantitation limit. SCBA, Full-face 1,000 f/cc
a - Fibre loading is below the limit of detection (7 f/mm 2)
Overload - nonfibrous material (as defined by NIOSH 7400) covered the counting field; no value available
Fault - Pump malfunction (loss of power) or cassette voided (wet, damaged filter, etc.), therefore no sample available
Pinchin Ltd. will store these samples for 90 days and will destroy the samples after this time unless otherwise instructed. Samples were analyzed in accordance with
NIOSH 7400 Method.
Pinchin participates in the Proficiency Analytical Testing program administered by the American Industrial Hygiene Association. All analysts are evaluated four times per
year and the Coefficient of Variation is calculated annually. The Coefficient of Variation is 0.34 and represents the ratio of the standard deviation to the mean and is useful
for comparing the degree of variation from one analyst to another.
Sample Range 8 through 12
Analyzed by: [insert signature] Reviewed by:

Charles Hankins Larissa Braun Neville
Project Technologist Project Manager
216561.095a01
Pinchin Ltd. - Air Sample Results - Raw Data
216561
AEP Building 2 - Unit 95 Abatement
Sample Date On Date Off Analysis Time On Time Off Type Location Flow Fibre Field Fibres Graticule Run Time Vol Density Fibre Level Analyst
No. mm/dd/yy mm/dd/yy mm/dd/yy (24 hrs) (24 hrs) (L/M) Count Count on Blank Area (Min) (L) (f/mm2) (Fibres/cc)
1 BLK Field Blank 0.0 100 0.00785 0 0.0 < a CH
2 3-22-21 3-22-21 3-24-21 21:10 23:39 AMB Inside Unit 95, Adj. to Containment entrance 14.90 49.0 100 0.0 0.00785 149 2220 62.4 < 0.02 CH
3 3-22-21 3-22-21 3-24-21 22:04 22:48 OCC William (PAPR), Drywall removal 1.94 74.0 100 0.0 0.00785 44 85 94.3 < 0.45 CH
4 3-23-21 3-23-21 3-26-21 18:15 20:50 AMB Inside Unit 95, Adj. to Containment entrance (SW Area) 14.90 31.0 100 0.0 0.00785 155 2310 39.5 < 0.02 CH
5 3-23-21 3-23-21 3-26-21 OCC Occupational - pump fault 1.94 100 0.0 0.00785 0 0.0 < FAULT a CH
6 3-24-21 3-24-21 3-26-21 17:10 19:50 AMB Inside Unit 95, Adj. to Atrium door 12.78 24.0 100 0.0 0.00785 160 2045 30.6 < 0.02 CH
7 3-24-21 3-24-21 3-26-21 17:05 17:50 OCC William (PAPR), Drywall removal from column 1.94 110.0 77 0.0 0.00785 45 87 182.0 0.80 CH
8 3-25-21 3-25-21 3-29-21 16:40 20:30 AMB Inside Unit 95, Middle of the Unit 12.78 67.0 100 0.0 0.00785 230 2939 85.4 < 0.01 CH
9 3-25-21 3-25-21 3-29-21 17:00 17:45 OCC William (PAPR), Drywall removal 1.94 92.0 100 0.0 0.00785 45 87 117.2 0.52 CH
10 2-26-21 2-26-21 3-29-21 16:45 20:35 AMB Inside Unit 95, Adj. to Atrium door 12.78 56.0 100 0.0 0.00785 230 2939 71.3 < 0.01 CH
11 2-26-21 2-26-21 3-29-21 BLK Field Blank 1.0 100 0.00785 0 1.3 < a CH
12 2-26-21 2-26-21 3-29-21 17:10 18:00 OCC Lami (PAPR), Drywall removal and final clean 1.94 105.0 88 1.0 0.00785 50 97 150.7 0.60 CH
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
APPENDIX IV
Waste Manifest
RICHMOND, BC
APPENDIX 2.2
Abatement Project Summary Report
Abatement Project
Summary Report
Prepared for:
200 Grandville Street, 19th Floor
Vancouver, British Columbia, V6C 2R6
May 17, 2021

Issued to: Colliers International

Issued on: May 17, 2021
Author: Charles Hankins, BES, Dipl. CVT

Project Technologist
604.238.2944
chankins@pinchin.com
Reviewer: Bryan Zecchel Dipl. T, A.Sc.T

Operations Manager
604.319.1398

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................................. 1

2.0 PROJECT SCOPE ........................................................................................................................... 1
3.0 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS ........................................................................................................ 1
4.0 INSPECTION AND AIR MONITORING REPORTS ........................................................................ 1
5.0 MILESTONE INSPECTIONS ........................................................................................................... 2
6.0 SAMPLING ....................................................................................................................................... 2
6.1 Asbestos Air Sampling ......................................................................................................... 2
6.2 Description of Types of Samples .......................................................................................... 3
7.0 MONITORING RESULT................................................................................................................... 3
7.1 Asbestos Air Sampling Results ............................................................................................ 3
8.0 DISCUSSION OF PROJECT ........................................................................................................... 3
8.1 General ................................................................................................................................. 3
8.2 Air Monitoring........................................................................................................................ 3
8.3 Project Completion ............................................................................................................... 4
9.0 TERMS AND LIMITATIONS ............................................................................................................ 4
APPENDICES
APPENDIX I Contractor Submittals

APPENDIX II Inspection Report
APPENDIX III Asbestos Air Monitoring Results
APPENDIX IV Waste Manifest

1.0 INTRODUCTION
Colliers International (Client) retained Pinchin Ltd. (Pinchin) to provide hazardous materials services
within Building 2 Unit 90 of Airport Executive Park, located at 10551 Shellbridge Way, Richmond, British
Columbia.
The services provided during the project included the following:
• Provide consulting and project management throughout the abatement.
• Provide inspection and air monitoring as required throughout the abatement.
• Provide abatement services by sub-contracting a Hazardous Materials Contractor.
The purpose of this report is to provide a summary of the project, provide a declaration of completion and
to place the important documents in one complete document.
2.0 PROJECT SCOPE
This abatement of hazardous materials was conducted in preparation for building renovation.
The following is a brief description of the asbestos materials abatement work:
• Removal and disposal of asbestos-containing drywall from perimeter walls and wall
cladding on columns throughout Unit 90 following Moderate Risk work procedures.
• Removal and disposal of asbestos-containing drywall from corridor walls within

associated Public Corridor North of Elevator directly outside Unit 90 following Moderate
Risk work procedures.
3.0 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
Refer to Appendix I for copies of the Contractor Submittals including:
• Notice of Project.
• Safe Work Procedures.
• Waste Manifests.
4.0 INSPECTION AND AIR MONITORING REPORTS
Pinchin provided inspection and air monitoring services during the contaminated work portion of the
abatement project, from March 30, 2021 to April 1, 2021. A total of three Inspection Reports was issued
over the course of this project. Inspection reports are included in Appendix II.

The objectives of the inspections were to monitor the work for compliance with the scope of work and
provincial guidelines and regulation, to monitor environmental safety and the progress of the work, to
document the work for future reference, and to provide an air monitoring record of the work.
At the time of each inspection, the Pinchin Inspector examined the Hazardous Material Work Area. A
report was prepared after each inspection, noting the condition of the site and conduct of the Contractor.
Directions were given to the Contractor in each report where applicable, to bring the work in compliance
with the provincial guidelines and regulation.
5.0 MILESTONE INSPECTIONS
Inspections were performed at significant milestones during abatement. These Milestone Inspections
were performed during abatement, and are as follows:
Milestone Inspection A – Clean Site Preparation (Pre-Contamination) - Inspect the site preparations and
set-up prior to contaminated work in the Work Area to ensure the initial site isolation is effective.
Milestone Inspection B – Bulk Removal Inspection and Air Monitoring - Inspection of the Work Area/s and
air monitoring to ensure compliance with the contract documents and to monitor environmental safety
during the progress of work in accordance to provincial guidelines.
Milestone Inspection C – Visual Clearance - Visual inspection of the Work Area to ensure that accessible
asbestos-containing materials and lead-based paints have been removed and areas are adequately
cleaned of dust and debris prior to application of lock-down agent.
Milestone Inspection D – Dismantling Inspection – Final Inspection of the Work Area after removal of the
polyethylene enclosure and prior to demobilization of the Contractor.
6.0 SAMPLING
6.1 Asbestos Air Sampling
Air monitoring for asbestos was conducted in accordance with Phase Contrast Microscopy (PCM)
methods following National Institute for Occupation Safety and Health (NIOSH) 7400 methodology. Air
sample pumps were calibrated before and after use. Sampling volumes were adjusted for the anticipated
airborne fibre level, to give appropriate concentrations of fibres on the filter surface.
Fibres are not identified or characterized as asbestos in the PCM method. All particles equal to or longer
than 5 micrometres and with length-to-width ratios of 3:1 or greater are included in the count. Therefore, if
fibreglass, cellulose, or gypsum fibres are also present, the PCM method will overestimate the true
asbestos concentration. Fibres with diameters less than about 0.25 micrometres are not detected by the

method, regardless of length. This is the resolution limit of the optical microscope set up with phase
contrast illumination.
Air samples were analyzed by Pinchin staff. All Pinchin analysts participate in either the Institut de
recherché Robert-Sauvé en santé et en sécurité du travail (IRSST) program or the American Industrial
Hygiene Association (AIHA) Proficiency Analyst Testing Program.
6.2 Description of Types of Samples
The types of samples that are generally collected correspond to the categories described as follows:
Field Blank A sample collected for quality control purposes to ensure samples are not
contaminated during the handling process. A field blank is transported to
the site and handled in a manner representative of the associated
samples in the set.
Ambient Air sample collected at the perimeter or outside (on the clean side) of the
Asbestos Work Area to document “clean” conditions at locations outside
the enclosure occupied by staff, tenants, or the public.
Occupational Air sample collected on a worker, using a battery-operated pump worn by
the worker. Gives the best estimate of worker exposure level and ensures
airborne fibre concentrations do not exceed the respirator protection
factor.
7.0 MONITORING RESULT
7.1 Asbestos Air Sampling Results
Air sampling results are included on the inspection reports in Appendix III.
8.0 DISCUSSION OF PROJECT
8.1 General
Work was performed by Proactive Hazmat and Environmental Ltd. (Contractor). Proactive began site
mobilization on March 30, 2021 and completed all required hazardous material abatement, waste removal
and demobilization by April 1, 2021. The abatement of hazardous materials followed the procedures
outlined in the scope of work as prepared by Pinchin. Pinchin provided inspection and air monitoring
services on a daily basis during the contaminated work.
8.2 Air Monitoring
All air samples results collected outside of the work area were within acceptable criteria. All personal air
sample results were within acceptable criteria for the respiratory protection observed in use.

8.3 Project Completion
In our opinion, the performance of the Contractor was acceptable. At no point during the project was work
stopped due to non-compliance, leakage from a work area, or improper safety procedures. All asbestos
and lead waste were reportedly disposed of, recycled and/or treated in accordance with provincial
regulations.
The abatement work was performed successfully in compliance with the scope of work.
this project.
216561.090 Abatement Summary Report AEP2 Unit 90,10551 ShellbridgeWy,Rmd,BC,Colliers,17May2021
Template: Master Report for Abatement Project Summary, HAZ, February 27, 2020

APPENDIX I
Contractor Submittals
Hazardous substances
Submitted: Thursday, March 18, 2021 at 1:25 p.m. Pacific Time
Except as permitted by OHS regulation , WorkSafeBC must be provided with at least 48-hour
20.2.1(6)
written notice prior to the start of the work activity. Work on this project, including set-up activities, may
begin on March 20, 2021, 1:25 p.m. Pacific Time, or on the start date indicated on the Notice of Project
— whichever is later.
20.2.1(5)
OHS regulation requires that a copy of the notice of project is posted at the worksite for the
duration of the project.
Worksite details
Worksite Location
City Location Planned start date Duration
1 Richmond 10551 Shellbridge Way, Richmond, BC V6X 3/22/2021 5 Days
2W8, Canada - AEP 2 Unit 90
49.187133,-123.107548
Daily hours of work:

17:00 to 01:00
Workers at the worksite per shift:

5
Owner or agent representative of this worksite:

200 Granville St
Vancouver, British Columbia
Canada, V6C 1S4
Project information
Employer working with or in proximity to the hazardous substances:
WorkSafeBC Account Number: 860760
Proactive hazmat and environmental
9295 198 St
Langley City, British Columbia
Canada, V1M 3J9
Person in charge of the planned activity:

Mike Tondu
Foreman
778-809-0579
Consultants:
Pinchin ( Consulting )
Scope of work
Plan for the building or structure after the hazardous substances are removed:
Repair
page 1 of 2
Planned activity involving asbestos-containing material:

Removal
Highest risk classification of this project as determined by a qualified person:

Moderate
Attachments
Attachments
Category File name Comment
1 Hazardous material survey 216561.055 HBMA Report AEP2
Units 90 95 10551 Shellbridge
Wy Richmond BC Colliers Apri.pdf
2 Safe work procedures 13160 - ACM - SWP-RA-ECP-
ModRisk - 10551 Shellbridge
WayRichmond -.pdf
Other information
Submitted by:
Edson Figueroa
778-298-2268
edsonf@practivehazmat.com
Limitations
Neither the issuance of a Notice of Project number, nor the absence of follow-up action by WorkSafeBC
indicates acceptance or approval of the information provided. If you have any safety concerns
regarding this project, contact the person in charge of this project or WorkSafeBC prevention
information line at 604.276.3100 or 1.888.621.7233.
Significant changes
If the information on the Notice of Project significantly changes, the new information must be submitted
to WorkSafeBC as soon as possible and posted at the worksite.
To update the information, provide WorkSafeBC with the Notice of Project number, the worksite address,
and a summary of the changes you want to make by either:
Email: prevnop@worksafebc.com
Fax: 604.276.3247
page 2 of 2
Form Number: GM-16-001-2.5-JP
Status: Released
Revision Date: -03-2021
PROJECT CHANGE NOTIFICATION FORM

Purpose: FM Change Time/Date Change Additional Equipment Additional SOW
Job Cancelled Postponed(forecasted start date) Additional Billing Yes No
Re-attending site? Yes
Estimator:
NOP#: Job #:
: Start Date:
How many days:
Site address:
Unit Number(s):
Procedures: Same Change Additional SOW

Extension: Yes No T&M Lump Sum
Description:
Site Access Information:

Foreman:
Start time: Finish time:

No. of Workers:
OHS Person Submitting this Form: Edson Figueroa - 778-298-2268
Page 1 of 1
RISK ASSESSMENT
Asbestos Abatement
4. SIGN OFFS
QUALIFIED PERSON (ASSESSOR): REVIEWER:

NAME/DESIGNATIONS:
POSITION/TITLE:
COMPANY:
SIGNATURE:
ASSESSMENT DATE:
REVISION DATE:
5. WARRANTY/DISCLAIMER
Page 2 of 2
APPENDIX II
Inspection Report
Inspection Report
Project Information

Proactive Hazmat and Environmental Number of Workers: 3
Distribution:

3. Asbestos air
monitoring
Action:
1. Washout bucket and clean cloths/ rags initially not in place. Added immediately upon Pinchin’s request

Site Isolation &
calendar year
Acceptable
removal
Cleaning Acceptable
Pinchin Ltd.
Richmond, BC

Inspection Report
Project Information

Distribution:

3. Asbestos air
monitoring
4. Final visual
clearance
Action:
1. Removal and disposal of corridor drywall commenced.
2. Final visual clearance inspection of corridor work area approved by Pinchin.

Site Isolation &
calendar year
Acceptable
removal
Pinchin Ltd.
Richmond, BC
Horizontal and vertical surfaces are HEPA vacuumed and wiped

Cleaning Acceptable


Inspection Report
Project Information

April 1, 2021 Charles Hankins Pinchin File: 216561.090
Distribution:

Asbestos AEP Building 2 – Unit 90 Removal and disposal of 1. Final visual Acceptable
asbestos containing drywall and clearance
HEPA vacuuming of all carpet

surface areas within the work
zones
Action:
1. ACM materials successfully removed from all work areas within the scope of work.
2. Paint is observed on electrical outlets – confirmed in all work areas (not ACM joint compound)

Site Isolation &
calendar year
Acceptable
No asbestos air monitoring conducted at this time.
Samples and Testing N/A
Waste transfer acceptable. Waste bags are wiped and cleaned before
exiting the containment
Pinchin Ltd.
Richmond, BC
Inspection Report; Report Number: 3 April 1, 2021

Cleaning Acceptable
White paint observed – not ACM joint compound

APPENDIX III
Asbestos Air Monitoring Results
Pinchin Ltd.
Air Sample Report
Pinchin File No.: 216561.090.
Project Description: AEP Building 2 - Unit 90 Abatement
Sample Date Date Time Time Type Location Fibre
No. On Off On Off Level
(mm/dd/yy) (mm/dd/yy) (24 hrs) (24 hrs) (f/cc)
a
1 BLK Field Blank <
2 3-30-21 3-30-21 18:12 21:19 AMB Inside Unit 90, Adj. to Entrance Door < 0.02
3 3-30-21 3-30-21 18:15 19:05 OCC Lami (PAPR), Drywall removal 0.45
4 3-31-21 3-31-21 18:52 21:53 AMB First floor Hallway, Adj. to Elevator < 0.02
5 3-31-21 3-31-21 19:00 19:44 OCC Trevor (PAPR), Drywall removal 0.60
Sample Type Criteria

CLR - Air Clearance Air clearance 0.02 f/cc
CLN - Clean Room Exposure Limit 0.1 f/cc
AMB - Ambient Ambient 0.02 f/cc
OCC - Occupational Clean Room 0.02 f/cc
BGD - Background Half-mask (negative pressure) 1 f/cc
BLK - Blank PAPR (full-face) 10 f/cc
Airline, Pressure Demand Full-face 100 f/cc
Airline, Continous Flow Full-face 100 f/cc
< - Less than the quantitation limit. SCBA, Full-face 1,000 f/cc
a - Fibre loading is below the limit of detection (7 f/mm 2)
Overload - nonfibrous material (as defined by NIOSH 7400) covered the counting field; no value available
Fault - Pump malfunction (loss of power) or cassette voided (wet, damaged filter, etc.), therefore no sample available
Pinchin Ltd. will store these samples for 90 days and will destroy the samples after this time unless otherwise instructed. Samples were analyzed in accordance with
NIOSH 7400 Method.
Pinchin participates in the Proficiency Analytical Testing program administered by the American Industrial Hygiene Association. All analysts are evaluated four times
per year and the Coefficient of Variation is calculated annually. The Coefficient of Variation is 0.34 and represents the ratio of the standard deviation to the mean
and is useful for comparing the degree of variation from one analyst to another.
Sample Range 1 through 5
Analyzed by: [insert signature] Reviewed by:

Charles Hankins Larissa Braun Neville
Project Technologist Project Manager
216561.090a01
Pinchin Ltd. - Air Sample Results - Raw Data
216561.090.
AEP Building 2 - Unit 90 Abatement
Sample Date On Date Off Analysis Time On Time Off Type Location Flow Fibre Field Fibres Graticule Run Time Vol Density Fibre Level Analyst
No. mm/dd/yy mm/dd/yy mm/dd/yy (24 hrs) (24 hrs) (L/M) Count Count on Blank Area (Min) (L) (f/mm2) (Fibres/cc)
1 BLK Field Blank 3.0 100 0.00785 0 3.8 < a CH
2 3-30-21 3-30-21 3-31-21 18:12 21:19 AMB Inside Unit 90, Adj. to Entrance Door 12.78 26.0 100 3.0 0.00785 187 2390 29.3 < 0.02 CH
3 3-30-21 3-30-21 3-31-21 18:15 19:05 OCC Lami (PAPR), Drywall removal 1.94 92.0 100 3.0 0.00785 50 97 113.4 0.45 CH
4 3-31-21 3-31-21 4-1-21 18:52 21:53 AMB First floor Hallway, Adj. to Elevator 12.78 19.0 100 3.0 0.00785 181 2313 20.4 < 0.02 CH
5 3-31-21 3-31-21 4-1-21 19:00 19:44 OCC Trevor (PAPR), Drywall removal 1.94 103.0 96 3.0 0.00785 44 85 132.9 0.60 CH
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
APPENDIX IV
Waste Manifest
RICHMOND, BC
APPENDIX 2.3
Hazardous Building Materials Assessment
Unit 90 and 95
Airport Executive Building No. 2
Hazardous Building
Materials Assessment
Unit 90 and 95
Airport Executive Building No. 2
Prepared for:
Suite 90, 10451 Shellbridge Way
Richmond, British Columbia, V6X 2W8
April 9, 2020

Hazardous Building Materials Assessment April 9, 2020
Airport Executive Building No. 2, 10551 Shellbridge Way, Richmond, British Columbia Pinchin File: 216561.055
Issued To: Colliers International

Issued On: April 9, 2020
Author: Raymond Leung, Dipl. OHS, EPt

Project Coordinator
604.238.2959
rleung@pinchin.com
Reviewer: Bryan Zecchel, Dipl. T, A Sc T

Operations Manager
604.238.2905

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
Colliers International (Client) retained Pinchin Ltd. (Pinchin) to conduct a hazardous building materials
assessment within the Airport Executive Building No. 2 located at 10551 Shellbridge Way, Richmond,
British Columbia. Pinchin performed the assessment on March 20, 2020.
The objective of the assessment was to identify specified hazardous building materials in preparation for
building renovation. The results of this assessment are intended for use with a properly developed scope
of work and performance specification.
The assessed area was limited to Units 90, 95 of the building located at 10551 Shellbridge Way,
Richmond, British Columbia. The assessed area is shown on the drawing located in Appendix I of this
report.
SUMMARY OF FINDINGS
Asbestos: Asbestos-containing materials (ACM) are present as follows:
• Drywall joint compound present on columns and perimeter walls within Suite 95 Office
Area, Lunchroom, Inner Office Area and Suite 90 Office Area, and Inner Office Area (Loc.
22, 23, 25, 58, and 59).
Lead: Lead is present as follows:
• Batteries of emergency lights.
Silica: Crystalline silica is present in concrete.
Mercury: Mercury vapour is present in light tubes.
Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs): Based on the date of construction, PCBs may be present in light
ballasts
Mould and Water Damage: Visible mould and water damage was not observed.

SUMMARY OF RECOMMENDATIONS
The following is a summary of significant recommendations; refer to the body of the report for detailed
recommendations.
1. Prepare specifications for the hazardous material removal required for the planned work.
2. Conduct further investigation of the following items, which could not be completed during
this assessment due to limitations on scope, occupancy, or being in service at the time of
the assessment:
a. Any materials listed as exclusions in this report, prior to disturbance.
3. Do not disturb suspected hazardous building materials discovered during the planned
work, which have not been identified in this report and arrange for further evaluation and
testing.
4. Remove and dispose of asbestos-containing materials if disturbed by the planned

renovation work.
5. Recycle mercury-containing light tubes.
6. Follow appropriate safe work procedures when handling or disturbing silica.
This Executive Summary is subject to the same standard limitations as contained in the report and must
be read in conjunction with the entire report.
© 2020 Pinchin Ltd. Page iii

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 INTRODUCTION AND SCOPE ....................................................................................................... 1

1.1 Scope of Assessment ........................................................................................................... 1
2.0 BACKGROUND INFORMATION ..................................................................................................... 2
2.1 Building Description .............................................................................................................. 2
2.2 Existing Reports.................................................................................................................... 2
3.0 FINDINGS ........................................................................................................................................ 2
3.1 Asbestos ............................................................................................................................... 2
3.2 Lead ...................................................................................................................................... 7
3.3 Silica ..................................................................................................................................... 8
3.4 Mercury ................................................................................................................................. 8
3.5 Polychlorinated Biphenyls .................................................................................................... 8
3.6 Mould .................................................................................................................................... 9
4.0 RECOMMENDATIONS .................................................................................................................... 9
4.1 General ................................................................................................................................. 9
4.2 Building Demolition or Renovation Work .............................................................................. 9
5.0 TERMS AND LIMITATIONS .......................................................................................................... 10
6.0 REFERENCES............................................................................................................................... 11
APPENDICES
APPENDIX I Drawing
APPENDIX II-A Asbestos Analytical Certificates
APPENDIX II-B Lead Analytical Certificates
APPENDIX III Methodology
APPENDIX IV Location Summary Report
APPENDIX V Hazardous Materials Summary Report / Sample Log
APPENDIX VI HMIS Data Report
© 2020 Pinchin Ltd. Page iv

1.0 INTRODUCTION AND SCOPE
Colliers International (Client) retained Pinchin Ltd. (Pinchin) to conduct a hazardous building materials
assessment within the Airport Executive Building No. 2 located at 10551 Shellbridge Way, Richmond,
British Columbia.
Pinchin performed the assessment on March 20, 2020. The surveyor was unaccompanied during the
assessment. The assessed area was unoccupied at the time of the assessment.
The objective of the assessment was to identify specified hazardous building materials in preparation for
building renovation. The results of this assessment are intended for use with a properly developed scope
of work and performance specification.
1.1 Scope of Assessment
The assessment was performed to establish the location and type of specified hazardous building
materials incorporated in the structure(s) and its finishes. This assessment is intended to be used for
renovation purposes only and may not provide sufficient detail for long term management of hazardous
materials as required by Health and Safety regulations.
The assessed area was limited to the parts of the building within the area to be renovated including:
• The assessed area was limited to the interior of Units 90 and 95.
The extent of the assessed area was defined by the Client and is shown on the appended drawing.
For the purpose of the assessment and this report, hazardous building materials are defined as follows:
• Asbestos;
• Lead;
• Silica;
• Mercury;
• Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs); and
• Mould.

2.0 BACKGROUND INFORMATION
2.1 Building Description
Description Item Details

Use Office Building
Number of Floors The building is 2 stories plus 1 level below grade
Total Area The assessed area is 10, 800 square feet
Year of Construction The building was constructed in 1975
Structure Steel, concrete
Exterior Cladding Masonry
HVAC Rooftop AC, forced air
Roof Not in scope
Flooring Carpet, vinyl floor tile
Interior Walls Drywall
Ceilings Acoustic ceiling tiles
2.2 Existing Reports
Pinchin was provided with the following reports, which have been reviewed as part of this assessment:
• “Hazardous Building Materials Assessment, Airport Executive Park- Building 2, 10551

Shellbridge Road, Richmond, BC”, dated: October 27, 2016, Pinchin Ltd. File No.
13881O.
3.0 FINDINGS
The following section summarizes the findings of the assessment and provides a general description of
the hazardous materials identified and their locations. For details on approximate quantities, assessment
and locations of hazardous materials; refer to the Hazardous Material Summary Report and All Data
Report in Appendix V and VI.
3.1 Asbestos
3.1.1 Pipe Insulation
Pipes are insulated with fibreglass, or other non-asbestos insulation such as mineral fibre or elastomeric
foam insulation.

The following table summarize the location, condition and quantity of asbestos-containing pipe insulation:
3.1.2 Duct Insulation and Mastic
Ducts are either uninsulated or insulated with non-asbestos fibreglass (foil-faced or canvas).
The following table summarizes the duct mastics present in the assessed area:
Quantity (LF Sample Asbestos

Colour Location (Location #)
of ducts) Number Type
Suite 95 Office Area, Suite 90 Office Area,

190 linear None
Grey Suite 95 Inner Office, Suite 90 Inner Office S0067A-C
feet Detected
Area (Loc. 22, 25, 58, and 59)
Suite 90 Office Area and Inner Office Area 110 linear None
Green S0075A-C
(Loc. 25 and 59) feet Detected
Non-asbestos grey duct mastic (S0067). Non-asbestos green duct mastic (S0075).
3.1.3 Vermiculite
Loose fill vermiculite debris was not observed in the spaces or areas inspected. Destructive testing was
not performed, and vermiculite may be present within masonry block walls, above solid ceilings or other
void spaces.
3.1.4 Acoustic Ceiling Tiles
Acoustic ceiling tiles are present in the assessed area, as follows:
Size, Type, Pattern Locations (Location #) Sample Number Asbestos Type

or Date Code
24”x48”, lay-in, pinhole Throughout assessed area S0066A-G None Detected
fissure (Loc. 22-26, 58, and 59)

Non-asbestos 2x4, lay-in tiles (S0066).
3.1.5 Drywall Joint Compound
Drywall joint compound was determined to be asbestos-containing in previous assessments and sample
collection was conducted to further delineate between areas of drywall with asbestos-containing joint
compounds and non-asbestos-containing drywall joint compound. Drywall joint compound is present in
the assessed area as follows:
Application Locations (Location #) Sample Number Asbestos Type

or Date Code
Drywall joint compound Suite 95 Office Area, Previously 2% Chrysotile
on perimeter wall Lunchroom, Inner Office sampled
Area and Suite 90 Office
Area, and Inner Office Area
(Loc. 22, 23, 25, 58, and 59).
Drywall joint compound Suite 95 Office Area, S0071A-E, 3% Chrysotile
on column Lunchroom, Inner Office
Area and Suite 90 Office S0074A-E
Area, and Inner Office Area
(Loc. 22, 23, 25, 58, and 59).
Drywall joint compound is a non-friable material, painted and is in Good condition.
Drywall joint compound present on interior walls (samples S0070A-G and S0073A-G) within Unit 95 and
90 (Loc. 22-26, 58, and 59) area does not contain asbestos.
Drywall joint compound present on demising walls (sample S0084A-E and S0085A-E) within Unit 95 and
90 (Loc. 22, 25, 26, 58, and 59) area does not contain asbestos.

3.1.6 Vinyl Floor Tiles
Vinyl floor tiles are present as follows:
Size, Pattern, Colour Locations (Location #) Sample Asbestos Asbestos

Number Type (tile) Type
(mastic)
12”x12”, off white with Suite 95 Lunchroom (Loc. 23) S0072A-C None None
tan marble Detected Detected
12”x12”, beige Suite 90 Lunchroom (Loc. 26) S0076A-C None None
Detected Detected
12”x12”, off white with Suite 90 Lunchroom (Loc. 26) S0077A-C None None
grey blue marble Detected Detected
12”x12”, brown marble Suite 95 Server Room (Loc. 24) S0078A-C None None
Detected Detected
12”x12”, white blue Suite 95 Server Room (Loc. 24) S0079A-C None None
fractal Detected Detected
Non-asbestos 12x12, off white with tan marbled (S0072). Non-asbestos 12x12, beige (S0076).
Non-asbestos 12x12 off white with grey blue marble (S0077). Non-asbestos 12x12, brown marble (S0078).

Non-asbestos 12x12, white blue fractal (S0079).
3.1.7 Levelling Compound
Levelling compound was not observed; however, levelling compound is often used in random and
isolated areas and without removing all flooring it may not always be detected.
3.1.8 Sealants, Caulking, and Putty
Grey putty present on window glazing of the sidelights within Suite 95 Office Area and Suite 95 Inner
Office (Loc. 22 and 58) was sampled (samples S0068A-C) and determined to be non-asbestos.
Non-asbestos putty on sidelight within Suite 95 (S0068).
3.1.9 Other Building Materials
The adhesive on rubber cove base present within Unit 90 and 95 (Loc. 22-26, 58, and 59) was sampled
and determined to be non-asbestos (samples S0069A-C).

Non-asbestos adhesive behind beige cove base (S0069).
3.1.10 Presumed Asbestos Materials
The following is a list of materials which may contain asbestos, which were not observed and/or not
sampled during the assessment; these materials are presumed to contain asbestos until otherwise
proven by sampling and analysis:
• Electrical components;
• Caulking;
• Fire resistant doors;
• Vibration dampers on HVAC equipment; and
• Materials concealed or outside the assessed area.
3.2 Lead
3.2.1 Paints and Surface Coatings
Refer to the lab report in Appendix II-B and the Hazardous Materials Summary Report in Appendix V for
details on paints sampled and their locations. All paint samples were below the threshold of 0.009% and
are considered non-lead.
3.2.2 Lead Products and Applications
Lead-containing batteries are present in emergency lighting.

Sample of lead-acid battery.
3.2.3 Presumed Lead Materials
Lead may be present in a number of materials which were not assessed and/or sampled. The following
materials, where found, should be considered to contain lead.
• Electrical components, including wiring connectors, grounding conductors, and solder;

and
• Solder on pipe connections.
3.3 Silica
Crystalline silica is a presumed component of the following materials:
• Poured or pre-cast concrete; and
• Masonry and mortar.
3.4 Mercury
3.4.1 Lamps
Mercury vapour is present in fluorescent lamps and other lighting that is known to contain mercury such
as mercury vapour lamps.
3.4.2 Mercury-Containing Devices
Mercury-containing devices were not found during the assessment.
3.5 Polychlorinated Biphenyls
3.5.1 Lighting Ballasts
The building has not been comprehensively re-lamped with new energy efficient light ballasts and lamps,
and as such, a percentage of light ballasts may be manufactured prior to 1980 and may contain PCBs.

3.5.2 Transformers
Transformers were not found during the assessment.
3.5.3 Presumed PCB Materials
• Voltage regulators and capacitors.
3.6 Mould
Visible mould growth and water damage was not found during the assessment.
4.0 RECOMMENDATIONS
4.1 General
1. Prepare plans and performance specifications for hazardous material removal required
for the planned work. The specifications should include the scope of work, safe work
practices, personal protective equipment, respiratory protection, and disposal of waste
materials.
2. If suspected hazardous building materials are discovered during the planned work, which
are not identified in this report, do not disturb and arrange for further testing and
evaluation.
3. Provide this report and the detailed plans and specifications to the contractor prior to
bidding or commencing work.
4. Retain a qualified consultant to specify, inspect and verify the successful removal of
hazardous materials.
5. Update the asbestos inventory upon completion of the abatement and removal of
asbestos-containing materials.
4.2 Building Demolition or Renovation Work
The following recommendations are made regarding renovation involving the hazardous materials
identified.
4.2.1 Asbestos
Remove asbestos-containing materials (ACM) prior to renovation, alteration, or maintenance if ACM may
be disturbed by the work.
If the identified ACM will not be removed prior to commencement of the work, any potential disturbance of
ACM must follow asbestos precautions appropriate for the type of work being performed.

Asbestos-containing materials must be disposed of at a landfill approved to accept asbestos waste.
4.2.2 Lead
Lead-containing items (lead-acid batteries) should be recycled when taken out of service.
4.2.3 Silica
Construction disturbance of silica-containing products may result in excessive exposures to airborne

silica, especially if performed indoors and dry. Cutting, grinding, drilling or demolition of materials
containing silica should be completed only with proper respiratory protection and other worker safety
precautions that comply with provincial standards or guidelines.
4.2.4 Mercury
Do not break lamps or separate liquid mercury from components. Recycle and reclaim mercury from
fluorescent lamps when taken out of service. Mercury is classified as a hazardous waste and must be
disposed of in accordance with local regulations.
4.2.5 PCBs
When light fixtures are removed, examine light ballasts for PCB content. If ballasts are not clearly labelled
as “non-PCB” or are suspected to contain PCBs; package and ship ballasts for destruction at a federally
permitted facility.
4.2.6 Mould
No mould was observed; if mould is uncovered inside wall cavities during hand demolition, use
appropriate precautions and protect workers using methods that comply with provincial guidelines.
this project.

6.0 REFERENCES
The following legislation and documents were referenced in completing the assessment and this report:
1. Occupational Health and Safety Regulation, B.C. Reg. 296/97, WorkSafe BC.
2. Safe Work Practices for Handling Asbestos, WorkSafe BC.
3. Safe Work Practices for Handling Lead, WorkSafe BC.
4. Hazardous Waste Regulation, B.C. Reg. 21/2016, BC Ministry of Environment.
5. Mould Guidelines for the Canadian Construction Industry, Standard Construction

Document CCA 82 – 2004, Canadian Construction Association.
\\fsrmd\job\216000s\0216561.000 Colliers,BCCUCC,HBMAandPhase1ESA\0216561.055 Colliers, AEP2, Units 90 & 95, HBMA\Deliverables\216561.055 HBMA Report, AEP2,
Units 90 & 95, 10551 Shellbridge Wy, Richmond, BC, Colliers, April 9, 2020.docx
Template: Master Report for Hazardous Materials Assessment (Pre-Construction), HAZ, January 10, 2020

APPENDIX I
Drawing
N
LEGEND
X PINCHIN LOCATION NUMBER
ASBESTOS BULK SAMPLE
LEAD BULK SAMPLE
ASBESTOS-CONTAINING MATERIALS:
DRYWALL AND JOINT COMPOUND ON

COLUMNS AND PERIMETER WALLS
FOR CLARITY, THE FOLLOWING HAZARDOUS

MATERIALS, ARE PRESENT IN THE
ASSESSED AREA, BUT HAVE NOT BEEN
HATCHED ON THE DRAWING:
· FLUORESCENT LIGHT TUBES
· LEAD ACID BATTERIES
S0085E
S0085D
S0077A
59 59 S0077B
S0076A S0077C
S0076B
S0076C
26
59
S0085C
25
S0075A
S0068A S0075B
S0068B S0073C S0075C
S0068C 25
25
S0084E
30 S0066B
S0066A
L-0026 S0074C
S0079A S0085B
S0079B L-0028 24
S0079C 25
S0084B
S0066F
S0084A
S0066G S0085A
S0067A 22
S0067B 30
58 S0074E
S0067C
25
S0070F 22
22 S0073A
S0071E 25 S0074B PROJECT NAME:
S0070G 25 S0073B HAZARDOUS BUILDING

S0073D MATERIALS ASSESSMENT
22
L-0027 23
58 58 22 25 25 25 CLIENT NAME:
22 COLLIERS INTERNATIONAL
S0071D S0074A
SUITE 90, 10451 SHELLBRIDGE WAY
RICHMOND, BC
S0069A PROJECT LOCATION:
S0069B S0084D
L-0029 S0078A S0084C S0070D S0071A S0066C S0071C S0071B S0066E S0074D S0073E 10551 SHELLBRIDGE WAY
S0069C
S0078B RICHMOND, BC
S0078C S0072A
S0070E S0072B S0070C S0066D S0070A S0070B FIGURE NAME:
S0072C
BUILDING 2
NOTE: MAIN FLOOR
NOT ALL KNOWN OR SUSPECTED HAZARDOUS BUILDING MATERIALS MAY BE DEPICTED ON THE DRAWING. REFER TO THE
PA2020030239
PROJECT NUMBER: SCALE:
HAZARDOUS BUILDING MATERIALS ASSESSMENT REPORT FOR A COMPLETE LIST OF KNOWN AND SUSPECTED HAZARDOUS
216561.055 NOT TO SCALE
BUILDING MATERIALS. DRAWN BY: REVIEWED BY:
PM LBN
LEGEND IS COLOUR DEPENDENT. NON-COLOUR COPIES MAY ALTER INTERPRETATION. DATE: FIGURE NUMBER:
MAR 2020 1 OF 1
APPENDIX II-A
Asbestos Analytical Certificates
Bulk Asbestos Analysis
By Polarized Light Microscopy
EPA Method: 600/R-93/116 and 40 CFR, Part 763, Subpart E,
App.E
Customer: Pinchin Ltd. Attn: Raymond Leung Lab Order ID: 71939320
Suite 200, 13775 Commerce Parkway Larissa Braun Neville Analysis ID: 71939320_PLM
Richmond, BC V6V 2V4
Date Received: 3/24/2020
Project: Date Reported: 3/26/2020
AEP Building 2
Sample ID Description Fibrous Attributes

Non-Fibrous
Lab Sample ID Lab Notes Asbestos Components Components Treatment
Ceiling Tiles (lay-in),2x4 Lay White
In Pinhole Fibrous
S0066A Fissure,Loc:22,Suite 95 Office None Detected
45% Cellulose 10% Perlite
Homogeneous
35% Mineral Wool 10% Other
71939320PLM_1 Ashed, Dissolved

In Pinhole Fibrous
S0066B Fissure,Loc:22,Suite 95 Office None Detected
Homogeneous

In Pinhole Fibrous
S0066C Fissure,Loc:22,Suite 95 Office None Detected
Homogeneous

In Pinhole Fibrous
S0066D Fissure,Loc:22,Suite 95 Office None Detected
Homogeneous

In Pinhole Fibrous
S0066E Fissure,Loc:22,Suite 95 Office None Detected
Homogeneous
Ceiling Tiles (lay-in),2x4 Lay- White

in Pinhole Fibrous
S0066F Fissure,Loc:58,Suite 95 Inner None Detected
Homogeneous
Ceiling Tiles (lay-in),2x4 Lay- White

in Pinhole Fibrous
S0066G Fissure,Loc:58,Suite 95 Inner None Detected
Homogeneous
Mastic, Grey,Grey Duct Gray

Mastic,Loc:58,Suite 95 Inner Non Fibrous
S0067A Office None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous
Disclaimer: Due to the nature of the EPA 600 method, asbestos may not be detected in samples containing low levels of asbestos. We strongly recommend that analysis of floor tiles, vermiculite, and/or
heterogeneous soil samples be conducted by TEM for confirmation of “None Detected” by PLM. This report relates only to the samples tested and may not be reproduced, except in full, without the written
approval of SAI. This report may not be used by the client to claim product endorsement by NVLAP or any other agency of the U.S. government. Analytical uncertainty available upon request. Scientific
Analytical Institute participates in the NVLAP Proficiency Testing program. Unless otherwise noted blank sample correction was not performed. Estimated MDL is 0.1%.
Philip Szabo (47)
Heather Davide (30)
P-F-002 r15 1/16/2021 Analyst Approved Signatory
Scientific Analytical Institute, Inc. 4604 Dundas Dr. Greensboro, NC 27407 (336) 292-3888 Page 1 of 10
App.E
AEP Building 2

Non-Fibrous
S0067B Office None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous

S0067C Office None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous
Putty,Putty On Black
Sidelight,Loc:58,Suite 95 Non Fibrous
S0068A Inner Office None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous
S0068B Inner Office None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous
S0068C Inner Office None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous
Adhesive/mastic,Mastic Beige
Behind Beige Cove Non Fibrous
S0069A - A Base,Loc:58,Suite 95 Inner Of None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous
71939320PLM_14
cove base Ashed, Dissolved
Adhesive/mastic,Mastic Yellow
S0069A - B Base,Loc:58,Suite 95 Inner Of None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous
71939320PLM_57
mastic Dissolved
S0069B - A Base,Loc:58,Suite 95 Inner Of None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous
71939320PLM_15
Philip Szabo (47)
Heather Davide (30)
App.E
AEP Building 2

Non-Fibrous
S0069B - B Base,Loc:58,Suite 95 Inner Of None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous
71939320PLM_58
mastic Dissolved
S0069C - A Base,Loc:58,Suite 95 Inner Of None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous
71939320PLM_16
S0069C - B Base,Loc:58,Suite 95 Inner Of None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous
71939320PLM_59
mastic Dissolved
Drywall And Joint White

Compound,Interior Non Fibrous
S0070A Drywall,Loc:22,Suite 95 Offic None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous
71939320PLM_17 Dissolved

S0070B Drywall,Loc:22,Suite 95 Offic None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous

S0070C Drywall,Loc:22,Suite 95 Offic None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous

S0070D Drywall,Loc:22,Suite 95 Offic None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous

S0070E Drywall,Loc:22,Suite 95 Offic None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous
Philip Szabo (47)
Heather Davide (30)
App.E
AEP Building 2

Non-Fibrous
S0070F Drywall,Loc:58,Suite 95 Inner None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous

S0070G Drywall,Loc:58,Suite 95 Inner None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous
Drywall And Joint Grayish

Compound,Drywall Non Fibrous
S0071A Columns,Loc:22,Suite 95 Offi 3% Chrysotile 97% Other Homogeneous

S0071B Columns,Loc:22,Suite 95 Offi 3% Chrysotile 97% Other Homogeneous

S0071C Columns,Loc:22,Suite 95 Offi 3% Chrysotile 97% Other Homogeneous

Compound,Drywall On Non Fibrous
S0071D Columns,Loc:58,Suite 95 Inne 3% Chrysotile 97% Other Homogeneous

Compound,Drywall On Non Fibrous
S0071E Columns,Loc:58,Suite 95 Inne 3% Chrysotile 97% Other Homogeneous
Vinyl Floor Tile And White

Mastic,Off White With Tan Non Fibrous
S0072A - A Marble,Loc:23,Suite 95 Lunch None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous
71939320PLM_29
tile Dissolved
Philip Szabo (47)
Heather Davide (30)
App.E
AEP Building 2

Non-Fibrous
Vinyl Floor Tile And Black
S0072A - B Marble,Loc:23,Suite 95 Lunch None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous
71939320PLM_60
mastic Dissolved

S0072B - A Marble,Loc:23,Suite 95 Lunch None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous
71939320PLM_30
tile Dissolved

S0072B - B Marble,Loc:23,Suite 95 Lunch None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous
71939320PLM_61
mastic Dissolved

S0072C - A Marble,Loc:23,Suite 95 Lunch None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous
71939320PLM_31
tile -ashed Dissolved

S0072C - B Marble,Loc:23,Suite 95 Lunch None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous
71939320PLM_62
mastic Dissolved

S0073A Drywall,Loc:25,Suite 90 Offic None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous

S0073B Drywall,Loc:25,Suite 90 Offic None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous

S0073C Drywall,Loc:25,Suite 90 Offic None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous
Philip Szabo (47)
Heather Davide (30)
App.E
AEP Building 2

Non-Fibrous
S0073D Drywall,Loc:25,Suite 90 Offic None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous

S0073E Drywall,Loc:25,Suite 90 Offic None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous

S0074A Columns,Loc:25,Suite 90 Offi 3% Chrysotile 97% Other Homogeneous

S0074B Columns,Loc:25,Suite 90 Offi 3% Chrysotile 97% Other Homogeneous

S0074C Columns,Loc:25,Suite 90 Offi None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous

S0074D Columns,Loc:25,Suite 90 Offi None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous

S0074E Columns,Loc:25,Suite 90 Offi None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous
Mastic,Green,Loc:25,Suite 90 Black, Green

Non Fibrous
S0075A Office Area
None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous
71939320PLM_42 Crushed, Ashed
Philip Szabo (47)
Heather Davide (30)
App.E
AEP Building 2

Non-Fibrous

Non Fibrous
S0075B Office Area

Non Fibrous
S0075C Office Area
Vinyl Floor Tile And Yellow

Mastic,Beige Vft,Loc:26,Suite Non Fibrous
S0076A - A 90 Lunch Room None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous
71939320PLM_45
yellow mastic Dissolved
Vinyl Floor Tile And Gray

S0076A - B 90 Lunch Room None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous
71939320PLM_63
tile Crushed, Dissolved

S0076A - C 90 Lunch Room None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous
71939320PLM_64
black mastic Dissolved

S0076B - A 90 Lunch Room None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous
71939320PLM_46

S0076B - B 90 Lunch Room None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous
71939320PLM_65

S0076B - C 90 Lunch Room None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous
71939320PLM_66
Philip Szabo (47)
Heather Davide (30)
App.E
AEP Building 2

Non-Fibrous
S0076C - A 90 Lunch Room None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous
71939320PLM_47

S0076C - B 90 Lunch Room None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous
71939320PLM_67
tile-ashed Ashed

S0076C - C 90 Lunch Room None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous
71939320PLM_68

Mastic,Off White With Grey Non Fibrous
S0077A - A Blue Marble,Loc:26,Suite 90 None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous
71939320PLM_48

S0077A - B Blue Marble,Loc:26,Suite 90 None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous
71939320PLM_69
mastic Dissolved

S0077B - A Blue Marble,Loc:26,Suite 90 None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous
71939320PLM_49

S0077B - B Blue Marble,Loc:26,Suite 90 None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous
71939320PLM_70
mastic Dissolved

S0077C - A Blue Marble,Loc:26,Suite 90 None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous
71939320PLM_50
tile -ashed Ashed
Philip Szabo (47)
Heather Davide (30)
App.E
AEP Building 2

Non-Fibrous
S0077C - B Blue Marble,Loc:26,Suite 90 None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous
71939320PLM_71
mastic Dissolved

Mastic,Brown Non Fibrous
S0078A - A Marble,Loc:24,Suite 95 Server None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous
71939320PLM_51

S0078A - B Marble,Loc:24,Suite 95 Server None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous
71939320PLM_72
mastic Dissolved

S0078B - A Marble,Loc:24,Suite 95 Server None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous
71939320PLM_52

S0078B - B Marble,Loc:24,Suite 95 Server None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous
71939320PLM_73
mastic Dissolved

S0078C - A Marble,Loc:24,Suite 95 Server None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous
71939320PLM_53
tile - ashed Ashed

S0078C - B Marble,Loc:24,Suite 95 Server None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous
71939320PLM_74
mastic Dissolved
Vinyl Floor Tile And White, Gray

Mastic,White Blue Non Fibrous
S0079A - A Fractal,Loc:24,Suite 95 Server None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous
71939320PLM_54
tile Crushed, Ashed
Philip Szabo (47)
Heather Davide (30)
App.E
AEP Building 2

Non-Fibrous
Vinyl Floor Tile And Black, Gray
S0079A - B Fractal,Loc:24,Suite 95 Server None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous
71939320PLM_75
mastic/leveling Dissolved

S0079B - A Fractal,Loc:24,Suite 95 Server None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous
71939320PLM_55
tile Crushed, Ashed

S0079B - B Fractal,Loc:24,Suite 95 Server None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous
71939320PLM_76

S0079C - A Fractal,Loc:24,Suite 95 Server None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous
71939320PLM_56
tile - ashed Ashed

S0079C - B Fractal,Loc:24,Suite 95 Server None Detected 100% Other Homogeneous
71939320PLM_77
Philip Szabo (47)
Heather Davide (30)
Client: Pinchin Ltd. *lnstwctions: Version 1-15-2012
Contact: Raymond Leung Use Column •a• for your contact info
Address: Pinchin Ltd .
Phone: 604.238.2959 To See an Example Click the
Fax: bottom Example Tab.
Email: rleung@12inchin .com
lbraunnevi1le@12inchin.com
56
~
Project: AEP Building 2 Begin Samples with a •« •above the first sample Scientific
Stop positive on mastics. Perform Analytical
ashing on third vinyl floor tile if first
Client Notes:
two are ND. and end with a •»• below the last sample.
Only Enter your data on the first sheet "Sheet1 • Institute ----
~~'
P.O. #. 216561 .055 Note: Data 1 and Data 2 are optional 4604 Dundas Dr.
Date Submitted: 03-23-2020 fields that do not show up on the official Greensboro, NC 27407
report, however they will be included Phone: 336.292.3888
Analysis: PLM BULK EPA 600 in the electronic data returned to you Fax: 336.292.3313
TurnAroundTlme: 2 davs to facilitate vour reinfAnr:>tion of the l'Pnl>ft data. Email: /ab@sailab.com
l5amp1e Number Data 1 (Lab use only) Sample Description Data 2 (Lab use only\)
<<
S0066A Ceiling Tiles (lay-in) ,2x4 Lay In Pinhole Fissure,Loc:22,Suite 95 Office Area
S0066B Ceiling Tiles (lay-in) ,2x4 Lay In Pinhole Fissure,Loc:22,Suite 95 Office Area
S0066C Ceiling Tiles (lay-in) ,2x4 Lay In Pinhole Fissure,Loc:22,Suite 95 Office Area
S0066D Ceiling Tiles (lay-in) ,2x4 Lay In Pinhole Fissure,Loc:22,Suite 95 Office Area
S0066E Ceiling Tiles (lay-in) ,2x4 Lay In Pinhole Fissure,Loc:22,Suite 95 Office Area
S0066F Ceiling Tiles (lay-in) ,2x4 Lay-in Pinhole Fissure,Loc:58,Suite 95 Inner Office
S0066G Ceiling Tiles (lay-in) ,2x4 Lay-in Pinhole Fissure,Loc:58,~uite 95 Inner Office
S0067A Mastic, Grey,Grey Duct Mastic;Loc:58,Suite 95 Inner Office
S0067B Stop positive Mastic, Grey,Grey Dud Mastic,Loc:58,Suite 95 Inner Office
S0067C Stop positive Mastic, Grey.Grey Dud Mastic,Loc:58,Suite 95 Inner Office
S0068A Putty.Putty On Sidelight,Loc:58,Suite 95 Inner Office
S0068B Stop positive Putty.Putty On Sidelight,Loc:58,Suite 95 Inner Office
S0068C Stop positive Putty,Putty On Sidelight,Loc:58,Suite 95 Inner Office
S0069A Adhesive/mastic.Mastic Behind Beige Cove Base,Loc:58,Suite 95 Inner Office
S0069B Stop positive Adhesive/mastic,Maslic Behind Beige Cove Base,Loc:58,Suite 95 Inner Office
S0069C Stop positive Adhesive/mastic,Mastic Behind Beige Cove Base,Loc:58,Suite 95 Inner Office
S0070A Drywall And Joint Compound.Interior Drywall,Loc:22,Suite 95 Office Area
S0070B Drywall And Joint Compound,lnterior Drywall,Loc:22,Suite 95 Office Area
S0070C Drywall And Joint Compound ,lnterior Drywall,Loc:22,Suite 95 Office Area
S0070D Drywall And Joint Compound .Interior Drywall ,Loc:22,Suite 95 Office Area
S0070E Drywall And Joint Compound.Interior Drywall,Loc:22,Suite 95 Office Area
S0070F Drywall And Joint Compound.Interior Drywall,Loc:58,Suite 95 Inner Office
S0070G Drywall And Joint Compound.Interior Drywall,Loc:58,Suite 95 Inner Office
S0071A Drywall And Joint Compound.Drywall Columns,Loc:22,Suite 95 Office Area
S0071B Drywall And Joint Compound .Drywall Columns,Loc:22,Suite 95 Office Area
S0071C Drywall And Joint Compound.Drywall Columns,Loc:22,Suite 95 Office Area
S0071D Drywall And Joint Compound.Drywall On Columns,Loc:58,Suite 95 Inner Office
S0071E Drywall And Joint Compound.Drywall On Columns,Loc:58,Suite 95 Inner Office
S0072A Vinyt Floor TIie And Mastic,Off White With Tan Marble,Loc:23,Suite 95 Lunch Room
S0072B Vinyt Floor TIie And Mastic,Off White Wrth Tan Marble,Loc:23,Suite 95 Lunch Room
S0072C Vinyt Floor TIie And Mastic,Off White With Tan Marble,Loc:23,Suite 95 Lunch Room
S0073A Drywall And Joint Compound.Interior Drywall,Loc:25,Suite 90 Office Area
S0073B Drywall And Joint Compound .Interior Drywall,Loc:25 ,S1,1ite 90 Office Area
S0073C Drywall And Joint Compound ,lnterior Drywall ,Loc:25,Suite 90 Office Area
S0073D Drywall And Joint Compound,lnterior Drywall ,Loc:25,Suite 90 Office Area
S0073E Drywall And Joint Compound,lnterior Drywall,Loc:25,S1:1ite 90 Office Area
S0074A Drywall And Joint Compound.Drywall Columns,Loc:25,Suite 90 Office Area
S0074B Drywall And Joint Compound .Drywall Columns,Loc:25,Suite 90 Office Area
S0074C Drywall And Joint Compound ,Drywall Columns,Loc:25,Suite 90 Office Area
S0074D Drywall And Joint Compound ,Drywall Columns,Loc:25,Suite 90 Office Area
S0074E Drywall And Joint Compound .Drywall Columns,Loc:25,Suite 90 Office Area
S0075A Mastic,Green ,Loc:25,Suite 90 Office Area
S0075B Stop positive Mastic,Green,Loc:25,Suite 90 Office Area
S0075C Stop positive Mastic,Green,Loc:25,Suite 90 Office Area
S0076A Vinyl Floor Tile And Mastic.Beige Vft,Loc:26 ,Suite 90 Lunch Room
S0076B Vinyl Floor TIie And Mastic,Beige Vft;Loc:26 ,Suite 90 Lunch Room
S0076C Vinyl Floor TIie And Mastic,Beige Vft,Loc:26 ,Suite 90 Lunch Room
S0077A Vinyt Floor TIie And Mastic,Off White With Grey Blue Marble,Loc:26,Suite 90 Lunch Room
S0077B Vinyt Floor Tile And Mastic,Off White With Grey Blue Marble,Loc:26,Suite 90 Lunch Room
S0077C Vinyl Floor TIie And Mastic,Off White With Grey Blue Marble,Loc:26,Suite 90 Lunch Room
S0078A Vinyl Floor TIie And Mastic,Brown Marble,Loc:24 ,Suite 95 Server Room
S0078B Vinyl Floor TIie And Mastic,Brown Marble,Loc:24 ,Suite 95 Server Room
S0078C Vinyl Floor Tile And Mastic,Brown Marble,Loc:24,Suite 95 Server Room Accepted
"" ~ ejected D
~ 3Ji,<-t 10 ',~c,\..fY}
S0079A Vinyl Floor TIie And Mastic,White Blue Fractal,Loc:24,Suite 95 Server Room
S0079B Vinyl Floor Tile And Mastic.White Blue Fractal,Loc:24,Suite 95 Server Room
S0079C Vinyl Floor TIie And Mastic.White Blue Fractal ,Loc:24 ,Suite 95 Server Room
>>
App.E
AEP Building 2 Unit 90, 95
Date Amended: 4/9/2020

Non-Fibrous
Compound,Demising Non Fibrous
S0084A Drywall,Loc:22,Suite 95 Offic None Detected 100% Other Heterogeneous
71940260PLM_1 Crushed

S0084B Drywall,Loc:22,Suite 95 Offic None Detected 100% Other Heterogeneous

S0084C Drywall,Loc:22,Suite 95 Offic None Detected 100% Other Heterogeneous

S0084D Drywall,Loc:22,Suite 95 Offic None Detected 100% Other Heterogeneous
Drywall And Joint Cream

S0084E Drywall,Loc:58,Suite 95 Inner None Detected 100% Other Heterogeneous

S0085A Drywall,Loc:25,Suite 90 Offic None Detected 100% Other Heterogeneous

S0085B Drywall,Loc:25,Suite 90 Offic None Detected 100% Other Heterogeneous

S0085C Drywall,Loc:25,Suite 90 Offic None Detected 100% Other Heterogeneous
Jalen Moore (10)

App.E
AEP Building 2 Unit 90, 95
Date Amended: 4/9/2020

Non-Fibrous
S0085D Drywall,Loc:26,Suite 90 Lunc None Detected 100% Other Heterogeneous

S0085E Drywall,Loc:59,Suite 90 Inner None Detected 100% Other Heterogeneous
Jalen Moore (10)

Client: Pinchin Ltd . *Instructions : Version 1- 15-201 2
Contact: Raymond Leung Use Column •a• for your contact info
Address : Pinchin Ltd .
Phone: 604 .238 .2959 To See an Example Click the
Email: rleung@pinchin .com
lbraunneville@pinchin.com
17
Project: AEP Building 2 Begin Samples wtth a "<< "above the first sample Scientific
Unit 90 , 95
Stop positive on mastics. Perform Analytical
ashing on third vinyl floor tile if first
two are ND. and end with a "»" below the last sample.
Client Notes : Only Enter your data on the first sheet "Sheet1 • .Institute
P.O.#. 216561 .055 Note: Data 1 and Data 2 are optional 4604 Dundas Dr.
report, however they will be included Phone: 336.292.3888
Analysis: PLM BULK EPA 600 in the electronic data returned to you Fax: 336.292.3313
TumAroundTime: 24 Hours to facilitate our reint ration of the re rt data. Email: lab@sailab.com
!Sample Number Data 1 (Lab use only) Sample Description Data 2 (Lab use only\)
<<
S0084A Drywall And Joint Compound .Demising Drywall ,Loc:22,Suite 95 Office Area
S0084B Drywall And Joint Compound .Demising Drywall,Loc:22,Suite 95 Office Area
S0084C Drywall And Joint Compound .Demising Drywall ,Loc:22,Suite 95 Office Area
S0084D Drywall And Joint Compound .Demising Drywall ,Loc:22,Suite 95 Office Area
S0084E Drywall And Joint Compound ,Demising Drywall,Loc:58,Suite 95 Inner Office
S0085A Drywall And Joint Compound ,Demising Drywall ,Loc:25,Suite 90 Office Area
S0085 B Drywall And Joint Compound .Demising Drywall,Loc:25 ,Suite 90 Office Area
S0085C Drywall And Joint Compound .Demising Drywall ,Loc:25,Suite 90 Office Area
S0085D Drywall And Joint Compound.Demising Drywall ,Loc:26,Suite 90 Lunch Area
S0085E Drywall And Joint Compound .Demising Drywall ,Loc:59 ,Suite 90 Inner Office Area
S0086A Drywall And Joint Compound ,Demising Drywall,Loc:30 ,Hallway
S0086B Drywall And Joint Compound ,Demising Drywall,Loc:30 ,Hallway
S0086C Drywall And Joint Compound .Demising Drywall,Loc:30 ,Hallway
S0086D Drywall And Joint Compound .Demising Drywall ,Loc:30 ,Hallway
S0086E Drywall And Joint Compound,Demisinq Drywall ,Loc:30,Hallway
S0086F Drywall And Joint Compound,Demising Drywall ,Loc:30 ,Hallway
S0086G Drywall And Joint Compound,Demising Drywall ,Loc:30 ,Hallway
>>
.,:, CC8Dt8d
-~
APPENDIX II-B
Lead Analytical Certificates
Analysis for Lead Concentration
in Paint Chips
by Flame Atomic Absorption Spectroscopy
EPA SW-846 3050B/6010C/7000B
Suite 200, 13775 Commerce Parkway Larissa Braun Neville Analysis ID: 71939315_PBP
Project: AEP Building 2 Date Reported: 3/25/2020
Sample ID Description Mass Concentration Concentration

Lab Sample ID Lab Notes (g) (ppm) (% by weight)
Wall, Drywall And Joint Compound, Beige On
L0026 Drywall,Loc:58,Suite 95 Inner Office
0.0615 < 65 < 0.0065%
71939315PBP_1
Other, Metal, Beige On Metal Door

L0027 Trim,Loc:58,Suite 95 Inner Office
0.0790 < 51 < 0.0051%
71939315PBP_2
Wall, Drywall And Joint Compound, Green On

L0028 Drywall,Loc:58,Suite 95 Inner Office
0.0863 < 46 < 0.0046%
71939315PBP_3
Other, Wood, Beige On Wood Door And

L0029 Trim,Loc:58,Suite 95 Inner Office
0.0888 < 45 < 0.0045%
71939315PBP_4
Unless otherwise noted blank sample correction was not performed on analytical results. Scientific Analytical Institute participates in the AIHA ELPAT program. ELPAT Laboratory ID: 173190. This report
relates only to the samples tested and may not be reproduced, except in full, without the written approval of SAI. Analytical uncertainty available upon request. The quality control samples run with the
samples in this report have passed all EPA required specifications unless otherwise noted. RL: (Report Limit for an undiluted 50ml sample is 4µg Total Pb).
Athena Summa (4)
L-F-021 r17 2/14/2020 Analyst Laboratory Director

pbRpt_4.0.01_pbp001 Scientific Analytical Institute, Inc. 4604 Dundas Dr. Greensboro, NC 27407 (336) 292-3888 Page 1 of 1
Client: Pinchin Ltd . *Instructions: Version 1-15-2012
Contact: Raymond Leung Use Column •s• for your contact info
Address: Pinchin Ltd.
Phone: 604.238.2959 To See an Example Click. the
Email: rleung@12inchin .com
lbraunneville@12inchin .com
. .. '+
~
Project: AEP Buildin~ 2 Begin Samples with a •« "above the first sample Scientific
and end with a •»• below the last sample. Analytical
Client Notes: Only Enter your data on the first sheet "Sheett• Znstituts
P.O.#. 216561 .055 Note: Data 1 and Data 2 are optional 4604 •>unclasDr.
report. however they will be included Phone: 336.292.3888
Analysis: Paint Chips Flame AA in the electronic data returned to you Fax: 336.292.3313
TumAroundTlme: 2 davs to facililale .,,.,,,. ~ t i o n of the renrvt data. Ema/I: lab@sailab.com
iSample Number Data 1 (lab use only) Sample Description Data 2 (Lab use only\)
<<
L0026 Wall , Drywall And Joint Compound, Beige On Drywall,Loc:58,Suite 95 Inner Office
L0027 Other, Metal, Beige On Metal Door Trim,Loc:58,Suite 95 Inner Office
L0028 Wall, Drywall And Joint Compound, Green On Drywall,loc:58,Suite 95 Inner Office
L0029 Other, Wood, Beige On Wood Door And Trim,Loc:58,Suite 95 Inner Office
>>
Accepted dJ
~ 3}~~
Rejected
•
APPENDIX III
Methodology
Methodology Appendix Pinchin File: 216561.055
1.0 GENERAL
Pinchin conducts a room-by-room survey (rooms, corridors, service areas, exterior, etc.) to identify the
hazardous building materials as defined by the scope of work. All work is conducted in accordance with
our own internal Standard Operating Procedures.
Information regarding the location and condition of hazardous building materials encountered and visually
estimated quantities are recorded. The locations of any samples collected are recorded on small-scale
plans.
As-built drawings and previous reports are referenced where provided.
1.1 Limitations on Scope
The assessment excludes the following:
• Articles belonging to the owner, tenant or occupant (e.g. stored items, furniture,
appliances, etc.);
• Underground materials or equipment (e.g. vessels, drums, underground storage tanks,

pipes, etc.);
• Building envelope, structural components, inaccessible or concealed materials or other

items where sampling may cause consequential damage to the property;
• Energized systems (e.g. internal boiler components, elevators, mechanical or electrical

components);
• Controlled products (e.g. stored chemicals, operational or process-related substances);

and
• Materials not typically associated with construction (e.g. settled dust, spills, residual
contamination from prior spills, etc.).
The assessment includes limited access of wall and ceiling finishes (drywall or plaster) via lay-in ceilings
or access panels to view concealed conditions at representative areas as permitted by the current
building use. Limited destructive testing of flooring is conducted where possible (under carpets or multiple
layers of flooring). Demolition of exterior building finishes, masonry walls (chases, shafts etc.), and
structural items is not conducted.
1.2 Asbestos
An inspection is conducted for the presence of friable and non-friable asbestos-containing materials
(ACM). A friable material is a material that when dry can be crumbled, pulverized or powdered by hand
pressure.

A separate set of samples is collected of each type of homogenous material suspected to contain
asbestos. A homogenous material is defined by the US EPA as material that is uniform in texture and
appearance, was installed at one time, and is unlikely to consist of more than one type or formulation of
material. The homogeneous materials are determined by visual examination and available information on
the phases of construction and prior renovations.
Samples are collected at a rate that is in compliance with the requirements of local regulations and
guidelines. The sampling strategy is also based on known ban dates and phase out dates of the use of
asbestos; sampling of certain building materials is not conducted after specific construction dates. In
addition, to be conservative, several years past these dates are added to account for some uncertainty in
the exact start / finish date of construction and associated usage of ACM.
In some cases, manufactured products such as asbestos cement pipe are visually identified without
sample confirmation.
Drywall joint compound is sampled at representative locations such as walls, ceilings, columns,
bulkheads or other building components. Asbestos in drywall joint compound was banned in Canada in
1980. Drywall joint compound that is known to have been installed after 1986 (1980 plus a reasonable
non-compliance period based on our experience) is presumed to non-asbestos and is not sampled.
Flooring mastic or adhesive is sampled and analyzed if present on the underside of flooring samples
(vinyl floor tile and vinyl sheet flooring).
The following materials (if present) are not sampled and will be presumed to contain asbestos.
• Electrical components or wiring within control centers, breakers, motors or lights,

insulation on wiring
• Mechanical packing, ropes and gaskets
• Vermiculite
• Paper products
• Fire resistant doors
• Metal clad finishes
• Vibration dampers on HVAC equipment
The bulk samples are submitted to a NVLAP accredited laboratory for analysis. The analysis is performed
in accordance with Test Method EPA/600/R-93/116: Method for the Determination of Asbestos in Bulk
Building Materials, July 1993.
Analytical results are compared to the following criteria.

Jurisdiction Friable Non-Friable
BC 0.5% 1 0.5%
The asbestos analysis is completed using a stop positive approach for select samples. Only one result
meeting the above regulated criteria is required to determine that a material is asbestos-containing, but all
samples must be analyzed to conclusively determine that a material is non-asbestos. The laboratory
stops analyzing samples from a homogeneous material once a result equal to or greater than the
regulated criteria is detected in any of the samples of that material. All samples of a homogeneous
material are analyzed if no asbestos is detected. In some cases, all samples are analyzed in the sample
set regardless of result.
Where building materials are described in the report as “non-asbestos” or “does not contain asbestos”,
this means that either no asbestos was detected by the analytical method utilized in any of the multiple
samples or, if detected, it is below the lower limit of an asbestos-containing material in the applicable
regulation.
Asbestos materials are evaluated in order to make recommendations regarding remedial work. The
priority for remedial action is based on several factors:
• Friability (friable or non-friable);
• Condition (good, fair, poor, debris);
• Accessibility (ranking from accessible to all building users to inaccessible);
• Efficiency of the work (for example, if damaged ACM is being removed in an area, it may
be most practical to remove all ACM in the area even if it is in good condition).
1.3 Lead
Samples of distinctive paint finishes, and surface coatings present in more than a limited application,
where removal of the paint is possible is collected. The samples are collected by scraping the painted
finish to include base and covering applications. Drawings included show sample locations.
Analysis for lead in paints or surface coatings is performed at an accredited laboratory in accordance with
EPA Method No. 3050B/Method No. 7420; flame atomic absorption.
For this report, all paints containing lead at a concentration of 0.009% (90 ppm) or greater are discussed.
Paint and surface coatings are evaluated for condition such as flaking, chipping or chalking.
1
Or any amount if vermiculite

Other lead building products (e.g. batteries, lead sheeting, flashing) are identified by visual observation
only.
1.4 Silica
Building materials known to contain crystalline silica (e.g. concrete, cement, tile, brick, masonry, mortar) is
identified by visual inspection only. Pinchin does not perform sampling of these materials for laboratory
analysis of crystalline silica content.
1.5 Mercury
Building materials/products/equipment (e.g. thermostats, barometers, pressure gauges, light tubes),

suspected to contain mercury are identified by visually inspection only. Dismantling of equipment
suspected of containing mercury is not performed. Sampling of these materials for laboratory analysis of
mercury content is not performed.
1.6 Polychlorinated Biphenyls
The potential for light ballast and wet transformers to contain PCBs is based on the age of the building, a
review of maintenance records and examination of labels or nameplates on equipment, where present
and accessible. The information is compared to known ban dates of PCBs and Environment Canada
publications.
Dry type transformers are presumed to be free of dielectric fluids and hence non-PCB.
Fluids (mineral oil, hydraulic, Aroclor or Askarel) in transformers or other equipment are not sampled for
PCB content.
Caulking or sealants are sampled for PCBs based on the date of construction or installation. Caulking
installed after 1985 (1980 ban date plus a reasonable non-compliance period based on our experience) is
presumed to be free of PCBs and hence not sampled. If sampled, analysis for PCBs is performed using
an ASTM test method appropriate to the sample matrix at an accredited laboratory. Sample results are
compared to the criteria of 50 ppm for solids as stated in the PCB Regulation, SOR/2008-273.
1.7 Visible Mould
The presence of mould is determined by visual inspection of exposed building surfaces. If any mould
growth is concealed within building cavities it is not addressed in this assessment.
Template: Methodology for Hazardous Building Materials Assessment, HAZ, March 9, 2020

APPENDIX IV
Location Summary Report
LOCATIONS LIST
Client:Colliers International Site: 10551 Shellbridge Way, Richmond, BC

Building Name: Building 2
Surveyor: Survey Date:
Reassessment Surveyor:
_
Last Re-Assessment: 0000-00-00
Location
No.
Name or Description ft2 Floor No. Notes
22 Suite 95 Office Area 6300 1
23 Suite 95 Lunch Room 100 1
24 Suite 95 Server Room 75 1
25 Suite 90 Office Area 4100 1
26 Suite 90 Lunch Room 200 1
58 Suite 95 Inner Office 1000 1
59 Suite 90 Inner Office Area 1000 1
2020-04- Quantities shown above are based on visual approximations only and may be subject to variation. Page 1 of 1.
08 Copyright Pinchin Ltd. 2020
APPENDIX V
Hazardous Materials Summary Report / Sample Log
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS SUMMARY / SAMPLE LOG
Client:Colliers
Site: 10551 Shellbridge Way, Richmond, BC Building Name: Building 2 Surveyor: Survey Date:
International
_
HAZMAT Sample No System/Material/Sample Description Locations LF SF EA % Type Positive

WALL | DRYWALL AND JOINT COMPOUND |
Asbestos S0002 EFG PERIMETER PERIMETER PERIMETER PERIMETER 22,23,25,58,59 0 6625 0 0 Chrysotile Yes
PERIMETER PERIMETER PERIMETER
S0066 CEILING | CEILING TILES (LAY-IN) | 2X4 LAY IN None
Asbestos 22,23,24,25,26,58,59 0 11825 0 0 No
ABCDEFG PINHOLE FISSURE Detected
None
Asbestos S0067 ABC DUCT | MASTIC, GREY | GREY DUCT MASTIC 22,25,58,59 180 0 0 0 No
Detected
None
Asbestos S0068 ABC WALL | PUTTY | PUTTY ON SIDELIGHT 22,58 16 0 0 0 No
Detected
OTHER, WALL | ADHESIVE/MASTIC | MASTIC None
Asbestos S0069 ABC 22,23,25,58 3120 0 0 0 No
BEHIND BEIGE COVE BASE Detected
S0070 WALL | DRYWALL AND JOINT COMPOUND | None
Asbestos 22,23,24,58 0 12900 0 0 No
ABCDEFG INTERIOR DRYWALL Detected
Asbestos S0071 ABCDE 22,58 0 2100 0 0 Chrysotile Yes
DRYWALL COLUMNS
FLOOR | VINYL FLOOR TILE AND MASTIC | OFF None
Asbestos S0072 ABC 23 0 99 0 0 No
WHITE WITH TAN MARBLE Detected
WALL | DRYWALL AND JOINT COMPOUND | None
Asbestos S0073 ABCDE 25,26,59 0 9900 0 0 No
INTERIOR DRYWALL Detected
Asbestos S0074 ABCDE 25 0 1000 0 0 Chrysotile Yes
DRYWALL COLUMNS
None
Asbestos S0075 ABC DUCT | MASTIC | GREEN 25,59 110 0 0 0 No
Detected
FLOOR | VINYL FLOOR TILE AND MASTIC | BEIGE None
VFT Detected
FLOOR | VINYL FLOOR TILE AND MASTIC | OFF None
WHITE WITH GREY BLUE MARBLE Detected
FLOOR | VINYL FLOOR TILE AND MASTIC | BROWN None
MARBLE Detected
FLOOR | VINYL FLOOR TILE AND MASTIC | WHITE None
BLUE FRACTAL Detected
WALL | DRYWALL AND JOINT COMPOUND None
Asbestos S0084 ABCDE 22,58 0 1950 0 0 No
|DEMISING WALL Detected
WALL | DRYWALL AND JOINT COMPOUND None
Asbestos S0085 ABCDE 25,26,59 0 1500 0 0 No
|DEMISING WALL Detected
Lead Paint V0025 WALL | CONCRETE (POURED) | WHITE 58 0 200 0 0 No
WALL | DRYWALL AND JOINT COMPOUND | BEIGE
Lead Paint L0026 22,23,24,25,26,58,59 0 18625 0 0 No
ON DRYWALL
Lead Paint L0027 OTHER | METAL | BEIGE ON METAL DOOR TRIM 22,25,58 3050 0 0 0 No
WALL | DRYWALL AND JOINT COMPOUND | GREEN
Lead Paint L0028 22,25,58 0 2100 0 0 No
ON DRYWALL
2020-04-09 Quantities shown above are based on visual approximations only and may be subject to variation. Copyright Pinchin Ltd. 2020 Page 1 of 3.
Lead Paint L0029 OTHER | WOOD | BEIGE ON WOOD DOOR AND TRIM 22,25,58 2600 1100 0 0 No
Lead Lead
V9000 BATTERIES IN EMER. LIGHTS 22,58 0 0 6 0 Yes
Product Product
Legend:
Sample number Units
S#### Asbestos sample collected SF Square feet
L#### Lead sample collected LF Linear feet
P#### PCB sample collected EA Each
M#### Mould sample collected % Percentage
Material visually similar to numbered sample
V####
collected
V0000 Known non Hazardous Material
V9000 Material is visually identified as Hazardous Material
V9500 Material is presumed to be Hazardous Material
APPENDIX VI
HMIS Data Report
ALL DATA REPORT
Client: Colliers International Site: 10551 Shellbridge Way, Richmond, BC Building Name: Building 2
Location: #22 : Suite 95 Office Area Floor: 1 Room #: Area (sqft): 6300
Surveyor:
_
Survey Date: 2020-03-19 Reassessment Surveyor: Last Re-Assessment: 0000-00-00
ASBESTOS
System Component Material Item Covering A* V* AP* Good Fair Poor Unit Sample Asbestos Type Amount Hazard
Ceiling Tiles (lay-in), 2x4 lay in pinhole S0066ABC
Ceiling ACOUSTIC TILE C Y N 4500 SF None Detected N.D. None
fissure DE
Duct Mastic, Grey C Y N 50 LF V0067 None Detected N.D. None
Floor All Carpet
Mechanical
Not Found
Equipment
Piping All Not Insulated
Structure All Concrete (poured)
Drywall and joint compound, Interior S0070ABC
Wall A Y N 4500 SF None Detected N.D. None
drywall DE
Drywall and joint compound, Drywall Confirmed
Wall A Y N 1500(7) SF S0071ABC Chrysotile 0.5-5%
columns Asbestos(NF)
Drywall and joint compound, Demising S0084ABC
wall D
Wall Adhesive/mastic Rubber A Y N 100 LF V0069 None Detected N.D. None
Wall Putty Glass A Y N 10 LF V0068 None Detected N.D. None
Confirmed
Wall All Drywall and joint compound, Perimeter A Y N 1575(7) SF S0002F Chrysotile 0.5-5%
Asbestos(NF)
Wall All Drywall and joint compound, Interior A Y N 6100 SF V0070 None Detected N.D. None
_
Surveyor:
_
PAINT
System Item Good Poor Unit Sample Sample Description Amount Hazard
Wall Drywall and joint compound 7675 SF V0026 White No
Other Metal 300 LF V0027 Beige on metal door trim No
Wall Drywall and joint compound 500 SF V0028 Green on drywall No
Other Wood 500 LF V0029 Beige on wood door and trim No
_
Surveyor:
_
_
ALL DATA REPORT
PB PRODUCTS
Component Quantity Unit
_
BATTERIES IN EMER. LIGHTS 2 EA
Location: #23 : Suite 95 Lunch Room Floor: 1 Room #: Area (sqft): 100
Surveyor:
_
ASBESTOS
Ceiling ACOUSTIC TILE Ceiling Tiles (lay-in) C Y N 100 SF V0066 None Detected N.D. None
Duct All Not Insulated
Vinyl Floor Tile and Mastic, Off white
Floor All A Y N 99 SF S0072ABC None Detected N.D. None
with tan marble
Mechanical
Not Found
Equipment
Wall Adhesive/mastic Rubber A Y N 20 LF V0069 None Detected N.D. None
Confirmed
Wall All Drywall and joint compound, Perimeter A Y N 25(7) SF S0002E Chrysotile 0.5-5%
Asbestos(NF)
_
Surveyor:
_
PAINT
Wall Concrete (poured) 175 SF V0026 White No
_
ALL DATA REPORT
Location: #24 : Suite 95 Server Room Floor: 1 Room #: Area (sqft): 75
Surveyor:
_
ASBESTOS
Vinyl Floor Tile and Mastic, Brown
marble
Vinyl Floor Tile and Mastic, White blue
fractal
Mechanical
Not Found
Equipment
_
Location: #24 : Suite 95 Server Room Floor: 1 Room #: Area (sqft): 75
Surveyor:
_
PAINT
Wall Drywall and joint compound 150 SF V0026 White No
_
ALL DATA REPORT
Surveyor:
_
ASBESTOS
Duct All Mastic, Grey C Y N 50 LF V0067 None Detected N.D. None
Duct All Mastic, Green C Y N 60 LF S0075ABC None Detected N.D. None
Floor All Carpet
Mechanical
Not Found
Equipment
Other Adhesive/mastic A Y N 1500 LF V0069 None Detected N.D. None
Drywall and joint compound, Interior S0073ABC
drywall DE
Drywall and joint compound, Drywall S0074ABC Confirmed
Wall A Y N 1000(7) SF Chrysotile 0.5-5%
columns DE Asbestos(NF)
Drywall and joint compound, Demising
Wall A Y N 750 SF S0085ABC None Detected N.D. None
wall
Confirmed
Wall All Drywall and joint compound, Perimeter A Y N 1025(7) SF S0002G Chrysotile 0.5-5%
Asbestos(NF)
_
Surveyor:
_
PAINT
Wall Drywall and joint compound 4100 SF V0026 Beige on drywall No
Wall Metal 250 LF V0027 Beige on metal door trim No
Wall Drywall and joint compound 100 SF V0028 Green on drywall No
Other Wood 600 SF V0029 Beige on wood door and trim No
_
ALL DATA REPORT
Surveyor:
_
ASBESTOS
Ceiling ACOUSTIC TILE Ceiling Tiles (lay-in) C Y N 200 V0066 None Detected N.D. None
Vinyl Floor
Floor Vinyl Floor Tile and Mastic, Beige vft D N N 258 SF S0076ABC None Detected N.D. None
Tile
Vinyl Floor Tile and Mastic, Off white
with grey blue marble
Mechanical
Not Found
Equipment
Drywall and joint compound, demising
Wall A Y N 250 SF S0085D None Detected N.D. None
_
drywall
Surveyor:
_
PAINT
_
ALL DATA REPORT
Location: #58 : Suite 95 Inner Office Floor: 1 Room #: Area (sqft): 1000
Surveyor:
_
ASBESTOS
Ceiling Tiles (lay-in), 2x4 lay-in pinhole
Ceiling ACOUSTIC TILE C Y N 1850 SF S0066FG None Detected N.D. None
fissure
Duct All Mastic, Grey, Grey duct mastic Edge C Y N 30 LF S0067ABC None Detected N.D. None
Floor All Carpet
Mechanical
Not Found
Equipment
Confirmed
Wall Drywall and joint compound, Perimeter Perimeter A Y N 3000(7) SF V0002 Chrysotile 0.5-5%
Asbestos(NF)
Drywall and joint compound, Interior
Wall A Y N 1800 SF S0070FG None Detected N.D. None
drywall
Drywall and joint compound, Drywall on Confirmed
Wall A Y N 600(7) SF S0071DE Chrysotile 0.5-5%
columns Asbestos(NF)
Wall Drywall and joint compound A Y N 500 SF S0084E None Detected N.D. None
Adhesive/mastic, Mastic behind beige
Wall Rubber A Y N 1500 LF S0069ABC None Detected N.D. None
cove base
Wall Putty, Putty on sidelight Glass A Y N 6 LF S0068ABC None Detected N.D. None
_
Surveyor:
_
PAINT
Wall1 Concrete (poured) 200 SF V0025 White No
Wall Drywall and joint compound 1000 SF L0026 Beige on drywall No
Other Metal 2500 LF L0027 Beige on metal door trim No
Wall Drywall and joint compound 1500 SF L0028 Green on drywall No
Other Wood 1500 LF L0029 Beige on wood door and trim No
_
1 - null
ALL DATA REPORT
Surveyor:
_
_
PB PRODUCTS
Component Quantity Unit
_
BATTERIES IN EMER. LIGHTS 4 EA
Location: #59 : Suite 90 Inner Office Area Floor: 1 Room #: Area (sqft): 1000
Surveyor:
_
ASBESTOS
Duct All Mastic, Grey C Y N 50 LF V0067 None Detected N.D. None
Duct All Mastic, Green C Y N 50 LF V0075 None Detected N.D. None
Floor All Carpet
Mechanical
Not Found
Equipment
Confirmed
Wall Drywall Compound, perimeter drywall A Y N 1000(7) SF V0002 Chrysotile 0.5-5%
_
Asbestos(NF)
Location: #59 : Suite 90 Inner Office Area Floor: 1 Room #: Area (sqft): 1000
Surveyor:
_
PAINT
_
Wall1 Concrete (poured) 1900 SF V0026 White No
1 - null
ALL DATA REPORT
Legend:
Sample number Units Other
S#### Asbestos sample collected SF Square feet SVM Suspect Visible Mould
L#### Lead sample collected LF Linear feet A Access
P#### PCB sample collected EA Each V Visible
M#### Mould sample collected % Percentage AP Air Plenum
V#### Material is visually identified to be identical to S#### LF Linear feet F Friable material
V0000 Known non hazardous material NF Non Friable material
V9000 Material visually identified as a Hazardous Material
V9500 Material is presumed to contain hazardous material
Access Condition
A Accessible to all building occupants Good No visible damage or deterioration
B Accessible to maintenance and operations staff without a ladder Fair Minor, repairable damage, cracking, delamination or deterioration
Accessible to maintenance and operations staff with a ladder. Also rarely entered,
C Poor Irreparable damage or deterioration with exposed and missing material
locked areas
D Not normally accessible
Action
Precautions for Access Which may Disturb ACM
(1) Clean up of ACM Debris (2) (3) ACM removal
Debris
Precautions for Work Which may Disturb ACM in Proactive ACM removal (Minimum repair required for
(4) (5) (6) ACM repair
Poor Condition fair condition)
(7) Management program and surveillance
RICHMOND, BC
APPENDIX 3
First Floor Slab Scan Summary and Interpretation Report
Entuitive Corporation
September 23, 2022
Chernoff Thompson Architects

1340 – 1075 W. Georgia St.
Vancouver, BC V6E 3C9
Attention: Mr. Tony Yip, Principal | Architect AIBC, MRAIC, CP, LEED AP
Re: Richmond East Urgent and Primary Care – 90/95 – 10551 Shellbridge Way, Richmond, BC
Scan Summary and Interpretation Report
Our Project No. EN022-01871-00
Dear Tony,
We have successfully completed the rebar scanning at all proposed cored hole locations conducted by our
subcontractor, Accurate Locates Ltd. The site work was conducted on August 30, 31, and September 9, 2022.
The last two visits were intended to complete one missing hole in Unit 95 and rescan the new proposed/shifted
holes after conflicts with existing conduits or floor beams were discovered from the first scan. As requested, we
are presenting this report to summarize and interpret the scan results in the following pages. For simplicity, we
simply add our remarks directly on the subcontractor’s report. The hole locations are schematically presented in
Appendix A.
This report has been prepared based upon the limited information provided by Accurate Locates at the
proposed coring locations as we do not have good knowledge of the actual construction of the subject
property. As such, Entuitive is not responsible for the accuracy of the scan results other than interpretation of
the results. It has been prepared in a manner consistent with good engineering judgement in a preliminary
nature for feasibility study. Should new information come to light, Entuitive requests the opportunity to review
this information and our conclusions contained in this report. This report has been prepared for the exclusive
use of the client, and there are no representations made by Entuitive to any other party. Any use that a third
party makes of this report, or any reliance on or decisions made based on it, are the responsibility of such third
parties.
Sincerely,
Entuitive (Permit #: 1001103)
Kenny Yip, P.Eng., P.E., S.E., MASCE

Senior Structural Engineer
T: (236) 833-8694
E: Kenny.Yip@Entuitive.com
entuitive.com
Report by Accurate Locates, with Entuitive's Remarks as Indicated
LEGENDS
GPR Markings
Place to drill for plate
Top targets
Entuitive's Remarks:
The proposed hole location
(H1) appears to be fine except
that two wires of the WWM
need to be cut.
Description
Location Room 90 hole 1
Type of Structure Suspended slab
Scanned Area 24x24
Concrete Thickness 6” +/- 20%
Reinforcement Type Mesh
Field Notes
Findings Report
LEGENDS
GPR Markings
Bottom targets
(H2) appears to be acceptable,
and one or two of the wires of
Description the WWM need to be cut off.
Location RoomFloor by entrance

90 hole 2 to unit
Type of Structure
Suspended slab
24x24
Scanned Area
Concrete Thickness 6” +/-20%
Field Notes
Findings Report
LEGENDS
GPR Markings
Top targets
(H3) appears to be appropriate.
The hole will entail cutting off
two wires of the WWM.
Description
Scanned Area 24x24
Field Notes
Findings Report
LEGENDS
GPR Markings
Bottom targets
(H4) appears to be fine without
any issue.
Description
Type of Structure
Suspended slab
24x24
Scanned Area
Field Notes
Findings Report
LEGENDS
GPR Markings
Top targets
(H5) appears to be acceptable,
involving cutting two wires of
the WWM.
Description
Scanned Area 24x24
Field Notes
Findings Report
LEGENDS
GPR Markings
Bottom targets
(H6) appears to be fine except
that two wires of the WWM
Description need to be cut off.
Location Room 90 hole 6ntrance to unit

Type of Structure
Suspended slab
24x24
Scanned Area
Field Notes
Findings Report
LEGENDS
GPR Markings

Bottom target
suggested location
for 6" hole.
Top targets
suggested location
for 4" hole.
It appears that the proposed
hole(H7) will entail cutting three
wires off. If possible, we
suggest shifting the hole as
indicated.
Description
Location Room 90 hole7
Scanned Area 24x24
Field Notes
Findings Report
LEGENDS
GPR Markings
Bottom targets
Top targets
Possible conduit
(H8) appears to be fine.
Description
Type of Structure
Suspended slab
24x24
Scanned Area
Field Notes
Findings Report
LEGENDS
GPR Markings
Bottom Targets
Top targets
(H9) appears to be fine.
Depending on the size of the
core hole, one wire may need
to be cut off.
Description
Scanned Area 24x24
Field Notes
Findings Report
LEGENDS
GPR Markings
Bottom targets
Top Targets
Possible Conduit
possible
conduit.
hole (H10) will entail cutting off
3 wires of the WWM. There
Description seems to be a conduit nearby.
Location ntrance to unit

Room 90 hole 10
Type of Structure
Suspended slab
24x24
Scanned Area
Field Notes
Findings Report
LEGENDS
GPR Markings

Bottom targets
Top targets
The proposed hole (H11) is too
close to a floor beam as shown
below. We recommend moving
the hole minimum 90 mm north,
provided that the maximum size
of the hole is 152 mm in
Description diameter.
11
24x24
0.12 m
Scanned Area
Field Notes
Findings Report
LEGENDS
GPR Markings
Bottom targets
Top targets
The proposed location for hole
(H12) seems to be appropriate
without any issue.
Description
Type of Structure
Suspended slab
24x24
Scanned Area
Field Notes
Findings Report
LEGENDS
suggested
location GPR Markings
Bottom target
Top targets
hole (H13) will cut off 4 wires
and is a bit close to a floor
beam as shown in the following
excerpt. We suggest moving
the hole north-east 75 mm as
Description shown in the above photo.
Type of Structure Suspended slab 16
Scanned Area 24x24
Concrete Thickness 6” +/- 20% 13
Reinforcement Type Mesh modern life SINK
K-80179R
BATHROOM
Field Notes 15
Findings Report
LEGENDS
GPR Markings
Bottom targets
suggested
location
Top targets
3 or 4 wires. We suggest
Description relocating the hole as indicated,
if possible.
ntrance to unit
Type of Structure
Suspended slab
24x24
Scanned Area
Field Notes
Findings Report
LEGENDS
GPR Markings
Bottom targets
Top targets
hole (H15) will entail cutting of
2 wires. If possible, shifting the
hole to avoid/minimize cutting
the wires.
Description
Scanned Area 24x24
Field Notes
Findings Report
LEGENDS
GPR Markings
Bottom targets
Top targets
The proposed hole (H16)
appears to be close to a floor
beam as shown in the following
Description excerpt. We suggest shifting
the hole north 50 mm, if
Room 90 hole 16
ntrance to unit
Location feasible.
Type of Structure
Suspended slab N
18
24x24 16
Scanned Area
5m
17
Field Notes
Findings Report
LEGENDS
GPR Markings
Bottom targets
Top targets
appears to be right on the edge
of a floor beam as shown
below. The hole needs to be
relocated a minimum 200 mm
away from the edge of the floor
Description beam.
Type of Structure Suspended slab N
18
Scanned Area 24x24
16
5m
17
Field Notes
Findings Report
LEGENDS
GPR Markings
Bottom targets
Top targets
appears to be fine without any
issues.
Description
Type of Structure
Suspended slab
24x24
Scanned Area
Field Notes
Findings Report
LEGENDS
GPR Markings
Bottom targets
Top targets
Possible conduit
It looks like that the proposed
three wires and a conduit. We
suggest shifting the hole north
by 250 mm -- see H19b on next
page.
Description
Scanned Area 24x24
Field Notes
Findings Report
LEGENDS
GPR Markings
Bottom targets
Top targets
T wall & conduit
The alternative location (H19b)
is acceptable and likely
involves cutting off two wires of
Description the WWM.
Location Room 90 hole 19b

ntrance to unit
Type of Structure
Suspended slab
24x24
Scanned Area
Field Notes
Findings Report
LEGENDS
GPR Markings
Top target
T Wall
This relocation (LH1b) was
proposed after the original
location (LH1) was discovered
to be infeasible. The new
location is acceptable, with
caution to floor beams indicated
Description by pink lines.
Location Room 90
Scanned Area 30x48
Field Notes
Findings Report
LEGENDS
GPR Markings
Top target
This location (LH2b) was
proposed after the original
location (LH2) was discovered
to be in conflict with conduits.
Description Th new location appears to be
Location Room 90 acceptable.

Scanned Area 30x48
Field Notes
Findings Report
LEGENDS
GPR Markings
Top target
Possible conduit
This location (H20b) was
proposed after hole H20 was
discovered to be inappropriate.
The new location is adjacent to
a possible conduit; thus, the
hole is to be shifted away from
Description the conduit by minimum 64 mm.
Scanned Area 24x24
Field Notes
Findings Report
LEGENDS
GPR Markings
Top target
Possible conduit
See the comments on the

previous page on H20b.
Description
Scanned Area 24x24
Field Notes
Findings Report
LEGENDS
GPR Markings
Bottom targets
Top target
Possible conduit
This hole (H22) location
appears to be acceptable.
Description
Room 90 hole 22ntrance to unit
Location
Type of Structure
Suspended slab
24x24
Scanned Area
Field Notes
Findings Report
LEGENDS
GPR Markings

Bottom target
Top targets
suggested
location if
possible
This hole (H23) location
appears to be acceptable but
less preferable as it entails
cutting off two wires of the
WWM. Shift the hole location
as indicated if possible (to
Description avoid wire-cutting).
Scanned Area 24x24
Field Notes
Findings Report
LEGENDS
GPR Markings
Bottom targets
Based on the following excerpt,
it is almost certain that H24 and
H25 will be directly over a
Description conflicting beam. As such, we
recommend that both H24 and
Room 90 hole 24ntrance to unit
Location H25 are to be moved
Type of Structure
Suspended slab northwards by 300 mm.
24x24
Scanned Area
6” +/-20% 24 25
0.20 m
Concrete Thickness
Field Notes
29 30
Findings Report
LEGENDS
GPR Markings

Bottom target
Top targets

previous page on H24.
Description
Scanned Area 24x24
Field Notes
Findings Report
LEGENDS
GPR Markings
Bottom targets
(H26) appears to be
appropriate.
Description
Location Room 90 hole 26 ntrance to unit
Type of Structure
Suspended slab
24x24
Scanned Area
Field Notes
Findings Report
LEGENDS
GPR Markings

Bottom targets
suggested Top targets

location
only if the
hole is 4"
(H26) appears to be
acceptable, except that 2 wires
need to be cut. If the hole is 4",
we suggest shifting the hole as
Description shown.

Scanned Area 24x24
Field Notes
Findings Report
LEGENDS
GPR Markings
Bottom targets
Top target
It appears that this hole (H28)
is right on top of a floor beam
(see below). We suggest
Description shifting the hole north 250 mm.
Type of Structure
Suspended slab
24x24 28
Scanned Area
Field Notes
Findings Report
LEGENDS
GPR Markings
Bottom targets
Top targets

previous page on H28.
Description
Scanned Area 24x24
Field Notes
Findings Report
LEGENDS
GPR Markings
Bottom targets
Top targets
See the comments on H28.
Description
Type of Structure
Suspended slab
24x24
Scanned Area
Field Notes
Findings Report
LEGENDS
GPR Markings
Top targets
Possible conduit
Thet originally proposed hole
location (H31) is right on top of
a floor beam (see below). An
alternative location (H31b) has
been proposed as shown
below, which is more
Description appropriate.
Type of Structure Suspended slab 0.40 m
24x24 31b
Scanned Area
Concrete Thickness 6” +/- 20% 0.47 m
Reinforcement Type Mesh 31

Field Notes
Findings Report
LEGENDS
GPR Markings
Bottom targets
Top targets
Possible conduit
Similar to H28 - H31, this hole
also appears to be right on top
of a floor beam. We suggest
shifting the hole north 250 mm.
Description
Type of Structure
Suspended slab
24x24
Scanned Area
Field Notes
Findings Report
LEGENDS
GPR Markings
Bottom target
Top target
will entail cutting off 3 wires.
Coring with caution for an
adjacent possible conduit.
Description
Scanned Area 24x24
Field Notes
Findings Report
LEGENDS
GPR Markings
Bottom targets
Top targets
will entail cutting off 3 wires of
the WWM; otherise, the
Description location is acceptable.

Type of Structure
Suspended slab
24x24
Scanned Area
Field Notes
Findings Report
LEGENDS
GPR Markings
Bottom target
Top targets
It is likely that this hole (H35) is
right on top or on the edge of a
floor beam (see below). Coring
at this location with extreme
care and caution to avoid
damaging the floor beam.
Description
Scanned Area 24x24
0.20 m

35
Field Notes
Findings Report
LEGENDS
GPR Markings
Bottom targets
Top targets
Possible conduit
The center of hole H36 is about
100 mm from a nearby possible
conduit. We suggest shifting
Description the hole away from the conduit
by additional 25 mm minimum.
Type of Structure
Suspended slab
24x24
Scanned Area
Field Notes
Findings Report
LEGENDS
GPR Markings
Bottom target
Top targets
Hole H37 is right on top of a
floor beam (see below) and
thus requires relocation. Note:
The pink lines indicate the edge
of the floor beam.
Description
Scanned Area 24x24
Field Notes
Findings Report
LEGENDS
suggested any of
these location if
possible GPR Markings
Bottom targets
Top target
Hole H38 is acceptable but not
preferable. We suggest shifting
the hole to any of the 4 red
Description circles only if the hole is 4" in
Room 95 hole 38ntrance to unit diameter to avoid damaging the
Location existing wires.
Type of Structure
Suspended slab
24x24
Scanned Area
Field Notes
Findings Report
LEGENDS
GPR Markings

Bottom target
Top target
Possible conduit
The centre of hole H39 is about
110 mm from an adjacent
conduit and may entail cutting
two wires. We suggest shifting
the hole minimum 30 mm from
the conduit to avoid or minimize
Description wire-cutting, if possible.
Location Room 95 hole 40 39

Scanned Area 24x24
Field Notes
Findings Report
LEGENDS
GPR Markings
Bottom targets
Top target
T wall
152 mm from the edge of a
floor beam. Coring with caution
Description or shifting the hole further from
the beam by additional 38 mm.
Location Hallway hole 40 ntrance to unit
Type of Structure
Suspended slab
24x24
Scanned Area
Field Notes
Findings Report
LEGENDS
GPR Markings
Top targets
140 mm from the centre of a
possible conduit. We suggest
shifting the hole further from the
conduit by additional 38 mm
and avoid/minimize
Description
wire-cutting.
Location
Hallway hole 41

Scanned Area 24x24
Field Notes
Findings Report
LEGENDS
GPR Markings
Bottom targets
Top target
suggested location suggested any of

for 6" hole, if these red-circled
possible. locations for 4" T wall
hole, if possible.
It appears that the centre of
hole H42 is about 152 mm from
the edge of a floor beam and
Description coring of the hole will entail
cutting 2 wires. We suggest
Location Room 95 hole 42ntrance to unit adjusting the hole location as
Type of Structure
Suspended slab shown, if possible.
24x24
Scanned Area
Field Notes
Findings Report
LEGENDS
GPR Markings
Top targets
The proposed location for hole
H43 appears to be acceptable.
Description
Scanned Area 24x24
Field Notes
Findings Report
LEGENDS
GPR Markings
Bottom targets
Top target
T wall
The proposed location for large
hole LH3 seems to be fine but
watch out for the floor beams.
Description
Location Large hole
Scanned Area 48x36
Mesh
Reinforcement Type
Field Notes
Findings Report
LEGENDS
GPR Markings

Bottom Target
Top target
T wall
The proposed location for large
hole LH4 seems to be fine
without any issues.
Description
Location Large hole
Suspended slab
Type of Structure
Scanned Area 48x36
Field Notes
Findings Report
APPENDIX A
Schematic Scan Locations
90/95 – 10551 Shellbridge Way, Richmond – Scan Summary & Interpretation: EN022-01871-00
Page 50 | September 23, 2022 entuitive.com
10
11
0.12 m
LH1b
9
5
LH4
0.20 m
35
20b 21b
40
0.16 m
39
4
22 23 38
36
41
37
BEAM, HOLE NEEDS
TO SHIFT OVER 3
24 25 LH2b
0.20 m
42
26 27
HOLE STILL
14 NEEDS TO SHIFT
0.40 m 12 18
31b
34 16 2 EGBC PERMIT #: 1001103
28 29 30 32
0.47 m
13
0.25 m
31 17 SHIFTED
33 modern
K-80179R
BATHROOM
life SINK
modern
K-80179R
BATHROOM
life SINK
NORTH 250
HOLE SHIFTED DUE
TO CONFLICT WITH 15 19
BEAM, HOLES STILL
CONDUIT IN SLAB
NEED TO SHIFT 1
43 19b
LH3
SCHEMATIC SCAN LOCATIONS

1:100
RICHMOND, BC
APPENDIX 4
Glazing Film Pattern and Graphics

Richmond East Primary Care Centre 10551 Shellbridge Way, Suites 90 & 95 Richmond, BC

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Richmond East Primary Care Centre 10551 Shellbridge Way, Suites 90 & 95 Richmond, BC

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Richmond East Primary Care Centre

10551 Shellbridge Way, Suites 90 & 95

ARCHITECT: Chernoff Thompson Architects

CLIENT: Vancouver Coastal Health

PROJECT Colliers Project Leaders

MECHANICAL: AME Group

ELECTRICAL: O’M Engineering

COMMUNICATION RYR Electrical Consultants Ltd.

SPECIFICATION DIVISION SECTION PAGES

DIVISION 02 02 05 00 Selective Demolition 3

DIVISION 05 05 50 00 Metal Fabrication 3

DIVISION 06 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry 3

DIVISION 07 07 21 16 Blanket Insulation 2

DIVISION 08 08 06 10 Door and Window Schedule 5

DIVISION 09 09 06 00 Finish Schedule 4

DIVISION 10 10 11 00 Visual Display Surfaces 3

CHERNOFF THOMPSON ARCHITECTS 24/03/2023 CTA PROJECT #42037.0

DIVISION 12 12 50 05 Roller Shades 6

DIVISION 32 32 31 13 Chainlink Fences 4

CHERNOFF THOMPSON ARCHITECTS 24/03/2023 CTA PROJECT #42037.0

APPENDIX 2.1 ABATEMENT PROJECT SUMMARY REPORT, BUILDING 2 – UNIT 95 52

APPENDIX 2.2 ABATEMENT PROJECT SUMMARY REPORT, BUILDING 2 – UNIT 90 46

APPENDIX 2.3 HAZARDOUS BUILDING MATERIALS ASSESSMENT – UNIT 90 AND 58

APPENDIX 3 FIRST FLOOR SLAB SCAN SUMMARY AND INTERPRETATION 52

APPENDIX 4 GLAZING FILM PATTERN AND GRAPHICS 2

CHERNOFF THOMPSON ARCHITECTS 24/03/2023 CTA PROJECT #42037.0

CHERNOFF THOMPSON ARCHITECTS 24/03/2023 CTA PROJECT #42037.0

.2 Submittals are shop drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, performance charts,

.6 The Contractor’s responsibility for deviations in submission from requirements of Contract

3.0 SHOP DRAWINGS

.4 Indicate materials, construction methods and attachment or anchorage, erections diagrams,

.5 Make review comments, adjustments or revisions to be brought to the Contractor’s or supplier’s

CHERNOFF THOMPSON ARCHITECTS 24/03/2023 CTA Project #42037.0

.2 The Contractor or applicable Subcontractor or supplier to prepare the following:

CHERNOFF THOMPSON ARCHITECTS 24/03/2023 CTA Project #42037.0

5.0 EXTENDED WARRANTIES

CHERNOFF THOMPSON ARCHITECTS 24/03/2023 CTA Project #42037.0

1.0 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

.4 Manuals are to contain pertinent maintenance operational and installation instruction

.5 Include all items covered by Change Orders.

.7 Include equipment supplied by the Owner and pre-tendered equipment.

CHERNOFF THOMPSON ARCHITECTS 24/03/2023 CTA Project #42037.0

.3 All manufacturer’s equipment, materials, products, data, details, identification, list,

1.1 ELECTRONIC COPIES OF MANUALS

CHERNOFF THOMPSON ARCHITECTS 24/03/2023 CTA Project #42037.0

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS

1.4 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

1.6 SITE CONDITIONS

.11 Keep fire extinguishing suppression equipment on hand at all times.

1.7 SCHEDULING OF WORK

1.8 HAZARDOUS MATERIAL

.5 Provide Rada Scanning or GPR scanning prior to coring of concrete floor.

CHERNOFF THOMPSON ARCHITECTS 24/03/2023 CTA PROJECT #42037.0

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES

.3 Steel support for millwork as indicated.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS

.2 Supports for Plaster and Gypsum Board Section 09 22 00

1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS

.2 Steel pipe: to ASTM A53-94 minimum 35Ksi..

.4 Bolts and anchor bolts: to ASTM A307-14.

.6 Shop coat primer: to CGSB 1 GP 40M